19.06 Specification Tender 210111

SPECIFICATION
Project
PROVIDENCE
CHRISTIAN COLLEGE
PRIMARY SCHOOL
STAGE 1
Issue
TENDER
Date
11 JANUARY 2021
Project No.
19.06
SPECIFICATION OF WORKS TO BE PERFORMED AND MATERIAL TO BE USED
for the construction of
PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY SCHOOL STAGE 1
for
THORNLIE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE INCORPORATED
at
19 FURLEY ROAD, SOUTHERN RIVER
Prepared by:
BRAD QUARTERMAINE ARCHITECT
27 CHARLES STREET, SOUTH PERTH, WA 6151
0417 931 941
brad@quartermaine.com.au
TENDER ISSUE 11 JANUARY 2021

SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTRACT PRELIMINARIES
Document No Document Name No of Pages
00200 INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS 1 - 4
00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING 1 - 2
00230 EXISTING CONDITIONS AT SITE 1 - 1
00300 TENDER FORM 1 - 1
00301 ROCK EXCAVATION SCHEDULE OF RATES & QUANTITIES 1 - 1
00301 TENDER SUM BREAKDOWN 1 - 1
00500 INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT 1 - 1
00610 PERFORMANCE BOND 1 - 1
00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 1 - 1
00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 1 - 8
00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 - 1
00860 DRAWINGS 1 - 3
00870 SCHEDULES & TABLES 1 - 2
TRADE SECTIONS (SPECIFICATIONS)

Section No Section Name No of Pages
02210 CIVIL WORKS 1 - 14
02220 EARTHWORKS 1 - 10
02210 LANDSCAPE PRELIMINARIES 1 - 5
02240 STORMWATER DRAINAGE 1 - 5
02360 TERMITE CONTROL 1 - 2
02769 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES 1 - 2
03100 CONCRETE 1 - 13
03310 BRICK AND BLOCK CONSTRUCTION 1 - 7
03360 CONCRETE FINISHES 1 - 2
03410 STRUCTURAL STEEL 1 - 24
03530 CONCRETE SCREEDS 1 - 3
05080 METAL FINISHES – SHOP APPLIED 1 - 2
05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 1 - 3
05500 METALWORK 1 - 4
05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES 1 - 2
06100 CARPENTRY 1 - 2
06165 FIBRE CEMENT PRODUCTS 1 - 3
06400 JOINERY 1 - 2
07130 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING 1 - 5
07200 INSULATION (THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC) 1 - 2
07600 METAL ROOFING, SIDING AMD ROOF PLUMBING 1 - 4
07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT 1 - 2
07810 FIREPROOFING 1 - 3
08100 FIRE RATED DOORS AND FRAMES 1 - 3
08200 DOORS, DOOR FRAMES AND HATCHES 1 - 3
PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY SCHOOL STAGE 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
08330 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS 1 - 3

08520 METAL WINDOWS AND GLAZING 1 - 5
08710 DOOR HARDWARE 1 - 3
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 1 - 4
08850 MIRRORS 1 - 3
09200 HARD PLASTER OVER RENDER BASE 1 - 4
09210 CEMENT RENDER 1 - 3
09250 PLASTERBOARD 1 - 2
09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS 1 - 2
09300 CERAMIC TILE 1 - 4
09500 SUSPENDED CEILING 1 - 3
09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 1 - 2
09585 MODULAR CARPET (TILE) 1 - 3
09720 WALLCOVERING (PAPER, FABRIC ETC) 1 - 2
09910 PAINTING 1 - 6
10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1 - 2
10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS 1 - 3
10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1 - 2
10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1 - 2
12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK – SHOP BUILT 1 - 5
12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 1 - 2
60000 LANDSCAPE & IRRIGATION 1 - 45
70000 MECHANICAL SERVICES 1 - 59
80000 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 1 - 64
90000 ELECTRICAL SERVICES 1 - 77
95000 LIFT SERVICE 1 - 40
20000 EXTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE 1 - 3
20001 INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE 1 - 3
20002 INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE ROOM BY ROOM 1 - 15
20003 INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE CABINETRY 1 - 1
APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
APPENDIX B CONFIDENTIAL DECLARATION FORM
PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY SCHOOL STAGE 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
00200 INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS
1. The Project
Construction of a new Primary School and associated external works and services.
2. The Contract
Fixed lump sum not subject to rise and fall.
AS 2124 1992 General conditions of contract.
3. Tenders
The proprietor reserves the right to reject the lowest or any tender or an otherwise conforming tender.
Comply with AS 4120 1994 Code of tendering.
4. Tender Documents
Available without fee from the architect.
5. Alternative Proposals
Submit tenders in accordance with the tender documents.
Alternatives may be considered but only where all performance aspects of each item comply with the one
specified and verification of compliance with the relevant Australian Standards must be submitted in writing.
Alternatives will only be considered where a conforming tender is submitted.
6. Permission to Visit the Site

Tenderers may visit the site by only at times to be notified by the architect.
7. Schedule
Submit a Preliminary Construction Program indicating commencement and completion dates.
8. Tender Enquiries
All enquiries during the tender period should be directed to:
Brad Quartermaine: Email brad@quartermaine.com.au, Phone: 0417 931 941
9. Approved Electrical and Hydraulics Services Sub- Contractors

Sub-contractors approved to tender for the electrical, mechanical and hydraulics services works are listed in
the relevant specification trade section.
The Contractor shall nominate the electrical and hydraulics sub-contractors selected to undertake those
sections of the work within their Tender submission. Failure to nominate the selected Sub-Contractors within
the Tender submission will deem the Tender non-conforming
10. Consultants
For this project, the proprietor has appointed the following Consultants:
Architects Name of Contact Tel: 0417 931 941

Brad Quartermaine Brad Quartermaine Mobile: 0417 931 941
Architect
Email brad@quartermaine.com.au
address:
Structural Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9382 8008
BPA Engineering Long Truong Mobile:
Email ltruong@bpaeng.com.au
address:
Civil Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9382 8008
BPA Engineering Todd Broadwood Mobile:
Email tbroadwood@bpaeng.com.au
address:
Mechanical Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9382 2711
DSA Mechanical John Van Vliet Mobile: 0417 099 649
Services Consultants
Email john@dsaptyltd.com
address:
Hydraulics Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9225 9300
HDA Matt Martin Mobile:
Email qo@hdawa.com.au
address:
Electrical Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9328 5500
ETC Scott Barrell Mobile:
Email sbarrell@etcpl.com.au
address:
Quantity Surveyor Name of Contact Tel: 9429 8889
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 25 00200 INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS
Owen Consulting Matthew Owen Mobile: 0408 908 367
Email matthew@owenconsult.com.au
address:
Landscape Architect Name of Contact Tel: 9388 9566
Plan E Andrew Baranowski Mobile: 0412 525 117
Email ab@plane.com.au
address:
Building Surveyor Name of Contact Tel: 9364 3395
Resolve Group Gary Houghton Mobile: 0418 367 584
Email gary.houghton@resolvegroup.com.au
address:
11. Annexure Part A to General Conditions of Contract

This Annexure is to be attached to the General Conditions of Contract and shall be read as part of the Contract:
The law applicable is that of the State or Territory of: Western Australia
(Clause 1)
Payments under the Contract shall be made at: Perth W.A. - by way of “Electronic Funds Transfer to
(Clause 1) the account nominated by the Contractor/Principal
The Principal: Thornlie Christian College Incorporated

(Clause 2)
The address of the Principal: 19 Furley Road, Southern River, WA 6110
The Superintendent: Brad Quartermaine Architect

(Clause 2)
The address of the Superintendent: 27 Charles Street

South Perth WA 6151
Limits of accuracy applying to quantities for which the Not Applicable

Principal accepted a rate or rates:
(Clause 3.3(b))
Bill of Quantities—the alternative applying: Alternative 2

(Clause 4.1)
The time for lodgement of the priced copy of the Bill Not Applicable
of Quantities:
(Clause 4.2)
Contractor shall provide security in the amount of: 5% of the Contract Sum in lieu of retention moneys.
(Clause 5.2)
Principal shall provide security in the amount of: Not Applicable

(Clause 5.2)
The period of notice required of a party’s intention to Not applicable

have recourse to retention moneys and/or to convert
security: (Clause 5.5)
The percentage to which the entitlement to security 50% (i.e. one of the Banker’s undertakings shall be
and retention moneys is reduced: returned)
(Clause 5.7)
Interest on retention moneys and security—the Not Applicable

alternative applying:
(Clause 5.9)
The number of copies to be supplied by the Principal: 0

(Clause 8.3)
The number of copies to be supplied by the 0

Contractor:
(Clause 8.4)
The time within which the Superintendent must give a 14 Days

direction as to the suitability and return the
Contractor’s copies:
(Clause 8.4)
Work which cannot be subcontracted without Work under the Contract that is carried out by
approval: (Clause 9.2) Subcontractors, suppliers or other parties nominated
by the Principal or Superintendent.
The percentage for profit and attendance: 0%

(Clause 11(b))
The amount or percentage for profit and attendance: 0%
(Clause 11(c))
Insurance of the Works—the alternative applying: Alternative 1

(Clause 18)
The assessment for insurance purposes of the costs 5 % of the Contract Sum
of demolition and removal of debris:
(Clause 18(ii))
The assessment for insurance purposes of 10 % of the Contract Sum

consultants’ fees:
(Clause 18(iii))
The value of materials to be supplied by the Principal: $ Nil

(Clause 18 (iv))
The additional amount or percentage: 5%

(Clause 18(v))
Public Liability Insurance—the alternative applying: Alternative 1

(Clause 19)
The amount of Public Liability Insurance shall be not $ 20 Million

less than:
(Clause 19)
The time for giving possession of the Site: Within 7 days of the date on which the Building Permit
(Clause 27.1) is issued.
The date for Practical Completion: 44 weeks from the giving of possession of the Site,
(Clause 35.2) inclusive of industry RDO/PDO and public holiday
allowances.
Liquidated damages per day: (Clause 35.6) $ 600.00 per day
Limit of Liquidated damages: (Clause 35.7) Not Applicable
Bonus per day for early Practical Completion: Not Applicable

(Clause 35.8)
Limit of bonus: (Clause 35.8) Not Applicable
Extra costs for Delay or Disruption: (Clause 36) No Extra Events
The Defects liability period: (Clause 37) 12 Months
The Charge for overheads, profit, etc. for Daywork 10 %

(Clause 41(f))
Times for Payment Claims: On the last Working day of the month
(Clause 42.1)
Unfixed Plant and Materials for which payment claims Nil

may be made notwithstanding that they are not
incorporated in the Works:
(Clause 42.1(ii))
Retention Moneys on: Nil

(Clause 42.3)
Unfixed Plant or Materials - the alternative applying Alternative 3

(Clause 42.4)
The rate of interest on overdue payments: Supreme Court rates as at the date of Acceptance of
(Clause 42.9) the Tender
The delay in giving possession of the Site which shall 28 Days

be a substantial breach:
(Clause 44.7)
The alternative required in proceeding with dispute Alternative 2

resolution:
(Clause 47.2)
The person to nominate an arbitrator: The President for the time being of the Institute of
(Clause 47.3 Arbitrators) & Mediators Australia – Western
Australian Chapter
Location of arbitration: Perth, Western Australia

(Clause 47.3)
END OF DOCUMENT
00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING
1. Tender Form
Refer Document 00300 "TENDER FORM".
2. Tender Documents
The tender documents include the "The Conditions" or "The Agreement" or "General Conditions of Contract",
tender form, and specification, drawings, schedules and any other documents issued by the architect for the
purpose of tendering (available at point of issue of documents). No explanation or amendment to the tender
documents will be recognised unless in the form of written addendum issued by the architect.
3. Tenderer to Inform Himself and Sub-contractors

The tenderer is deemed to have:
A. Examined the tender documents, the site and its surroundings and other information made available.
B. Examined information relevant to the risks, contingencies, and other circumstances having an effect on
his tender and which is obtainable by the making of enquiries.
C. Satisfied himself as to the correctness and sufficiency of his tender and that his tender covers the cost
of complying with the obligations of the tender documents.
D. Advised suppliers and sub-contractors of the requirements of the preliminary and trade sections of the
specifications. Satisfied himself that all legal and other requirements, relevant to the project and relating
to Occupational Health Safety and the Environment, have been met.
4. Discrepancies, Errors and Omissions in Tender Documents

If a tenderer finds any discrepancy, error or omission in the tender documents, notify the architect, in writing, 5
days before the date and time for closing of tenders.
5. Submission of Tender
A. Submit tender only on the form provided, Document 00300 TENDER FORM.
B. Include an address for service of notices for the purpose of this tender and subsequent contact.
C. Sign the tender form, or if the tenderer is a corporation or company, sign the tender with company seal.
D. The tender shall be for the whole of the work described in the tender documents.
E. Do not alter or add to tender documents except as required by these General Conditions of Tendering.
6. Lodgement of Tenders
A. Tender to be placed in a sealed envelope, marked with the name of the project, and lodged in the
tender box at, (or sent by pre-paid post to) the architect’s/proprietor’s office:
by the date and time of closing of tenders. See "C" below.
B. Notwithstanding sub-clause A, faxed, emailed, telegraphic or telexed tenders received by the date and
time for closing of tenders may be admitted for consideration, subject to the concurrent submission of a
written tender. Oral tenders will not be received.
C. Tenders Close 2:30pm on 16th February 2021.
7. Informal Tenders (Non-conforming Tenders)

Tenders which do not comply with the requirements of, or which contain provisions not required or allowed by
the tender documents, will be declared informal.
8. Trade Names
Trade or proprietary names, brands, catalogue or reference numbers are specified in the tender documents. A
successful tenderer may offer material or equipment of similar characteristics or type, quality, appearance,
finish, method or construction and performance, after the Letter of Acceptance of tender has been issued,
unless otherwise noted in the specification trade sections.
9. Customs Duties
The tender shall include customs duty and other similar charges applicable to imported materials, plant and
equipment required for work described in the tender documents.
10. Pre-requisites to Acceptance

A. Notwithstanding other requirements of the tender documents, the proprietor or architect may require a
tenderer to submit additional information to allow further consideration of his tender.
B. Should the tenderer fail to submit the information so required by the date and time stipulated by the
proprietor or architect the tender may be treated as informal.
11. Review And Acceptance Of Tenders

The Proprietor is not obliged to accept the lowest or any tender and may reject without liability any or all
tenders submitted.
The Contract, if any, will be awarded to the tenderer that in the opinion of the Proprietor meets the
requirements described in the Tender Documents and offers the best value for money. Value for money will be
determined solely by the Proprietor and will take into consideration, but is not bound or limited to:
A. Tendered price.
B. The tenderer’s past performance in relation to:
• compliance with any applicable code of practice for the building and construction industry;
• payment of subcontractors, suppliers and/or workers;
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 5 of 25 00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING
• quality, time and cost under previous contracts;
C. Current workload and resources;
D. Review of Tender Breakdown forms for Landscaping and Electrical Services;
E. Proposed construction methodology;
F. The experience and capacity of the proposed key project personnel.
G. The tenderer’s financial viability and capacity;
H. Compliance with the requirements of the Tender Documents; and
I. If, in the opinion of the Proprietor, a tenderer fails to meet, or is otherwise deficient in respect of, any one
or more of the above criteria, the tenderer may be excluded from further consideration.
Information pertaining to items B to H are not required to be submitted with the tender. This information will be
requested after the closing of tenders from the tenderer(s) under consideration.
12. Acceptance of Tender

A tender shall not be deemed to have been accepted unless and until a Letter of Acceptance is handed to the
tenderer or is sent by pre-paid post to, or is left at the address stated in the tender form for service of notices.
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 6 of 25 00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING
00230 EXISTING CONDITIONS AT SITE
EXISTING OCCUPIED BUILDINGS TO BE RETAINED.
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 7 of 25 00230 EXISTING CONDITIONS AT SITE
00300 TENDER FORM
COMPLETE IN FULL AND LODGE WITH ARCHITECT
I/We (tenderer’s name)

Licence no. Registration no.
of (address)
hereby tender(s) to perform the work for (proprietor name):
in accordance with the following documents and specifications:

(add extra pages if needed)
For the lump sum of:
Construction Program. Tenderer to submit a Preliminary Construction Program for the works.
working days inclusive of
________________________________________days for inclement weather.
Signed by (Company Directors)
Date this (day) (month) 20
COMPANY SEAL
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 8 of 25 00300 TENDER FORM
00301 TENDER SUM BREAKDOWN FORM
Tender Sum Breakdown
Lump Sum (excluding GST)

Preliminaries $
Site Preparation and Earthworks $
Roadworks and Drainage $
Concrete $
Blockwork / Brickwork $
Structural Steelwork $
Carpentry and Joinery $
Metalwork $
Fibre Cement Products $
Metal Roofing, Siding and Roof Plumbing and Insulation $
Doors and Door Frames $
Metal Windows, Glazing and Mirrors $
Plastering $
Cold Formed Metal Framing, Dry Wall Partitions, Suspended Ceilings and Insulation $
Ceramic Tiles $
Carpet and Resilient Flooring $
Manufactured Casework $
Painting $
Paving, Landscaping & Irrigation $
Lift Service $
Hydraulic Services $
Electrical Services $
Mechanical Services $
Provisional Sum: Water Corporation Application Fees $ 15,000.00
Provisional Sum: Fall Arrest Equipment $ 10,000.00
Provisional Sum: Door Hardware $ 90,000.00
Provisional Sum: Identification Signs $ 10,000.00
Provisional Sum: Fire Extinguishers $ 7,500.00
Provisional Sum: Unidentifiable services diversions $ 10,000.00
Provisional Sum: Public Artwork $ 100,000.00
Contingency Sum $ 270,000.00
Total $
GST $
Total Price $
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 9 of 25 00301 TENDER SUM BREAKDOWN FORM
00500 INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT
(ADAPTED FROM AS 2124 -1992)
AGREEMENT made day of 20

BETWEEN
(the contractor)
AND
(the principal/proprietor)
IT IS AGREED that the annexed documents listed below:

Tender,
dated
Letter of acceptance,
dated
General Conditions of Contract and Annexure.

(Agreement signed and all pages initialled by parties).
Documents and
specification
Drawing no.s:
Other documents:
(Use extra sheets if necessary to list all documents and drawings)

together comprise the contract between the parties AND if the contractor or the principal is two or more persons then
they will be regarded as being bound jointly and severally.
Signed by the contractor
COMPANY SEAL
Signed by the principal
COMPANY SEAL
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 10 of 25 00500 INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT
00610 PERFORMANCE BOND
APPROVED FORM OF UNCONDITIONAL UNDERTAKING

(ADAPTED FROM AS 2124 - 1992)
At the request of (the contractor)

and in consideration of (the principal, proprietor, owner)
accepting this undertaking in respect of the contract for
(name of project )
(name of the “financial institution”)

unconditionally undertakes to pay on demand any sum or sums which may from time to time be demanded by the
principal to a maximum aggregate sum of
$ (
)
The undertaking is to continue until notification has been received from the principal that the sum is no longer required
by the principal or until this undertaking is returned to the financial institution or until payment to the principal by the
financial institution of the whole of the sum or such part as the principal may require.
Should the financial institution be notified in writing, purporting to be signed by
for and on behalf of the principal that the principal desires payment to be made of the whole or any part or parts of the
sum, it is unconditionally agreed that the financial institution will make the payment or payments to the principal forthwith
without reference to the contractor and notwithstanding any notice given by the contractor not to pay same.
Provided always that the financial institution may at any time without being required so to do pay to the principal the sum
of
$ ( )
less any amount or amounts it may previously have paid under this undertaking or such lesser sum as may be required
and specified by the principal and thereupon the liability of the financial institution hereunder will immediately cease.
DATED at this day of 20
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 11 of 25 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND
00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
Submit each certificate to the principal via the architect before commencement of work.
A. COST OF DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH.
B. RESTORATION OF EXISTING OR BUILT STRUCTURES.
C. PERCENTAGE TO COVER FEES OF CONSULTANTS.
D. PERCENTAGE TO COVER ESCALATION COSTS.
E. PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE.
F. WORKER’S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY.
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 12 of 25 00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Annexure Part B to General Conditions of Contract
The Clauses set out below (the Supplementary Conditions of Contract) have been added to those of AS
2124—1992 and/or have been amended and differ from the corresponding Clauses in AS 2124-1992. If there
is any inconsistency between the General Conditions of Contract and this Annexure Part B, this Annexure Part
B prevails to the extent of any inconsistency.
1. Information to Sub-contractors, Suppliers and Installers

Advise sub-contractors and suppliers and installers of material of the requirements of these Supplementary
Conditions of Contract.
2. Amount of Security (Performance Bond)

See Annexure Part A to General Conditions of Contract or Appendix to General Conditions of Contract. Refer
Document 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND.
3. Interpretation of Drawings
Check dimensions on site, certified by a qualified land surveyor, before proceeding with the work of the
contract. Survey needs to be confirmed by a qualified surveyor and checked at specific intervals during the
construction period. Notify architect of omission or conflict in drawings and their relation to specifications.
4. Construction Progress Bar Graph

Within 14 calendar days after the date of Letter of Acceptance of tender, submit to the architect a detailed chart
of the plan of progress, in bar graph form. For each item of work provide graph showing planned progress with
planned monthly quantities and with space or other provision for entering actual progress. The architect may
require the builder to provide an amended bar graph within 7 days of being requested to do so.
Submit bar graph at monthly intervals showing actual progress.
5. Sub-contractors and Suppliers

Within 7 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, supply to the architect a complete list of sub-contractors
and suppliers proposed for the works. The principal, through the architect, reserves the right to reject any so
listed.
6. Indemnity of Principal
A. Indemnify, and keep indemnified the principal against claim, demand, action, suit or proceeding that
may be brought or made against the principal by any other person who has entered into a contract with
the principal to execute work associated with the project.
B. Submit evidence of such insurance in respect of loss, damage or expense incurred by that other person
by reason of an act, default or neglect of the builder in the performance of his obligations under the
contract or arising out of or as a consequence of delay by the builder in executing or failing to complete
work under the contract and also from costs and expenses that may be incurred by that other person in
connection with such claim, demand, action, suit or proceeding.
C. Do not proceed with work under the contract until evidence of licencing, indemnities and insurances
required herein, is submitted in writing to the architect.
7. Approvals, Services, Fees and Tax

A. The following documents have been submitted by the principal, via the architect and fees paid for:
Development Approval.
B. Allow for fees for the Application for a Building Permit, Construction Training Fund Levy, Building
Services Levy, Verge Bond and Application for an Occupancy Permit.
C. Be responsible for the identification and protection of existing services and connection /disconnection of
services, water, sewerage, drainage, electricity and gas etc. Apply for such permits, pay for fees and
charges levied by relevant bodies for such connections. Issue necessary notices to such bodies. Obtain
and pay for scaffolding permit.
D. Pay tax on items where such tax is applicable. If tax is not applicable, request from the principal, via the
architect, a tax exemption certificate for use when ordering specified materials.
E. Pay fees, where applicable, relating to workplace health and safety acts, Regulation, Code of Practice,
Australian Standards and other state or local government policy, acts regulations etc.
8. Site Control
A. Existing buildings will remain in occupation throughout the duration of the works. Ensure that the work is
carried out without damage to and with a minimum of nuisance or annoyance to the occupants of the
existing building and adjacent premises. Prevent weather and dust ingress into the existing building for
the duration of the works. Make good any weather damage incurred to the existing building. The
Proprietor’s use of the existing building and adjacent premises as a school must not be negatively
affected in any way. Safe access and egress from occupied premises is to be maintained at all times.
B. Erect approved site safety fence, barriers and hoardings to enclose the works and to protect the
occupants of adjoining occupied premises, and to prevent weather ingress where required. Exact
position of safety fences etc shall be to the approval of the Architect. Use all types and methods of
protection (such as temporary safety fencing and warning signage) that are reasonably practicable and
necessary to protect the public from hazards associated with the work under the Contract. Protection
shall be consistent with the recommendations contained in the WorkSafe WA publication “Construction
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 13 of 25 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Work and the Public”. Where a safety fence is used, it shall be not less than 1.8 metres in height, fully
secured for its entire length with visual barrier screens and lateral stays to stabilise the fence against
wind forces.
C. Be responsible for activities on the site including providing access for authorised persons and restricting
access by unauthorised persons. Take necessary precautions to secure the assets of the principal.
D. Be responsible for providing controls to protect workers, working at height, in confined space, in
excavations and trenches, using hazardous substances/chemicals and other tasks and activities
identified by legislation or contained in the builders hazard and risk register, maintained at the project,
that may create a risk to the occupational health and safety of workers and other persons at or near the
workplace.
E. Except as otherwise provided in the contract, delivery of materials for the works, space for storage of
same and for building sheds, office and workshops will be allowed only as directed by the builder. Do
not store waste building materials and flammable liquids in the building.
F. Take proper precautions to keep hazardous chemicals/substances, poisons and other injurious
substances in places secured against access by unauthorised persons, properly labelled and not stored
in food containers or drinking vessels.
G. Confirm that the site is not in an area affected by vermin, noxious pests, e.g. fire ants, termites etc Refer
to relevant authority for guidance.
H. Delivery of materials for the works shall not take place between 7:30am-8:30am and 2:30pm-4pm on
school days.
9. Noise Control
Take adequate measures to control noise on the site and comply with the following requirements.
No operation shall be carried out on the site if it causes the sound emitted (as determined by the sound level at
the site boundary by the Architect) to exceed:
Time of day Sound level in Decibels (A)
Monday to Friday
7.00 am to 7.00pm 80
Saturday and Sunday
7.00 am to 7.00pm 70
Evening
7.00 am to 10.00pm 65
Night
10.00 pm to 7.00 am 55
No appliance shall be used if the noise emitted by the appliance exceeds the following maximum sound levels
measured at any point 7 metres ±200mm from:
The surface of the appliance excepting those items indicated which shall have sound levels measured at the
building site boundary. measurements shall be made in accordance with AS.1217 (methods of measurement of
airborne sound emitted by machines), or where applicable for pneumatic driven appliances, the measurement
procedures set out in the cagi-pneurop test code for the measurement of sound from pneumatic machines
1969 may be used.
- Group (I) 70 decibels (A) max.: Air compressors up to 170 litres/sec capacity.
- Group (ii) 75 decibels (A) max.: Internal combustion or electrically driven equipment up to 14kw N.E.P.
(20hp) (mobile or stationary), construction dumpers up to 1 cu metre capacity, fluid pumps, air
compressors above 170 litres/sec capacity.
- Group (iii) 80 decibels (A) max.: Vibratory compactors, internal concrete vibrators, concrete saws (mobile
and stationary), internal combustion or electrically driven equipment over 14kw N.E.P. (2Ohp) (mobile or
stationary), earth moving equipment up to and including engine capacities of 100kw N.E.P. (lSOhp),
concrete pumps, concrete agitators, portable air or electric tools, public address system (at boundary),
cranes (at boundary).
- Group (iv) 85 decibels (A) max.: Air or electric impulsive tools, scabblers, impact wrenches, explosive
power tools, earth moving equipment of engine capacity between 100kw and 200kw N.E.P. (lSOhp and
300hp), refuse chutes (at boundary).
- Group (V) 90 decibels (A) max.: Sirens - warning (at boundary), pile drivers (at boundary), earth moving
equipment of engine capacity above 200kw N.E.P. (300hp).
For the purpose of this clause:
- Appliance means any apparatus, equipment or machine used for or in connection with the building site and
includes motor vehicles and earth moving machinery.
- Sound level emitted from the building site boundary means the sound level exceeded for 10% of the time
(110), measured in decibels (A) and evaluated over hourly intervals during the period of time specified in
the “time of day and sound level table” above.
- Maximum sound level emitted by an appliance means the sound level in decibels (A) exceeded for 1% of
the measurement period.
- Sound level decibels (A) shall be measured with a sound level meter complying with the specifications set
out in AS.1259 part 1 or AS.1259 part 2, with the microphone oriented in a direction indicating the
maximum sound level.
- means net engine power determined in accordance with Australian design rule no. 28, motor vehicle noise,
dated July 1972.
- Where no means of performing a particular function is available other than by a means which will produce
sound levels in excess of those requirements specified above, the Contractor shall obtain permission from
the Architect to perform such operations on the days and within the hours approved by the Architect.
The Architect may require the Contractor to produce a certificate of acoustic performance issued by a
laboratory registered with the N.A.T.A. for any appliance before permitting its use, or continued use, on the
building site.
On occasions for emergency reasons, the Architect may direct that all noise on the site ceases or be reduced.
the Contractor shall direct all its sub-Contractors on site to meet the requirements.
10. Dust, Dirt, Water and Fumes

Prevent any nuisance occurring through the discharge of dust dirt, water, fumes and the like on to persons or
property. Prepare and implement a Dust Management Plan. Submit to the architect prior to taking possession
of the site.
11. Security of Premises

Carry out the work under the contract in such a manner that maximum security of the existing premises is
maintained at all times. If, in the opinion of the Architect at any period of the contract and during all non-working
hours maximum security cannot be maintained, the Contractor shall employ an approved static guard security
service on the site.
Prepare and implement a security management plan which shall include:
A. Arming / disarming requirements of existing intruder alarm systems.
B. A pre-start or demolition program of works showing the areas where isolation and reinstatement of
alarm system detection points is required.
C. Measures to be adopted to provide effective security to the site at all times.
D. Name and contact details for the approved electronic security Subcontractor engaged by the Contractor
to implement changes to existing intruder alarm systems. Endorsement by the approved electronic
security Subcontractor.
12. Restrictions on access to the school site.

Pursuant to clauses 27 and 14 of the “General Conditions” access to the site under this Contract is controlled
as described hereunder.
The School Education Regulations 2000 made under section 244 of the School Education Act 1999 empowers
the school principal to regulate persons who enter or are on school premises. Accordingly, overall control of
occupied school premises is the responsibility of the school principal (occupied school premises includes a new
school on a greenfield site that has achieved partial or total Practical Completion). These Regulations and Act
enable the school principal to direct the Contractor, its employees, sub-contractors, suppliers and the like in
respect to school access.
In determining access to the school premises, the school principal is guided by the School Education
Regulations 2000 and other Department of Education policies. Persons admitted onto school premises must
be of good character and conduct. The following conduct is prohibited on school premises and any offending
person may be directed to leave the premises:
- Causing disruption to or likely to cause disruption to the good order on the school premises;
- Using threatening or insulting language;
- Using threatening or violent behaviour;
- Adversely affecting the safety and welfare of persons on the school premises;
- Causing damage to property that comprises or is located at the school premise;
- Smoking;
- Defacing school premises;
- Lighting fires or bringing explosives onto school premises;
- Bringing animals onto school premises;
- Having intoxicating liquor;
- Driving vehicles off roadways and parking areas;
- Exceeding speed limits or driving in a dangerous or inconsiderate manner, or;
- Disobeying traffic signs.
The applicable Department of Education policy requires that all persons working on occupied school premises
be screened for previous convictions for certain types of offences. The Contractor shall screen all employees,
sub-contractors, suppliers and other persons entering the building site for previous criminal convictions by
ensuring that they:
are the holder of a federal police criminal record check that is no more than 2 years old;
or
have completed a “Confidential Declaration” form contained in Appendix B. A person need only complete a
“Confidential Declaration” form once for entry to the school in relation to this contract.
The Contractor shall maintain a register of employees, sub-contractors, suppliers and other persons accessing
the Contractor’s site. On a weekly basis, the Contractor shall provide to the school principal the following
information:
- A list of persons who have entered the site, sorted by:
- Those with a federal police certificate;
- Those who have already provided a “Confidential Declaration” form to the school;
- Those who have completed a “Confidential Declaration” form for the Contractor.
- A copy of all federal police criminal record certificates and “Confidential Declaration” forms provided to the
Contractor.
Once the Contractor ceases to maintain a controlled building site, or where the nature of the work makes a
controlled site impractical, all access to the school/site shall be through the school office.
The Contractor shall cooperate with the school principal to maintain effective control of access to school
premises and site throughout the contract period.
13. Compliance with Ordinances, etc.
Comply throughout with the requirements of relevant sections of the National Construction Code (NCC).
Whenever work or type of plant or machinery, etc. is required either by the specification or by the relevant
statutory authority, provide full details of such work, plant, etc. to the relevant statutory authority and make such
applications, etc. as may be required within 2 weeks of receipt of Letter of Acceptance.
In such cases, approval given by the architect to data submitted by the builder will not necessarily imply that
such data meet the requirements of the relevant statutory authority.
14. Site Amenities and Meetings

A. Provide statutory and necessary amenities and sanitary facilities for site workers where such are not
already available in suitable locations. Maintain in working condition and clean daily. Comply with
legislative requirements.
B. Provide accommodation on the site of sufficient size to hold regular site meetings of building foreman,
architect and consultants with table and chairs, lighting and heating.
C. Arrange for site meetings to occur at regular intervals throughout the contract period. Advise architect
and consultants of meeting times, keep accurate records of each meeting, and issue to each attendee a
copy of the record within 3 days of each meeting.
15. Temporary Fire Extinguishers

Maintain fully charged, and accessible fire extinguishers and other plant and equipment as are necessary for
the care and safety of the works, as required by local fire authority and/or NCC.
Provide temporary fire services as required by conditions of approval.
16. Telephone and Email

Provide a telephone and email service and means of graphic communication. Pay costs of installation, rental,
calls and removal as required.
17. Light and Power

Provide temporary electric light and power supply during construction and pay charges connected therewith to
AS 3102 Electrical installations, construction and demolition sites. Provide sufficient of each as required for
execution of work specified.
Ensure permanent power is compliant with AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (known as the electrical wiring
rules)
18. Water
Provide potable drinking water and adequate signage if relevant to identify same, and maintain a temporary
water supply sufficient for executing the work under the contract. Disconnect and clear away same on
completion and pay costs and charges in connection therewith. Provide tapping of main supply if required.
19. Commencement of Work

Notwithstanding that possession of the site has been given to the builder, the builder is not permitted to
commence work on the site until he has provided:
A. Security required by the Conditions of Contract, as stated in the Annexure to the Conditions of Contract.
Refer Document 00200 Annexure and DOCUMENT 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND.
B. Insurances: refer Clause 6 above and DOCUMENT 00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE.
C. Verify the existence of site pegs and check that they are complete. If needed data is missing, advise
proprietor to have a licensed surveyor replace them in their correct positions. Maintain site pegs in good
condition and ensure their visibility.
D. Ensure the set out of the works is executed by a licensed land surveyor and submit documentation to
the architect.
E. Secure the site to prevent access by unauthorised persons and install signage “DANGER entry by
authorised persons only” installed on boundaries.
20. Adjacent Premises

Ensure where access to an adjacent property is required that the written approval of the owner, not the tenant,
is obtained prior to entry, and the permit as signed and witnessed, details the scope, time and arrangements to
protect owner or other persons at or near the property and that the work is carried out without damage to, and
with a minimum of nuisance or annoyance to, the occupants of adjacent premises.
Before commencing any demolition, piling, excavations, underpinning, shoring, earthworks, compaction or such
like work under the Contract carry out a comprehensive survey of adjoining properties.
The survey shall be carried out, where possible, in the presence of the owners or representatives of the owners
of such adjoining properties.
The survey shall be recorded by suitable means to accurately show the condition of the adjoining properties at
the time immediately prior to the commencement of work on the site.
Copies of the survey documents endorsed by the owners of such adjoining properties shall be lodged with the
architect.
The survey shall not relieve the builder of its responsibilities or liabilities for damage to other properties
adjacent to the site.
21. General Attendance on Sub-contractors

General attendance includes taking delivery, assisting to unload, storing and protecting sub-contractor's
materials and for allowing sub-contractors ample working space, free use of water, electricity (unless otherwise
described), scaffolding, hoists and ordinary plant, etc., and messing and sanitary accommodation and for
cutting away, building in and protecting finished work and making good. Refer Document 00870 SCHEDULES
AND TABLES Part III.
22. Precautions in Carrying Out Work Under the Contract

Unless otherwise specified in the contract, observe, in the absence of statutory requirement to the contrary, the
relevant current Australian Standard published by SAI Global relating to storage, transport, use of materials,
explosives, fire precautions in arc or flame cutting flame heating and arc or gas welding operations, plant and
equipment, work processes and safety precautions.
23. Joining Up to Existing Buildings

Where the method of joining up of old and new work is not otherwise specified, the cutting away and joining up
is to be carried out in a manner approved by the architect and made good by relevant trades to match existing
adjacent work.
24. Existing Services

Prior to commencing construction work on site, undertake Electromagnetic Locating and Ground Penetrating
Radar surveys to locate existing underground services. Contact Dial Before You Dig or service provider(s), or
contact service owners to obtain details of existing services. Distribute to all relevant subcontractors and
suppliers, and ensure all requirements for working on, or near any relevant service provider service(s) are
complied with, without exception during the works on the site. Notify and provide the architect with an existing
services plan, indicating the location, depth and type of connection, disconnection or interference with existing
services.
Repair, to the satisfaction of the architect, damage which occurs to services during currency of the contract.
25. Damaged Services

Where existing services at or adjacent to the site are in non-optimum condition, arrange for an inspection by
the architect and the officer-in-charge of the area responsible for such service. At such meeting, record the
condition and follow instructions when issued in writing by the architect.
26. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous Contaminants

A. Be aware of legal and other requirements for the proper storage, decanting, use and/or disposal of
solids, liquid and gaseous contaminants and
B. Be responsible for the proper disposal of solids, liquid and gaseous contaminants.
C. Discharge gaseous contaminants in such a manner that they will be sufficiently diluted with fresh air that
the toxicity will be reduced to an acceptable level.
D. Subject to statutory and local requirements, liquid contaminant may be diluted with water to a level of
quality acceptable in the sewer system or contained in approved vessels for disposal at sites approved
by the relevant authority.
E. Dispose of solid contaminants by removal from the site to locations approved by the relevant authority
and obtain certificates of disposal to demonstrate compliance.
27. Disposal of Refuse

Remove refuse from construction operation (including food scraps and the like) from the site at frequent
intervals. Prior to removal, ensure the refuse is contained so as to prevent it being discharged in the air or onto
adjoining property.
28. Explosive Devices

Do not use free flight explosive power tool(s). Use only piston-driven tools, except as approved by the architect.
Explosive powered tools that are free flight type may only be used by competent persons authorised by their
employer.
29. Dimensioning
Do not scale drawings which are clearly diagrammatic and/or marked 'not to scale' or NTS.
30. Shop Drawings

Shop Drawings mean complete drawings showing details of fabrication, assembly, installation, fixing and
waterproofing methods of specific items or components, including necessary explanatory notes and
specifications.
When preparing Shop Drawings, do the following:
A. Include provision in construction programme for the production and distribution of Shop Drawings.
B. Refer discrepancies discovered in the contract documents to the architect for direction.
C. Verify relevant dimensions. Dimension drawings so that the items or components fit accurately into the
required positions.
D. Ensure that Shop Drawings conform with the requirements of the contract.
E. Drawings are to be of consistent standard size and presentation.
F. Submit drawings in PDF format.
G. When the Shop Drawings are satisfactory, 1 PDF copy will be stamped by the architect. Provide as
required for the builder's site office, manufacturers or sub-contractors.
H. Acceptance of Shop Drawings are to imply only that the builder's interpretations of the relevant
requirements of the contract are generally correct, but are to in no way relieve the builder of his
obligations under the contract to construct and complete the works correctly and accurately.
I. Do not order, manufacture, assemble or supply any item or component needed according to
requirements of Shop Drawings until the architect returns the applicable stamped drawings.
J. The builder is to provide as built drawings and details of all installed in-ground services, including type,
location and depth, referenced against known data or reference points so as to prevent unintended
contractor damage during future excavation works.
31. Care of the Works

A. Delivery, handling and storage: deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss
including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimise long-term storage of products at site and over-
crowding of construction spaces. In particular, co-ordinate delivery and/or installation to ensure
minimum holding or storage times for products recognised to be flammable, hazardous, easily
damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss.
B. Limiting exposure of work: to the extent possible, through control and protection methods, supervise
performance of work in a manner which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in
progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, or damaging exposures during construction period.
C. Cleaning and protection of finished work. General: during handling and installation of work as project
proceeds, clean site and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual
maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where required to ensure
freedom from damage or deterioration at a time of Practical Completion; otherwise, clean and perform
maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary throughout remainder of construction
period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure equipment operates as intended.
32. General Product Compliance

A. Provide products which comply with requirements, and which are undamaged and unused at time of
installation, and which are complete with accessories, trim, finish, features required by regulation, and
other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for intended use and effect.
B. Standard products: where available, provide standard products of types which have been produced and
used previously and successfully on other projects and in similar applications.
C. Continued availability: where additional amounts of a product, by its application, are likely to be needed
by principal at a later date for maintenance and repair or replacement work, provide a standard,
domestically produced product which is likely to be available to principal at such later date.
D. Manufacturer's recommendations: where installations include manufactured products, comply with
manufacturer's current and applicable recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are
more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in contract documents.
At completion of project, provide to the architect a copy of each set of manufacturer's recommendations
which have been used in the work of each trade.
E. Manufacturer's data sheets: where this specification requires, obtain 2 copies of the current data sheets
issued by the manufacturer of specified component. Retain 1 copy for use on site and submit the other
to the architect as a record of instructions followed on the site.
33. Builder's Quality Control

A. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged or
defective items.
B. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing materials properly as they are
installed, true to line and level, and within recognised industry tolerances unless otherwise indicated.
Allow for expansion and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organised
for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual effect choices to the architect.
C. Re-check measurements and dimensions of the work as an integral step before starting each
installation.
D. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure and weather which will ensure the best
possible results for each part of the work, or component or treatment as necessary to prevent damage
and deterioration.
E. Co-ordinate enclosure and closing-in of work with required inspections and tests, so as to avoid
necessity of uncovering work for that purpose.
34. Occupational (Workplace) Health and Safety

Be responsible for the maintenance of a satisfactory safety system on site. Ensure Risk Assessments are
made and amended as conditions change and prepare appropriate Risk Management Statements that fully
comply with relevant workplace regulations. Provide evidence to the architect of full compliance with the
provisions of the relevant state health and safety act, and that all relevant documents are approved by
Workcare representatives. It is the responsibility of the contractor and sub-contractors to use the safety
equipment and procedures as required by law.
Refer 00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS.
35. Material/Colour Selections

A. The architect will prepare a master Colour Schedule indicating the required colour, finish, pattern,
material, texture and other pertinent information in connection with interior and exterior finishes.
B. Submit colour chips for items having colour unless otherwise directed or approved by architect.
C. To facilitate the preparation of such a schedule, submit within 15 days following date of award of
contract, unless otherwise extended by the architect, the names and products of those manufacturers
whose products are proposed for use within the framework of the specifications wherever colour, finish,
pattern, texture and other related information is a consideration.
36. Miscellaneous Completion Procedures
A. Removal of protection: except as otherwise indicated or requested by architect, remove temporary
protection devices and facilities installed during course of the work to protect previously-completed work.
Where secured to exposed-to-view new work or existing to remain, remove evidence of protection
devices. Remove protection within 5 days before Practical Completion.
B. Trade cleaning: as each trade completes its work in each area of the building, the sub-contractor is
required to be responsible for "broom clean" standard of cleaning in that area.
37. Final Cleaning

Final cleaning: provide final cleaning of the work of this specification, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning
each surface of unit of work to normal 'clean' condition expected for a first class building cleaning and
maintenance programme.
Examples of required cleaning are:

A. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
B. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing
substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged
transparent materials.
C. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaces finished, to a dirt free condition, free of dust, stains,
finger marks, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid
disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective
condition.
D. Wipe clean surface of mechanical and electrical equipment, including lift and similar equipment; remove
excess lubrication and other substances.
E. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces.
F. Clean concrete floors broom clean.
G. Vacuum clean carpet and similar soft surfaces.
H. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary and polished condition, free of stains including those resulting from
water exposure.
I. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.
J. If permanent lighting fixtures have been used for construction purposes replace globes with new.
K. Clean project site, including planted sections and footpaths, of litter and foreign substances. Sweep
paved areas to a broom clean condition; remove stains, petro-chemical spills and other foreign deposits.
L. Label keys for locks accurately and provide in duplicate to the architect at the completion of the project.
38. Clean Site and Access Roads

Be responsible for ensuring environmental requirements, policies and standards are maintained at all times,
including maintaining clean roads and access. Remove and clean away mud, building debris from footpaths,
gutters, drains, walls etc. when such occurs.
39. Warranties
Provide written warranties as set out in the relevant trade specification sections.
40. Authority Approvals and Certificates

A. Prior to the issue of Practical Completion Notice for the whole or section of the work, lodge with the
architect relevant certificates required by local authorities for the Occupancy Permit.
B. Produce to the architect a certificate of clearance of reinstatement of damage to footpaths and road, etc.
from the appropriate road authority or city engineer before issue of Practical Completion Notice.
C. Provide as constructed drawings and operations and maintenance manuals prior to the issue of the
Notice of Practical Completion.
41. Contract Stamp Duty

If contract is liable to stamp duty, the builder is to provide to the architect at time of signing the contract, duty
stamps to the value required by the state in which the project is being constructed, together with 1 new copy of
the printed Conditions of Contract being used in this project.
42. Asbestos
No asbestos products or asbestos based materials are to be used in any part or parts of this building or its
services and the builder is to ensure that sub-contractors, nominated sub-contractors, suppliers and others are
advised of this restriction.
43. Patent Rights

Ensure that no patent is infringed and that unless otherwise specified, amounts payable and conditions
imposed in respect of the manufacture, use or exercise of patented invention are paid and complied with and
will indemnify the principal against claims, damages, costs, charges and expenses in any way whatsoever
arising out of the manufacture, use or exercise by the builder of patented invention.
44. Record of Services

Obtain from the architect, 2 additional copies of the drawings and mark thereon the exact position and route of
underground piping as actually laid, by dimensions from boundaries, buildings and other fixed points.
The position of valves, branches, inspection openings and the like, will be dimensioned and checked by the
builder before the work is covered up. Record on the drawings the invert levels of drains and other relevant
piped services. Variations in position of size of the pipes, valves and the like within the building, will also be
marked on these sets of drawings and checked by the builder.
Return the dimensioned drawings to the architect on completion to enable an exact record of the whole
installation to be made for use in future maintenance.
45. Payment of Workers and Sub-contractors

A. Before the principal makes each payment to the contractor, the architect may, not less than 5 days
before a payment certificate is due, in writing request the contractor -
B. To give the architect a statutory declaration by the contractor or, where the contractor is a corporation,
by a representative of the contractor who is in a position to know the facts declared, that all workers who
have at any time been employed by the contractor on work under the contract have at the date of the
request been paid all moneys due and payable to them in respect of their employment on the work
under the contract; and:
C. To provide documentary evidence to the architect that at the date of the request all workers who have
been employed by a sub-contractor of the contractor have been paid all moneys due and payable to
them in respect of their employment on the work under the contract.
D. Not earlier than 14 days after the contractor has made each claim for payment, and before the principal
makes that payment to the contractor, the contractor is to give to the architect a statutory declaration by
the contractor or, where the contractor is a corporation, by a representative of the contractor who is in a
position to know the facts declared, that all sub-contractors have been paid all moneys due and payable
to them in respect of work under the contract.
E. If the contractor fails:
Within 5 days after a request by the architect to provide the statutory declaration, or the documentary
evidence (as the case may be) required, or fails:
To comply with these requirements, payment of moneys to the contractor may be withheld by the
principal until the statutory declaration or the documentary evidence (as the case may be) is received by
the architect.
If the contractor provides to the architect satisfactory proof of the maximum amount due and payable to
workers and sub-contractors by the contractor, the principal is not entitled to withhold any amount in
excess of the maximum amount. At the written request of the contractor, from and out of, moneys
payable to the contractor, the principal may on behalf of the contractor make payments directly to any
worker or sub-contractor. If any worker or sub-contractor obtains a court order in respect of moneys
referred to in clause B or C above and produces to the principal the court order and a statutory
declaration that it remains unpaid, the principal may pay the amount of the order, and costs included in
the order, to the worker or sub-contractor and the amount paid is to be a debt due from the contractor to
the principal. After the making of a sequestration order or a winding up order in respect of the contractor,
the principal is not to make any payment to a worker or sub-contractor without the concurrence of the
official receiver or trustee of the bankrupt or the liquidator as the case may be.
46. Tree Preservation

Clearly mark and protect all trees and vegetation identified on the site plan. Refer to the landscape drawings for
tree protection zones to be established and maintained.
47. Provisional Delay Period

The builder shall allow the following provisional period for delays in the execution of the Works caused by
inclement weather.
January; 1 day May; 7 days September; 7 days

February; 1 day June; 9 days October; 6 days
March; 2 days July; 9 days November; 3 days
April; 4 days August; 9 days December;2 days
Instead of granting an extension of time for any such delay the Architect shall issue to the builder a notice
reducing the provisional period by the amount of the extension of time which would otherwise have been
granted, provided that if and when the provisional period is thereby reduced to nil, any further such delay shall
be cause for extensions of time for Practical Completion of the Works, and provided further that if the
provisional period is not thereby reduced to nil by the time the Works shave reached practical completion, the
Date of Practical Completion shall not be altered in consequence thereof.
48. Construction Management Plan

Prepare a Construction Management Plan for approval by the City of Gosnells prior to commencement of the
works. The approved plan shall be implemented for the duration of the works and is to ensure the construction
has minimal impacts on the nearby residents, users of public roads and footpaths
.
END OF DOCUMENT
00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Compliance
Prepare an Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental Management Plan for the works that complies, as a
minimum, with statutory and other legal requirements of the locality the works are to be undertaken in, including
all licensing, permits, fees, charges, etc. relevant to the works they will undertake
Develop a “Hazard and Risk Register” for the construction phase of the project and:
• Include all hazards/risks they have identified as possible, during the conduct of the construction
phase, and
• Rate each hazard/risk level. Where the risk is greater than a first aid injury or minor illness…
• Identify and include specific controls to reduce the risk so the consequence is minor injury or illness
and …
• Re-assess the risk after the introduction of the control so as to ensure the selected control will be
effective in preventing identified injury or illness in the relevant hazard/risk identified and…
• Identify and document how the hazards and risks, as identified, will be monitored and reviewed, and
the frequency of such monitoring and review, during the conduct of the works on the project
Include, where applicable the following hazard categories and associated risks as a minimum in the “Hazard
and Risk Register”:
• Working at height and at same level.
• Working in excavations and trenches.
• Working on or near essential services, including electricity, gas, telecommunications, water, sewer
etc.
• Delivery, storage, decanting, use and disposal of a hazardous chemical/substance.
• Delivery, unloading/loading, servicing, maintenance use and repair of plant.
• Using a confined space.
• Activities generating excessive noise, manual and materials handling risks.
• Asbestos and demolition works.
• Other categories of hazards, as included in the relevant Occupational Health, Safety and
Environmental Act, Regulation, Policy, Code of Practice, Australian Standard etc.
Prepare “Safe Work Method Statements (SWMS)”, or equivalent, so as to control identified hazards and risks
documented in the “Hazard and Risk Register”, in consultation with workers, or providing training to workers, in
the way they will undertake the work, so as to prevent injury or illness during the conduct of the works. Controls
will include the requirements of any Regulation, or where no regulation exists, controls to be equal to or better
than a Code of Practice, Australian Standard, Ministerial Notice, statutory or industry alert, relevant to the
identified hazard and risk,
Provide supervision, training and instruction, as relevant, to all affected workers on the project, so as to ensure
that during the conduct of the works the potential for injury or illness, as identified in the “Hazard and Risk
Register”, and documented in “Safe Work Method Statement” is minimised to an acceptable level.
At the completion of the project, provide a copy of all identified and unresolved hazards and risks that remain to
be controlled by the end user or end user servicing, maintenance or repair personnel, so that they are not put
at risk by the completed project.
2. Submissions
Develop and submit, prior to commencing work on the project, a copy of the contractors:
• Occupational Health Safety and Environmental Management plan, and
• Hazard and Risk Register, and
• Safe Work Method Statement.
Document, and make available as necessary:
• The intended training, supervision, induction and inspection processes and procedures to be
undertaken on the project and …
• The notification of all Incidents occurring at the project, including reporting, investigation, findings and
corrective actions and …
• Any occupational health, safety and environmental visitation, prosecution or consultation, including any
recommendations or finding provided by external parties to the project.
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 21 of 25 00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
00860 DRAWINGS
ARCHITECTURAL
Number Name Revision No.
A101 Site Demolition Plan 0
A102 Site Plan 0
A103 Piazza Plan 0
A104 Balcony Plan 0
A201 GA Part Ground Floor Plan A Block 0
A202 GA Part Ground Floor Plan B Block 0
A203 GA Part Upper Floor Plan A Block 0
A204 GA Part Upper Floor Plan B Block 0
A211 Setout Plan – Part Ground Floor A Block 0
A212 Setout Plan – Part Ground Floor B Block 0
A213 Setout Plan – Part Upper Floor A Block 0
A214 Setout Plan – Part Ground Floor B Block 0
A241 Verandah Roof Plan 0
A242 Main Roof Plan 0
A301 Elevations – Block A 0
A302 Elevations – Block B 0
A303 Screening Details 0
A401 Sections 0
A402 Sections 0
A403 Sections 0
A411 Sectional Details 0
A441 Stair Details 0
A442 Stair Details 0
A501 Reflected Ceiling Plan – Ground Floor 0
A502 Reflected Ceiling Plan – Upper Floor 0
A601 Room Layouts 0
A602 Room Layouts 0
A603 Room Layouts 0
A604 Room Layouts 0
A605 Room Layouts 0
A606 Room Layouts 0
A607 Room Layouts 0
A608 Room Layout Details 0
A701 Door and Window Schedule 0
CIVIL
C01 Civil General Notes 0
C20 Bulk Earthworks 0
C30 Site Levels 0
C35 Line Marking 0
C40 Standard Details Road 0
STRUCTURAL
S 1001 General Notes Sheet 1 0
S 1101 Footing Plan Block A Sheet 1 0
S 1102 Footing Plan Block B Sheet 2 0
S 1110 Footing Details General Sheet 1 0
S 1111 Footing Details General Sheet 2 0
S 1121 Ground Steel Plan Block A Sheet 1 0
S 1122 Ground Steel Plan Block B Sheet 2 0
S 1125 Secondary Steelwork Plans & Details 0
S 1201 First Floor Plan Block A – Sheet 1 0
S 1202 First Floor Plan Block B – Sheet 2 0
S 1210 First Floor Plan Bottom Reinforcement Block A – Sheet 1 0
S 1211 First Floor Plan Bottom Reinforcement Block B – Sheet 2 0
S 1214 First Floor Plan Top Reinforcement Block A – Sheet 1 0
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 22 of 25 00860 DRAWINGS

S 1215 First Floor Plan Top Reinforcement Block B – Sheet 2 0
S 1220 First Floor Slab Sections – Sheet 1 0
S 1225 Stair Plans & Details 0
S 1231 First Floor Steel Plan Block A – Sheet 1 0
S 1232 First Floor Steel Plan Block B – Sheet 2 0
S 1301 Roof Plan Block A – Sheet 1 0
S 1302 Roof Plan Block B – Sheet 2 0
S 1400 Sections - Sheet 1 0
S 1405 Steelwork Details - Sheet 1 0
S 1406 Steelwork Details - Sheet 2 0
S 1410 Elevations – Sheet 1 0
HYDRAULICS
H 01 Site Plan - Drain, Water & Fire 0
H 02 Part Site Plan / Ground Floor Plan- Drain, Water & Fire 0
H 03 Ground Floor Plan - Drain 0
H 04 First Floor Plan - Drain 0
H 05 Ground Floor Plan - Water 0
H 06 First Floor Plan - Water 0
H 07 Typical Details 0
ELECTRICAL
DE 000 Cover Page 0
DE 001 Legend 0
DE 002 Luminaire & Direct Connection Schedule 0
DE 003 Details 0
DE 004 Existing Site Plan Forward Works 0
DE 005 Site Plan 0
DE 006 Carpark Lighting Layout 0
DE 007 Ground Floor Power Layout 0
DE 008 Ground Floor Lighting Layout 0
DE 009 First Floor Power Layout 0
DE 010 First Floor Lighting Layout 0
DE 011 Ground Floor Cable Tray Layout 0
DE 012 SMSB & BMSB Single Line Diagram 0
DE 013 DB1 Single Line Diagram 0
DE 014 Communications Schematics 0
MECHANICAL
M 000 Cover Page 0
M 001 Ground Floor Plan 0
M 002 First Floor Plan 0
M 003 Legend & Details 0
LANDSCAPE
L 3.101 Levels Works Drawing 0
L 4.101 Hard Works Drawing 0
L 5.101 Soft Works Drawing 0
L 7.101 General Details Drawing 0
FEATURE SURVEY
F01 (6 Sheets) Feature survey 1.0
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 23 of 25 00860 DRAWINGS

00870 SCHEDULES AND TABLES
PART I MONETARY SCHEDULES
Provisional Sums
Definition: Provisional Sum

An amount of money included in the contract documents to cover works proposed as part of the contract for
which full information cannot be made available prior to the calling of tenders and letting of a contract. A
provisional sum includes labour, materials, and all costs and margins.
Allow the following Provisional Sums:
Section No. Section Name $ Amount (excluding GST).

Unidentified services diversions $ 10,000.00
Water Corporation Application Fees $ 15,000.00
07725 Fall Arrest Equipment $ 10,000.00
08710 Door Hardware $ 90,000.00
10400 Identification Signs $ 10,000.00
10520 Fire Extinguishers $ 7,500.00
Public Artworks $ 100,000.00
Contingency
Definition: Contingency Sum

A sum of money included in the contract documents to cover the cost of unforeseen items. It can be expended
in full or in part as required by the superintendent during the progress of the works under the contract.
Allow the following sum for contingencies $ 270,000.00 + GST
Definitions are quotes from (Standards Australia “Glossary of Building Terms”) SAA HB 50.
PART II BUILDER’S WORK SCHEDULES
SCHEDULE OF BUILDER’S WORK ITEMS - MECHANICAL SERVICES
Provide for the mechanical services contractor:

A. Clear openings through the building structure for passage of ductwork, pipes etc., and openings in doors
or walls for the passage of return and relief air.
B. Access openings in ceilings, bulkheads, walls and at other positions as required for adjustment and
access by mechanical services sub-contractor.
C. Cutting, patching, framing up, furring in and making good associated with the building structure for the
passage of pipes, ductwork, grilles, etc. Details will be supplied by the mechanical services sub-
contractor.
D. Supply and installation of door grilles, as nominated or required by mechanical services sub-contractor.
E. Supply and installation air intake and discharge louvres complete with bird screens if required.
F. Sealing air-tight of ceilings plenums where used for passage of return air.
G. Penetrations through roof and walls, including flashings, collars etc.
H. Provision of temporary lighting, 415/240V power, gas, water and other services required for the
installation and testing of the mechanical services.
I. Provision of hot water outlets and connection pipe tails to outlets. The mechanical services sub-
contractor will provide hot water piping terminating in tails adjacent to outlets.
SCHEDULE OF BUILDER’S WORK - ELECTRICAL SERVICES

Provide for the electrical services contractor:
A. Provision of temporary lighting, 415/240V power and other services as required for the installation and
testing of the electrical services, as per AS 3012 2010 Electrical installation- Construction and
demolition sites and AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (Australian & NZ Wiring rules) for finished
building or structure.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 24 of 25 00870 SCHEDULES AND TABLES
B. Slab penetrations for floor mounted GPOs, telephone outlets, etc.
C. Chasing and making good for conduit access for skirting wiring duct, GPOs, switches etc.
D. Supply and installation of access openings where required.
E. Provision of electrical and telephone riser cupboards and floor penetrations.
F. Provision of sign writing to Main Switchroom, Distribution Board and telephone cupboards, etc.
G. Provision of openings for luminaires to sizes required by the electrician.
SCHEDULE OF BUILDER’S WORK - HYDRAULIC SERVICES
Provide for the hydraulics contractor:

A. Pit for sewer pump.
B. Clear openings through building structure for passage of piping and fittings.
C. Access openings as required for hydraulic pipes.
D. Access doors as required for sewer inspection points.
E. Trenching and back filling and making good of existing road works, for underground hydraulic works,
including gas.
F. Excavate hole for grease traps.
G. Signage for hose reel cupboards.
H. Plinth for domestic hot water service.
END OF DOCUMENT
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 25 of 25 00870 SCHEDULES AND TABLES
SECTION 02210 Civil Works
02210 CIVIL WORKS
1 SURVEY SETOUT
1.1 SURVEY AND TESTING – SET OUT

The works shall be set out and constructed in accordance with the alignments, levels, grades and
cross sections as shown on the approved drawings or as directed by the Architect in accordance with
this specification.
The Contractor shall have on site at all times survey equipment of a standard suitable to accurately
confirm detailed setout and levels, plus personnel skilled in the proper operation of this equipment. All
such equipment and personnel, if required, shall be made available for the Architect's use upon
request. This requirement shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of their responsibilities with
regard to accuracy of setout, levels and falls, etc.
The works shall be set out, using all the necessary survey equipment, from the pegs and bench marks
given and these shall be used constantly during the progress of the works to check the accuracy
thereof. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor's surveyor to obtain digital setout information
from the Principal's surveyor. The contractor's surveyor shall confirm dimensions and scale on the
drawings prior to setting out any works on site. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the Architect for
confirmation or resolution prior to proceeding with any works.
The Contractor shall allow for lot boundaries to be re-established and confirm all setout dimensions
prior to beginning works on site. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the Architect for confirmation
or resolution prior to proceeding with any works.
Care shall be taken not to disturb any survey peg, survey recovery pegs or survey marks and none of
these are to be removed without the prior approval of the Architect.
Where it is necessary to cover a survey peg, such a peg must have a substantial stake driven beside it
and this stake shall extend at least 75mm above the finished surface and be appropriately marked to
identify it. Any State Survey mark affected by the works shall be identified and reported to the
Department of Lands and Surveys for replacement or relocation.
The Contractor shall protect and keep protected the bench mark and any other survey control marks
established by the Licensed Surveyor. All costs involved in re-establishing these marks should they be
removed as a result of the Contractor's neglect shall be met by the Contractor. Re-establishment of
such marks shall be carried out by a Licensed Surveyor only.
Setout amendments, if required, shall only be undertaken on site in conjunction with the Architect and
are subject to Approval.
Approval to proceed shall not constitute acceptance of the accuracy of the work nor relieve the
Contractor of their contractual obligations and responsibility for the work.
Payment for survey set out will be assumed to be included in the relevant schedule item for each
activity.
Should major survey be required to replace pegs during progress of the works, the superintendent
shall be informed at an earlier prior time and the Contractor shall keep him informed as to all survey
requirements.
2 TESTING
2.1 GENERAL
- It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide all materials for the completion of this project and to
provide verification that all materials comply with the requirements of the contract documents.
- In addition it is the contractors responsibility to undertake all necessary testing of subgrade,
subbase, basecourse and, asphalt to ensure conformance with this specification for compaction,
moisture content, level, dryness, shape, finish etc. The costs for all testing shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
- All compaction testing shall be undertaken by an approved, independent NATA registered testing
laboratory in accordance with A.S. 1289.1.4.1.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 14 SECTION 02210 CIVIL WORKS
2.2 STANDARDS
The work shall comply with relevant current Australian Standards including but not limited to the
following:
Comply with particular specifications in building regulations and/or local council publications.
- AS 1141 Methods for sampling and testing aggregate

- AS 1152 Specification for Test Sieves
- AS 1254 PVC-U pipes and fittings for stormwater and surface water applications
- AS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent application
- AS 1289 Methods for testing soils for engineering purposes
- AS 1379 The specification and supply of concrete
- AS 1650 Hot-dip galvanised coatings on ferrous articles
- AS 1725 Galvanised rail-less chainwire security fences and gates
- AS 1726 Geotechnical site investigations
- AS 2032 Installation of PVC pipe systems
- AS 2423 Galvanised wire fencing products
- AS/NZS 2566 Buried Flexible Pipelines
- AS/NZS 2566.2 Buried Flexible Pipelines Installation
- AS 2758 Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes
- AS 2891 Methods of Sampling and Testing Asphalt
- Test Methods 731.1 Stability and Flow of Asphalt”
- AS 3660 Termite management.
- AS 3705 Geotextiles - Identification, Marking and General Data
- AS 3706 Geotextiles - Methods of Test
- AS 3798 Guidelines on earthworks for commercial and residential developments
- AS 3972 Portland and Blended Cements
- AS 4058 Concrete Pipes
- AS 4133 Methods of Testing Rocks for Engineering Purposes
- AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays.
. AS/NZS 4200.1 1994 Materials. Plus 1 Amdt, 1994.
. AS/NZS 4200.2 1994 Installation requirements.
- AS 4678 Earth-retaining structures
- AS 4687 2007 Temporary fencing and hoardings.
- AS/NZS 5065 Polyethylene and polypropylene pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage
applications
2.3 MATERIAL TESTING SCHEDULE
Table 2.3 Material Testing - Compaction Performance Criteria - To Pavements & Structures
Material Material Type Method Minimum Frequency - area per portion (2)
Definition Density
Subgrade Sand PSP - to 95% SMDD >1000m2 1 test per
A.S. 500m2 or
1289.6.3.3 (1) three per
portion
500-1000m2 1 test per
500m2 or
Clay / Clayey NDT - to A.S. 98% MMDD three per
1289.5.2.1 portion
<500m2 2 tests per
500m2 or
three per
portion
Filling Sand PSP - to 98% SMDD >1000m2 1 test per

A.S. 500m2 or
1289.6.3.3 (1) three per
portion (all per
layer)(3)
500-1000m2 1 test per
500m2 or
Clay / Clayey NDT - to A.S. 98% MMDD three per
1289.5.2.1 portion (all per
layer)(3)
<500m2 2 tests per
500m2 or
three per
portion (all per
layer)(3)
Sub-base Limestone NDT - to A.S. 95% MMDD 1 test per 500m2 or three per
1289.5.2.1 portion
Road Base Crushed Rock NDT - to A.S. 98% MMDD 1 test per 500m2 or three per
1289.5.2.1 portion
Wearing Asphalt 94% Marshall 1 test per 500m2 or three per

Course Maximum portion
Density
Notes on Table 2.3.

1. PSP testing shall be used in sandy locations where deemed appropriate. Refer section 1.10 of 0222
Earthworks for details.
2. The contractor shall determine which sections of the works will constitute a portion in accordance
with the criteria indicated, and submit to the Superintendent for approval. A portion shall have been
produced by the same works process and be brought to completion at the same time. Portions shall
appear to be of consistent quality without obvious changes in attribute values.
3. Testing frequency to be completed per each fill layer installed loose and compacted.
- Density shall be measured in situ by use of a nuclear moisture/density meter in accordance with
Test Method AS 1289.5.2.1-2003. All measurements shall be made using the direct transmission
mode. The cost of all testing for direct transmission testing methods shall be borne by the
contractor. Indirect density tests using correlations will not be accepted.
- The nuclear moisture/density meter can be calibrated for the range of density 1.3 t/m³ to 3.05 t/m³.
- If the in situ density is outside the range of densities for which the nuclear moisture/density meter
has been calibrated the "Sand Replacement Method" shall be used.
- For the purpose of conformance judgement of subgrade, and basecourse, the in situ density shall
be expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density.
- The maximum dry density shall be determined by the appropriate Australian Standard method.
Density - Asphalt
Density shall be calculated on the basis of the results of tests of core samples of asphalt randomly
sampled form the pavement, after laying and compaction, in accordance with AS 2891 “Methods of
Sampling and Testing Asphalt” with MRD Test Methods 731.1 "Stability and Flow of Asphalt”.
Moisture Content
The moisture content shall be determined using the appropriate Australian Standard method.
Remedial Works
- The Contractor shall be responsible for patching holes made during earthworks, subgrade or
pavement testing.
- The test holes shall be backfilled immediately after sampling or testing by the person who made the
holes. Backfilled material shall have similar properties and shall be compacted at or near optimum
moisture content to densities matching the surrounding material.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
The surface of all unpaved areas, roadways, subgrade, and embankments constructed or disturbed by
the Contractor shall be graded to a smooth surface. The slope of batters shall not exceed the
specified slope. The finished surfaces of earthworks shall be accurate within the tolerances set out in
the Table below.
Table 2.4 REQUIRED TOLERANCES
Vertical Deviation Horizontal 3m Straight

Deviation Edge Deviation
Bulk earthworks levels +50 mm, -25 mm
Deviation of batter line at any point <150 mm <150 mm
Subgrade level +5 mm, -35 mm +100 mm, -0 mm
Sub-base level +5 mm, -25 mm +50 mm, -0 mm
Basecourse level +5 mm, -5 mm +20 mm, -0 mm Max 6mm
Asphalt wearing course +5mm, -0 mm +0 mm, -0 mm Max 5mm
Trafficable brick pavers +5mm, -0 mm +0 mm, -0 mm Max 5mm
Base of foundations and ground + 0 mm, -10 mm

surfaces prior to placement of
structures
Concrete kerbs and footpaths +5 mm, -5 mm +5 mm, -5 mm
Stormwater Drainage +5 mm, -5 mm +5 mm, -5 mm

Retaining Walls +5 mm, -5 mm +5 mm, -5 mm
All earthworks shall be final graded to the underside of the pavement stage including, but not limited
to:
- evenly graded changes between design levels and existing ground levels;
- smoothly finished surface, no ruts or disturbances;
3 AS-CONSTRUCTED
- Records for all underground works shall show the location of the item referenced from the boundary
or road centre line as applicable with chainage and offset at all changes of direction and 20m
maximum centres on straights.
- "As Constructed" detail shall be at cross sections to coincide with cross sections, chainages and all
offsets on the approved drawings at 20m intervals.
- Final As-Constructed information shall be provided in accordance with the General Requirements
work sections. Additionally, as-constructed locations of all kerbing and centrelines shall be
accurately located by a licensed surveyor. A digital copy of the as-constructed location shall be
provided to the Architect in Autocad dwg and pdf formats for client records.
- Under no circumstance will payment be made for works which have not received the Architects
approval of the "As Constructed" information.
4 ROADWORKS
4.1 SCOPE OF WORKS

The work of this section comprises but is not limited to subgrade preparation, lay and compact
subbase, base course and wearing course, provide and install kerbing, signing and lining, stormwater
pipes, manholes and gullies and all other works necessary to complete the bitumen paving and
stormwater drainage.
4.2 RELATED WORK
- Site preparation and earthworks
- Concrete
- Landscaping
4.3 PAVEMENTS
General
The pavement shall be constructed to the widths, grades, crossfalls, depths and lengths shown on the
drawings.
Subgrade
- The finished levels of the subgrade shall be within tolerance of design levels per table 2.4.
- During sub grade preparation, the works shall be maintained in such condition that they are
thoroughly drained at all times.
Sub-Base
- The sub-base material shall be crushed limestone from an approved source and crushed to comply
with the grading given below. The crushed limestone shall be free of sand, capstone, roots and
other foreign material. The compacted thickness of limestone sub-base shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
- The limestone shall comply with the following requirements, when sampled and tested in
accordance with AS 1141 and AS 1189:
. Percentage of wear by Los Angeles test - not more than 60%.
. Calcium carbonate content - not less than 60% nor more than 80% by weight.
AS Sieve Size % Passing By Weight
75 mm 100
19 mm 50 - 75
2.36 mm & less 30 - 50
- No limestone shall be placed until the subgrade has been approved by the Superintendent.
- The limestone rubble shall be placed so that the subgrade is not disturbed and broken up.
Limestone shall not be spread upon a water logged subgrade. If at any time the subgrade material
becomes mixed with the limestone sub-base, the Contractor at his own cost shall remove the
mixture and reshape with clean limestone.
- The sub-base shall be worked in compacted layers not greater than 250mm nor less than 100mm.
- The limestone shall be compacted by rolling and watering to a firm, even and unyielding surface to
the satisfaction of the Architect.
- Where in the opinion of the Architect, damage to adjoining properties may result, the use of vibrating
rollers will not be permitted.
- The finished surface shall be tested by template to ensure accuracy within tolerance of design levels
per table 2.4
4.4 CRUSHED ROCK BASE COURSE
- The base course material shall be diorite or granite fine crushed rock from an approved source.
The compacted thickness of the base course shall be as shown in the drawings.
- The crushed rock shall comply with the following requirements when sampled and tested in
accordance with AS 1141 and AS 1289.
- Percentage of wear by Los Angeles test not more than 45%.
19 mm 100
9.5 mm 70 - 80
4.75 mm 40 - 65
2.36 mm 30 - 50
0.425 mm 12 - 30
0.075 mm 3 - 12
- The ratio of the portion passing 0.075 mm sieve to the portion passing 0.425 mm sieve shall fall
within the range of 40 60%.
- The portion retained on the 0.425 mm sieve shall conform to the following:
. Linear shrinkage not greater than 1%
. Lower liquid limit not greater than 25
. Plasticity index not greater than 5.
. Dry compressive strength not less than 1.75 MPa.
- No rock base shall be placed until the sub base has been approved by the Architect.
- The fine crushed rock shall be maintained at optimum moisture content, within a tolerance of + 2%
(two per cent) until spreading and compaction is completed, additional water being added as
necessary during rolling.
- The road base shall be worked in compacted layers not greater than 250mm nor less than 100mm.
- Materials shall be spread without segregation of large or fine particles. Segregated materials shall
be re mixed by harrowing and blading or, if ordered by the Superintendent, they shall be cast to
waste.
- Fine crushed rock shall not be spread upon a waterlogged sub base. If at any time the sub base
material should become churned up or mixed with the pavement, the contractor shall, without
additional compensation, remove the mixture and re shape with clean material, which shall be
satisfactorily compacted uniformly with the surrounding surface.
- The finished surface shall be tested by template to ensure accuracy within tolerance of design levels
per table 2.4.
4.5 PRIMING OF PAVEMENT
- No surface shall be primed until the finished base course has been approved by the
Superintendent.
- A short time before the priming is to be commenced, the surface shall be finished by light watering,
planing and rolling with multi wheeled, pneumatic tyred rollers.
- The mulch which forms on the surface shall be removed from the pavement by light grading and
brooming to provide a surface free from loose stones, dirt and foreign matter. At this stage, the
pavement shall be dry, or at most, only slightly damp and the surface pores free from water down to
a depth of 12 mm.
- The pavement shall be primed with a medium curing cut back bitumen containing at least 70% by
volume bitumen. The rate of application shall be not less than 1.20 litres/m2 measured at 15°C. The
spraying temperature shall be between 70°C and 120°C.
- Alternatively, a bitumen emulsion prime containing at least 60% by volume bitumen may be used,
subject to the Architect's approval. The rate of application shall be not less than 1.36 litres/m2
measured at 15°C.
- The method of application shall be in accordance with standard practice adopted by Main Roads
WA.
- The primed spray shall be blinded after spraying.
- For cutback prime, sand or 1.5 mm aggregate shall be applied after penetration of the primer but
while sufficient bitumen is on the surface to allow adhesion.
- For emulsion prime, 5 mm granite aggregate shall be evenly applied at a rate of 100 square metres
coverage per cubic metre. The surface shall be rolled until the aggregate is firmly embedded in the
primer.
- On no account shall the bituminous concrete material be placed on a section of the primed base
course until such section has been inspected and approved by the Architect. A minimum of 72 hours
after application of the primer shall elapse in all cases.
4.6 WEARING COURSE
- The wearing course shall be "bituminous concrete" consisting of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate
and mineral filler uniformly coated and mixed with a bituminous binder.
- The nominal size of the bituminous concrete shall conform to the following requirements.
. 50 Blow Marshall Mix, Class 320 Bitumen
- Aggregate shall be 7mm nominal size unless noted otherwise. Minimum compacted depths as
specified on the Drawings.
- The aggregate for the course shall consist wholly of crushed granite material produced from sound
stone having a Los Angeles Abrasion Test value of not greater than 30 or a mixture of crushed
material and natural sand provided that, if natural sand is included in the mixture, the amount used
shall be so limited that the mixture of aggregate passing the 4.75 mm A.S. Sieve will contain not
less than 50% by weight of crushed particles. The flakiness index of the aggregate shall not exceed
35%.
- Filler, if required, shall consist of Portland Cement, ground limestone or stone dust.
- The paving mixture for the surface coarse shall meet the following requirements by weight when
determined by A.S. sieves. The residual binder, that is the residual asphaltic bitumen, shall be
determined as a percentage by weight of the total mixture.
Nominal Size 7 mm
13.2 mm 100
9.50 mm 100
6.70 mm 80-100
4.75 mm 70-90
2.36 mm 49-67
1.18 mm 37-53
600 um 25-41
300 um 15-27
150 um 8-16
75 um 4-8
Total Mineral Matter 100
Nominal Agg Size 7 mm
Bitumen Binder (% of total 5.2-7.0

mix by mass)
Marshall Stability Test 5.5kN
(minimum)
Marshall Flow Value (mm) 2-5
Range of air voids in total 3-7
mix when compacted
- Strict control of temperature shall be maintained to avoid burning of the binder and to also provide
maximum laying qualities in the mix.
- The following limits shall apply:
. Maximum aggregate temperature = 190°C
. Maximum bitumen temperature = 160°C
. Maximum temperature of mix leaving plant = 175°C
. Minimum temperature of mix at spreader = 135 C
4.7 TACK COAT
- A tack coat of rapid breaking cationic bituminous emulsion (CRS / 50 - 60 Grade) shall be applied to
the primed surface at a rate between 0.20 and 0.50 litres per sq. metre.
- The existing surface shall first be swept to the satisfaction of the Architect to a clean, dry surface.
- When ordered, splash guards shall be supplied and used to protect property, traffic and adjoining
work from damage. The Architect shall direct the length of tack coat which may be put out beyond
the point at which the spreading of bituminous concrete is to be undertaken and the period of time
which must elapse before spreading commences on the tack coat. This time shall normally be not
less than 30 minutes nor more than 2 hours.
4.8 PLACING THE MIXTURE
- The mixture shall be laid upon a base which is dry and only when weather conditions are suitable
and atmospheric temperature above ten (10) degrees centigrade.
- The mixture shall be spread to line and camber without tearing, gouging or shearing to produce a
surface free from waves.
- The mixture shall be spread in such a manner as to minimise the number of joints in the pavement.
More than one longitudinal joint will not be permitted if the total width is 7.4 m or less.
- Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be made in a careful manner well bonded and sealed. Joints
between old and new pavements or between successive days work, shall be carefully made to
ensure a thorough and continuous bond between the old and new surfaces.
- Immediately after any course is spread and before roller compaction is started, the surface shall be
checked, any inequalities adjusted, all fat, sandy, segregated hungry or dusty accumulation from the
screed removed by a rake or hoe and replaced with satisfactory material.
4.9 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
- After spreading, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compressed as soon after being
spread as it will bear the roller without undue displacement. For the compaction of the mixture, the
Contractor shall provide self propelled and reversible rollers approved by the Architect and
complying with the following requirements:
. Steel static three wheeled rollers, weighing not less than 10 tonnes nor more than 12 tonnes. The
wheel pressures of the rear wheels shall be not less than 60 kg/cm width.
. Steel static tandem wheeled rollers weighing not less than 10 tonnes nor more than 12 tonnes.
The wheel pressures of the rollers shall be not less than 45 kg/cm width.
. Pneumatic tyred multi wheeled rollers equipped with pneumatic tyres capable of being inflated to
700 kPa. The rollers shall be so constructed that the total weight of the roller can be varied to
produce an operating weight per tyre of up to 200 kg.
. Vibrating rollers each of minimum static mass of six (6) tonnes capable of varying the amplitude
and/or frequency of vibration may be used subject to the approval of the Architect. Vibratory
compaction shall be discontinued in areas where it is considered such vibration could cause
damage to adjacent buildings or structures.
- An approved brush or similar device shall be fitted so that each tyre or roll is kept clean of foreign
material and kept uniformly wet. Tyres shall be free of pit marks.
- The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one steel three wheeled roller and one pneumatic tyred
roller for each asphalt paver in use on the job, but the Architect may require the provision of
additional rolling equipment if, in his opinion, the rollers on the job are not obtaining the required
compaction of the mixture.
- For compacting confined areas, the Contractor shall provide a small roller and/or a mechanical
impact type or vibrating type hand operated compactor of size and mass acceptable to the Architect.
- Undue delays in rolling freshly spread mixture will not be tolerated. Initial compaction of the asphalt
shall be achieved using the self propelled steel wheel roller. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the
sides and proceed toward the centre of the pavement overlapping on successive passes by at least
150 mm. Successive passes of the roller shall be of slightly different lengths. A minimum of three
passes shall be given to the asphalt and these passes shall be completed as soon as practicable
but before the asphalt temperature falls below 110 degrees Celsius. Subsequent to at least three
passes of the static wheel roller, rolling shall be carried out using the pneumatic tyred roller.
- Where the width of the pavement permits, the pavement shall then be subjected to diagonal rolling
in two directions with a tandem roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes, the second diagonal rolling
crossing the lines of the first.
- The speed of the steel wheeled roller shall not exceed 5 km/hour, or 10 km/hour in the case of a
pneumatic tyred roller and shall be at all times slow enough to avoid displacement of the hot
mixture. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any
other cause, shall at once be corrected by the use of rakes and of fresh mixture where required.
Rolling shall proceed continuously until all roller marks are eliminated and no further compression is
possible.
- Along kerbs, channels, headers, manholes and similar structures, and at all places not accessible to
the roller, thorough compaction shall be secured by means of hot tampers and at all contacts of this
character the joints between these structures and the mixture must be effectively sealed.
- After final compaction the course shall conform to the following requirements. It shall:
. be smooth and true to the established crown and grade, and be within a tolerance of + 5 mm of
the design level;
. shall at no point vary more than - 0 mm to + 5 mm from the specified thickness indicated on the
drawings. Any low or defective places shall immediately be remedied by cutting the course at
such spots and replacing it with fresh hot mixture which shall be immediately compacted to
conform with the surrounding area and shall be thoroughly bonded to it. The surface of the
finished course shall be free from depressions exceeding 5 mm as measured with a three metre
straightedge;
. shall have crown or crossfall as directed by the Architect;
. surface slope shall also be such that ponding of water cannot occur at any point.
4.10 PAVEMENT INSPECTION
- The Contractor shall allow for a lightweight water cart to carry out a pond test on the completed
pavement in the presence of the Superintendent.
- The test shall be completed as soon as practicable following completion of the asphalt wearing
course install.
- Any ponding that is identified shall be rectified immediately to avoid accumulation of excess oils.
Ponding is defined as any local depression that holds water any deeper than approximately 2mm.
- Paving to be particularly inspected at corners, edges and immediately adjacent drainage.

- Where re-works are required to the wearing course to correct the level and/or shape, the contractor
shall advise their proposed methodology for rectification.
- Where heat & roll is required to promote falls, the contractor shall ensure that asphalt thickness is
maintained within tolerance. An aesthetic finish acceptable to the Superintendent must also be
maintained. Where this cannot be achieved, the defect area shall be removed with saw cut, levels
corrected and wearing course reinstated.
4.11 CONCRETE KERBS
- Concrete kerbs shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
- Kerbs shall be constructed in situ by an approved kerbing machine. They shall be placed in straight
lines and horizontal and vertical curves as shown on the drawings, and to the levels shown on the
drawings.
- The concrete used shall have a minimum compressive strength of 32 MPa at twenty-eight days.
This strength shall be determined in each test by the average of two duplicate specimens moulded
from concrete actually being placed in the work, selected to represent truly the whole of the
concrete poured on the day of moulding. The concrete shall be composed of a mixture of
screenings, sand and cement to give the strength specified with a maximum slump of 90mm.
- Ready mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of AS 1379 - 2007.
- The contractor shall provide all materials, labour and facilities for the manufacture of cylindrical
concrete test specimens, including the necessary moulds at such times during the course of the
contract as may be required. The test specimens shall be made, cured and tested in accordance
with AS 1012. The whole cost of obtaining concrete samples shall be borne by the contractor.
- Contraction joints shall be provided at 2.5 m intervals and formed perpendicular to the kerb length
by either a joint tool capable of cutting 20 mm deep or a 5 mm wide cut 66% though.
- Not less than 24 hours after the placement of the kerb, transverse expansion joints shall be
provided in vertical planes at right angles to the kerb lines and at intervals not exceeding 5 m,
coinciding with formed construction joints, and at sides of drainage gullies. The joints shall be made
with a full 10 mm thickness cut filled with an approved butyl mastic compound and foam or
polyurethane backing as detailed in the drawings. Alternative filling materials may be used if
specifically approved in writing by the Architect.
- The first 150 mm of extruded kerb shall be neatly cut away and removed.
- Care shall be taken to joint the new kerb to existing kerbs with a smooth join. All curves and arises
shall be smooth and true. Uniformity of colour must be obtained.
- Within two hours of surface finishing, all exposed faces of kerb shall be protected from moisture loss
for not less than ninety six hours after extrusion by covering with plastic sheeting or spraying with an
approved curing compound.
- Place backfilling to kerbing after kerb has cured and jointing is completed.
5 PAVEMENT MARKING & SIGNAGE
5.1 GENERAL
This section of the Specification covers the provision of pavement marking and other surface
delineations.
5.2 STANDARDS
Work carried out and testing performed under this part of the Specification shall comply with the
following standards to the extent that they are relevant.
- AS 1742 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices
- AS 1906 Retroreflective Materials and Devices for Road Traffic Control Purposes
- AS 2009 - 2006 Glass Beads for Road Marking Materials
- AS 4049 Paints and Related Materials - Road Marking Materials
- AS 2890.6 Off-street Disabled Parking
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 10 of 14 SECTION 02210 CIVIL
5.3 SETTING OUT

The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting out of works from details shown on the Drawings
and the reference points provided therein. Additionally, kerbs and other pavement structures may be
adopted for the purposes of alignment.
5.4 MATERIALS
Pavement Marking Paint
- Unless otherwise on the Drawings paint for non-reflectorised pavement marking shall be plain type
suitable for application by spray, ie Type 1, Class A in accordance with the requirements of AS 4049
whereas paint for reflectorised pavement marking shall be retro-reflective (beads in paint) type
suitable for application by spray, ie Type 3, Class A in accordance with the requirements of AS
4049.
- Colours shall be white, yellow or blue as detailed or as per standard practice and shall not be
subject to discolouration by bitumen from the pavement surfaces.
Glass Beads
Spherical glass beads shall comply with the requirements of AS 2009 - 2006.
Raised Pavement Markers
Non-reflective ceramic markers shall be 100 mm nominal diameter and approximately 16 mm height.
The exposed surface shall be smooth, free of marks and of the colour specified on the Drawings.
Spray Equipment
Mechanical spraying equipment shall be capable of applying paint uniformly to the road surface at the
application rate specified. It shall be equipped with a device for the application of glass beads located
immediately behind the paint jets.
Paint Tank
The paint tank shall be equipped with a suitable device such as a dip stick for the determination of its
contents.
5.5 PAVEMENT MARKING DETAILS
- Pavement marking shall comply with the details shown on the Drawings and AS 2890.6 - 2009 - Off-
street parking for people with disabilities, or if not otherwise indicated, with the relevant section of
AS 1742.
- Pavement lettering and numerals shall be as detailed in Figure 7.5 of AS 1742.1 - 2006 unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
- Pavement arrows shall comply with details illustrated in Figure 7.6 of AS 1742.1 - 2006 unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
5.6 APPLICATION
- Unless otherwise permitted, all paint shall be applied by mechanical sprayer.
- The road surface shall be clean and dry at the time of painting.
- Paint shall be applied at a wet thickness in the range 0.35 to 0.40 mm
5.7 SIGNAGE
- All signs are to be Class 2 reflectorised unless scheduled otherwise.
- Posts shall be as per the Drawings with the tops closed by means of an approved galvanised cap or
by flattening. Posts shall be of sufficient length so that each signboard can be positioned at the
required height above the pavement. Signboards shall be fixed to posts in an approved manner.
- The clearance to the bottom of the sign in pedestrian areas shall be 2100 mm.
5.8 ACCEPTANCE
All sampling and testing of pavement marking paint and glass beads shall be carried out in
accordance with procedures specified in AS 4049 and AS 2009 - 2006.
5.9 MAINTENANCE
- Defects developing during the Defects Liability Period shall be made good immediately and all
faded, cracked, chipped and discoloured linework shall be re-marked as directed at no additional
cost to the Principal.
- All line work shall be in good condition at the end of the Defects Liability Period.
- Where required existing pavement marking is to be completely obliterated by a method approved by

the Architect.
6 LIMESTONE RETAINING WALLS
6.1 RETAINING WALL – SCOPE OF WORKS

The work specified in this section includes but is not necessary limited to the following:-
- Blocks for Retaining Wall Construction
- Wall Construction
- Mortar for joints
- Backfilling of walls
All as shown on the drawings and specified, complete and ready for use and/or subsequent
construction.
6.2 RETAINING WALL – APPLICATION DOCUMENTS
The following applicable documents shall apply to this section.
- AS3972 Portland and Blended Cements
- AS1379 Ready Mixed Concrete
- AS1289 Methods of testing soils for Engineering purposes
and others where quoted in the text of the specific clauses.
6.3 RETAINING WALL – MATERIALS
Blocks for Retaining Wall Construction
- Blocks for wall construction shall vary according to the type of finish required and are specified on
the drawings.
- Where mass limestone walls with coursed facing stones are specified on the drawings, the blocks
shall generally consist of cut blocks, nominally 350mm wide x 350mm high x 1000mm long.
Samples & Testing
- A sample of all face blocks shall be provided for inspection and approval by the Architect prior to
blocks being delivered to site. Variations to colour of face blocks are to the discretion of the
Architect only. The material shall be dense and even in consistency and colour, without solution
cavities or other imperfections.
- Where reconstituted blocks are used, the blocks shall be in the "natural earth" colour.
- Testing certification of proposed blocks to be used for face and backing blocks shall be provided at
the rate of 1 per 200 blocks for natural limestone, and 1 per 500 for reconstituted blocks.
- The blocks shall be from an approved supplier and have a minimum density of 1500kg/m3 for
Natural Limestone blocks and 1800kg/m3 for Reconstituted blocks. Compression Strength of blocks
shall be not less than 3.0Mpa for Natural Limestone blocks and 5.0Mpa for Reconstituted blocks.
- Extensive cutting of blocks shall not be undertaken on site without prior approval from the Architect.
Cement
- All cement used shall be Portland cement Type GP in accordance with AS 1379 and obtained from
an approved manufacturer.
- Cement shall be delivered to the site fresh and in sealed bags and there stored in a water-proof
shed until such time as it is to used. Any bags showing signs of deterioration or setting shall be
rejected.
Aggregate
- Fine aggregate shall be well graded, clean, sharp and free from clay and organic impurities in
accordance with AS 1141 and AS 2758 Pt.1
- Course aggregate shall be crushed granite or diorite, clean and free from all impurities and dust in
accordance with AS 1141 and AS 2758 Pt.1
- The maximum particle size shall not exceed 20mm.
Sand
- Sand for mortar shall be crushed stone or natural sand free from all deleterious substances and
have uniform grading.
- Sand for bedding or backfilling shall be clean and free from roots, clay or any deleterious matter in
accordance with the requirements of 0222 Earthworks.
Water
- Water for use in concrete and mortar shall be of potable quality free from any impurities harmful to
concrete, mortar or steel.
6.4 RETAINING WALL – WALL CONSTRUCTION
Foundations
- Walls constructed of mass blocks shall be founded on a compacted base of clean sand fill in
accordance with the requirements of 0222 Earthworks.
- Where foundation is bedded in rock the base of the wall shall be prepare by placing mortar and
suitably sized stone to form a level pad. Footings shall be stepped on sloping ground.
Blocks for Walls
- Blocks for walls shall be in accordance with Clause 8.3 (a).
- The size of surface blocks is to retain consistent throughout the job and no rubble to be used.
- All blocks forming the face of all retaining walls are to be laid integrally with the rising of the wall. No
blocks are to be applied as a facing to the retaining wall.
Backfilling Walls
- Backfilling behind the retaining walls is to proceed in accordance with the requirements of section
"Clearing and Earthworks" of this specification.
- In addition to these requirements, the height of any retaining wall must not be raised more 1.0m
above the level of backfill which is to be introduced and compacted in layers progressively as the
wall is constructed, as specified elsewhere.
Pipe Penetration and Ducts
- The Contractor shall install all pipe ducts as nominated on the drawings.
- Pipe materials unless noted otherwise shall generally be PVC pipe ducts, solvent jointed.
Mortar Joints
- Mortar joints (perpendicular and horizontal) shall consist of a mixture of clean sand, lime and
Portland cement as specified below:-
. 1 part cement
. 1 part lime
. 6 parts sand
. All joints shall be fully mortared throughout the entire wall construction.
- Finished joints shall be finished flush with the surface of the wall of where bevelled blocks are
utilised shall be flush with the recessed bevelled edge and shall match in colour the block material
used.
- Other finishes may be selected by the Principal at his discretion and wall finishes shall be approved
by the Architect prior to the commencement of works.
Vertical expansion joints
- Vertical joints shall be provided generally at intervals as indicated on the Drawings, or as nominated
on wall elevations. Otherwise, 20mm wide vertical joints shall be provided at 20 meter centres.
Joints shall be sealed with a flexible, UV resistant mastic on a backing rod. Colour strictly to the
Architect’s selection.
Mortar Mixing
- Where the mortar is used in large quantities, a mixer of approved type shall be used. In hand
mixing, materials shall be thoroughly mixed on a boarded platform. Mortars shall be mixed only for
immediate use and any mortar that has once set or in any way deteriorated shall not be used.
Drainage
- 20 dia PVC-U weep holes shall be provided through the cross section of the wall at centres
nominated on the Drawings, where the wall is founded in rock, capstone or less than 600mm of
sand. A continuous, blue metal aggregate drain wrapped in a non-woven geotextile at the back of
wall connecting to upstream end of weep holes shall be provided at the height nominated on the
Drawings for the full length of the wall.
6.5 RETAINING WALL – TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION DRAINAGE

- The Contractor shall provide and maintain slopes, crowns and ditches on all excavated and filled
areas to ensure satisfactory drainage at all times during the construction period.
- During wet weather conditions the Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide cut off drains along
the high side of the embankments and shall maintain sufficient drainage of both fill and cut to
prevent ponding and scour. All softened material shall be removed before proceeding with further
filling of excavation.
6.6 RETAINING WALL – MAINTAINING ACCESS AND SECURITY
Where indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall note that several residences and existing
facilities are located adjacent to and within the development. Services and access are to be
maintained to these properties, where such access traverses work site.
6.7 RETAINING WALL – CLEANING UP
- On completion, the whole work shall be cleared and all debris etc shall be removed to render the
entire job neat and tidy.
- Remove all rubbish and debris from construction activities and leave the site tidy.
6.8 RETAINING WALL – CERTIFICATION OF RETAINING WALLS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the Certification of the Limestone Retaining Walls being as
Constructed in accordance with the contract documents and shall be responsible for the appointment
of a practicing Structural Engineer to provide letter of certification for the As Constructed limestone
retaining walls at practical completion.
SECTION 02220 Earthwork
02220 EARTHWORK
1 CLEARING & EARTHWORKS
1.1 SCOPE
The work of this section comprises but is not limited to excavation, disposal of surplus excavated
material both on and off the site, supply of compaction and filling material and the preparation
necessary to bring the areas to correct shape and level prior to building construction and as follows:
- Site management
- Site preparation
- Supply and installation of waterproofing membrane
- Termite Treatment
- Temporary site fence
1.2 STANDARDS
Standards
The work shall comply with relevant current Australian Standards including but not limited to the
following:
- AS 1289 Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes.
- AS 2159 2009 Piling - Design and installation. Plus 1 Amdt, 2010.
- AS 3660 Termite management.
. 3660.1 2000 New building work.
. There are 2 other parts, 2000.
- AS 3798 2007 Guidelines on earthworks for commercial and residential developments.
- AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays.
. 4200.1 1994 Materials. Plus 1 Amdt, 1994.
. 4200.2 1994 Installation requirements.
- AS 4687 2007 Temporary fencing and hoardings.
Comply with particular specifications in building regulations and/or local council publications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
- Common Material - is defined as any material which can be excavated by any excavation equipment
up to and including a 20 tonne excavator at a rate of 50 bank m3/ hour.
- Excavation in Soft Rock - Soft rock shall be defined as rock that cannot be excavated with a 20
tonne excavator with a G.P bucket at a rate of 50m3 per hour and requires the use of a rock bucket
and/or single tine ripper.
- Excavation in Hard Rock - Hard rock shall be defined as rock that cannot be excavated with a 20
tonne excavator using single tine ripper and rock bucket and therefore requires use of an excavator
with a hydraulic rock breaker.
- Sub-grade: the natural ground below the excavations.
- Filling: a general term for material spread and compacted over the sub-grade to make up finished
levels or levels to the under-side of the base.
- Sub-base: selected filling spread and compacted over the sub-grade to make up levels to the
underside of the base.
- Base: a selected filling layer spread and compacted to form an acceptable working surface directly
under the building.
- Water – Any flow or seepage, either underground or overland from any source including but not
limited to rainfall, precipitation, ground water, perched ground water.
- Comply with particular specifications in Building regulations and/or Local Council publications.
1.4 CERTIFICATION
The builder is to engage and pay for a suitably qualified NATA approved laboratory approved by the
Architect to instruct on and certify the following:
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 02220 EARTHWORK
- Compaction of sand pad to building envelope and pavements.

- Compaction under all footings and covered areas.
- Confirm fill and natural ground have been compacted to specification requirements.
1.5 PROVISIONAL DEPTHS
Actual depths on the site shall be to the approval of the Architect.
If there have been variations to the Contract levels or dimensions of excavations, do not commence
back filling or place permanent work in excavations until the Architect has made measurements and
approved them.
1.6 GROUND CONDITION DISCREPANCIES
- 'Discrepancy' for the purposes of this Section means a difference between Contract information
about the site and conditions encountered on the site, including but not limited to discrepancies
concerning:
. The nature or quantity of the material to be excavated or placed,
. Existing site levels,
. Services or other obstructions beneath the site surface.
- If the Contractor considers that he has discovered a discrepancy, they shall notify the Architect
immediately, and obtain a determination before proceeding with the Works, otherwise no claim for
extra cost shall exist.
- Differing ground conditions during ground works can be encountered, in formation type and / or
density. Should ground conditions encountered differ to Contract Information and not respond to
remediation techniques to achieve the required performance criteria, the Contractor shall in the first
instance consult their engaged Geotechnical Engineer. All remediation shall be to the approval of
the Superintendent at all times prior to beginning works.
- The site investigation information provided in the geotechnical report, shown on the drawings or
both, is information on the nature of the sub-surface conditions at each tested location of the site at
the time of inspection. It is not a complete description of conditions existing below the surface. The
accuracy of the information is not guaranteed and will not be a basis for cost variation.
- The Contractor shall submit, independent of the tendered amount, rates per cubic metre for
excavation in common material and in subgrade materials. The rates shall be used for payment for
work which may be required as an extension of the contract and ordered by the Architect in writing.
- The material classification shall be agreed on site at the time of excavation by the Contractor and
the Architect and payment shall be made on quantities determined by field measurement.
- Should the Architect and the Contractor fail to agree on the assessment of quantities the Architect
will calculate the quantity and payment will be made accordingly.
- All cubic metre rates provided shall include excavation, removal from site & disposal of materials.
- Any material that becomes saturated and softens during excavations or general ground works and
changes consistency, workability, plasticity, ‘compactibility’ from increased moisture content or
exposed to ponding will not be treated as a ground condition discrepancy. Removal and
replacement of this material will not attract a variation.
1.7 NATURE OF EXCAVATION

A geotechnical report has been carried out on the site by ATC Williams, report number
120118.01LR01. A copy is available for review at the architect's office. The following is an excerpt
from the report:
Summary of Site Conditions
The subsurface conditions at the site comprised:
Topsoil: A thin layer of loose, fine and medium, brown sand with trace silt and grass roots was
encountered in all hand auger boreholes.
Fill: A layer of medium dense to dense yellow brown sand material was encountered in all
hand auger locations, below the topsoil to depths of approximately 0.8m below ground
level (BGL).
Sand: Dense, fine and medium, pale grey sand was encountered in all hand auger locations
to depths of up to and beyond 1.9m below the ground level.
The CPT probes (CPT1-CPT4) located in the proposed building area indicate the
presence of dense sand in all CPT locations. A localised area of medium dense sand
was encountered in CPT01 and CPT03 at depths of 3.5 to 4.5m below ground level.
Groundwater: Groundwater was encountered in all CPT locations (but CPT02) at depths of
approximately 3.4m (CPT01) to 3.7m (CPT04) below ground level.
1.8 ROCK
The geotechnical report has not identified rock on site. Should rock exists on site and unless specified
to the contrary the Contractor shall include in his Tender Price an amount for excavation in rock.
It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the amount tendered allows for excavation in
rock of varying hardness and depth for the entire works. The contractor shall include all but excavation
in Hard Rock in their tender price.
Where rock is encountered below road pavements or building foundations, such material shall be
removed to a depth of 100mm minimum below the design subgrade level and the area filled as
specified.
In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Superintendent independent of the tendered amount,
rates per cubic metre for excavation in common material and in rock based on the definitions in
section 1.3:
- Common Material.
- Excavation in Soft Rock.
- Excavation in Hard Rock.
The rates shall be used for payment for work which may be required as an extension of the contract
and ordered by the Architect in writing.
The material classification shall be agreed on site at the time of excavation by the Contractor and the
Architect and payment shall be made on quantities determined by field measurement.
Should the Architect and the Contractor fail to agree on the assessment of quantity of rock the
Architect will calculate the quantity and payment will be made accordingly.
1.9 EXPLOSIVES
Do not use explosives in groundworks.
1.10 TOLERANCES
Finish groundworks to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces conforming to the tolerances per
section 2.4 of 0221 Civil Works:
1.11 SITE MANAGEMENT
General
- Seek approval from the Local Authorities for all works and site access beyond of the site boundaries
prior to commencing work on site. The builder shall ensure that existing roads are protected from
damage. If damage does occur, the builder shall reinstate to a like new state without cost to the
client.
Dust Control
- The builder is advised that this site has a classification. The builder is responsible for maintaining
dust control on the site at all times during the works. Dust control measures must comply with EPA
and City of Gosnells requirements.
- If the Contractor complies with the previously mentioned dust control measures and dust problems
persist then further measures will be adopted (wind fencing, hydromulch, etc). The Contractor shall
at all times however be responsible for implementing the necessary measures to prevent sand or
dust drift and shall be liable for damages as a result of sand or dust drift.
- To avoid dust nuisance to adjacent owners the Architect may direct that no earthworks, including
stripping or replacing of topsoil, shall be carried out when a wind is blowing towards surrounding
properties and in the opinion of the Architect will cause sand drift or dust to reach those properties.
Inspection
Give the Architect at least two working days’ notice that the following are ready for inspection:
- rock encountered in the excavations
- excavation completed to Contract levels
- filling completed to Contract levels

- completed sub-base
- completed placement of waterproof membrane
1.12 TESTING
- Obtain the tests specified from an independent NATA approved testing authority. Do not proceed
with work subject to testing until tests are satisfactorily completed and the approval of the
Superintendent has been given.
- Perth Sand Penetrometers (PSP) are not able to accurately measure the compaction in soils which
contain limestone, buried cobbles or boulders. Should the contractor elect to use a PSP for
construction testing in sandy areas the following guidelines shall be followed:
. The PSP shall be calibrated for the sand type.
. Topsoil shall not be tested with a PSP.
. Where limestone, cobbles, boulders or the like exist at the test site, if these particles are greater
than 5mm diameter, a PSP shall not be used for compaction testing
. Where the test site has not been disturbed by earthworks and the insitu material is lightly
cemented in the form of a weak limestone, a PSP shall not be used for compaction testing.
- Compaction (density): Test for compliance with the specified criteria.
- Field dry density: To AS 1289 Method 5.8.1.
- Density index: To AS 1289 Method 5.6.1.
- Standard maximum dry density: To AS 1289 Method 5.1.1 or 5.2.1.
- Filling: Sample to AS 1141.3 and AS 1726 and test to AS 1141 or AS 1289, as appropriate, for
compliance with the criteria specified.
- California bearing ratio: Sample and test to AS 1289 Method 6.1.1, 6.1.2, or 6.1.3, as appropriate.
1.13 SITE CLEARING
Before commencement of clearing refer to all drawings and specification for areas beyond the
buildings, roads and carpark to be cleared for landscaping works.
General Clearing
Unless otherwise shown on drawings remove all vegetation from the Site surface, including rubbish,
organic debris, scrub, timber, stumps, boulders, rubble, and the like. Dispose off site at an approved
disposal facility. Remove all vegetation down to the bottom of the root zone including tree stumps and
other debris and all organic topsoil and surficial fill.
The removal of topsoil as specified is to occur, but not limited to all areas under paving and any areas
to be filled. This is required to allow free drainage through soakage to the water table. Only the trees
specifically designated on the drawings are to be removed. No other trees are to be removed with our
written instruction from the Architect. All trees in the road reserve shall be maintained & protected at all
times.
Grubbing
Grub out stumps and roots over 75 mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500 mm below subgrade
under buildings or paving, or 300 mm below finished surface in unpaved areas.
1.14 DE-WATERING
- Keep groundworks free of water. Place construction, including masonry, concrete, services and the
like, on ground from which water has been removed. Prevent water flow over freshly laid work.
- When excavations or trenching is below water table, keep water from excavations by pumping or
other suitable means and provide adequate means for disposing of water to Local Authority & EPA
requirements.
- Maintain all natural soil in a dry condition. Shape and batter ground to fall away from buildings.
Dispose of surface water where clay or clayey soils are exposed during the works. The builder shall
take all necessary measured to protected the site and prevent softening of the soils due to water
ponding including, but not limited to the provision of blue metal drains, sumps, pumping and grading
away of the surface to ensure falls away from area of works.
1.15 EXISTING SERVICES
- All works shall be carried out in accordance with relevant service provider’s standard procedures
when working near main services in the road reserve.
- 1100 One-Call information confirms critical services exist in Furley Road verge adjacent to the site
including Telstra fibre optic telecommunications and NBN.
- The builder must hand locate all existing services using a qualified service locator to confirm their
actual alignment and depth using non-destructive methods, strictly in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant proprietary service provider. The builder must satisfy themselves of the
actual locations of all services prior to works commencing.
- The builder shall maintain all proprietary service provider’s requirements including but not limited to
minimum cover / clearances to service, particular compaction methodologies over and around
services and any other requirements the provider may have.
- Do not excavate by machine within 1m of existing underground services without prior approval
1.16 SPOIL
- Remove from the site, including debris, tree stumps and the like resulting from site clearance.
Dispose off-site at an approved disposal facility.
- The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safe and harmless disposal of surplus excavated
material. Do not burn without permission.
1.17 SUPPORTING EXCAVATIONS
- Support sides of excavations as necessary to ensure safe working. The builder is responsible for all
temporary retaining structures required for construction of the footings and other in ground
structures.
- If, in the opinion of the architect any support provided is insufficient, he may order the provision of
additional support fully at the cost of the contractor. No such instruction shall relieve the Contractor
of sole responsibility for the sufficient support of the excavations.
- Remove temporary supports progressively as backfilling proceeds, unless otherwise instructed.
1.18 SITE RESTORATION
Unless otherwise specified, restore the developed and undeveloped ground surfaces of the site to the
condition existing at the commencement of the work under the Contract.
1.19 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
Unless otherwise instructed by the Superintendent, all subgrades shall be proof compacted by rolling
the surface with modern, efficient, heavy duty vibration compaction plant that shall provide uniform
compaction across the subgrade area. The Contractor is responsible for the correct selection of plant
based on the expected ground conditions, however generally, the type of plant required is:
Gravels & sands without surface boulders - Smooth Drum Roller
Clay & Clayey materials - Pad Foot Roller
Subgrade compaction shall proceed in an orderly fashion at constant speed to ensure the whole site
has been given a single pass, without the addition of surface watering. Under no circumstances shall
the initial pass speed be less than that recommended by the plant manufacturer for efficient
compaction. Should any subgrade be shown to be weak or deform under compactive effort, cease
compaction to these zones and these area shall be marked for further inspection. Subsequent passes
shall be carried out except where any non-uniform conditions are encountered.
Non-uniform ground conditions revealed by proof compaction as not improving with compaction shall
be the subject of further investigation. The Contractor shall provide all labour and machinery required
to conduct further investigation. Once it has been confirmed on site that subgrade areas are not
responding to compactive effort or deforming, the contractor shall initially advise the Superintendent in
writing that a discrepancy has been encountered, in accordance with section 1.6 Ground Condition
Discrepancies. Should no notification be provided prior to proceeding with any remediation works, no
claim for extra cost shall exist.
Additional passes may be necessary over non-uniform conditions or where deformations occur.
In accordance with section 1.6 Ground Condition Discrepancies, following notification to the
Superintendent, the Contractor shall in the first instance consult their engaged Geotechnical Engineer
on advise on how to proceed. All remediation shall be to the approval of the Superintendent at all
times prior to beginning remediation works.
Should the material be inconsistent and of variable quality, the Contractor shall consult with their
engaged Geotechnical Engineer to establish an appropriate method of compaction.
Following initial passes and provision of a consistent subgrade across the site, the moisture content of
the subgrade shall be controlled to be within 90%-110% of the optimum moisture content for that
material. The material shall be lightly water or dried as required to maintain the moisture content.
The completed subgrade profile shall be in a homogeneous, uniformly bonded condition with no
evidence of layering or disintegration.
1.20 RECORD MEASUREMENT
Should a ground conditions discrepancy be encountered, backfilling or construction over of permanent
structures or fixtures over shall not commence until the following have been confirmed, agreed or
measurement methodology accepted by the Superintendent:
- Depths of excavation relative to the design or an appropriate Datum.
- Actual plan dimensions of excavations.
- Quantities of excavations.
The actual excavations completed shall be site measured and surveyed by a licensed surveyor. The
3d data shall be supplied to the superintendent in native format for review and acceptance.
Survey data shall be provided for each earthworks sequence.
Where rock is measured for payment purposes, do not remove the rock from site until it has been
agreed the material is classified as rock.
1.21 FILLING MATERIAL
Bring filling on to the site unless it can be provided from spoil recovered from site. Filling shall be
sound material, free of organic or perishable material, or material that will form stable fill, but subject
always to Architect’s approval. Filling shall be of the following types:
- Approved Excavated Material: The best of the clean inorganic excavated material, approved by the
Architect.
- Approved Imported General Fill Material: Clean, well graded, compactable granular sand fill, with
less than 5% fines approved by the geotechnical engineer. Fill must be evenly graded to allow for
free draining of stormwater.
Clay soils shall not be used in fill.
1.22 EXCAVATIONS
- Excavate as required or as shown on the Drawings, including but not necessarily limited to the
following:
. Site Surface : Excavate over the site to give correct levels and profiles as the basis for
construction, paving, filling, landscaping and the like. Make allowance for compaction or
settlement.
. Footings : Excavate for footings, pits, wells, shafts and the like, to the required sizes and depths.
. Where footings overlay rock, ensure this rock material is removed to a depth of 600mm below the
underside of footing and replaced with fill material compacted to the standard specified below.
. Services : Excavate for underground services as specified in service trenches.
- No excavation is to be carried out closer to an existing footing than a line extending down from its
bottom edge at 45 degrees.
- Suspend ground works during inclement weather, which would result in unsatisfactory work.
1.23 GRADING
Grade the site as shown and to give falls away from the building, minimum 1:100 unless otherwise
shown.
1.24 BEARING SURFACES
- Provide even plane bearing surfaces for loadbearing elements including footings and the like. Step
as necessary, or as shown on the Drawings, to accommodate level changes. Make the steps to the
appropriate courses if supporting masonry (e.g. brickwork, blockwork).
- If the bearing surface deteriorates after approval because of water or other cause, excavate further
to a sound surface before placing the loadbearing element, without extra charge if the deterioration
has resulted from the Contractor's actions or failure to act.
1.25 EXCESS EXCAVATION

The Contractor shall not be entitled to contract variation or extension of time for excavation in excess
of that required by the Contract, including excavation below required depths, or additional excavation
which the Contractor may elect to undertake to permit the use of certain constructional plant, and any
consequent additional backfilling, compacting or testing.
1.26 REINSTATEMENT
Where excavation exceeds the required depths, whether as a result of instructions given by the
Superintendent, excess excavation by the Contractor as defined in section 1.24 EXCESS
EXCAVATION, or the discovery of voids, fissures and the like, reinstate to the correct depth and
required bearing value by filling with approved granular material compacted to the compaction density
specified for the area per section 2.3 Material Testing Schedule of specification 0221 Civil Works.
Prior to the back-filling of a void created from the excavation of any unsuitable material, the Contractor
shall give the Superintendent at least 48 hours’ notice of if a digital ground survey is necessary, for the
purpose of accurate measurement of material removal.
1.27 PREPARATION FOR FILLING
Generally
Suitably prepare the ground surface to receive filling.
Under Slabs or Paving
Water and roll the subgrade to achieve the densities stated for these locations in dry density ratio.
1.28 PLACING FILLING
- Place and compact filling to the dimensions, levels, grades and cross section as required by or as
shown on the Drawings, and so that the surface is constantly self draining.
- Place filling in layers not exceeding the thickness stated below when measured loose, and compact
each layer as specified in COMPACTION. The thickness of layers shall be chosen to suit the
compaction equipment and method.
- Maximum layer thickness: granular material 300mm.
- Do not place filling against concrete or masonry until the concrete has been in place for fourteen
days, unless otherwise approved.
- Any obviously loose, wet or otherwise unsuitable material should be removed but not replaced from
the base of the excavation.
- Trim the sub grade surface evenly to the levels shown on the Drawings.
- Make allowance for settlement and compaction.
- Allow for falls in pavements on grade to street and access road crossovers.
- Prepare for underground services.
- Carry out additional excavation where necessary to permit full use of suitable mechanical equipment
(e.g. rippers) and back fill with appropriate material as specified in this Section.
- Where excavation exceeds the required depth, fill back to correct depth with material as follows:
. In service trenches: 1:2:4 concrete or approved compacted pipe bedding material.
1.29 COMPACTION
- Compact each layer of filling to the specified density index.
- Compact to achieve a dry density ratio per section 2.3 of 0221 Civil Works.
. not less than 1.5m below the proposed strip and pad footing levels;
. not less than 0.5m below the proposed floor slab, pavement areas and parts of the site to be
filled.
- Protect the works during compaction from damage by compaction operations. Compact by hand if
necessary to prevent damage or disturbance to services, pipe joints, and the like.
- Prior to and during placing, bring the materials to within 2% of the optimum moisture content
determined to AS 1289 5.1.1 for the filling type. The surface may be lightly sprinkled with water
during compaction if necessary to replace moisture loss.
- Compaction shall be obtained by passing a plate compactor as many times as necessary and
having a zone of influence of sufficient depth to achieve the required results.
- Where thin layers of sand fill are to be compacted (~<150mm), the contractor shall consider
compaction with at least ten passes with heavy smooth-drum roller machinery, rolled in static mode
only.
- The degree and uniformity of compaction shall be tested by use of a standard penetrometer
calibrated for Perth sand.
- For Perth sand and sand of a similar nature the contractor shall best the degree of compaction
using a Perth Sand (16mm diameter tip, 9kg falling weight) penetrometer in accordance with
AS1289 6.3.3.
- For sand of a different nature to Perth sand the Contractor must carry out penetrometer tests in
accordance with AS.1289.6.3.3 using a penetrometer calibrated by a soil testing laboratory. This
calibration will be the accepted criterion for ensuring that the specified density is achieved. The cost
of calibrating the penetrometer shall be borne by the Contractor.
- The Contractor shall arrange for all tests including penetrometer tests to be carried out by an
approved testing laboratory registered with NATA. The Contractor shall allow for all costs.
- The tests shall be carried out in the zone between 0mm and 1500mm below foundation level and
below the base level of any excavations. The frequency of testing shall be
. under pad footings: 1 test per pad
. under strip footings: 1 test per 3m length
. under slabs and paved areas: On 5 x 5 grid
- An acceptable degree of compaction as measured by the penetrometer shall be:
Testing Depth Below Ground Surface at
Required Blows per 300 mm Penetration
Time of Testing (m)
0 – 0.45 8
0.45 – 0.90 10
0.90 – 1.50 14
- Under pad footings, strip footing, slabs and paved areas.

- Compaction result certificates shall be sent to the consulting structural engineer prior to seeking
permission to pour footings and slabs.
- Do not compact backfilling to retaining walls until they are a minimum of 14 days old and material on
the low side of the wall has been compacted.
- Keep heavy vibrating equipment as far back from the wall as the height of the backfill on which it is
operating. Use only small compaction immediately behind retaining walls.
- *Under buildings includes 1000 beyond 'lines of influence'.
1.30 PROTECTION TO MEMBRANES
Protect waterproofing, vapour barrier, or tanking membranes from damage by subsequent operations
including backfilling and the like.
1.31 SERVICE TRENCHES
- Excavate to the lines, levels and grades as required for underground services specified in the
relevant services sections, including drainage, hydraulic, electrical and the like. Unless otherwise
specified make the trenches straight between manholes, inspection points, junctions and the like,
with vertical sides and uniform grades.
- Excavate trenches in sections of suitable length, lay and bed the relevant service length, and backfill
the trench section, with the minimum of delay, and if possible on the same working day, unless
otherwise specified or permitted.
- Subject to regulatory authority requirements, keep trench widths to the minimum consistent with the
laying and bedding of the relevant service, and the construction of manholes and pits.
- Trench depth to be as required by the relevant service and its bedding method.
- Cut back roots encountered in trenches to not less than 600mm clear of the relevant service.
Remove such other obstructions including roots, stumps, boulders and the like which may, in the
opinion of the Principal, interfere with the proper functioning of the service.
- Laying and bedding services to be in accordance with the relevant services section.
1.32 BACKFILLING SERVICE TRENCHES

- Backfill service trenches as soon as possible after approval of laid and bedded service, generally as
specified in placing filling. Compact as specified in compaction to the compaction density which
applies to the location of the service trench.
- Pipe trenches to be compacted so that the pipe is buttressed by the walls of the trench.
- Unless otherwise specified, backfill with general filling, with no stones retained on a 25mm sieve
occurring within 150 mm of the service. For materials other than the above as cover or backfilling to
particular services, refer to the relevant services Sections.
- Where service excavations occur in topsoil areas, complete the backfilling with topsoil.
- All backfilling to Service Trenches shall be placed in layers and compacted as under:
. Pipe Bedding: 150mm layers, 95% MMDD
. Pipe Surround: 150mm layers, hand tamped with 9kg minimum weight tampers
. Trench Under Pavements: 250mm layers, 98% MMDD compaction as previously specified
. Trench Under Buildings: 250mm layers, 98% MMDD compaction as previously specified
. Other Trenches: 500mm layers, equal or better than adjacent in situ material
- Backfill Material: Backfill with general filling, with no stones larger than 25mm occurring within
150mm of the service.
- Topsoil: Where service excavations occur in topsoil areas, complete with the backfilling with topsoil.
1.33 STABILISATION
Prior to stabilisation, all areas to be treated shall be graded so as to present a smooth even surface on
completion of the stabilisation application.
Vehicle and pedestrian movement along the treated areas shall be avoided to reduce failures as a
result of erosion.
1.34 TERMITE TREATMENT
Provide certification in accordance with AS 3660, stating method of application and certificate of
completion.
Refer to termite work section of the specification.
1.35 WATER PROOF MEMBRANE
- Provide approved flexible polymeric film 0.2mm thick to the Architect’s specification. Deliver
underlays to the site in suitable protective packaging, bearing the name of the manufacturer.
Handle and store the underlay so that it is not punctured, torn or otherwise damaged and in
accordance with the manufacturers requirements.
- Lay on approved sand blinding. Where necessary, cut sheets to maximum practical width, to suit the
layout, and arrange laps to face away from the direction of the pour.
- Provide laps as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 200mm. Seal laps with
pressure adhesives or tapes as recommended by the manufacturer of the underlay and ensure that
the adhered surface of the underlay is dry and clean.
- Take the underlay up walls to level of top of concrete slab or as otherwise documented and
instructed. Seal service pipes and similar elements when they penetrate the underlay. Allow ample
slack to avoid pulling at tape junctions.
- Cover vertical or inclined surfaces in an unbroken sheet where possible. Otherwise arrange laps
vertically to avoid pulling at joints. Fix at the top with tape or other recommended fixing.
- Inspect membrane after laying and before concrete is poured. Patch and seal punctures.
1.36 TEMPORARY FENCING
- Supply and install temporary 1800mm high continuous fence structure in the location nominated on
the site plan and as required to prevent public access to areas of work such as service installations
throughout the campus.
- At practical completion the contractor shall remove the temporary fencing and leave the site in a
clean, compacted and level state free of rubble and building material.
1.37 ADJOINING PROPERTIES

- Carry out a comprehensive dilapidation survey of existing buildings, services and structures within
the vicinity of the works before proceeding with any excavations or filling or compaction like
operations for the project.
- The survey shall include the recording by approved persons and approved means of the existing
conditions of those properties in detail prior to the commencement of the works.
1.38 PROTECTION OF SITE & ADJACENT PROPERTIES
- Carry out shoring or other forms of support, shielding, fencing or whatever protective and
precautionary measures are necessary to ensure the safety, freedom from interference, damage or
injury to all adjacent public or private lands, properties, ways, services, personal property and all
persons in the vicinity of the site.
- Unless shown on the drawings supporting of adjoining properties is not to be carried out without
consultation with the Architect.
- It is recommended that non-vibratory compaction techniques be adopted within a distance of
approximately 10m of any existing structures.
- Take all reasonable steps to minimise nuisance, especially from dust, debris, noise and obstructions
arising from the works, and comply with all reasonable requests for the cessation of such nuisance.
SECTION 02240 Stormwater Drainage
02240 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
1 GENERAL
1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
General
Requirement: Provide stormwater drainage, as documented.
2 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
2.1 EXCAVATION
- The Contractor shall excavate pipe trenches to the lines, levels, grades and widths shown or
specified on the Drawings, and in the Specification. Where necessary the trench shall be widened
and/or deepened to facilitate the making of joints, casing pipes with concrete and/or to
accommodate timbering while still maintaining the clearances specified between the timbering and
the pipes.
- The Contractor shall establish prior to commencing excavation whether or not other services exist in
the path of or parallel to excavation. In the event of existence of any such services the contractor
shall take every care not to damage such services. Any damage caused shall be made good at the
entire cost of the Contractor.
- Open cut excavation of trenches will be an acceptable alternative to timbered trenches, provided the
following requirements are complied with:
. The widths of open cutting shall be the absolute minimum practical and necessary for
construction procedures;
. Backfilling over the whole width shall be carried out as provided in this specification;
. The trench width for the first one metre depth (or pipe diameter plus 300mm whichever greater)
shall be confined to the specified widths; and,
. Where indicated on the drawing or ordered by the Architect, the trench shall be timbered to
protect adjacent works or trees. Damage to adjacent works, whether or not the Architect has
given directions in this regard, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
- The maximum width of trench shall be the diameter plus 225 mm clearance on each side, subject to
a minimum width of 850 mm.
- The Contractor shall maintain the works area in a suitable dry condition in order that each and every
part of the works may be constructed to a high standard and for the protection of the works against
damage due to water.
- During the construction of the Works the Contractor shall, at the cost of the Contractor, take every
precaution necessary and provide all plant, materials and labour required for the effective diversion
and removal of surface and sub surface water from the works.
- Trenches in which the bottom is likely to be adversely affected by rain or seepage shall have the last
150 mm of excavation removed as a separate operation immediately prior to the laying of the pipes
or placing of bedding material. Such measures shall be carried out at the Contractor’s expense.
- If pipe trench is excavated deeper than required, the extra depths shall be filled with 1:3:6 cement
concrete or other approved material compacted to a density exceeding the natural surrounding
ground.
- Spoil from excavation shall be kept at least one metre from the edge of excavation.
- The Contractor shall take whatever measures necessary to prevent the spoils of excavation from
being carried away by water or wind from the site.
- Excavation in rock or hard soil will not be carried out be carried out by blasting.
2.2 PIPE BEDDING
- Unless special bedding or pipe supports are shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere, the
bedding material shall be clean sand.
- One type of bedding support only shall be used along each length of line.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 02240 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
- Clean sand from the excavation may be used. The bed shall be carefully shaped to receive the
pipes with grooves to receive the pipe sockets so that the barrel shall be uniform bearing along its
length.
2.3 BACKFILLING
- Initial backfilling shall be undertaken using selected fill, being defined as sand, gravel or other
approved granular materials free of all stones retained on a 25 mm sieve.
- Initial backfilling at the sides and for 150 mm above the top of the pipe shall be hand tool placed and
compacted ensuring that no joints or pipes are disturbed or damage. Refer to Standard Drawings.
- The joints shall be left fully exposed for inspection during testing.
- No part of the works or any length of pipes or fittings shall be covered up until they have been
inspected and approved by the Architect. The Contractor may still be required to uncover and repair
at the expense of the Contractor, during the period of maintenance, any unsatisfactory work.
- The material excavated from the trench may, subject to the approval of the Architect, be used for
ordinary backfill, provided it is free of rocks and vegetable matter.
- The backfilled material shall be thoroughly rammed and consolidated in 150 mm layers with hand
rammers weighing not less than 9 kg to a height of 600 mm above the top of the pipe, and thereafter
in 250 mm layers with power rammers or in 150 mm layers with hand rammers. The compaction of
the backfill shall be equal or better than the adjacent in situ material, except under roads and where
indicated on the Drawings the compaction shall be equal to or 98% of the modified maximum dry
density.
- Any deficiency found in backfill shall be made good by adding and compacting approved backfill
material at the entire cost of the Contractor.
- After the trench has been filled in, the Contractor shall immediately restore the surfaces, other than
in roads and driveways, to equal or better than their pre existing conditions.
- In roads and driveways, the Contractor shall immediately effect an interim restoration to a safe and
reasonable condition for traffic. The Contractor shall make good any settlement, deterioration etc.,
as they occur.
- The permanent reinstatement of roads shall not be commenced until the Architect is satisfied that
sufficient trench settlement has taken place. The materials used in permanent reinstatement of
roads shall be identical to materials used in adjacent roadwork. The roads shall be restored to pre
existing or improved standards ensuring a good match of restored and existing surfaces.
- The Contractor shall make good at the expense of the Contractor any subsidence or consolidation
that occurs in the backfill and any damage caused by the subsidence before the end of the
maintenance period.
2.4 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
- For payment purposes, the ground has been classified as common material, soft rock or hard rock.
Definitions of each are covered in the earthworks specification. No rock shall be paid for unless the
amount has been measured and agreed by the Architect. For payment purposes, the trench width
shall be prescribed minimum width applicable to the size of the pipe.
- Measurement of trench depths for the purpose of determining the appropriate scheduled rate for
payment for excavation and refilling shall be made only at manholes, pits and head walls and the
depth of the trench at intermediate points shall be allotted to the several depth groups on the
assumption that the ground surface slopes uniformly between successive points of measurement.
- Work shall include all excavation, bedding, backfilling and compaction testing. Payment will be
made only for completed work, i.e. after the trench has been tested, backfilled and consolidated and
surplus spoil removed.
2.5 DRAINAGE
Materials
- Stormwater pipes shall be reinforced concrete, PVC-U up to 225 diameter manufactured to AS 1254
or polypropylene with SN8 equivalent grade as shown on the Drawings.
- Reinforced concrete pipes shall be socketed, rubber ring jointed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with AS 4058 - 2007 and shall be 1, 2, 4 or 4 class as indicated on the Drawings.
- Polypropylene pipes – to comply with AS/NZS 5065-2005 - Polyethylene and Polypropylene pipes
and fittings for drainage and sewerage applications.
2.6 PIPE LAYING

- All pipes shall be laid to the lines levels and grades shown on the Drawings and shall be placed with
sockets uphill in a straight line between manholes (or gullies).
- All dirt and foreign matter shall be removed from inside the pipe and the outside of the spigot and
the inside of the socket and spigots shall be fully homed into the sockets.
- The barrels shall be uniformly bedded and supported throughout their length. The sockets of the
pipe shall be laid clear of the trench bed.
- Concrete pipes with elliptical reinforcement shall be laid with the top uppermost.
2.7 INSPECTION
- Where the consultant is unable to complete inspection of stormwater drainage pipe trenches, the
builder shall provide photo records of trenches for each line. The photos must include pipe bedding
& backfill,
Photo records shall be named in sequence and to match the documentation.
2.8 MANHOLES AND GULLIES

- Manholes and gullies shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings.
- Manholes of a depth greater than 1.2 m shall be fitted with approved step irons.
- Where constructed in roads, footpaths and driveways, all stormwater shall be finished flush with the
level and slope of the surrounding surface. Manholes located in the road carriageway or carparks
shall be fitted with a “Gatic” or similar type heavy duty trafficable, cast iron frame and lid.
- Lids and grates shall be class D & cycle safe to AS 3996.
- In wet ground or unstable trench bottom, the Contractor may be required to provide pile and keel
bearer footings for the manholes if directed by the Architect.
- Gully surrounds shall have a broom type finish at the upper face to provide a key for prime bonding.
2.9 ON SITE DETENTION SYSTEMS

- On-site detention systems shall be installed to the location and levels shown on the Drawings and
installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and requirements.
- Proprietary systems shall be supplied inclusive of all required parts, fittings, materials and
equipment as required for compliant installation of the system to the manufacturer’s requirements.
- The builder shall provide all manufacturer’s warranties for the installed proprietary drainage system.
- Alternative proprietary products to those proposed may be considered. Should an alternative system
be proposed and accepted by the Superintendent, it is the builder’s responsibility to confirm the
required base area and storage volume is achieved as all systems have different sizes and storage
capacities per unit. Where arched systems are proposed, shortfall of volume shall not be made up
by increasing blue metal. Drainage chamber connections may also require to be altered from those
documented. Pipe connections to cells shall be as close to perpendicular as possible. Should an
angled pipe connection be required, the engineer shall be contacted for comment.
- Compaction results for the prepared subgrade shall be provided in accordance with specification
0222 Earthworks where the on on-site detention system is installed over. Should weak soils be
encountered or ground conditions not respond to compactive effort, ground improvements shall be
provided in accordance with specification 0222 Earthworks and the geotechnical report.
- HOLD POINT Installed drainage cells shall be made available for inspection prior to backfill. All pipe
connections, breathers, overflows etc shall be visible at the time of inspection. For arched drainage
cells, the cells shall be inspected prior to blue metal backfill around the arches.
- It is the builder’s responsibility to manage construction, access and loading of the ground over the
cell prior to the final installation of road pavement and permanent finishes. Temporary works may be
required such as filling and compaction over to maintain minimum cover to meet the manufacturer’s
specifications. Temporary works will be considered inclusive in the builder’s contract works.
- At no time will recycled materials be considered as an acceptable alternative to blue metal for base
and backfill to arched systems.
2.10 CULVERTS
All drainage culvert crossings under roads, crossovers and at culvert entries and outfalls shall have
approved, proprietary headwalls installed to suit the culvert size and type.
2.11 TESTING
- It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide all materials for the completion of this project and to
provide verification that all materials comply with the requirements of this specification. In addition it
is the contractor’s responsibility to undertake all necessary testing of, subgrade and trench backfill
to ensure conformance with this specification for compaction, level, dryness, shape, finish etc.
- The costs for all testing shall be allowed for.
- For the purposes of testing, the works shall be divided into sections referred herein as "portions".
The definition of a "portion" shall be that section between manholes, drainage structures or
terminating end to a maximum length of 100m and to a maximum depth per test of 1.0m.
- All compaction testing for drainage in clean sand shall be undertaken by an approved NATA
registered laboratory unless:
. The Architect specifically permits otherwise or,
. The specialist drainage contractor has an acknowledged Quality Assurance Accreditation
(recognised by the Architect) in which case a maximum of 90% of tests (using a Perth Sand
Penetrometer only) may be undertaken by the contractor/subcontractor so long as a minimum of
10% of tests are undertaken by a NATA registered laboratory and the P.S.P. is calibrated for the
site sand at the commencement of the works.
2.12 AS CONSTRUCTED
- The Contractor is entirely responsible to undertake "As Constructed" survey for all stormwater
drainage installations.
- Records shall include the lengths, alignments, chainage, diameters and invert levels of all pipes
entering access chambers or stormwater entry pits, and the lid levels of the of the access chambers
or stormwater entry pits.
- Preliminary stormwater "As Constructed" information shall be maintained, progressively updated
and available for review by the Superintendent on site. This shall be in the form of a “mark-up” of the
current civil Drawings.
Measurements shall be taken while trenches and pipe are exposed, prior to backfill to record pipe
depth and location of the pipe on site relative buildings, roads, cadastral boundaries or other
relevant site features.
- Where works are completed in stages, the preliminary as-constructed “mark-up” plan with complete
as-constructed information for the stage will be accepted however at the completion of the project,
the final as-constructed Drawing will be required.
- Final As Constructed information shall be provided in accordance with the General Requirements
work sections. Additionally, as-constructed locations of all soakwells, access chambers, gully pits
and the like shall be accurately located by a licensed surveyor. A digital copy of the as-constructed
location shall be provided to the Architect in Autocad dwg and pdf formats for client records.
- Under no circumstance will payment be made for works which have not received the Architects
approval of the "As Constructed" information.
2.13 END OF DEFECTS PERIOD MAINTENANCE

- The builder shall carry out maintenance on the completed stormwater drainage systems prior to
hand-over and again at a time within one month of the completion of the Defects Liability Period. A
report detailing areas inspected and works completed shall be provided to the superintendent.
- All maintenance thereafter is recommended to be carried out on an annual basis.
- Annually, in autumn or following any significant storm event, inspect and carry out maintenance to
stormwater drainage systems, scope including but not limited to:
Routine Maintenance
• Removal of all leaves, debris and rubbish from on top of grates, in chambers & drains and
screens to detention systems.
• Removal of any materials from soakage bases or louvred slots in soakwells that could reduce
infiltration.
• Ensure pipe barrels are free of debris, material, rubbish etc.

• Ensure on-site stormwater detention systems are free of debris, material, rubbish etc.
• Inspect all clean-out risers for subsoil drainage (slotted) systems to ensure no sitting water
level in the system or material ingress. Flush out if so.
Corrective Maintenance
• For any above ground drainage systems such as swales, compensating basins, open
channels, overland drainage flow paths, check for scouring, erosion, rilling and the like as well
as any new naturally formed drainage paths created by the flows. Replace material and
compact to damaged areas or rock armour, as required.
The design of stormwater drainage systems requires regular, routine maintenance by the owner to
maintain its hydraulic capacity, inlet efficiency and/or design life.
SECTION 02360 TERMITE CONTROL
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
The work of this trade section includes but is not limited to the control and/or management of termites on
building sites for both new and existing buildings. Note that this is a design and construct item and the
contractor is to provide all coordination and complete the design for the selected system with provision
of samples and shop drawings as well as the method statement.
Obtain approval from the principal certifying authority prior to commencing work as to the adequacy of
the proposed system and suitability for the intended use.
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with each trade involved in the construction of the building, and in particular:
Site Preparation
103 Quality Assurance

Where specialist sub-contractors are engaged, provide formal documentary evidence of experience and
skills which meet the requirements of the Australian Standards.
104 References
Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards which are requirements of the
Building Code of Australia:
AS 3660 Termite management.
3660.1 2014 New building work.
3660.2 2000 In and around existing buildings and structures.
There is 1 other part, 2014.
AS 4349 Inspection of buildings.
4349.3 2010 Timber pest inspections. There are 2 other parts, 2007.
Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities having jurisdiction.
105 Submissions
Obtain a written statement, from each proposed sub-contractor tendering for the work, that the work to
be performed will comply with the relevant Australian Standard.
106 Warranty
Provide a written warranty from the sub-contractor stating the period of years of protection from termite
damage. Provide also a written statement that the work performed complies 100% with the requirements
of AS 3660.
PART II MATERIALS200
201 Acceptable Manufacturers

HomeGuard
TERM-Seal Ura-Fen Shield TWB
202 Materials
Complete termite management system comprising
1. Bifenthrin impregnated high impact 200 micron single extrusion polymer termite and moisture
barrier to the underside of on ground concrete floor slabs.
2. Bifenthrin impregnated high impact 500 micron embossed polymer damp proof course to the full
perimeter of the ground floor slab.
3. Bifenthrin impregnated collars to all ground floor slab service penetrations.
203 Equipment
Provide equipment needed to effect a treatment which complies with the Australian Standards.
PART III EXECUTION300
301 Examination
Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to the drawings before delivery of materials to
site.
Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrata.
Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02360 TERMITE CONTROL
302 Coordination
Arrange for cooperation of other trades to ensure effective pest control. Take care of materials. Prevent
damage before and during installation.
303 Preparation
Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done prior to commencement of work
and arrange for provision and fixing grounds.
304 Installation
Comply with appropriate Australian Standard.
Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components, during
installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.
305 Installation Particulars

Comply in all respects with manufacturer’s recommendations contained in technical bulletins. Call for
technical advice where necessary. Refer clause 105.
Comply with occupational health, safety and environmental requirements of the statutory and local
authority during the conduct of the works, including preparation of Safe Work Method Statement,
training, instruction and supervision of involved workers.
306 Protection
Protect finished work.
307 Cleaning
Clean the site where work of this trade is performed.
Remove surplus material.
308 Completion
Complete contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by
the architect.
Certify the completed system for compliance with statutory regulations and the Council Conditions of
Approval. Hand over to the architect on completion.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 02360 TERMITE CONTROL
SECTION 02769 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install tactile warning surface material with necessary accessories required for the work.
Refer to architectural documentation and project specific BCA report including access provisions for
scope and extent of work for provision of tactile warning surfaces and stair nosings.
This trade section may include components of design and construct as part of the proposed scope of
work.
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades:
Concrete Floor tiling
Carpet tiles Other floor finishes

Suppliers and installers need to be widely experienced in the class of work required for the work of this
trade section.
At a place selected by the architect, construct a prototype of a completed installation 2 square metres in
area. On completion of the prototype and approval by the architect of aspects of the installation, the
work remains in place and becomes the standard for the remaining work.
104 References
Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards:
AS 1428.4.1 2009 Design for access and mobility – Means to assist the orientation of people
with vision impairment - Tactile ground surface indicators. Plus 2 Amdts,
2010, 2014.
AS 1884 2012 Floor coverings - Resilient sheet and tiles - Laying and maintenance
practices.
AS/NZS 4586 2013 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface material. Plus 1 Amdt,
2005.
AS/NZS 4663 2004 Slip resistance measurement of existing pedestrian surfaces.
HB 197 1999 An introductory guide to the slip resistance of pedestrian surface materials.
Comply also with instructions of manufacturers of materials to be installed.

Referenced reports are to include access report provisions of the BCA report for the project.
105 Submissions
Provide samples and data sheets of materials as well as confirmation of compliance with specific
requirements of the BCA Report.
Where colour contrast is listed on the access report provisions, confirm compliance with technical data
and obtain approval of the Principal Certifying Authority.
If compliance with specific standards are listed confirm all at submissions stage of the project. Obtain
architect's approval for each item before ordering.
106 Delivery, Handling and Storage

Deliver materials in the packaging of the supplier, bearing the brand name, colour, thickness and other
relevant data.
Store materials in a secure dry area away from other materials which may cause deterioration.
107 Warranty
Provide a warranty covering aspects of the installation performed by this trade, against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of 7 years from the date of Practical Completion.
The warranty includes a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with
AS 1884 and the instructions of the manufacturers of components in effect at the time of installation.
Before ordering materials obtain and provide to the architect written evidence that items to be installed
comply with Australian Standards and are approved by statutory authorities having jurisdiction.
If non-approved materials or components are installed, replacement will be at contractor’s expense.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02769 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES
Nova Products
Provide all materials and components in accordance with the product manufacturers’ specifications and
technical data sheets.
202 Materials
A. Tactile ground surface indicators (TGSI) to concrete slab surfaces: Nova Products PVC TacAlert
Tactile Studs.
Colour: Black.
B. Stair nosings: Nova Products CCRG 10 Tiger 2.0 stair nosing with 10mm riser height. Clear
anodised aluminium retainer extrusion with “Black” insert.
C. Tactile ground surface indicators (TGSI) in paved surfaces: Refer to Landscape specification.
203 Equipment
Supply equipment required for the preparation of floor, and installation of materials as recommended by
the material manufacturer.
301 Examination
Examine the site conditions applicable to each installation and comply with AS 1884.
302 Preparation
Prepare each area to be surfaced in accordance with AS 1884. Test the dryness of concrete sub-floor
in accordance with AS 1884.
303 Installation
Comply throughout with manufacturer’s current written instruction.
304 Cleaning
Remove excess adhesive and blemishes from the completed surfaces of flooring.
305 Protection
Apply suitable hardboard or plywood to completed floors and maintain in position until final cleaning prior
to Practical Completion.
Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully repaired or cleaned.
306 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 02769 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES
SECTION 03100 CONCRETE
0310 CONCRETE
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
The work required under this section includes the design, supply, fabrication, erection and stripping of form
work, the scheduling, supply, placing and supporting of reinforcement and the design supply, testing, placing,
finishing and curing of concrete. It also includes the placing of embedded items and the supply and
installation of waterstops and waterproofing.
1.2 Standards
Materials and construction: To AS 3600.
Formwork design and construction to AS3610.
Concrete: To AS 1379.
Reinforcement to AS/NZS 4671.
Concrete structures for retaining liquids: To AS 3735.
1.3 Interpretations
Definitions:
A. Hot weather: Surrounding outdoor shade temperature > 32oC.
B. Contraction joint: An unreinforced joint with a bond-breaking coating separating the concrete joint surfaces.
C. Expansion joint: An unreinforced joint with the joint surfaces separated by a compressible filler.
D. Control joint: A weakened plane contraction joint created by forming a groove, extending at least one quarter
the depth of the section, either by using a grooving tool, by sawing, or by inserting a premoulded strip.
E. Isolation joint: A joint without keying, dowelling, or reinforcement, which imposes no restraint on movement.
1.4 Inspection
A. Witness Points: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following:
1. Base prepared for membrane installation.
2. Membrane or film underlay installed on the base.
3. Completed formwork, and reinforcement, cores and embedment’s fixed in place.
4. Shrinkage/Control Joint strengthening plates installed.
4. Commencement of concrete placing.
5. Surfaces or elements to be concealed in the final work before covering.
B. Rejection: Remove rejected concrete from the site.
1.5 Submissions
Builder shall engage a qualified CPE to design all formwork. Formwork must comply to all requirements of
Work Safe WA. Builder to have calculations available for review by the Architect if requested.
A. Tests:
1. Void formers: Submit test certificates to confirm that the formers comply with the following
requirements, under laboratory conditions, when placed on damp sand and loaded with a mass of
wet concrete at least the mass of the beams or slabs they are required to support:
Deflection during placing and compaction of the concrete is less than the span of the beam or slab
divided by 1000.
Additional deflection between initial set and 7 days does not exceed span/400.
2. Collapse and loss of load carrying capacity will occur not more than 48 hours after flooding with
water, creating a void at least 60% of the original depth of the void former.
3. Reinforcement: Certificate of compliance: Submit either the manufacturer's certificate of compliance
with the relevant standard, or an independent testing authority's test certificates demonstrating
compliance.
B. Execution:
1. Builder must have all documentation available for review by the Architect on formwork
documentation and details of proposed form linings, form coatings, release agents and, where
applicable, reuse of formwork.
2. Reshoring: If intended, submit proposals.
3. Surface repair method: Before commencing repairs, submit the proposed method.
4. Changes: Submit proposed changes, if any, in the reinforcement shown on the drawings, including
additional splicing.
5. Mechanical splices: If mechanical bar splices are proposed or required submit details and test
certificates for each size and type of bar to be spliced.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 13 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE
6. Damaged galvanizing: If repair to AS 1650 Appendix F is intended, submit proposals.
1.6 Material Tests

A. Material Tests Schedule
Material Test method Test frequency
Portland and blended cement To AS 3972
(each type used)
Fly ash To AS 3582.1
Ground slag To AS 3582.2
Admixtures (each type used) To AS 1478
Coarse aggregate:
Dense and lightweight:
- Particle size analysis To AS 1141.11
and
AS 1141.12
- Particle density and water To AS 1141.6.1
absorption
- Particle shape To AS 1141.14
- LA value To AS 1141.23
- Soundness To AS 1141.24
- Potential reactivity To AS 1141
Section 39
Fine aggregate:
- Particle size analysis To AS 1141.11
and AS 1141.12
- Bulk density and water To AS 1141.5
absorption
- Friable particles To AS 1141.32
- Organic impurities To AS 1141.34
- Soundness To AS 1141.24
- Light particles To AS 1141.31
- Sugar To AS 1141.35
- Potential reactivity To AS 1141
Section 39
B. Dissemination of production information: If concrete is manufactured off site, register the project in
accordance with AS 1379 clause 6.4.3.
1.7 Concrete Tests
A. Concrete Testing Methods
1. Sampling and testing: To AS 1012. Sample the concrete on site.
2. Test authority: NATA Approved Testing Laboratory
B. Test Records
1. Records and reports: To AS 1012
C. Control Tests: Acceptance criteria
1. Average strength of all samples must exceed the required value.
2. Strength of any one sample must be at least 0.85 of the required value.
D Control Test Requirements Schedule: for concrete strength requirements refer to structural drawings.
E Acceptance Testing : All concrete testing shall be carried out in all respects with the provisions of AS1012
and 1379 and AS3600, as currently amended and any relevant N.A.T.A. regulations currently in force.
Before any concreting is commenced, the Architect will ensure that any testing done by the Contractor will
conform with these requirements.
The Contractor shall pay the costs of all tests. The supply of testing equipment and suitable personnel to
carry out the tests will be the responsibility of the Contractor. All test specimens are to be cured and broken
at an approved N.A.T.A. laboratory.
All samples of concrete are to be obtained from a full flow of concrete at the truck discharge chute and shall
be taken after 25% of the load and before 75% of the load has been discharged.
Compression test samples shall be taken in accordance with AS1012 and 1379 and AS3600 at the
frequency set out below:-
1 Truck - one sample

2 to 5 Trucks - two samples
6 to 10 Trucks - three samples
11 to 20 Trucks - four samples
For each additional 10 Trucks, one additional sample shall be taken.
Test samples shall in all cases be cylinders.
Each sample shall consist of three test cylinder specimens. The Architect may order an increase in this rate
of testing if considered necessary.
One specimen shall be tested at seven (7) days while the other two shall be kept for testing at twenty-eight
(28) days. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of all concrete tests made on site.
Consistency (Slump Test) samples shall be taken at the rate of three samples from each load or separately
sampled where discharge is extended over a period of thirty minutes or more all in accordance with AS1012
and 1379.
F. Embedded Pressure Pipes:
1. Leak tests: Before embedment, leak test pipes which will contain liquid or vapour at a pressure
> 10 kPa.
1.8 Cast in Items
A. Trim and Build in: Trim openings in the work as required. Build in all necessary plugs, bolts, ties and
fastenings required by other trades. Build in bolts and fixings etc provided and set out by others. Every care
shall be taken to do as little cutting as possible after pouring is completed.
B. Cast In: To all floors and concrete works, allow for holes as required for casting in electrical or plumbing
pipes.
C. Brass Trim : Cast in as required all necessary brass edging to mat-sinking, weatherbars, thresholds and floor
finishes.
D. Inspection of Pipes : No concrete floor slabs shall be poured until all plumbing, electrical and gas service
pipes have been inspected and passed by the Architect and the appropriate Authority.
E. Fabricate shrinkage control joint plates as per the structural drawings and install in place.
F. Install all cranes holding down bolts, cast in plates, junction boxes and conduits as shown on structural,
Architectural, and services drawings as well as manufactures data sheets.
G. Materials
1. General: Submit details of proposed sources of materials.
2. Foamed concrete: Submit details, including aggregate grading and mix proportions.
3. Curing compounds: If it is proposed to use a liquid membrane-forming curing compound submit the
following information:
Certified test results for water retention to AS 3799 Appendix B.
Evidence that an acceptable final surface colour will be obtained.
Evidence of compatibility with applied finishes, if any.
Methods of obtaining the required adhesion for toppings and render.
H. Ready Mixed Supply
1. Delivery docket: For each batch, submit a docket listing the information required by AS 1379, and
the following additional information:
The concrete element or part of the works for which the concrete was ordered.
The total amount of water added at the plant and the maximum amount permitted to be added at
the site.
The amount of water, if any, added at the site.
2. FORMWORK
2.1 Formwork
A. General
1. General: Design and construct formwork so that the concrete, when cast in the forms, will have the
required dimensions, shape, profile, location and surface finish. Allow for dimensional changes,
deflections and cambers resulting from the application of prestressing forces, applied loads,
temperature changes and concrete shrinkage and creep.
2. Openings: In vertical forms provide form openings or removable panels for inspection and cleaning.
3. Cleaning: Remove free water, dust, debris and stains from the forms and the formed space before
placing concrete.
B. Stripping of Forms : Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete in contact with them has hardened
sufficiently to withstand such action without damage.
In the absence of any specific direction by the Engineer, the following table shall be used in
determining stripping times for concrete made with Portland cement Type 'A'.
This table is based on construction loads not exceeding 100 kg per square metre.
Bottom Forms of Beams and
Slabs
Average of Daily Vertical less than 3000 to 5000 to over
Minimum Surfaces 3000 5000 7500 7500
Temperatures span span span span
Above 200C 2 days 7 days 12 14 28 days

days days
10 - 200C 3 days 10 days 14 21 28 days
days days
5 - 100C 5 days 14 days 21 28 28 days
days days
Under 50C Special precautions shall be taken and stripping
times lengthened.
The Builder may use the following alternative to determine stripping times.
Forms shall not be stripped before the concrete supported by them has attained the strength
designated in Table A. The strength of the concrete at stripping shall be taken as the average
strength of 2 cylinders taken from the pour to be stripped.
TABLE ‘A’
% of F’c (28 days value)
Proportion of Design Load on slab at 1/4 1/2 3/4 1.0
stripping
Element Surface Span
Beams and Horizontal 2000 and less 55 60 75 100
Slabs
3000 and less 55 65 80 100
5000 and less 55 70 85 100
6000 and less 80 85 100
7500 and less 90 85 100
above 95 85 100
Removal of bottom forms between bearers or props, prior to the removal of supports may be
permitted by the Engineer, provided the formwork has been designed to allow such removal without
disturbance of the supports.
The Builder shall provide sufficient tomming to ensure that the loading caused by green concrete
floors, (not up to design strength F'c as shown on the drawings) formwork, building equipment and
material is supported by such a number of concrete floors that no floor carries loads exceeding its
capacity based on Table A. The number of floors to remain tommed will depend on the design dead
and live loads of the floors, the pouring cycle and the rate at which the concrete gains its strength.
Neither walls nor any permanent loading shall be erected on any part of the structure while it is still
supported by formwork - unless approved by the Engineer.
Reshoring: Do not reshore.
C. Release Agent : Before placing reinforcement, apply a release agent compatible with the contact surfaces, to
the interior of the formwork, except where the concrete is to receive an applied finish for which there is no
compatible release agent. Clean the reinforcement to remove all traces of release agent.
D. Defective Formwork : Remove rejected concrete, form construction joints, reconstruct the formwork and
recast concrete.
E. Formwork Removal : Remove formwork, other than steel reinforcement decking, including formwork in
concealed locations.
2.2 Dimensional Tolerances

Position: Construct formwork so that the position of finished concrete is within the tolerances stated in the
Position tolerances table.
Plumb of vertical elements: 1:1000
Position tolerances table

Formwork class to AS 3610 1 2 3 4
Maximum deviation from correct position (mm) +/- 2mm 1 1 2 2
0 5 0 5
2.3 Formed Surface Finish

A. Visually Important Surfaces : For concrete of surface finish classes 1, 2 or 3, set out the formwork to give a
regular arrangement of panels, joints, bolt holes, and similar visible elements in the formed surface. Form 45o
bevels, 25 mm on the face on corners and angles.
B. Formed Surfaces Schedule : Only approved type form hardware will be permitted and shall in general be of a
type which precludes any ferrous material, i.e. wire etc. being exposed on the concrete surface after stripping.
Where perforation of formwork is necessary for the passage of electrical conduits, ducts, etc., the contractor
shall design the formwork to accommodate such perforations or sleeves.
Unless otherwise specified the minimum standard of finishes to formed concrete surfaces shall be as
follows :
Concrete Element or Surface Formwork Class Colour Control
Normal architectural work and

surfaces 2 Yes
not otherwise specified
Civil engineering works 3 Yes
Surfaces to be rendered or hidden by

other finishes 4 No
Surfaces permanently concealed (eg.

footings, rear faces of retaining walls 5 No
2.4 Form Tie Bolts
A. Removable Bolts : Remove the bolts without causing damage to the concrete.
B. Cover : Position formwork tie bolts left in the concrete so that the ties does not project into the concrete
cover.
C. Bolt Hole Filling
1. General: Provide material matching the surface colour.
2. Recessed filling: Fill or plug the hole to 6 mm below the surface.
2.5 Lost Formwork
Type: Permanent or lost formwork, chloride free, which will not impair the structural performance of the
concrete members.
2.6 Void Formers
Cast designated suspended ground floor slabs and beams on unwaxed cardboard or fibreboard void formers
which are collapsible on absorption of moisture. Keep void formers dry until use, place them on a firm level
surface, cover with a waterproof membrane, and place reinforcement and concrete with minimum delay.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Polymeric Film Underlay
A. General : Under internal slabs on ground including integral ground beams and footings, provide a vapour
barrier or, in areas prone to rising damp or salt attack, a damp-proofing membrane.
B. Standard : Vapour barriers and damp-proofing membranes: To AS 2870.
C. Base Preparation : According to base type, as follows:
1. Graded stone base: Blind with sufficient sand to create a smooth surface free from hard projections.
Wet the sand just before laying the underlay.
2. Concrete working base: Remove projections above the plane surface, and loose material.
D. Installation : Lay over the base, lap joints at least 200 mm and seal the laps and penetrations with waterproof
adhesive tape. Face the laps away from the direction of concrete pour. Take the underlay up vertical faces as
far as the damp proof course where applicable, and fix at the top by tape sealing. Locate vertical laps only on
vertical or inclined surfaces. Patch or seal punctures or tears before pouring concrete.
3.2 Concrete Materials
Cement shall be locally manufactured normal Portland cement, Type A complying with AS3972. Blended
cement type SA is permissible only in accordance with Clause 4.1 and shall comply with AS3972.
3.3 Concrete
A. Concrete Schedule : Refer to structural drawings for concrete strength & grade.
B. Ready Mixed Supply
1. Method: Use the batch production process. Deliver in agitator trucks.
2. Admixtures: Do not provide admixtures containing significant chlorides.
3. Addition of water: Do not add water at the site.
4. Plastic cracking: Design the concrete mix to minimise plastic settlement and shrinkage cracking.
C. Elapsed Delivery Time : Elapsed time between the wetting of the mix and the discharge of the mix at the site
must not exceed the criteria in the Elapsed delivery timetable.
Elapsed Delivery Time Table
Concrete temperature at time of Maximum elapsed time (hours)
discharge (oC)
< 24 2.00
24 - 27 1.50
27 - 30 1.00
> 30 0.75
Emergencies: Do not mix by hand.
D. Where specified on the drawings provide concrete with Xypex water proofing additive. Concrete mix to be in
accordance with manufactures recommendation for the proposed conditions. Provide certification from the
additive supplier on completion of the concrete works.
3.4 Concrete Types

A. Foamed Concrete : Cement, fine aggregate, water and foam.
B. Fine Aggregate : Fine aggregate shall be clean, coarse, well graded sand free from all deleterious matter and
shall comply with AS2758.
C. Coarse Aggregate : Coarse aggregate shall be clean, crushed granite, diorite or other approved stone free
from all deleterious matter and shall comply with AS2758.
D. Water : All water used in mixing with cement for concrete, mortar or grout, in cleaning out or wetting forms, in
washing materials or in curing concrete, shall be clean and fresh, free from impurities and of drinking quality.
E. Admixtures : Admixtures shall not be added to the concrete unless specified.
4. REINFORCEMENT
4.1 General
A. Steel reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of:-
1. AS/NZS 4671 Steel reinforcing materials.
Where galvanised reinforcing is specified, tie-wire and other similar items shall also be galvanised.
Reinforcement shall be free from scale, loose rust, oil, grease or other deleterious matter that may
impair the bond between the concrete and reinforcement or cause disintegration of the concrete.
All reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the tolerances set out in Clause 19.2 of AS 3600, and fixed
in position to the tolerances set out in Clause 19.5.3.
Reinforcement on site shall be stored clear of the ground and shall be tied free from any form of
surface contamination.
No adjustment to reinforcement other than straight cutting of bars shall be made on site without the
approval of the Engineer.
B. Dowels
1. Standard: To AS/NZS 4671 grade 250R.
2. General: Provide each dowel in one piece, straight, with square cut ends free from burrs. Apply 2
coats of bitumen emulsion to half the length of the dowel at one end. Embed the unpainted half of
the dowels in the concrete placed first.
3. Tolerances:
Location: ± half the diameter of the dowel.
Alignment: 2 mm in 300 mm.
C. Welding
1. General: Give notice before welding reinforcement. Do not weld reinforcement within 75 mm of a
section which has been affected by bending or re-bending.
2. Standard: To AS 1554.3.
4.2 Protective Coated Reinforcement

A. Extent : For concrete elements containing protective coated reinforcement, provide the same coating type to
all that element's reinforcement and embedded ferrous metal items, including tie wires, stools, spacers,
stirrups, plates and ferrules, and protect other embedded metals with a suitable coating.
B. Galvanizing
1. Coating (minimum): 700 g/m2.
2. Preparation: Pickling to AS 1627.5.
C. Damage : If damage occurs to the coating replace the damaged reinforcement.
D. Unencased Reinforcement
1. General: Provide protection for "starter bars" and other items projecting from cast concrete for future
additions, and exposed to the weather.
2. Protection method: Cover in grout slurry wrap in approved grease tape.
4.3 Fixing Reinforcement
A. Fixing Requirements
1. General: Secure the reinforcement against displacement by tying at intersections with either
annealed iron 1.25 mm diameter (minimum) wire ties, or clips. Bend the ends of wire ties away from
nearby faces of forms so that the ties do not project into the concrete cover.
2. Mats: For bar reinforcement in the form of a mat, secure each bar at alternate intersections, and at
other points as required.
3. Beams: Tie ligatures to bars in each corner of each ligature. Fix other longitudinal bars to ligatures at
1 m maximum intervals.
4. Columns: Secure longitudinal column reinforcement to all ligatures at every intersection.
5. Bundled bars: Tie bundled bars together so that the bars are in closest possible contact. Provide tie
wire at least 2.5 mm diameter at centres £ 24 times the diameter of the smallest bar in the bundle.
B. Concrete Cover
1. General structures: To AS 3600.
2. Structures for retaining liquids: To AS 3735.
C. Provision for Concrete Placement
Notice: If spacing or cover of reinforcement does not comply give notice.
For cover requirements refer to structural drawings.
4.4 Reinforcement Supports
A. Support Types
1. General: Provide purpose-made concrete, metal or plastic supports.
2. Exposure classification A1: Provide a protective coating to ferrous metal supports which extend to
the surface of the concrete.
3. Exposure classifications more severe than A1: Provide either
plastic supports of adequate strength and of a shape appropriate to the location; or
concrete supports of the same concrete quality as the concrete element.
B. Supports Over Membranes : Prevent damage to waterproofing membranes or vapour barriers. Place a metal
or plastic plate under each support to prevent puncturing.
C. Support Spacing
1. Bars: £ 60 diameters.
2. Fabric: ³ 750 mm.
5. EMBEDMENTS, CORES AND FIXING

5.1 Fixings and Embedded Items
A. Adjoining Elements : For adjoining elements to be fixed to or supported on the concrete, provide for the
required fixings. Where applicable provide for temporary support of the adjoining elements during construction
of the concrete.
B. Structural Integrity : Fix cores and embedded items to prevent movement during concrete placing. In locating
embedded items, do not cut or displace reinforcement, or cut hardened concrete.
C. Tolerances on Placement : Maximum deviation from correct positions:
Embedded items generally: +/- 10mm.
Fasteners, including anchor bolts: +/- 3 mm.
Anchor bolt groups for structural steel: To AS 4100.
D. Inserted Fixings Methods : Do not insert fixings using drilling (including masonry anchors), or using explosive
tools.
E. Steelwork : Any structural steel used in conjunction with these works shall conform to AS4100. And shall be
heavily hot dip galvanised or similarly treated when external. See 'Structural Steelwork' section of
specification.
6. PLACING AND CURING
6.1 Concrete Working Base

A. Material : N20 concrete. Lay over the base or subgrade and screed to the required level.
B. Thickness : Minimum 50 mm.
C. Finish
1. Membrane support: Wood float finish or equivalent.
D. Surface Tolerance : +/- 2mm from the correct plane, +/- 6mm form a 3mm straight edge. +/- 2mm from
correct plane areas to receive vinyl – 3mm from a 3mm straight edge.
6.2 Placing and Compaction
A. Placing
1. General: Use placing methods which minimise plastic settlement and shrinkage cracking.
2. Layers: Place concrete in layers such that each succeeding layer is blended into the preceding one
by the compaction process.
3. Placing slabs and pavements: Place concrete uniformly over the width of the slab so that the face is
generally vertical and normal to the direction of placing.
4. Concrete to the factory and warehouse floors are not to be installed until building is fully weather tight
with all wall and roof structure installed.
B. Horizontal Movement : Use suitable conveyors, clean chutes, troughs or pipes. Do not use water to facilitate
the movement.
C. Vertical Movement : In vertical elements, limit the free fall of concrete to 1500 mm per 100 mm element
thickness, up to a maximum free fall of 3000 mm, using enclosed chutes or access hatches in forms. As far
as practicable keep chutes vertical and full of concrete during placement, with ends immersed in the placed
concrete.
D. Wet Weather Requirements : Concrete shall not be ordered for a pour in wet weather without the approval of
the Architect.
Where approval is given to proceed, the Builder shall undertake responsibility for making good all areas of
mono finish which may be damaged by rain.
Waterproof covers shall be kept close at hand to cover the screeded surface and prevent cement being
washed out of the concrete during showers.
When a pour is in progress and is abandoned due to worsening conditions, it shall be carried to or
subsequently cut back to a joint line to be nominated by the Architect.
Concrete shall not be deposited on ponded areas of formwork, but worked in a face to push the water ahead
of the pour.
Holes will be cut as necessary to allow entrapped water to drain out of the forms.
E. Sequence of Pours : Minimise shrinkage effect by pouring the sections of the work between construction
joints in a sequence such that there will be suitable time delays between adjacent pours.
Minimum Time Delay Schedule
Between (pour locations) Minimum period between
adjacent pours (days)
Adjacent pours abutting vertical construction joints 7 days
in walls
Adjacent pours abutting horizontal construction 7 days
joints in walls or columns
"Pour strips" and adjacent concrete 14 days
F. Compaction
1. General: Remove air bubbles and fully compact the mix.
2. Methods: Use immersion and screed vibrators accompanied by hand methods as appropriate.
3. Vibrators: Do not allow vibrators to come into contact with partially hardened concrete, or
reinforcement embedded in it. Do not use vibrators to move concrete along the forms. Avoid over-
vibration that may cause segregation.
G. Placing Records : Keep on site and make available for inspection a log book recording each placement of
concrete, including the following:
Date.
The portion of work.
Specified grade and source of concrete.
Slump measurements.
Volume placed.
6.3 Cold Weather Placing
A. General : Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete within the limits shown in the Cold weather
placing table. "Outdoor" air temperature applies to the air temperature at the time of mixing and to the
predicted or likely air temperature at any time during the subsequent 48 hours.
Cold Weather Placing Table
Outdoor air temperature Temperature
of concrete
Minimum Maximum
Less Than 5oC 10oC 32oC
Greater Than 5oC 18oC 32oC
B. Additives : Do not provide calcium chloride, salts, chemicals or other material in the mix to lower the freezing
point of the concrete.
C. High Early Strength Cement : Provide in severe weather conditions to enable the concrete to develop
sufficient strength to permit formwork removal within the specified time. Do not provide as a substitute for the
heating of materials or for adequate protection of placed concrete against low temperatures. Do not provide
high alumina cement.
D. Heating : Heat the concrete materials, other than cement, to the minimum temperature necessary to ensure
that the temperature of the placed concrete is within the limits specified. Maximum temperature of water:
60oC when it is placed in the mixer.
6.4 Hot Weather Placing
A. Mixing : Surrounding outdoor shade temperature > 38oC: Do not mix concrete.
B. Handling : Prevent premature stiffening of the fresh mix and reduce water absorption and evaporation losses.
Mix, transport, place and compact the concrete as rapidly as possible.
C. Placing : Before and during placing maintain the formwork and reinforcement at £ 32oC using protection, cold
water spraying, or other effective means. When placed in the forms, the temperature of the concrete must not
exceed the criteria in the Hot weather placing table.
Hot Weather Placing Table
Concrete element Temperature limit
Normal concrete in footings, beams, columns, 35oC
walls and slabs
Concrete in large mass concrete sections; or 27oC
concrete of strength 40 MPa or greater,
in sections exceeding 600 mm in
thickness
D. Temperature Control Methods : Select one or more of the following methods of maintaining the specified
temperature of the placed concrete:
Use chilled mixing water.
Spray the coarse aggregate using cold water.
Cover the container in which the concrete is transported to the forms.
Cool the concrete using liquid nitrogen injection before placing.
6.5 Curing
A. General
1. Protection: Protect fresh concrete, during the curing period, from premature drying and from
excessively hot or cold temperatures.
2. Curing period: Cure continuously until the total cumulative number of days or fractions of days,
during which the air temperature in contact with the concrete is above 10oC, is at least the following:
Fully enclosed internal surfaces: 3 days.
Other surfaces: 7 days.
B. Curing Componds
1. Standard: To AS 3799 or ASTM-C309.
2. Substrates: Do not use wax-based or chlorinated rubber-based curing compounds on surfaces forming
substrates to concrete toppings and cement-based render.
3. Application: Provide a continuous flexible coating without visible breaks or pinholes, which remains
unbroken at least seven days after application.
C. Hot Weather Curing : Do not use curing compounds. After placement, either
1. immediately cover the concrete using an impervious membrane, or hessian kept wet, until curing
begins; or
2. if the temperature exceeds 35oC or if not protected against drying winds, protect the concrete using a
fog spray application of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant.
D. Curing of concrete containing ≥30% fly ash cement replacement:
1. A high quality curing compound (90% min retention to ASTM C309 or AS/NZS 3799) must be applied
as soon as possible after finishing the concrete.
2. After final setting, water curing shall be applied for 14 days. A curing compound only is not suitable.
3. For formed concrete components such as columns and walls, shuttering is to remain in place for a
minimum of 7 days. Where ambient temperature is less than 15°C this is to be 10 days.
4. Take all necessary measures to keep the concrete moist during finishing.
6.6 Protection
A. Loading
1. Notice: Give notice before loading the concrete structure.
2. Protection: Protect the concrete from damage due to load overstresses, heavy shocks and excessive
vibrations, particularly during the curing period. Do not place construction loads on self-supporting
structures which will overstress them.
B. Surface Protection : Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage.
7. JOINTS
7.1 Construction Joints
A. Location : Do not relocate or eliminate construction joints, or make construction joints not shown on the
drawings. This includes emergency construction joints made necessary by unforeseen interruptions to the
concrete pour.
B. Joint Preparation : Roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface, remove loose or soft material,
free water, foreign matter and laitance. Dampen the surface just before placing the fresh concrete. Additional
joints in the factory or warehouse slabs on grade are not permitted and any unfished section will need to be
demolished and replaced.
C. Finish at Construction Joints : Butt join the surfaces of adjoining pours. In visually important surfaces make
the joint straight and true, and free from impermissible blemishes relevant to its surface finish class.
7.2 Expansion Joints
A. Jointing Materials
1. Type: Provide jointing materials compatible when used together, and non-staining to concrete in visible
locations.
2. Foamed materials (in compressible fillers): Closed-cell or impregnated types which do not absorb
water.
3. Bond breaking: Provide back-up materials for sealants, including backing rods, which do not adhere to
the sealant. They may be faced with a non-adhering material.
B. Jointing Material Schedule
Location of joint Jointing material
Primer Backing rod Sealant
Vertical Joint 10mm n/a Closed cell Tremco Mono
555 or
approved
equivalent
Fire Rated 10mm n/a Closed cell Sika Firerate or
approved
equivalent
Horizontal Joint 10mm n/a Closed cell Tremco Mono
555 or
approved
equivalent
C. Joint Filling
1. Preparation: Before filling, dry and clean the joint surfaces, and prime.
2. Joint filling: Fill with jointing materials. Finish visible jointing material neatly flush with adjoining
surfaces.
3. Watertightness: Apply the jointing material so that joints subject to ingress of water are made
watertight.
7.3 Waterstops
Provide waterstops as specified on the drawings where required.
8. PLINTHS AND DUCTS

8.1 Concrete Plinths
A. Construction
1. General: Provide galvanized steel surround at least 75 mm high and 1.6 mm thick, fixed to floor with
masonry anchors minimum M12 Hilti HSL 3B at 300c/c. Fill with concrete.
2. Reinforcement: Single layer of SL102 fabric.
3. Concrete: Grade N32.
4. Finish: Steel float flush with the surround.
9. FINISHES GENERAL
9.1 Tolerances
A. Tolerance Classes : Determine tolerance classes using a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in
any direction.
B. Tolerances Class Table
Class Measurement Maximum deviation
(mm)
A 3 m straight edge 3
B 3 m straight edge 6
C 600 mm straight edge 6
Class A shall apply unless noted otherwise
Additional requirements to factory and warehouse slab on grade.

0.1m straight edge 1mm
10m straight edge 12mm
15m straight edge 15mm
9.2 Surface Modifiers
A. Seal Stripper :Thoroughly clean the surface before the application of finishes to masonry and cementitious
floors. Remove wax (buffable, self-polishing and acrylic paste types), heavy duty polymer finishes, and clear
resin sealer using a seal stripper.
B. Clear Resin Sealers
1. Type: Transparent acrylic resin sealer, resistant to ultraviolet rays, suitable for exterior or interior
applications, rendering the surface impervious to stains of oils, grease, water and acids, non-
yellowing, non-discolouring to the base surfaces, cut with a combination of hydrocarbon solvents to
give good penetration into the surface.
2. Total solids: At least 14%.
C. Surface Hardeners : Suitable for cementitious toppings or as laid surfaces. Apply to clean surfaces. Do not
apply to non-slip topping.
10. INTEGRAL FINISHES

10.1 Unformed Surfaces
A. Screeding : Finish slab surfaces to finished levels, to tolerance class A.
Finish slab surfaces: Class A
B. Finishing Methods : Surfaces not otherwise specified to have steel trowelled finish.
1. Scored finish: After screeding, give the surface a coarse scored texture using a stiff brush or rake
drawn across the surface.
2. Machine floated finish: Finish the screeded surface to a uniform smooth texture using a machine
float. Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float.
3. Steel trowelled finish: Use steel hand trowels to produce the final finish free of trowel marks and
uniform in texture and appearance.
4. Wood float finish: Produce the final finish using a wood float.
5. Broom finish: After floating use a broom to produce an even textured slip-resistant surface.
6. Pattern paving: Proprietary treatment producing integral coloured and patterned surface for in situ
paving and ground slabs.
7. Sponge finish: After machine floating, obtain an even textured sand finish by wiping the surface using
a damp sponge. Surfaces not otherwise specified to have Machine floated finish.
10.2 Formed Surfaces
A. Evaluation of Formed Surfaces : If evaluation of formed surface tolerance or colour is required, complete the
evaluation before surface treatment.
B. Smooth Rubbed Finish : Remove the forms while the concrete is green, patch immediately, and complete the
rubbing not later than the following day. Wet the surface and rub using a carborundum or similar abrasive
brick until a uniform colour and texture are produced. Do not provide cement grout other than the paste
drawn from the green concrete by the rubbing process.
C. Exposed Aggregate Finish : Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Wet the surface and scrub using
stiff fibre or wire brushes, using water freely, until the surface film of mortar is mechanically removed without
the use of acid etching, and the aggregate uniformly exposed. Rinse the surface with clean water.
D. Bush Hammered Finish : Remove the minimum matrix using bush hammering to expose the coarse
aggregate without recessing the matrix deeper than the aggregate, to give a uniform texture with insignificant
random tool marks.
E. Floated Finishes
1. Sand floated finish: Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Wet the surface and rub using a
wood float. Rub fine sand into the surface until a uniform colour and texture are produced.
2. Grout floated finish: Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Dampen the surface and spread,
using hessian pads or sponge rubber floats, a slurry consisting of one part cement (including an
appropriate percentage of white cement) and one and a half parts sand passing a 1 mm sieve.
Remove surplus until a uniform colour and texture are produced. Cure.
F. Blasted Finishes
1. Abrasive: Blast the cured surface using hard, sharp graded abrasive fine aggregate particles until the
coarse aggregate is in uniform relief.
2. Light abrasive: Blast the cured surface using hard, sharp graded abrasive fine aggregate particles to
provide a uniform matt finish without exposing the coarse aggregate.
10.3 Schedule
Integral Finishes Schedule : Refer to drawings for finishes type and location.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03310 Brick and Block Construction
03310 BRICK AND BLOCK CONSTRUCTION
1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
General
Supply and build all the brick/blockwork shown on the Drawings or needed to complete the works,
including but not limited to the following:
- All labour and materials
- Building in of miscellaneous items provided by others
- Staging and scaffolding
- Flashings and services
- Cleaning
Specifically
- 90mm core filled blockwork as shown on the drawings.
- 90mm brickwork as shown on the drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide manufacturer's certification that bricks and blocks supplied are of the specified type and
strength, and were manufactured in accordance with AS 1225, AS 1653 or AS 2733.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
AS/NZS 1576 Scaffolding
AS 1684 Residential timber-framed construction
AS 2423 Coated Steel Wire Fencing Products for Terrestrial, Aquatic and General Use
AS 3660 Termite Management
AS 3700 Masonry Structures including all The Standards to which it refers (Clause 1.2).
AS/NZS 4671 Steel Reinforcing Materials
1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
Coordination
- Reach agreement with the Architect about site provision for storage of sand, cement and other
materials and for mixing of mortar.
- Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
prevent damage, deterioration or loss.
2 QUALITY
2.1 SUBMISSIONS
Requirement
- Before installation commences, obtain and submit the following data:
- Manufacturer's data: The manufacturer's published product data, including
- Technical specifications;
- Recommendations for installation; and
- Type test or factory test data.
- Product warranties: The manufacturer's written statement certifying that the product complies with
the specification and is suitable for the intended use.
2.2 SAMPLES
Requirement
- Submit samples of the following:
- Masonry units: Not less than six units of each type, representing the total range of variation of
colour, texture, surface irregularities (including defective arises), and regularity of shape.
- Sand: A 2 kg sample of sand, where required to be from a particular source or of a particular colour.
2.3 SAMPLE PANELS
Facework
- Prepare in a suitable position, or where directed, a sample panel of facework, double sided with
capping as specified or detailed.
Facework Type
- Face units as specified to be laid in stretcher bond.
- Minimum size (face of panel) 1800 (H) x 1670 (W) and containing all the units specified.
- Allowing for extending panel as necessary to achieve acceptance.
The final accepted sample will form the standard to which all masonry work is to conform.
3 MATERIALS
3.1 BRICKS/BLOCKS
Solid bricks and Blockwork
- Areas where bolt fixings are required
- Cappings and top courses to all other walls
- To perimeter of head and jambs to all doors
- Window sills
Common Brickwork U.C.S.
- Midland Brick 305L x 76H x 90W Maxibricks >12 MPa
- Midland Brick 230L x 76H x 110W Common Bricks >12 MPa
Blockwork U.C.S.
- Boral Besser 390L x 190H x 90W grey smooth faced blocks. >15 MPa
- Boral Besser 390L x 190H x 140W grey smooth faced blocks. >12 MPa
- Boral Besser 390L x 190H x 190W grey smooth faced blocks >12 MPa
Face Brickwork U.C.S.
- Midland Brick 290L x 162H x 90W Opal Blush face bricks >12 MPa
- Midland Brick 290L x 76H x 90W Opal Blush face bricks >12 MPa
(refer to drawings for coursing layout)
3.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS AND TYPES
Materials
Comply with AS 3700 as follows:
- Mortar: Restrict the amount of fine aggregate passing a 75 micron test sieve to 5% maximum.
- Grout: Clause 3.5, 10.7
Types
Comply with AS 3700; Clauses 2.23.1, 3.3 and 10.4, 10.7 and Table 10.1, providing materials in the
proportions described below:
- Mortar:
Mix Proportions
Classification Portland Cement Lime Sand
M3 1 1 6
M4 1 0.5 4.5
. Mortar for Brickwork: M4

. Mortar for Grouted and Reinforced Blockwork: M3
. Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Blockwork: M3

- Grout: f'c not less than 15 MPa (AS 3700, Clause 3.5, 10.7).
3.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Comply with AS 3700 as follows:
- Wall Ties and Accessories: Clause 3.4, 10.5
- Reinforcement: Clause 3.6, 10.8
- Lintels and Other Steel in Brickwork and Blockwork: Clause 10.5
- Caulking: Elastomeric sealing compound, coloured to match final paint colour; for general caulking
including movement control joints:
- Liquid polysulphide polymer equal to Thioseal 5000.
- Neutral silicone, equal to Dow Corning 790,
- Damp Proof Courses: 'Master black' laid to all leaves at ground floor level.
- Flashing: Allow to build in cover flashings where necessary to render building watertight.
- Built-in flashings to all walls to be 0.8mm zincalume bitumen painted and shaped as required.
- At ground floor level turn up waterproof membrane the required courses and build in.
- Expansion Joint Material: Provide foam backing strip set 25mm into joint and seal over with
approved caulking compound.
- Control Joint Material: As for expansion joint.
- Fire Rated Vertical Expansion Joints: Fill 10mm thick expansion joints with Nullifire System J flexible
J10.45 in full accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Point exposed face with waterproof
mastic sealant.
3.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Refer Clauses 11.6 and 11.7 of AS3700.
3.5 STEEL LINTELS
- Refer Lintel Table on Structural Drawings.
- Set all angles with the first dimension vertical.
- Minimum bearing each end:
. Span ≤ 1000 mm: 120 mm.
. Span > 1000 mm ≤ 3000 mm: 150 mm.
. Span > 3000 mm: To structural drawings.
- Propping: Provide temporary props to lintels to prevent deflection or rotation.
- Minimum propping period: 7 days.
- Treat all steel lintels in exterior openings as per Steelwork Specification – Type B treatment where
visible, otherwise type D treatment. All other lintels to be hot dip galvanised.
- Fix all angles to concrete columns or beams with the bearing leg cut and bent to the height of the
vertical leg and bolted to concrete with 2 no. 16mm masonry anchors.
- All cast in shelf angles are to be hot dip galvanised. Refer Steelwork Specification.
3.6 REINFORCEMENT
- Unless noted otherwise on the Structural Drawings, all masonry is to be reinforced with 2 W6 wires
laid horizontally, with 20mm cover to the face of the mortar, at four standard course (343mm)
centres for brickwork, or at 400mm centres for blockwork, for full height of wall. Provide corner L-
bars lapping 400mm with reinforcement.
- In addition to the above, provide 2 W6 wires in the first two bed joints above and below any
openings and extending 600mm beyond each side of the opening.
- In masonry parapets, provide 2 W6 wires, as in A, at 2 standard course (or 200mm for blockwork)
centres.
- Where R4 classification applies (AS/NZS 2699), reinforcement in external leaf is to be stainless
steel rods, equivalent to the above requirements.
- The above reinforcement applies to each leaf of masonry.
- In 190mm and 140mm Core-filled blockwork provide vertical and horizontal reinforcement as shown
on the drawings.
3.7 MASONRY SEALER (ANTI-GRAFFITI)

- Provide anti-graffiti sealer to all masonry brick, block and limestone, to Manufacturer’s
specifications, suitable for porous substrates. Apply sealer to the surface of all internal and external
face brick and external face limestone.
- Sealer to be Crommelins Barricade RGB (or similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the
approval of the Superintendent’s Representative) sacrificial anti-graffiti coating supplied and
installed to manufacturer’s recommendations. Anti-Graffiti coating shall be applied to all external
concrete block, brick work, entire concrete wall panels, painted walls, and limestone retaining walls
from ground level to 3m above ground level.
3.8 WATERPROOFING
Material
- To all retaining walls, supply and install a waterproof membrane. Membrane is to meet the
requirements of the Architectural drawings and specifications. Installation to manufacturer’s
specifications. Extend coverage to full extent of the rear face of all masonry brick and block walls
where they are retaining.
- Applicator to be approved by the manufacturer to achieve manufacturer’s warranty.
- Provide a warranty for the installed membrane for minimum 25 years.
3.9 CAVILTY INSULATION
- Provide cavity insulation as per Architectural drawings and specifications. Cavity insulation to be
installed to manufacturer’s specifications with minimum 40mm air space.
4 EXECUTION
4.1 MORTAR MIXING

- Measure materials to ensure that the specified mix proportions are maintained (AS 3700, Clause
11.3.3).
- Mix in a suitable mixing machine until a uniform blending of the components is achieved.
- Add water to create a mix that is as wet as can be conveniently used by the bricklayer.
- Except for the previously specified methyl cellulose water thickener, use no chemical to affect the
plastic or other properties of mortar or as a substitute for lime without the Architect's written
permission.
4.2 MORTAR LIFE
Re-tempering to replace water lost by evaporation is encouraged until initial set begins. Mortar which
has begun its initial set must be rejected and may not be re-tempered.
4.3 PREPARATION
- Review the project with all other trades in relation to ducts, piping, conduits, thimbles, sleeves, etc.
or other item penetrating or to be built into blockwork and coordinate their installation.
- Obtain all built-in items from their suppliers prior to starting the blockwork setout.
- Clean the surface of concrete before laying any blocks thereon.
- Set up pressed metal door frames and aluminium shopfront and partition units plumb and level and
brace as required. Maintain bracing until walls are at least 1000 high and frame grouting has set.
4.4 SETTING OUT
Rod and Bond
- Set out masonry so as to maintain the specified rod and bond with bed joints and vertical joints of
uniform width and with the minimum cutting of masonry units.
- Brick rod: Standard 7 courses to 600 to new work.
- Block rod: 3 courses to 600mm.
- Bond: Standard stretcher bond to all face work, with perps on every other course aligned.
Stretcher bond to brickwork for plaster/render.
Trial Set-Out
- Make a trial set-out of two courses for each panel of facework and obtain approval before laying.
4.5 LAYING
- General: Comply with all applicable provisions of AS 3700. Set out all brickwork and blockwork so
as to reduce cutting to a minimum and, in facework, to avoid irregular or broken bond.
- Make cuts in facework with a masonry saw only. Carefully position openings for other trades to
eliminate cutting.
- Build in accordance with the dimensions, thicknesses and heights shown on drawings, plumb, level
and in the designated position within the tolerances of AS 3700, clause 11.5
- Allow no part to rise more than 1000mm above adjacent unfinished work. Rake back advanced
work, build all blockwork in bond and avoid toothing wherever possible.
- Build in as necessary all reinforcements, arch bars, lintels, frames, straps, bolts, lugs, wall ties,
metalwork, damp-proof courses and flashings, etc.
- Re-lay, in fresh mortar, bricks/blocks accidentally moved after initial laying.
- Keep mortar stains to a minimum and protect horizontal ledges, finished sills and the like from
mortar droppings as work proceeds.
- Before mortar sets hard, remove excess mortar. Scrub brickwork and blockwork within 24 hours of
laying using a bristle brush plus detergent if necessary. Removal of excess mortar with acid is not
permitted.
- Protect new and incomplete brickwork with coverings, temporary bracing or the like - AS 3700,
clause 11.9.
- Form control joints where directed by the Architect and in accordance with AS 3700. Unless noted
otherwise, the maximum unjointed length of wall to be 10m.
4.6 DAMP-PROOF COURSES
Location
General
- Provide damp-proof courses as follows:
. Timber floors: In the first course below the level of the underside of ground floor timbers in
internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls.
. Cavity walls built off slabs on ground: In the bottom course of the outer leaf, continuous
horizontally across the cavity and up the inner face bedded in mortar, turned 30 mm into the inner
leaf 1 course above.
. Masonry veneer construction: In the bottom course of the outer leaf, continuous horizontally
across the cavity. Fasten to the inner frame 75 mm above floor level.
. Walls adjoining infill floor slabs on membranes: In the course above the underside of the slab in
internal walls and inner leaves of cavity walls. Project 40 mm and dress down over the membrane
turned up against the wall.
Height
- Not less than:
. 150 mm above the adjacent finished ground level.
. 75 mm above the finished paved or concrete area.
. 50 mm above the finished paved or concreted area and protected from the direct effect of the
weather.
Installation
- General: Lay in long lengths. Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at
joints. Step as necessary, but not exceeding 2 courses per step for brickwork and 1 course per step
for blockwork. Sandwich damp-proof courses between mortar.
- Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions of damp-proof courses and waterproof
membranes.
- Lap sealing: Seal with a bituminous adhesive and sealing compound.
4.7 SLIP JOINTS
General
Provide slip joints to top of all vertically unreinforced masonry walls supporting concrete slabs and
other concrete elements.
Protection
Keep the slip joints in place and protect from displacement.
4.8 JOINTING AND FINISHING

Location and spacing
Provide contraction joints, expansion joints or articulation joints to AS 3700 clause 4.8.
Joint thickness
10mm within the tolerances given in AS 3700 Joint finish:
Blockwork for plaster:
Cut off flush
Internal Blockwork: Where not rendered to be lightly rolled joints suitable for painting. To Preparation
and Food Trading areas to be dense flush joints.
4.9 BONDING AND TYING
- Build all work in stretcher bond and maintain existing bond.
- Wall ties shall be stainless steel grade 316.
- Space wall ties in accordance with AS 3700, Clause 3.4 and as specified in the Structural drawings.
- Keep all cavities clean and free from mortar droppings, using cavity battens.
- Fix to concrete or steel columns and at the junction with concrete walls with ‘Brunswick’ frame ties
built at least 250mm into the horizontal joint and fix to the structure as close as possible to the
course line. Ties to be fixed to steelwork or concrete using a minimum of 2 no. power fixings.
- Mechanically fix all blockwork and brickwork ‘facing’ leaves to precast / tilt-up concrete panels with
proprietary strap ties fixed back to the panels and built into the brickwork / blockwork as detailed on
the structural engineer’s drawings.
4.10 WEEPHOLES
Location
Provide weepholes to external leaves of cavity walls in the course immediately above flashings, and
cavity fill, and at the bottoms of unfilled cavities.
Form
Open perpends.
Maximum spacing
1200 mm.
4.11 DOOR FRAMES
Build in all door frames as the work proceeds. Generally allow for lugs at 400 to 450mm centres
except Fire door frames which have lugs to sizes and centres required by the fire test report pertaining
to the particular type of door. Grout solid all cavities behind frames.
4.12 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK DUCT RISERS
General
Build a one-piece corrosion resistant metal tray to the masonry duct risers at roof level.
Installation
Cut an opening for the riser. Turn tray edges up 25 mm around the opening 13 mm clear of the walls.
Externally turn the tray up 100 mm under the stepped flashing and down 100 mm over the apron
flashing. Lap and solder joints.
Weepholes
Provide 2 weepholes through the masonry duct riser walls on opposite sides immediately above the
tray.
4.13 REINFORCED AND GROUTED BLOCKWORK
Cleaning core holes
- General: Provide purpose-made cleanout blocks or machine cut a cleaning hole at the base of each
grouted core.
- Location: Locate on the side of the wall which is to be rendered or otherwise concealed.
- Cleaning: Rod cores to dislodge mortar fins protruding from the blocks and mortar droppings from
reinforcement. Remove through the clean-out blocks.
Grouting
- Extent: Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, all 140mm and 190mm blockwork is to be fully
core filled.
- Commencement: Do not commence until grout spaces have been cleaned out and the mortar joints
have attained sufficient strength to resist blow-outs.
- Height of lift: Limit the height of individual lifts in any pour to make sure that the grout can be
thoroughly compacted to fill all voids.
- Compaction: Compact by vibration or by rodding.
- Topping up: On the completion of the last lift, top up the grout after 10 min to 30 min, and vibrate or
rod to mix with the previous pour.
4.14 INCIDENTAL WORK
- Chases: Refer to AS 3700, Clause 11.4 and, as far as possible, provide for chases to be made as
the work rises. No horizontal chase will be allowed and no vertical chase may be closer than
600mm to an element providing lateral support. No chase may be more than 20mm deep. Diagonal
chases are not permitted. Perform all miscellaneous incidental blockwork as required throughout
and for other trades. Make good after other trades.
- Build-in flashings progressively with all steelwork, plumbing and electrical items within cavities
separated from external leaf with flashings bent around and taken 100mm beyond.
- Perform all miscellaneous incidental blockwork as required throughout and for other trades. Make
good after other trades.
4.15 COMPLETION
- Complete all contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders
issued by the Architect.
- On completion clean up all mortar droppings, debris, etc., remove all scaffolding, make good all
putlog holes and blemishes and leave all work in a first class condition.
- Protect all facework surfaces where necessary to avoid damage during other building operations.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03360 CONCRETE FINISHES
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
The work of this section includes but is not limited to:
Preparation supply and execution of concrete finishes as shown on Finishes Schedule and in full
accordance with the non-slip requirements for all floor finishes in concrete.
Note that applied floor finishes such as epoxy coatings and concrete sealers are to be provided in full
accordance with the product manufacturer’s specifications and to an approved sample panel for each of
the listed finishes.
Off form concrete surfaces are subject to specific quality control measures and are to be specified with
full colour and tolerance level requirements as applicable to each of the listed types.
Preparation supply and installation of bagged finish.
102 Related Work

Concrete Coloured concrete flooring
Cement render Waterproofing and tanking

A. The selected sub-contractor is to have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the application of the
specified or similar material, and is to be known for reliability, performance and quality of work.
B. At a location and time to be selected by the architect construct a complete prototypical
installation. Approx. 3m square of each type of finish is required. Include all elements provided
under this section and finish in every respect. On approval by the architect, the prototype will
become the standard for the remaining work, and will remain as part of the work.
Obtain approval for colour from the architect.
104 References
AS 1379 2007 Specification and supply of concrete. Plus Supplement 1-2008 and 2 Amdts
2009, 2015.
AS 3610.1 2010 Formwork for concrete –Documentation and surface finish.
AS 3700 2011 Masonry structures. There is 1 Supplement 2012, 2 Amdts, 2012, 2015
AS 3799 1998 Liquid membrane-forming curing compounds for concrete.
HB 64 2002 Guide to concrete construction. Chapters 8 and 15.
HB 198 2014 Guide to the specification and testing of slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces
CIA Z39-2008 Render finishes.

Deliver materials in sealed (where applicable) containers and store in a dry location on the site.
106 Submissions
The architect will supply to the contractor a sample of the required material from the range obtained from
the supplier.
The sample will indicate all aspects of the required finish, size of granules, colour, texture, finish etc.
An appropriate supplier's specification may be available from the architect.
107 Warranty
Provide a warranty to the proprietor covering cracking, peeling and fading for a period of years.
201 General
Formed concrete finishes: Provide formed concrete finishes with off form concrete surfaces
conforming to control panel installation for tolerance levels and to colour control measures to ensure
compliance with Class 2 finish.
Show all visible components of the finished surface on the control panel and carry out all modifications
to ensure compliance.
Obtain approval from the architect prior to commencing work.
Unformed concrete finishes: Provide non slip self-finished floor surfaces meeting the listed R value for
the non-slip and to finishes listed within the Finishes Schedule.
Coordinate floor finishes with provision of line markings and tactile indicators where required for the
Access provisions of the Building Code of Australia.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 03360 CONCRETE FINISHES
Applied concrete finishes: Provide applied finishes to specific locations scheduled on the Interior and
Exterior Finishes Schedule, all to approved submission of samples.
Ensure non slip finish to floors.
202 Materials
Concrete surface Finish Comments
Floors -sealed concrete Fosroc Nitroflor 150 HP-FC Refer to Interior Finishes
Schedule
External walkway screed Dulux Avista Waterbased Refer to Exterior Finishes
Concrete Sealer Schedule
Exposed concrete columns Class 2 off form finish with Fosroc Refer to Exterior Finishes
Nitocote SN502 penetrating Schedule
sealer
301 Examination
Inspect surfaces to be treated and notify architect of any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate and
carry out all remedial work to suit.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations
302 Preparation
Make good damage in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor.
Provide and install required scaffolding, hoisting equipment, etc. in accordance with statutory authority
regulations.
Mask dissimilar materials adjacent to surfaces to be treated in order to avoid contact, e.g. metal frames
and cappings.
303 Application
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or approved sample regarding mixing of
materials and application methods.
304 Finish
Match approved sample panel
305 Protection
Protect finished surfaces against damage until Practical Completion.
306 Cleaning
At completion of work remove debris, scaffolding, erection materials, etc. and leave surfaces in a
condition entirely satisfactory to the architect.
307 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 03360 CONCRETE FINISHES
SECTION 03410 Structural steelwork
03410 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
1 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1.1 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification, the definitions included in AS/NZS 5131 and the following apply:
- Contractor: the party responsible for the relevant scope of work. The contractor shall be designated
by the contractual documentation.
- Hold point: an identified point in a process beyond which the relevant work cannot proceed without
approval.
- Project Drawings: the set of drawings that describe in a diagrammatic fashion the extent and detail
of the Works and the relationship of the Works to the overall construction. The Project Drawings
may include the detail necessary to fabricate and erect the Works, depending on the contractual
relationships established for the project.
- Steelwork: the fabricated structural steel.
- Witness point: An identified point in a construction process at which an activity is observed.
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
For the purposes of this specification, the following abbreviations apply:
- AESS: Architecturally exposed structural steelwork
- ASI: Australian Steel Institute
- CC: Construction Category (CC1, CC2, CC3, CC4)
- CompMP: Compliance Management Plan
- EPD: Environmental Product Declaration
- ESC: ASI Environmental Sustainability Charter
- ESM: Erection Sequence Methodology
- FC: Fabrication Category (FC1, FC2)
- IL: Importance Level
- ILAC: International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation
- ITP: Inspection and Test Plan
- MDR: Manufacturer’s Data Report
- NDE: Non-Destructive Examination
- NSSCS: The ASI National Structural Steelwork Compliance Scheme
- PC: Coating quality level
- QP: Quality Plan
- SC: Service Category (SC1, SC2)
- SDoC: Supplier Declaration of Conformity
- SCA: Steelwork Compliance Australia
- UNO: unless noted otherwise
- WPQR: Welding Procedure Qualification Record
- WQR: Welder Qualification Record
- WPR: Welding Procedure Record
- WPS: Welding Procedure Specification
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 22 SECTION 03410 STRUCTURAL STEEL
2 GENERAL
2.1 SCOPE OF WORK – STRUCTURAL STEEL

The work covered in this Specification consists of:
- The supply of materials and fabrication of structural steel components for the Works, as shown and
described on the Project Drawings and in this Specification
- The supply of all associated welding consumables and bolted connection components for both in-
shop and on-site assembly of the Works
- Shop detailing documentation
- Surface preparation
- Corrosion protection, including ‘touch-up’ repairs
- Handling and storage of all materials and components
- Loading and transportation of fabricated components to the job site
- Erection of the components and assemblies on-site
- Fixing of adjoining building elements connected to or supported on the structural steel
- The quality control of all materials, components, assemblies and processes associated with the
scope of work
- The compliance management of all materials, components and finished assemblies associated with
the scope of the work.
Table B.3 of AS/NZS 5131 details a list of responsibilities to be assigned.
For the responsibilities assigned under the scope of the project contract, if requested, the steelwork
contractor shall provide a list of named personnel and organisations corresponding to the entries in
Table B.3 of AS/NZS 5131 at least 5 working days prior to the respective portion of the works being
undertaken.
All work on this project shall be undertaken by competent personnel. Requirements and examples of
qualifications for competent personnel are contained in AS/NZS 5131.
Comply with: Importance Level 2, Region A1; Terrain Category 2.5
Product substitution
Conform to PRODUCTS, GENERAL, Substitutions in the Preliminaries work section.
2.3 CONFLICTS
If there is a conflict in specified requirements, such conflicts shall be documented, advised to relevant
parties and resolved using a managed process.
2.4 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

The contractor shall allow for the extent of liaison and coordination necessary with adjoining trades to
identify all necessary fitments, flashing plates, brackets, holding down bolts and the like that either
support or are supported by, or otherwise interact with the steelwork under scope of this project.
All work shall be undertaken in accordance with the Project Drawings and shall comply with the
various Australian Standards and other reference documents as prescribed in this technical
specification.
2.5 SUSPENSION OF SERVICES FROM STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

- Approval to suspend services from the structural steelwork is to be obtained from the
Superintendent. Holes may not be drilled in steelwork without approval.
- Generally, ceiling, A/C ducting and pipes not exceeding 50mm diameter may be suspended from
purlins, but other plumbing or fire sprinkler pipes are to be suspended only from beams or trusses.
Fixings are to be made to the webs of purlins. No attachments are to be made to the flanges.
- Beams or truss members may not be drilled to attach fixings but in lieu, welding or clamps are to be
used. Except for minor fixings, attachment shall be made to the top chord adjacent to a panel point.
3 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
3.1 STANDARDS
The following Standards and codes applicable to and referenced in this Specification shall be
regarded as describing the minimum standard of materials and workmanship to be provided:
Standard Title
AS 1111 ISO metric hexagonal commercial bolts and screws
AS/NZS 1163 Cold-formed structural steel hollow sections
AS/NZS 1214 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse thread
series) (ISO 10684:2004, MOD)
AS/NZS 1252.1 High-strength steel bolt assemblies comprising bolts, nuts and washers for
structural engineering – Part 1: Technical requirements
AS/NZS 1252.2 High-strength steel bolt assemblies comprising bolts, nuts and washers for
structural engineering – Part 2: Verification testing
AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip – Coatings of zinc and
zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium
AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding (several parts, as applicable)
AS/NZS 1594 Hot-rolled steel flat products
AS 1627.4 Metal finishing – Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces – Abrasive blast
cleaning of steel
AS 1710 Non-destructive testing – Ultrasonic testing of carbon and low alloy steel plate
and universal sections – Test methods and quality classification
AS 2207 Non-destructive testing – Ultrasonic testing of fusion welded joints in carbon and
low alloy steel
AS/NZS 2312.1 Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the
use of protective coatings – paint coatings
AS/NZS 2312.2 Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the
use of protective coatings – hot-dip galvanizing
AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip – Coatings of zinc and
zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium
AS 3597 Structural and pressure vessel steel – Quenched and tempered plate
AS/NZS 3678 Structural steel – Hot-rolled plates, floorplates and slabs
AS/NZS 3679.1 Structural steel – Part 1: Hot-rolled bars and sections
AS/NZS 3679.2 Structural steel – Part 2: Welded I sections
AS 3750.1 Paints for steel structures Epoxy mastic (two-pack) – For rusted steel
AS 3894.3 Site testing of protective coatings – Determination of dry film thickness
AS 3894.4 Site testing of protective coatings – Assessment of degree of cure
AS 3894.5 Site testing of protective coatings – Determination of surface profile
AS 3894.6 Site testing of protective coatings Determination of residual contaminants
AS 4100 Steel structures
AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed steel structures
AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles
AS/NZS 5131 Structural steelwork – Fabrication and erection
SA TS 101 Design of post-installed and cast-in fastenings for use in concrete
SA TS 102 Structural steel – Limits on elements added
SA TS 103 Welding to AS/NZS 1554 Parts 1, 5 and 7 – Limits on boron in parent materials
3.2 OTHER REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

This technical specification shall be read in conjunction with:
- ASI TN011 ‘AS/NZS 5131 Structural steelwork – Fabrication and erection: Implementation guide for
engineers, specifiers and procurers’.
- ASI ‘Practical guide to planning the safe erection of steel structures’.
4 DESIGN, DOCUMENTATION AND QUALITY CONTROL/MANAGEMENT
4.1 CONSTRUCTION CATEGORY

In accordance with the requirements of AS/NZS 5131, Construction Category CC3 shall be adopted
unless specified on the Project Drawings.
4.2 TREATMENT GRADES

Unless noted otherwise on the Project Drawings, for the elements on this project, the treatment grades
according to AS/NZS 5131 shall be:
Element Treatment grade
1 All painted structural steelwork UNO on Project Drawings P2
4.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A quality management system complying as a minimum to AS ISO 9001 is required to be operated by
the Contractor for the Works and for a specified product or service.
4.4 QUALITY DOCUMENTATION

If requested, provide quality documentation as required by Clause 4.5.1 of AS/NZS 5131.
If requested, provide a Quality Plan as required by Clause 4.5.2 of AS/NZS 5131.
4.5 CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCE

The following certifications are required for this project:
- All structural steel shall be sourced from mills with a relevant JAS ANZ accredited third party
certification scheme such as the ACRS Scheme (see http://steelcertification.com/). Alternative
sourcing of third party certified structural steel shall be submitted for review and must be approved
prior to the commencement of procurement.
- High strength structural bolts shall be verified to AS/NZS 1252.2.
The procurement, fabrication and erection of structural steelwork shall be undertaken under a
documented Compliance Management Plan (CompMP). The CompMP shall include the requirements
of the Quality Plan in AS/NZS 5131 and the following:
- Process and documentation checklists for purchasing steel
- Process for identification and traceability of steel and steelwork from purchasing through to
completion of the project
- Process and documentation checklists for erection of structural steelwork
- Assigned responsibilities for compliance management, including names and CV’s of relevant
personnel.
If requested, the CompMP shall be provided by the contractor prior to first procurement of materials for
the project.
4.6 IDENTIFICATION AND TRACEABILITY

The Contractor shall implement systems to ensure identification and traceability complying with
AS/NZS 5131 for the appropriate Construction Category, including by all subcontractors.
4.7 PURCHASING – COMPONENTS AND SUBCONTRACTED SERVICES

The processes and documentation required for purchasing of components or subcontracted services
shall meet the requirements of Clause 4.6 of AS/NZS 5131.
4.8 SUBMITTALS
The submittals required are defined in AS/NZS 5131. The timing on specific submittals shall be:
Submission Timeframe Hold/Witness

Origin of steel 48 hours after fabricated steel delivery to site Witness
Submission of shop drawings Allow four weeks for examination Hold
Notice for inspections 48 hours’ notice required (UNO on Project Drawing) Witness
In particular, submittals shall include the following:

Personnel
If requested, submit names, CV’s, qualifications, roles and responsibilities for all key personnel to be
involved with the project.
Quality plan and ITPs
The requirements for submission of Quality Plans and ITP’s are provided in Section 13 Inspection,
testing and correction.
Products and materials
Origin of steel
The requirements in AS/NZS 5131 for documentation to demonstrate compliance with Australian
Standards apply.
Steel shall be certified by an accredited third party certifier. If requested, provide documentation to
demonstrate JAS ANZ accredited third party certified steel has been sourced for this project. Where
this is not possible, specific written approval shall be obtained for non-JAS ANZ accredited third party
certified steel.
Chemical composition of steel
In addition to the requirements of the Australian Standards for structural steel (refer Section 5.2
Structural steel), the steel shall also comply with the following requirements for boron content:
- The material test certificates shall report all elements required by the Australian Standards listed
above, plus total boron.
- If boron is not specified on the material test certificates, then the material shall be tested to
determine the total boron.
Parent steel materials with a total boron equal to or exceeding 0.0008% will require requalification of
welding procedures using the higher boron content material.
Bolts
Provide documentation demonstrating compliance to the relevant Standard (refer Section 5.3 Bolt
assemblies) prior to delivery of bolts to site. Bolts delivered to site without complete documentation
shall be rejected.
The high strength structural bolts for this project are required to have verification testing to
AS/NZS 1252.2. Provide documentation and a ‘Supplier Declaration of Conformity’ as defined in
AS/NZS 1252.2.
If requested, submit details of the bolt tensioning procedure and calibration of the process and
equipment to be used.
If requested, submit details of training to be provided to personnel involved with bolt tensioning.
Shop drawings
Submit shop drawings and any supporting documentation providing the range of information required
for the shop detailing documentation in AS/NZS 5131.
Shop drawings are to include all provisions documented in all Project Drawings across all design
disciplines involved in the project.
Shop drawing numbers shall be maintained. Changes to shop drawings shall be clouded.
The contractor is to submit all proposed changes to the documented design for approval prior to
submitting shop drawings for approval.
The shop drawings shall be reviewed and approved, certifying that they have been checked for
compliance with the technical specification and Project Drawings by the Contractor.
Before fabrication is commenced, submit to the Superintendent for examination an electronic PDF set
of the approved shop drawings including marking diagrams and a 3D model of the structural
steelwork. Free software capable of reviewing the model and a hardcopy set of the drawings must be
provided if requested by the Superintendent. Alternatively provide an electronic PDF set of the shop
drawings including marking diagrams as well as a hardcopy set of the drawings.
Examination of the drawings shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the responsibility
for ensuring that the work is complete and accurate.
If the drawings are to be submitted in stages, a key or location plan shall be submitted with each
stage.
No fabrication shall commence until shop drawings relating to that part have been reviewed.
Execution details
Subcontractors
If requested, submit names and contact details of any proposed fabricator, detailer, surface
preparation contractor, painter/galvanizer and erector/installer.
Fabrication
Provide documentation to demonstrate NSSCS certified fabricators or subcontractors will be utilised
for the Works.
Approval to use non-NSSCS certified fabricators must be formally requested and approved. In this
case, documentation shall be provided to demonstrate compliance with AS/NZS 5131.
If requested, submit a fabrication program showing the proposed sequence of operations and time
required.
If requested, submit plan for the marking of members to ensure material and component traceability
meets the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
If requested, submit the completed ‘Supplier declaration of conformity’ (SDoC) for the fabricated
structure or components, as defined in AS/NZS 5131.
Erection documentation
If requested, submit the ‘Erection Sequence Methodology’ (ESM) as defined in AS/NZS 5131 for
review and approval.
If required by the ESM, submit calculations to justify the adequacy of the structure for the intended
erection methodology.
Connections
If requested for bolted connections, submit inspection records for completed installation.
If requested for bolted connections not fully documented, submit proposals for approval.
If requested for bolted connections requiring rectification, submit proposals for approval before
proceeding.
For anchor bolts that do not meet documented location tolerances, submit proposals for rectification
for approval before proceeding.
For temporary connections, if not documented, submit proposals for approval.
If splicing of structural members is proposed, submit details for approval.
Structural steel members shall be in single lengths unless otherwise shown on the shop drawings and
approved by the Superintendent. Splices and joints shall develop the full strength of the members
connected unless otherwise shown on the Structural Drawings.
Where alternative anchors are proposed, submit documentation for approval to substantiate the
anchor capacity to carry the load where mechanical or chemical anchors are required or proposed for
the support or fixing of structural steel.
Steelwork exposed to view
If requested, submit details of proposed member, connection and component marking for steelwork
identified as AESS or otherwise exposed to view.
Rectification works
Proposals for rectification works shall be submitted in writing and approved before being undertaken.
Non-conforming work
Where a section of the Works does not comply with the requirements of the specification and the
Project Drawings (including requirements for inspection and testing), the Contractor shall submit a
non-conformance report detailing the non-conformance and the proposed rectification method for
approval. Where deemed necessary, the non-conformance report may be reviewed and/or inspected
by the relevant consultant(s).
4.9 INSPECTION
Inspection scheduling
Refer Section 4.8 Submittals for inspection notice.
Inspection points
So that inspection may be made, provide notice at the following stages:
- Testing of welding procedures and welder qualification tests.
- Commencement of shop fabrication
- Commencement of surface preparation prior to protective coating
- Completion of protective coating before delivery to site.
- Steelwork on site before erection.
- Commencement of site erection
- Anchor bolts in position before casting in.
- Completion of erection prior to enclosing with cladding or finishes.
No roof or wall cladding nor other finishes shall be installed until the Engineer has inspected the
completed steel framework. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and safe access to all elements
of the work to allow the Engineer to undertake these inspections. The Contractor shall be responsible
for all expenses and allow for the time associated with these requirements.
5 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
5.1 GENERAL
Members and components shall be packed, supported, lifted and transported in a manner to prevent
distortion, loss of camber or damage to the steelwork and its protective coating.
Damaged items shall be reported and rectified or replaced. Where rectified, the method of rectification
shall be subject to approval.
Documentation supplied with materials and components shall conform to the requirements of
AS/NZS 5131.
5.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL

All structural steel materials and components shall conform to the following table UNO:
Component To conform with Australian Grade
Standard
Hot rolled steel sections AS/NZS 3679.1; TS 102 300; 350
Plates and flats AS/NZS 3678; AS/NZS 1594; 250; 300; 350; 400; 450;
TS 102 WR350
AS/NZS 1594; TS 102 HA250; HA300; HA350;
HA400, HW350
Hollow sections: AS/NZS 1163; TS 102
Circular C250L0; C350L0; C450L0
Square C350L0; C450L0
Rectangular C350L0; C450L0
Welded beams and columns AS/NZS 3679.2; TS 102 300; 400
Shear studs (composite slab to steel) AS/NZS 1554.2 380
Quench & tempered plate AS 3597 500; 600; 700; 900; 1000
Purlins and girts AS 1397 G450; G500; G550
5.3 BOLT ASSEMBLIES

Bolt designation
Designation To conform with Tightening process Property class
Australian Standard
4.6/S AS 1111 Snug tight 4.6
8.8/S AS/NZS 1252.1 Snug tight 8.8
8.8/TB AS/NZS 1252.1 Fully tensioned to AS 4100 as a bearing 8.8
type joint
8.8/TF AS/NZS 1252.1 Fully tensioned to AS 4100 as a friction 8.8
type joint.
Connecting surfaces to be left uncoated.
UNO all bolts except holding down and purlin bolts to be Grade 8.8.
Bolt assembly verification
High strength bolt assemblies to AS/NZS 1252.1 shall be verified to AS/NZS 1252.2. Documentation
to meet the requirements of AS/NZS 1252.2 shall be provided.
Bolt finish
All bolts shall be hot dip galvanized to AS/NZS 1214 UNO. Refer Project Drawings for additional
requirements.
5.4 WELDING CONSUMABLES

Welding consumables shall conform to the requirements of AS 4100, based on the yield strength of
the steel to be welded, as defined in the table below:
Nominal yield strength of steel to be welded To conform with Australian Standard
≤ 500 MPa AS/NZS 1554.1
>500MPa; ≤ 690 MPa AS/NZS 1554.4
Nominal yield strength of steel to be welded Nominal tensile strength of weld metal, fuw
(MPa)
All steel with Grade ≤ 300 MPa 430
All steel with 300 < Grade ≤ 450 MPa 490
Quench & tempered steel to Grade 690 MPa 760
The following Electrodes shall also comply with the following:

Base Material Grade Electrode Standard
300 PLUS E43XX AS/NZS 4855
W50XX AS/NZS 2717
C350, C450 E49XX AS/NZS 4855
W55XX AS/NZS 2717
316 Stainless Steel E316L AS/NZS 4854 / AS/NZS ISO 14343
Rebar E6218 AS/NZS 4857
5.5 MECHANICAL AND CHEMICAL ANCHORS

Mechanical and chemical anchors shall meet the requirements defined in SA TS 101.
5.6 STUDS AND SHEAR CONNECTORS

Studs and shear connectors shall meet the requirements defined in AS/NZS 5131.
5.7 SPECIAL FASTENERS

Special fasteners shall meet the requirements defined in AS/NZS 5131.
5.8 FASTENERS FOR THIN GAUGE COMPONENTS

Fasteners for thin gauge components shall meet the requirements defined in AS/NZS 5131.
5.9 LOCKING DEVICES

Where required, locking devices to prevent loosening of fasteners are noted on the Project Drawings.
Locking devices shall meet the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
5.10 FOOTING BOLTS

Footing bolts shall meet the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
Bolts and other structural items cast into concrete shall be accurately located. This may be achieved
by the use of suitable templates firmly located and accurately surveyed prior to concrete being poured.
The Superintendent shall be notified of any discrepancies in the placement of holding down bolts prior
to the erection of steelwork. Any remedial work required shall be at the Superintendent’s discretion.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses and delays associated with the remedial work.
Protect threads on nuts with grease or tape to prevent adhesion of mortar during concreting
operations.
5.11 GROUTING MATERIALS

Materials used for grouting under steel base plates and bearing plates shall meet the requirements
defined in AS/NZS 5131. A minimum grout strength of 40MPa is required UNO on Project Drawings.
Grout forming part of a fire rated wall/element shall achieve the same fire rating properties as that
wall/element.
5.12 TESTING
Lamellar tearing
If required, joint details which are susceptible to lamellar tearing (LT) are indicated on the Project
Drawings as “LT susceptible”. The identified plate in joints that have been assessed as ‘LT
susceptible’ shall be ultrasonically tested to AS 1710 Class 1.
Z-plate requirement
Joints that are designated ‘LT susceptible’ (see Section 5.12 Testing - Lamellar tearing) and further
require plate to a nominated Z-value are indicated on the Project Drawings with a designated Z-value.
The plate identified in these joints shall be ordered to the designated Z-value and shall be
ultrasonically tested to AS 1710 Class 1.
Supplementary ultrasonic testing
Supplementary ultrasonic testing to AS 1710 Class 1 is required for all plates 40mm thickness and
over.
6 PREPARATION, ASSEMBLY AND FABRICATION
6.1 GENERAL
Operations comprising cutting, shaping, holing and assembly into fabricated components shall
conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
Particular requirements from AS/NZS 5131 are outlined in Section 0
Particular requirements, together with a reference to the applicable clause in AS/NZS 5131.
6.2 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Architecturally exposed structural steelwork (AESS) 6.1.5
Refer Section 10 Architecturally exposed structural steel for further details.
Identification and traceability 6.2
Hard stamping
If required, areas where hard stamping is prohibited are designated on the Project
Drawings.
Identification marks 6.2
If required, areas where identification marks are not permitted or shall not be visible
after completion are designated on the Project Drawings.
Cutting
Cutting processes 6.5.1
No additional requirements.
Yielding regions 6.5.1
If required, yielding regions for seismic design categories D & E are designated on the
Project Drawings.
Fatigue detail category 6.5.2
If required, details with fatigue detail category ≥ 80 MPa are designated on the Project
Drawings.
Holing
Friction-type connections 6.7.4
If required, friction-type connections are designated on the Project Drawings in the
manner detailed in Section 5.3 Bolt assemblies - Bolt designation.
Full contact bearing surfaces 6.8
If required, full contact bearing surfaces are designated on the Project Drawings.
Assembly
Camber and preset 6.9
If required, camber and preset requirements are designated on the Project Drawings.
Assembly check 6.10
7 WELDING
7.1 GENERAL
Welding shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
Particular requirements from AS/NZS 5131 are outlined in Section 0
Weld category, together with a reference to the applicable clause in AS/NZS 5131.
Minimum nominal tensile strength of weld metal to be 430MPa.
All welds to achieve full strength of the connecting element. Where full strength can be obtained by
fillet welds, welding is to be a minimum of 6mm fillet weld continuous all around unless drawn and
detailed otherwise.
All welds shall be SP quality unless noted otherwise.
Fillet welds performed on site are to be GP quality.
All Complete Penetration Butt Welds (CPBW) shall be SP quality.
7.2 WELD CATEGORY

The weld categories shall be as per the table below UNO:
Element Weld category (GP/SP/FP)
Shop fabrication SP
Site welding GP
All complete penetration butt welds SP
Weld categories for specific details are indicated on the Project Drawings.

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
General
Additional welding requirements 7.1.2
Weld details 7.1.3
Weld category, size, type and extent are designated on the Project Drawings.
Non-destructive examination 7.1.3
Extent of non-destructive examination (NDE) is given in Section 13.3 Particular
requirements - Inspection of welding - Scope of inspection after welding.
Welding plan
Welding processes 7.3
Qualification of welding procedures and welding personnel
Impact tests 7.4.1.1
Welding production testing 7.4.1.2
Qualification of welders 7.4.2
Qualification of welding supervisor or coordinator 7.4.3
Preparation and execution of welding
Temporary attachments 7.5.6
If required, areas where welding of temporary attachments are not permitted are
designated on the Project Drawings.
Run-on/run-off tabs 7.5.9.1
Backing plates 7.5.9.2
Post-weld heat treatment 7.5.14
Arc strikes 7.5.15.1
Dressing of butt welds 7.5.15.1
Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Acceptance criteria
Alternative acceptance criteria 7.6.1
Alternative assessment of nonconformity 7.6.1
Fatigue design assumptions 7.6.3
8 MECHANICAL FASTENING
8.1 GENERAL
Mechanical fastening shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
Type /TB and /TF bolts are to be tightened using either the part-turn method or load indicating
washers. Where the part-turn method is used, the nut and shank are to be clearly marked to allow
easy visual identification of degree of turn.
Where load indicating washers are proposed, if requested, provide manufacturer installation data to
the engineer prior to installation. Ensure all washers required by the manufacturer are installed in the
correct location relative to the part to be turned prior to tightening.
Particular requirements from AS/NZS 5131 are outlined in Section 8.2 Particular requirements,
together with a reference to the applicable clause in AS/NZS 5131.

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Bolts, nuts and washers
Locking of nuts 8.2.3
Washers 8.2.4
Preparation of contact surfaces on connected plies
Coating of friction-type connection surfaces 8.4.2
Friction type connection surfaces are not to be coated unless noted otherwise on the
Project Drawings.
Tensioning of high strength bolts
Part-turn tightening 8.5.6
Specialised fasteners 8.7
Installation of mechanical and chemical anchors 8.8.1
Mechanical and chemical anchors, where required, are noted on the Project Drawings.
9 SURFACE TREATMENT AND CORROSION PROTECTION
9.1 GENERAL
Surface treatment and corrosion protection shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
The Coating Quality Level (PC1, PC2) shall be assessed according to AS/NZS 5131.
All surfaces shall be coated as specified within 4 hours of surface preparation for shop work and 2
hours for field work. In unfavourable locations these times may have to be decreased.
Surface treatment to AS2312-2002 (unless noted otherwise).
Durability – Years to first maintenance: Exposed (visible) 15 years
Concealed 25+ years
Paints referenced below are based on Dulux Protective Coatings. Thicknesses are Minimum Dry Film
Thickness.
Type A Class 2.5 blast clean. 75µm Zincanode 304. (IZS1)
Type B *Class 2.5 blast clean. 75µm Zincanode 402, 200µm Duramax GPE, 75µm Weathermax
HBR (Colour selected by Superintendent) (PUR5)
Type C 2 coats at 200µm Durabild STE over other coating types. Extend to 100mm above
paving, slab or ground level. For Type B, apply after zinc rich primer coat.
Type D Hot Dip Galvanised to 600g/m2 minimum coating mass.
* Ensure compatibility of all coatings.
Surface Atmospheric Parts of Steel Work
Treatment Corrosivity Category
Type A C1 or C2 Internal or External Concealed Steelwork
Type B C1 or C4 Visible Internal Steelwork or Steelwork
Exposed to Weather
Type C C5 Members in contact with the ground or below
finished floor level. (extend 100mm above
surface level).
Type D C4 Members in Cavity of External Brick Walls
including lintels.
Red oxide zinc phosphate shall comply with AS/NZS 3750.20 to a minimum dry film thickness of 50
microns.
Inorganic zinc silicate shall comply with AS/NZS 3750.15 to a minimum dry film thickness of 75
microns.
Paint systems to be all from the same manufacturer.

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Requirements for painting and galvanizing
Requirements for painting 9.2.3.1
Refer Project Drawings for steelwork designated to be coated.
In addition to protective coatings specified above, the bases of all columns including
the underside of baseplates shall be coated below finished floor level with 2 coats of
high build epoxy complying with AZ/NZS 3750.14 or 3750.1 having a minimum dry film
thickness of 400 microns. After erection apply two coats of high build epoxy to holding
down bolts, nuts and washers to previously treated baseplates. Touch up damaged
coatings on column bases.
Refer paint manufacturer’s instruction for any special instructions and additional
requirements.
Refer AS 1627.4 for surface preparation and surface cleanliness requirements.
Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with AS/NZS 5131.
For Site Testing of Protective Coatings:
- Surface profile measurement requirements to be in accordance with AS 3894.5
- Dry film thickness requirements to be in accordance with AS 3894.3
- Dry film curing requirements to be in accordance with AS 3894.4
Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
- Checks for the presence of measurement of and removal of soluble salts or non-
visible contaminants to be in accordance with AS 3894.6.
Damaged coatings 9.2.3.1
After erection and/or site welding make good any damage to shop finish immediately
after cleaning.
Steelwork specified as coated with inorganic zinc silicate shall have damage made
good with 2 coats of a zinc rich epoxy primer such as Dulux Zincanode 202 to a
minimum dry thickness of 100 microns.
Wherever damage occurs to a galvanised surface or edge, prepare surface to ST3,
degrease area, apply two coats of an approved 2 part cold galvanising compound or an
approved zinc rich paint strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s requirement to
provide a total film thickness of 0.1 mm. Finish with an Aluminium paint, blended into
the surrounding area to the Architects satisfaction.
Steelwork specified as painted with red oxide zinc phosphate shall be repaired with a
red oxide zinc phosphate applied to a minimum dry thickness of 50 microns.
For all other Coatings, including duplex Coatings:
- Site Repairs (e.g. after site welding)
. Bristle blast or power tool clean area to be treated. Apply 200µm Dulux Durebild
STE. Where Architectural finish is required, apply suitable primer and final coat to
suit the required treatment.
- Apply finish coats in accordance with Architectural requirements.
Where exposed to view touch up must be consistent with architectural finish. Provide a
coloured top coat to the approval of the Architect.
All touch up paints are to be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer immediately after cleaning.
Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Requirements for hot-dip galvanizing 9.2.3.2
Hot-dip galvanizing shall comply with AS/NZS 4680.
- Where steel is specified as being galvanised, prepare surface to Class 2½ AS
1627.4 and then treat by pickling and neutralising in accordance with the best trade
practice.
- Carry out galvanising to steel members by the Hot Dip process in accordance with
AS/NZS 4791 and 4792 to provide a uniform zinc coating thoroughly adherent and
weighing at least 600 g per square metre for general purposes.
- Galvanise bolts and nuts by the hot dip process in accordance with AS 1214.
Internal threads shall be tapped after galvanising. Surplus zinc shall be removed
from external threads by centrifuging, brushing or similar. External threads shall not
be recut.
- Take care with all members, but in particular with unsymmetrical sections such as
angles and channel members, to avoid distortion. Members may be straightened by
an approved method to achieve the original shape, provided the galvanised coating
is not damaged.
- Where galvanised surfaces are affected by welding, use a zinc/tin lead alloy in a
stick form such as CIG Galvanising Bar or similar, for repair. Apply the stick to the
damaged areas after vigorous cleaning with a wire brush. Apply the stick to the weld
area while it is still hot or, alternatively, pre heat the surface to be treated to 315°C.
Spread the molten alloy with a wire brush or flexible blade.
- Where the galvanised coating is specified as architectural finish, finish to the
member the galvanising is to be architectural grade and quality. Builder is to prepare
samples for the Superintendent to view and approve if acceptable standard. An
approved sample will be used as a measure of the finish and members outside this
will be rejected and require replacement at the builders cost.
- Rough Areas surrounding the welding or cutting should be buffed to a uniform
appearance.
- Sharp edges will normally be heavily coated with zinc but may sometimes need post
galvanizing inspection and dressing.
- At the design stage, ensure that the article to be galvanised will fit inside the
galvanising bath in a single dip and discuss with galvaniser provisions for adequate
filling, venting and draining. Ensure that the design will allow even zinc runoff. This
can have a significant effect on the ability to achieve a smooth finish. As a general
rule, the drainage should be a minimum of 30% of the cross sectional area of the
article.
- Specify steel which, when galvanized, will produce a 'normal' coating in appearance.
Certain steels containing silicon and / or phosphorous can produce coatings which
can be dull or patchy grey in colour, with a rough finish and may be brittle. As a
general rule the following criteria should be used:
. % Si < 0.04 %
. % Si + (2.5 x % P) < 0.09 %
. While dull coating denotes thicker and longer lasting protection, appearance is
adversely affected.
- In extreme cases shot blasting of deformed surfaces may be necessary depending
on the finish required. Examples of a requirement for blasting would be structural
CHS (Circular Hollow Sections) particularly lacquer coated in the warehouse where
part removal has allowed corrosion and texture to affect the steel surface.
- Specify the steel to be galvanized in accordance with Australian Standard
AS/NZS4680 and highlight the need for the coating to be free from runs, dags,
spikes, uneven surfaces and roughness or other defects that could affect
appearance.
- Welding quality should be free from porosity; all weld slag removed and grinding
marks minimized.
Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
- Inspection of the finished galvanized work must take place at the galvanizer's yard
prior to dispatch.
- To maintain optimum appearance, it is important that care be taken to ensure the
coating is not dirtied or damaged during transportation, site storage and or erection.
- If the galvanized coating is to be subsequently painted (Duplex Coating) the
galvanizer should be advised of the paint system to be used at the time of order, as
certain operating procedures may need to be taken to ensure the paint coating can
be properly applied.
- Differing time periods will temporarily show brightness variations at the early stages
of exposure but are a transitory effect.
- Care is required with site storage to provide open ventilation which prevents moisture
entrapment with resulting wet storage stain. This is normally a temporary condition
which does not affect the lift of the coating.
- As the galvanizing surface texture can vary and is dependent on steel chemical
composition, consult with the galvanizer on procurement.
For lintels less than 1km from the coast or R4 exposure classification:
Steel lintels shall have a duplex coating consisting of galvanised coating complying with
AS/NZS 4680, with a coating mass of at least 600g/m², and a coating of 50μm min. of
non-inhibitive epoxy primer (two-pack) to AS/NZS 3750.13, plus 200μm min. of high-
build epoxy micaceous iron oxide (two-pack) to AS 3750.1.
For lintels greater than 1km from the coast or R3 exposure classification:
Steel lintels hot-dip galvanised to comply with AS/NZS 4680, with a minimum coating
mass of 600g/m².
All nuts, bolts, washers, pins and other specified brackets and fastenings shall be hot
dip galvanised in accordance with AS/NZS 1214 UNO on Project Drawings.
Any galvanised steelwork receiving a paint coating shall be cleaned, degreased and
abrasive swapblast after galvanising. Alternatively submit details of paint manufactures
requirements for approval. Acid Etching shall not be used as part of the preparation.
Cold-formed sections 2.5mm and thinner shall be formed from steel strip coated in
accordance with AS 1397. Further surface treatment is not required UNO.
Preparation of steel surfaces
Preparation of exterior steelwork 9.3.2
Testing for soluble salts 9.3.2
Weather resistant steel surfaces 9.3.5
Surfaces in contact with concrete 9.3.7
Abrasive blasting
Abrasive blast cleaning 9.4.1
Alternative surface finishes 9.4.4
Sealing of enclosed spaces
Enclosed spaces 9.6.1
Sealed spaces 9.6.1
Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Fabrication and welding considerations
Rectification of surface defects 9.8.3
The fabricator shall rectify any surface defects not meeting the requirements of
AS/NZS 5131.
Surfaces to be painted 9.8.4
Surfaces to be galvanized 9.8.4
Treatment of cut edges 9.8.5
Welding and repair of pre-coated steel 9.8.6
Welding and repair of pre-coated steel shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
written instructions. Refer Section 9.2 Particular requirements - Requirements for
painting and galvanizing - Damaged coatings for additional information.
Application of paint coatings
Monitoring of conditions 9.9.10
Air and surface temperatures, relative humidity and dew point shall be regularly
monitored and recorded.
Testing of film continuity 9.9.16
Testing of degree of cure 9.9.17
Corrosion protection of fasteners 9.9.18
Application of galvanized coatings
Control of distortion 9.10.4
Galvanizing process – double dipping 9.10.5
Double dipping of galvanized components is permitted, subject to written approval for
the particular components.
Galvanizing process – test lot 9.10.5
End use of galvanized components 9.10.6
Adherence of coating 9.10.8
Wet storage staining 9.10.10
Wet storage staining shall be removed.
10 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
10.1 GENERAL
Architecturally exposed structural steel (AESS) shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
All visible steelwork to be treated as AESS3 unless the AESS category (1,2,3,4 or C) are designated
on the Project Drawings otherwise. Any comments on Project Drawings Specifying “smooth finish” is
deemed as AESS4.
If required, architecturally sensitive connection details are indicated on the Project Drawings.

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
General
Category AESS C elements 10.3
Where applicable, AESS C elements are designated on the Project Drawings.
Visual samples 10.3
Provide physical samples of all AESS4 elements as requested by the Architect.
Tolerances 10.5
11 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK ERECTION
11.1 GENERAL
Structural steelwork erection shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
The steelwork erection contractor shall supply and install all temporary bracing and the like necessary
for the safe erection of the structure.
The contractor shall be responsible for the temporary stability of the structure during construction.
The structure has been designed such that when all members are in place, all bolts are tightened and
all walls are in place, the system will be stable. However, there will necessarily occur intermittent
stages of partial completion when the structure may not be stable under all conditions. The Contractor
shall take adequate precautions to ensure stability and safety during these intermittent stages.
Such extra items supplied by the Contractor to expedite the erection shall remain the Contractor’s
property. All costs associated with these extra items shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Site planning
Lifting equipment 11.2.5
Erection sequence methodology 11.5.1
An Erection Sequence Methodology (ESM) shall be prepared if assessed as required
by AS/NZS 5131.
Temporary erection (trial assembly)
No additional requirements. 11.5.10
Supports
Temporary shims and packers 11.6.3
Temporary shims and packers used during erection shall either be removed or require
the same or greater strength and corrosion resistance properties of the supporting
steel.
Grouting at supports 11.6.4
Erection drawings
No additional requirements. 11.7
11.3 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY

The structural steel fabricator shall schedule, coordinate and sequence structural steel transportation
and delivery in cooperation with the erection of the structural steel by the structural steel erection
contractor.
Components noted as AESS shall be marked and particular care taken to meet the requirements for
handling in AS/NZS 5131.
The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to ensure safe loading, transportation, unloading and
storage of structural steel. The Work shall consist of loading at the Fabricator’s plant, transporting to
the site, and unloading and storing at the site, including temporary works for access.
Structural steel shall be loaded for shipping in such a manner that it can be transported and unloaded
at its destination in the correct orientation for erection without being excessively stressed, deformed,
or otherwise damaged.
Structural steel shall be stockpiled in such a manner to avoid excessive stress, deformation or other
damage while stored.
If requested, the Transportation Plan and schedule shall be provided not less than 7 Days before any
shipping begins.
Should the Contractor wish to break the steelwork into smaller sections to assist transport and
handling, he shall seek approval from the Superintendent and be liable for all additional costs and
associated lost time.
Provide all cleats, fittings, bolts etc. necessary to complete the structure and for fixing of Architectural
elements and finishes even if not specifically shown on the Structural Drawings.
12 GEOMETRICAL TOLERANCES
12.1 GENERAL
Fabrication and erection tolerances shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
Fabricate and erect beams with natural camber up.
Allow for and correct as necessary for all distortion and out of alignment caused by welding,
galvanising or other processes.
12.2 CLASS FOR FUNCTIONAL TOLERANCES

The tolerance class for functional tolerances shall be Class 1 UNO on the Project Drawings.

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Special or additional tolerances 12.1
- Steelwork shall finish to the levels and positions noted on the drawings to within a
tolerance of +or– 3mm.
- Beams and the like are to be fabricated and erected so that the mid point of any such
member is within 1/1000 span of its correct position (including camber).
- In making connections, drifting of unfair holes will not be permitted and holes not
matching properly shall be reamed or drilled out and larger bolt inserted.
- No member or part of member which has been bent or distorted shall be erected in
that condition. All straightening shall be done on the ground.
- All bolts and tie rods shall be left tight and all bevelled washers and plates properly
positioned.
13 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CORRECTION
13.1 GENERAL
Inspection, testing and correction shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
A quality plan shall be prepared covering each stage of the fabrication of the structure.
13.2 ADDITIONAL PROJECT-SPECIFIC TESTING

Testing of ‘LT susceptible’ joints
Completed welded joints which are indicted on the Project Drawings as ‘LT susceptible’ shall be
ultrasonically tested to AS 2207 and AS/NZS 1554.1. The extent of ultrasonic testing, if required, is
detailed on the Project Drawings.
Testing of highly stressed joints
Joints which are highly stressed and utilise thick plates may be susceptible to failure through reduced
ductility. Such locations, if required, are identified on the Project Drawings. The critical plates in such
joints shall be ultrasonically tested prior to fabrication. The extent of ultrasonic testing, if required, is
detailed on the Project Drawings.
Testing at the Superintendents Request
The Superintendent may at any time require any materials to be tested in accordance with the
requirements of the above listed codes and specifications. The cost of all such tests shall be borne by
the client but the contractor shall, if required, promptly supply at his own expense, test pieces as
required by the Superintendent.
Should the presence of faulty workmanship be suspected, the contractor will be directed to cut out the
parts affected and remove them for examination and testing. The contractor shall carry out all such
cutting and dismantling and making good to the approval of the Superintendent.
Should faulty workmanship and/or materials be disclosed by inspection the cost of dismantling, cutting
out and making good shall be borne by the contractor.

Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Inspection personnel
Competency of inspection personnel 13.2
No additional requirements
Inspection of materials and components
Inspection and test plan (ITP) 13.3.2
An ITP shall be prepared covering the inspection against the relevant Standards for the
materials and components.
Non-conforming steel or components 13.3.7
If the documentation supplied does not meet the requirements of AS/NZS 5131, the
steel or components shall be treated as non-conforming and treated as unidentified
steel according to the requirements of AS/NZS 5131.
Testing of non-conforming steel or components 13.3.8
Testing of non-conforming steel or components shall be to the requirements of
AS/NZS 5131.
Inspection of preparation and assembly
An ITP shall be prepared covering the inspection against the items specified in
Section 13.5.1 of AS/NZS 5131.
Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Inspection of welding
Inspection and test plan (ITP) 13.6.1.2
Section 13.6.1.2 of AS/NZS 5131.
Scope of inspection after welding 13.6.2.2
The extent and type of NDE corresponding to the designated Construction Category or
Categories shall be as per Table 13.6.2.2(A) of AS/NZS 5131.
Assessment of weld defects 13.6.2.5
Welds on enclosed spaces 13.6.4
Inspection of mechanical fastening
Non-conforming mechanical fasteners 13.7.4
If the documentation supplied does not meet the requirements of AS/NZS 5131, the
mechanical fasteners shall be treated as non-conforming until such time as it can be
reliably established that the mechanical fasteners meet the requirements of
AS/NZS 5131.
Testing of mechanical fasteners 13.7.5
If testing of mechanical fasteners is undertaken to establish conformity, the type and
extent of testing shall be consistent with that specified in AS/NZS 5131 and shall be
sufficient to establish a proper statistical basis. Single or limited test results shall not be
acceptable.
Inspection of fully tensioned high strength bolted connections
Sampling plan 13.7.8
Inspection of mechanical and chemical anchors
Proof testing 13.7.11
Inspection of surface treatment
For Coating Quality Level PC2, an ITP shall be prepared covering the inspection
against the items specified in Section 13.8.1 of AS/NZS 5131.
Inspection of paint coatings
For Coating Quality Level PC2, an ITP shall be prepared covering the inspection
against the items specified in Section 13.9.1 of AS/NZS 5131.
Inspection of galvanized coatings
Inspection requirements 13.10.1
Inspection shall be undertaken according to the requirements of AS/NZS 4680.
Additional or special inspection requirements 13.10.1
Inspection of erection
Additional or special inspection requirements 13.11.1
Clause in
AS/NZS 5131
Location and frequency of measurements 13.11.7
Inspection of secondary structural elements
Inspection of installation 13.12.2
An ITP shall be prepared covering the inspection of purlins and girts against the items
specified in Section 13.12.2 of AS/NZS 5131.
14 SITE MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR
14.1 GENERAL
Site modifications and repair shall conform to the requirements of Section 14 of AS/NZS 5131.

No site modification to any steel member, connection component, mechanical fastener, weld or
corrosion protection shall be made without a detailed written procedure. The written procedure shall
be approved by the Project Superintendent.
14.3 SITE WELDING

Site welding shall be carried out in accordance with AS/NZS 5131 section.
Touch up any paint treatment with the relevant coating as set out in the damaged coatings section.
15 SAFETY
The Contractor shall ensure that all aspects of the Works are carried out in accordance with the
relevant Worksafe Regulations.
15.1 SAFTEY LINE, FALL ARREST AND SERVICE RESTRAINT ANCHORS

Builder is to engage a specialist contractor nominated or acceptable by the Contract Administrator, to
design and install a fall arrest, safety line and or service restraint anchorage system for building
maintenance. This includes but shall not be limited to, any building elements loaded or effected by the
actions of the operational systems. Any structural concrete, structural steel, Balustrade, glazing walls,
roof/wall upstands and any features (structural or not) exposed to the maintenance systems must be
checked, designed and certified by CPE for the system loading actions (ultimate and service). The
system must comply to all Worksafe requirements and be certified by a CPE. The designer must liaise
with Superintendent regarding fixing points in respect to aesthetic requirements. Fixing points should
be Energy absorbing type attaching to structural beams, columns or purlins.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03530 CONCRETE SCREEDS
PART I GENERAL100
1. Scope
Supply and install a complete installation of granolithic surface screeds and topping mixes to the extent
and thickness as indicated on drawings or scheduled including but not limited to:
Applied granolithic screeds.
Matching coves, risers, kerbs, margins, pit covers, etc.
Float screeding, curing and protection.
Polished concrete topping mix.
Ensure that all toppings are meeting the required non slip R rating and provide supporting tests for this
item if required by the Principal Certifying Authority.
2 Related Work
Concrete Concrete pavements
Sanitary sewerage Floor finishes
Wall finishes Waterproofing and tanking
3 Quality Assurance
A. Provide data indicating that the tradesmen engaged for this project have a minimum of 5 years of
experience in such work as required by this specification.
Supply names of contacts, with telephone numbers, who can verify performance quality.
B. Prepare for the architect’s approval a square meter of granolithic screed, including coves, risers,
kerbs where applicable. When approved proceed with remaining work.
4 References
AS 1379 2007 Specification and supply of concrete. Plus Supplement 1-2008 and 2 Amdts
2009, 2015.
AS/NZS 3661.2 1994 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces – Guide to the reduction of slip
hazards.
AS 3700 2011 Masonry structures. There is 1 Supplement 2012, 2 Amdts 2012, 2015
AS 3740 2010 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas. 1 Amdt, 2012.
AS 3972 2010 General purpose and blended cements.
Where relevant, comply with construction standards and notes published by the Cement Concrete and
Aggregates Association of Australia , www.concrete.net.au
Read this component of the specification in conjunction with BCA report for the required R values for the
non-slip.
5 Submissions
Where applicable, provide evidence of payment of relevant fees.
6 Delivery Handling and Storage

Deliver materials properly packaged to the site in original, unopened containers with grade, type and
quality indicated on the labels.
Store and protect materials raised above floor and kept dry until ready for use.
PART II MATERIALS
201 Granolithic Components

A. Cement: Portland Cement, comply with AS 3972.
B. Stone (granolithic screeds): clean granite screenings of maximum size 6mm.
C. Stone dust (protective screeds): clean bluestone fines of maximum size 4mm.
D. Sand: washed, sieved, sharp sand, passing a No 16 (1.19mm) sieve.
E. Aggregate for screeds: dense aggregate graded as follows:
Passing 4.75 mm sieve 80%
Passing 6.00 mm sieve 90%
F. Water: clean drinking quality
G. Mesh: galvanised welded wire fabric, minimum 2.5mm diameter wires at 100mm each way.
H. Pigments: compatible with other components.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 03530 CONCRETE SCREEDS
202 Joint Sealing Materials
A. Non-structural external weather-proofing sealants: low modulus neutral curing silicone rubber
compounds.
B. Joint primer/sealer: provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended by sealant manufacturer for
joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
C. Bond breaker tape: polyethylene tape or other plastic as recommended by sealant manufacturer
to be applied to contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler is to be avoided for proper
performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. Sealant backer rod: compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed
polyurethane foam, butyl foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent durable non-
absorptive material as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant.
E. Sealant for floor joints: 2-part, self-levelling polyurethane based, chemically cured.
203 Miscellaneous Materials

A. Compressed fibre cement sheet: 6mm thick.
B. Non-slip material: set into formed grooves in stair treads, silicone carbide or carborundum mix,
mixed and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
204 Mixes
A. Mix screeds with minimum water to produce screed material that is workable and will consolidate
uniformly. The proportion will depend on the sand in use and is found by practical trial. Minimise
random variations once the proportions are established. Carefully control water quantity.
B. Granolithic finish mix: 1:2:1 cement: stone: sand.
C. Protective screed mix: 20 MPa concrete with maximum aggregate size of 6mm.
D. Batching by shovelful is not allowed. Batch by weight only.
Add pigment as instructed by manufacturer to a sample colour approved by the architect.
E. Waterproofing: add mixture. Refer section 07130 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING, System
Type D.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Visit site and inspect conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to site. Notify contractor of any
discrepancy or unsuitability or substrate.
302 Records
Obtain essential services information (Dial Before You Dig).
303 Preparation
Before commencing work, ensure that the concrete is clear and free of mortar, honeycombing, surface
cavities, oil, tying wires or other surface deficiencies and is suitable to receive the membrane.
Sweep up all debris.
Roughen surface of existing surface to ensure adequate key for granolithic.
304 Mix Life

Reject material which, in the architect's opinion, has become excessively stiff so as to make placement
difficult. Re-tempering of mixes will not in any case be permitted. Discard any mortar unused within 2
hours of adding water.
305 Screeds
A. Dense screeds: thickness of not less than 25mm, except 20mm at outlets. Reinforce with light
galvanised steel mesh. Refer clause 201 G.
B. Protective screeds: 50mm thick parallel to substrate.
Reinforce with light galvanised steel mesh. Provide control joints as specified in clause 305D.
Dust on and trowel in bluestone fines.
C. Setdowns: for screeds to receive other finishes, consult with other sub-contractors for those
finishes to determine the setdown required.
D. Walls and upstands: finish at junction with walls and upstands with galvanised wire mesh and
50mm radius cove.
306 Installation of Granolithic Toppings

A. Place, compact and screed to the required levels and grades and trowel to a smooth surface,
true to plane and free from trowel marks. Grade evenly to drains, 1:80 minimum.
B. Thickness: 50mm thick parallel to substrate.
C. Scoring: provide scored pattern of 600 x 600 with trowel to regular depth.
D. Control joints: provide control joints 10mm wide to receive floor joint sealant. Joints to be
maximum 3 metres apart. Provide joint 600mm inside and parallel to parapets or walls.
307 Tolerances
A. Tolerances to grades established on drawings: + 5mm, -5mm
B. Local variation from a flat surface: not to exceed +3mm -3mm under a 3 metre straightedge, with
6mm "feet" on each end so variations can be measured from the surface to the straightedge.
308 Curing
General: protect from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Where required,
provide damp curing.
309 Added Colour

Where scheduled, add in 2 successive applications, worked into the surface by trowelling to smooth
dense finish.
307 Joint Preparation - Sealants

A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove
dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond of sealant
or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated and where recommended by sealant manufacturers.
Do not allow primer/sealant to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
308 Installation of Sealants

Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or
recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application indicated. Install bond breaker tape
where indicated and where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric
sealants will perform properly.
309 Protection
Lay hardboard over completed work for minimum of 5 days.
310 Completion
the architect.
Clean up leaving the surfaces in first class condition to the satisfaction of the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05080 METAL FINISHES - SHOP-APPLIED
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply all labour and material, services and equipment necessary for the preparation, application and
finishing of metal surfaces as indicated on drawings, schedules and as specified herein, to internal and
external metal surfaces as follows:
Refer Schedule of Finishes.
102 Related Work

Metalwork Structural steel
Metal door frames and fire doors Metal windows
Metal decking and roof plumbing

A contractor with wide experience in this class of work is required for the work of this section.
104 References
AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Anodic oxidation coatings.
AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces.
1627.6 2003 Chemical conversion treatment of metals.
There are 6 other parts, 1997 – 2005.
AS 2832 Cathodic protection of metals. There are 5 parts, 2003 – 2015.
AS 3715 2002 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coating for architectural applications of
aluminium and aluminium alloys.
105 Submissions
Submit the following materials:
A. Product literature on all proposed finishing systems.
B. Colour samples for all approved finishing materials. Provide samples identified with:
1. Manufacturer's colour code and colour name.
2. Match to schedule colour code and name.
C. Samples not less than 100 x 100mm and of the same gloss level as the scheduled colour.

Handle all materials with care.
Do not store on site.
Install directly in place.
107 Warranty
Provide a written warranty stating the preparation of surfaces, materials and material application under
this contract will show no deterioration and remain in good condition for a period of 10 years from date of
Practical Completion.
201 Materials – General

Where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified, use the highest grade of
each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by trade name in these specifications.
202 Metal Finishes

A. Anodising
Anodise to colour selected and approved by the architect. Pre-treat and apply anodising by
applicators approved by the architect.
Minimum coating thickness of 25 microns subjected to random testing after installation. Remove
and replace non-conforming material.
B. Polyester powdercoat
Apply polyester powdercoat, to colour approved by the architect to metal surfaces specified.
Perform pre-treatment and application of powder coating by applicators approved by the architect
and by the manufacturer of the powder material.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 05080 METAL FINISHES - SHOP-APPLIED
Minimum coating thickness of 50 microns subjected to random testing after installation. Remove
and replace non-conforming material.
C. Fluoroset FP (Dulux Product).
203 Schedule
Refer to Finishes Schedule.
301 Examination
Inspect all surfaces and determine that they are in proper condition to receive the work to be performed
under this section.
The starting of work under this section means acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory and
any defects in work resulting from accepting poor surfaces are to be corrected at no cost to the
proprietor.
302 Preparation
A. General: prepared to a standard not less than that described in AS 1627.
B. Clean base metal surfaces of all mill scale, rust, grease, oil, dirt or other foreign matter then
properly wash with spirit or other approved cleaning agents.
After cleaning, etch, pickle or prepare as recommended by manufacturer of the finish applied.
303 Protection
Protect finished metal surfaces as necessary during handling, transport and erection to prevent
mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes, dents, spots, stains and streaks.
Do not use adhesive protective coating. Protect by other means with the approval of the architect.
304 Application
Execute all work in this section in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with
the provisions of the Australian Standards which are incorporated by reference as part of this
specification and apply to the work in this section to same extent as if written herein. In the event of
conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and the provisions of the Australian Standards,
manufacturer's recommendations govern.
305 Cleaning
At completion of work, keep and maintain finished surfaces clean and free from dust, dirt and other
foreign matter.
306 Completion
Complete all contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued
by the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 05080 METAL FINISHES - SHOP-APPLIED
SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Provide load bearing and non-loadbearing cold formed metal framing to locations shown on the
drawings and to meet the structural engineer’s design.
Provide all components to approved submission of samples and shop drawings.
Design, engineer, supply and install a complete cold formed metal framing, including but not limited to:
Load bearing wall framing
Non-loadbearing wall framing
Loadbearing roof framing
Other
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with the tradesmen preparing floors, installing windows and doors and
weatherproofing material, including casting in of anchors where required.

A. Manufacturer qualifications: not less than 6 years continuous experience in the manufacture of
the product types specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: installer is to have not less than 3 years continuous experience in the
erection of specified material.
104 References
AS/NZS 1170 Structural design actions.
1170.1 2002 Permanent, imposed and other actions. Plus 2
Amdts,2005 – 2009.
1170.2 2011 Wind actions.
1170.3 2003 Snow and ice actions. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007.
1170.4 2007 Earthquake actions in Australia. Amdt 1 2015
There is 1 other part, several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011.
AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding.
1554.1 2014 Welding of steel structures, 1 Amdt 2015.
1554.2 2003 Stud welding (steel studs to steel) Plus 1 Amdt, 2003.
1554.3 2014 Welding of reinforcing steel.
1554.4 2014 Welding of high strength quenched and tempered
steels.
1554.5 2014 Welding of steel structures subject to high levels of
fatigue loading.
1554.6 2012 Welding stainless steels for structural purposes.
1554.7 2014 Welding of sheet steel structures.
AS 3623 1993 Domestic metal framing.
Comply with relevant authority's requirement for fire.
105 Submissions Required Prior to Fabrication

A. Complete system description including the following information:
1. Names of manufacturers of products.
2. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products.
3. Types, model numbers and names of products, and indication whether products are "off
the shelf" or custom fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses,
patented process name, process description and test data.
4. Detailed information on products manufactured specifically for this project.
5. Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and
large-scale details of specially fabricated products.
B. Statement that the proposed system meet(s) the regulatory requirements, thermal, aesthetic and
wind loading, construction, warranty requirements specified; noting in detail exceptions.
C. Shop drawings: refer DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT,
clause 27. Provide shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the
items:
1. Layout (sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly).
2. Full size section of members.
3. Methods of assembly, type and location of exposed screws.
4. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, flashings.
5. Provision for expansion (thermal).
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
6. Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces.
7. Fittings and accessories.
D. Engineer's calculations on wind loading, live and dead loads.

Handle materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place as instructed by manufacturer.
Where possible, deliver pre-assembled panels of framing, roof trusses etc., ready for immediate
placement and connection.
201 General
Provide all work in accordance with approved shop drawings and samples as well as technical data
information from approved manufacturers and certified by the structural engineer for adequacy.
The following manufacturers of frames are acceptable:
202 Materials
Wall, floor and roof framing components manufactured from corrosion resistant steel materials.
Match components detailed on drawings or an alternative approved in writing by the architect.
203 Structural Criteria

Adopt Terrain Category: 2.5
Refer AS/NZS 1170.
Wind loading: design:
Frame assemblies to suit the static and dynamic wind forces as indicated on the tables in the AS/NZS
1170.
Structural members of units of such strength that when tested at the specified design wind values they
do not deflect by an amount greater than span/240 and do not cause permanent deflection.
Fix members so that the above loading is generated in the members without stress causing failure or
movement becoming evident at any joint.
Movement: permit free and noiseless movement of the components due to thermal effects, structural
effect, wind pressure, effect of dead loads, without strain to the frames, without buckling of components
and without excessive stress to members or assemblies.
Contact with other materials: coat metal surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, plaster, masonry, wet-
application of fire-proofing and absorbent materials with an anti-galvanic, moisture barrier material.
Isolate, with inert material, dissimilar metals for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion.
Distortion: design the assembly to minimise visual distortion.
REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINERING DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC FRAMING REQUIREMENTS
204 Detail Design Provisions

A. General: the architect's drawings are to be considered essentially schematic except for profiles of
exposed surfaces and panel arrangement where indicated. If, in the opinion of the builder a
change of profile is required in order to meet the specification, arrange through the architect for a
review of the condition. Design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to suit each specified
condition in an acceptable manner complying with the requirements specified herein.
B. Tolerances: design frames to accommodate building tolerances, and when completed, within the
following tolerances:
1. Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle within 3mm per 3.5m of length of
member, or 6mm in total run in line.
2. Deviation from theoretical position on plan or elevation, including deviation from plumb,
level or dimensioned angle not to exceed 9mm total at location.
3. Change in deviation not to exceed 3mm for 3.5m run in direction.
205 Fabrication
Form junctions so that no fixings, such as pins, screws, pressure indentations and the like are visible on
exposed faces. Show on shop drawings fixings which will be exposed. Cut edges, drill holes, rivet joints
and clean flat sheets, neat, free from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive
deformation. Fit mitred joints accurately to a fine hairline.
Pre-assemble and match mark before delivery.
301 Examination
Inspect site conditions before start of work on site, before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are
satisfactory for installation.
Perform rectification required before delivery of materials.
302 Preparation
Ensure tasks and activities comply with the requirements of the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice and
relevant Australian Standards.
Prepare surfaces affected by the installation in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions.
303 Frame Anchorage

Fabricator is required to supply the anchorage devices to the builder for building in by others and check
that devices are located as required to suit the requirements of the fabrication for positive and
permanent fixing. Insulation: isolate dissimilar metals at interfaces with bitumen based or nylon shim
materials to prevent galvanic action.
Make good concrete or masonry damaged during the installation of masonry anchors at no cost to the
proprietor.
304 Installation
Wall frames: vertical. Permitted maximum tolerance is 3mm in 3000mm.
Floor frames: horizontal. Permitted maximum tolerance is 3mm in 3000mm.
Except where otherwise directed.
Secure in place in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
305 Cleaning
Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from the fabrication and erection operations, each day.
306 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05500 METALWORK
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Provide items listed on the drawings and where scheduled.
Supply, engineer and install required general and architectural metalwork items including but not limited
to:
Floor finish trims
Sundry metalwork items
Furniture Steel
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with the following trade sections:

Ensure that all items of this trade section are adequate for the intended task and meet all statutory
requirements of the National Building Code.
Work of this section will be performed by experienced craftsmen familiar with the quality required in this
class of work.
Comply throughout with manufacturer's instructions.
104 References
AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. There are 7 parts, 2003– 2014.
AS/NZS 1734 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate.
AS/NZS 1866 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow shapes.
AS 4100 1998 Steel structures. Plus 1 Supplement 1999, 1 Amdt 2012.
AS/NZS 4673 2001 Cold-formed stainless steel structures.
AS/NZS 4680 2006 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles.
Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities.
105 Shop Drawings

Comply with DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, clause 27.
Provide shop drawings for major items supplied hereunder.
A. Contract drawings and details provided are indicative as to general and minimum requirements,
and do not show conditions.
Develop details not shown and in conformity with the indicative details shown.
B. Take and confirm dimensions on site, before preparing Shop Drawings where possible.
C. Submit detailed shop drawings for fabrication and installation of major metalwork. Show plans,
elevations and detailed sections; indicate materials, finishes, types of joinery, fasteners,
anchorages and accessory items. Provide setting diagrams and full-scale templates of blocking,
anchorages, sleeves and bolts installed by others.
106 Samples
Sample welds: if requested, provide samples of weld types, including samples of railings joined at right
angles and at typical acute angles, welded and ground smooth, for approval. If not acceptable, provide
additional samples until approved. Approved samples establish quality of similar work of this section.
Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and materials not
meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples will be rejected.
Return rejected materials to the fabricator at the fabricator's expense.
Finish: provide samples of specified finishes when requested.
PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
201 Materials and Components

Provide all materials and components suitable for the intended use and meeting the statutory and the
industry standards for the required performance.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 05500 METALWORK
Confirm with technical data and samples at the submission stage of the specification and obtain an
approval prior to commencing work.
Metalwork Components Schedule
ITEM Manufacturer Cat No. Material Finish/ Details

Colour
Liquid Soap N/A N/A N/A N/A Install Owner supplied
Dispensers item
Paper Towel N/A N/A N/A N/A Install Owner supplied
Dispenser item
Toilet Roll N/A N/A N/A N/A Install Owner supplied
Holder item
Door Grilles Refer Refer Aluminium Powdercoat -
Mechanical Mechanical
Grab rails Metlam MLR103 Stainless Satin 90° Flush Mount Side
Steel Wall & Cistern Grab
Rail LH Set
Grab rails Metlam MLR112 Stainless Satin 90° Ambulant Grab Rail
Steel
Grab rails Metlam ML332 Stainless Satin 750mm straight grab
Steel rail
Folding Metlam ML995CL Compact - -
Shower Seat Laminate
Coat Hooks Metlam 202SCP Diecast Satin Concealed Fix Coat
(UAT) zinc Chrome Hook (2 No.)
Shower Sonata Shower Polyester White Finish 10mm minimum
Screen cube above floor surface.
Shower JD MacDonald JDMTRAC Aluminium Anodised -
Screen K-L1200A
Track
Roller Blind Vertilux Easydrive - Refer Interior Supply and install to
BGS 1.02a Finishes windows as scheduled
Schedule.
Grated Aco Refer Stainless Refer Refer Hydraulics
drainage Hydraulics Steel Hydraulics Services section and
channel Services Services drawings
section section
Linear Stormtech Refer Stainless Refer Refer Architectural
Threshold Hydraulics Steel Hydraulics drawings
Drain Services Services
section section
Hose tap Pride Hose tap Stainless Polished Refer Hydraulics
wall box Industries box - Steel drawings for locations
regular and Hydraulic
specification
Furniture - - Mild Steel Powdercoat Refer drawings for
frame details and extent
Electric Westinghouse WVE655S N/A Stainless Install in each Kitchen
ovens Steel
Ceramic Westinghouse WHC642B N/A Glass Install in each Kitchen
Electric A
Cooktop
Electric Westinghouse WRF610S N/A Stainless Recirculating
Range Hood A Steel Install in each Kitchen
Nappy Koala Kare KB200-05 White Install in Parent Room
Change
Window Heka Hood HH 300mm Aluminium Powdercoat Install to manufacturer’s
Surround wide instructions
Awning
Rainwater Custom - Steel CHS Hot dip Fabricated downpipe
down pipes fabrication sections galvanised and integral cleats as
detailed on drawings
Screen & Bluechip UW B5050 Aluminium Powdercoat With endcaps fixed to
balustrade –Woodstock steel framing as
battens UW2311. detailed on drawings
203 Finish
Materials exposed to weather may be either:
Mild steel - hot dipped galvanised after fabrication or chromate pre-treated followed by polyester powder
coating.
Finish internal steel after fabrication with zinc-rich organic primer, or with inorganic zinc silicate paint.
Comply with relevant codes of practice or manufacturers' recommendations.
204 Welding Steel

General: details of joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds
made and the methods used to correct defective work; conform to requirements of AS/NZS 1554.
Welds exposed to view: grind smooth to architect's approval.
Concealed welds: grind smooth before galvanising.
Tack or skip welding: at regular intervals, very neat. Not permitted if material is to be hot dip galvanised.
Remove weld spatter.
Certification: only welders who have previously been qualified by tests may weld.
Tack welding or skip welding will NOT be permitted where items are to be galvanised. Weld
continuously form joints and connections to exclude water and to permit draining during galvanising.
Stainless steel welding: refer AS/NZS 1554.
205 Connection Design

General: design fabricated items so that possible work is done before delivery. Fully protect for
shipment. Take possible care to prevent damage.
A. Welding external items: conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 1554, noting particularly the
design criteria.
B. Flanges: concealed where possible. Sleeve connecting railings inside railing sections and
secure with flush or set screws. Except where access is impossible, connection screws and bolts
will be on the underside of joints.
C. Fasteners on the top of railing sections will not be permitted.
D. Weld shop connections for steel fabrications, and bolt field connections.
E. Provide smooth finishes to exposed surfaces with sharp well-defined lines and arrises. Mill to a
close fit machined joints. Design necessary lugs, brackets and similar items so that work can be
assembled and installed in a neat, substantial manner.
F. Provide ample strength and stiffness by using appropriate metal thickness of assembly and
supports.
G. Provide holes and connections as required to accommodate the work of other trades and for site
assembly of metalwork. Drill or punch and ream in the shop.
206 Miscellaneous
Fasteners: provide required bolts, screws, inserts, fasteners, templates and other accessories required
for a complete installation.
Coordinate with other trades as to the proper fastening systems suitable for the substrates to which the
item is to be secured. Refer to architect if in doubt.
Fasten galvanised items with galvanised fasteners.
207 Dissimilar Metals

In moist environments, e.g. swimming pools of either fresh water or sea water etc., prevent totally
contact between dissimilar metals (any metals).
This instruction takes priority over any drawing, detail or instruction and will prevent cathodic reaction
between the metals.
Refer this instruction to the structural engineer.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Inspect site conditions before fabrication, where possible, and before delivery of materials. Ensure
conditions are satisfactory for installation. Arrange for rectification required.
Start of work means total acceptance of relevant conditions.
302 Preparation
Field measurements: do not delay job progress. Allow for adjustments and fitting of the work in the field
where taking of measurements might cause delay.
Coordination with work of others: furnish to each relevant trade foreman anchorages and setting
drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of items having integral anchors which
are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the
project site.
303 Inspection and Reinstatement
Check fabrications as they are unloaded at the project site for evidence of physical damage.
Treat damaged fabrications as follows:
A. Damage through galvanising: perform immediate inorganic zinc silicate paint or cold-galvanising
repair. Do not install until reinstated.
B. Architectural metalwork: returned to shop for repair or replacement.
Verify anchors, bolts and other required anchorage items for proper size and accurate location prior to
erection.
304 Installation
Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or relevant Australian
Standards,
Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure
necessary anchorages, including concrete and masonry inserts, bolts, wood screws and other
connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and holes to
ensure proper positioning of completed work.
Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted, and
reveals uniform. Finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to adjacent
construction. Make tolerances conform to Australian Standards.
Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted under
conditions. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site.
Isolate dissimilar metals likely to be subject to moisture with inert materials, not visible on completion of
installation.
305 Field Quality Control

Where considered necessary by the architect, arrange for the manufacturer of products to instruct
installers regarding correct installation.
306 Protection
Cover work: immediately following installation, wrap or cover architectural metalwork to avoid wear and
tear of finish during subsequent construction.
307 Cleaning
Clean materials installed to the satisfaction of the architect.
Remove temporary protective coatings.
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Design, fabricate, supply and install exterior and interior handrail, and rails (which form a
balustrade ) including but not limited to:
Metal pipe handrails and railings.
Associated material e.g. Aluminium balusters.
Solid metal handrails and railings.
Note that components of this trade package may contain aspects of design and construct. Complete the
design indicating full compliance with statutory and structural performance levels and submit for
approval.
Certify on completion for compliance.
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with the following other trades:
Floor construction Carpentry
Wall construction Metal work
Concrete Metal finishes – Shop applied

A. Submit samples and shop drawings with calculations for structural adequacy for approval.
B. Installer qualifications: installer is not to have less than 5 years continuous experience in the
erection of specified material.
104 References
AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. There are 7 parts, 2003 – 2014
AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pretreatment of surfaces.
There are 6 other parts, 1997 - 2005
AS 4100 1998 Steel structures. Plus 1 Supplement, 1999, 1 Amdt 2012.
AS/NZS 4673 2001 Cold-formed stainless steel structures.
202 Materials
Hot dip galvanised mild steel balustrade posts, rails, handrails and cleats.
Bluechip powdercoat finish 50mm x 50mm aluminium UWB5050 balusters with endcaps fixed to steel
rails. Refer to detail drawings.
203 Finish
Hot dip galvanised.
204 Fabrication
Before delivery to site, pre assemble where possible all items to ensure proper fit and dimension of each
item. Disassemble and pack carefully for shipping to the site. On delivery and unloading, inspect for
damage and arrange immediate replacement if necessary.
205 Source Quality Control

Advise architect when material is ready for inspection before delivery. Arrange for architect to inspect
each item and indicate approval or otherwise by marking a check list of every item required for the
project.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES
301 Examination
302 Preparation
A. Field measurements: do not delay job progress. Allow for adjustments and fitting of the work in
the field where taking of measurements might cause delay.
B. Coordination with work of others: furnish to each relevant trade foreman anchorages and setting
drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of items having integral anchors
which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to the project site.

A. Check fabrications as they are unloaded at the project site for evidence of physical damage.
1. Damage through galvanising: perform immediate inorganic zinc silicate paint or cold-
galvanising repair. Do not install until reinstated.
2. Architectural metalwork: returned to shop for repair or replacement.
B. Verify anchors, bolts and other required anchorage items for proper size and accurate location
prior to erection.
304 Installation
A. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian
Standards, as relevant.
B. Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure
connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and
holes to ensure proper positioning of completed work.
C. Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted,
and reveals uniform. Finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to
adjacent construction. Make tolerances conform to Australian Standards.
D. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted
under conditions. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site.
Isolate dissimilar metals likely to be subject to moisture with inert materials, not visible on
completion of installation.

306 Protection
307 Cleaning
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES
SECTION 06100 CARPENTRY
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Scope of work of this trade section is the structural and non-structural carpentry components with timber
being of the type and species suitable for the intended use.
Note that use of treated timber is essential under specific project conditions such as use of termite
resistant structural timber, check and evaluate prior to commencing work.
Coordinate work fully with the structural engineer for structural components of the works.
Provide materials and labour, equipment and services and perform operations necessary to complete
the carpentry as indicated and specified. Include nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, hardware, framing,
shoring, bracing, scaffolding and barriers required by the drawings and construction.
102 Related Work

Cooperate and coordinate with the following trades:
Metalwork Structural Steel
103 Quality Assurance Prototype: at a location selected by the architect on site, construct a full size
prototype of:
Include in each prototype elements required by this specification, and finish in every respect. When
approved by the architect, such samples remain part of the work and become the standard for the
remaining work.
104 References
AS 1428.1 Design for access and mobility – General requirements for access - New
building work.
AS 1684 Residential timber-framed construction. There are many parts and
Supplements, 1999 - 2010.
1684.2 2010 Non-cyclonic areas. Numerous supplements, 2 Amdts
2012 and 2013.
1684.3 2010 Cyclonic areas. Numerous supplements, Amdt 2012.
1684.4 2010 Simplified - Non-cyclonic areas. Special reprint with
Amdt 1 2012 included.
AS 1720 Timber structures.
1720.1 2010 Design methods. Plus 3 Amdts, 2010 - 2015.
1720.2 2006 Timber properties. Plus 1 Amdt, 2006.
1720.4 2006 Fire-resistance for structural adequacy of timber
members.
1720.5 2015 Nailplated timber roof trusses.
AS/NZS 1859 Reconstituted wood-based panels - Specifications
1859.1 2004 Particleboard. Plus 2 Amdts, 2006 - 2011.
1859.2 2004 Dry processed fibreboard. Plus 2 Amdts, 2006.
1859.3 2005 Decorative overlaid wood panels. Plus 1 Amdt, 2009.
AS 1860.2 2006 Particleboard flooring – Installation. Plus 1 Amdt, 2010.
AS/NZS 2904 1995 Damp-proof courses and flashings. 2 Amdts, 1998, 2013
AS 3959 2009 Construction of buildings in bushfire-prone areas. Plus 3 Amdts, 2009 - 2011.
AS 4055 2012 Wind loads for housing. 1 Amdt 2015
AS 4226 2008 Guidelines for safe housing design.
AS/NZS 4364 2010 Timber – Bond performance of structural adhesives.
AS 4786.2 2005 Timber flooring - Sanding and finishing.
HB 44 1993 Guide to AS 1684 1992, The National Timber Framing Code.
Further advice and changes in specifications of timber are needed frequently. For latest information visit
www.timber.net.au
For timber decks visit the Outdoor Timber section of Resources at www.timber.net.au.
105 Submissions
Where timber is used in external locations ensure that correct timber species are used and confirm at
the submissions stage of the works.
Submit the following prior to ordering materials:
Product literature on hardware items proposed.
Technical data on melamine laminates proposed for use.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 06100 CARPENTRY
Technical data and samples of substrate materials (particleboard etc.). Thickness of materials at typical
locations and functions.

Deliver, handle and store products so that damage, deterioration and loss will be prevented. Control
delivery schedules to minimise long-term storage at site.
Store timber on site indoors, or above ground and cover with secure impervious material.
201 Timber Components

Provide the following carpentry components for the works. Ensure that all components are to meet the
structural as well as project specific requirements and are to be certified for adequacy and approved
submission of samples and shop drawings.
Decking: Perma Timber 146 BAL Heavy Grain Decking 146 x 22mm. Colour: Walnut.
Secondary support framing: Seasoned treated Pine. Stress grade MPG10, hazard level H3.
301 Examination
Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to site.
302 Installation General

Comply with: AS 1684 Residential timber-framed construction, and other relevant Standards.
Ensure installation of isolation material between timber and damp substrate, installed in accordance with
AS/NZS 2904 1995.
Loadbearing framing: Provide to structural engineer’s design.
.
Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards,
as relevant.
Perform operations including grooving, rebating, framing, housing, beading, mitring, scribing, nailing,
screwing and gluing as necessary to carry out the works. Use timber in single lengths whenever
possible. If joins are necessary, make them over supports unless otherwise shown or specified.
Arris visible edges in sawn work and in dressed work arris with sandpaper to 1.5mm radius unless
otherwise shown or specified.
Back plough boards liable to warping (for example, if exposed on one face). Make the width, depth
number and distribution of ploughs appropriate to the dimensions of the board and the degree of its
exposure.
Provide necessary templates, linings, blocks, stops, ironwork and hardware, screws, bolts, plugs and
fixings generally.
Install waterproof membrane to separate infrastructure from concrete or masonry.
Decking joists to be capped with waterproof membrane prior to the installation of decking.
Trim framing where necessary for openings, including those required by other trades.
Unless otherwise noted, construct framing so that floors are horizontal, i.e. no more than 3mm slope in
3000mm.
Consult the architect concerning changes of floor level in excess of 3mm or in compliance with AS
1428.1
Construct wall framing vertical, so that no more than 3mm out of vertical in 3000mm of wall height.
304 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 06100 CARPENTRY
SECTION 06165 FIBRE CEMENT PRODUCTS
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Supply and install fibre cement products and associated equipment and fixings including but not limited
to:
External cladding.
Soffit Linings and bulkheads.
102 Related Work

Wall framing Ceiling framing
A tradesman with wide experience and knowledgeable in this class of work is to undertake the work to
be performed.
104 References
AS 2329 1999 Mastic adhesives for fixing wallboards.
AS/NZS 2908 Cellulose-cement products.
2908.1 2000 Corrugated sheets.
2908.2 2000 Flat sheet.
AS 3740 2010 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas. 1 Amdt, 2012
Relevant Technical Bulletins and published instructions produced by manufacturers.
Telephone Customer Services of state office for technical assistance.
Comply with requirements of relevant statutory authorities.

Deliver materials in bundles or packages with care. Stack on edge or lie flat under cover and keep dry
until installed. Protect edges and covers from chipping.
106 Warranty
Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period years
from the date of Practical Completion. Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried
out in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and codes and manufacturer's instructions in effect
at the time of installation.
PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS200

James Hardie Australia.
Rondo Building Services Pty Ltd.
CSR Building materials.
BGC
202 Materials
A. James Hardie 6mm Versilux soffit lining and bulkheads with expressed joints.
B. Black PVC extrusion expressed jointer for 6mm Versilux sheet.
C. James Hardie Exotec Façade System comprising compressed fibre cement 9mm thick sheet
together with all accessories.
203 Equipment
Supply equipment required for the erection and installation of the specified materials as recommended
by the manufacturer.
301 Examination
Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to the drawings before delivery of materials to
site. Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 06165 FIBRE CEMENT PRODUCTS
302 Preparation
Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done, prior to commencement of work
and arrange for fixing grounds required for satisfactory execution of the work of this trade, including
penetrations through cement sheet for services.
303 Installation
as relevant.
Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Anchor and fasten materials and components to
comply with ratings and performance requirements, and to comply with governing local regulations.
Comply with appropriate Australian Standard.
Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components, during
installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.

Comply in all respects with manufacturers’ recommendations contained in technical bulletins. Call for
technical advice where necessary. Refer clause 104.
A. Versilux® 6mm Soffit Lining

SUPPORT FRAMING: Furring channels fixed to soffit framing at 500 mm maximum spacing within
1200 mm of the corners of the building and 600 mm maximum spacings elsewhere.
FASTENERS:
Fastener Durability: Ensure that all fasteners have the appropriate level of durability required for
the prevailing environmental conditions. Fasteners must be fully compatible with all other materials
that they are in contact with to ensure the durability and integrity of the assembly.
Fastener Type: Exposed fixings No.10x25mm pan, wafer or hex head self-drilling screws (Class 3
minimum coating to AS 3566). Do not over drive fasteners. Do not use adhesives.
Fastener Spacing: Locate fasteners not less than 12 mm from sheet edges and 50 mm from sheet
corners.
Fastener Centres:
Within 1200 mm of Building Corners: 300 mm maximum.
Elsewhere: 300 mm maximum.
JOINTS: Form expressed joints by black PVC extrusion expressed jointer.
Joint Layout: Grid.
INSTALLATION: Install in accordance with James Hardie's current instructions and
recommendations.
APPLIED FINISH: Painted as scheduled in the 'Finishes Schedule'.
B. James Hardie ExoTec® Façade Panel Fixing System.

Incorporating ExoTec top hat, Intermediate JH tophat, ExoTec Gasket snap strip, ExoTec backing
strip’s and ExoTec façadewasher. Install framing in strict accordance with the manufactures
instructions.
Fasteners shall be exposed fixings No.10x25mm pan, wafer or hex head self-drilling screws (Class
3 minimum coating to AS 3566). Panels to be screw fixed to framing through pre-drilled holes. Drill
with a 6mm masonry drill, which provides a 6.2mm to 6.3mm diameter hole.
Horizontal joints: Proprietary Colorbond steel backing strip fixed to the rear face of the panel with
adhesive tape horizontal gasket. Seal the joint with a 3 mm epoxy fillet.
Vertical joints: Proprietary top hat framing and adhesive gasket.
Intermediate supports - top hat backed
Fixing: Double side tape fix to proprietary top hat intermediate frame.
Use full sheet lengths and minimise joints where possible. Refer façade layout drawings for
setouts.
Comply in all respects with manufacturers recommendations contained in technical bulletins. Call
for technical advice where necessary. Refer Clause 104.
Refer Section 07200 Insulation for sarking and thermal breaks.
FINISH: Paint as scheduled.
305 Finishing Details

Finish joints and secure fasteners. Remove surface defects to achieve uniform appearance of each type
of installation.
306 Protection
Protect finished work. Make good damage in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor.
307 Cleaning
Clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with manufacturer's instructions for
cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage.
Remove spatterings, droppings and surplus material.
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 06400 JOINERY
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
The work of this trade section covers the supply and installation of caseworm joinery items. It includes,
but is not limited to:
Trim, architraves, skirtings, pelmets etc.
102 Related Work

Floor construction Wall construction
Ceiling construction Window trades
Doors and door frames Plaster trades
Electrical installations Hydraulic installations

Prototype: at a location selected by the architect construct a complete prototype installation of:
Include in each prototype elements required by this specification, finished in every respect. When
approved by the architect, each prototype remains part of the work and becomes the standard for the
remaining work.
104 References
Comply with applicable portions of the Australian Standards listed in SECTION 06100 CARPENTRY,
plus those following, current edition:
1859.3 2005 Decorative overlaid wood panels. Plus 1 Amdt 2009.
AS 2754.2 1991 Adhesives for timber and timber products - Polymer emulsion adhesives.
AS 2796 Timber - Hardwood- Sawn and milled products. There are 3 parts, 1999-
2006.
AS 4785 2002 Timber - Softwood- Sawn and milled products.
4785.1 2002 Product specification.
4785.2 2002 Grade description.
4785.3 2002 Timber for furniture components.
105 Submissions
Submit the following prior to fabrication:
Product literature on proposed hardware items.
Technical data and samples of substrate materials (particleboard etc.).
Thickness of materials at typical locations.

Do not deliver until completion of anything which could soil, damage or deteriorate joinery. Prevent
soiling, damage or deterioration during delivery, storage and handling.
Keep site storage to a minimum. If circumstances make storage necessary in areas other than the final
location, store only in those that meet the requirements specified for installation areas.
201 General
Provide all casework joinery items on site fully coordinated with services, check for site
dimensions and constructed from approved high moisture resistant materials.
Provide to an approved sample component if required by the architect.
202 Materials
Medium Density Fibre board. Refer Finishes Schedule and detail drawings.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 06400 JOINERY
PART III EXECUTION300203, G
301 Examination
Visit the site and inspect conditions. Check dimensions and compare aspects with the drawings and
specification. Resolve differences before ordering materials or starting work.
302 Preparation for Joinery Installation

Prior to installing, condition joinery to the average humidity conditions prevailing in the installation areas.
Deliver anchoring devices and similar inserts required to be built into substrates well in advance of the
fixing of fittings and provide full details when they are to be fixed by others.
Prior to installation, examine shop-fabricated work for completeness and remedy deficiencies. Include
back priming and the removal of packing.
Thoroughly clean floors and walls that will be permanently concealed by joinery.
303 Installation of Joinery

as relevant.
Use concealed shims as required to install the work plumb, level, straight and distortion free within the
- 1mm in 800mm for plumb and level (including bench tops),
- 0.5mm maximum offsets in flush adjoining surfaces,
- 2mm maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work; refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finishes at cuts.
Secure joinery with anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds,
stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required to complete
the installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing
nails, countersunk and filled flush. Use a matching filler where a transparent finish is required.
Install casework without distortion so that doors will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned.
304 Hardware
Install joinery hardware as scheduled, listed and required in full compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Adjust as needed to centre doors in openings.
305 Adjustments, Cleaning, Finishing and Protection

A. Finish the work specified in this trade section and remedy anything not finished at the shop or
other stage prior to completion.
B. Adjust joinery to achieve a uniform appearance.
C. Lubricate and clean hardware, making final adjustments needed for proper operation.
Remove handling marks from visible joinery surfaces.
D. Protection: do everything needed to ensure that work is without damage or deterioration at
306 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 06400 JOINERY
SECTION 07130 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
This trade section identifies requirements for the supply and installation of 4 different types and areas of
waterproofing. It covers preparatory and protective work and associated materials including but not
limited to:
A. System Type A, Wet Area membrane as in bathrooms, showers, laundries, garbage rooms and
similar areas.
B. System Type B, Lift overrun pit
C. System Type C, Balcony substrate.
102 Related Work

Concrete Masonry
Surface finishes Roofing
Excavation and fill Windows
Concrete screeds (granolithic)

Use experienced and trained installers licensed by the material manufacturer. Provide evidence of the
licence to the architect.
104 References
AS 1884 2012 Floor coverings – Resilient sheet and tiles – Laying and maintenance
practices.
AS 3600 2009 Concrete structures. Plus 2 Amdts, 2010, 2013, 1 Supplement 2014.
AS 4654 Waterproofing and membranes for external above-ground use
4654.1 2012 Materials
4654.2 2012 Design and installation
AS/NZS 4858 2004 Wet area membranes.
105 Manufactured Products

Identification of a particular manufacturer’s product does not exclude alternative products by others. It is
a quality standard required to be met.
Submit request for alternatives to be approved to the architect with full description including
recommended installation procedures and procedures relating to Occupational Health and Safety of
applicators and other site personnel. Written evidence is to be supplied verifying compliance with
relevant Australian Standards and the requirements of statutory authorities having jurisdiction.
Do not order materials until written approval of alternatives has been received.
Submit manufacturer’s approval of installers where manufacturer’s own licensed installers are not
employed and a warranty is required.

Keep on-site storage of materials to a minimum, delivering them as required for direct installation. Be
responsible for loss and damage to delivered materials, both stockpiled and in place.
Deliver materials in sealed containers showing manufacturer’s name. Arrange for inspection of materials
by the architect before using them.
107 Warranty
Requirement
Prior to completion of the waterproofing systems installation, provide each warranty, in the appropriate
form;
executed by the sub-contractor and the warrantor (or warrantors in the case of joint warranties); and for
the required warranty period.
Warranty Conditions
Sub-contractor's obligations: the provision of a warranty does not relieve the sub-contractor of any of his
contractual obligations.
Guarantee of performance: where the warrantor is a subsidiary of another organisation, provide that
organisation's guarantee of performance of the warranty.
Adjustment of warranty period: where any part of the work is required to be repaired or made good
under a warranty, the warranty period does not terminate until that part has been satisfactorily repaired
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 07130 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING
or made good; and in respect of that part, recommences from the date of completion of the repair or
making good.
Product warranties
Provide separate product warranties for each of the waterproofing systems.
System warranty
Provide separate warranties for each of the waterproofing systems, signed jointly by the manufacturer
and the installer, stating that the products applied comply with this specification, are suitable for the
conditions to which they will be subjected and were correctly installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s published recommendations and details, the contract documents and provide a complete
waterproof membrane.
Warrant each of the waterproofing systems against any defects that affect their performance or
appearance Defects include failure of any element of the waterproofing system, whether or not the
failure causes the system not to achieve the design criteria or specified performance.
The warranty must cover the repair and/or replacement of all other building elements, finishes etc. to
which damage occurs as a consequence of a defect in, or repair work carried out, to the waterproofing
system.
Warranty Period
As noted beside each of the waterproofing systems described in this specification.
PART II SYSTEM DESCRIPTION200
201 Waterproofing System Type A

SYSTEM TYPE A – Wet Area Membrane
Typically to floors and walls of wet areas: including bathrooms, ensuites, laundries and garbage rooms,
and to wall areas immediately adjacent to and behind a bath, sink or similar fixture.
Carry the membrane under fixtures, baths, shower bases, toilets, vanities and the like, and extend into
the full area of shower recess:
to a minimum height of 2100mm to walls of shower recess extending 300mm beyond the horizontal
extent of the designated tiled wall area;
to a height and width not less than 450mm to wall areas immediately adjacent to and behind a bath, sink
or similar fixture.
System
Type: liquid applied, moisture curing, polyurethane liquid membrane.
Proprietary item: Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Undertile non-exposed membrane system by Parchem.
Substrate
Curing: allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to the application of the membrane.
Cleaning: clean down the substrate surface to remove all curing agents, wax, grease, oil, dirt, dust and
other foreign material and leave it clean, dry, dust free, smooth and free of undulations.
Voids: patch with a non-shrinking quick setting grout and allow to cure for a minimum of 7 days prior to
applying the membrane.
Application
Fillet: wherever a vertical penetration or upstand occurs, install Emer-Proof Elastic Joint Band System at
the intersection of the vertical and horizontal surfaces.
Primer: prime porous substrate (concrete/cement) typically with Emer-Proof Primer Porous.
Prime non-porous materials (metals/plastics) typically with Emer-Proof Non-Porous Primer.
Joints and penetrations: on the same day as priming, seal joints and penetrations with Emer-Seal PU 25
or PU 40 and subsequently covered with polyethylene bond breaker tape in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
Application: apply two coats of Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Undertile non-exposed membrane to a
minimum wet film thickness of 1.5mm to floors and walls in a single operation.
Detailing
Detail the membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, as shown on the
drawings and as follows:
Turn the membrane down into the puddle flange of outlets.
Turn the membrane up at, and seal to, all penetrations, pipes, waste outlets, etc.
Turn the membrane up for 100mm at all walls, plinths, and other upstands.
Dress the membrane over the horizontal leg of angle tile trims at doorways and turn up the vertical face
of the angle to terminate level with the bottom of the floor tiles.
Similarly, dress the membrane up the face of door jambs to terminate at the underside of the floor tiles.
The membrane turn up is to create a complete waterproof envelope to the floor area of the space being
treated.
Detail the membrane at movement joints in the substrate as detailed on the drawings.
Membrane curing: allow 72 hours for the membrane to cure prior to carrying out water tests or applying
finishes, toppings etc.
Warranty
Provide a warranty for materials and application of the membrane for a period of 20 years from the
date of Practical Completion, to be in a form approved by the principal.
Alternatives
Type: any proposed alternative to the system specified below is to be a proprietary liquid applied or
sheet membrane system which:
has a current Australian Building Product and Systems Certification Scheme certificate (Australian
Building Codes Board); or
has a current technical opinion issued by the Australian Building Systems Appraisal Council (CSIRO)
stating that the system is suitable for use as a waterproofing system for use in wet areas, shower recess
bases and associated floors and wall/floor junctions which are to be tiled.
201B Waterproofing System Type B

SYSTEM TYPE B – Lift Overrun pit
System: Fosroc Proofex 3100 HDPE high performance bituminous self-adhesive waterproofing
membrane and Proofex Sheetdrain 81 System supplied by Parchem.
General: All surfaces shall be prepared, primed and the membrane and drainage
sheet, applied strictly in accordance with the current manufacturer technical
data sheet.
All work shall be carried out by a pre-qualified contractor, who is well
trained in the application of the specific, documented, membrane system.
All materials used in conjunction with the new membrane systems, shall be
approved by the membrane supplier. Both the manufacturer and supplier
must be ISO 9001 accredited.
Surface Preparation: All surfaces to which the new membrane is to be applied, shall be smooth,
clean, dry, and free from irregularities. Sand / cement fillets, polymer
modified, shall be installed at all change in direction of substrate locations
(e.g. from horizontal to vertical). Internal and external corners shall be
double detailed in accordance with the manufacture’s recommendations. All
substrate cracks and surface imperfections are to be filled, sealed and dry
prior to membrane application. Remove paints/coatings prior to application
of the system.
Priming: Proofex Self-adhesive Primer or Primer 24 applied at the rate of 6 - 8 m2
per litre to surfaces which will have Proofex 3100 HDPE applied. The
coverage rate for the primer will vary depending on the porosity of the
surface being treated. Allow the primer to dry for a minimum of 30 minutes
and a maximum of 8 hours, at temperatures of 25°C and above; the primer
must be touch dry. Longer drying times will be required at lower
temperatures. Priming should only be carried out on surfaces which will be
covered with Proofex 3100 HDPE on the same day. Apply as per the
manufacturer technical data sheet.
Waterproofing Membrane: Proofex 3100 HDPE self-adhesive bituminous membrane incorporating a
cross laminated HDPE film. Apply as per the manufacturer technical data
sheet and detail drawings. Allow extra sufficient Proofex 3100 WPM up the
wall, loose to allow connection along blinding slab detail.
Membrane Protection: Proofex Sheetdrain 81. Apply as per the manufacturer technical data sheet.
Warranty: Provide a warranty for materials and application of the membrane for a
period of 20 years from the date of Practical Completion, to be in a form
approved by the principal.
201C Waterproofing System Type C

SYSTEM TYPE C – Balcony Waterproofing membrane.
System: Nitoproof 410 supplied by Parchem applied to structural slab prior to
topping screed installation. Both the manufacturer and supplier must be ISO
9001 accredited.
Surface Preparation: All new concrete surfaces must be allowed to cure for at least 7 days, with a
moisture content <5% and have a wood float finish. Steel trowelled finished
slabs must be chemically or mechanically abraded prior to commencing
waterproofing. Rendered surfaces must be allowed to cure for at least 16
hours in normal ambient conditions prior to commencing waterproofing.
Ensure all rendered surfaces have a wood float finish.
All screw / nail heads must be sealed with Nitoseal MS400 and all sheet
joints must be covered with Nitoband Tape. See Nitoband Tape System
technical data sheet.
Ensure all surfaces are sound, dry and free from excessive movement, oil,
dust, grease, wax, curing compounds, release agents, paint and any other
loose contaminants. Remove any protrusions from the surface that may
pierce the membrane.
Cracks larger than 2 mm or structural shrinkage cracks must be firstly
cleaned and any loose material removed then filled with Nitoseal MS400 or
covered with Nitoband Tape in conjunction with Nitoproof 410 System.
Refer to technical data sheet.
Priming Nitoprime 120 is to be compatible with the water-based membrane, and
provide high bonding and penetrating properties to porous substrates such
as concrete and masonry. A Nitobond SBR slurry primer must be used to
water-tank and immersed substrates.
Waterproofing Membrane: Apply Nitoproof 410. wall to wall and floor to wall junctions, internal and
external corners are to incorporate Emerband Tape to accommodate any
movement at these junctions in conjunction with the Nitoproof 410 as per
technical data sheet.
Apply Nitoband 410 as three (3) coats with a minimum total coverage of 2.0
litres/m2
Warranty: Provide a warranty for materials and application of the membrane for a
period of 20 years from the date of Practical Completion, to be in a form
acceptable to the principal.
301 Examination
A. Inspect conditions before delivery of materials and start of work on site to ensure that everything
is satisfactory. Arrange with builder for needed rectification.
B. Waterproofing Table
Waterproofing materials Location and Extent System Type

A, B, C or D
Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Undertile Toilets. A
Fosroc Proofex 3100 HDPE high Lift overrun pit walls B
performance bituminous self-
adhesive waterproofing
membrane
Nitoproof 410 liquid membrane Balcony floor substrate. C
302 Substrates
Substrates for membranes
Apply membranes to dry, smooth, firm, continuous surfaces, clean and free from loose or foreign matter.
Provide coving or fillets on internal corners. Round or arris external corners and edges.
Dryness tests for substrates: to AS 1884.
Acceptance of substrate: certify that the building structure, including the building tolerance, provision of
reference lines and marks, is satisfactory for receiving the application of the waterproofing system.
Approval of installer: if the installation of the waterproofing system is not by the manufacturer, and a
manufacturer’s warranty is conditional on approval of the installer, then obtain the manufacturer’s
approval of the installer.
Make a photographic record of prepared substrates.
303 Protect Adjacent Surfaces

Protect adjacent surfaces from splashes over sprays and the like during the application of the waterproof
membranes.
Plug drainage holes prior to the application of waterproofing membranes to prevent the material from
entering outlets beyond what is necessary to dress the material into the outlet to complete the
membrane system.
Remove plugs on completion.
Protect waterproofing membranes upon completion of each area of the application and maintain that
protection until such time as the installation is approved and covered up by other finishes.
304 Protection of Installed Membranes

Location
Protect planter boxes, retaining walls, footings and any other location where the membrane is in direct
contact with backfill or other potential damaging materials.
Type
Provide protection board made from 6mm thick fibre cement or 3mm thick, hollow polypropylene, co-
polymer sheet or proprietary protection board equal Tremco Pty Limited.
Installation
Protect waterproofing membranes upon completion of each area of the application and maintain that
protection until such time as the installation is approved and covered up by other finishes.
Following completion of the waterproof membrane to planter boxes install protection board to the
membrane on vertical faces.
Restrain the board by trapping the top edge under the bottom edge of the K shaped pressure flashing
used to terminate the top of the membrane.
Retaining Walls and Footings
Refer to 02315 SITE PREPARATION - EXCAVATION for membrane protection to retaining walls and
footings built against existing site fill or rock.
305 Cleaning
During the application, promptly remove foreign material from the work area without damaging the
waterproofing system.
306 Installation of Waterproofing Systems

as relevant.
Refer to the systems specified in Part II System Description.
Follow the specified instructions.
307 Quality Control – Inspections

Notice
Give sufficient notice so that inspections can be made at the following stages:
All substrate surfaces prior to the application of the waterproofing system.
Upon delivery of the system component material on site in sealed containers, prior to opening.
At completion of the application of the waterproofing systems, and prior to covering up with other
finishes.
During the carrying out of flood tests.
Minimum notice required: 3 days.
Manufacturers’ Inspections
Arrange for and pay the cost of inspections by the waterproofing systems manufacturer at each of the
above stages and at regular frequent intervals during the application of the waterproofing systems.
Maintain a logbook on the site and record the time and date of each inspection, work complete and
underway, at the time of each inspection, and comments by the manufacturer’s representative.
Have the manufacturer’s representative sign the logbook at the completion of each inspection and
record the observations made.
308 Testing Reports

Test installations prior to application of finishes to membranes.
To each membrane in wet areas, test 20% of area of membrane with a minimum of 10 tests.
Submit a report on the preparation of areas to be treated, working progress and on completion. In each
report include a photographic record.
309 Cleaning
Thoroughly clean work on completion, including affected adjacent surfaces.
310 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07200 INSULATION (THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC)
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
The scope of work includes, but is not limited to, the supply and installation of thermal insulation.
It also includes the supply and installation of acoustic insulation.
102 Related Work

Carpentry Wall and roof framing
Brickwork Blockwork
Metal roofing Roof tiles
Plasterboard Suspended ceiling

Installers are required to be widely experienced in relevant aspects of the work and with the
requirements of Australian Standards appropriate to the work.
Coordinate the installation with all adjacent trades and ensure that installation of insulation does not
contribute to condensation problems by using breathable type of sarking membranes.
Check with the membrane manufacturer and submit confirming data for approval.
104 References
Comply with the applicable portions of these Australian Standards:
AS 1366 Rigid cellular plastic sheets for thermal insulation. There are 4 parts, 1989-
1992, and 2 Amdts, 1992 - 1993.
AS/NZS 2107 2000 Acoustics - Recommended design sound levels and reverberation times for
building interiors.
AS 3671 1989 Acoustics - Road traffic noise intrusion - Building siting and construction.
AS 3999 2015 Thermal insulation of dwellings - Bulk insulation - Installation requirements.
AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays.
4200.1 1994 Materials. Plus 1 Amdt, 1994.
4200.2 1994 Installation requirements.
AS/NZS 4859.1 2002 Materials for the thermal insulation of buildings - General criteria and
technical provisions. Plus 1 Amdt, 2006.
Comply with the requirements of the Building Code of Australia.
105 Submission
Provide to the architect before ordering, samples, literature and technical data of each specified
material.
Confirm compliance with an approved national energy rating system etc. as applicable to the works.

Deliver, handle and store products so that damage, deterioration and loss will be prevented. Control
delivery schedules to minimise long-term storage at the site.
Store above ground with secure impervious material.
201 Approved Material Suppliers

CSR Bradford
Fletcher
Autex
202 Materials – Thermal
A. Roof: Bradford Anticon FBS-1 Glasswool blanket of thickness 80mm, that is thermally rated to
AS/NZS4859.1, faced with Reflective Foil Laminate (RFL) facing (foil facing downwards), to be
laid over safety wire mesh and held firmly against all sheet metal roofing. R-Value 1.8 minimum.
B. External soffits and stud framed walls between soffit and suspended slab: Bradford Glasswool
Building blanket 80mm thick, R-value R1.8 minimum.
C. Exterior Masonry walls: Bradford Fibertex 650 Rockwool board, 75mm thick R-value R2.1
minimum. Note; Insulation board to be fitted against internal leaf.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 07200 INSULATION (THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC)
D. Metal clad and CFC clad external walls: Bradford Gold High Performance 90mm thick batts, R-
value R2.5 minimum.
E. Suspended ceilings: Bradford Gold batts, R-value R2.5 minimum.
F. Concrete slab soffit insulation: Bradford Gold High Performance 75mm thick batts, R2.0
minimum.
G. Sarking to Metal clad and Fibre Cement clad external walls: Bradford Enviroseal ProctorWrap
Commercial Wall vapour permeable membrane.
H. Thermal breaks to metal clad external walls: James Hardie HardieBreak minimum R-value R0.2
thermal break strips to all external wall studs or girts between cladding and stud / girt.
Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and the relevant Australian Standards.
203 Materials–Acoustic
A. Internal framed walls: Bradford Acoustigard 14 wall batts, 90mm thick to match stud thickness.
B. Suspended ceilings and soffit fixed ceilings: Bradford Gold batts, R-value R2.5 minimum.
C. Acoustic lagging: Install Pyrotek 4525 Soundlag acoustic lagging to internal rain water pipes, soil
and waste pipes above and within internal spaces.
D. Acoustic wall panels (Music Classroom, Meeting Room); Autex 50mm Quietspace with Vertiface
fabric covering including edge wrapping. Refer Interior Finishes Schedule.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Visit the site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to
site. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.
302 Preparation
Prepare surfaces and/or framing material and ensure that no obstructions will prevent rapid and effective
installation.
303 Installation General (Thermal)

as relevant.
Comply with manufacturer’s current written recommendations and the relevant Australian Standards.
Install membrane to metal roofing, walls,.
Install bulk thermal insulation to:
Walls; restrain bulk insulation in stud wall sides with no sheeting by stringing-in.
Roof
Ceiling space
Install rigid thermal insulation to areas shown on the drawings: roof, walls, etc.
304 Installation General (Acoustic)

Install acoustic attenuation type material in accordance with the manufacturer’s current written
recommendations. Comply with AS/NZS 2107.
Install acoustic absorption material in accordance with the manufacturer’s current written
recommendations.
Seal junctions and around penetrations where indicated by the acoustic systems designs.
Spray surface after providing protection and masking to surrounding surfaces, in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
Restrain bulk insulation in stud wall sides with no sheeting by stringing-in.
305 Cleaning
Remove surplus material on completion and arrange for inspection(s) by manufacturer’s representative.
306 Completion
Complete contracted work in accordance with the contract document and written variation orders issued
by the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 07200 INSULATION (THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC)
SECTION 07600 METAL ROOFING, SIDING AND ROOF PLUMBING
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install a complete roofing and siding (external cladding) installation as shown on the
drawings including but not limited to the following:
A. Metal deck of zincalume steel, aluminium, copper etc., including accessories, fastening clips,
apron flashings, gutters, parapet linings, copings, sumps, overflow pipes, downpipes. Refer to
External Finishes Schedule project specific document and to the product manufacturer’s
specification for adequacy of each proposed installation.
B. Roof insulation and wire mesh.
C. Roof penetrations and sealing thereof.
D. Metal cladding.
102 Related Work

Structural steel Metal windows and glazing
Doors and door frames Roller shutter doors
Carpentry Drainage

Tradesmen are required to be experienced in and knowledgeable about the work to be performed and
the various Standards to which the work is to comply. The architect will make random inspections during
the execution of the work.
104 References
There are 5 parts, several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011.
AS 1273 1991 Unplasticised PVC (UPVC) downpipe and fittings for rainwater.
AS/NZS 1562 Design and installation of sheet roof and wall cladding.
1562.1 1992 Metal. Plus 3 Amdts, 1993 - 2012.
1562.3 2006 Plastic. There is 1 other part, 1999.
AS/NZS 2179 Specifications for rainwater goods, accessories and fasteners.
2179.1 1994 Metal shape or sheet rainwater goods, and metal
accessories and fasteners.
AS 3566 2002 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries. There are 2
parts.
AS 3999 2015 Thermal insulation of dwellings - Bulk insulation - Installation requirements.
AS/NZS 4256 Plastic roof and wall cladding materials. There are 5 parts,
2006.
AS/NZS 4389 1996 Safety mesh.
HB 39 2015 Installation code for metal roof and wall cladding.
HB 114 1998 Guidelines for the design of eaves and box gutters.
105 Submissions
Submit prior to ordering materials:
A. Samples and product data of specified products.
B. Calculation of sizes for gutters and downpipes.
C. To roofer - supply layout showing exact roof framing member positions.

Deliver to site, unload and stack in a location away from potential damage, preferably directly on to
installed roof framing. Inspect on arrival and reject bent or damaged material.
107 Warranty
Provide to the proprietor a warranty on the whole of the roof and roof plumbing including penetrations for
pipes, flues, upstands etc. performed for mechanical equipment sub-contractor which states that work
will remain waterproof and weather-tight for the period of 15 years from the date of Practical Completion.
PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS200

Fielders Lysaght Bluescope Steel
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 07600 METAL ROOFING, SIDING AND ROOF
PLUMBING
202 Materials- Metal Roofing
Item Manufacturer Material Base Metal Finish Colour Size Details
Thickness
Roofing Lysaght Zincalume 0.48mm Colourbond Surfmist - Spandek
profile
Translucent Ampelite WebGlas 2mm - Opal 2400gsm Spandek
roofing GC roofing profile
with FS
Firecheck
Wire support Galvanised 2mm Galvanised - 300x
mesh steel 150x
2mm
Eaves Lysaght Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Basalt 150mm Half
Gutters dia round
Box gutter Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
drawings
Sumps over Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
downpipes drawings
Downpipes PVC Sewer - - Refer
class drawings
Downpipes Galvanised See Hot dip - Refer to Refer to
steel drawings galvanised drawings drawings
Rain Heads Fielders Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist - R25
Standard
flat
bottom
Cappings Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
drawings
Flashings Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
drawings
Cover Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
flashings drawings
Apron Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
flashings drawings
Gutter Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
flashing drawings
Overflows PVC Sewer - - Refer
class drawings
Insulation Refer Insulation Section
R value
Sealing of Dektite
penetrations Premium
203 Metal Siding (Cladding) for Walls

Item Manufacturer Material Base Metal Finish Colour Size Details
Thickness
Cladding Lysaght Zincalume 0.42mm Colourbond Surfmist N/A Spandek
profile
Cappings Zincalume 0.60 mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
drawings
Flashings Zincalume 0.60 mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer
drawings
Sarking Bradford Enviroseal
ProctorWrap
CW
Thermal R0.2
Break minimum
Strips
204 Fabrication
Form and fabricate components in accordance with AS/NZS 1562 and AS/NZS 2179.1, and other
relevant Standards.
Self-drilling screws are to conform to Class 3 as described in AS 3566.
PLUMBING
In moist environments, prevent totally contact between dissimilar metals (any metals).
between the metals.
301 Examination
Inspect site conditions before installation. Ensure framing is entirely satisfactory.
Ensure that delivery and installation will not be impeded by on-site conditions at time of delivery.
302 Terrain Category

The site is zoned as Terrain Category: 2.5
Refer AS/NZS 1170.
303 Preparation
Prepare framing and surfaces for installation.
304 Installation
Install work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Australian Standards. Refer clause 104.
305 Flashing
Lap flashing at least 150mm at junctions, and over flashings neatly dressed and finished. Where
necessary to follow a roof slope, step flashings in even overlapping widths. Finish top corners to a line
parallel to the roof slope.
Fabricated flashings in materials which are compatible with, and same finish as, gutter and roofing
materials. Complete work and leave an entirely watertight installation.
306 Penetrations
Form penetration flashings neatly with material matching roofing material. Form flanged tubular collars
0.70mm sheet zinc not less than 150mm high and 12mm wider than penetrating item, or use EPDM
collars.
Where the width of a penetration is wider than a roofing trough or extends across several troughs, form
a back gutter, using sheet material similar to the roofing material, well lapped under the roofing, double
riveted and sealed with silicone sealant. Close and seal ends of cut ribs. Form back gutters not less than
100mm wide with falls towards the sides of the penetration collars.
Form over-flashings of penetration collars neatly in material matching the roofing material but not less
than 0.5mm thick, securely clipped and sealed to the penetrating items and dressed well down over the
collars to finish at a straight line level with the tops of the ribs.
Do not use lead or copper for over-flashings.
307 Downpipes
Install in accordance with AS/NZS 2179.1 for metal.
Install in accordance with AS 1273 for PVC. Comply also with manufacturer's instructions.
Secure to building at recommended centres, minimum 1800mm with galvanised steel straps.
308 Cleaning
To prevent contamination and corrosion, keep clean metal roofing and rainwater goods at times during
the progress of the works.
At the end of work each day, and immediately before each occurrence of rain, sweep the metal surfaces
thoroughly to remove metal filing, swarf, off-cuts, dust, and other materials which could cause corrosion
or blockages. Prevent waste materials from entering downpipes, rainwater heads, or drains.
Remove unsecured nails, rivets, screws, bolts and similar fixing devices, guttering, etc., at the end of
work each day and at the completion of roofing installation.
309 Testing
On completion, test the entire installation in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the architect.
PLUMBING
310 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING
SECTION 07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install fall arrest equipment including but not limited to:
Anchor points, static line, fixed access ladders, eaves ladder brackets and associated safety signs.
Allow a Provisional Sum of $10,000.00 plus GST for the supply and installation of fall arrest equipment.
102 Related Work

Roof framing Roofing materials

Work of this trade section is to be performed by experienced craftsmen familiar with the quality required
in this class of work.
Where 5 or more items of a similar product are required, construct a prototype, full size. Finish the
prototype in every respect. When approved by the architect, this sample remains part of the work and
becomes the standard for the remaining work.
104 References
AS 1657 2013 Fixed platforms, walkways, stairways and ladders – Design, construction and
installation.
AS/NZS 1891.1 2007 Industrial fall arrest systems and devices – Harnesses and ancillary
equipment.
There are 3 other parts, 1997 - 2009, 1 Supplement 2001, 2 Amdts 2007 –
2008.
AS/NZS 4801 2001 Occupational health and safety management systems - Specification with
guidance for use.
AS 6001 1999 Working platforms for housing construction
Comply with State requirements and codes of practice in relation to work on roofs.
Comply with the requirements of relevant statutory authorities having jurisdiction on this product.
Product manual produced by manufacturers of components.
105 Shop Drawings
106 Samples
A. Sample welds: if requested, provide samples of weld types, including samples of railings joined
at right angles and at typical acute angles, welded and ground smooth, for approval. If not
acceptable, provide additional samples until approved. When approved, samples will establish
quality of similar work of this section.
B. Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and he will
reject materials not meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples.
C. Finish: provide samples of specified finishes when requested.
107 Warranty
Provide a warranty to the proprietor covering the whole of the work for a period of 5 years after Practical
Completion. Warranty to cover roof penetrations.
201 Manufacturers
Acceptable manufacturers include:
Safemaster Safety Products
202 Materials
Item Description Manufacturer/Supplier

Anchors Surfacemount energy absorbing Safemaster or equal approved
safety anchor points
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT
Item Description Manufacturer/Supplier
Static lines Anchor Strops Safemaster or equal approved
Signage Access Control sign Safemaster or equal approved
Fixed access ladders Aluminium Safemaster or equal approved

Ladder access bracket Safemaster or equal approved
203 Fabrication
Visit site and accurately measure openings etc. before fabrication.
Before delivery to site, pre-assemble where possible all items to ensure proper fit and dimension of each
item. Disassemble and pack carefully for shipping to the site. On delivery and unloading, inspect for
damage and arrange immediate replacement if necessary.
204 Miscellaneous
item is to be secured. Refer to architect if in doubt. Fasten galvanised items with galvanised fasteners.
301 Examination
302 Preparation
Check roof framing and other items to which safety equipment is to be fixed.
Ensure that structures local to the installed items are secure.
A senior technical representative of the material supplier is required to be present to check each part of
the installation.
303 Installation
as relevant.
Secure each item in accordance with Australian Standards.
Arrange with the builder and roofer for penetrations if required through roof materials.
Ensure that penetrations are completely watertight after installation and on completion of the work.

Arrange for inspection of the work before and after completion.
305 Testing
Arrange for tests of each item of equipment. Replace items which fail the test.
306 Portable Equipment

After tests are completed, provide and hand over portable equipment to the builder. Store where
directed. Builder to hand over the material to proprietor on completion of the work.
307 Cleaning
Remove surplus materials and leave the area clean on completion.
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT
SECTION 07810 FIREPROOFING
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Design, fabricate and install materials with required components, fixings, fabrication techniques,
coatings and finishes including but not limited to fire protection of structural steel columns.
102 Related Work

Structural steel Concrete
Wall framing Floor framing
Mechanical Electrical

A. The products specified herein are proprietary items manufactured and supplied by specialist
fabricators. Manufacturer is required to submit written verification of quality of aspects of
materials and performance.
B. Provide certificates prepared by relevant testing authorities stating that the materials comply with
fire-rating and other characteristics claimed by the manufacturer, and qualities required by the
relevant statutory authorities.
C. Pre-installation conference.
Arrange for a conference to establish and settle matters regarding the site installation methods
and time schedule.
D. Installation and application at the site is required to be performed in accordance with the
requirements of relevant statutory authorities.
104 References
AS 1530 Methods for fire tests on building materials, compounds and structures.
There are 7 parts, 2 Amdt, 1992 – 2007.
AS 1603 Automatic fire detection and alarm systems. There are 12 parts 1996 – 2011
and 4 Amdts, 1996 – 2001.
AS 1670 Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems - System design,
installation and commissioning. There are 4 parts, 1997 – 2015,.
AS 1682 Fire Dampers.
1682.1 1990 Specification.
1682.2 1990 Installation.
AS 2118.4 Automatic fire sprinkler systems - Residential
AS 3784.1 1990 Coatings for fire protection of building elements – Guide to selection and
installation of sprayed mineral coatings.
AS 3959 2009 Construction of buildings in bushfire-prone areas. Plus 3 Amdts 2009-2011
AS 4072.1 2005 Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant separating
elements – Service penetrations and control joints. Plus 1 Amdt, 2006.
AS 5414 2012 Bushfire water spray systems
Bushfire Set 2009
HB 37.4 1994 Handbook of Australian fire Standards – Building materials, products and
construction.
105 Submission Required Prior to Fabrication

1. Names of manufacturers of products.
2. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products.
3. Types, names of products, and indication whether products are "off the shelf" or custom
fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses, patented process name,
process description and test data.
4. Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature
B. Statement that the proposed system meets the regulatory requirements, for fire protection and
warranty requirements specified.
C. Shop drawings: refer Document 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT,
items:
3. Methods of assembly.
4. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, caulking.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 07810 FIREPROOFING
D. Sealants: submit manufacturer's product specifications, handling, installation/curing instructions,
and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Submit certificate of
test reports for elastomeric sealants on aged performance, including hardness, stain resistance,
adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility, compression set,
modulus of elasticity, water absorption and resistance (ageing, weight loss, deterioration),
exposure to heat, ozone and ultraviolet light.

Deliver the materials to the site in a totally satisfactory condition. Provide security for materials not
installed, from loss of damage by weather or other cause.
Do not install damaged components or panels; remove and replace.
107 Project Site Conditions

Do not install wet processes in wet weather, or when temperature is less than 4oC or more than 35oC.
108 Warranty
Provide to the architect a written warranty stating that components of the complete installation will
remain intact and in a satisfactory condition for years from the date of Practical Completion.

Promat.
202 Design Criteria

All materials to be erected/applied are to meet the following criteria.
A. Structural movement (of building).
B. Thermal movement.
C. Wind load on panels.
D. Dead load of panels and support structure.
E. Fire resistance requirements.
F. Anchor bolts to secure panels and support structure to building.
203 System Components

Where proprietary items are specified, comply with manufacturer’s/suppliers recommendations.
204 Fabrication
A. Provide and fabricate frame and support structures.
B. Check site dimensions before fabrication of components. Tolerances are not to exceed +3mm, -
3mm.
C. Schedule fabrication in accordance with builder's construction program.
D. Mark each item for easy identification.
205 Source Quality Control

The engineer and architect will make random inspections at various stages of works during installation.
Make available items needed for inspection and verification of compliance with this specification.
301 Examination
Examine conditions at the site before delivery of materials and prior to the commencement of
installation. Arrange with builder for correction of non-optimum conditions.
302 Preparation
as relevant.
Protect by appropriate means adjoining surfaces of the building which may be damaged during the
installation.
303 Installation
Install/apply 30mm Promatect 250 fireproofing materials to structural steel columns in locations as
detailed on the documents to achieve an FRL of 120/-/-. Secure in final position.
Comply with supplier's/manufacturer's installation recommendations.
Apply plasterboard skim coat finish to any exposed face prior to the application of paint finish.
304 Sealants
At junctions with other materials, insert into opening a backing rod, wedged firmly in place. Apply over
the backing rod an approved fireproofing sealant, to colour selected by the architect.
Comply with supplier's/manufacturer's installation recommendations.

A representative or system supplier is required to be present during the installation of fireproofing
materials in the building.
306 Repairs
Repair damaged surfaces which may have been damaged during installation.
Make good the surfaces and reinstate material integrity, all in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
307 Protection
Protect the installation until completion of the project. Prevent damage to completed work by necessary
means.
308 Cleaning
On completion, clean up debris, remove support structures, scaffolding and the like. Leave work and
surfaces in entirely clean and uniform condition.
309 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08200 DOORS, DOOR FRAMES AND HATCHES
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install doors and timber [or steel] door frames including but not limited to:
A. EXTERNAL DOORS
Timber doors in metal frames (jambs).
Solid core doors.
B. INTERNAL DOORS
Flush panel doors - solid core.
Metal frames (jambs).
Acoustic doors.
Glazed doors.
102 Related Work

Carpentry Joinery
Blockwork Brickwork
Plasterboard Fire-rated doors and frames
Metalwork Glass and glazing
Painting Electrical
Suspended ceilings

Prototype: at a location selected by the architect construct a complete prototype installation of:
Include in each prototype elements required by this specification, finished in every respect. When
approved by the architect, each prototype remains part of the work and becomes the standard for the
remaining work.
104 References
AS 1288 2006 Glass in buildings - Selection and installation.
Plus 1 Supplement, 2006, and 2 Amdt, 2008 - 2011.
AS 1428.1 Design for access and mobility. General requirements – New building work ..
1859.1 2004 Particleboard. Plus 2 Amdt, 2006 - 2011.
1859.3 2005 Decorative overlaid wood panels. Plus 1 Amdt, 2009.
1859.4 2004 Wet-processed fibreboard.
AS/NZS 2272 2006 Plywood – Marine.
AS 2688 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doors.
AS 2689 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doorsets.
AS 4145 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows. There are 5 parts, 2001 –
2011 plus 2 Amdts, 2009, 2015.
AS 5007 2007 Powered doors for pedestrian access and egress.
AS 5039 2008 Security screen doors and security window grilles.
105 Submissions
Submit the following for inspection by the architect before installation:
Product literature on proposed hardware items.
Samples of items as requested by architect.

Deliver specified items shortly before installation is due to occur.
Prevent damage and deterioration during transport and handling.
Store carefully at site in a secure area. Prevent twisting and warping of doors. Note the condition
requirements of clause 304.
107 Warranty
Provide to the proprietor a warranty covering faulty materials, and installation, warping of materials and
other faults which may occur within 5 years of Practical Completion.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08200 DOORS, DOOR FRAMES AND HATCHES

Lotus Folding Walls & Doors – Acoustic sliding doors.
202 External doors

Comply with AS 2688 Timber doors.
A. Steel frames: pressed steel 1.6mm thick single [or double] rebated fully welded frames with floor
spreader. Provide 8 or 10, 3mm wire ties per frame for building into walls and 2 black stops on
closing side. Grout back of frames with cement mortar.
Supply steel frames with shop applied rust inhibitive paint.
B. Solid-core doors
Thickness total: minimum 40mm
Core: particleboard
Face each side: waterproof plywood
Edge strips: 10mm hardwood. Total plywood thickness:
203 Internal Doors

Comply with AS 2688.
A. Solid core, Flush panel
Frame of door: timber with top mid and bottom rails
each 50mm deep
Core: medium density particle board
Face: 4.5mm hardboard
Edge strips: to 2, 3 or 4 sides of door, 10mm thick hardwood
Minimum thickness: 35mm,
B. Steel frames: pressed steel 1.6mm thick single [or double] rebated fully welded frames with floor
spreader. Frame to be square bend profile. Provide 8 or 10, 3mm wire ties per frame for building
into walls and 2 black stops on closing side. Grout back of frames with cement mortar.
Supply steel frames with shop applied rust inhibitive paint.
C. Acoustic sliding doors: Lotus Series SL65C/36/CS2 top supported, manually operated Sliding
panels that form a sound retardant closure.
Panels shall be 65SL series with concealed panel junctions. Panels shall be constructed of a
sandwich of board &/or steel separated by acoustic insulation to achieve the specified sound
rating. Panel faces shall be contained within a perimeter frame with interlocking stiles. Panel
faces shall be replaceable in the field.
The manufacturer shall guarantee that the operable walls are of a construction to achieve RW 43
based on acoustic tests to AS1276 by a NATA approved independent Australian acoustic
laboratory.
The Acoustic slider shall be Cavity fixed using track type #100-1 When the Slider is opened the
panels are parked in a single slider configuration. Suspension is two points per module.
Slider shall incorporate SABS Motion safe braking system.
The Acoustic slider will have type 2 seals.
Panel surfaces shall be finished in Formica Glossy White Magnetic whiteboard laminate and
Formica Matt Black Magnetic laminate as nominated on the Door Schedule and Interior Finishes
Schedule.
Panel frames and Head track shall be Powdercoated –refer Interior Finishes Schedule.
D. Glazed Acoustic Sliders: Lotus Series SL80G/30/CS1 consisting of top supported, manually
operated Sliding panels that form a sound retardant closure.
Panels shall be 80SL series with standard panel junctions. Panels shall be constructed of a
perimeter frame containing toughened safety glass to AS1288 & to meet acoustic build as tested.
Standard Lockwood Pull handles by Lotus (others, if required by builder)
Panel faces shall be replaceable in the field.
The manufacturer shall guarantee that the operable walls are of a construction to achieve RW 30
based on acoustic tests to AS1276 by a NATA approved independent Australian acoustic
laboratory.
When the Slider is opened the panels are parked in a single slider configuration. Suspension is
two point per module.
Slider shall incorporate SABS Motion safe braking system.
The Acoustic slider will have Type 1 seals
Panel surfaces shall be finished in clear toughened glass
Panel frames and head track shall be Powdercoated –refer Interior Finishes Schedule.
204 Hatches
For ceiling hatches ensure that the ceiling performance levels are matched by the hatch construction
and performance levels.
301 Examination
Inspect site conditions. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation.
302 Preparation
as relevant.
Prepare openings in walls or other structures before installation. Install fixing grounds and inserts as
required to secure frames.
303 Installation of Door Frames

Erect frames plumb and true. Brace as required until surrounding structure is complete. Comply with AS
2689.
304 Installation of Doors

Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and AS 2689. Reject doors which do not comply with AS 2688
Appendix A. Condition doors to average humidity in area prior to hanging.
Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut
surfaces after machining.
Provide clearance of 3mm at jambs and heads; 3mm at meeting stiles at pairs of door; 12mm from
bottom of door to top of floor finishing or covering. At thresholds provide 6mm clearance.
305 Installation of Hardware

Refer Schedule of Door Furniture and Hardware. Check deliveries on arrival. Keep items locked until
needed. Assume responsibility for delivered items. Fit accurately and at correct heights, protect with
heavy cloth until completion of project.
Label keys, and hand over to builder.
Master key locks as instructed.
306 Adjustment and Cleaning

Adjust each door in its frame and ensure silent operation. Oil locks and hinges. Clean all surfaces
marked during the installation of door frames, doors and hardware.
307 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08330 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply, engineer and install roller shutter door(s) including but not limited to:
Drum support.
Door guides.
Electric motors and controls.
Locking devices.
Wind locks.
Weatherstrips.
Tapered bottom rail.
Powder coating.
102 Related Work

Structural steel Brickwork
Blockwork Concrete
Electrical Painting
Refer to mechanical engineers documentation where ventilation to roller shutter doors is listed.

Craftsmen are required to be experienced and familiar with the quality required in this class of work.
Comply throughout with manufacturer's instructions.
104 References
Comply with applicable portion of the following Australian Standards:
AS 1905.2 2005 Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant walls – Fire-
resistant roller shutters.
105 Shop Drawings

B. Develop details not shown and in conformity with the indicative details shown.
C. Take and confirm dimensions on site, before preparing shop drawings where possible.
D. Submit detailed shop drawings for fabrication and installation of major metalwork. Show plans,
anchorages and accessory items. Provide setting diagrams and full-scale templates of blocking,
106 Samples
acceptable, provide additional samples until approved. When approved, samples will establish
quality of similar work of this trade section.
B. Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and
materials not meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples will be
rejected.
107 Warranty
Provide to the proprietor a warranty, counter-signed by the installer, on the whole of the installation,
which states that work will remain intact, waterproof and fully operational for the period of not less than 5
years after date of Practical Completion.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08330 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS
Mirage Doors B&D Commercial Roller Doors Arco Architectural Systems
202 Materials
A. Roller Shutter: Mirage S75 Steel Roller Shutter
Curtain: 75 x 1.0mm roll formed galvanised steel interlocking slats,
Drum: mild steel or galvanised tube with the outside diameter and thickness appropriate to the size
and application of the steel roller shutter.
Channel guides: 75MM X 37MM roll formed steel
Brackets: fabricate from prime painted mild steel, with the steel gauge to suit the shutter sizes.
Bottom rail: steel box section to accept a weatherseal.
Operation: 1.5 h.p. Electric motor / gearbox c/- push button operation via a reversing contactor,
including emergency chain operation in the event of power failure. Provide key switch in external
weatherproof enclosure.
Finish: Dulux Duralloy powdercoat.
Colour: Refer Exterior Finishes Schedule.
203 Miscellaneous Items

301 Examination
302 Preparation
B. Field measurements: do not delay job progress. Allow for adjustments and fitting of the work in
C. Coordination with work of others: furnish to each relevant trade foreman anchorages and setting

1. Misshaped items: return to shop for repair or replacement.
2. Damaged surface treatment: repair as recommended by application of the finish.
prior to erection.
304 Installation
A. Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure
B. Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted,
adjacent construction.
C. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted.
Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site.
D. Comply with manufacturers' installation instructions throughout.
Where considered necessary by the architect, arrange for supervision of the installation by a senior staff
member of the manufacturer.
306 Protection
Protect the completed installation from damage by appropriate means until completion of the project.
307 Cleaning
Apply necessary lubrication.
Remove temporary protective coating.
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08520 METAL WINDOWS AND GLAZING
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Design, engineer, supply and install a complete glazed system of windows, doors and screens, including
but not limited to:
Material type
Finish type
Openings
Glass types
Glazing methods
Insect screens
Ensure compliance with BCA requirements regarding the protection of openable windows.
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with the tradesmen preparing walls and frames to accept windows, including
casting in of anchors.
Read this trade section of the specification in conjunction with the following:
Approved national energy rating system or Section J report as applicable to the project. Builder’s return
schedule is to confirm all performance requirements for this item.
.
Manufacturer qualifications: not less than 10 years’ continuous experience in the manufacture of the
product types specified.
Installer qualifications: installer is to have not less than 5 years’ continuous experience in the erection of
specified material.
Manufacturers’ specifications: Submit product manufacturers’ specifications for approval prior to
commencing work.
104 References
1170.0 2002 General principles. Plus 5 Amdts, 2003 – 2011.
1170.1 2002 Permanent, imposed and other actions. Plus 2 Amdts,
2005 – 2009.
1170.3 2003 Snow and ice actions. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007.
1170.4 2007 Earthquake actions in Australia. 1 Amdt 2015
There are several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011.
AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Anodic oxidation coatings.
Plus 1 Supplement, 2006 and 2 Amdts, 2008 - 2011.
AS 2047 2014 Windows and external glazed doors in buildings - Selection and installation.
AS 3715 2002 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coating for
architectural applications of aluminium and aluminium alloys.
AS 4145.2 2008 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows – Mechanical locksets for
doors and windows in buildings. Plus 2 Amdts, 2009, 2015.
HB 125 2007 The glass and glazing handbook.
Comply with relevant authority's requirement for fire-rated installation.
105 Submissions Required Prior to Fabrication

Submit samples, shop drawings, confirmation of performance requirements and list of associated
hardware that form part of the installation.
Obtain approval prior to commencing work.
Names of manufacturers of products.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products.
Types, model numbers and names of products, and indication whether products are "off the
shelf" or custom fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses, patented
process name, process description and test data.
Detailed information on products manufactured specifically for this project.
Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and large-
scale details of specially fabricated products.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 08520 METAL WINDOWS AND GLAZING
B. Statement that the proposed system meet(s) the regulatory requirements, thermal, aesthetic and
waterproofing criteria and wind loading, construction, glazing and warranty requirements
specified; noting in detail exceptions.
C. Shop drawings: refer DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT,
items:
Layout (sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly).
Full size section of members.
Methods of assembly, type and location of exposed screws.
Methods of glazing.
Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, caulking, flashings.
Provision for expansion (thermal).
Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces.
Fittings and accessories.
D. Engineer's calculations on wind loading.
E. Sealants: submit manufacturer's product specifications, handling, installation/curing instructions,
and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Submit certificate test
reports for elastomeric sealants on aged performance as specified, including hardness, stain
resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility,
compression set, modulus of elasticity, water absorption, and resistance (ageing, weight loss,
deterioration) and exposure to heat, ozone and ultraviolet light.

Handle materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place. Store sealants as instructed by
manufacturer.
107 Warranty
Provide to the proprietor a warranty, counter-signed by the installer, on the whole of the installation,
which states that work will remain intact, waterproof and fully operational for the period of not less than
years after date of Practical Completion.
PART II MATERIALS

The following manufacturers of window frames are acceptable:
Alspec
Capral
AWS
202 Materials
A. Window frames: Alspec McArthur 101x44 centre pocket framing as scheduled on the drawings
with sub-head and sub-sill extruded aluminium components manufactured from aluminium alloy
6063, temper T5 or T6.
B. Doors: Alspec Swan 45mm commercial door series as scheduled on the drawings extruded
aluminium components manufactured from aluminium alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6.
C. Glass: refer clause 206.
D. Sliding windows: Alspec View-Max Commercial sliding window extruded aluminium components
manufactured from aluminium alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6.
E. Folding doors and frames: Alspec Hawkesbury 101x44 commercial multi-fold door manufactured
from aluminium alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6, with flat sill and integral Stormtech stainless steel
grate.
F. Awning windows: Alspec 50mm commercial awning window extruded aluminium components
with lockable chainwinder with security screen adaptor.
G. Vertical sliding windows: Alspec Provista sashless double hung window.
H. Security Insect Screens: Alspec Invisiguard steel security mesh screens manufactured from
grade 316 stainless steel as scheduled on the drawings. Note all screens to first floor windows to
comply with AS5203-2016 for fall prevention.

I. Adopt Terrain Category: 2.5
Refer AS/NZS 1170.
J. Wind loading: design:
1. Glazing and frame assemblies to suit the static and dynamic wind forces as indicated on
the tables in the AS/NZS 1170.
2. Structural members of glazed units of such strength that when tested at the specified
design wind values they do not deflect by an amount greater than span/240 and do not
cause permanent deflection.
3. Fix members so that the above loading is generated in the members without stress
causing failure or movement becoming evident at any joint.
K. Movement: permit free and noiseless movement of the components due to thermal effects,
structural effect, wind pressure, effect of dead loads, without strain to glass, without buckling of
components and without excessive stress to members or assemblies.
L. Contact with other materials: coat metal surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, plaster,
masonry, wet-application of fire-proofing and absorbent materials with an anti-galvanic, moisture
barrier material. Isolate, with inert material, dissimilar metals for the prevention of electrolytic
action and corrosion.
M. Distortion: design the glazed assembly to minimise visual distortion of reflected images.

205 Finish
Ensure that in corrosive environment the proposed finish meets the product manufacturer’s warranty.
The warranty may be subject to ongoing maintenance procedures, confirm these at shop drawings
stage.
Refer to Finishes Schedule for type and coating thickness.
Polyester powder coat:
Polyester powdercoated, to colour approved by the architect and by the manufacturer of the powder
material, to metal of windows, doors and shop fronts.
Perform pre-treatment and application of powder coating by applicators approved by the architect and
by the manufacturer of the powder material.
Minimum coating thickness of 50 microns subjected to random testing after installation. Non-conforming
material will be removed and made good by the builder.
Comply with requirements of AS 3715.
206 Glass
Metal of windows, doors and shop fronts anodised to selected colour. Refer to approved national energy
rating system or Section J for glass selection.
A. Glass materials for external use: Viridian Comfort Plus Clear glazing, minimum 6.38mm thick.
B. Glass material for internal use: Clear laminated glass minimum 6.38mm thick.
C. Calculations: calculate glass sizes and thicknesses in accordance with Standards, and fixing
devices and connections to structure in accordance with engineer's computations where
applicable.
207 Sealants and Accessory Materials

Refer to Acoustic Report as applicable.
A. Provide non-structural external weatherproofing sealants of low modulus neutral curing silicone
rubber compounds by approved manufacturer.
B. Generally comply with AS 1288, Part 2, Section 6 or 8. Supply spacer gaskets, glazing tapes and
setting blocks compatible with sealants, which do not contribute to sealant colour change or
affect the sealants adhesion to substrates when exposed to ultraviolet light.
Prior to application, samples of materials receiving the silicone, including elastomeric sealants
are to be evaluated by the silicone sealant manufacturer for compatibility and primer selection.
Clearly identify the submitted materials as to manufacturer and product number.
Silicone sealants generally will be clear in colour.
C. Interior sealers: acrylic-emulsion or latex-rubber-modified acrylic emulsion sealant compound,
permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended by manufacturer for
protected exterior exposure and general interior exposure.
D. Joint primer/sealer: provide type of joint primer/sealer as recommended by sealant manufacturer
to suit each surface.
E. Bond breaker tape: polyethylene tape or other plastic as recommended by sealant manufacturer
to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler is to be avoided
for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
F. Sealant backer rod: compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed
polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible permanent, durable non-
absorbent material as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant.
G. Glazing tape: polyisobutylene tape of type, thickness and width as recommended by glass
manufacturer and architect.
H. Exposed screws: countersunk type, anodised aluminium or non-magnetic stainless steel evenly
and neatly located in an approved manner. Exposed fasteners: finished to match aluminium.
208 Fabrication
Framing system: fabricate from extrusions to profiles shown on approved shop drawings.
Form junctions so that no fixings, such as pins, screws, pressure indentations and the like are visible on
exposed faces. Show on shop drawings fixings which will be exposed. Cut edges, drill holes, rivet joints
and clean flat sheets, neat, free from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive
deformation. Fit mitred joints accurately to a fine hairline.
Pre-assemble and match mark before delivery.

In moist environments, prevent totally contact between dissimilar metals (any metals).
between the metals.
210 Acoustic seals

Provide where listed on the drawings
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Perform rectification required before delivery of materials.
302 Preparation
as relevant.
303 Frame Anchorage

Fabricator is required to supply the anchorage devices to the builder for building in by others and check
that devices are located as required to suit the requirements of window frame fabrication for positive and
permanent fixing.
Insulation: isolate dissimilar metals at interfaces with bitumen based or nylon shim materials to prevent
galvanic action.
Make good concrete or masonry damaged during the installation of masonry anchors at no cost to the
proprietor.
304 Frame Installation

305 Glazing
Secure glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations and AS 1288. Allow for thermal
expansion of glass, the metal framing and spandrels.
306 Preparation for Sealants

Joint preparation sealants: clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking
compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which could interfere with
bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by
sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces if recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not
allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate on to adjoining surfaces.
A. Install bond breaker tape where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that
elastomeric sealants will perform properly.
B. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in
uniform continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond
surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly
concave surface slightly below adjoining surfaces.
C. Install sealant to depths as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
D. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength internal cohesive strength and surface
durability.
Advise architect of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during
construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear
and weathering) at time of Practical Completion.
E. Remove excess caulking compound and sealant and leave surfaces neat, smooth and clean,
without smears on surrounding work. Tool joints where recommended by manufacturer or where
required. Remove cartons and debris from site as the work progresses.
308 Insect Screens

Refer Grilles and Screens specification section.
309 Protection
A. Framing system: protect metal surfaces as necessary during erection. Finish surfaces free from
mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes, dents, spots, stains and streaks.
B. Glass: protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation and until Practical Completion.
Remove and replace glass and metal panels which are broken, cracked, abraded, chipped or
damaged in other ways, before, during or after installation, at no additional cost to proprietor.
C. Be responsible for breakage and damage to installation until Practical Completion.
310 Cleaning
A. Remove labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, spots and other foreign matter from glass,
frames, hardware and other finished surfaces immediately upon installation of glazing for each
light.
B. Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from glazing operations, each day.
311 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install door hardware including but not limited to:
Wall mounted grilles for ventilation and other purposes.
Hinges.
Pivots.
Latches.
Locks.
Door holders.
Push plates.
102 Related Work

Floor construction Painting
Wall construction Doors and door frames
Ceiling construction Fire-rated door and frames
Concrete Roller shutter doors
Carpentry Folding doors and grilles
Metal finishing

104 References
AS 1428 Design for access and mobility. There are 5 parts. 1992 – 2010.
AS 1909 1984 (Obsolescent) Installation of timber doorsets.
AS 2688 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doors.
AS 2689 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doorsets.
AS 4145 Locksets.
4145.2 2008 Mechanical locksets for doors in buildings.
There are 4 other parts, 2001 - 2011 plus 2 Amdts 2009, 2015.
AS 4178 1994 Electromagnetic door holders.

Deliver items to site in original packaging, each clearly labelled for the relevant door by door number.
106 Warranty
Provide to the proprietor a warranty covering faulty materials and installation for 5 years from date of
201 Manufacturers
202 Hardware Items

Master key systems: refer schedule provided by manufacturer.
203 Miscellaneous
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Examine the materials to which door hardware is to be fixed.
Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation.
302 Preparation
Remove hardware from surfaces to be painted. Replace when paint is dry.
303 Installation
Comply throughout with the written instructions of manufacturer.
304 Keys
Supply duplicate labelled keys for each lock. Provide plastic tags for each key.
Arrange with architect for location of a key cupboard.
Fit cupboard with hooks for each key with room names or numbers.
Install cupboard where instructed.
305 Testing
Check each key in relevant lock for satisfactory operation. Replace defective keys or locks.
Clean the materials installed.
Remove construction locks.
306 Coordination
Before finalising hardware order, review with security sub-contractor work related to reed switches,
electric locks/strikes etc. Generally such items will be supplied by the security contractors and fitted to
doors and frame by the builder.
307 Door Hardware Fixing Schedule

Fix door hardware scheduled below to be supplied by a nominated supplier.
ALUMINIUM DOOR AND FRAME HARDWARE

No. Item Location
108 Fast Fix Hinges Surface Fixed
25 Mortice Lockset and Accessories Fully Morticed
1 Mortice Deadlock and Accessories Fully Morticed
25 Door Closers Surface Fixed
53 Door Closer Accessories I.e. Hold Open Device Adjustment Only
25 Lever Furniture and Accessories Back to Back Fixed
2 Entry Pull Handles Back to Back Fixed
2 Strapbolts Surface Fixed
11 Floor Threshold Fixed to Floor
12 Door Bottom Seal Fully Rebated into Door Bottom
5 Door Stops Floor Mounted
TIMBER DOOR HARDWARE
128 Butt Hinges Rebated Into Door and Frame
4 Fast Fix Hinges Surface Fixed
4 Mortice Lockset and Accessories Fully Morticed
2 Mortice Deadlock and Accessories Fully Morticed
7 Rebate Kit to suit Mortice Lock/Latch Rebated into Door Edge
4 Lever Furniture and Accessories Back to Back Fixed
4 Mortice Indicator Bolt Fully Morticed
7 Hat & Coat Hook Surface Fixed
19 Door Closers Surface Fixed
11 Strapbolts Surface Fixed
22 Push Plate and D Pull Handle Back to Back Fixed
2 Floor Threshold Fixed to Floor
8 Door Bottom Seal Fully Rebated into Door Bottom
3 Perimeter Frame Seal (head & jambs) Surface fixed to frame
3 Astragal Seal Fixed to Meeting Stile
12 Door Stops Floor Mounted
19 Door Stops Wall Mounted
308 Door Hardware Provisional Sum
Allow a Provisional Sum (PS) of $ 90,000.00 plus GST for the supply of door hardware by a nominated
supplier.
END OF DOCUMENT
SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install a complete system of glass, glazing and sealants including but not limited to:
Glass, clear float
spandrel
Glass, laminated
Glass, tinted, heat reflecting, mirrored
Glazing bars
Glazing beads, strips
Sealants and related materials
102 Related Work

Concrete
Masonry
Structural steel
Roof flashings, etc.
Electrical
Security
Fireproofing and fire services
Timber windows and frames

A. Manufacturer qualifications: not less than ten (10) years continuous experience in the
manufacture of the product types specified.
B. Installer qualifications: installer is to have not less than five (5) years continuous experience in
the erection of specified material.
C. Testing agency qualifications generally: Perform tests, where required, by a NATA Laboratory or
by CSIRO Division of Building Research. Tests performed by recognised overseas testing
laboratories certified by the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) may be submitted and
will be considered in evaluation of the products and systems proposed, but such tests will not
relieve the builder from responsibility for providing tests from an approved testing agency.
D. Take responsibility for providing the trades of such Sections with complete information on the
materials and equipment to be installed, the critical dimensions of such work, and other data
affecting the work of the trades identified.
Ensure sub-contractors and vendors cooperate in the proper sequence and fit of the work.
E. Review sub-contractor’s shop drawings and obtain architect’s approval in writing. Refer
DOCUMENT 00800, clause 27.
F. Take care with tolerances and dimensional verifications.
104 References
1170.0 2002 General principles. Plus 5 Amdts, 2003 – 2011.
1170.1 2002 Permanent, imposed and other actions. Plus 2 Amdts,
2005 – 2009.
There are 2 other parts, several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011.
AS/NZS 2208 1996 Safety glazing materials in buildings. Plus 1 Amdt, 1999.
AS/NZS 2343 1997 Bullet-resistant panels and elements.
AS 4145.2 2008 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows – Mechanical locksets for
doors and windows in buildings. Plus 2 Amdts, 2009, 2015.
AS 4666 2012 Insulating glass units
HB 125 2007 The glass and glazing handbook.
Comply with relevant authority's requirement for fire-rated installation.
105 Submissions Required Prior to Purchase and Fabrication

Names of manufacturers of products.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING
Types, model numbers and names of products, and indication whether products are "off the
shelf" or custom fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses,
patented process name, process description and test data.
Detailed information on products manufactured specifically for this project. Detailed system
description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and large-scale details of
specially fabricated products.
B. Statement that the proposed system(s) meet(s) the regulatory requirements, thermal, aesthetic
and waterproofing criteria and wind loading, construction, glazing and warranty requirements
specified; noting in detail exceptions.
C. Shop drawings: pursuant to DOCUMENT 00800, clause 27 and the provisions of this document,
provide the shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the items:
3. Methods of assembly.
4. Methods of glazing.
5. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, caulking, flashings.
D. Engineer's calculations on wind loading.
E. Sealants: submit manufacturer's product specifications, handling, installation/curing instructions,
and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Submit certificate
test reports for elastomeric sealants on aged performance as specified, including hardness, stain
resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility,
compression set, modulus of elasticity, water absorption, and resistance (ageing, weight loss,
deterioration) and heat and exposure to ozone and ultraviolet light.

manufacturer.
107 Warranty
In addition to the warranty requirements of the General Conditions of Contract, provide the following:
A. Warranty: provide glass manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to, within specified warranty
period, furnish freight paid to project site, replacement units for glass units which have defective
hermetic seals (excluding that due to glass breakage), defined to include intrusion of moisture or
dirt, internal condensation at temperatures above -2°C, deterioration of internal glass coatings,
and other visual evidence of seal failure or performance failure; provided manufacturer's
instructions for handling, installation, protection and maintenance have been adhered to during
warranty period.
B. Warranty period is 10 years after date of installation and not less than10 years after date of

The following manufacturers are acceptable for this project:
Glass: Viridian

A. Adopt terrain category: 2.5
Refer AS/NZS 1170.
B. Wind loading: design glazing and frame assemblies to suit the static and dynamic wind forces as
indicated on the tables in the AS/NZS 1170. Structural members of glazed units: of such strength
that they will not deflect by an amount greater than span/240 without causing permanent
deflection when tested at the specified design wind values. Fix members so that the above
loading is generated in the members without sufficient stress to cause failure or movement
becoming evident at any joint.
C. Distortion: design the glazed assembly and erect to minimise visual distortion of reflected
images.
203 Selection of Glass and Glazing Materials

Refer to detailed parts and sections of AS 1288.
Part 1 deals with the selection of type and thickness of glass.
Part 3 with unframed toughened glass assemblies.
Note particularly:
Part 1, Section 4, Human Impact Safety Requirements, AS/NZS 2208.
Part 1, Section 3, Non-Vertical Situations.
Part 2, Glazing techniques. Choose the method directly from the eight sections of this part of the
Standard.
204 Glass Materials

Glass types (Refer drawings for location)
A. External vision glazing:
1. Viridian Comfort Plus Neutral, 6.38mm minimum thickness. Refer to window schedule for
location and extent.
2. Viridian Comfort Plus Clear, 6.38mm minimum thickness. Refer to window schedule for
location and extent.
3. Viridian Seraphic Design 3mm reverse dots pattern. Colour; White. Refer to window
schedule for location and extent.
B. Internal glazing:
1. Clear laminated, 6.38mm minimum thickness.
205 Sealants and Accessory Materials

A. Comply with AS 1288. Refer the appropriate Trade Section, and comply with requirements
stated.
B. For timber frames, use linseed oil glazing putty.
C. For metal frames:
1. Non-structural external weatherproofing sealants: low modulus neutral curing silicone
rubber compounds of approved manufacture.
2. Generally comply with AS 1288. Spacer gaskets, glazing tapes and setting blocks:
compatible with sealants, which do not contribute to sealant colour change or affect the
sealants adhesion to substrates when exposed to ultraviolet light.
Evaluate prior to application, samples of materials receiving the silicone, including
elastomeric sealants for compatibility and primer selection. Submit materials clearly
identified as to manufacturer and product number.
Silicone sealants generally: clear in colour.
3. Interior Sealers: acrylic-emulsion or latex-rubber-modified acrylic-emulsion sealant
compound, permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended by
manufacturer for protected exterior exposure and general interior exposure.
4. Joint Primer/Sealer: provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
5. Bond Breaker Tape: polyethylene tape or other plastic as recommended by sealant
manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint
filler is to be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where
applicable.
6. Sealant Backer Rod: compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed
polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other permanently flexible,
durable non-absorptive material as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
compatibility with sealant.
7. Glazing Tape: polyisobutylene tape of type, thickness and width as recommended by
glass manufacturer and architect.
8. Exposed fixings: countersunk type, anodised aluminium or non-magnetic stainless steel
evenly and neatly located in an approved manner. Exposed fasteners: finished to match
aluminium.
Show on shop drawings or discuss with the architect before fabrication and delivery of any
fixings which will be exposed.
301 Examination
Arrange for rectification required before delivery of materials.
302 Preparation
as relevant.
303 Preparation for Sealants
Joint preparation sealants: clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking
compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which could interfere with
bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by
sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces if recommended by sealant
manufacturer and comply with his instructions.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not
allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate on to adjoining surfaces.
304 Glazing
Secure glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations and AS 1288. Allow for thermal
expansion of glass, the metal framing and spandrels.

A. Install bond breaker tape where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that
elastomeric sealants will perform properly.
B. Employ proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform
continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces
equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave
surface slightly below adjoining surfaces.
C. Install sealant to depths as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
D. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface
durability.
Advise architect of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during
construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear
and weathering) at time of Practical Completion.
E. Remove excess caulking compound and sealant and leave surfaces neat, smooth and clean,
without smears on surrounding work. Tool joints where recommended by manufacturer or where
required. Remove cartons and debris from site as the work progresses.

Arrange for visits to the site by the supplier's approved technical representative of each component.
Such visits are to occur at the start of and during the first stages of installations and towards the end of
installations. Follow instructions of the technical representatives. Call in the architect where appropriate
for resolution of problems or difficulties.
307 Protection
A. Framing system: protect metal surfaces as necessary during erection.
B. Finish surfaces free from mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes, dents, spots,
stains and streaks.
C. Glass: protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation until Practical Completion.
Remove and replace glass and metal panels which are broken, cracked, abraded, chipped or
damaged in other ways, before, during or after installation, at no additional cost to the Proprietor.
D. Be responsible for breakage and damage to installation until Practical Completion.
308 Cleaning
A. Remove labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, spots and other foreign matter from glass,
frames, hardware and other finished surfaces immediately upon completion of each panel of
glazing.
B. Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from glazing operations, each day.
309 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08850 MIRRORS
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Supply and install mirrors including but not limited to:
Glass mirrors - laminated safety glass
102 Related Work

Cement render Hard plaster
Plasterboard Masonry housework
Particleboard backings Suspended exposed grid ceilings

A. Manufacturer's qualifications: not less than 10 years’ continuous experience in the manufacture
of the product types specified.
B. Installer qualifications: not less than 5 years’ continuous experience in the fixing of the specified
material.
C. Take responsibility for providing the trades with complete information on the materials and
equipment to be installed.
D. Review sub-contractor’s shop drawings and obtain the architect's approval in writing.
Refer DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, clause 27.
E. Take care with tolerances and dimensional variations.
104 References
AS/NZS 2208 1996 Safety glazing materials in buildings. Plus 1 Amdt, 1999.
105 Submissions
If not specified in Part II Materials, the following submissions are required before ordering materials:

the manufacturers.
PART II MATERIALS
202 Selection of Mirror Types

A. Laminated to 3mm clear glass with 0.38mm thick interlayer to comply with relevant sections of
AS/NZS 2208.
203 Accessory Materials

A. Neutral curing (non-acetic) clear silicone adhesive:
applied to the edges of frameless mirrors.
applied to the edges of laminated glass mirrors.
B. Aluminium channel frame to suit glass thickness:
selected colour polyester powdercoat finish applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions. Refer to Interior Finishes Schedule.
204 Fixing Holes

Drill mirrors 8mm diameter at each corner to receive face fixing screws. Locate holes 75mm minimum
from edges of mirrors.
205 Recessed Finger Pulls

Grind and polish, 75mm long, 20mm wide, 3mm deep recessed finger pulls, 50mm back from one
vertical edge of each sliding glass mirror door.
206 Proprietary Brand Mirror Systems

A. Mirror faced proprietary brand sliding door system provided complete with components
recommended by its manufacturer.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08850 MIRRORS
B. Or an alternative mirror faced bi-fold door system provided complete with components
recommended by its manufacturer.
207 Glass Edge Finishes

Finish edges of glass mirrors as follows:
- aluminium channel frame.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
satisfactory for installation. Perform rectification required before delivery of materials.
302 Preparation
as relevant.
Clean glass surfaces immediately before applying silicone sealants to the edges of mirrors. Remove dirt,
insecure coatings, moisture and other substances that could interfere with the bond of the sealant.
Thoroughly clean down the backings to remove dust, dirt and other substances that:
- could interfere with the bond of the adhesive
- could interfere with the bond of the double sided tape
Sand down gloss surfaces of backings to provide porous type finish.
Seal new plasterboard or hard plaster backings with 1 coat of pigmented sealer.
303 Edge Sealing to Mirrors

Arris the outer corner of backings and seal around edges of the mirrors with clear neutral cure (non-
acetic) silicone sealant gunned into place between the backings and the edges of the mirror and finished
off to smooth even fillet lapping slightly over the back edges of the mirror.
304 Support Angles to Bonded Mirrors

12.70 x 9.53 x 1.57 Alcan H 9660 or similar extruded clear anodised aluminium angles provided
continuously along the bottom edges of flannelette bonded glass mirrors. Set the support angles with the
12.70mm flange vertical.
Fix the support angles to the backings using 13mm long counter-sunk head screws spaced 150
maximum o.c.'s along the angles. Glue the angles to the backings in addition to screwing using a clear 2
pot epoxy glue. Set to true straight level lines to ensure a continuous bearing surface along the bottom
edge of the mirror.
305 Fixing of Polarex/Flannelette Bonded Mirrors

Cover mirrors on the back surface with free brushed flannelette fabric pressed into the adhesive and
thoroughly smoothed to remove air bubbles and wrinkles. The adhesive should not saturate the cloth,
and keep the top surface of the cloth dry and fluffy. Leave to harden for approximately 12 hours.
After this adhesive has hardened, apply a full coat of adhesive to the surface of the backing and spread
evenly to cover the whole area of the mirror.
When "tacky" press the mirror firmly into position until the mirror is bonded to the backing such that full
adhesion is maintained over at least 90% of the mirror for approximately 1 or 2 minutes.
Provide spaces of at least 2mm width between adjacent mirrors to allow for expansion and movement in
the backing material.
Paint the backing behind these spaces black. 5 litres of adhesive is sufficient for approximately 25
square metres.
306 Clip Fixing of Mirrors

Fasten mirrors to the backings using chrome plated brass mirror clips screwed to the edges of the
backings using chrome plated counter-sunk Phillips head screws.
Provide flannelette pads between the clips and the mirror. The pads are to be of the same width as the
clips.
307 Face Fixing of Mirrors

Fasten mirrors to the backings using proprietary brand brass screws through holes drilled through the
mirror.
Provide domed caps screwed onto the threaded outer ends of the screws - refer to clause 203 of this
trade section.
308 Proprietary Brand Systems
A. Proprietary brand glass mirror faced sliding door systems installed in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Proprietary brand glass mirror faced bi-fold door system installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Install in the exposed grid, suspended metal ceiling grid in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions. Provide 3mm minimum clearance between the panels and the vertical
flanges of the ceiling grid rails.
309 Protection
A. Aluminium components: protect metal surfaces as necessary during erection and until Practical
Completion. Finish surfaces free from mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes,
dents, spots, stains and streaks.
B. Mirrors: protect mirrors from breakage immediately upon installation until Practical Completion.
Remove and replace mirrors and metal parts that are broken, cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways before, after or during installation up to the date of Practical Completion at no
additional cost to the proprietor.
310 Cleaning
A. Remove labels, excess silicone, stains, spots and other foreign matter from mirrors, frames,
hardware and other finished surfaces immediately upon completion of the installation of each
mirror. Use cleaning systems recommended by the manufacturer of the mirror type.
B. Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from glazing operations each day.
311 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09200 HARD PLASTER OVER RENDER BASE
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
The work of this trade section includes but is not limited to the supply and installation of new (render
base and hardwall plaster) work on masonry surfaces as follows:
Glass face cement render to walls
102 Related Work

Masonry Ceilings
Electrical wiring Joinery
Resilient wall linings Painting

A. Supply and installation of render base (“float coat”) and plaster surface treatment (“set coat”) are
to be performed by an approved sub-contractor known for reliability, quality of work and
performance. Submit evidence to the satisfaction of the architect.
B. At a location and time to be selected by the architect, construct a complete prototypical
installation approx. 6m x 3m square (3m square render base, 3m square plaster finish). Include
elements provided under this section and finish in every respect. On approval by the architect,
the section of render base sample will be plastered and prototype will become the standard for
the remaining work, and will remain as part of the work.
104 References
Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards; current edition:
AS 3700 2011 Masonry structures. There is 1 Supplement 2012, Amdt 2015
HB 161 2005 Guide to plastering

A. General: deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing
the name of the manufacturer and the brand.
B. Protect materials from dampness. Store off the ground or slab, under cover and away from wet
walls and other damp conditions, in secure storage.
106 Warranty
On completion of the work, provide a warranty to the proprietor stating that the work is secure against
defects including delamination from substrate, “blowing", "grinning" and "crazing" for the period of
years from the date of Practical Completion.
PART II MATERIALS

A. To comply with AS 2592:
Cement: Cockburn Cement, Swan Cement
Lime:
Plaster: Thistle
B. Accessories
Rondo
202 Render Base Materials

A. Cement: Grey Portland. Conform to AS 3972.
B. Sand: clean, sharp washed free from loam, organic matter or soluble impurities, conforming with
the following table:
Sieve size Retained on each sieve
No. %
4 0
8 5
16 30
30 65
50 95
100 100
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09200 HARD PLASTER OVER RENDER BASE
Soluble salts content (W/W%) 0.15 max.
NOTE: When instructed by the architect, arrange for laboratory tests to be carried out on sand
samples at no cost to proprietor.
C. Lime (if required): Hydrated lime.
D. Water: Clean, drinkable.
203 Render Base/Plaster Finish Accessories

Rondo galvanised components: refer www.rondo.com.au.
External corner bead: (R01) or (R02) or (R05).
Bullnose external corner: R06.
Stopping bead: (R11, R12 or R13 finished thickness) or (R11) or (R12) or (R13).
Expansion joints: R45.
Lathing: galvanised expanded metal lathing, Lysaght, PL 25 or other approved.
204 Mixes
A. Render base (float coat):
Render over masonry and concrete substrates: sand: 6 parts by volume.
lime: 1 part by volume.
cement: 1 part by volume.
Use minimum water content to achieve workability and adhesion.
Measure parts in mixes by dry volume in gauge boxes. Keep gauge boxes clean and free from
hardened materials.
Do not use any other additives without written permission of the architect.
B. Plaster finish (set coat):
Thistle Multi Finish applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instruction
C. Render base (glass face cement render); sand: 6 parts by volume.
cement: 1 part by volume
hardened materials.
D. Finish coat (glass face cement render); sand: 1 parts by volume.
cement: 1 part by volume
hardened materials.
E. Variations in mix
Obtain the architect’s prior permission to vary mixes where necessary to match new work with
existing adjacent work.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Acceptance: notify the architect of discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate.
302 Preparation
as relevant.
Remove foreign material, dust, dirt, oil, nails and other material which could reduce bonding of render
base to the masonry substrate.
303 Application of Plaster

Unless otherwise nominated, render base is required to all wall areas to receive hardwall plaster finish.
Where render is applied over very smooth masonry, first apply 2 separate coats of Cemstik, Bondcrete
or Bondseal. If in doubt, check with architect.
Thickness - minimum 10mm.
Where 2 coat work is required: Base coat: 8 - 10mm thick.
Finish coat: 6 - 8mm thick.
(comb in 2 directions and allow to dry over 5 days minimum)
Produce surface suitable to accept plaster finish.
Use material within 30 minutes of addition of the water. Beyond this time, discard the mix.
Do not re-temper.
Apply mixes containing cement within 1 hour of adding these materials to the mix.
Apply top coats on each plane in a single operation without joints or breaks.
Dampen render base 3 hours after application.
Do not allow finishes to dry out within 48 hours.
Continue render base behind the full extent of unlined fittings.
Finish curved surfaces to a true radius.
At construction joints between different substrate sections or materials, install:
Galvanised stopping beads fixed to substrates each side of joint.
V-joint in render/plaster at construction joints.
Wall finish control joint as detailed.
304 Application of Plaster

Apply mixes containing hardwall plaster within 1 hour of adding these materials to the mix.
Apply top coats on each plane in a single operation without joints or breaks.
Do not apply plaster finish coats within 7 days of applying render base.
Continue plaster finish behind the full extent of unlined fittings.
305 Movement Control Joints

A. Locate wall finish movement control joints to coincide with junctions of differing wall materials
(reinforced concrete/blockwork).
B. Form joints continuously to extend neatly and clearly up to adjacent abutting surfaces and finish
with approved sealant system.
306 Internal Corners

Finish square internal (re-entrant) vertical corners of walls and columns.
307 External Corners

Finish external vertical corners slightly rounded to approximately 5mm radius or to corner bead as
nominated.
308 Extent of Finish

Extend render base and plaster finish into recesses, door and window reveals, returns, etc.
309 Covering Concealed Chases

Backgrout chases with 1:4 cement mortar up to face level of masonry at least 24 hours before
commencing render base.
Reinforce chases wider than 50mm with galvanised expanded metal lathing (fixed before first render
coat) carried at least 150mm beyond each side of chase and fixed with galvanised fastenings at 300mm
maximum centres.
310 Covering to Steelwork

Unless otherwise detailed, wrap steelwork required to be plaster coated with expanded metal lathing
applied with the cuts of the mesh horizontal and the bent strands sloping downwards and inwards.
Fix lathing before first render coat.
Overlap adjacent material at least 75mm.
Lap lathing not more than 300mm at joints.
Secure lathing to masonry with 4mm staples at 150mm maximum spacings.
Secure lathing to mild steel with explosive powered fastenings and tie wire at 150mm maximum
spacings.
311 V-Joints
Unless otherwise detailed, form V-joints where plaster finish abuts insitu concrete, face brickwork,
blockwork, plasterboard or timber surfaces.
312 Door and Window Frames

Unless otherwise detailed, where plaster finish abuts door and window frames, stop render base and
plaster finish short of frames, ensuring no bond to frame at base of render, raking back to a gap of
approximately 3mm at the plaster surface. Finish frame/plaster gap with approved flexible paintable joint
sealant.
313 Cleaning
Clean up and remove from site excess materials and debris resulting from operations. Clean and restore
to original condition adjacent materials affected by the work.
314 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09210 CEMENT RENDER
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
The work of this trade section includes but is not limited to the supply and installation of cement render
work
Provide render to locations shown on the drawings and with reference to the Finishes Schedule included
in this documentation.
Where proprietary type render is used provide to the product manufacturer’s specifications.
102 Related Work

Electrical wiring Door frames
Brickwork Blockwork

A. Supply and installation of render base and surface treatment is to be performed by an approved
sub-contractor known for reliability, quality of work and performance.
B. At a location and time to be selected by the architect, construct a complete prototypical
installation approximately 3m square. Include elements provided under this section and finish in
every respect. On approval by the architect, the prototype will become the standard for the
remaining work, and will remain as part of the work.
104 References
AS 1672.1 1997 Limes and limestones – Limes for building.
AS 3700 2011 Masonry structures. There is 1 Supplement 2012, Amdt 2015
CIA Z39 2008 Render finishes.
Render is a data sheet published by Cement Concrete & Aggregates Australia. Visit
www.concrete.net.au

General: deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the
name of the manufacturer and the brand.
Protect materials from dampness. Store off the ground or slab, under cover and away from wet walls
and other damp conditions.
106 Warranty
On completion of the work, provide a warranty through the builder to the proprietor stating that the work
is secure against defects including delamination from substrate, "blowing", "grinning", and "crazing" for
the period of 7years from the date of Practical Completion.
PART II MATERIALS
201 Render Materials

A. Cement: Grey Portland. Conform to AS 3972.
B. Sand: clean, sharp, washed free from loam, organic matter or soluble impurities, conforming with
the following table:
Sieve size Retained on each sieve

No. %
4 0
8 5
16 30
30 65
50 95
100 100
Soluble salts content (W/W%) 0.15 max.

NOTE: When instructed by architect, arrange for laboratory tests to be carried out on sand
samples at no cost to proprietor.
C. Lime (if required): Hydrated lime.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 09210 CEMENT RENDER
D. No additives may be used without architect’s written approval.
202 Accessories
Supplied by Rondo Building Services Pty. Ltd.
Rondo EXTREME UV stabilised PVC render beads to all exterior corners.
203 Mixes
Render over masonry and concrete substrates: not greater than 6 parts sand, 1 part lime, 1 part cement,
by volume. Machine mix materials.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Acceptance: notify architect of discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate.
302 Preparation
as relevant.
Remove foreign material, dust, dirt, oil, nails and other material which could reduce bonding of render to
the surface.
303 Application of Render

Where render is applied over very smooth masonry, first apply 2 separate coats of Cemstik, Bondcrete
or Bondseal. If in doubt, check with architect.
Alternatively, bag on to surface a mix of 1 part cement and 1 part sand.
Nominal thickness:
A. Single coat: 15mm of render.
B. 2 coats, base coat: 8-10mm thick.
Comb in 2 directions, and allow to dry over 5 days minimum.
Finish coat, a fine even exposed sand finish, 6-8mm thick.
Where instructed by architect, damp roll or fine spray and lightly acid etch before thoroughly washing
down.
Use material within 30 minutes of the addition of the water. Beyond this time, discard the mix. Do not
re-temper.
304 Movement Control Joints

A. Locate movement control joints to coincide with junction of differing wall materials (reinforced
concrete/blockwork), at maximum 6 metre centres.
B. Form joints continuously to extend neatly and clearly up to adjacent abutting surfaces. Form with
approved mastic sealant and an approved fully compressible joint filler or similar.
305 Internal Corners

Finish square internal (re-entrant) vertical corners of walls and columns.
306 External Corners

Finish external vertical corners to 2.5mm radius render beads.
307 Extent of Rendering

Extend rendering into recesses, jambs, returns etc.
308 Covering Concealed Chases

Before rendering, form covers over chases in walls and columns for pipes, conduits, cables, etc., with
galvanised expanded metal lathing lapped 150mm over recess, fixed with galvanised nails or power
driven fasteners and washers, spaced at maximum 300mm centres. Fix lathing before first coat of
render.
309 Door and Window Frames

Unless otherwise detailed, stop render short of door and window frames so that no bond occurs to
frames. Rake back to a gap of 3mm at the surface. Finish the gap with paintable silicone rubber joint
sealant.
310 V-Joints
Form V-Joints in render where steel door frames are flush with render, also where insitu concrete beams
abut brickwork or blockwork and where concrete or masonry walls abut plasterboard or timber substrate.
311 Cleaning
Clean up and remove from site excess materials and debris resulting from operations. Clean and restore
to original condition adjacent materials affected by the work.
312 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09250 PLASTERBOARD
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install a complete installation of plasterboard including but not limited to:
Plasterboard
Lining of concrete and masonry walls
Lining of steel stud walls
Lining with water-resistant plasterboard
Ceilings, drop walls, bulkheads
Cornices.
102 Related Work

Masonry walls Electrical
Stud walls Other:
Suspended ceilings

Prototype: at a location selected by the architect, construct a complete prototypical installation of
plasterboard on each different substrate.
Each sample, full height by 3600 wide includes elements required by this specification and finish in
every respect. When approved by the architect, this sample will remain part of the work and becomes
the standard for the remaining work.
104 References
AS/NZS 2589 2007 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing.
HB 161 2005 Guide to plastering

Deliver manufactured materials in bundles and packages bearing the name of the manufacturer and the
brand. Handle with care. Remove damaged materials from the site. Protect stored materials from
damage and damp, or materials which may cause deterioration.
106 Warranty
Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5
years from the date of Practical Completion. The warranty includes a statement that the whole of the
work has been carried out in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and Codes and
manufacturer's instructions in effect at the time of installation.
PART II MATERIALS

CSR Gyprock
Boral Plasterboard
BGC GTEK
Rondo
202 Materials
Supply materials in accordance with material supplier's recommendations for each application. Refer to
the drawings for locations and extent of boards.
13mm thick impact resistant plasterboard, minimum mass 10.5kg/m2.
13mm thick plasterboard.
13mm moisture resistant plasterboard.
13mm perforated plasterboard.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Acceptance: visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of
materials to site. Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09250 PLASTERBOARD
302 Preparation
B. Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done prior to commencement of
work; failure to do so will involve removal of plasterboard and immediate rectification.
C. Arrange for provision of additional stud, nogging, trimmed openings, boxed studs, fixing grounds,
etc., required for satisfactory execution of the work of this trade including penetrations through
plasterboard for services. Cooperate in installation of frames, duct openings, etc.
D. Space enclosure: do not install materials until space is enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-
work in space is completed and nominally dry.
303 Layout and Tolerances

A. Check dimensions of areas and surfaces to which material is applied before installation begins.
B. Measure each area and establish layout pattern.
C. All finished work is to be within + 2mm of the sizes shown on the relevant drawings.
304 Installation - General

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Anchor and fasten materials and
components to comply with ratings and performance requirements, and to comply with governing
local regulations. Comply with appropriate Australian Standard.
B. Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components,
during installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.

General: apply treatment at board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetration,
fasteners, heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Pre-fill
open joints and rounded or bevelled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer.
Apply fibreglass joint tape at joints between boards, where a trim accessory is indicated, or where extra
strength is required.
307 Protection
Protect finished work. Make good damage in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor, and
without delay to job progress.
308 Cleaning
A. Adjust and clean: clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with
manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and
replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate
damage.
B. Remove spatterings and droppings resulting from work. Remove daily surplus materials and
rubbish from the work area.
C. Leave floors broom clean at completion.
309 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 09250 PLASTERBOARD
SECTION 09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Supply and install drywall partitions including but not limited to:
Steelwork
Stud wall framing
Plasterboard
Pre-surfaced panels of plasterboard etc.
Other:
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with the following trade sections:
Floor construction Ceiling construction
Floor treatment Electrical wiring
Skirtings Plumbing
Wall construction Painting
Wall finishing

Prototype: at a location selected by the architect on site, construct a full size prototype of:
Include in each prototype all elements required by this specification, and finish in every respect.
When approved by the architect, such samples will be the control standard and remain part of the work.
104 References
AS 1684 Residential timber-framed construction. There are many parts and
Supplements, 1999 – 2010 and Amdts 2012, 2013.
AS/NZS 2589 2007 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing.
2589.1 1997 (Available Superseded) Gypsum plasterboard.
2589.2 1997 (Available Superseded) Fibre reinforced gypsum
plaster.
AS 3623 1993 Domestic metal framing.
AS/NZS 4600 2005 Cold-formed steel structures. Plus 1 Amdt, 2010.

Deliver manufactured materials in bundles and packages bearing the name and manufacturer, and the
brand.
Handle with care. Remove damaged materials from the site. Protect stored materials from damage and
damp, or materials which may cause deterioration.
106 Warranty
Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years
from the date of Practical Completion. Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried
out in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and codes and manufacturer's instructions in effect
at the time of installation.
PART II MATERIALS

CSR Gyprock
Boral Plasterboard
BGC GTEK
Rondo
202 Materials
Supply materials in accordance with material supplier's recommendations for each application. Refer to
the drawings for locations and extent of boards and framing sizes.
A. 13mm thick impact resistant plasterboard, minimum mass 10.5kg/m2.
B. 13mm thick plasterboard.
C. 13mm moisture resistant plasterboard.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS
D. 92mm lipped steel studs as nominated on the drawings, base metal thickness to suit maximum
wall height in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
E. Acoustic and thermal insulation; refer to Insulation Thermal and Acoustic specification.
203 Material Specials Not applicable
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Rectify discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate.
Space Enclosure: do not install materials until space is enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-work in
space is completed and nominally dry.
302 Preparation
F. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian
G. Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done prior to commencement of
work; failure to do so will involve removal of dry wall partition and immediate rectification.
H. Arrange for provision of additional stud, nogging, trimmed openings, boxed studs, fixing grounds,
etc., required for satisfactory execution of the work of this trade including penetrations through
plasterboard for services. Cooperate in installation of frames, duct openings, etc.
303 Installation General

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Anchor and fasten materials and
components to comply with ratings and performance requirements, and to comply with governing
local regulations. Comply with appropriate Australian Standard.
B. Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components,
during installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.
305 Protection
Protect finish work. Damage made good in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor, and
without delay to job progress.

General: apply treatment at board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations,
fasteners, heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Pre-fill
open joints and rounded or bevelled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer.
Apply fibreglass joint tape at joints between boards, where a trim accessory is indicated, or where extra
strength is required.
307 Cleaning
A. Adjust and Clean: clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with
damage.
B. Remove spatterings and droppings from work. Remove daily surplus materials and rubbish from
the work area.
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS
SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install ceramic tile work including but not limited to:
Preparation of surfaces before tiling or bedding.
Bedding screeds where required.
Wall tile.
Floor tile.
Cleaning of finished tiled surfaces.
102 Related Work

Wall construction Floor construction

A. Qualifications: tiling sub-contractor to submit to architect evidence of reliability in quality of work
and performance.
B. Samples: provide samples of tiles specified; not less than 4 units of each.
C. Sample panel: for each tile type, floor and wall, construct a sample panel, 1 metre square. When
approved by the architect this sample becomes the standard for the balance of the work and
remain as part of the completed work.
104 References
AS 1428.1 Design for access and mobility. General requirements – New building work.
There are 5 parts. 1992 – 2010.
hazards.
AS 3958 Ceramic tiles.
3958.1 2007 Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles.
3958.2 1992 Guide to the selection of a ceramic tiling system.
AS 4663 2013 Slip resistance measurement of existing pedestrian surfaces.
Contact www.ardexaustralia.com for technical advice regarding waterproofing matters and technique.
105 Submissions
Copies of minutes of pre-installation conference.
Submissions required prior to installation: product specifications for:
adhesives, primers, prepared grouts, moisture resisting admixtures.

Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers with grade, type and quality indicated on the labels.
Provide secure and dry storage.
107 Warranty
Provide a warranty covering defects in materials and installation for a period of 5 years from the date of
201 Screed Materials for Masonry Walls, Concrete Floors
Item Type Required

Cement Portland cement, comply with AS 3972, cement type A
Sand Clean, washed, sharp, sieved and graded, complying with
the following limits:
Sand grade No % Passing sieve
4 (4.75mm) 100
8 (2.36mm) 95-100%
100 (150 microns) 25% max
200 (75 microns) 10% max
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE
Item Type Required
Fineness modulus 1.6 to 2.5%
Water demand ratio by weight 0.65% maximum
Aggregate Passing 4.75m sieve 80%
Passing 6.00mm sieve 90%
Passing 8.00mm sieve 100%
Water Clean, drinking quality
Mesh Galvanised steel, welded wire fabric: minimum 2.5mm
diameter wires at 100mm centres each way.
202 Adhesives and Sealants

A. Bond and seal all tiles with low or zero VOC sealants.
B. Exterior/wet area adhesives: cement-based ceramic tile adhesive.
C. Interior/dry area adhesives: organic based adhesive.
203 Underlay and Backing Boards

A. Underlay over timber floors:
B. Ceramic tile wall-backing for stud walls:
C. Fastenings: Use fastenings supplied by material manufacturers in each case.
D. Waterproof membrane: recommended by an approved manufacturer.
204 Tile
Supply: specified tiles are available from the following suppliers:
Refer Interior Finishes Schedule.
205 Table of Tile Finishes

Refer Interior Finishes Schedule and drawings.
206 Grout
Prepared grout: inorganic Portland cement integrated, ready-to-use, dry-curing grout. Colours to
architect’s selection.
Supply waterproof grout for wet area tiling.
207 Expansion Joints

Silicone rubber, as recommended by manufacturer. Colour to architect’s selection.
208 Spare tiles

Deliver to the site in unopened boxes, spare specified tiles equivalent to 5% of the total area of ceramic
tiles laid.
Do not deliver to the site until directed by the architect. Place in the final storage location.
301 Examination
Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings, before delivery of materials to site.
as relevant.
Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate.
302 Conditions of Installation

A. Install backing boards or panels in accordance with manufacturer's precise instructions.
B. Allow cement-rendered surfaces to dry out at least 7 days, and preferably 14 days, before tiling.
Longer curing times are required if recommended by adhesives' manufacturers.
C. Rectify substrate so that when checked with a 2m straightedge, gap under the straightedge does
not exceed 6mm.
D. Allow new concrete to dry out for at least 4 weeks before rendering or direct fixing of tiles.
Wall screeds: uniform in plane and lightly combed. Floor screeds: broom finished.
E. Consult the architect concerning changes of level in excess of 25mm or in compliance with AS
1428.1.
303 Setting Out

A. As far as possible, set out work so that no tile less than half size occurs. Align joints in floor tile at
right angles to each other and straight with walls to conform to patterns selected. Verify locations
of equipment before installing tile. Coordinate with plumbing and other trades. Fully tile surfaces
under surface-mounted items.
B. Expansion Joints
Set out panels of tiling so that tiles may expand or contract to and from corners of tiled walls and
floors. Allow for expansion in each corner of 5mm minimum. Fill expansion joints with silicone
rubber.
C. Control Joints
1. Provide control joint
At junctions of dissimilar wall construction.
2. In walls, no more than 2.5 apart.
3. At junctions of wall and floor in multi-storey buildings.
D. Form junctions of different materials (e.g. tiles to carpet) so that they occur under the centre line
of doors.
304 Bedding Mixing

A. Tile fixing mortar is to be adequately cohesive and water retentive but not richer than 1:3 nor
leaner than 1:4 cement/sand by volume.
Within these limits the choice of the precise proportions is governed by the need to produce a
mortar of the required properties with the minimum water content. These proportions will depend
on the sand in use and is found by practical trial before tile fixing starts.
B. Once the proportions are established, make every attempt to minimise random variations. Batch
by weight wherever possible. Do not batch with shovels.
C. The mixing of mortars by a suitable machine is to be preferred whenever it is practicable.
D. Volume batching: base batching on multiples of a whole bag of cement (50kg, approximating
0.035m3 or 35 litres). In such cases measure by volume using correctly made gauge boxes or
other suitable containers of fixed, measurable volume. This method allows water addition to be
checked and thus permits approximate mix proportions to be established and maintained.
E. Where mixing by machine is not possible, mortars may be mixed on a clean non-absorbent
surface using clean hand tools. Whatever method of mixing is used, blend the materials
thoroughly in the dry state before water is added. Continue mixing until the batch has a uniform
consistency.
F. No water should be added once mixing is complete. Discard mortar which is unused within 2
hours of adding the mixing water.
305 Bedding Methods

A. Portland Cement bedding, semi-dry mix method:
1. Mix: 1 part cement to 4 parts of sand by volume, mixed dry, with only sufficient water
added to make a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed in the
hand. It is important to ensure complete mixing of the cement and sand.
2. Before laying the mix, establish finished floor levels by means of dots. Spread roughly to a
thickness slightly greater than that required for the actual bed.
Thoroughly compact and draw-off to the required level. Lay only sufficient bedding mix for
one man to deal with satisfactorily in one operation.
3. Pour a slurry consisting of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume with sufficient water to
make it slightly fluid, over the bedding and spread with a trowel until it is about 3mm thick.
Place tiles, which preferably are dry, in position and firmly beaten into the bedding. Form
joints of at least 2mm and regulating should be done at this time.
Wash off if necessary after the joints have set thoroughly.
4. Minimum bedding thickness 25mm.
B. Bedding with adhesives (walls only):
1. Apply adhesive to a thin bed or thick bed according to site conditions:
a. Apply thin bed adhesives when the background is true to within 3mm when tested
with a 2 metre straight edge, at thickness not less than 1.5mm and not more than
3mm. Apply with a notched trowel.
b. Apply thick bed adhesives when deviations up to 6mm, over a 2 metre length, are
present in the background, or when applying tiles having deep keys or ribs on their
backs. Thick bed adhesives should be used at thicknesses not less than 3mm and
not exceeding 12mm. Apply with either 10 x 10 x 10mm notched trowel, solid bed
or buttering method.
2. Application methods:
a. Notched trowel method: apply the adhesive to the background as a screed, then
form ribs by combing it with a notched trowel of the type recommended for the
particular application. Do not apply adhesive in areas larger than 1 square metre at
a time.
b. Solid bed method: apply the adhesive to the background as a screed and bring it to
a true surface, working in 1 square metre area at a time.
c. Buttering method: spread the adhesive evenly over the back of the tile to a
thickness slightly greater than the final bed thickness required, so that when the tile
is pressed or tapped firmly into position, the correct thickness is achieved and the
tile is solidly bedded over its entire surface.
3. Apply dry tiles immediately into the adhesive, before it skins.
4. Press the first tile firmly into position and then remove it to check that complete contact is
being made with the adhesive. Make occasional similar checks throughout the tiling work.
The whole of the back of the tile is to be in good contact with the adhesive. Do not allow
voids to occur beneath tiles.
5. Remove surplus adhesive remaining on the face of the tile or in the tile joints, after fixing,
before it skins.
6. Form joints straight and constant in width. Under no circumstances fix tiles with tight
joints.
7. Allow tiles to set for a minimum 24 hours before grouting and protect from weather, water
penetration, etc. during this period.
8. Expansion joints: refer clause 303 B, complying with AS 3958.1. See clause below.
C. Cement based adhesive method for extruded, quarry or terracotta floor tiles:
Secure to a prepared concrete surface with cement based adhesive 10mm thick with a 10mm
notched trowel. Comply with manufacturer’s current instructions
306 Installation - General

A. Wall tiling: comply with the recommendations of AS 3958.1 and AS 3740.
B. Floor tiling: comply with the recommendations of AS 3958.1 and AS/NZS 3661.2.
C. Adhesives: comply with recommendations of adhesive manufacturer.
D. Sealing: where tiles are cut around penetrations for taps and outlets, seal thoroughly with silicone
rubber to prevent water entry behind tiles.
E. Membrane: install to manufacturer’s instructions, with a 100% waterproof result.
307 Tolerances and Cleaning

A. General: install tiles in true planes so that when checked with a 2m straightedge, gap under the
straightedge does not exceed 3mm. In sloped floor tiling this tolerance does not apply across
intersections of fall planes. Adjust tiles within 10 minutes of fixing.
B. Cleaning: cleaned down using a damp cloth before cement smears and surplus mortar begin to
harden on the surface or in the joint spaces, care being taken to avoid disturbance of the tiles
during the setting of the bedding.
C. Lighting: whenever possible the lighting at the time of applying the bedded finish is not to be
appreciably different from the ultimate permanent lighting.
308 Grouting
A. Except as otherwise required, do not commence grouting for at least 24 hours after placing of
tile. Follow specific instructions of materials manufacturer.
B. Grout mix:
1. Floors: Prepared grout, acid resistive.
2. Walls: Epoxy-based mortar grout, mildew resistant.
3. Colours: as selected by the architect.
C. Grouting and curing:
1. Apply the grouting mix to as large an area as can be worked before hardening
commences. Apply with a squeegee working back and forth over the area until the joints
are completely filled. Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a damp, not wet,
cloth and the joints then tooled. After the grouting has dried, final polish using a clean, dry
cloth.
2. Remove surplus grout from the floor surface; on no account use sawdust for this purpose,
as there is a danger that sawdust entering moist joint surfaces may break down their
strength, and cause them to become porous.
3. In dry weather, grout joints after maintaining damp condition for 3 days by sponging down,
fog-spraying or other methods. Allow floors to set 48 hours before permitting ordinary foot
traffic.
309 Protection
Prevent walking on or contact with floor or wall tiles for a minimum of 7 days. During that period, cover
floor tiles.
310 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09500 SUSPENDED CEILING
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install a complete system of suspended ceilings including but not limited to:
Plasterboard ceilings.
Acoustic tile ceilings.
Bulkheads.
Ceiling access panels.
Insulating material.
102 Related Work

Roof framing Structural steel
Concrete Mechanical services
Masonry Plasterboard

A. Prototype
At a location and time to be selected by the architect construct a complete prototypical ceiling
installation in one bay from one column to another of each ceiling type. Include elements
provided under this trade section and finish in every respect. When approved by the architect, the
prototype becomes the standard for the remaining work, and will remain as part of the work.
B. Acoustical ceilings installer
Sub-contractor is to have not less than 3 years of successful experience in installation of ceilings
similar to requirements for this project and who is acceptable to manufacturer of each ceiling
type.
104 References
AS/NZS 2785 2000 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation.
AS 2946 1991 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface
requirements for physical compatibility.
AS/NZS 4600 2005 Cold-formed steel structures. Plus 1 Amdt, 2010.
105 Samples
A. Acoustical ceiling tile: provide samples of tile, as selected by architect to be supplied; not less
than 2 units of each.
B. Provide one sample of each of the following elements:
1. Rounded cornice
2. Cornice internal angle
3. Cornice external angle
C. Suspension systems: provide sample of each component of suspension and acoustic suspension
system, including both standard shapes and accessories.

Deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the
manufacturer and the brand.
Protect materials from dampness. Store off the ground or slab, under cover and away from wet walls
and other damp conditions, in secure storage.
107 Warranty
Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 10
years from the date of Practical Completion.
Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with relevant
Australian Standards and manufacturer's instructions in effect at the time of installation.

GSR Gyprock Boral BGC GTEK Rondo Armstrong CSR Bradford
Architectural Ceiling Systems
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 09500 SUSPENDED CEILING
202 Materials
A. Suspension system: Carrier rails shall be 45 x 38 x 0.8mm thick, roll formed steel sections
spread at 1200 centres. Fix carrier rails to 38 x 38 x 0.8mm thick galvanised coated steel angle
hanger at 1200mm centres. Note; spring or friction type suspension clips are not approved
for use.
B. Mineral fibre acoustic tiles, Armstrong Ultima + (factory applied finish, fine textured surface),
1200x600x19mm, in Armstrong Blue Tongue Aluminium 24mm Flat Face Tee exposed T-grid
proprietary suspension system and shadowline wall angle or a similar product / system
equivalent in function, quality, etc. to the approval of the architect. NRC 0.70. CAC 41dB.
C. Perforated plasterboard; CSR Gyptone 12mm square hole perforated with black scrim backing
fabric.
D. Moisture resistant plasterboard, 13mm; to all wet area ceilings and bulkheads.
E. Plasterboard: 13mm
F. Ceiling access panels in flush ceilings: Gyptone 510 x 510 access panels and frame.
G. Cornice: Rondo P50 shadowline wall angle or as specified on ceiling plans and detail drawings.
H. Casing beads, stop-ends, etc.: Rondo trims as required or a similar product equivalent in
function, quality, etc to the approval of the architect.
I. Perforated corrugated soffit lining: Coruline metal strip panels manufactured by Architectural
Ceiling Systems installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Carrier rails to be ACS P/No 4 mat black finished universal carrier rails spaced 900mm apart
commencing and finishing at a maximum of 150mm from the ends of the panels. Hangers shall
be ACS P/No 63 25x25 angle compression hangers as supplied by the manufacturer and shall
be fixed with a 12mm wafer head screw to purlins and ACS P/No 4 carriers at a maximum of
1800mm centres.
Conceal fix perforated Coruline metal ceiling face panels, 160mm wide, by means of screws or
rivets as recommended by the manufacturer through the fixing flange on one side of face panel.
Continue to install face panels applying edge pressure on each panel appropriate to achieve a
firm fixing. No rivets or other fixings shall be visible on the main body of the ceiling.
Perforated Coruline panels should be fixed in full lengths, where possible or joined end to end
with the face of a colour matched aluminium T-section trim or H mould covering the meeting of
each panel run. Ensure that the line of each panel flows through to the next bay of panels.
Face panels shall be Colorbond Zincalume 0.4mm BMT and shall be corrugated to provide 6 ribs
per panel. All fixings and raw metal edges shall be concealed. Coruline face panels shall be
perforated with 3mm diam. holes at 7mm centres in a diagonal pattern. Perforations shall cover a
width of 120mm of each face panel leaving 40mm unperforated at the side junction of each of the
panels. Wall trims to be extruded aluminium “L” of baked enamel finish to match the colour of the
panels.
Acoustic and thermal insulation, to a thickness of 50 to roof soffits and 75mm to concrete slab
soffit, shall be black faced with non-woven scrim which is to be laid over perforated ceiling panels
between the up-stand legs of the carrier rails.
J. Insulation: refer Thermal and acoustic insulation specification.
203 Accessories
Supply and install necessary accessories as indicated by component manufacturer for satisfactory and
complete installation.
204 Equipment
Supply equipment, forms, scaffolding, ladders, frames, etc. necessary for the satisfactory installation of
specified items.
301 Examination
Acceptance: visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of
materials to site. Rectify unsuitable situation.
Start of work means total acceptance of conditions. Comply with referenced Standards and
manufacturer's recommendations regarding environmental conditions.
302 Preparation
Space enclosure: do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed, is weatherproof until
wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry until work above ceilings completed, and until ambient
conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated
for final occupancy.
Protect wood, metal, glass, flooring and other finished work during progress. Damage is to be made
good in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor.
Prepare areas and surfaces against which installation will be constructed. Ensure work by other trades
is completed before erecting suspension system.
Powder driven fasteners are not approved for use.
303 Installation
as relevant.
Comply throughout with applicable portions of AS/NZS 2785, or AS 2946, and with the data sheets
supplied by material manufacturer.

When requested by architect, arrange for manufacturer's representative to visit site and check
installation.
305 Adjustment
Adjust installation to permit installation of such items as light fittings, mechanical vent registers and the
like.
306 Protection
Protect completed installation from possible damage until issue of Practical Completion certificate.
307 Cleaning
Clean surfaces exposed to view. Replace sections or components which cannot be cleaned. Make good
damaged sections or panels affected by later work of other trades.
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Supply and install resilient floor surfacing material with necessary accessories and related equipment
required for the work including but not limited to:
Vinyl sheet
Moisture barrier
102 Related Work

Concrete Internal wall construction

Suppliers and installers need to be widely experienced in the class of work required for the work of this
section. At a place selected by the architect, construct a prototype of a completed installation of vinyl
floor and skirtings, 3 square metres in area. On completion of the prototype and approval by the
architect of aspects of the installation, the work remains in place and becomes the standard for the
remaining work.
104 References
AS 1884 2012 Floor coverings - Resilient sheet and tiles - Laying and maintenance
practices.
hazards.
AS 4586 2013 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials.
Comply also with instructions of manufacturers of materials to be installed.
105 Submissions
Provide samples and data sheets of materials.
Obtain architect's approval for each item before ordering.

Deliver materials in the packaging of the supplier, bearing the brand name, colour, thickness and other
relevant data.
Store materials in a secure dry area away from other materials which may cause deterioration.
107 Warranty
Provide a warranty covering aspects of the installation performed by this trade, against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of Practical Completion. The warranty
includes a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with AS 1884 and
the instructions of the manufacturers of components in effect at the time of installation.
PART II MATERIALS
201 Materials
Vinyl sheet: refer to Interior Finishes Schedule.
Adhesive: refer AS 1884.
Moisture barrier: Emer Proof Aqua Barrier by Parchem.
Movement joint cover strip: Armstrong X-pand Strip or similar.
202 Equipment
Supply equipment required for the preparation of floor, and installation of vinyl materials as
recommended by the material manufacturer.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Examine the site conditions applicable to each installation and comply with AS 1884.
as relevant.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
302 Preparation
Prepare each area to be surfaced in accordance with AS 1884. Test the dryness of concrete sub-floor in
accordance with AS 1884.
303 Installation
A. Moisture content: Test the moisture content of the concrete to AS 1884 Appendix A Submit
moisture content test results to the architect and obtain approval prior to application of the
membrane. If the values required in clause A3.1.2 or A3.1.3 are not obtained apply Emer Proof
Aqua Barrier membrane barrier or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc. to the
approval of the architect. Application shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Compatibility with the floor vinyl adhesive to be confirmed prior to application.
If the required moisture content values are obtained the moisture barrier membrane will
be deducted from the contract as a variation.
B. Adhesives: comply with AS 1884, and manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install material in accordance with AS 1884, including conditioning of both the materials and the
sub-floor.
1. Weld joints of vinyl sheet.
D. Skirting, to manufacturer's instructions.
E. Form junctions of different materials (e.g. tiles to carpet) so that they occur under the centre line
of doors.
F. Movement joints: Install movement joint cover strips over floor slab movement joints. Refer to
structural drawings for locations and extent.
304 Cleaning
Remove excess adhesive and blemishes from the completed surfaces of flooring and skirtings.
305 Protection
Apply suitable hardboard or plywood to completed floors and maintain in position until final cleaning prior
to Practical Completion.
306 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09685 MODULAR CARPET (TILE)
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Supply labour, materials and equipment required for supply, delivery, storage, installation and testing for
the complete Modular Carpet installation.
102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with:
Installers of floors
Joinery
Preparation of surfaces under and adjacent to floors to receive carpet.

A thoroughly experienced and skilled tradesmen familiar with projects of this nature, under the direction
of a similarly experienced foreman, is required.
104 References
AS/NZS 1385 2007 Textile floor coverings - Metric units and commercial tolerances for
measurement.
AS/NZS 2270 2006 Plywood and blockboard for interior use. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007.
AS/NZS 2455 Textile floor covering - Installation practice
2455.1 2007 General. Plus 1 Amdt, 2009.
This standard provides full instructions of pre-installation requirements and
installation methods.
2455.2 2007 Carpet tiles.
Maintain a copy of AS/NZS 2455.1 2007 General, at the project site until completion.
105 Submissions
Submit the following data and obtain approval from the architect before ordering materials:
A. List of recent projects with contact names and telephone numbers.
B. Full size sample module of each carpet type.
C. Confirmation of acceptance and compliance with the requirements of the builder in relation to the
time schedule for supply and laying.
D. Schedule of laying rates per square metre.
These rates include supply and installation of adhesive (if required) and accessories, cutting
(where required) and allowances for profit, overheads and administration costs.
E. Properties: provide test certificates from recognised authorities with the tender to confirm that the
modular carpet complies with the properties set down in clause 204.
F. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials comply with this specification.

Deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the
manufacturer.
Protect materials from dampness. Store off the ground or slab, under cover away from wet walls and
other damp conditions in an approved location in the building.
107 Carpet Module Manufacturer's Guarantees

Provide a written confirmation from the manufacturer or his accredited representative that the carpet
modules have been properly installed and that subject to the carpet modules being properly maintained
indoors in a commercial installation, the carpet modules to the affected area/s will be replaced by the
manufacturer at his expense if any of the following occur:
A. Surface pile in area wears more than ten percent (10%) within 10 years of installation.
On stains the period of this guarantee is 5 years.
B. Horizontal dimensions of the modules vary from the specified dimensions by more than .2
percent (0.2%) within ten years of installation as measured by the Aachen Test undertaken by an
independent test authority.
C. The modular carpet installation will not disrupt electronic office equipment (which is otherwise
operating properly) to cause malfunction by induced static charges.
D. The modular carpet installation, in a commercial installation, is guaranteed to control static shock
below 3.5 kilovolts when the relative humidity is no less than 20% and the room test is 70oF.
(AATCC Test 134-1975).
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 09685 MODULAR CARPET (TILE)
108 Modular Carpet Installation Contractor's Warranty
Provide a written warranty stating that materials supplied and installed under this contract will remain in
good condition, secure against faulty workmanship and/or defective materials for a period of 7 years
from the date of Practical Completion.
PART II MATERIALS

Carpet Tiles: Interface.
202 Accessories
Plain clear anodised aluminium (silver)
203 Carpet
Refer Interior Finishes Schedule
Tolerances: AS 1385
Adhesive: Interface TacTiles adhesive connector squares.
204 Properties
205 Non-slip Materials

Water based substance recommended by its manufacturer as suitable for use as a pressure sensitive
non-slip compound.
100mm wide double-sided tape with a releasable pressure sensitive coating recommended by its
manufacturer as suitable for the purpose of preventing the slippage of the modular floor tiles.
206 Testing Carpet
207 Carpet Colour Sample

Before commencing the production of the carpet, supply three (3) tiles of the selected modular carpet to
the architect for written approval of colour and pattern.
208 Identification
Mark modular carpet tiles on the back to identify the manufacturer and the type of modular carpet.
209 Carpet Pattern Design Drawings

Lay the modular carpet to patterns, colours and designs shown on the architect's drawings and noted on
the Interior Finishes Schedule.
210 Laying Diagrams

Prepare laying diagrams showing locations and directions of joints, types, patterns and colours of the
modular carpet.
211 Inspection Before Laying

Inspect modular carpet tiles before laying to ensure that:
A. The tiles are of types, patterns and colours specified.
B. Colour variations are within the specified tolerances.
C. The tiles are free from colour streaks, oil or grease spots, etc.
D. The carpet generally conforms to the Specification.
Reject modular carpet tiles not conforming to the required standards.
212 Spare Carpet Modules

Deliver to the site in unopened boxes spare modular carpet tiles equivalent to 5% of the total area of
carpet laid along with one (1) full roll of TacTile connectors.
Do not deliver to the site until directed by the architect. Place in the final storage location.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Visit the site and inspect conditions comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to the
site. Notify the architect of discrepancy or unsuitability of the substrate.
as relevant.
302 Preparation
A. Comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations regarding
environmental and other on-site conditions.
B. Repair by approved means imperfections of the floor surface which might impair the finished
carpeted surfaces.
C. Broom clean or vacuum clean surfaces upon which carpet is to be laid.
D. On completion of cleaning, obtain architect's approval of surface and follow such standard as he
may determine for preparation throughout the project.
303 Space Enclosure

Do not install material until space is enclosed and weather-proof and until wet-work in space is
completed and nominally dry, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
304 Nap-lok Bars

Fix Nap-lok bars with each length fixed to the sub-floor using fastenings recommended by the
manufacturer of the Nap-lok bars as suitable for the respective sub-floors.
Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 2455.1.
305 Setting Out

Before laying modular carpet tiles, accurately establish two starting chalk lines towards the centre of the
room or area and at precisely 90o to each other.
Commencing only at the cross-over point of the chalk lines, complete one row of modules on each side
of the centre line.
From this point proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
306 Pressure "Sensitive" Non-slip Compounds

Interface TacTiles adhesive connector squares applied strictly in accordance with Interface application
instructions.
307 Laying – General

Lay strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions.
Cut tiles from the back using a sharp knife and a cutting board.
Open boxes on site 24 hours before laying and mix up tiles of similar pattern and colour from different
boxes.
Lay tiles hard up against each other and maintain tension on the tiles during laying by kneeling on the
tiles as they are installed.
Use a knee kicker to ensure that tiles are laid hard up against each other.
Carefully scribe up to walls, columns, partitions and other fixed obstructions using techniques
recommended by the manufacturer.
308 Partitions
Partitions will be erected prior to the laying of the modular carpet.
309 Cleaning And Protection

On completion of laying each section of carpet, remove dirt, scraps of left-over carpet, etc., and vacuum
the surface clean and free from dust, etc.
After inspection by the architect, cover the carpet in each section with continuous layer of 0.152mm thick
clean polythene film with joints lapped 150mm minimum and continuously sealed with self-adhesive
tape.
Batten and nail perimeters to the floor.
Maintain the cover in good order and condition and remove the same and finally clean the carpet at
310 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09720 WALLCOVERING (PAPER, FABRIC ETC)
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply labour and materials, services and equipment necessary for the preparation, application and
finishing of wall covering as indicated on drawings, schedules and as specified herein, to internal
surfaces of building.
Refer to Schedule of Finishes.
102 Related Work

Plasterboard
Painting

The installer is to be widely experienced in the class of work required for the work of this section.
At a place selected by the architect, prepare a test sample for all types. Test samples include the
suitable preparation of substrates. After approval, the test samples remain in place and become the
standard of the remaining work of the same type.
104 References
In the absence of Australian Standards, comply with applicable written recommendations of the
manufacturer.
105 Submissions
Product literature on proposed systems.
Samples of approved materials which are to be identified with the manufacturer's colour code batch
number and colour name or match to scheduled colour code and name.
Samples are not to be less than 2 metres long and are to be of the same colour, pattern and type as
scheduled.

A. Bring all materials to the site and store in manufacturer's original packaging, bearing the
manufacturer's standard label, indicating type, pattern and colour.
B. Store materials in designated spaces in a safe and secure manner. When not in use, keep such
spaces locked and inaccessible to those not employed under this Trade Section.
107 Warranty
Provide a written warranty stating that preparation of surfaces, materials and material application
installed under this contract will show no deterioration and remain in good condition for a period of
years from the date of completion.
201 Materials
Provide all materials necessary for preparation of surfaces and for application of wall coverings.
A. WALL COVERING:
1. Manufacturer: Ecoustic
a. Type: Velour Panel
b. Size: 15mm thick
c. Pattern: N/A
d. Colour: Refer Interior Finishes Schedule
B. ADHESIVES:
1. Follow wall covering manufacturers recommendation for adhesion to plasterboard/ glass
face cement render surfaces.
C. TRIMS:
1. Manufacturer: Refer to Interior Finishes Schedule
202 Table for Wall Covering

Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09720 WALLCOVERING (PAPER, FABRIC ETC)
301 Examination
Inspect all surfaces and determine that they are in proper condition to receive the work to be performed
under this section.
as relevant.
The starting of work under this section means acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory.
Correct defects in work resulting from accepting poor surfaces at no cost to the Proprietor.
302 Preparation
Prepare all surfaces as required so that they are in a proper condition to receive the work.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Remove dust, dirt, grease and other extraneous matter
affecting the finished work.
Remove lighting fixtures, switches, power outlets and similar items in place prior to installation and
reposition upon completion of each space.
303 Protection
Provide suitable protection in all areas where wall covering is being done to protect adjacent surfaces
from damage during work.
304 Application
Execute all work of this section in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
305 Cleaning
At completion of work in each area, thoroughly clean the area.
Replace wall fittings and fixtures previously removed.
306 Spare Material Rolls

Supply to the proprietor’s representative further material being 3% of the area of surfaces covered.
307 Completion
by the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 09720 WALLCOVERING (PAPER, FABRIC ETC)
SECTION 09910 PAINTING
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply labour and materials, services and equipment necessary for the preparation, application and
finishing of painting and staining as indicated on drawings, schedules and as specified herein, to internal
and external surfaces of building, as follows:
Refer Schedule of Finishes.
Consult with the architect with regard to requirements of other trade sections of the specification which
require painting, and include as part of the work of this trade section the appropriate preparation,
painting, and finish required to complete the installation.
102 Related Work

Substrates to be painted Cleaning and finishing
Scaffolding

A. Compatibility of shop and field paints:
Determine that the materials specified in the Schedule of Finishes are compatible with shop
coats. Failure to do so will be construed as accepting the paints specified. Contractor is to
correct, at his own expense, defects in his work resulting from the use of such materials.
B. Test samples:
1. Prepare test samples for painting types and typical locations, where determined by the
architect. Do not commence painting of the substrate type until the sample is approved
by the architect. Apply samples in conditions approximating as closely as possible the
lighting conditions of the finished work.
2. Test samples include the suitable preparation of substrates.
3. After approval, test samples are to be the standard for quality control of the completion of
work of same type.
104 References
AS/NZS 2311 2009 Guide to the painting of buildings.
(NB: maintain this document at the project site by the contractor as a
controlling general reference).
AS/NZS 2312 . Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by
the use of protective coatings. There are 2 parts, 2014.
105 Submissions
A. Product literature on proposed painting systems.
B. Colour samples for approved painting materials. Identify samples with:
1. Manufacturer's colour code and colour name (if any).
2. Match to Schedule colour code and name.
C. Samples are not to be less than 100 x 100mm, and are to be of the same gloss level as the
scheduled colour.
D. Copies of pre-installation conference minutes.

Store materials in designated spaces in a secure manner which meets the requirements of applicable
codes and fire regulations. When not in use, keep such spaces locked and inaccessible to those not
employed under this section. Provide each space with a fire extinguisher of carbon dioxide or dry
chemical type bearing a tag of recent inspection.
Bring materials to the building and store in manufacturer's original sealed containers, bearing the
manufacturer's standard label, indicating type and colour. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities in
advance of the time needed in order that work will not be delayed in any way.
107 Project Conditions

Temperature: comply with the requirements of clause 6.3 of AS/NZS 2311 The painting of buildings, and
of paint manufacturers with regard to both ambient temperature and relative humidity.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 09910 PAINTING
108 Warranty
Provide a written warranty stating that preparation of surfaces, materials and material application
installed under this contract will show no deterioration and remain in good condition for a period of 7
years from date of Practical Completion.
201 Materials
All internal paints are to be low VOC or environmental paints.
General: where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified, use the highest
grade of each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by trade name in these specifications.
Paints and finishes used for the project may be manufactured by the following manufacturers:
Dulux.
No other products will be approved by architect.
Provide materials necessary for preparation of surfaces, and for application of paint finishes.
202 Schedules
Schedules of Finishes is included in this specification.
203 Paint Types
The architect will prepare a final Schedule of Colours in sufficient time before commencement of work.
INTERIOR TIMBER as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2295 DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss
Proprietary item (primer): Dulux Professional Enviro2 ASU
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss
Location: Interior painted woodwork throughout the Works unless otherwise specified or scheduled
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR DOORS as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2295 DULUX Aquanamel Semi
Gloss
Location: Interior and exterior painted timber doors throughout the Works unless otherwise specified or
scheduled
INTERIOR TIMBER as per Dulux Specification: AUSW4749 INTERGRAIN UltraClear Interior Satin
Proprietary item (finishing coats): INTERGRAIN ULTRACLEAR SATIN
Location: Timber skirtings, architraves and the like mouldings nominated for clear finishing.
MEDIUM DENSITY FIBREBOARD as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2872 DULUX Aquanamel Semi
Gloss
Location: Skirtings, sills, architraves and the like mouldings manufactured from MDF.
PRETREATMENT OF GALVANISED STEEL & ZINCALUME SURFACES: Solvent clean and apply
waterborne pre-treatment for galvanised iron using an abrasive nylon pad, allow to react, rinse off, allow
to dry then apply one coat of specified galvanised iron primer.
Proprietary item: (pre-treatment): DULUX PREP-GALV
INTERIOR METALWORK as per Dulux Specification AUSD3152

Proprietary item Galvanised (primer): DULUX PROFESSIONAL Galvanised Iron Primer
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Gloss, Dulux Specification: AUSD2282
Location: All interior visibly exposed metalwork, including but not limited to:
• Interior steel stair strings, including brackets etc.
• Interior handrails and balustrading.
• Steel door frames.
• Steel corner protection.
• Interior exposed service pipework and ducts - colour identified in accordance with AS 1345.
INTERIOR STEELWORK , Shop Primed Metal, as per Dulux Specification AUSD5218

Proprietary item: (primer): DULUX Quit Rust All Metal (Water based)
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Gloss
Location: All interior visibly exposed structural steelwork, shop primed (inorganic zinc silicate), including
but not limited to:
• Exposed structural steel
EXTERIOR GALVANISED METALWORK AND STEELWORK – POLYURETHANE as per Dulux

Specification:AUSI4217
Proprietary item (intermediate coats): DULUX DUREBILD STE.
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX WEATHERMAX HBR.
Location: All galvanised exterior metalwork and structural steelwork, including but not limited to:
• Exterior exposed service pipework and ducts - colour identified in accordance with AS 1345.
• Roof mounted equipment such as air handling units, hot water units, ductwork and the like.
EXTERIOR STEELWORK – HOT DIP GALVANISED STEEL (if nominated for painting), as per Dulux
Specification: AUSI3393
Proprietary item (spot primer, applied as full prime coat): DULUX Durebild® STE - PC237
Proprietary item (intermediate coat): DULUX Durebild® STE MIO - PC565
Proprietary item (top coat): DULUX Weathermax® HBR - PC405
Location: All non-galvanised non-visibly exposed structural steelwork not otherwise specified, including
but not limited to:
• Hot dip galvanised exterior structural steelwork and hot dip galvanised metalwork, if nominated
for painting.
EXTERIOR STRUCTURAL STEELWORK – FIRE PROTECTED
Intumescent paint fire protective coating, as per specification 05100 Structural Steel
Proprietary item (top coat): DULUX Weatherrmax® HBR - PC405; 2 coats at 50 microns per coat
Location: All structural steel nominated for panting, required to be fire protected.
PLASTERBOARD (DRY AREA CEILINGS) as per Dulux Specification: AUSD4308 DULUX

Professional Enviro2 Tintable Ceiling Flat for Plasterboard
Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 ASU
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Professional EnvirO2 Tintable Ceiling Flat
Location: Ceilings lined with liner-faced plasterboard generally unless otherwise nominated on the
ROOM DATA SHEETS.
PLASTERBOARD (WET AREA CEILINGS) – LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux

Specification:AUSD5229
Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX Professional EnvirO2 Water Based Sealer
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX PROFESSIONAL ENVIRO2 LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC.
Location: Ceilings to ‘wet’ areas lined with water-resistant plasterboard throughout the Works and as
nominated on the ROOM DATA SHEETS.
FIBRE CEMENT (VERSILUX & VILLABOARD) - LOW SHEEN EXTERIOR ACRYLIC as per Dulux
Specification: AUSD3458
Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX PROFESSIONAL TOTAL PREP.
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX PROFESSIONAL EXTERIOR LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC.
Location: Exterior fibre cement soffits and eaves.
FIBRE CEMENT (VILLABOARD) - LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2288
Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 Interior Low Sheen
Location: General areas, interior painted fibre cement sheet as indicated on the drawings and
schedules.
FIBRE CEMENT (VILLABOARD) - LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD4177
Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Wash & Wear 101 Advanced Low Sheen
Location: Classroom walls, interior painted fibre cement sheet as indicated on the drawings and
schedules.
FIBRE CEMENT (VILLABOARD) – SEMI GLOSS ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD3711
Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 Interior Semi Gloss
Location: Food & Textiles, Materials & Technology area walls, interior painted fibre cement sheet as
indicated on the drawings and schedules.
PLASTERBOARD (LINER-BOARD FACED GENERALLY) – LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux

Location: Plasterboard liner-faced board walls generally unless otherwise specified or scheduled.
PLASTERBOARD (LINER-BOARD FACED GENERALLY) – MATT ACRYLIC as per Dulux

Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Prepcoat Acrylic Sealer Undercoat
Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Wash and Wear Matt
Location: Plasterboard liner-faced board walls generally unless otherwise specified or scheduled.
EXTERIOR RENDERED MASONRY WALLS, CONCRETE WALLS

DULUX AcraTex 950 Roll On 00 and 955 AcraShield as per Dulux Specification: AUSA11496
Prep Coat: Dulux AcraTex Tiltwash Cleaner
1 coat: Dulux AcraTex Acraprime Solvent Based Clear.
1 coat: Dulux AcraTex 950 Roll On 00 Fine Texture Roller Finish
1 coat: Dulux AcraTex 955 AcraShield
Location: Exterior concrete tilt up walls, masonry and rendered masonry nominated for texture finish
unless otherwise specified or scheduled
Warranty (all textured acrylic surface finishes): 7 years from Date of Practical Completion.
EXTERIOR EXOTECH FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING SYSTEM WITH SEALED EXPRESSED JOINTS
– MEMBRANE FINISH as per Dulux Specification : AUSI1810
Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX ACRA-PRIME 501/1.
Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX ACRA-SHIELD 955
EXTERIOR CONCRETE SOFFIT – MEMBRANE FINISH as per Dulux Specification : AUSA3218

Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX ACRA-PRIME 501/1.
Proprietary item (finishing coats): 2 coats DULUX AcraTex 958 AcraSand
1 coat DULUX AcraTex 955 AcraShield
Note: repair all imperfections in the concrete surface before commencing painting.
INTERNAL MASONRY SURFACES - LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2300
Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional Enviro2 ASU
Location: Painted face of masonry walls nominated on the ROOM DATA SHEETS.
INTERNAL CONCRETE BLOCK WORK SURFACES – CLEAR SEALER:

System: 2 coats waterborne, acrylic polymer matt sealer.
Proprietary item (sealer): CROMMELINS BRICK AND RENDER SEALER.
Sample: Provide sample block for approval prior to commencing application. Seal one half of the block
with proposed sealer system and leave the other half untreated for comparison.
Location: Clear matt sealer to visibly exposed interior fair faced concrete blockwork.
PLASTIC (UPVC) PIPEWORK

System: Surface preparation as per AUSD4547
New PVC - Exterior - Weathershield Low Sheen
Proprietary item (finishing coats): Weathershield Low Sheen
Location: PVC pipework generally where specified to be painted
PAVED AREA MARKINGS

PROGRAMME: Apply paint markings to paved areas as late as the works programme permits after
laying bitumen paving.
SYSTEM: 1 coat low sheen 100% acrylic road-marking paint with luminescence.
WORKMANSHIP: Spray apply paint. Use templates.
REQUIREMENT: The contractors shall comply with Main Roads standards for paint and marking.
204 Priming Materials

Colours of priming coats (and body coats where specified) are to be lighter than those of finish coat.
205 Spare Paint

Contractor to provide adequate left over paint for touching up and maintenance. To be supplied in well-
sealed long-life containers of colour matched paints, clearly labelled and mapped to rooms/walls inside
and outside the building (where applicable).
301 Examination
Inspect surfaces and determine that they are in proper condition to receive the work to be performed
under this trade section. Refer 302 A, below.
as relevant.
The starting of work under this trade section will be taken to mean acceptance of such surfaces as being
satisfactory and defects in work resulting from accepting poor surfaces are to be corrected at no cost to
the proprietor.
Refer AS/NZS 2311 Appendix C.
302 Preparation
A. General: prepared to a standard not less than that described under AS/NZS 2311, Section 3:
Preparation of Un-Painted Surfaces inclusive, and other clauses of Australian Standards
referenced therein.
This Standard is incorporated by reference as part of this specification and applies to the work
below to the same extent as if written herein.
B. Broom clean floor surfaces before painting. Remove dust, dirt, plaster, grease and other
extraneous matter affecting the finish work.
C. Putty-stop or plug nail holes and cracks on both exterior and interior work, as required. Natural or
stained wood finishes are to have putty coloured to match. Putty wood after prime coat or sealer
coat has been applied.
D. Clean bare metal surfaces of mill scale, rust, grease, oil, dirt, or other foreign matter, then
properly washed with spirit or other approved cleaning agents. After cleaning, etch, pickle, prime,
or otherwise prepare, as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
E. Remove blisters or other imperfections in previous coats caused by foreign substances or paint
skins from painted surfaces before the subsequent coat is applied.
F. Rub down wood and metal surfaces before finishing and between coats with No. 00 and finer
sandpaper or steel wool, leaving a perfectly clean surface. Sand smooth-finished surfaces before
finishing and between coats as required to smooth out rough areas and to assure a smooth, even
finish. Surfaces to receive paint are to be smooth and free of sandpaper scratches, mill-marks,
and other imperfections.
G. Remove hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place prior to
painting and re-position upon completion of each space, or protect as otherwise directed by the
architect.
H. Thoroughly stir materials in containers before application, unless otherwise directed by the
manufacturer of the paint used, to ensure uniformity of colour and mass. Strain out paint skins or
other materials which would cause lumps or roughness. Thin only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
303 Protection
Furnish and lay suitable drop cloths in areas where painting is being done to protect floors and other
surfaces from damage during the work.
304 Application
A. General: execute work of this trade section in strict compliance with paint manufacturer's
recommendations, and with the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, Section 6: Paint Application,
inclusive. This standard is incorporated by reference as part of this specification and applies to
the work below to the same extent as if written herein. In the event of conflict between
manufacturer's recommendations and the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, manufacturer's
recommendations govern.
B. Maintenance or repainting
Execute work of this trade section in strict compliance with paint manufacturer's
recommendations, and with the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, Section 7: Maintenance of Painted
Surfaces on inclusive and Section 8: Maintenance Painting Systems. This standard is
incorporated by reference as part of this specification and applies to the work below to the same
extent as if written herein. In the event of conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and
the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, manufacturer's recommendations govern.
305 Cleaning
At completion of work in each area, remove paint spots, oil and stain from adjacent surfaces, including
finish hardware.
Replace hardware previously removed.
306 Completion
the architect.
307 Schedules
Refer to Finishes Schedule for locations.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Design, supply and install complete compartments and/or enclosures including but not limited to:
Toilet partitions, doors, panels etc.
Urinal partitions constructed of metal, particleboard, laminated surfaces, stone etc.
102 Related Work

Floor construction Wall construction
Ceiling construction Finishing trades
Plumbing fixtures Ceramic Tiling

Ensure that the chosen contractor is widely experienced in the class of work required by this
specification.
Provide details of similar work satisfactorily completed, including names and telephone numbers of
those for whom the work was done so they can be contacted for references.
104 References
Comply with current written instructions of the manufacturer of the products specified.
105 Submissions
Provide to the architect before ordering components:
Manufacturer’s printed data on the specified products and installation instructions.

Deliver all the materials to the site in totally satisfactory condition. Reduce storage of materials on site to
a minimum. Do not install any damaged component or panel. Remove and replace all such items.
107 Warranty
Provide to the architect a written warranty stating that all components of the complete installation will
remain intact and in a satisfactory condition for 5 years from the date of Practical Completion.

Aqualoo Kindy Series partition system (Toilets A-G11, A-G14, A-G19, A-G24, A-G28)
Aqualoo Regent Cubicle Partition System (All other Toilets).
202 Materials
A. Toilet Partitions
Fixed panels: 13mm compact laminate.
Front panels: 13mm compact laminate
Doors: 13mm compact laminate
Supports at floor: 304 stainless steel pinned directly to floor (Regent System).
Anodised Aluminium Proprietary Liberty floor bracket (Kindy System).
Supports at wall: Extruded anodised aluminium U section.
Headrail: Extruded anodised aluminium round headrail (Regent System).
Indicator bolts, hinges turn snibs: Aqualoo concealed series.
Coat hangers: Coat hook with bumper.

Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
301 Examination
as relevant.
302 Preparation

Check each item, on arrival at the installation location, for damage. Replace damaged items.
304 Installation
adjacent construction.
C. Comply fully with manufacturer’s current written instructions.

306 Protection
Cover work: immediately following installation, wrap or cover the installations to avoid wear and tear of
finish during subsequent construction.
307 Cleaning
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Design, fabricate, supply and install grilles and screens including but not limited to:
Wall mounted grilles for ventilation and other purposes
External grilles.
Internal grilles.
Ceiling grilles.
Freestanding screens.
Hinged screens.
102 Related Work

Floor construction Metalwork
Wall construction Metal windows and glazing
Ceiling construction Metal finishing
Concrete Painting
Carpentry

104 References
AS 1428 Design for access and mobility. There are 5 parts, 1992 – 2010.
AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. There are 7 parts, 2003 – 2014.
AS 4100 1998 Steel structures Plus 1 Supplement, 1999, 1 Amdt 2012.
AS/NZS 4680 2006 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles.
AS 5039 2008 Security screen doors and security window grilles.
AS 5040 2003 Installation of security screen doors and window grilles. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007.
105 Shop Drawings

B. Develop details not shown and in conformity with the indicative details shown.
C. Take and confirm dimensions on site, before preparing shop drawings where possible.
D. Submit detailed shop drawings for fabrication and installation of major metalwork. Show plans,
anchorages and accessory items. Provide setting diagrams and full- scale templates of blocking,
106 Samples
acceptable, provide additional samples until approved. When approved, samples are to establish
quality of similar work of this trade section.
B. Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and he will
reject materials not meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples.
Rejected materials are to be returned to the fabricator at the fabricator's expense.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS
PART II MATERIALS
201 Manufacturers
Invisiguard
202 Materials
Manufacturer Item Model no. Material Finish Size(s)

Alspec Security/ Insect Invisiguard 316 Stainless Powdercoat 1.6 x 1.6mm
Screens Steel aperture
Note: Security screens to all first-floor windows to comply with AS 5203 Protection of openable windows
fall prevention.
203 Welding Steel

General: details of joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds
made and the methods used to correct defective work; conform to requirements of AS/NZS 1554.
Welds exposed to view: grind smooth to architect's approval.
Concealed welds: grind smooth before galvanising.
Tack or skip welding: at regular intervals, very neat; not permitted if material is to be hot dip galvanised.
Remove weld spatter.
Certification: welds are to be made only by welders who certified in accordance with the Australian
Standard.
Tack welding or skip welding will NOT be permitted where items are to be galvanised. Weld
continuously form joints and connections to exclude water and to permit draining during galvanising.
204 Connection Design

General: design fabricated items so that possible work is done before delivery. Fully protect for
shipment. Take possible care to prevent damage.
A. Welding external items: conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 1554, noting particularly the
design criteria.
B. Flanges: concealed where possible. Sleeve connecting railings inside railing sections and secure
with flush or set screws. Except where access is impossible, connection screws and bolts are to
be on the underside of joints.
C. Fasteners on the top of railing sections will not be permitted.
D. Shop connections for steel fabrications are to be welded, and field connections bolted.
E. Provide smooth finishes to exposed surfaces with sharp well-defined lines and arrises. Machined
joints are to be milled to a close fit. Design necessary lugs, brackets and similar items so that
work can be assembled and installed in a neat, substantial manner.
F. Provide ample strength and stiffness by using appropriate metal thickness of assembly and
supports.
G. Provide holes and connections as required to accommodate the work of other trades and for site
assembly of metalwork. Drill or punch and ream in the shop.
205 Miscellaneous
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
as relevant.
302 Preparation

Damaged fabrications are to be treated as follows:
1. Damage through galvanising: perform immediate inorganic zinc silicate paint or cold-
galvanising repair. Do not install until reinstated.
2. Architectural metalwork: returned to shop for repair or replacement.
prior to erection.
304 Installation
adjacent construction. Make tolerances conform to Australian Standards.
C. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted
under conditions. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site.

306 Protection
307 Cleaning
308 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
Design, supply and install required items including but not limited to:
Exterior/interior signs
Plaques
Door signs
Signs for the disabled.
102 Related Work

Wall construction Concrete
Floor construction Finishes
Tactile warning surfaces

Materials, shop fabrication and on-site installation are to be supplied and performed by fully trained and
experienced tradesmen in accordance with instructions of the manufacturer.
104 References
Comply with the applicable portions of the following Australian Standards:
AS 1319 1994 Safety signs for the occupational environment.
HB 123 1999 Guidelines for the selection, location and installation of visual warning
devices in buildings.
105 System Description

The specified materials and systems are intended to provide a uniform image throughout the building.
Where possible, materials are to be provided by the same manufacturer.
106 Submissions
Submit to the architect for approval, the following before ordering materials:
A. Samples of specified materials, conforming to type and finish required.
B. Fully detailed drawings showing overall dimensions and component sizes with proposed methods
of fixing and/or securing position.
C. Check data on sign for data accuracy - spelling, phone number, etc. before manufacture.
D. Copies of minutes of pre-installation conference.

Deliver materials in accordance with the Project Schedules.
Prevent damage to materials by securely boxing or wrapping before delivery. Take care with materials
during delivery and handling.
Store materials on site where directed by builder. Where possible install directly in place.
108 Warranty
Provide to the proprietor a warranty co-signed by the manufacturer and installer stating that items in this
specification will remain in full operational condition for a period of years from the date of Practical
Completion.
109 Maintenance
Provide a written undertaking to the proprietor that parts of the installation will be available for additional
supply from time to time to suit the proprietor's needs for a period of 10 years from the date of Practical
Completion.
PART II MATERIALS

Allow a Provisional Sum (PS) of $ 10,000.00 for the supply and installation of signage by a nominated
sub-contractor
.
202 Materials
203 Finishes
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
204 Signs for The Disabled
205 Fabrication
Fabricate components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved drawings.
Form junctions so that fixings are concealed.
Cut edges, drill holes free from burrs and indentations. Fit joints to a fine hairline.
Pre-assemble where possible or practical and mark each item for intended location before delivery.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Rectify discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate.
as relevant.
Space enclosure: do not install materials until space is enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-work in
space is completed and nominally dry.
302 Preparation
Prepare areas and surfaces before installation, so that best conditions exist.
Where necessary, ensure that lighting cable is in place and concealed ready for connection to light
fittings within the illuminated items.
303 Installation
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Provide appropriate anchoring devices, concrete pads
for external signs.
Take care of and protect adjacent surfaces and materials. Provide protective cover to adjacent finishes
where necessary.
304 Protection
Protect finished work.
Replace or make good work found damaged at time of Practical Completion.
305 Cleaning
A. Adjust and clean: clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with
evidence of damage.
B. Remove spatterings and droppings from work. Remove daily surplus materials and rubbish from
the work area.
306 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART I GENERAL100
101 Scope
Supply and install extinguishers where indicated in accordance with the statutory authority having
jurisdiction.
102 Related Work

Wall construction
Wall finishes

Perform work of this trade section with experienced tradesmen familiar with the quality of work required
and licensed by the manufacturers of the extinguishers. Comply throughout with written instructions.
104 References
Comply with applicable portion of the following Australian Standards:
AS 1603 Automatic fire detection and alarm systems.
There are 12 parts 1996 – 2011 and 4 Amdts, 1998 – 2001.
AS 1670 Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems - System design,
installation and commissioning. There are 5 parts, 1997 – 2015..
AS/NZS 1841 2007 Portable fire extinguishers. There are 8 parts, one for each type.
AS 2444 2001 Portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets – Selection and location.
AS/NZS 4353 1995 Portable fire extinguishers - Aerosol type.
Comply with requirements of statutory authority having jurisdiction.
105 Submissions
Copies of minutes of pre-installation conference.
201 Manufacturers
Manufacturers of materials approved in writing by the statutory authority may supply equipment.
202 Materials
Allow a Provisional Sum (PS) of $7,500.00 plus GST for the supply of fire extinguishers from a
nominated supplier.
203 Installation Devices

Supply brackets signs and other required items, and the means of securing them to the building.
301 Examination
conditions are satisfactory for installation. Arrange for rectification if required.
as relevant.
302 Inspection on Arrival at Site

Inspect materials on arrival, comparing each item to the schedule provided. Ensure that no material is
damaged. Return to the manufacturer damaged items and obtain a replacement.
303 Installation
Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure
connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and holes to
ensure proper positioning of completed work.
304 Cleaning
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
305 Completion
the architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
SECTION 12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK - SHOP BUILT
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
The work of this trade section covers the supply and installation of manufactured casework items.
It includes but is not limited to:
Kitchen cabinets and cupboards
Shelving
Laboratory cabinets and cupboards
Work benches
Storage cupboards
102 Related Work

Carpentry Wall finishes
Floor finishes Ceiling finishes
Plumbing Electrical installation

Manufacturers and installers are required to be widely experienced in the relevant aspects and class of
work required for this section.
At a place selected by the architect, construct a prototype of a completed installation. Include in this
prototype all elements required by this specification, finished in every respect. When approved by the
architect, each prototype remains part of the work and becomes the standard for the remaining work.
104 References
Comply with applicable portions of the Australian Standards:
AS/NZS 1859 Reconstituted wood-based panels – Specifications.
There are 3 other parts, 2004 – 2005, 3 Amdts, 2006 - 2009.
AS 2754.2 1991 Adhesives for timber and timber products - Polymer emulsion adhesives.
AS/NZS 2924 High pressure decorative laminates – Sheets made from thermosetting
resins.
There are 2 parts, 1998.
AS/NZS 4386 Domestic kitchen assemblies.
4386.1 1996 Kitchen units.
4386.2 1996 Installation.
105 Submissions
Submit the following prior to fabrication:
Product literature on proposed hardware items including components.
Technical data and samples of substrate materials.
Thickness of materials at typical locations.

Do not deliver work to the site until after completion of other trade activities which could soil, damage or
cause deterioration of manufactured joinery items.
Prevent soiling, damage or deterioration during delivery, storage and handling.
Keep site storage to a minimum. Install directly in place, but refer to clause 302.
If circumstances make storage necessary in areas other than the final location, store only in those that
meet the requirements specified for installation areas.
PART II MATERIALS
201 Materials
Use low formaldehyde emission particleboards and MDF boards - E0 type. Use low VOC emission
adhesives.
A. Carcass units (Ends and vertical divisions):
1. (DRY AREA) Material : Pre-finished particle board
Finish : White melamine finish internally all exposed external
surfaces to be finished with 0.8mm thick plastic
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK - SHOP
BUILT
laminate.
Thickness : 18mm
2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Pre-finished particle board
laminate.
Thickness: 18mm
B. Floors of carcass
1. (DRY AREA) Material : Pre-finished Particleboard.
laminate.
Thickness : 18mm
2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Pre-finished particle board
laminate.
Thickness : 18mm
C. Shelves within carcass :

1. (Dry Area) Material : Pre-finished Particleboard.
laminate.
Thickness : 18mm
2. (Wet Area) Material : HMR Pre-finished Particleboard.
Name : White melamine finish internally all exposed external
laminate.
Thickness : 18mm
D. Doors of cabinets :
1. (DRY AREA) Material : Medium Density Fibreboard
Finish : Pre-finished coloured melamine board.
Thickness : 18mm
2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Medium Density Fibreboard
Finish : Pre-finished coloured melamine board.
Thickness : 18mm
E. Base (below floor of carcass) :

1. (DRY AREA) Material : HMR Particle board
Finish : Front rail to have 0.8mm Thick Plastic Laminate
Thickness : 18mm
2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Particleboard
Finish : Front rail to have 0.8mm thick Plastic Laminate.
Thickness : 18mm
F. Bulkheads (above cupboards or overhead cabinets)

1. (Dry Area) Material : Pre-finished particle board
Finish : Coloured melamine board
Thickness : 18mm
2. (Wet Area) Material : Plasterboard, water resistant
Thickness : 13mm
Frame : Metal stud frame or timber stud frame
Finish : Paint as selected
G. Back of Carcass :
1. (Dry Area) Material : Pre-finished particle board
Finish : White melamine
BUILT
Thickness : 12mm
H. Edge Strips and Inserts :

Material :Plastic laminate to match pre-finished board;
ABS edge
Thickness : 2.0mm
I. Laminates : Refer to Interior Finishes Schedule
J. BenchTops :
(DRY) Material : Particle board, Laminex Squareform post formed edge,
with 2mm ABS edge strip to exposed sides other than
the post formed edge. Install with drip groove to
underside of post formed edge.
Finish : 1.2mm plastic laminate
Thickness : Min. 39mm
(SOLID SURFACE) Material : Refer to Finishes Schedule
Edge To resemble Laminex Squareform post formed edge
treatment:
Thickness : Min. 12 mm on 18mm MDF base
(WET) Material : HMR Particle board with Laminex Squareform post

formed benchtop; ABS edge strip
Finish : 1.2mm plastic laminate
Thickness : Min. 39 mm
K. Whiteboard: Vitreous Porcelain Enamel on 0.43mm Thick Mild Steel Sheet. No alternative
finish will be accepted. Test sampling may be performed on whiteboards
installed in the works of this contract.
Facings shall be fixed to gypsumboard core. Provide 0.43mm zincannealed
steel sheet as backing. Provide extruded white power coated aluminium chalk
rail at bottom and white powder coated aluminium edging to remaining edges,
complete with concealed fixing strip.
L. Pin-up boards: 3mm thick Hardboard glued to nom 12mm thick pinnable fabric composite.
22 x 22 x 1.6 aluminium channel to all edges (mitre corners). Refer details.
Selected fabric; refer Finishes Schedule
Frame Finish: Clear Natural Anodised.
202 Fasteners and Adhesives.

A. Metal fasteners: in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and all relevant Australian
standards for the application.
B. Plastic fasteners: in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and all relevant Australian
standards for the application.
C. PVA adhesives:
Comply with AS 2754.2.
D. Contact adhesives:
Supply the manufacturer’s instructions and incorporate into this specification.
203 Hardware
A. Door handles : 200mm long / 20mm thick / 35mm deep “D” handles by Hafele, anodised
aluminium (silver coloured) as scheduled in Finishes Schedule.
B. Drawer handles : 200mm long / 20mm thick / 35mm deep “D” handles by Hafele, anodised
aluminium (silver coloured) as scheduled in Finishes Schedule.
C. Drawer runners : Heavy duty Blum soft close nylon roller powdercoated steel runners, full
extension
D. Adjustable shelf brackets : Ferrule and socket brass shelf supports @ 75mm ctrs.
E. Pin-up fixing to wall: M4.5 x 58mm long flat head masonry anchors @ M2x 600 Centres.
F. Hinges: Slide on type Hafele, Blum or Hettich automatic soft close hinges with steel and nickel
plate finish, heavy duty.115° for doors with restricted opening (against walls etc.) and 180° for all
other doors.
Minimum number of hinges per door: 2, for up to 900mm high door
3, for up to 1500mm high door
BUILT
4, for up to 2000mm high door
Refer manufacturer’s instructions for details and installation requirements.
G. Catches: Magnetic type, unless hinges are of the pressure sprung closer type where catch is not
required.
H. Locks: Lockwood 600 series.
204 Fabrication
Construct by screwing and gluing or other approved method. A dry stapled assembly will not be
approved.
Fabricate bench tops as indicated in a manner recommended by the material's manufacturer. Fabricate
units without joints unless counter length exceeds maximum available length of materials.
Seal joints between counter and splash back with matching colour silicone. Wherever possible, pre-cut
openings to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items.
Locate openings accurately using templates or roughing-in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth
edges of cut-outs and, where located in bench tops and similar exposures, seal edges of cut-outs with a
water resistant coating.
Back prime all concealed solid timber surfaces prior to installation.
Install fasteners, hinges etc. in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. When in doubt about
suitability, consult with manufacturer of the items specified or selected.
205 Inspection Before Delivery

Advise architect when the first of any group of items is ready for inspection not less than 4 days before
delivery is due at the site. Where work is found not to comply with documentation, the architect will order
rectification. The architect will be the sole decision-maker regarding compliance or non-compliance.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Visit the site and inspect conditions. Check dimensions and compare all aspects with the drawings and
specification. Resolve differences before ordering materials or starting work.
as relevant.
Start of work means total acceptance of all conditions.
302 Preparation for Installation

Prior to installing, condition joinery to the average humidity conditions prevailing in the installation areas.
Deliver anchoring devices and similar inserts required to be built into substrates well in advance of the
fixing of fittings and provide full details when they are to be fixed by others.
Prior to installation, examine shop-fabricated work for completeness and remedy and any deficiencies.
Include back priming. Remove packing where not required.
Thoroughly clean all floors and walls that will be permanently concealed by joinery.
303 Installation
Use concealed shims as required to install the work plumb, level, straight and distortion free within the
- 1mm in 800mm for plumb and level (including bench tops),
- 0.5mm maximum offsets in flush adjoining surfaces,
- 2mm maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work; refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finishes at cuts.
Secure joinery with anchors of blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds,
stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required to complete
the installation.
Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails, countersunk
and filled flush. Use a matching filler where a transparent finish is required.
Install casework without distortion so that doors will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned.
304 Hardware
Install all door and joinery hardware as scheduled, listed and required in full compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Adjust as needed to centre doors in openings.
305 Adjustments, Cleaning, Finishing and Protection

A. Finish the work specified in this trade section and remedy anything not finished at the shop or
any other stage prior to completion.
B. Adjust joinery to achieve a uniform appearance.
BUILT
C. Lubricate and clean hardware making any final adjustments needed for proper operation.
D. Remove all handling marks from visible joinery surfaces.
E. Protection: do everything needed to ensure that all work is without damage or deterioration at
completion.
306 Completion
by the architect.
END OF SECTION
BUILT
SECTION 12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART I GENERAL
101 Scope
The work of this trade section covers the supply and installation of floor mats and/or recessed mats and
frames.
102 Related Work

Concrete Metalwork Carpet
Resilient flooring

Suppliers and installers are required to be widely experienced in the relevant aspects and class of work
required for this section. At a place selected by the architect, construct a prototype of a completed
installation of floor mat and frame.
On completion of the prototype and approval of all aspects of the installation, the work will remain in
place and become the standard for the remaining work.
104 References
(Not used).
105 Submissions
Provide samples and data sheets of all materials.
Obtain architect's approval for each item before ordering.

Deliver all materials in the packaging of the supplier bearing the brand name, colour, thickness and
other relevant data.
Store all materials in a secure dry area away from other materials which may cause deterioration.
107 Warranty
Provide a warranty covering all aspects of the installation performed by this trade, against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of 7 years from the date of completion.
Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with the relevant
Australian Standards and the instructions of the manufacturers of components in effect at the time of
installation.
PART II MATERIALS
201 Materials
202 Fabrication
Comply with the relevant Standards.
Contractor to check all dimensions on site.
Contractor to provide prototype for architect's approval prior to manufacture.
Contractor to present sample to architect for final selection.
203 Schedule of Quantities

Refer to drawings for location and extent.
PART III EXECUTION
301 Examination
Examine the site conditions applicable to each installation. Arrange for correction if required.
as relevant.
302 Installation
Refer to drawings for location of floor mats.
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
Frame (if required by the manufacturer) to be provided with anchors and cast-in place or to be fixed in
the mat recess with masonry anchors.
303 Preparation
Comply with referenced Standards and manufacturer's recommendations. Do not install material until
space is enclosed and weatherproof and until wet work in space is completed and dry.
304 Cleaning and Protection

On completion of mat recess or area remove all dirt, scraps of left over materials and vacuum the area
clean.
305 Completion
by the architect.
Work will be deemed complete after being inspected and approved by architect.
END OF SECTION
Providence Christian College Primary School Stage 1 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
Technical Specification
for
Plan E No. 2006701
PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE - PRIMARY SCHOOL
TENDER
LANDSCAPE & IRRIGATION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – STAGE 1
DECEMBER 2020
Version Date Issued Reason Checked
1 09/11/2020 Issued for Review AB
2 22/12/2020 Pre-tender Review AB
Project No. 2006701
Suite 4, 414 Rokeby Road

Subiaco WA 6008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRELIMINARY TECHNICAL CLAUSES 1

1.1 UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND AUTHORITY APPROVALS 1
1.2 MANUALS AND WARRANTIES 1
1.3 AS CONSTRUCTED RECORDS 1
1.4 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES 1
1.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES 2
1.6 WORKS WITHIN ROAD RESERVES 2
1.7 SETTING OUT OF WORKS 3
1.8 WORKS BY OTHERS 3
1.9 SAMPLES AND TESTING 3
1.10 INSPECTIONS 4
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 6
2.1 TREE REMOVAL & PRUNING 6
2.2 BULK EARTHWORKS 6
2.3 SITE WORKS 6
2.4 SOIL CONDITIONER – ‘C-WISE HORTICUTURE’ 8
2.5 IMPORTED SOIL - SCREENED TOPSOIL 9
2.6 SITE SOIL CONDITIONER – TREE WELLS 9
2.7 IMPORTED SAND – TURF GRASS AREAS 10
2.8 WALL TYPE C 11
2.9 UNIT PAVEMENT 13
2.10 STEELWORK 17
2.11 CONCRETE WORK – STRUCTURAL 19
2.12 CONCRETE SEAT WALLS TYPE D 21
2.13 IN-SITU CONCRETE PAVEMENT 22
2.14 IN SITU CONCRETE MOWING KERB 25
2.15 SEALER / ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING 26
2.16 SITE FURNITURE 26
2.17 STEEL HAND RAIL 26
2.18 COMPOSITE DECKING 28
2.19 SYNTHETIC TURF 28
2.20 TREE, SHRUB AND PLANT (GREEN STOCK) SUPPLY AND PLANTING 29
2.21 MULCH – BOUTIQUE 33
2.22 TURF GRASSING AND ESTABLISHMENT 33
2.23 IRRIGATION – DESIGN AND CONSTRUCT 36
2.24 PRACTICAL COMPLETION 40
2.25 CONSOLIDATION 41
2.26 CONSOLIDATION COMPLETION - PRINCIPAL HAND OVER 43
2.27 FINAL COMPLETION 43
2006701 Providence Christian College – Primary School Table of Contents

1
1. PRELIMINARY TECHNICAL CLAUSES

1.1 UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND AUTHORITY APPROVALS
Within one week from the award for tender the Contractor shall apply for all services connections including
electrical and scheme water connections, Certificate of Building Compliance, all relevant building licences and
all other Authority approvals as required to complete the works. The Contractor shall allow for all works to
coordinate with service providers and pay all costs and fees as required.
Copies of all written applications are to be furnished to the Superintendent at the time of each application.
1.2 MANUALS AND WARRANTIES

Prior to Date of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall supply the Superintendent all operation manuals
covering all works as executed and covered by the contract as follows:
 Three (3) complete hard copy sets; and
 one (1) complete digital set.
Copies of all written warranties as per the Preliminaries, duly completed and dated as may be required and
made in the name of the Principal and effective from the date of Practical Completion shall be provided and
included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual submitted to the Superintendent prior to Practical
Completion.
The supply of fully comprehensive and fully complete works as executed warranties and manuals forms part of
the works and shall be a condition precedent to the Superintendents acceptance of Practical Completion.
1.3 AS CONSTRUCTED RECORDS

Prior to Date of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall supply to the Superintendent works as
executed drawings shall clearly show all works and services as executed and covered by the contract as
follows:
 one (1) set of Original Drawing size paper drawings;
 one (1) set of A3 size paper drawings;
 one (1) set of digital AutoCAD drawings; and
 one (1) set of digital PDF drawing.
All as executed documentation to be in Department of Housing and Works preferred format. Format to be
approved in writing with the Superintendent before commencement of as executed documentation.
The supply of fully comprehensive and fully complete works as executed drawings shall be a condition
precedent to the Superintendents acceptance of Practical Completion.
1.4 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES

Prior to commencing works on site, the contractor shall contact all relevant Service Authorities and determine the
location of all existing overhead and underground site facilities and services including those to adjacent sites.
The Contractor shall engage a suitably qualified cable locator contractor, responsible for locating, marking out and
digitally recording all existing facilities and services whether or not such information is shown on any contract
drawings. The Contractor shall supply to the Principal, Two (2 no.) electronic copies in CAD format and two (2 no.)
hard copies of all Services Survey drawings.
The location and nature of any facilities or services shown on contract drawings is approximate only and shall not
be relied upon for construction purposes.
The contractor shall ensure all facility and service locations are defined on site by Chalk Lines and Temporary
Bench Marks and are clearly shown on the site drawings and on existing services drawings and prominently
displayed in the contractor’s site office. The Contractor’s workforce shall be made aware of the locations of all
facilities and services and the need for their protection.
Particular care must be taken by the Contractor to avoid damage to all such underground and overhead facilities
and services and all brackets, posts and fittings in connection therewith. It is the Contractors responsibility to
ensure all facilities and services encountered are securely protected, supported, strutted and slung or otherwise
protected at the Contractors expense.
The Contractor shall allow for excavating by hand in the close vicinity of all facilities and services. It should be
understood that the location of facilities and services shown on the Drawings is only intended as a guide and that
liaison must be maintained with the relevant Service Authority so that they can be located more accurately.
2006701 Providence Christian College – Primary School Preliminary Technical Specification (Stage 1)
2
Where any facility, structure or service is damaged, displaced or otherwise interfered with, the Contractor is to
give notice immediately to the Service Authority and the Superintendents Representative and afford all facilities
to assist in early inspection and repair of the service. All costs associated with the necessary repair, and any
other cost incurred through the damaged, displacement or otherwise interference with any service will be borne
by the Contractor.
The Superintendent’s representative reserves the right to have any poles, cables, ducts, etc. re-sited or diverted
where he considers it inadvisable to allow them to remain in their present position. The Principal will pay for
such re-siting or diversion but the Contractor must give every facility to enable them to carry out the alterations.
Negligence by the Contractor in managing and supervising the protection of services shall be sufficient cause
for the Superintendent to direct the Contractor to remove relevant persons from the site or from any activity
connected with the works, in accordance with Clause 26 of the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall have no claim for any extra payment due to interference with, or delay in, the carrying out
of the Contract caused by any alteration to a facility, structure or services.
1.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES

1.5.1 Tree Protection Zones
Under the works, all existing trees within the works site, including all and any trees designated as ‘Tree to be
Protected’ within or external to the works site, shall have NO access, plant, equipment, preparation or works
whatsoever within the tree canopy drip line (Canopy Zone) or their Tree Protection Zone (TPZ), as defined under
AS4970 - Protection of Trees on Development Sites, whichever is the greater, without the approval of the
Superintendent.
For any single breach of a Canopy Zone or TPZ by the Contractor or their representatives for any reason without
the approval of the Superintendent, including from wind-blown or water borne materials such as cement, the
following penalties will apply:
 Breach of a Canopy Zone or TPZ $1,500.00 Per Event.
Should the Contractor or any of their representative’s damage (including canopy, trunk and root system) any
tree within a Canopy Zone or TPZ, including from wind-blown or water borne materials such as cement, the
following penalties will apply for any single event:
 Damage to a Protected Tree $5,500.00 Per Tree Per Event excluding GST.
All costs will apply and be borne solely by the Contractor by reduction in monies payable under the Contract.
1.5.2 Works Within Tree Protection Zones
For approved works within a Canopy Zone or Tree Protection Zones the following applies:
 All works shall be hand works;
 Do not add or remove topsoil;
 Do not backfill around tree trunks to a height greater than 300mm above the original ground surface.
Immediately after back-filling, thoroughly water the full extent of the Tree Protection Zone;
 Do not compact. If compaction is required, for example from the operation of heavy constructional plant,
loosen the soil by coring;
 Air Spade all excavations such that root systems are preserved intact and undamaged;
 Open up excavations under tree canopies for as short a period as possible;
 Do not cut tree roots exceeding 25mm diameter unless permitted. Where it is necessary to cut tree roots,
use means such that the cutting does not unduly disturb the remaining root system. Immediately after
cutting, apply a bituminous fungicidal sealant to the cut surface to prevent the incursion of rot or disease.
1.6 WORKS WITHIN ROAD RESERVES

1.6.1 General
All works undertaken within road reserves shall comply with AS 1742.3 Part 3 – Traffic Control Devices for
Works on Roads. The contractor shall ensure all conditions under this standard are satisfied.
Works within reserves under the control of Main Roads WA (MRWA) shall only be undertaken in accordance
with an MRWA approved road management plan, approved in writing by the Superintendent prior to
commencement of works on site. Notification of impending works on an MRWA controlled road shall be
supplied to the relevant MRWA Road Maintenance Contractor as required prior to the works commencing.
3
1.7 SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out the works in accordance with issued hard copy and
electronic set out drawings.
Set out of all works, including but not limited to, all earthworks, all hard works, all soft works, all structures, all
above and below ground services, all built elements, and all other works under the contract. Set out works shall
be undertaken by a Licensed Surveyor from the dimensions as indicated on the drawings and from electronic
drawings issued by the Superintendent for set out purposes. Electronic drawings shall be in ACAD format.
Datum to set out for surveyor will be Australian Height Datum and either Perth Coastal Grid or Perth Coastal
Grid 94.
The Contractor shall maintain survey pegs undamaged and unaltered until such time as the works have been
completed to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. The Contractor shall undertake all re-surveying as
necessary to maintain the integrity of the survey set out.
The Contractor will provide:
 White painted timber stakes to define the position of all elements, including services, built elements,
trees, paths, paving, garden beds and other construction elements as specified and or on the drawings,
 Relevant levels and bench marks for all set out points, and
 Stakes to define lot boundaries.
 Setting out shall be approved by the Superintendent prior to the commencement of construction.
All discrepancies between the design levels and the existing site levels shall be brought to the immediate
attention of the Superintendent for written direction prior to commencement of works.
Permanent survey pegs which have been damaged or moved during construction shall be reinstated by a
Licensed Surveyor nominated or approved by the Superintendent and the cost of such work shall be paid for in
full by the Contractor.
Should survey pegs or marks be in the line of construction operations, the Contractor shall advise the
Superintendent prior to commencing work to enable their temporary removal or relocation of the works. Co-
ordination shall include necessary approvals from Main Roads Department, Council, Service Authorities, other
Contractors and the like, to make the contract run smoothly.
Due to the nature of landscape construction works, minor changes in the layout of the works may be instigated
by the Superintendent on site.
The Contractor shall allow in their price for changes in the set out of the works. A variation to the contract shall
only be issued where any change results in a change in the scope of works.
1.8 WORKS BY OTHERS

1.8.1 General
The Contractor shall be aware and allow for in their tender price the co-ordination of works that will be built by
others during the contract period, within the designated construction site of the works.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs associated with co-ordination of other works not limited to programming
and co-ordination of site access.
The contractor shall allow contractors undertaking other works sufficient access to the site and site services to
ensure the completion of the works to programme.
1.9 SAMPLES AND TESTING

1.9.1 Sample Schedule
1.9.1.1 General
The contractor shall provide samples and sample panels to the Superintendent for approval for all materials and
works as detailed in schedules. No works comprising samples or works items as listed in the schedules shall
proceed without approval by the Superintendent.
Subject to approval by the Superintendent, samples and panels may be permitted to be incorporated into the
works.
Approval of samples and panels by the Superintendent in no way absolves the Contractor of their obligations
and responsibilities under the contract.
4
1.9.1.2 Sample Schedule

ITEM QUANTITY REQUIRED BY
All soils & sands 500 Grams Six (6) weeks prior to supply.
All turf 2 Sq.m Six (6) weeks prior to supply.
All mulches 500 Grams Six (6) weeks prior to supply.
1.9.2 Sample Panel Schedule
1.9.2.1 General
The contractor shall prepare sample panels for the works as detailed in the sample panel schedule. Approved
panels, if suitably located, may be permitted to be incorporated into the works to the approval of the
Superintendent. Any panel not incorporated into the works shall be fully removed from site and the area made
good at the completion of the works.
1.9.2.2 Sample Panel Schedule
ITEM QUANTITY REQUIRED BY
All pavement types 2 Sq.m Two (2) weeks prior to supply.
All wall types 2 LM. Six (6) weeks prior to supply.
All edges inc. mowing kerb 1 LM. Two (2) weeks prior to supply
All handrails 1 LM. Two (2) weeks prior to supply
1.9.3 Testing
It is the Contractors responsibility to provide all materials, machinery and labour as required for the completion of
this project and, to provide verification that all materials and workmanship comply with the requirements of this
specification.
In addition, it is the Contractors responsibility to undertake, at the Contractors expense, all necessary testing as
specified and, as may be requested from time to time by the Superintendent for certification of the works,
including materials and workmanship, to confirm conformance with the drawings and this specification.
All costs associated with testing and quantity certification shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and will be
included in the appropriate lump sum schedule item.
1.10 INSPECTIONS
1.10.1 General
Complete all inspections as per the inspection schedule in the presence of the Project Landscape
Architect / Superintendent.
1.10.2 Notice
Give three (3) days’ calendar notice to the Superintendent so that inspection may be made of all items noted in
Schedule of Inspections. Following each inspection, await direction prior to proceeding with works.
1.10.3 Inspection Schedule
Undertake all inspection in accordance with the following schedule:
Item Date Inspected by

(Landscape Architect /
Superintendent)
SITE WORKS
Following completion of final site works
IN-SITU SOIL AND SITE SOIL CONDITIONERS
Following initial application of imported soils (prior to cultivation)
PLANTING AND MULCHING
Following set-out of all plants
Following initial mulch application to planted areas
At completion of planting and mulching works
5
TURF GRASSING
Following completion of ground preparation works
At installation of turf grassing
At time of each maintenance task including fertilizing
PAVING TREATMENTS
Following initial set-out
Following initial installation of the paving (for each type)
At completion of each section of each paving type
STEEL FABRICATED ITEMS
At completion of fabrication and finishing of all items, fittings
and fixings and prior to assembly and delivery to site
At completion of installation
TIMBER FABRICATED ITEMS
BESPOKE FURNITURE
PROPRIETARY FURNITURE
Following set-out of major furniture items
Following preparation works prior to installation
Following completion of works
PRACTICAL COMPLETION
Pre-Practical Completion Inspection.
Practical Completion Inspection.
Follow-up Inspections (as required).
CONSOLIDATION PERIOD
Monthly Maintenance Inspection - Month 1
Monthly Maintenance Inspection - Month 2
Consolidation Completion Inspection
FINAL COMPLETION
Pre-Final Completion Inspection.
Final Completion Inspection.
6
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.1 TREE REMOVAL & PRUNING
2.1.1 General
Allow in the lump sum tender price for tree removal and pruning / remedial works as indicated on the
landscape drawings. All pruning and remedial works are to be carried out to the direction of the arborist report
& Superintendent on site.
Tree removal and pruning shall be undertaken by a qualified Arborist, to the approval of the Superintendent.
Tree removal and pruning shall be undertaken by a minimum Certificate level 3 qualified Arborist, and in
accordance with AS4373-2007. All works shall be undertaken to the highest safety standard in accordance
with all statutory requirements and bylaws.
All removed trees, pruning and debris shall be loaded, hauled and disposed of off-site in an approved tip in
compliance with statutory requirements.
Any damage to the existing security fences, surrounding surfaces and structures caused by tree removal or
pruning will be rectified at the cost of the contractor.
2.2 BULK EARTHWORKS

2.2.1 Bulk Earthworks by Head Contractor
Bulk earthworks to all areas under this contract are to be undertaken by the head Contractor.
Confirm that the head Contractor is undertaking all bulk earthworks and the extent of bulk earthworks.
No variation shall be issued for bulk earthworks should the head contractor and the landscape subcontractor
fail to reach agreement on the extent of bulk earthworks works.
2.3 SITE WORKS

2.3.1 General
Provide all machinery and equipment necessary to complete minor excavation, levelling and grading to ensure
the works conform to the levels and details in the landscape drawings and specification. All minor earthworks
shall be carried out in accordance with finished contours, levels and details indicated on drawings, and to
ensure water drains to sumps.
2.3.2 Tree and Stump Removal
Remove all trees and stumps in accordance with the drawings and as specified.
Grub out stumps and roots over 10mm diameter to a minimum depth of 600mm below finished sub-grade level
in paved areas or 450mm below finished surface level in unpaved areas. Backfill grub holes with suitable spoil
from excavations compacted in layers to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil.
All debris together with fallen timber shall be loaded, hauled and disposed of in a tip in compliance with
statutory requirements or may if instructed be dumped as directed by the superintendent.
2.3.3 Site Clean Up
Clean up all areas to be irrigated and landscaped prior to commencement of construction works. Remove
from the site all deleterious material and rubbish including but not limited to building rubbish and vegetative
refuse and the like and dispose of in the correct manner off site at an approved rubbish.
2.3.4 Weed and Grass Eradication
After site clean up and prior to cut and fill and fine grading totally eradicate all existing grass and weeds
throughout the full extent of soft landscape areas in this Contract.
Broad Spectrum Herbicide for the eradication of both weeds and grasses shall be a non-residual herbicide such
as Glyphosate (e.g. “Round-Up) or an Approved equivalent.
Selective Herbicide for the eradication of grasses only shall be a non-residual, monocotyledon specific
herbicide such as “Fusilade” or an Approved equivalent. Confirm that this product will be effective against the
grasses on site prior to commencement of application.
Weed and grass eradication shall be undertaken prior to the commencement of any earthworks or installation
of soil conditioner, either by physical or mechanical means or by the use of an approved non-residual herbicide
as detailed below in this Specification.
Where physical or mechanical means are used to eradicate grass and/or weeds, excavate to a depth as
required, to remove all roots, rhizomes, stolons and any other propagative material, to ensure that re-growth
does not occur in the area.
2006701 Providence Christian College – Primary School Technical Specification (Stage 1)

7
Remove all resultant spoil, including all vegetative material, from site. Where it is necessary to reinstate levels,
backfill with approved clean, weed-free sand.
Where the use of a non-residual herbicide is approved to eradicate grass and/or weeds, it shall be applied
strictly in accordance with the manufacturers written directions.
Spraying shall only be carried out on windless days and the Superintendent shall be informed when this
operation is to be undertaken.
Do not use Glyphosate near any waterways nor use any other herbicides near waterways unless such use is
specifically approved by the Waters and Rivers Commission and the Relevant Local Authority.
The use of a herbicide will only be approved whilst there is active translocation occurring in the grass and/or
weeds. This can be generally be judged by the presence of visible new growth, however approval shall be solely
at the discretion of the Superintendent.
Where the application of herbicide is proposed between the months of April to October the application rate
shall be increased by 30% to allow for the lower rate of plant translocation during these months.
The ratio for application shall be chosen to suit the hardiest weed species present.
Herbicide shall not be applied within six (6) hours of rain, nor shall the treated area be watered within six (6)
hours of application. Re-apply herbicide, if the treated area is affected by rain or watering within six (6) hours
of the initial application.
Following the application of the herbicide, the treated weeds shall be left undisturbed for a minimum of
fourteen (14) days.
Following the fourteen (14) day "ingestion" period, the treated area shall be cultivated to a depth of 150mm, to
expose all roots, stolons, rhizomes etc, to the atmosphere. The affected area shall be left in this condition for
an additional two (2) days, prior to undertaking any further work.
If, in the opinion of the Superintendent, the use of a herbicide may constitute a threat to any existing habitat or
vegetation, eradicate weeds by manual means only.
2.3.5 Cut and Fill
2.3.5.1 General
Undertake all excavation, cut and fill or fill operations as may be required for the construction of the works
under the contract, including but not limited to excavation and back filling to all retaining walls and excavation
for the importation of prepared soils and the like under the contract. No variation shall be issued for any
earthworks, cut or fill operations, removal of excess material off site or importation of clean fill as may be
required to complete the works under the contract.
2.3.6 Imported Clean Fill
Filling material shall be a clean granular material, sand as defined in AS1289.3.6.1 and shall have the
following properties:
i) Have non plastic fines;
ii) Be clean and free of all silty, organic or any other deleterious inclusions and certified as Die Back
(Phytophthora sp.) free;
iii) Be cohesionless with a minimum permeability of 5m/day when compacted at 95% Modified Maximum
Dry Density in accordance with AS1289.5.2.1; and
iv) Have a particle size distribution in compliance with the limits shown below.
Sieve Size % Passing
4.75mm 100
2.36mm 100
1.18mm 100
600um 84
300um 31
150um 4
75um 1.8
Pan 0

8
The contractor shall provide results from NATA registered testing authority which demonstrates compliance
with the above criteria prior to undertaking fill operations.
Independent testing certifying compliance shall be provided to the Superintendent within three days of request.
2.3.6.1 Fill Installation
Place and compact filling in uniform layers of thickness. Layers shall extend for the full width of fill area. The
maximum layer thickness generally shall be 150mm compacted. However, greater thicknesses will be
permitted subject to the ability of compaction equipment to achieve specified densities. No layer shall be less
than 100mm thick compacted. Each layer shall be compacted to not less than Eight (8) blows per 300mm with
a Perth sand penetrometer as determined by AS1289.5.2.1-2003.
2.3.6.2 Excess Material
All excess excavated material shall be loaded, hauled and disposed of off site in an approved tip in compliance
with statutory requirements.
2.3.7 Fine Grading
Undertake all minor levelling and grading to achieve final design levels to all areas under the works. Supply all
the machinery and equipment necessary to complete the works in an efficient manner.
Fine grading shall including all excavation or fill as required for the provision of hard landscape works and
prepared soils and mulch to achieve final design levels.
All final grading shall be carried out in accordance with finished contours and levels indicated on drawings, and
to ensure water drains to sumps.
Finish all levels to neatly tie in and match up with existing work in adjoining areas to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent. This shall include all works associated with roads and pavements carried out previously, to
the areas covered by this contract.
Remove from the site all excess excavated material and deleterious material encountered during final grading
and dispose of in the correct manner off site at an approved rubbish tip.
2.4 SOIL CONDITIONER – ‘C-WISE HORTICUTURE’

2.4.1 General
After Site Works supply and install to all areas designated on the drawings site soil conditioner to the following
specification:
 C-WISE ‘ HORTICULTURE’
As supplied by:
C-Wise, Nambeelup Road, Nambeelup, Western Australia, Ph (08) 9581 9582
2.4.2 Standards
Soil conditioner shall comply with AS4419 Soils for Landscaping and Garden Use and AS4454 Composts, Soil
Conditioners and Mulches.
The conditioner shall have a pH range of 6.5 to 7.5 (i.e. slightly acid to neutral). The individual elements of this
mix shall be combined thoroughly to form a balanced product free from lumps and any other deleterious
matter.
2.4.3 Placement
Prior to placement, ensure all base material is clean, free draining and free of all builder’s rubble, rubbish,
deleterious material and contamination. All areas contaminated by the builder or others shall be removed and
replace with clean fill sand to the approval of the Superintendent.
Place soil conditioner to a depth as shown on the landscape drawings over the full extent of areas to be
conditioned.
Rotary-hoe, or spade dig where necessary, soil conditioner into existing site soil to a depth of 100mm to
produce a fully homogeneous mix.
Remove all rubble or other extraneous and deleterious matter exposed as a result of cultivation, including any
base course material and dispose of in the correct manner off site at an approved rubbish tip.
After placement, rotary hoeing, smudging boarding and planting, soil conditioner mix shall finish 80mm below
adjacent kerbing, paving and turf areas.

9
2.4.4 Samples
Prior to delivery of prepared soil, submit a 0.01 m3 sample of the prepared soil to the Superintendent for
approval. Allow for three (3) samples of the mix to be laboratory tested for pH, salt and major trace elements.
A laboratory certificate may be required to accompany the initial sample at the instruction of the
Superintendent. The Superintendent may select a further two (2) samples for analysis during the course of the
Works.
All approvals shall be confirmed in writing. Subsequent conditioner used on the project shall conform to this
sample. In the event that these tests prove unacceptable, the defective conditioner will be removed and
replaced. If further testing is required, the cost of testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.5 IMPORTED SOIL - SCREENED TOPSOIL

2.5.1 General
After Site Works supply and install to all areas designated on the drawings imported soil to the following
specification:
 SCREENED BLACK TOPSOIL
2.5.2 Standards
Screened black topsoil shall be in accordance with AS4419-2003 Soils for Landscaping and Garden Use and
Australian Standard AS4419-2003, Soils for Landscaping and Garden Use.
Screened black topsoil is to be completely free of all noxious weeds, seeds and fungus, insect pests and other
deleterious material.
2.5.3 Placement
Prior to spreading of imported soil, remove all rubble or other extraneous and deleterious material and matter
on the base course material and dispose of in the correct manner off site at an approved rubbish tip.
Remove existing top soil to a depth of 150mm over the full extent of areas designated Garden Bed Type B on
the drawings or as otherwise indicated.
Place imported soil to a depth of 150mm over the full extent of areas designated Garden Bed Type B on the
drawings or as otherwise indicated. After placement, smudging boarding and planting, soil conditioner mix
shall finish 80mm below adjacent kerbing, paving and turf areas.
2.5.4 Samples
Prior to delivery of prepared soil, submit a 0.01 m3 sample of the prepared soil to the Superintendent for
approval. Allow for three (3) samples of the mix to be laboratory tested for pH, salt and major trace elements.
A laboratory certificate may be required to accompany the initial sample at the instruction of the
Superintendent. The Superintendent may select a further two (2) samples for analysis during the course of the
Works.
All approvals shall be confirmed in writing. Subsequent imported soil used on the project shall conform to this
sample. In the event that these tests prove unacceptable, the defective soil will be removed and replaced. If
further testing is required, the cost of testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.6 SITE SOIL CONDITIONER – TREE WELLS

2.6.1 General
After site works apply conditioned screened top soil to all tree holes in the following areas:
 All Tree planting holes – excluding trees in raised planters.
2.6.2 Soil Conditioning Mix
Conditioned site soil mix shall be as follows:
 Screened top soil (clean and free of contamination) Ten (10) parts; and
 C-Wise ‘Horticulture’ Soil Improver One (1) part.
Soil conditioner shall comply with AS4454 Composts, Soil Conditioners and Mulches.
2.6.3 Excavation
Excavate Tree holes to the depth, and twice the width of the root ball.
No excavation shall occur deeper than the tree root ball.
Remove from site all excavated material as required to construct the works and dispose of in the correct
manner off site at an approved rubbish tip at.

10
2.6.4 Screened Top Soil

Screened black topsoil shall be in accordance with AS4419-2003 Soils for Landscaping and Garden Use and
Australian Standard AS4419-2003, Soils for Landscaping and Garden Use.
Screened black topsoil is to be completely free of all noxious weeds, seeds and fungus, insect pests and other
deleterious material.
2.6.5 Placement
Conditioned screened top soil shall be applied to the full extent of tree hole excavation and lightly compacted.
2.6.6 Samples
Prior to placement of conditioned screened top soil, submit a 0.01 m3 sample of the soil to the Superintendent
for approval.
Allow for three (3) samples of the mix to be laboratory tested for pH, salt and major trace elements. A laboratory
certificate may be required to accompany the initial samples at the instruction of the Superintendent.
The Superintendent may select a further two (2) samples for analysis during the course of the Works.
All approvals shall be confirmed in writing.
Subsequent conditioned site soil used on the project shall conform to this sample. In the event that these tests
prove unacceptable, the defective conditioned site soil will be removed and replaced. If further testing is
required, the cost of testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.7 IMPORTED SAND – TURF GRASS AREAS

2.7.1 General
After site works supply and install to all areas designated on the drawings screened and washed imported
yellow turf sand.
2.7.2 Imported Yellow Turf Sand Supply
Yellow turf sand shall be a clean granular material, sand as defined in AS1289.3.6.1, and shall have the
following properties:
i) Have non plastic fines;
ii) Be clean and free of all silty, organic or any other deleterious inclusions and certified as Die Back
(Phytophthora sp.) free;
iii) Be cohesionless with a minimum permeability of 5m/day when compacted at 95% Modified Maximum
Dry Density in accordance with AS1289.5.2.1; and
iv) Have a particle size distribution in compliance with the limits shown below.
Sieve Size % Passing
4.75mm 100
2.36mm 100
1.18mm 100
600um 84
300um 31
150um 4
75um 1.8
Pan 0
The contractor shall provide results from NATA registered testing authority which demonstrates compliance
with the above criteria prior to undertaking fill operations.
Independent testing certifying compliance shall be provided to the Superintendent within three days of request.

11
2.7.3 Placement
Place sand to a depth of 100mm over the full extent of areas to be grassed.
Prior to placement, ensure all base material is clean, free draining and free of all builders rubble, rubbish,
deleterious material and contamination. All area contaminated by the builder shall be removed and replace
with clean fill sand to the approval of the Superintendent.
After placement and smudging boarding sand shall finish 10mm below adjacent kerbing and paving.
2.8 WALL TYPE C

2.8.1 General
Supply and construct reconstituted laterite block walls as indicated on the drawings including all excavation
and back filling.
2.8.2 Stone Work Materials
Laterite Blocks shall:
 be in accordance with AS3700 Masonry Structures;
 have a minimum characteristic compressive strength of 2.7 Mpa;
 have a minimum density of 1,500 Kg/M3;
 be free of faults, fractures, chips and hollows;
 be type and size: Brikmakers ‘Natural Earth Range’ Blocks, 1000mm long x 350mm deep x 350mm
wide; and
 have a bevelled edge to all faces.
2.8.3 Tolerances - Units
2.8.3.1 Units
The units shall conform to the following tolerances, to the approval of the Superintendent:
 Uniformity: The maximum deviation in any direction or plane, from a 350mm straightedge placed
anywhere on the wearing surface of each unit, shall not exceed 2mm;
 All bevels, chamfers and radii on curved surfaces (including bull noses) shall be continuous, true and
even; and
 Squareness of plan: Square angles to each corner.
The contractor shall confirm the unit supplier can comply with all tolerances prior to fabrication.
2.8.4 Tolerances - Walls
For all walls the level at the top of the wall shall be -0mm to +10mm over the length of a 3m straight edge, and
no more than -0mm to +15mm overall from the design level.
Wall faces shall not deviate from the design:
 Vertical 0.5% in layback slope
 Horizontal 25mm from design position
 Surface 20mm from 3m straight edge in any direction
2.8.5 Quality Assurance
The Contractor shall produce, and submit weekly to the Superintendent, verified records to confirm that the
specification requirements have been achieved as follows:
Component of Works Type of Certification Required Quantity
Foundation Compaction Compaction Certificate Test per 10m length of wall
Backfill Compaction Compaction Certificate Test per layer per 50m2
Finished Walls As-constructed profiles (with tolerances 1 per 20m length of wall
and locations)
Limestone Blocks Density Certificate 3 tests per project

12
Mortar Certificate of sand:cement:lime ratio 1 per wall
Anti Graffiti Coating Supplier’s Application Certificate 1 per coat
Independent Certification Independent Engineering Certification of 1 per project

Retaining Wall Construction
2.8.6 Mortar
All cement mortars to be to AS3972, AS3972, and AS3972 Type GP.
Mortar Mix to be 6 part sand: 1 part cement: 1 part lime unless otherwise specified.
For masonry more than three (3) courses below ground and in retaining walls use mortar mixes 3 part sand: 1
part cement: 0.25 part lime.
All sands shall be tested and certified as salt free, either independently or by the sand supplier. The contractor
shall supply a complying copy of the certification to the Superintendent's Representative for approval prior to
ordering materials. The contractor shall ensure all sands used in the works shall be from the same source and
provenance as the tested and certified source.
All cost associated with testing and certification shall be borne by the contractor.
Colour of all mortar to be CCS Marigold to match natural earth block.
2.8.7 Sub-Grade Preparation
2.8.7.1 Moisture Content
Prior to compaction, bring the sub-grade under all walls to within 2% of the optimum moisture content
determined to AS1289.5.1.1 (standard) or AS1289.5.2.1 (modified) as applicable to the material.
2.8.7.2 Compaction
The sub grade under all walls shall be fully compacted with a mechanical vibrator to not less than Eight (8)
blows per 300mm with a Perth sand penetrometer as determined by AS1289.5.2.1 AS1289.5.2.1
AS1289.5.2.1 to a depth of 750mm.
2.8.8 Stone Work Workmanship
All stone works shall comply to AS3700.
Clean stonework progressively as the work proceeds, removing mortar and other droppings as they occur.
Clean face work to remove mortar smears, stains, discoloration, and the like. Stained or damaged surfaces or
edging units shall be replaced not repaired, unless otherwise directed by the Superintendent.
Set out stonework so as to maintain the specified rod and bond with bed joints and vertical joints of uniform
width, and with the minimum muting of units.
Bonding Pattern shall be stretcher bond, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Work with a jointing tool produce face work joints: to a dense, smooth surface to a flush profile, or as detailed.
2.8.9 Waterproofing to Retaining Walls
2.8.9.1 Coating
Location behind all retaining walls to within 100mm of finished ground level or as detailed.
Coating is to be liquid applied single component asphalt latex emulsion which cures by evaporation to form an
elastomeric waterproofing membrane.
Waterproofing agent is to be 'ELASTOSEAL' by CROMMELIN CHEMICALS (WA).
2.8.9.2 Application
Apply the emulsion in two coats at the rate of 1m2 / litre / coat. Allow first coat to cure before application of
the second coat. Apply each coat at right angles to each other in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2.8.10 Wall Backfilling
Compacted structural fill to walls shall achieve a minimum density ratio of 95% of MMDD. Backfilling to be
completed progressively in maximum layers of 500mm once the section of wall has achieved an age of 7 days
since last block laid. Contractor shall take care when backfilling to prevent damage to wall.

13
2.8.11 Sealer / Anti-Graffiti Coating

Upon completion of construction, supply and apply sealer / anti-graffiti coating to all above ground surfaces.
Sealer / anti-graffiti coating shall be equal or equivalent to Crommelins, to the approval of the Superintendent,
suitable for the substrate and site conditions, as recommended by the manufacturer.
Install strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions suitable for the substrate.
2.9 UNIT PAVEMENT

2.9.1 General
Supply and install pre-cast concrete paving, headers and concrete haunch.
Construct all paving and install headers to the details and limits shown in the drawings. The cost of paving and
headers shall include all edging, paving, expansion joints, cutting, cleaning down and surface protection during
construction. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to confirm orders and delivery times for paving units as
early as possible to ensure that the Construction Program is maintained without delays due to late deliveries.
2.9.2 Pavement Type 2
Supply and lay
Unit Paving – 290x290x60mm Remastone
Textured Finish in “MAPLE”
2.9.3 Materials and Workmanship
All pavement surfaces shall comply with AS/NZS 4586 Classifications in Selecting Pedestrian Surface
Materials.
All materials liable to deteriorate by exposure to the weather shall be kept undercover and the Contractor shall
be held responsible for loss or deterioration occurring in the course of loading, unloading, transit or storage, no
matter what the cause. Quality of all workmanship, materials, and all construction methods shall conform to
the relevant SAA code and shall be FIRST CLASS throughout.
Only workers or Sub-Contractors of proven competence for the type of work specified will be permitted to carry
out the work of this Contract. Evidence of proven performance will be required by the Superintendent before
approval will be granted.
2.9.4 Co-ordination
Co-ordinate all the work with the Superintendent, other Contractors and the paving manufacturer.
2.9.5 Supervision
The Contractor will be wholly responsible for executing the whole of the work of this Contract in the required
positions to the requirements of the Specification under the supervision of a foreperson experienced in this
work.
2.9.6 Standards
Materials and workmanship used in all construction shall conform with the relevant requirements of the
applicable Australian Standards and Codes.
2.9.7 Samples
Submit samples of various materials to be used, for approval. Subsequent work shall in all respects match the
approved samples.
2.9.8 Responsibility
The Contractor shall accept all responsibility for paving units at all times after delivery and acceptance and it
shall replace any damaged, defective or discoloured units, at its own expense when called upon by the
Superintendent to do so.
All paving shall be protected from injury or staining after delivery until completion of the Contract.
2.9.9 Installation
2.9.9.1 Construction Generally
The Contractor will be responsible for the supply of all materials and setting out the works and installing all
paving as shown on the plans and details. This work includes laying pre-cast concrete paving units of various
sizes in various patterns. Ensure that each unit is accurately manufactured or saw cut and mitred to the
required size and shape and face surfaces finished to specified requirements. Where metal fixings are
required for construction, the concealed faces of each unit shall be specially shaped and recessed to suit the
type of fixing used.

14
Shaped units shall be fitted to match with the paving and to conform to applicable details. Cut or shaped units
shall not be less than one third of the original unit size.
Marks shall not be made on face surfaces. In face work, all units shall be carefully mixed to ensure an even
overall blend of colour, tone, texture and figure.
All prepared units shall be packed for delivery in a manner which will protect them from damage and staining.
Particular care shall be taken during loading, unloading and stacking to prevent damage and defacement.
Under no circumstances shall unloading by tipping and/or dropping be permitted.
Units shall be stacked clear of the ground on pallets or other suitable supporting materials or structures which
will insulate them from rising damp, and the stocks covered by suitable waterproof covers to prevent wetting.
2.9.9.2 Workmanship
All work shall be carried out in the best recognized trade practice by approved firms specializing in the
particular work and employing skilled experienced tradesmen.
Pre-cast paving units shall be carefully unloaded at site and stacked in an approved manner until set in
position.
Provide all accessories and perform all operations necessary for the proper execution of first class paving
including selecting, culling, bedding, setting, sawing, fixings, pointing, grouting, caulking, and the like.
Build in all necessary fixings as required. Provide all other fittings, as detailed. Co-ordinate with other trades
as required.
Inspect all areas to ensure that the surfaces are suitable to receive them.
Undertake all the necessary minor filling and/or minor grinding off of the adjacent surfaces i.e. kerbs, pram
crossings etc. that it deems necessary prior to setting the paving.
2.9.9.3 Samples
Submit representative samples of the paving units for approval prior to proceeding. Upon approval, allow to
construct for further approval, a sample incorporating each type of paving to a minimum of 40m 2. This work
shall be reviewed by the Superintendent, to ensure compliance with the Specification and Drawings.
Once approved, ensure that all materials and workmanship comply with the approved samples. The approved
samples may be incorporated into the finished work if appropriate.
2.9.9.4 Paving
Blocks shall be laid to grades and lines as shown on the drawings.
2.9.9.5 Sub-Grade
2.9.9.5.1 Preparation
Prior to compaction, bring the sub-grade to within 2% of the optimum moisture content determined to
AS1289.5.1.1 or AS1289.5.2.1 as applicable to the material.
2.9.9.5.2 Compaction
The pavement sub grade shall be fully compacted with a mechanical vibrator to not less than Eight (8) blows
per 300mm with a Perth sand penetrometer as determined by AS1289.5.2.1 to a depth of 450mm.
2.9.9.5.3 Finished Sub-Grade Level Tolerances
Maximum deviation from the design level: + 10mm, - 0mm.
Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid anywhere on each plane surface: 20mm.
2.9.9.5.4 Compaction Equipment:
Use approved rollers, appropriate to the materials and compaction requirements. Use approved plate
compactors on areas inaccessible to rollers. To maintain moisture content, use water spraying equipment
capable of distributing water uniformly in controlled quantities without washing fines from the sub-grade or
base material.
2.9.9.6 Bedding Sand
Bedding sand shall be well graded sand passing a 4.75mm sieve and suited to concrete manufacture. The
bedding sand shall be free of deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence.
Bricklayers sand and single sized dune sands are not considered to be suitable.
The maximum depth of bedding sand shall be 30mm (+ - 5mm) after compaction of the paving. This shall be
achieved by field trials. The bedding sand is to be spread loose in a uniform layer, screeded loose to a
nominated level just ahead of the laying of the paving units. The Contractor is to ensure that only light
compaction of the bedding sand occurs with a small plate compactor prior to placing of paving units. Only
sufficient area is prepared as will be paved in that day.

15
2.9.9.7 Placing of Paving Units

Paving units are to be placed on to the lightly compacted bedding sand to the nominated laying pattern. All
joints are to be correctly aligned and the nominated joint width to be maintained, with a suitably approved sand
retention adhesive i.e. sand stick or similar. Nominated joint width to be as follows:
Concrete Block Paving Units Nominal Joint Width 2mm
Closure units shall be fitted after all full paving units in a row have been positioned.
In-fill spaces and strips around boxes or manholes will be unit paving, or in approved concrete with a suitable
colour additive to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. Allow for the preparation of sample concrete panels
for approval by the Superintendent prior to incorporation in the work. Exposed aggregate finishes to match
some forms of paving may be required and the Contractor is to make due allowance for this.
Cut unit size shall comprise a minimum of 30% of any unit type. Break bond as required to maintain minimal
unit size in all situations, to the approval of the Superintendent.
Where it is necessary to adjust the position of paving units this shall be by adjustment of the bedding sand not
by hammering of the units.
2.9.9.8 Compaction
The paving units shall be consolidated to design levels with a minimum of three passes of a high frequency low
amplitude plate compactor with a plate large enough to eliminate damage to the paving units.
Prior to carrying out compaction, sand for joint filling is to be spread over the paving units to a minimum depth
of 20mm. Generally for paving units less than 60mm thick this will not provide adequate protection against
damage to the paving units and the Contractor shall be required to provide additional protection to the
underside of the place compactor.
Any units damaged during the compaction process shall be immediately removed and replaced.
All sand for joint filling shall be free of soluble salts or contaminants with 100% passing the 2.36mm sieve and
being uniformly graded. Shall be “Pavelock” joint filling sand only.
The whole of the area shall be swept clean at the completion of each day’s work and the Contractor is to take
all precautions against the filling sand becoming wind blown or spread by any means whatsoever.
No construction traffic shall be allowed onto the pavement until this stage has been achieved other than foot or
barrow traffic.
2.9.9.9 Clean Up
Upon completion of paving works, clean away all debris resulting from their works together with any
accumulated debris along kerb lines and in storm water pits.
2.9.9.10 Tolerances
Install paving within the following tolerances.
A cumulative effect of the tolerances for size, location and position in the horizontal or vertical plane is not
permitted. The 3 dimensional variation of any point from its documented position shall be governed by the
minimum single tolerance figure allowed.
 lipping (vertical deviation) between adjacent units + 2mm;
 lipping (vertical deviation) between adjacent works i.e. kerbs + 2mm;
 deviations from a 1500mm straight edge placed on the surface in any direction shall not exceed 3mm.
Deviation from a straight edge shall conform to the previously stated tolerances but shall not exceed a
maximum deviation of 25mm over the entire length of the paving;
 variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces 6mm per 3000mm but not more than 25mm in total
length;
 variation from the level or grades indicated on drawings, + 5mm; and
 variations from plan position shown on drawings in 12000mm or more shall be no greater than 20mm
thereof.
2.9.10 Expansion Joints
2.9.10.1 Expansion Joints
Provided 15mm wide expansion joints in paving as indicated on the drawings and, as a minimum evenly
spaced at intervals not exceeding 6000mm apart in any one direction.
Provided 15mm wide expansion joints in paving at all fixed edges including kerbs, adjoining pavement edges
and walls, to the edges of all furniture and fittings, services lids and other pavement inserts.

16
Set into expansion joints a backing of 15mm dia. closed cell cream polyethylene strip. Set strip back sufficient
distance so that sealing compound will finish flush with paving.
Seal expansion joints with a polysulphide or polyurethane based sealing compound. Depth of sealing
compound shall not exceed the width of the joint. Colour of sealing compound shall blend with colour of
pavement. Where polysulphide sealing compounds are used, coat surfaces of pavement in contact with
sealing compound with a sealer recommended by the sealing compound manufacturer.
2.9.11 Mortar Haunch
All unrestrained pavement edges and all pavement edges abutting service pits are to have a continuous mortar
haunch to the full extent of all unrestrained edges and service pit edges.
Mortar shall be:
 all part sand mortars to AS3972 Type GP, 4 part sand: 1 part cement;
 cement to be blended cement with fly ash content approximately 25%;
 sand must be clean, washed, medium to fine;
 gauge boxes for proportioning of the cement and sand must be used;
 a reasonably large powerful mixer capable of thorough mixing must be used; and
 contain cement aids "Caltite Water proofer" at the rate of one part water proofer to 5 parts water.
Mortar haunch to be as detailed on the drawing and, as a minimum be 100mm deep below underside of unit
pavement, 200mm wide located central to unrestrained edge of pavement and finishing a minimum of two
thirds up the face of the unsupported edge.
2.9.12 Protection
Protect paving from staining and damage. Use sheeting or other screening as necessary. Do not use
hardwood in contact with units.
Clean off all droppings as they occur. Stained or damaged units shall be replaced, not repaired, unless
otherwise permitted by the Superintendent.
Protect adjoining surfaces during paving work. Finished surfaces in the vicinity of work being carried out shall
be protected from staining and impact and all necessary precautions are to be taken to ensure that protection
is provided and maintained.
Protect all paving as follows:
 exclude all foot traffic for 3 days;
 exclude all heavier traffic for 7 days;
 exclude all vehicles for 21 days minimum; and
 provide barriers and planking to accommodate traffic.
All sealants to meet "non-skid" slip resistance to Pendulum P4 rating or higher as per AS 4586 Slip Resistant
classification of New Pedestrian Surface Materials.
2.9.14 Completion
On completion and following approval by the Superintendent of the work, all work shall be cleaned by means
(approved by the Superintendent in writing) to give a uniform surface free from all foreign residues.
Clean away and remove from the site all rubbish and unwanted materials and leave the area of the work clean
and tidy.
2.9.15 Testing
The Superintendent reserves the right to take samples of any materials at any time for test or analysis.
Should the results indicate that the requirements of this Specification have not been complied with, action will
be taken under the Contract regarding replacement, re-performance or compensation.
The costs of all failing tests or analysis will in all circumstances be paid by the Contractor.

17
2.10 STEELWORK
2.10.1 Standards
The following standards shall apply to this Section:
AS1074 Steel tubes and tubulars for ordinary service
AS1214-0983 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners
AS1397 Steel sheet and strip - Hot-dipped zinc-coated or aluminium/zinc-coated
AS 1428 Design for access and mobility
AS1450 Steel tubes for mechanical purposes
AS 1538 Cold-formed steel structures code
AS 1554 Structural steel welding Part 1 - Welding of steel structures
AS1627.5 Metal finishing - Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces
AS/NZS4680 Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on ferrous articles
AS 1725 Galvanised rail-less chain wire security fences and gates
AS 2105 Inorganic zinc silicate paint
AS2423-2002 Galvanised wire fencing products
AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural applications
AS 4100 Steel structures.
2.10.2 Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings (4 copies) to the Superintendent for examination.
Obtain certified examined drawings from the Superintendent before manufacture or installation commences for
all steel work and all steel fabricated items including all fittings and fixings and the like.
Submit shop drawings in a timely manner, allowing a minimum of 14 days for examination prior to return.
Shop drawings shall contain reference to all work, including all elements, galvanising ventilation holes,
transportation lugs, fittings and fixings as required by all trades.
All elements under the works including all fittings and fixings shall be referenced as to material, dimension and
location within the works. Show on drawings single line schematics, plans, elevations, dimensions, equipment,
fittings and fixings and the like detail, as required to fully describe the works to be supplied, installed and
commissioned. Comments on “examined” shop drawings will apply to general principles of design only.
Examination of the drawings by the Superintendent or Relevant Consultant will in no way relieve the
Contractor’s responsibility for any errors, omissions or necessity of furnishing such workmanship or materials
as may be required for the completion of these works in accordance with the contract documents.
2.10.3 Transportation and Installation
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and administration associated with the transportation, cranage and
installation of all structures including any individual elements thereof, including the protection of all existing
facilities, services and vegetation.
The Contractor is deemed to have, prior to tender, inspected the site in regard to transportation and installation
of all works, in accordance with the tender preliminaries.
2.10.4 Materials
2.10.4.1 Metals
Use metals suited to their required function, finish and method of fabrication, in sections of adequate strength
and stiffness for their purpose.
2.10.4.2 Steel
The contractor shall guarantee that all steel shall have silica levels of:
% Si < 0.04%
%Si + (2.5 x %P) < 0.09%
The contractor shall guarantee that all steel shall be of like provenance and composition prior to galvanising.
2.10.4.3 Stainless Steel
All Stainless Steel shall be Grade 4 Linished standard.

18
2.10.5 Workmanship
2.10.5.1 Prefabrication
Fabricate and pre-assemble items in the workshop wherever practicable.
2.10.5.2 Surfaces and Edges
Keep clean, neat and free from all imperfections including burs and indentations.
Remove all imperfections including all bumps and indentations, including all identification markings.
Remove all sharp edges without excessive radiusing.
2.10.5.3 Joints
Fit joints to an accuracy appropriate to the class of work. Finish visible joints made by welding, brazing or
soldering by grinding, buffing or the like methods appropriate to the class of work before painting, galvanizing,
or the like further treatment.
Self-finished metals: Free of surface colour variations, after jointing.
2.10.5.4 Tube Bends
Form bends in tube without unduly deforming the true cross section.
2.10.5.5 Colours
Match colours of sheets, extrusions and heads of fastenings in colour finished work.
2.10.5.6 Metal Separation
Separate incompatible metals by concealed interlayer’s of suitable materials and thicknesses.
2.10.5.7 Thermal Movement
Make provision, sufficient to prevent harmful effects, for thermal movement in joints and fastenings.
2.10.5.8 Steel Welding
To AS/NZS1554 Finished welds shall be free of surface and internal cracks, slag inclusion, and porosity.
2.10.6 Structural Steel
2.10.6.1 Fabrication and Erection
Steel structures to AS4100.
Cold formed steel structures to AS/NZS4600.
2.10.6.2 Beam Camber
If beam members have a natural camber within the straightness tolerance, fabricate and erect them with the
camber up.
2.10.7 Fastenings
2.10.7.1 General
Provide fastenings, including bolts, anchors, screws, rivets, welds, and the like:
 sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly;
 of types appropriate to the work;
 in materials of mechanical strength and corrosion resistance at least equal to that of the lowest resistant
metal joined;
 capable of transmitting the loads and stresses imposed; and
 installed so as to prevent galvanic corrosion.
2.10.8 Protection
2.10.8.1 Generally
Protect metalwork during the work under the Contract as necessary to prevent damage or defacement.
2.10.9 Galvanized Coatings
2.10.9.1 General
Provide hot dipped galvanized coating to all steelwork including all fittings and fixings.
All galvanised coatings shall be of an Architectural Finish standard.
Finish shall be free from runs, dags, spikes, uneven surfaces and roughness or other defects that could affect
appearance.
All HDG steel shall be inspected by the Superintendent’s Representative, or Clerk of Works, at the galvaniser’s
premises and be approved for use prior to dispatch.

19
2.10.9.2 Fabrication
Complete welding, cutting, drilling and other fabrication before coating.
2.10.9.3 Surface Preparation
(General ferrous articles): Pickle to AS1627.5
2.10.9.4 Coatings
Unless otherwise specified, zinc coatings shall be by the hot dip method as follows:
Ferrous articles generally: To AS/NZS4680
Ferrous wire: To AS/NZS4680, Section 4, Type A, unless otherwise specified.
Steel sheet: To AS1397, coating class as specified for the particular item.
Threaded fasteners: To AS1214.
2.10.9.5 Damaged Coatings
Repair damaged coating areas by power tool cleaning to AS1627.2 and apply organic single component zinc
coating of minimum 92% (weight) zinc in the dry layer cold galvanizing to provide protection equal to the
original coating.
2.10.10 Dulux Weathermax HBR (High Build Polyurethane)
2.10.10.1 General
Refer Dulux PC 405. Prepare all surfaces and Install strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
2.10.10.2 Fabrication
2.10.10.3 Coatings
Galvanized Steel
Clean, degrease and abrade surface
1st Coat Duremax GPE ZP 125 um DFT
2nd Cost Weathermax HBR 100 um DFT.
2.10.10.4 Damaged Coatings
Repair damaged coating areas by power tool cleaning to AS1627.2 and applying original coating system to
original specification.
2.10.11 Below Ground Steel
All steel works below finished ground level shall be coated with two (2) coats of asphaltic paint, to be approved
by the Superintendent’s Representative. Asphaltic coating shall be applied to the manufacturer’s
recommendations for site specific materials, conditions and use.
2.11 CONCRETE WORK – STRUCTURAL

2.11.1 Scope
Concrete works include all concrete footings, slabs and cavity fill.
2.11.2 Transportation and Installation
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and administration associated with the transportation, cranage and
installation of all structures including any individual elements thereof, including the protection of all existing
facilities, services and vegetation. The Contractor is deemed to have, prior to tender, inspected the site in
regard to transportation and installation of all works, in accordance with the tender preliminaries.
2.11.3 Standards
The following standards shall apply to this Section:
AS1012 Methods of testing concrete
AS1379-2007AS1379 Ready mixed concrete (metric units)
AS/NZS2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings
AS3600 Concrete structures
AS3610 Formwork for concrete
AS3972 Portland and blended cements.
AS/NZS 4586 Classifications in Selecting Pedestrian Surface Materials.

20
2.11.4 Inspection
Give sufficient notice so that an inspection may be made of the following:
 Completed form work
 Reinforcement fixed in place
 Placing of concrete.
2.11.5 Testing
Concrete supplied for the Works shall be subject to production assessment and testing to AS1379, Paragraph
B3.
Testing Authority: Testing and assessment of concrete and concrete materials shall be carried out by an
authority registered with the National Association of Testing Authorities Australia (NATA).
Production Assessment Records: To AS1379. Register the project in accordance with AS1379. Maintain
records and reports of test results required by AS1012. Make the records available on request. Rejection shall
be to AS3600 Clause 19.1.7. Remove rejected concrete from the site.
2.11.6 Materials
2.11.6.1 Concrete Materials
To AS3600 Section 19.
Ready Mix supply to AS1379. Deliver in agitating trucks.
Supply concrete to comply with the following performance criteria:
 Class of Concrete: Normal Portland Cement (Type GP).
 Cement: To AS3972 AS3972 AS3972 Type GP,
 Strength Grade, Slump, Maximum Aggregate Size:
 Slabs on Ground: 32MPa, 80mm, 20mm.
 Footings: 25MPa, 80mm, 20mm.
 Blinding: 15MPa, 80mm, 20mm
 Cavity Fill: 25MPa, 200mm, 14mm.
2.11.6.2 Form Work
To AS3600 Clause 19.6.
Design and construct form work so that concrete, when cast in the forms, will have the dimensions, shape,
location and surface finish required by the Contract.
Dimension tolerances to AS3600 Clause 19.5.
Form work removal to AS3600 Clause 19.6.
2.11.6.3 Reinforcing
To AS3600 Clause 19.2.
Supply and fix reinforcement, including the necessary tie wires, support chairs, spacers and the like.
Reinforcement shall be readily identifiable as to grade and origin.
Submit for approval details of proposed bending and splicing not shown on the Drawings.
2.11.7 Workmanship
2.11.7.1 Sub Grade
Compact sub-grade to the full extent of all footings and slabs on ground to a minimum of 8 blows per 300mm
as measured with a Perth Sand Penetrometer to a minimum depth of 750mm.
2.11.7.2 Placing and Compaction
To AS3600 clause 19.1.3.
Use placing methods which minimise plastic settlement and shrinkage cracking.
Movement may be by means of suitable clean chutes, troughs or pipes. Do not use water to facilitate the
movement.
Place concrete in layers such that each succeeding layer is blended into the preceding one by the compaction
process. Concrete exposed to rain before it has set, including during mixing, transport or placing, shall be liable
to rejection.

21
Use immersion and screed vibrators accompanied by hand methods as appropriate to remove air bubbles and
compact the mix. Ensure concrete is fully compacted and entrapped air removed, but avoid over vibration that
may cause segregation. Do not allow vibrators to come into contact with partially hardened concrete, or
reinforcement embedded in it. Do not use vibrators to move concrete along the forms.
2.11.7.3 Curing
To AS3600 clause 19.1.5.
Protect fresh concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Maintain the concrete
at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss for the curing period.
Commence curing immediately after finishing, and cure continuously for not less than seven (7) days.
Submit for approval the proposed method of curing, which may include the following:
 Ponding or continuous sprinkling with water (moist curing)
 An impermeable membrane
 An absorptive cover kept continuously wet.
2.11.7.4 Finish
All off form finished surfaces including, but not limited to walls, tables, benches, benching, seats, step treads
and pavement surfaces shall be free draining and free of ponding. All step treads and pavement surfaces shall
comply with AS/NZS 4586 Classifications in Selecting Pedestrian Surface Materials.
2.12 CONCRETE SEAT WALLS TYPE D

2.12.1 General
Construct and install pre cast concrete seat walls as detailed on the drawings.
2.12.2 Shop Drawings and Survey
The Contractor shall allow for a pre-construction survey of existing concrete beam to bench seat locations.
Survey shall fully indicate size, extent and levels of existing beam, and be provided to the Superintendent for
assessment, prior to the commencement of construction works.
Contractor shall supply full shop drawings of all elements of all concrete, steel and timber bench seats.
Submit shop drawings in a timely manner, allowing a minimum of 14 days for examination prior to return.
Shop drawings shall contain reference to all work, including all elements, galvanising ventilation holes,
transportation lugs, fittings and fixings as required by all trades.
All elements under the works including all fittings and fixings shall be referenced as to material, dimension and
location within the works. Show on drawings single line schematics, plans, elevations, dimensions, equipment,
fittings and fixings and the like detail, as required to fully describe the works to be supplied, installed and
commissioned
Comments on “examined” shop drawings will apply to general principles of design only. Examination of the
drawings by the Superintendent or Relevant Consultant will in no way relieve the Contractor’s responsibility for
any errors, omissions or necessity of furnishing such workmanship or materials as may be required for the
completion of these works in accordance with the contract documents.
Construction works to bench seats shall not commence until such time as the Superintendent has approved
both site survey of beam and shop drawings of benches.
2.12.3 Concrete mix
The concrete mix shall be:
Cement: White Cement
Oxide: Nil;
Aggregate: 100% Granite nominal size 14mm;
- Maximum slump: 80mm;
Finish: Steel Off-form; and
Compressive Strength: 40 M.Pa. Minimum at twenty eight (28) days.
2.12.4 Standards
All precast concrete work shall be finished to a monolithically smooth “Glass Finish” and 10mm chamfer to all
exposed edges.

22
All off form concrete work shall be finished to a monolithically smooth “Class 2 Finish” and 10mm chamfer to
all exposed edges.
All steel shall be pre-drilled for fixings and welded prior to hot dip galvanising.
All steel work shall comply with the ‘Steel’ clause of this specification.
Concrete work: refer Structural Engineers specification.
2.12.5 Waterproofing to CONCRETE Retaining Walls
2.12.5.1 Coating
Location behind all retaining walls to within 100mm of finished ground level or as detailed.
Coating is to be liquid applied single component asphalt latex emulsion which cures by evaporation to form an
elastomeric waterproofing membrane.
Waterproofing agent is to be Enviro HP1200.
2.12.5.2 Application
Apply the emulsion strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.
2.12.6 Sealing
Following installation all concrete surfaces shall be sealed with "DRY TREAT Stain-proof" penetrating sealer,
applied with two (2) coats to the approval of the Superintendent.
2.12.7 Protection
Protect stone work and concrete from staining and damage. Use sheeting or other screening as necessary. Do
not use hardwood in contact with units.
Clean off all droppings as they occur. Stained or damaged units shall be replaced, not repaired, unless
otherwise permitted by the Superintendent. Contractor shall be fully liable for all costs associated with
replacement.
The replacement of units will not be grounds for extension of construction time.
2.13 IN-SITU CONCRETE PAVEMENT

2.13.1 General
Supply and install in-situ concrete pavement where indicated on the drawings.
2.13.2 Earthworks
Carry out earthworks and preparation to allow for levels to be achieved to finished grades as specified.
2.13.3 Sub-Grade
2.13.3.1 Preparation
Prior to compaction, bring the sub-grade to within 2% of the optimum moisture content determined to
AS1289.5.1.1 (standard) or AS1289.5.2.1 (modified) as applicable to the material.
2.13.3.2 Compaction
The pavement sub grade shall be fully compacted with a mechanical vibrator to not less than Eight (8) blows
per 300mm with a Perth sand penetrometer as determined by AS1289.5.2.1 to a depth of 450mm.
2.13.3.3 Finished Sub-Grade Level Tolerances
Maximum deviation from the design level: + 10mm, - 0mm.
Maximum deviation from a 3 m straightedge laid anywhere on each plane surface: 20mm.
2.13.3.4 Compaction Equipment:
Use approved rollers, appropriate to the materials and compaction requirements. Use approved plate
compactors on areas inaccessible to rollers. To maintain moisture content, use water spraying equipment
capable of distributing water uniformly in controlled quantities without washing fines from the sub-grade or
base material.

23
2.13.4 Concrete
Concrete mixes shall be as follows:
Pavement Type 1:
Cement: Grey, Portland Cement Type ‘GP’ or approved equivalent,
Oxide: Nil,
Aggregate: Grey granite, nominal maximum size 14mm,
Maximum slump: 80mm,
Thickness: 100mm
Finish Steel float and Broom finish to full extent (no tooled edges or joints),
Pavement Type 3:
Type: Exposed Aggregate Concrete
Colour: Holcim Geostone “GREVILLEA”;
Maximum slump: 80mm;
Thickness: 100mm
Finish: Water-washed exposed aggregate (no tooled edges or joints); and
Pavement Type 4:
Type: Exposed Aggregate Concrete
Colour: Holcim Geostone “JACKWOOD”;
Maximum slump: 80mm;
Thickness: 100mm
Finish: Water-washed exposed aggregate (no tooled edges or joints); and
The Contractor shall guarantee that all concrete shall be of like composition, i.e. utilising the same batch of
sand and using the same proportional mix of materials.
All colour variations caused by variances in the composition of materials used, the lack of cleanliness of the
site or truck, or failure to adequately protect concrete will be replaced by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s
expense.
2.13.5 Form Work
Form work shall be of steel or suitable dressed seasoned timber planks, free of warps, bends or kinks.
Forms shall be staked with no less than 3 stakes and not more than 1.5m apart to prevent unspecified warps
and bends. Forms shall be in one piece for the concrete pavement thickness specified.
2.13.6 Placement
2.13.6.1 Placement – Pedestrian Pavement
Lay concrete 100mm thick minimum between control joints and screened off to falls and finish with a steel
hand trowel.
2.13.6.2 Placement – Trafficable Pavement
Lay concrete 150mm thick minimum between control joints and screened off to falls and finish with a steel
hand trowel.
2.13.7 Expansion and Control Joints
2.13.7.1 Expansion Joints
Provided 15mm All In One Lock Joint expansion joints in paving as indicated on the drawings and, as a
minimum evenly spaced at intervals not exceeding 6000mm apart in any one direction in pavements or in
lineal sections of paths.
All In One Lock Joints rubber top to match surrounding pavement materials.

24
Provided 15mm wide expansion joints with a backing of 15mm dia. closed cell polyethylene strip (colour to
match surrounding pavements) in paving at all fixed edges including kerbs, adjoining pavement edges and
walls, to the edges of all furniture and fittings, services lids and other pavement inserts and where two linear
paths join or deviate in alignment. Set strip back sufficient distance so that sealing compound will finish flush
with paving.
2.13.7.2 Contraction Joints
Provided 30mm deep cut contraction joints minimum as indicated on the drawings located as per the drawings,
at a minimum evenly spaced at intervals not exceeding 2000mm apart in any one direction.
2.13.8 Finishing
2.13.8.1 General
All pavement surfaces shall comply with AS/NZS 4586 Classifications in Selecting Pedestrian Surface
Materials.
2.13.8.2 Broom Finished Concrete
After placing and compaction, concrete shall be finished monolithically to a smooth, even surface by means of
steel floats or other suitable equipment. On completion of steel floating and before initial set, the surfaces of
concrete pavements shall be brushed to a “non-skid” slip resistant texture to Pendulum P4 rating or higher as
per AS 4586 Slip Resistant Classification of New Pedestrian Surface Materials. This shall be achieved by
drawing a moistened nylon broom lightly across the surface in a continuous direction.
2.13.8.3 Edges and Joints
Pavement finish shall be to full extent with pencil round tooled edges. There shall be no “picture window”
treatment to edges or joints.
2.13.9 Curing
To AS 3600 clause 19.1.5.
Protect fresh concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Maintain the concrete
at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss for the curing period.
Commence curing immediately after finishing, and cure continuously for not less than seven (7) days.
Submit for approval the proposed method of curing, which may include the following:
 Ponding or continuous sprinkling with water (moist curing)
 An impermeable membrane
 An absorptive cover kept continuously wet.
2.13.10 Protection
Protect paving from staining and damage. Use sheeting or other screening as necessary. Do not use
hardwood in contact with pavements.
Clean off all droppings as they occur. Stained or damaged pavements shall be replaced, not repaired, unless
otherwise permitted by the Superintendent.
Protect all paving as follows:
 exclude all foot traffic for 3 days;
 exclude all vehicles and heavy traffic for 21 days minimum; and
 provide barriers and planking to accommodate traffic.
2.13.11 Tolerances
Works shall be undertaken to the following tolerances:
 Maximum deviation from design level: + 5mm, - 5mm
 Grade across pavement shall be 2% + or -0.5% or as indicated on the drawings.
 Pavement surface shall be true to line and not deviate more than 5mm under a 3m straight edge.
 Surface irregularities, including abutting to service authority manholes, etc. shall not exceed 2mm.

25
 Thickness: = or –5mm. A random testing programme will be used to check the thickness, and if any
point is outside the tolerance, further testing shall be undertaken within that 5m section and the adjoining
5m sections on either side. Three or more additional thickness tests will be taken on each of the
sections. If any of these show a reading that is outside the required tolerance, that section of the
pavement shall be removed and replaced with new work to this specification.
 The pavement shall be constructed to the nominated width + or - 20mm.
Any sections of the pavement not meeting the requirements of this specification shall be removed from the site
and replaced.
2.13.12 Sample Panel
Construct a three (3) square metre sample panel for approval of the Superintendent prior to commencing
works. All works shall comply with the finish of the approved sample panel.
The panel may be incorporated into the Works. Panel location is to be determined on site by the
Superintendent.
All sealants to meet "non-skid" slip resistant texture to Pendulum P4 rating or higher as per AS 4586 Slip
Resistant classification of New Pedestrian Surface Materials.
2.14 IN SITU CONCRETE MOWING KERB

2.14.1 General
Supply and install mowing kerbs in accordance with the drawings, details and as specified.
2.14.2 Setting Out the Works
Construct mowing kerbs to areas shown on drawings or as determined on site by the Superintendent.
2.14.3 Materials
Concrete mixes shall be as follows:
Cement: Grey, Portland Cement Type ‘GP’,
Oxide: Nil,
Aggregate: Grey granite, nominal maximum size 14mm,
Maximum slump: 80mm,
Finish Steel float finish,
2.14.4 Line and Level of Work
Kerbs shall be placed true to alignment in the horizontal plane as shown on the drawings or as may be directed
by the Superintendent and it shall be placed true to grade in vertical alignment as shown on the drawings and
without local irregularities within the following tolerances:
 The tolerance in finished surface level, when tested with a 3 metre long straight edge shall be + 3mm.
 The tolerance in top width of kerb shall be + 3mm.
 The tolerance in alignment and level over a length of not less than 15 metres shall be + 6mm.
2.14.5 Earthworks
Compact sub-grade, by watering and rolling, to not less than Eight (8) blows per 300mm with a Perth sand
penetrometer as determined by AS1289.5.2.1 to a minimum depth of 750mm. Sub grade compaction shall
extend for a minimum of 150mm beyond edge of finished mowing kerb.
2.14.6 Installation
Kerbing shall be constructed using machine formed extruded in-situ concrete to have dimensions 140mm wide
x 90mm deep. Kerbing is to be free from imperfections and irregularities in width and thickness and must be
constructed in good straight line and/or smooth even radius curves, to the approval of the Superintendent.
Construct control joints at 3.0 metre maximum centres and at least one quarter of the depth of the kerb
section.

26
Hand constructed mowing kerbs must be done using good quality framework capable of producing uniform,
well finished kerbs in either straight and even lengths or smooth, even curves.
Top surface of all kerbing must finish flush with surrounding surfaces and/or ground level.
Finish all kerbing monolithically to a smooth, even surface by means of a steel trowel or other surface
equipment.
Provide surface protection to kerbing as necessary to prevent cracking of the concrete due to temperature
changes during curing periods. Make good to all poorly constructed and/or damaged lengths of kerb.
2.14.7 On Completion
Remove all excess concrete from site and backfill with soil flush with top of kerb.
2.15 SEALER / ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING

2.15.1 General
Upon completion of construction, supply and apply APPROVED sealer / anti-graffiti coating to the following:
 All above ground surfaces of retaining and free-standing walls, podiums and steps;
 All exposed surfaces of structures; and
 All pavements.
2.15.2 Materials
Sealer / anti-graffiti coating shall be suitable for substrate, intended use and prevailing conditions, as
recommended by the manufacturer. All pavement and step sealants shall meet "non-skid" slip resistance to
Pendulum P4 rating or higher as per AS 4586 Slip Resistant classification of New Pedestrian Surface Materials.
Details of the system proposed should be lodged with the Superintendent within 30 days of acceptance of
Tender. Details shall include manufacturer’s specification and recommendations, application procedures,
warranty and maintenance requirements.
Warranty shall be for a minimum of 5 years.
2.15.3 Application
Application methods and rates shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and
product data sheets particular to approved coating.
2.16 SITE FURNITURE

2.16.1 Tactile Indicator Studs
Supply and install individual tactile indicator studs.
Model: Latham TI Series LTAS Stainless Steel Sparkling Black
Supplied By: Latham Australia
Installation: Strictly in accordance with Australian standards.
2.16.2 Prefabricated Bench Seat
Supply and install, including footings, where indicated on site bench seats as supplied by:
Supplier: Street Furniture Australia
Model: PS7 or approved equivalent
Details: 1500mm; ‘Night Sky’ Frame; anodised aluminium battens; surface fixed
All footings, seat fixings and fixings to be vandal resistant, to manufacturer’s recommendation, to the approval
of the Superintendent.
2.17 STEEL HAND RAIL

2.17.1 General
Supply and install HDG CHS steel handrail to the locations as indicated on the drawings.
2.17.2 Steel
Steel handrail to be constructed using 42.4mm diameter (nominal) x 3.2mm wall thickness tube with T section
mullions ex. 150 UB 18 welded to tube and base plate. Fabricate as shown on the Drawings and to comply
with AS 1428 Part 1. Exposed welds are to be ground off smooth.
All works shall comply with the ‘Steelwork’ clause of this specification, including the requirement for shop
drawings.

27
2.17.3 Fixing
Use M6 stud type chemical anchors and stainless-steel acorn nuts fixing to limestone wall and M12 Loxin
masonry anchors with flush head fixing into concrete footing, as detailed.
2.17.4 Fastening
Provide fastenings, including bolts, anchors, screws, rivets, welds, and the like:
 Sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly;
 Of types appropriate to the work;
 In materials of mechanical strength and corrosion resistance at least equal to that of the lowest resistant
metal joined;
 Capable of transmitting the loads and stresses imposed; and
 Installed so as to prevent galvanic corrosion.
2.17.5 Galvanized Coating
Pickle prepared surface to AS1627.5 Part 5. Unless otherwise specified, zinc coatings shall be by the hot dip
method as follows:
 Ferrous articles generally: To AS/NZS4680.
 Ferrous wire: To AS/NZS4680, Section 4, Type A, unless otherwise specified.
 Steel sheet: To AS1397, coating class as specified for the particular item.
 Threaded fasteners: To AS1214-0983.
2.17.5.1 Galvanized Coating
method as follows:
 Ferrous wire: To AS/NZS4680, Section 4, Type A, unless otherwise specified.
 Steel sheet: To AS1397, coating class as specified for the particular item.
 Threaded fasteners: To AS1214-0983.
2.17.5.2 Powder Coating
Complete galvanize coating before powder coating.
All steel frames, horizontals and uprights to be powder coated using Dulux Alphatec Plus. Colour to be advised.
All powder coating application to comply with AS3715
2.17.6 Steel Grab Rail
2.17.6.1 General
Supply and install steel grab rail to all kerb ramps to the locations as indicated on the drawings. Grab rails to
comply with Main Roads WA specification and approval.
2.17.6.2 Steel
Steel grab rail to be constructed using 50mm diameter (nominal) x 3.2mm wall thickness tube. Fabricate as
shown on the Drawings and to comply with AS1428 Part 1. Exposed welds are to be ground off smooth.
2.17.6.3 Fixing
Set grab rail 400mm minimum into 200 x 200 x 400mm deep N20 concrete footings, minimum 50mm cover
as detailed.
2.17.6.4 Galvanized Coating
All steelwork are to be galvanized.
method as follows:

28
2.17.6.5 Finish
2.17.6.6 Reflective Tape and Powder Coat Finish
Reflective tape and powder coat finish to be installed as detailed on the drawings, to AS1743, colours and
locations as detailed.
All powder coating application to comply with AS3715
2.18 COMPOSITE DECKING

2.18.1 General
Supply and construct Composite Timber Decking or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc. to the
approval of the Superintendent to areas as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall allow for treated pine
and steel sub-frames, and all footings and fixings.
Product Type: Permatimber 146 Heavy Grain Decking or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to
the approval of the Superintendent.
Boards shall be 146 x 38mm composite Timber boards, Colour: WALNUT
As supplied by: M & B Sales – Perth
Sub-frame shall be 75 x 50 x 2.0mm treated pine sub-frame with 50 x 50 x 6mm HDG cleats bolted with M12
HDG bolts fixed to retaining wall and existing boardwalk at 575mm max centres with M12 HDG bolts as shown
on the drawings. All steel shall comply with the 'Steelwork' clause of this specification.
Footings shall be as shown on the drawings, comprising of 400 x 200 x 200mm concrete block reinforced and
core-filled piers on reinforced concrete footings as shown on the drawings.
All steel shall comply with the 'Steelwork' clause of this specification.
All timber shall comply with the 'Timberwork' clause of this specification.
All concrete shall comply with the 'Concrete Work - Structural' clause of this specification.
2.19 SYNTHETIC TURF

2.19.1 General
The construction of the artificial turf is to be undertaken by a suitably qualified artificial turf installation sub-
contractor. All synthetic turf, including any proposed substitutes, must be certified lead free.
2.19.2 Materials
Regal Grass ‘Exclusive Dark’
Type: 3/8” tufted synthetic grass
Roll Width: 4 metres
Roll Length: 25 metres
Fibre Producer: Royal TenCate
Fibre Type: ‘Xtreme’ 8 – threads monofilament in V-shape
Fibre Quality: 8x1500dTex
Fibre Length: 38mm (+/- 10%)
Fibre Colour: 6 Field green + 2 Lime green
Fibre Weight: 13 stitches/10cm – 1,450g/SqM (+/- 10%)
Backing: Double backing with fleece, UV stable, 272g/SqM
Coating: Black SBR-latex, 1000g/SqM
Permeability: 60 Litres/SqM/minute (drainage holes, without sand infill)
Total Weight: 2,722 g/SqM (+/- 10%)
Sand Infill 1: 16kg/SqM dried white silica sand, class 0.4 - 0.8mm
Sand Infill 2: 6 Kg/SqM brown ceramic sand, class 0.7 – 1.2mm
Connection: Connection by seam tape and special adhesive, as per supplier
2.19.3 Supplier / Installer
The synthetic turf shall be supplied and installed by: VIVA GRASS

29
2.19.4 Preparation for Synthetic Turf

Sub-grades in the areas to be artificially turfed shall first be brought to a smooth even grade and the pavement
sub grade shall be fully compacted with a mechanical vibrator to not less than Eight (8) blows per 300mm with
a Perth sand penetrometer as determined by AS1289.5.2.1.
Sub surface shall be compacted 60mm cracker dust fine grade blue metal, as per manufacturer’s
specifications.
Finished compacted sub-grade levels shall 30mm below adjacent surface level fixtures such as kerbs,
pavements and the like to ensure that synthetic turf finishes flush with these surfaces.
2.19.5 Installation of Synthetic Turf
Install synthetic turf to manufacturer’s specifications and requirements including supply and spreading sand
infill layers to surface of turf after installation.
2.20 TREE, SHRUB AND PLANT (GREEN STOCK) SUPPLY AND PLANTING
2.20.1 Green Stock Supply
All green stock supplied by the Contractor shall be supplied by suppliers approved by the Superintendent, to the
species, sizes and quality as specified in Specification and Plant Schedules.
2.20.2 Green Stock Supply and Report
2.20.2.1 Supply Report
Within two (2) weeks of acceptance of tender, furnish to the Superintendent a PRELIMINARY GREEN STOCK
SUPPLY REPORT covering all green stock under the works, including Principal supplied stock and stock from
specified suppliers, detailing the following:
 Container and Green Stock Size for each species;
 Number of each species;
 Nursery Supplier for each Species;
 Contact Details for each Nursery Supplier;
 Holding Location and Details for each Species; and
 Green Stock not currently available as specified.
Within four (4) weeks of acceptance of tender, furnish to the Superintendent a FINAL GREEN STOCK SUPPLY
REPORT, including all species substitutions for unavailable green stock as determined by the Superintendent.
The report shall detail the following:
 All Green Stock and Stock Substitution Species under the Works,
 Container and Green Stock Size for each species,
 Number of each Species,
 Nursery Supplier for each Species,
 Contact Details for each Nursery Supplier,
 Holding Location and Details for each Species,
2.20.2.2 Green Stock Supply Guarantee and Penalties
Failure to provide to the Superintendent, in writing, a Preliminary Green Stock Supply Report and a Final Green
Stock Supply report comprising all green stock species and sizes within the contract within the times specified
within this contract will incur a penalty on the Contractor of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000) per week per report
for every week, or part week for which the reports are not submitted, excluding Principal supplied stock and
stock from specified suppliers. The penalty shall be deducted from the value of the Contract.
The Final Plant Supply Report shall constitute a written guarantee by the Contractor that each species listed in
the report will be in good condition and available for use in the works, excluding Principal supplied stock and
stock from specified suppliers.
A penalty on the Contractor of Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000) shall apply for each species listed in the Final
Green Stock Supply Report approved by the Superintendent that is subsequently found by the Superintendent
to not be in good condition or not available for use in the works, excluding Principal supplied stock and stock
from specified suppliers. The penalty shall be deducted from the value of the Contract.

30
The full cost of the supply and planting of all replacement species for plants that are subsequently found by the
Superintendent to not be in good condition or not available for use in the works shall be borne by the
Contractor, excluding Principal supplied stock and stock from specified suppliers. The Superintendent shall
determine the species and stock to be used for substitution in the works.
2.20.2.3 Green Stock Quality
All green stock shall:
 be true to species, subspecies and variety;
 be vigorous and healthy;
 be of good form consistent with species and variety;
 be well established in the plant container specified including having a large and healthy root system that
occupies the full extent of the container while showing no evidence of restriction or having been restricted
or damaged at any time during production;
 not be soft or produced using forced growing techniques;
 be hardened off;
 be fully self supporting without staking or guying;
 be free from disease, insect pests and other pathogens and;
 be free from damage from staking, tying or any other horticultural techniques used throughout
production.
The Superintendent will reject any green stock which does not meet the required quality.
2.20.2.4 Green Stock Labelling
Label at least one specimen of each species or variety with a durable, readable tag.
2.20.2.5 Green Stock Storage on Site

Wherever possible, green stock shall be planted immediately after delivery to the site. If this is not possible,
keep them in good condition by appropriate storage methods, or as may be directed. Prevent theft, drying out
or damage from any cause including frost, wind, sun, rain, animals and the like. Provide an on-site nursery for
holding green stock on site for more than 48 hours, of sufficient size, with provision for watering.
2.20.3 Planting Generally
2.20.3.1 Setting Out of Works
Where underground services, manholes, cable pits, fire hydrants, lamp standards, retaining walls, kerbing,
roads, paving and other obstructions occur, plant clear of such service and obstructions and protect services
and obstructions from damage by machines and equipment.
2.20.3.2 Planting Generally
Remove all plants from their containers, including all biodegradable containers and growing tubes, in such a
manner as to do as little disturbance as possible to the roots. Where necessary, tease out root-balls before
planting.
Place trees, shrubs and plants in holes in an up-right position and backfill level with top of root-ball. Compact
soil by hand watering.
2.20.3.3 Mass Planting Areas
Excavate a hole for each plant large enough to provide not less than 150mm all round the root system of the
plant, or as shown on the Drawings.
2.20.3.4 Individual Planting in Grassed Areas
Excavate a hole to the depth of the root ball and 600mm wider than plant containers of 5 Litre and over, or to
depth of the root ball and 450mm wider than the plant container for pots small than 5 Litre, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings. Break up the base of the hole to a depth of 100mm, and loosen compacted sides of
the hole, as necessary to prevent confinement of root growth to the hole.
2.20.3.5 Plant Locations
Do not vary the plant locations from those shown on the Drawings unless otherwise directed. If it appears
necessary to vary the location and/or spacing to avoid service lines, or to cover the area uniformly, or for
similar reasons, apply for directions.

31
2.20.3.6 Planting Conditions

Do not plant in unsuitable weather conditions such as extreme heat, cold, wind or rain. Suspend excavation in
other than sandy soils when the soil is wet, or during frost periods.
2.20.3.7 Depth of Planting
When the plant is in its final position in its hole or bed the top soil level of the plant root-ball shall be level with
the finished surface of the soil surrounding the hole or bed. Test the depth by measuring the sides of
containers. If back filling is required to correct the depth, use soil as specified.
2.20.3.8 Plant Placement
When the hole of bed appears to be of correct size and not before, remove the plant from the container with
minimum disturbance to the root-ball, and place it in its final position, in the center of the hole and plumb.
2.20.3.9 Fertilizer to Non Australian (Exotic) Plants
At time of back filling Exotic plants, all plants are to receive approved propriety item ‘Eight to Nine Month Slow
Release All Purpose Fertilizer’ equal or equivalent to “Osmocote Pro” NPK 19-9-10+2MgO+TE
A sample of the fertilizer is required for approval by the Superintendent prior to commencement of works on
site.
Fertilizer to be applied in backfill (below ground) during planting at the manufacturers recommended rate for
the relative plant size, and at a minimum rate as follows:
 200 to 100 Litre pot size plants to have thirty grams;
 45 Litre pot size plants to have twenty grams;
 25 to 15 Litre pot size plants to have twenty grams;
 200 to 170mm pot size plants to have ten grams;
 150 to 130mm pot size plants to have five grams; and
 Tube pot size plants to have five grams.
2.20.3.10 Fertilizer to Australian Native Plants
At time of back filling Australian native plants, all plants are to receive approved propriety item ‘Eight to None
Month Slow Release Fertilizer’ equal or equivalent to “Macracote Grey” NPK 8-1-8+TE.
A sample of the fertilizer is required for approval by the Superintendent prior to commencement of works on
site.
Fertilizer to be applied in backfill (below ground) during planting at the manufacturers recommended rate for
the relative plant size, and at a minimum rate as follows:
 200 to 100 Litre pot size plants to have thirty grams;
 45 Litre pot size plants to have twenty grams;
 200 to 170mm pot size plants to have ten grams;
 150 to 130mm pot size plants to have five grams; and
 Tube pot size plants to have five grams.
2.20.3.11 Back Filling to Plants
Backfill with soil as specified. Lightly tamp down the soil and water to eliminate air pockets.
2.20.3.12 Watering Basins
Construct a shallow watering basin around the base of each individually planted tree of 13 Litre pot size and
above in garden bed and turf grass areas consisting of a raised ring of soil of minimum diameter of 1200mm
capable of holding a minimum of 10 litres of water. Supply and place 75mm mulch as specified to the extent of
each watering basin to a minimum diameter 1200mm and 200mm from tree trunks.
2.20.3.13 Mulching
Mulch to the full extent all areas, and to the depth as indicated on the drawings and as specified.
All plant stems shall be kept free from mulch.

32
Mulch shall not be placed within 100mm of all plant stems for less than 13 litre pot sized stock, and shall not
be placed within 200mm of all plant stems for 13 litre pot size and greater.
2.20.3.14 Staking and Tying
Protect each tree of pot size 200, 100, 45 and 15 Litre with Three (3) 50 x 50 x 2500mm pointed hardwood
stakes.
All Stakes shall be painted Blackusing two coats of Dulux Timber colour Low Sheen Acrylic. Painting of stakes is
to be carried out no less than 48 hours prior to installation to ensure that paint on all stakes is dry prior to
installation
Stakes shall be set out in an equal triangulated configuration, each 600mm from the trunk and at the extent of
much bed in turf grass areas. Do not pierce root ball.
All stakes shall be set 700mm into the ground and individually cut to length to extend 100mm only above
finished tree tie fixing location.
All ties shall be 50mm wide Natural Hessian to the approval of the Superintendent.
Ties are to be located at no more than 2/3 of the tree height from ground and sufficient to provide additional
support during adverse prevailing wind conditions only.
All ties shall be placed in a loose figure of eight around stake and stem to provide adequate protection from
damage without compromising natural plant growth, stabled to skakes.
2.20.3.15 Watering
At time of planting provide by hand watering a minimum of 10 litres of water to each plant. Repeat watering to
each plant with 10 litres of water on each alternate day up to Practical Completion.
Watering of plants by sole reliance on the irrigation system will not be accepted until the irrigation system is
practically complete or, unless approved in writing by the Superintendent.
2.20.4 Tree Planting
2.20.4.1 Planting
Remove tree bag or container carefully to prevent root damage. Edges of the root ball to be ‘ruffled’ to remove
any root circling / girdling that may be occurring.
Backfill with improved soil media to occur in 100-150mm ‘lifts’ with firming of the back-fill occurring around the
root ball of the tree after every lift.
Watering shall occur at the same time as the planting and firming.
Construction a ‘bund’ at the edge of the compost / mulch zone to aid in water retention where landscape
surrounds allow.
After planting conditioned site soil shall finish 120mm below adjacent kerbing, paving and turf areas.
2.20.4.2 Compost
Directly after plating apply 15mm compost to the full extent of the root ball and conditioned soil mix and gently
cultivate into the top 100mm to provide a homogeneous mix.
Compost shall be:
 C-Wise ‘Horticulture’.
Soil conditioner shall comply with AS4454Composts, Soil Conditioners and Mulches.
2.20.4.3 Humate
At time of compost application apply a Humate to the full extent of the rootball and conditioned soil mix.
Humate shall be
 Eco-Growth’s Humus 400.
Apply at the rate of 50g / square metre.
2.20.5 Clean Up
On completion of planting ensure that all plants are in first class, presentable condition by removing dead,
damaged and unhealthy branches and trimming where necessary to result in balanced growth typical of their
normal form. After inspection by the Superintendent and on Practical Completion, remove labels from plants.

33
2.21 MULCH – BOUTIQUE

2.21.1 General
Supply and apply ‘Boutique’ to all areas as designated on the drawings. Mulch shall be applied to a depth,
after tamping down, of 75mm to the approval of the Superintendent.
Mulch shall be equivalent to ‘Boutique Mulch’ as supplied by Eclipse Soils. Mulch shall be applied:
 To the full extent of all areas indicated ‘Garden Bed Areas’ on the drawings;
 To the full extent of each individual tree watering basin in turf areas to a minimum diameter of 1000mm;
 To each individual in-fill plant in re-vegetation areas to a minimum diameter of 300mm; and
 To the full extent of areas indicated ‘Mulch Only Areas’.
Mulch is to be completely free of all noxious weeds, seeds and fungus, insect pests and other deleterious
material. A sample of the mulch will be required for approval by the Superintendent prior to commencement of
works on site.
Minor beds preparation including raking and removal of rubbish to produce an even and smooth surface at a
constant depth of 75mm below finished surface of mulch will be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor.
All plant stems shall be kept free from mulch.
Mulch shall not be placed within 100mm of all plant stems for less than 13 litre pot sized stock, and shall not
be placed within 100-200mm of all plant stems for 13 litre pot size and greater.
The mulch will be consolidated, to produce smooth and even grades, finishing 10mm below surrounding hard
surfaces.
2.21.2 Mulch Standards
Soil conditioner shall comply with AS4454 Composts, Soil Conditioners and Mulches.
2.22 TURF GRASSING AND ESTABLISHMENT

2.22.1 Selected Grass Species
Grass species shall be:
 Kikuyu (Pennisetum clandestinum) turf rolls.
Obtain specified grass species from a specialist grower of cultivated turf. The turf shall be sourced from a turf
farm and shall not be sourced from any active or passive area such as from a council park, school, golf course
or other non specialist turf farm areas.
The turf shall:
 be certified as from an area in the turf farm that has either been newly established in the previous twelve
months or which has been harvested in the previous twelve months;
 be free draining with total organic fines in the turf roll no greater than 5mm in depth;
 be certified by a ASPAC accredited laboratory that it is Sting Nematode and Phytopthora free. Contractor
shall also provide a declaration from the supplier that the turf has not been treated with a Nematicide for
the 12 months prior to testing.
 be free of all deleterious material including plastic reinforcing sod netting;
 be in rolls with clean cut edges and square ends;
 be in rolls all of the same dimensions (length, width and thickness);
 have a roll depth of thatch not exceeding 10mm;
 have the thickness of the soil portion of the roll not exceeding 15mm and be uniform over the entire roll;
and
 have a uniform deep green foliage colour and not be discoloured.
Furnish a warranty from the grower that the grass is true to species and free from other grasses, weeds,
fungus, inspect pests and other deleterious matter.
2.22.2 Installation
2.22.2.1 Minor Preparation
Remove all rubbish, roots and stones greater than 10mm in diameter to a depth of 300mm and grade to true
and even grades to the levels as indicated on the drawings or, grade out all depressions and humps less than
150mm from the general grade where contour or spot levels are not indicated.

34
All surfaces prepared for grassing to finish flush with adjoining kerbs to roads, parking and paved areas, and
with foot pavements, terraces, verandas, mowing strips, manholes, pit and the like.
Where plumbing connector traps and rainwater relief overflows occur, finish ground level 75mm below overflow
level.
All grading works shall be undertaken by hand work or by machine as is appropriate to the work however all
grading and earthworks within a distance of 600mm radius of sprinklers or other fixed reticulation apparatus
shall be hand worked to prevent damage to equipment.
Finish shall be smooth rolled, consolidated and smudge boarded to obtain a perfectly even, well consolidated
surface.
No irregularities, depressions, hollows or abrupt changes in grades or falls will be accepted.
The cost of such minor preparation work shall be included in the unit rate per square metre tender price and no
extras will be allowed for such preparation.
Before commencing work, inspect the site with the Superintendent to determine that grading can be achieved
without providing additional filling sand from off-site sources.
If the Superintendent determines that additional filling sand is required, submit a written quotation which will
be the subject of a variation to the contract as per the unit rate schedules.
2.22.2.2 Fertilizing
Prior to turf laying supply and spread to the full extent of area to be turfed pelletised organic fertilizer equal or
equivalent to “Dynamic Lifter” at the rate of 100 grams per square meter to the approval of the
Superintendent.
2.22.2.3 Watering
Supply all equipment necessary to adequately water the site during the Construction period.
Before commencing planting, ensure adequate watering services and equipment are available and properly
functioning.
Areas to be planted shall first be watered to a depth of 100mm and the planting shall be carried out
immediately after watering.
Throughout the contract up to Practical Completion, watering shall be properly undertaken, either by hand or
irrigation system to keep the planted area moist to a depth of 100mm at not more than two (2) day intervals
excepting Saturdays, Sundays and Public Holidays unless otherwise directed by the Superintendent.
Any faults or defects to the watering service and equipment during the construction period shall be immediately
reported to the Superintendent.
2.22.2.4 Turf Laying
Lay the turf along the land contours with staggered, close butted joints, and so that the finished turf surface is
flush with adjacent finished surfaces of paving and the like. As soon as practicable after laying, roll the turf
with a roller weighting not more than 90 kg/m of width or plate compactor. On slopes too steep for rolling,
lightly tamp with turf into place.
2.22.2.5 Making Good
Lift failed turf and relay with new turf. Turf of poor quality will be rejected.
2.22.2.6 Top Dressing
Undertake top dressing as required to produce a true and even surface to the full extent of turf areas free of
humps, hollows and depressions. Should top dressing be required, undertake when the turf is established,
mow closely, remove cuttings and lightly top dress to a depth of 10mm with approved quality top dressing
sand. Rub the dressing well into the joins and correct any unevenness in the turf surface.
2.22.3 Turf Establishment
2.22.3.1 General
All turf grassing shall be fully established prior to granting of Practical Completion of turf grassing.
Undertake all establishment requirements including watering, fertilizing and mowing as specified to all newly
grassed areas for the duration of the mowing and fertilizing programme specified and until such time as the
turf grass is fully established.
For turf laid between the months of November to May inclusive a minimum of 6 weeks shall be allowed for full
establishment. For turf laid between the months of June to October inclusive a minimum of 12 weeks shall be
allowed for full establishment.
Commencement of turf grassing consolidation will be subject to the successful establishment of turf grassing
as solely determined by the Superintendent.

35
2.22.3.2 Watering
Throughout the turf establishment period, ensure watering shall be properly undertaken, either by hand or
irrigation system to keep the planted area moist to a depth of 100mm at not more than two (2) day intervals
excepting Saturdays, Sundays and Public Holidays unless otherwise directed by the Superintendent.
Any faults or defects to the watering service and equipment shall be immediately reported to the
Superintendent.
2.22.3.3 Fertilizing (1st stage)
One week after laying turf, apply to the whole area a fertilizer mixed in the proportion of:
 Two parts AGRAN 34, one part Superphosphate No. 1 and,
 One part of MURIATE of Potash or such other lawn starter fertilizer as may be approved.
Evenly spread fertilizer at the rate of 50 grams/square metre and immediately thoroughly water in.
Fertilizing and watering shall be inspected by the Superintendent during each operation.
Give the Superintendent two (2) working days notice before the commencing of fertilizing and watering.
2.22.3.4 Fertilizing (programme)
(2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th Applications)
Apply a total of FIVE fertilizer applications to grassed areas after initial fertilizing.
Each application shall be at a maximum of four (4) and a minimum of three (3) weeks after initial fertilizing.
Each application is to be at the following rate:
 50 grams/sq. metre of baileys ‘Brilliance’ NPK with trace elements granulated fertilizer immediately
thoroughly watered in.
Give the Superintendent two (2) working days notice before the commencement of each fertilizing and watering
for site inspection.
2.22.3.5 Sample of Fertilizers
Submit to the Superintendent on request, sample of fertilizers used in the works.
The samples may be subjected to analysis. Fertilizer not in accordance with the Specification may be rejected.
Areas found to be not in accordance with the Specification shall be given an additional application of fertilizer
in accordance with the Specification at their own expense.
2.22.3.6 Mowing
All newly grassed areas are to receive six mowing’s using a reel mower or an approved equivalent. When grass
growth has reached 75mm a first light cut shall be made carefully avoiding damage to new turf. Cutting shall
not remove more than 50% of growth and cuttings shall be caught and removed from the site.
Each additional cut (five in total) shall be made when turf has again reached 75mm. Repair all failed turf after
mowing. Cuttings shall not remove more than 50% of growth and all cuttings shall be caught and removed from
the site.
2.22.3.7 Weed, Insect and Fungus Control
The control and eradication of all weed growth, insect and fungus infestations shall be the total responsibility of
the Contractor. During the establishment period all areas shall be managed to ensure minimal weed growth
either by spraying or manual removal at all times until Practical Completion. Where required, spray with
insecticide, herbicide or fungicide in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, to all Health
Department and other statutory requirements. Submit proposal for approval prior to starting this work.
2.22.3.8 Rolling and Surface Finish
After the completion of second mowing the newly grassed areas shall be rolled with a heavy roller and finished
to produce true and even grades and falls free of all wheel marks and ruts, waves, depressions and other
irregularities. Maximum weight of roller is to be 500 kilograms.
2.22.3.9 Programme Inspections
Give the Superintendent not less than two (2) working days notice before completing each stage so that he may
inspect the work.
Payment will only be made upon a satisfactory grass growth pattern being in evidence with sward in a healthy
and vigorous condition at the initial inspection and continuing similar healthy growth being evident. Make
repairs to each stage as are necessary to maintain full cover to the area.

36
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all remedial works, including patching, to ensure a 100% full cover
of grass is maintained at all times.
2.22.4 Practical Completion
Practical Completion and commencement of Consolidation will be granted by the Superintendent, upon sole
determination by the Superintendent that the turf establishment programme is fully complete and that the turf
grassing is fully established.
2.23 IRRIGATION – DESIGN AND CONSTRUCT

2.23.1 Scope
Design, supply and install an effective fully-automatic irrigation system to all irrigated landscape areas serviced
from the existing bore supply system. The contractor shall maintain irrigation to the existing site being retained
whilst this project is being constructed.
Prior to the irrigation design being prepared an updated flow and pressure test must be undertaken on site and
the irrigation designed accordingly to ensure a fully operational system.
2.23.2 Materials and Works
Allow for all materials and works including but not limited to the following:
 Pipes, fittings and accessories including controllers;
 Connection to water supply;
 Connection to power supply;
 Use for scheme systems]Back flow prevention device to gate valve;
2.23.3 Irrigation Requirements
Include the following specific requirements in the design of the irrigation system:
 TREES: Irrigation Type: 1 No. flood bubbler.
 TREES IN PERMEABLE PAVING: Install 2 No x 2L/minute Hunter 'Root Zone Watering Systems'
(RZWS-18-50-R) to each tree in permeable pavements.
 GARDEN BEDS: Irrigation Type: Pop-up sprays to beds adjacent to paving and grass areas and
fixed-head sprinklers of size to suit the garden bed areas.
 LAWN AREAS: Irrigation Type: Pop-up sprays of size to suit the lawn areas.
Related Work
Co-ordinate and co-operate with the following trades:
 building contractors;
 Services installation contractors; and
 landscape contractors.
2.23.4 Quality Assurance
Contractor's Qualifications: Minimum five years experience in similar work as required by the Specification.
Submit evidence of completed similar work with contact names and telephone numbers.
2.23.5 References
 AS1432-2004 Copper tubes for plumbing, gas fitting & drainage application;
 AS/NZS1477:2006 Unplasticised PVC (UPVC) pipes and fittings for pressure applications
Parts 1,2,4 and 6; and
 AS/NZS2032:2006 Code of practice for installation of UPVC pipe systems.
2.23.6 Submissions
Submit for approval full irrigation drawings clearly showing all materials and their locations, all irrigation
sleeves and penetrations, hydraulic calculations, i.e. flow rates required by the design and calculations of
pressure requirements, sprinkler operating pressures, loss through mainline, loss through lateral line, loss
through back flow preventer, loss through master valve, loss through sectional valve, loss through filter, loss
through pressure regulator, rise to highest point, etc. Submit samples of each component for approval of the
Superintendent before ordering material.

37
2.23.7 Project Conditions

Inspect drawings and visit site. Check aspects of required work and refer any discrepancy to the
Superintendent for direction.
2.23.8 Warranty and Maintenance
Maintain the system against faulty workmanship and materials for twelve (12) months after date of Practical
Completion.
Replace any faulty component and restore to full operation at no cost to the principal.
2.23.9 Materials
UNDERGROUND PIPES: All under ground PVC piping, installed down stream of the master solenoid valve, shall
be minimum class 9 PVC manufactured to AS/NZS1477:2006.1. Should PVC piping be used upstream of the
master solenoid valve, this shall be minimum class 18
Each pipe to be marked with AS/NZS1477:2006
PIPE JOINTING: Solvent cements and cleaners shall be approved manufacture and shall be used in
accordance with the manufactures recommendations. Cleaners must be coloured. Joints over 65mm dia.
must be rubber ringed.
PVC FITTINGS: All PVC fittings for the installation shall be manufactured to AS/NZS1477:2006.2 and shall be
compatible with PVC pipe produced in accordance with the Standard.
GATE VALVES: One to each supply line of size to suit end of main supply line.
SPRINKLER RISERS: Sprinklers shall be spring retractable, 6” pop up types preferably from the Toro, Rainbird
or H.I.T. range. Risers may either be threaded polythene or polythene "funny pipe".
SPRINKLER HEADS: Compatible with delivery pressure of the main supply
BUBBLERS TO TREES IN PERMEABLE PAVING: Install 2 No x 2L/minute Hunter 'Root Zone Watering Systems'
(RZWS-18-50-R) to each tree in permeable pavements. RZWS shall be connected to lateral pipe work with an
articulated or flexible riser, minimum of 500mm in length. Install Hunter 'Filter Fabric Sleeve' (#RZWS-Sleeve)
to each RZWS unit. Locking grated cap to RZWS to finish flush with finished permeable pavement level.
FLOOD BUBBLERS: Installed to each tree species
SPRAY HEADS: Compatible with delivery pressure of the main supply
SOLENOID CONTROL VALVES: Control valves shall be Bermad 200 series 24V A.C. solenoid valves, with flow
control facilities, installed in adequately sized rectangular valve boxes. Solenoid valves which control dripper
stations shall be of the pressure regulating type, or have separate pressure regulators.
MASTER SOLENOID VALVE: The master valve shall be a ‘Watermark’ approved 25mm 24V A.C solenoid valve
approved by the Water Authority of Western Australia for this application.
SOLENOID CONTROL WIRES: Active control cables shall be a minimum of 1.5mm 5 multi-strand building wire,
with the common wire being a minimum size of 2.5mm. Size the cable with the minimum sizes in mind, to
ensure that voltage drop is kept to a minimum, and that the operation of the solenoid valves is not affected.
Adequate spare wires must be installed to strategic locations to allow for the future extensions to the system.
LOCKABLE PROTECTIVE BOXES: One to each timer and gate valve.
AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER: Supply and install an automatic irrigation controller with the following minimum
features:
 Solid state operation;
 Multi-programme;
 Repeat cycle;
 Minimum eight (8) hours per station;
 Fourteen (14) day calendar;
 Rain switch;
 Manual, semi-auto and automatic operation;
 Transformer and back-up batteries; and
 Located within a lockable, hot dipped galvanized and powder coated weatherproof cabinet.

38
2.23.10 Examination
Inspect site and compare conditions to those provided in specification and drawings. Notify Superintendent of
any discrepancy for direction.
Commencement of works signifies full acceptance on behalf of the contractor of all existing site conditions.
2.23.11 Preparation
Co-ordinate with other trades responsible for any site preparation or works as required prior to making final
preparation before installation of materials.
2.23.12 Trenches and Excavations
Prior to excavation of trenches, obtain approval of pipe runs. Minor adjustment in the system's layout will be
permitted to clear existing underground obstructions. Repair costs to services damaged are the responsibility
of the Contractor performing this work.
Excavate mainline trenches to a depth so as to allow a minimum of 400mm cover from the top of the pipe to
the ground surface. Excavate trenches for lateral spray lines to a depth so as to allow a minimum of 300mm
cover from the top of the pipe to the ground surface. Excavate trenches to sufficient width to permit proper
handling and installation of the pipe and fittings.
Obtain approval prior to back filling trenches. Pipes are to be firmly and evenly supported with clean backfill
material free of rubble, stones and rocks. Where rock and stone is incurred during the excavation works, back
fill material over the pipe to be clean, white packing sand free of organic matter. Place sand layer 75mm
depth from the top of the pipe.
Place trench backfill material in at least two equal layers. Each layer to be wheel-rolled with a backhoe or
other approved compaction equipment and crown completed backfill 30mm higher than the surrounding
surface to allow further consolidation.
Where solid rock is encountered in trench excavation, request an inspection of the open trench prior to further
trench excavation in that area. Rock are to be measured in the solid jointly by representatives of the Contractor
and the Superintendent within the confines of the excavation and within the limits shown on the drawings or
specified prior to back filling. No allowance will be made for over break.
The Contractor is responsible for the erection of all necessary barriers and safety signs to make trench work
safe from public pedestrian entry. Under no circumstances are trenches to remain either open or partially
open over night.
2.23.13 Installing Pipes
Install sprinkler lines or mains with a minimum cover as specified above. Interior of pipes are to be kept free
from dirt and debris. Open ends of pipe to be closed by approved means during the laying process.
Use red priming fluid and blue dyed solvent cement to joints. Ensure that excess solvent is carefully wiped free
of joints and keep joints dry for 24 hours minimum to allow solvent cement to dry. Turn on valves to each
station to flush lines out with water before fitting spray heads.
Ensure that no pipe lengths will carry water at greater than 1.5 metres/second velocity.
2.23.14 Under Road Boring, Sleeve Pipes and Thrust Boring
Utilize under road or pavement boring techniques to facilitate road crossings which may be required for the
placement of irrigation mainlines and control cabling under such infrastructure. All road crossings shall be
accomplished utilizing an appropriately sized PVC sleeve for the placement of mainlines and/or control
cables. Where control cables are to be installed within the same PVC sleeve as irrigation mainlines, install the
cables within an appropriate size PVC low density electrical conduit.
PVC along entire width of pavement. Install top of PVC sleeve pipe 400mm below existing pavement level.
2.23.15 Valves
Inform Superintendent of any proposed change made in supply and installation of Master Valve. Allow for
connection of pipe work tees and junction elbows from the existing pipe work out of the valve.
2.23.16 Sprinkler Risers
Install sprinklers on screwed 15mm schedule 80 PVC articulated risers. Set spray heads level with topsoil or at
a level determined by the Superintendent.
Securely brace the riser against vibration where the sprinkler head is in operation.
Flush out mains, laterals and risers with water before fitting sprinkler heads to risers.

39
2.23.17 Sprinkler Heads

Set sprinkler heads according to manufactures specification. Set half circle sprinklers flush to edge of grass
and garden or paving and grass or kerb.
Set sprinkler heads perpendicular to finished surfaces. Set heads at grade on shrub beds.
Discharge of water from sprinkler heads to be compatible to the pipe layout and delivery pressure of the main.
Refer to the Schedule which lists valve sprinkler types. Make adjustments for throw of individual spray heads
prior to commissioning of service and Practical Completion. Adjust sprinklers to give complete even coverage
at completion of installation. Install the spray heads as nominated on the Schedule.
2.23.18 Commissioning
General
The contractor shall be responsible for the testing and satisfactory performance of the complete irrigation
system.
Give 48 hours notice to the Superintendent prior to testing.
Commissioning Procedure
A. Static Tests
Prior to commissioning ensure valve stations close satisfactorily.
Pipe work and fittings to be tested to the satisfaction of the Superintendent to ensure there are no
water leaks in the system.
B. Upon completion of the above static tests in the presence of the Superintendent commission the
system in accordance with the following procedure:
1. Open each valve to test sprinkler operation. During this procedure only one valve station is to
be open at any one time.
2. Test sprinkler operation by continuous operation for a minimum of 15 minutes for each valve.
C. Upon satisfactory completion of the above procedures the complete system is to be continuously
operated for a minimum of one hour.
2.23.19 ‘As Constructed’ Irrigation Records.
Prior to Date of Practical Completion the Contractor shall supply to the Superintendent:
 one (1) set of Original Drawing size paper drawings;
 one (1) set of A3 size paper drawings;
 one (1) set of digital AutoCAD drawings on CD;
 one (1) set of digital PDF drawing on CD:
 three (3) sets of paper warranties and manuals; and
 one (1) set of digital warranties and manuals on CD.
Drawing/s to clearly show pipe sizes, valve types and locations, fittings and control cable routes. Clearly and
accurately annotate dimensions of pipes.
The ‘as constructed’ drawings shall be supplied to the Superintendent in the following formats:
 Fully comply with O Spec drawing protocols as approved by the Superintendent;
Each separate service shall be on a separate drawing layer. Service invert level or depth of cover information
shall be provided on a service by service basis on each drawing layer with point numbering reference.
The ‘as constructed’ drawings shall include grid co-ordinates to the same system as that used the Principals
Surveyor and to Perth Coastal Grid.
Location of existing services which are exposed or located during trenching operations shall be shown on the
‘as constructed’ drawings and the type of service noted.
If the Contractor utilises drawing files provided for construction purposes, to prepare ‘as constructed’ records,
then all notes and instructions shown on the drawings that refer to the scope of work to be undertaken shall be
substituted with appropriate, accurate ‘as constructed’ information. As a reference for verification by the
Superintendent’s representative of the changes that have occurred on site, the Contractor shall provide on a
single separate drawing layer, the scope of work drawings issued at the commencement of the Contract.

40
This shall be represented by AutoCAD.

Layer = Orig or similar
Linetype = Bylayer
Colour = 8 (grey)
Pen width = 0.18
Where more than two (2) pipes or services exist in a common trench, trench cross sections shall be provided
showing the accurate position, type and depth of each service. Where sprinkler head numbers or nozzle
configurations have changed during construction, the revised valve flows will be calculated by the Irrigation
Sub-Contractor and will be shown on the ‘As Constructed’ drawing.
The drawings shall show accurate locations of sizes of pipe work, road crossings, valves, sprinklers, cables,
controllers, main connections and other components relevant to the irrigation system.
Grid co-ordinates will be provided and shown in tabular form on the drawing, for the following:
 Mainline staring and finishing points.
 Changes in direction of mainline and sub-main.
 Isolating valves.
 Solenoid valves.
 Sub-main start and finish points.
 Lateral start and finish points.
 Road crossings.
Solenoid wire colour or wire code numbers for each valve shall be shown on the drawing.
The form of presentation shall be acceptable to the Superintendent. As a minimum requirement, the symbols
used shall be the same as those used on the drawing issued for construction.
All measurements shall be in metres to the first decimal point.
The Irrigation Sub-Contractors shall submit a draft paper copy of the ‘As Constructed’ drawing for approval by
the Superintendent, before finalizing the drawings.
The drawings shall show, at least the same level of site details as the construction drawings. Where landscape
features (eg. pavements, garden beds) have changed from those shown on the construction drawing, the
Irrigation Sub-Contractor shall indicate these changes on the drawing with a notation such as “pavement
location shown not accurate”.
Where multiple valves and fittings are installed in close proximity to each other, symbols can be repositioned
schematically on the drawings for clarity and an enlarged installation detail drawn, showing installation detail
and measurements between valves and fittings. Surveyed co-ordinates are to be provided for each item in this
instance.
The provision of accurate ‘as constructed’ information forms an important component of this Contract and
back-filling of services without ‘as constructed’ details will not be permitted. Failure to comply with the ‘as
constructed’ requirements of the Contract will result in the Contractor being required to expose services, survey
as stated and reinstate trenches and all other works, at the Contractors cost.
2.23.20 Clean Site
Upon completion of the works, the site shall be left in a tidy condition, free from rubbish and surplus excavated
materials to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.
2.23.21 Completion
Complete all works in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the
Superintendent.
2.24 PRACTICAL COMPLETION

2.24.1 General
Reference is made to the General Conditions of Contract, definition of Practical Completion.
Give the Superintendent three (3) working days notice that the works are complete and that the works are
ready for issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion and commencement of Consolidation.

41
Prior to Date of Practical Completion the Contractor shall supply to the Superintendent one A1 paper (or original
drawing) size and one digital (CD) copy of the as constructed drawings clearly showing all works as executed
and covered by the contract, including all warranties and manuals.
The supply of approved as executed drawings, warranties and manuals forms part of the works and shall be a
condition precedent to the Superintendents acceptance of Practical Completion.
Practical Completion of Turf Grassing will be granted by the Superintendent upon completion of the turf
grassing establishment programme and when the turf grass is fully established as solely determined by the
Superintendent.
2.25 CONSOLIDATION
2.25.1 General
Consolidation shall mean the continuing care and consolidation of the works by accepted horticultural and
landscape maintenance practices, as well as rectifying any defects that become apparent in the works.
The consolidation period for Hard Landscape and Planting works shall commence from the Date of Practical
Completion and be for a period of Three (3) calendar months.
The consolidation period for Turf Grassing shall commence from the Date of Practical Completion of Turf
Grassing (at completion of turf establishment programme to the sole discretion of the Superintendent) and be
for a period of Three (3) calendar months.
Works to be consolidated include all the works under the contract including, but not limited to:
 Inspection and Reporting;
 Hard Landscape Works Consolidation;
 Soft Landscape Works Consolidation;
 Irrigation System Operation (where irrigation is within the landscape contract);
 Rubbish Removal; and
 Rectification of Defects, Vandalism and Theft.
2.25.2 Consolidation Commencement
Works shall only be placed in consolidation when a certificate of practical completion has been issued for the
full or separable portion of the works as stated in the contract.
2.25.3 Inspection and Reporting
2.25.3.1 Weekly Inspection
The Contractor shall inspect the full works at a minimum on a weekly basis and immediately report to the
Superintendent any activities and conditions that in any way adversely affect the works including all damage
and theft.
2.25.3.2 Weekly Consolidation Reporting
Throughout the consolidation period the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Superintendent on a
weekly basis a consolidation report covering the following:
 Date and time of weekly inspections;
 Condition of pavements and hard landscape elements;
 Condition of garden structures, furniture and fixtures (including lighting where lighting is within the
landscape contract);
 Exercise Elements and Surfaces Maintenance;
 Condition of irrigation;
 Condition of garden beds and turf grassing;
 Progress of establishment of green stock and turf grassing;
 Damage or disruption by others throughout the works, including sand drift from adjacent sites;
 Activities that have been completed throughout the month,
 Activities planned for the month ahead, and
 Upcoming capital outlays required to consolidate the works.

42
Payment of claims for consolidation shall be dependent upon the submission and approval by the
Superintendent of compliant consolidation reports.
2.25.4 Hard Landscape Works Consolidation
2.25.4.1 General
Maintain all hard landscape works in a clean, neat and tidy condition for the full extent of the consolidation
period. All defects shall be rectified at the Contractor’s expense within one (1) week of detection.
Notify the Superintendent of any hard works or street furniture that have been stolen or damaged and await
instructions from the Superintendent prior to repair or replacement..
2.25.5 Soft Landscape Works
2.25.5.1 General
The consolidation programme shall include, but not be limited to the following items where and as required:
 Turf Grassing Maintenance; and
 Mass Planting Area Maintenance.
2.25.5.2 Turf Grass Maintenance
Maintain turf grassing in a healthy, vigorous condition, free of weeds and pest and mown as required to
maintain optimal health and suit seasonal requirements.
Undertake all testing and control as required to identify and control all pests and disease including Pythium
root rot.
2.25.5.3 Weed Control
Maintain site and fence lines free of weeds and invasive plants. Eliminate all weed growth to landscaped areas
using approved non-residual herbicide such as “Roundup”. Control weeds growing in watering basins by means
of suitable selective herbicide such as ‘Roundup’.
2.25.5.4 Vermin, Pest and Disease Control
The Contractor shall maintain all plants free from pests, disease and attack and damage by vermin by
approved methods at the Contractors expense.
Undertake all testing and control as required to identify and control all pests, disease and vermin including
Phytophthora root rot.
Where chemicals are required preference will be given to biological control and low toxicity systemic products.
Mechanical applicators will be precisely calibrated and care taken when applying to minimize over spray.
Chemicals used in plant maintenance shall be applied in accordance with all Health Department Regulations
and relevant approved Safety Data Sheets for each chemical.
2.25.5.5 Re-Planting
Replace weekly all dead and dying plants, including plants damaged by vermin at the Contractor’s expense.
On a weekly basis notify the Superintendent of the quantity and type of plants that have been stolen or
damaged through vandalism and await instructions from the Superintendent prior to replacement.
2.25.5.6 Pruning
Prune all dead wood or foliage from plants as required each week.
2.25.6 Watering - Irrigated
Provide sufficient irrigation to maintain all plants in a healthy growing condition in accordance with the
Irrigation Operation and Maintenance section of this specification for the duration of the Consolidation period.
2.25.7 Irrigation System Operation
Operate and maintain the irrigation system for the extent of the consolidation period to ensure the effective
watering off all irrigated areas under the contract under prevailing site conditions. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all cost associated with maintaining the irrigation during the consolidation period.
Any plant material that has died or is set back due to the failure of the irrigation system shall be immediately
replaced to original specification be the Contractor. All costs associated with replacement of dead or set back
plant material shall be borne by the Contractor.
During the consolidation period of the Contract the Contractor shall immediately repair, at the Contractors
expense, any irrigation component failure or malfunction including the repair of any erosion of soil due to
sprinkler failure or malfunction.

43
During the consolidation period of the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately inform the Superintendent of
any theft or wilful damage by others and await instruction. All cost associated with repairs due to vandalism
and theft shall be borne by the Principal and be subject to an approved variation to the contract.
The contractor will make immediately make safe and undertake repairs as necessary to the irrigation system
when a failure of the system will jeopardize public safety or the establishment of the landscape works and,
immediately notify the Superintendent of the actions taken.
After establishment of the landscaped areas, adjust the heights of all sprinkler heads, valve boxes, cable pits
etc as and when instructed by the Superintendent.
2.25.8 Rubbish Removal
Maintain the site free of rubbish, rocks, branches etc for the full extent of the consolidation period.
Rubbish, including the emptying of refuse bins from the entire site shall be undertaken as required to maintain
the site in good condition. As a minimum, rubbish removal shall be undertaken once per week on Friday or
Saturday mornings. All rubbish shall be disposed of off site in an approved refuse tip at the contractor’s
expense.
2.25.9 Rectification of Damage, Vandalism and Theft
Take all reasonable steps practicable to minimize the threat and occurrence of damage, vandalism and theft to
the landscape generally. This shall include but not be limited to removal of unused equipment after hours,
maintaining lighting, not leaving tools or piles of pruned or mowed vegetative material on site over weekends
and immediately reporting suspicious activities to the Superintendent and, if deemed necessary the police.
During the consolidation period damage to the works due to vandalism and theft shall be repaired by the
Contractor.
All cost for rectification of damage, vandalism and theft of the works, except those due to an act or omission on
the part of the Contractor, shall be borne by the Principal and subject to an approved variation to the Contract.
No rectification shall be completed without the written approval of the Superintendent. All rectification shall be
completed by the Contractor within seven days of approval to proceed.
Any damage, vandalism or theft that renders the works unsafe shall be immediately made safe by the
Contractor by barricading off or other appropriate means and immediately notified to the Superintendent.
Any damage, vandalism or theft to the landscape shall be reinstated as shown on the plans and as outlined in
the contract documents.
2.26 CONSOLIDATION COMPLETION - PRINCIPAL HAND OVER

2.26.1 General
Fourteen (14) days prior to the dated of Completion of Consolidation, give the Superintendent written notice
that the Consolidation Period is due to expire. The contractor shall be responsible for the ongoing
consolidation of the works until such time that the notice has been served to the Superintendent.
Directly prior to consolidation completion ‘top up’ mulching to all garden beds and tree watering basins to
conform to specification.
At time of consolidation completion grass areas shall have a healthy and vigorous grass sward.
At time of consolidation completion trees and shrubs shall show signs of healthy vigorous growth, be free of all
pests and diseases and be appropriately pruned. Trees shall be appropriately staked and have a suitably sized
watering basins intact.
At time of consolidation completion all hard works including paving, kerbing, lighting (where lighting is within
the landscape contract) and street furniture shall be functional, oiled or painted as specified, free of damage,
clean, neat and tidy.
At time of consolidation completion all irrigation works shall be fully automated, working efficiently and
effectively and programmed to suit the current status of the landscape works. Maintenance personnel to
whom the work are to be handed to shall be fully briefed on the operation of all systems to ensure they can
operate the systems efficiently and effectively.
2.27 FINAL COMPLETION

2.27.1 General
Fourteen (14) days prior to date of Final Completion, give the Superintendent written notice that final
completion is due.

0700 MECHANICAL SERVICES
07.1 INTRODUCTION
07.1.1 GENERAL
This section of the specification forms part of the contract documents. It is to be read in conjunction with
the preliminaries section of the specification for full meaning. Both the contractor and subcontractor are
deemed to be fully informed of the contents and requirements of (in the case of the contractor) this
specification section and associated drawings and (in the case of the subcontractor) the relevant sections
of all other specification trade sections, including the preliminaries and all other relevant drawings.
The Mechanical subcontractor is referred to the Preliminaries section of the Specification for the particular
requirements which relate to work arising from and related to the works specified in this section.
07.1.2 TENDER SCHEDULES
The tender schedules supplied within the Preliminaries of the specification relates to this part of the works
only and are to be provide by the contractor as part of the bid documents
The tender schedules relating to the Mechanical works are to be signed and clearly identified as submitted
by the subcontractor and countersigned by the Contractor when submitted.
The tender schedules are to be supplied by the Mechanical Subcontractor and then incorporated by the
contractor as part of its tender and must be complete in all respects to validate the tender. An invalid
tender is subject to rejection.
All particulars requested in the tender form are required and alternatives, if any, are to be offered with the
bid. Tenderers shall submit tender forms in duplicate with their tender submission. The detailing
requirements and comments on information to be supplied and alternatives are set out in the following
sections relating to particulars of the specialist section of the work.
07.1.3 APPROVED SUB-CONTRACTORS
The following Subcontractors are selected for tendering this project to undertake the completion of the
works described in the specification and associated drawings.
Admiral Mechanical Services Steve Nelson

Centigrade Services Chris Smith
Jako Industries Vic Jakovich
Engie Matthew Callaghan
Integrated Air Brad McDermott
The contractor may submit in writing for formal approval from the superintendent and consultant for the use
of an alternative Subcontractor for this section of the work, if it is deemed a benefit to the project quality
and value for money outcome.
Providence Christian College – Stage 1 1 January 2021

DSA Job No. 6182 Revision 0
07.1.4 MECHANICAL SERVICES DRAWINGS
The following drawings shall and must be referenced as part of the works described in this Specification.
M.00 – Cover Sheet.

M.01 – Ground Floor Plan
M.02 – First Floor Plan
M.03 – Legend and Details
07.1.5 APPRECIATION OF REQUIREMENTS
Each tenderer will be assumed to have:
- Inspected building and services documents and to have visited the site and informed themselves of
site and local conditions offering the contractor works and to have satisfied themselves as to the true
nature and extent of the works.
- Checked access to the site and ascertained local information required in preparation of the tender with
particular reference to access and systems to enable the execution of the works.
- Assessed the work, materials, plant and similar items necessary to carry out the true intent of the
specification and of the difficulties and hazards that will affect the execution of the works.
The submission of a tender shall be deemed to carry with it agreement to all the items referred to in the
specification and/or indicated on the drawings or inferred therefrom have been included to enable the
completion of the contract, works.
No consideration will be granted for misunderstanding or faulty assessment of the works to be done or of
the materials to be furnished or for lack of knowledge of the nature and conditions of the site.
07.1.6 PROGRESS CLAIMS
As part of the Builders monthly Progress Claim submission, the mechanical progress claim break up sheet
must be included in this specification, Refer Section 07.27 of this section for the required format.
Progress claims will not be processed without this sheet being provided by the MSSC

07.2 ASSOCIATED WORKS
07.2.1 CONCRETE BASES
Concrete bases and plinths for the mechanical equipment will be supplied and installed by the Builder at
no cost to the MSSC.
Galvanised steel edge surrounds and steel reinforcement as necessary shall be supplied and positioned
as part of this sub-Contract.
07.2.2 HOLES IN STRUCTURE
General
Provide detailed builders works shop drawings including, but not limited to; openings, building
penetrations, access panel requirements (particularly ceiling access panels) all as required to complete the
mechanical services installation.
Setting Out Openings
The Builder shall provide all openings throughout the building in accordance with dimensional details
provided by the MSSC. Penetrations through structural beams shall not be permitted without written
approval from the Structural Engineer.
If openings, fixings, chases and similar items of work are wrongly located or omitted due to incorrect or lack
of information supplied to the Builder, the cost of any remedial works shall be paid for by the MSSC.
Penetrations
Penetrations through structural beams, walls or floors will be provided by the Builder.
Materials used for sealing penetrations shall be suitable for the purpose and shall comply with the
requirements of the relevant statutory Authority.
Holes in Roofs
The Builder shall provide roof openings with purlins trimming to all sides of the penetration to support the
roof material and the flashings and complete with under & over flashings, including kerbs as necessary, to
prevent the ingress of water and to accommodate the installation of plant and equipment.
The Builder shall provide under & over-flashings to each penetration to ensure a fully waterproof
installation. Suitable reinforcement to accommodate plant and equipment shall be provided.
07.2.3 PLATFORMS AND COMPOUNDS
The Builder shall provide all HGD roof platforms and associated screening, trimmed openings with
trimming to all sides of the penetration to support the plant and equipment.
Under supports shall be provided in the locations to the builders work drawings provided by the MSSC.
07.2.4 CO-ORDINATION OF INSTALLATION OF AIR OUTLETS, CEILINGS AND FINISHES
The Builder shall provide all access panels, door and ceiling penetrations and be responsible for co-
ordination of the doors and ceiling installation and commissioning of the Services located above the ceiling.
Progressive removal and replacement of ceiling during the commissioning period for access to equipment
will be carried out by the builder. Should subsequent access to the ceiling space be required due to
deficiencies attributable to the MSSC's installation, the MSSC shall pay all costs associated with removal
and replacement of ceilings.

07.2.5 OUTSIDE AIR GRILLES
All outside air grilles associated with the mechanical services systems shall be supplied and installed by
the MSSC. This is to include ember mesh with frame and to be removable for cleaning,
07.2.6 DOOR GRILLES
The MSSC shall supply all louvered door grilles to the Builder who will arrange for cutting and preparation
of holes in doors for the installation of grilles.
07.2.7 PLUMBING
The Builder shall provide waste points for disposing of waste water necessary for the operation of the
mechanical plant.
All final water connections to equipment and drains from equipment to the points of collection shall be
provided as part of these Contract works. All drains shall be arranged so that they can be rodded through
for cleaning.
Plumbing work carried out as part of these Contract works shall be undertaken by suitably qualified and
experienced Tradesmen, in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Authority.
07.2.8 ELECTRICAL
The Builder shall arrange with the Electrical services sub-contractor to supply, install and terminate
sub-main cables to all of the mechanical services switchboards.
The electrical services sub-contractor will make provision in each of the distribution boards including circuit
breakers for the power. Termination to the isolators, provided by the MSSC, shall be by the MSSC.
The electrical contractor shall provide power and wire terminations for all of the exhaust fans. Switching
shall be by the MSSC.
The electrical contractor shall take possession of the power meters from the MSSC and install them into
their boards.
07.2.9 SECURITY SERVICES
Signals from the buildings security system for automatic shutdown of the plant in secure mode will be
provided by the security services subcontractor to terminal strips provided by the MSSC the Mechanical
Services switchboards.
The mechanical services systems shall be installed shut down when the building is secure and the systems
shall be able to operate during occupation.
07.2.10 POWER AND FUEL FOR TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
The Builder will provide sufficient power for testing and commissioning the mechanical services works in
accordance with the agreed construction programme.

07.3 SCOPE OF SERVICE
07.3.1 SCOPE OF WORK IN THIS SECTION
The scope of work broadly includes:
i) Provision of co-ordinated & detailed mechanical services & associated builders works shop
drawings.
ii) The supply and installation of the (VRV/VRF) heat recovery and inverter air conditioning systems.
This shall include stainless steel drip trays under condensing with drains, power isolators, wiring,
ductwork, discharge duct and protective mesh power coated to match roof, security shutdown,
flexible and rigid ductwork, air diffusion and grilles, pipe work, valves, controls and all ancillary
equipment necessary to satisfy the requirements of this specification. Power for the fan coil units
shall be derived from the MSSB.
iii) The supply and installation of the general ventilation systems. This shall include power isolators,
wiring, ductwork, ceiling grilles, door and wall grilles, flexible and rigid ductwork, controls and
switching and all ancillary equipment necessary to satisfy the requirements of this specification
The single phase fans must have speed controllers provided to enable the adjustment of volumes
to those specified. The speed controllers must be mounted in the ceiling space adjacent to the
fans.
Ceiling exhaust fan motors must be rated for continuous operation and bearings shall be of the ball
or roller type, sealed for life bearings. The fan shall have an inlet guard/face cover and a line of
sight/dust cover over (behind).
iv) The supply and installation of a full integrated Building Management System including but not
limited to BMS boards and Panels, with 13” inch touch screen within each MSSB, interconnecting
wiring, interface cards, wiring, sensors, controllers, awning window wiring and (Window) power
supplies, control and switching louvre switch panels, indication lights, interconnecting control wiring
and all ancillary items to satisfy the requirements of the specification, including termination,
sensors with tuning and testing.
v) Supply and installation of the building power meters, and associated interfacing with the BMS.
vi) Provision of all of the switching station in their final locations.
vii) Mounting of all of the wall controllers and sensors in their final locations.
viii) The manufacture, supply and installation of the two mechanical services switchboards shall be
located as shown on the drawings and shall contain run lights, fault lights, manual and automatic
switching, relevant contactors and relays.
Power will be provided to the boards by the electrical contractor, the final termination to the board
is by the MSSC.
The MSSB’s shall be fed from a single power supply and the board shall segregated the feed
between the air conditioning systems, ventilation systems, BMS and louvre relays and control.
The power supplies and controls for all of the equipment under this scope shall also be derived
from this board., including but not limited too;
- Building Management system.
- Condensing units and fan coil units.
- Fan coil units and outside air fans,
- Ventilation Fans,
- Extraction fans,

The boards shall include a terminal strip to pick up signals for the fire panel and the security
system, which will shut down the systems when activated.
ix) All testing and commissioning necessary for the completion and handover of the project.
x) Continuous quarterly tuning and logging of the system necessary for the completion and handover
of the project, including the testing of the system at the 12 month period for certification and for the
completed.
07.3.2 GENERAL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
i) All roof mounted plant and equipment, including fans, cowls, conduits, ect, shall be finished to match
the roof colour.
ii) Supply and installation of relief air grilles, ducts and door grilles.
iii) All exposed ductwork, pipework and conduits are to be painted and concealed in a colour bond duct.
The duct colour is to match the mounting surface.
iv) Commissioning and testing of the systems installed during these works.
v) Three (3) sets of the Installation and Operations Manuals, including As Built drawings.
vi) Co-ordination of work with other trades on site.
vii) Scaffolding and hoisting as necessary to complete the contract works.
viii) Twelve (12) service and maintenance, at quarterly intervals.
ix) Twelve (12) months warranty on workmanship for all new items.
x) The Contractor shall ensure all filters and equipment are left in a clean condition.

07.3.3 ASSOCIATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
The work not included in the mechanical section but is to be provided by the main contractor/builder and
associated sub-contractors shall include;
Air tight ceiling voids throughout the air conditioned spaces.
Fire barriers.
All the access to enable the installation of the new pipe work, ductwork and air conditioning units,
Unit Structural support trimmers,
Plant area compounds and concrete plinths.
Access panels and hatches.
The access to enable the installation of the new pipework, ductwork and air conditioning units, unit
supports.
Ceiling penetrations for ceiling grilles.
Ceiling access panels
Wall and door penetrations for grilles.
Slab, wall and door penetrations for duct work, pipe work and grilles,
Trimmed roof penetrations and under flashing,
Equipment concrete plinths Metal surround provide by the mechanical contractor,
Condensate drains.
Power supplies associated with the execution of the mechanical contract work component.
The Builder shall provide water supplies and waste points for disposing of waste water necessary for the
operation of the mechanical plant.
All drains from equipment to the points of collection shall be provided as part of these Contract works. All
drains shall be arranged so that they can be rodded through for cleaning.
Plumbing work carried out as part of these Contract works shall be undertaken by suitably qualified and
experienced Tradesmen, in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Authority.
Signals from the fire detection and security system for the overriding control of Mechanical Services plant
in fire mode and security isolation of the building. The control cabling will be reticulated by the fire and
security contractor into a MSSB for use by the Mechanical Contractor in the shutting down of the services.
The mechanical contractor is to provide coordination and penetration drawings for use by the contractor.
The drawing are to be submitted for approval and are to be coordinated with the other trades and services.

07.4 DESIGN CRITERIA, PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
07.4.1 GENERAL
The tender documents have been prepared for the guidance of the tenderers.
The MSSC shall guarantee that the performance of the equipment will be as specified. The quality of the
installation shall be in accordance with the Specification and good trade practice.
The MSSC shall advise of any anomalies in the system design, which may prejudice compliance with the
design criteria. Such advice shall be provided in sufficient time to avoid delays, should any changes be
required.
The Sub-Contractor shall prepare piping and ductwork pressure loss calculations to demonstrate selection
of pipework and ductwork does not exceed the specified maximum duties, selections and application.
07.4.2 SERVICES
The design criteria that would be used for the project is as follows:
External Design Criteria
Summer 37.60K dry bulb temperature

230 wet bulb temperature
Winter 70K dry bulb temperature
Internal Design Criteria
Summer 230 +/- 1.50K dry bulb temperature

Winter 210 +/- 1.50K dry bulb temperature
Relative Humidity 50% (at peak load conditions based on coil performance)
Outside Air
7.5 l/s per person by the use of air filters which achieve 60% against no. 1 test dust for ducted units and
10l/s for cassette and wall split systems.
Exhaust Systems
NCC and Health Act.
AS 1668
07.4.3 STANDARDS
Materials, equipment and workmanship shall comply with the most recent documents published by the
Standards Association of Australia or where S.A.A. documents do not exist, the standards of the British
Standard Institute.
All material, equipment and workmanship shall comply with the requirements of:
- National Construction Code. BCA - 2016
- The Western Power Electricity Act.
- The Health Act.
- The Department of Occupational Health, Safety and Welfare.
- The Western Australian Fire and Rescue Board.
- The Health Department.

- The Local Authority.

- Water Corporation Standards.
Any other authority having jurisdiction over this project.
07.4.4 AUTHORITIES – INSPECTIONS AND COSTS

Where testing is required by any statutory Authority having jurisdiction, the MSSC shall give notice and
make application accompanied by such plans and information as may be necessary to obtain such
approvals. The MSSC shall obtain all permits within such time as to ensure no delay to the work and shall
pay all associated costs.
07.4.5 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP

The air conditioning and ventilation equipment and its accessories shall be designed, supplied and
installed in accordance with the requirements and the latest editions and addenda of the relevant Statutory
Regulations and Codes applicable in Australia and The State of Western Australia. In particular, the air
conditioning system shall comply with the following:
NCC – National Construction Code of Australia
AS-1259, Part 1 : Sound Level Meters
AS-1432 : Copper Tubes for Water, Gas Sanitation.
AS-1530 : Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and smoke
release.
AS-1571 : Seamless copper tubes for use in refrigeration.
AS-1668 : Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning Code Parts 1 and 2.
AS-1674 : Fire precautions in cutting, heating and welding operations.
AS-1677 : Refrigeration code.
AS-2107 : Acoustics Recommended design sound levels and reverberation times for building
intervention.
AS-3666 : Air Handling and Water Systems of Buildings.
AS-4254 : Ductwork for Air Handling Systems in Buildings.
Together with all related Australian Standards and Codes including Local Authorities Regulations. All other
applicable Australian Standards and Codes not necessarily nominated above or not referred to by BCA
2015. All Codes and Standards are to be of the latest (current) edition
07.4.6 CHASING
Chasing shall not be permitted in columns and rammed earth walls. Conduits must be cast into location.
All required chases shall be made after checking with the Builder the proposed finish of the surface, to be
chased. Chasing shall be kept to minimum widths and depths but provide sufficient depth so that the
conduit is a minimum of 15mm below the surface after final rendering. All chases shall be completed using
a Carborundum disc saw.
The Builder will rendered walls when installation of conduits and boxes is completed and before plastering
commences in the area.
A limited amount of building-in to wall chases shall be carried out in order to retain conduits and wall boxes
in position.
Pipes greater than 25mm dia. Overall shall not be chased into walls unless directed otherwise in writing.
Pipes chased into walls shall be insulated for thermal reasons and to minimise transmission of vibration
into the structure.

07.5 MANUFACTURE AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
The MSSC shall prepare, and submit for review, before commencing manufacture or installation, drawings
from which the subject works shall be built. No factory or site work, other than manufacture of standard
equipment or controls, shall proceed until such drawings have been reviewed and are deemed to be
satisfactory.
Drawings shall all be on the same size drawing sheets as the design drawings and shall be to a scale of
not less than 1:50.
Drawings shall cover the following parts of the work.
- All structural penetrations.
- All structural supports
- Ductwork and pipework layouts, Sections and Details.
- Reflected ceiling plans showing all air outlets, sizes, air quantities etc.
- Automatic control schematics including control equipment.
- Electrical schematics including proposed switching & thermostat locations and switchboards.
Drawings shall contain reference and required sizes to all Builders work and work required by other trades,
such as plinth dimensions, drain positions, sleeves, penetrations, ceiling access panels, electrical
terminations and the like, to enable the Builder to coordinate these requirements with the trades
concerned.
Submit each of the drawings in AutoCAD 2018 to the BMW CADD Drawings Standards drawing file format,
pdf & 2 hard copies for review and vetting.
Shop drawings are to be co-ordinated with other building & service elements & checked for spatial
requirements of equipment & services indicated diagrammatically in the contract documents.
The Main Contractor shall check and stamp the drawings prior to the submission to the consultants.
An allowance of 10 working days shall be for the consultant’s review of the drawings.
Note: The Main Contractor and Mechanical Services sub-contractor shall complete the “Drawing
Certification Checklist” (Reference Section 07.26), stamp the drawings prior to the submission for
review or approval.

07.6 EQUIPMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
This section deals with the equipment and materials to be supplied for this project.
07.6.1 VARIABLE REFRIGERATION AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
General Requirements
The Heat Recovery (VRF/ VRV) air conditioning units shall be of a single manufacture. Daikin, Panasonic
or Mitsubishi Electric are the preferred or equivalent can be offered for approval.
All units shall have guaranteed capacity rates.
General
The unit shall be reverse cycle type. The unit shall be fitted with all safety devices such as H/P, L/P
overload protection, safety condensate tray and return air filter. Separate 25 mm condensate line with ‘P’
trap and all necessary items to enable efficient, safe and serviceable operation. The unit shall be steel
construction finished with powder coat.
The local switching station shall have fault and run indication.
Casing
The casing shall be fabricated from 1.6mm thick galvabond or zincanneal sheet folded to form panels to
accommodate the thickness of the thermal and acoustic insulation. The outside surface of the casings shall
be flush without external framing. Panels shall be adequately braced and effectively sealed at joints with
gaskets.
Access panels shall be provided to allow full and easy access to all internal areas. Access panels shall be
fabricated to that specified above and shall be fitted with weather resistant latches for ease of removal.
Fans and Motors
Fans and motors shall be selected to provide air flow rates of 10% more than that specified against the
corresponding increased system resistance. Fan discharge velocity at design air flow shall not exceed 9
m/s.
Bearings shall be self aligning ball or roller type fitted with lubricant retaining and dust excluding seals and
shall be selected for an operating life of not less than 100,000 hours. Bearings shall be accommodated in
grease relief housings and shall be lubricated through grease ripples situated in readily accessible
positions.
Coils
Fins spacing shall not exceed 400 fins per meter.
Coil velocity shall not exceed 2.25 m/s.
Aluminium fins copper tubes with brazed joint.
Tube support to be heavy gauge Aluminium.
Condensate Tray
To comply with AS3666, have a minimum 50mm turn up edges, drain connection is not to be less tan
25mm and have a lip on the leaving edge to prevent carry over.

Insulation
The entire casing shall be acoustically insulated with minimum 25mm thickness fibreglass or nitrile rubber
insulation having a density of not less than 48 kg/m3. The insulation shall be faced with perforated foil
laminate sheet and shall be retained by non piercing fixings.
There shall be no cold bridging.
Access panels and separate joints shall have not less than 25mm edge return of surface material.
Air Cooled Condensers
Condensers shall have sufficient heat rejection capacity to maintain the saturated refrigerant condensing
temperature not higher than 13K above design ambient dry bulb temperature.
Condensing coils shall be copper tube Aluminium fin type. Sub-cooling circuit is required to give a
minimum of 6.5K sub-cooling. Coils shall be tested to 2800 kPa and guaranteed for 2200 kPa working
pressure.
Condenser fans shall be direct drive, fully balanced fitted with removable safety guards. Fan shafts shall be
corrosion protected. Permanently lubricated bearings shall be provided.
Casings shall be manufactured from galvanised sheet steel. Support legs, framing and structural members
shall be formed from 3mm minimum thick steel and unit panel covers etc from 1.6 mm minimum thick sheet
steel. All casing shall be baked enamel finished. All fixing used in the unit manufacture must be corrosion
resistant.
The units shall be installed complete with condensate drain pipework.
07.6.2 MINOR AIR CONDITIONING UNITS – SPLIT SYSTEM

General Requirements
Wall mounted and cassette split systems shall be inverter and either Daikin or Mitsubishi Electric
manufacture.
All units shall have guaranteed capacity rates.

Unit Configuration
The units shall be an inverter split system, air cooled reverse cycle type. The evaporator section shall be
mounted within the ceiling space and be fitted with a flush mounted combination return and supply air
diffuser. The condensing unit shall be air cooled of zinc coated steel construction finished with powder
coat.
Equipment
Each unit shall have:
− Combination supply/return air facia with a removable washable filter media.

− Infra red remote control with temperature and fan speed selection.
− Centrifugal supply air fan.
− Centrifugal or propeller condenser fan.
− Defrost operation.
− Outside air connection.
− The units shall be installed complete with condensate drain pipework.

Condenser and Cooling Coils

Coils shall be manufactured from seamless copper tubing to comply with the relevant Australian
Standards.
Fins shall be fabricated from aluminium and be mechanically bonded to the primary surface.
End plates and frames shall be constructed from galvanised steel sheet or aluminium.
Fins shall be factory dipped and treated to prevent corrosion.
Compressor/s shall be of the hermetic type operating on non-toxic and non-inflammable refrigerant.
Compressor/s are to be of the high speed multi-cylinder or helical screw type operating at 48 r/s maximum
speed.
Multiple compressors shall not start simultaneously.
Compressors shall be protected from short circuit by phase failure relays etc.
Compressor motors shall be suitable for D.O.L. starting.

Electrical
All electrical components, including controllers, not in units, shall be mounted within a compartment
separate from the other equipment components. This compartment shall be completely weatherproof
complete with labelled accessible and removable components. Each motor shall have protection. An As
Built wiring diagram shall be fixed to the inside of this compartment and include a schedule of the fan and
compressor motor overload makes and settings.
The units shall be installed complete with condensate drain pipework.
07.6.3 PROPELLER FANS
General
Fans shall be of approved manufacture of the in-duct diaphragm, wall or roof cowl mounting type. Fans
and motors shall be selected to provide air flow rates of 10% more than that specified against the
corresponding increase in system resistance.
Fans shall be selected for a minimum total efficiency of not less than 65%
Construction
Fans shall have cast aluminium or pressed mild steel blades mounted in hubs and complete with brackets.
07.6.4 INLINE FANS
General
The units shall be totally sealed missed flow or axial flow fans housed in a compact base fitted with a
curved contour.
Fans and motors shall be selected to provide air flow rates of 10% more than that specified against the
corresponding increase in system resistance.
Construction
The units shall be steel casings, stiffened and braced. All rotating parts of the units shall be isolated from
the unit casings by approved resilient mountings.

Fans/Motor Assembly
Fans motor bearings shall be of the ball or roller type, sealed for life or grease packed fitted with lubricant
retaining and dust excluding seals extended to an accessible location, and shall be selected for an
operating life of not less than 100,000 hours.
Fan motors shall be positioned above impellers to allow servicing from above the roof.
07.6.5 WALL MOUNTED FANS
Be located where shown on the drawings.
Be of quiet propeller or equal.
Be capable of exhausting the air quantities nominated on the drawing against the resistance of the
installed system.
Have matched speed controller.
Be “Fan Tech”, “Fan’s Direct” or approved equal.
07.6.6 CEILING EXHAUST FANS
Fan shall be centrifugal and motors must be rated for continuous operation and bearings shall be of the
ball or roller type, sealed for life bearings. The fan shall have an inlet guard/face cover and a line of
sight/dust cover over.
The fans shall include a shutoff damper that closes when the fan is not operating.
07.6.7 MOTORS GENERAL
General
• Motors shall be continuously rated squirrel cage metric induction type selected to be non-
overloading at all operating conditions.
• Shall comply with AS 1359 and AS 1360.
• Motors shall be designed to operate on either 415 Volts 3 phase or 240 Volts single phase supply
+ 6% 50 Hz.
• Motors shall be suitable for direct on line starting and shall have minimum Class B insulation and
rated for Class B temperature rise.
• Smoke control motors shall have totally enclosed fan cooled enclosures with Class H insulation, in
accordance with AS 1688 and the requirement of the relevant statutory Authority.
• Class F and Class H insulated motors shall be provided with high temperature leads and terminals
and the bearings packed with high temperature grease and guaranteed for operation at the
specified duty.
• Bearings shall have a minimum service life of 100,000 hours continuous operation.
• Motors up to and including 15kW shall incorporate permanently lubricated ‘sealed life’ bearings.
• Lubrication points and shall be provided for greasing with the motor in operation.
• Motors shall be selected for a minimum efficiency of not less than 90% at design duty point and
70% at 10% load

07.7 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
07.7.1 GENERAL
All air diffusers, air registers, louvres, exhaust air grilles, door relief grilles, supply air grilles and all other
such fittings shall be of SW Hart or Variflow manufacture only.
Provide N.A.T.A., A.D.C. or equal approved certified performance data for all air diffusion equipment to be
installed. Performance data for similar but not identical equipment will not be accepted.
All outlets shall be selected for efficient air distribution and low noise levels and it is the MSSC's
responsibility for selecting and checking neck velocities, horizontal and vertical flow patterns and noise
levels. Outlets with poor distribution and excessive noise levels shall not be used.
All outlets selected for variable volume systems shall be suitable for the system and shall be capable of
providing adequate distribution without causing draughts at high volume or 'dumping' at low volume and
shall only be used if manufacturer's have specifically tested them for variable volume systems.
All slot diffusers, linear grilles and light air saddle diffusers shall have provision for air pattern adjustments
such that air can be deflected in a vertical or horizontal direction.
Air distribution equipment shall:
- Be supplied and installed in quantities, sizes, types and locations shown on the project drawings.
- Be free from distortion, bends, surface defects, irregular joints, exposed fastenings and operating
vibration.
- Where specified to be manufactured from steel shall be finished in enamel or powder coat to the
Architect's choice of colour.
- Where specified to be manufactured from aluminium shall be finished in enamel, powder coat or by
colour anodising as chosen by the Architect.
All air distribution equipment shall be selected and installed to eliminate the formation of condensation.
07.7.2 GRILLES - DOOR RELIEF SHALL:
- Be manufacturer from extruded 1.6mm steel profiled blades.
- Be of the inverted chevron blade type.
- Have minimum free area of 50% of gross.
- Have secure concealed fixings.
- Be powder coated or anodised to the colour & approval of the architect.
07.7.3 RADIIAL DIFFUSERS SHALL:
- Have frame profile dimensioned to suit the ceiling module and type.
- Have metal cores which are easily adjusted to set throw to suit the floor to ceiling height without
disturbing the outer frame.
- Have secure, concealed fixings.
- Be painted to match the ceiling tile finish.

07.7.4 DIFFUSERS SHALL:
- Have frame profile dimensioned to suit the ceiling module and type.
- Have metal PCD cores which are easily removed without disturbing the outer frame.
- Be provided with matt black sector blanking plates where necessary.
07.7.5 BAR GRILLE SHALL:
- Have frame profile dimensioned to suit the location detailed.
- Have metal cores which are 3 mm bars at 10mm spacing .
- Be provided with matt black sector blanking plates where necessary.
07.7.6 CEILING RELIEF AND RETURN AIR GRILLES SHALL:
- Be half chevron slimline blades made from extruded aluminium.
- Have removable cores with concealed fixings.
- Have all visible surfaces behind grille painted matt black.
- Be powdercoat finish, colour to the Architect’s approval.
07.7.7 CEILING RELIEF AND EXHAUST AIR GRILLES SHALL:
- Be half chevron slim line blade made from extruded aluminium.
- Have removable cores with concealed fixings.
- Have all visible surfaces behind grille painted matt black.
- Be powdercoat finish, colour to the Architect’s approval.

07.7.8 EXTERNAL GRILLES – SHALL:
− Louvres and frames to be powder coated to the architects selected colours or provide matching
aluminium jamb, still head flashings as documented and as required.
− Provided fixed black stainless steel woven framed and removeable ember mesh.
− Provided fixed black stainless steel woven mesh vermin mesh.
− Provide matching aluminium plate behind unused section of louvre (where mechanical
ductwork/piping does not connect) and seal. Builder to provide additional thermal panels.
− Neatly mitre continuous louvres at 90° and provide end concealed fixing clips to support corners
− louvres at 90° and provide end concealed fixing clips to support corners
Note:- Samples of all grilles must be submitted for approval prior to ordering or manufacture.

07.8 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT
07.8.1 INSTALLATION SUBCONTACTORS
The piping systems shall be installed by shall either;
− Goffs Refrigeration Air conditioning Installation Pty Ltd.
− Westech Commercial Installations.
07.8.2 GENERAL
The refrigerant circuit shall:
- Comply with AS 1677 and AS1571.
- Comply with the manufacturer's specifications
- Be arranged to return oil to the compressor.
- Include all traps, separators, double risers, heaters, reservoirs and controls as necessary to provide and
maintain efficient compressor lubrication.
- Have circuit pressure losses not exceeding:
Compressor to Condenser -1.0K

Evaporator to Compressor -1.0K
Condenser to Evaporator -0.6 K
07.8.3 REFRIGERATION PIPING
Refrigeration piping shall be clean, capped copper conforming to AS1571.
Piping shall be free from defects and have a chemical composition complying with AS1571.
Piping shall be stamped as designated in AS1571.
All straight lengths shall be supplied in H temper. All coils shall be 0 temper.
Wall thickness shall be selected in accordance with the recommendations of “Kembla” and “Crane”, “Safe
Working Pressures” for the refrigerant used and a design tensile stress of 65oC for discharge and liquid
service and 45oC for suction lines used in cooling only circuits.
Where refrigeration grade tube is not available, the circuit shall be installed using copper piping in
accordance with AS1432 using fittings with wall thickness equal to the pipe wall.
Where piping to AS1432 is used the pipe and fittings shall be carefully cleaned.
All piping practices shall comply with AS1677.
07.8.4 PIPING INSTALLATION SHALL:
- Be installed by experienced refrigeration tradesmen to detailed drawings provided by the sub-

contractor.
- Be continuously fed with inert gas internally during welding operations and left with welded ends and
"Schaeder" valves. Leave holding charge of inert gas after testing. Ensure tails are of sufficient
length for final connection.
- Be supported by a proprietary system of hangers and clamps located in accordance with the following
table:
Nominal Pipe Diameter mm Hanger Spacing mm
0 – 10 1,500
12 – 40 2,000
40 - 3,000
- Be installed in full straight lengths at right angles or parallel to the building structure.
Proprietary systems shall be “Unistrut” “Binder” or “Caddy”
Where pipes of dissimilar diameters are grouped, the smallest line size sets the hanger spacing.
In all situations where changes of direction or elevation occur 45o or 90o bends shall be made using only
mechanical pipe benders or wrought copper fittings.
Have split lengths of UPVC class 6 piping protecting insulation for pipe sizes 10mm diameter and smaller.
Have “Aeroflex”, “Aerofix” hanger blocks for pipe diameters of 10mm or greater.
Blocks shall be the same wall thickness as the pipe insulation.
Have neoprene insert between hanger and uninsulated pipe.
07.8.5 JOINTS SHALL:
- Be made by silver soldering using a minimum of heat, rod and non-corrosive flux.
- Be of the spigot and socket type and in continuous runs. The minimum insertion length shall be 10mm.
- May be of the flared type for piping below 6mm nominal diameter. Flared joints may be used up to
20mm nominal diameter.
Welding rods shall be “Brown” tip or 15% silver content rods.
07.8.6 FITTINGS
Fittings shall be of the wrought copper type for elbows, tees, reducers, sleeves, etc. of wall thickness equal
or greater than the associated pipe.
Elbows shall be of the long radius type.
07.8.7 PIPING INSULATION SHALL:
- Be "Aeroflex" with the thickness complying with the requirements of BCA 2016.
- Be fire rated where penetrating through fire or smoke rated wall to BCA regulations ensuring that a
vapour barrier is maintained.
- Be applied to the lines as specified by the unit supplier.
- Be slipped over the piping prior to final connections being made.
- Have joints glued with an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the insulating material.
- All joints shall be protected and sealed by “Aeroflex Protape” in a workmanlike manner.
- Be protected where exposed to the weather by "colorbond" sunshields.

- Final connections to units shall have insulation painted with a UV protected paint compatible with the
insulation.
- Be wrapped with "Denso" tape to manufacturer's specifications when installed underground.
07.8.8 REFRIGERANTS SHALL:
- Be charged into machines cleaned and dehydrated to standards recommended by the manufacturer.
- Be free from contamination.
An operating charge of refrigerant shall be proved with each machine and additional refrigerant shall be
provided to maintain the operating charge during the 12 months defects liability period.
07.8.9 UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

General, Separate underground piping from electrical cables and gas pipes, by at least 300 mm.
Installation
Pipe underlay: Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding material, at least 75 mm thick after
compaction. Grade the underlay evenly to the gradient of the piping.
Bedding material: Sand free from material retained on a 13.2 mm sieve.
Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from
bearing on the trench bottom or underlay.
Other services: Separate underground piping from electrical cables and other services by ≥ 300 mm.
Pipe surrounds
General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers < 200 mm loose thickness and compact
without damaging or displacing the piping.
Protection: Lay continuously concrete tiles > 25 mm thick, or PVC tape at least 3 mm thick, in the
overlay, 50 to 75 mm clear of the piping, for the length of the piping.
Warning tape: During backfilling lay plastic warning tape 300 mm above buried piping, for the full length
of the piping.
Type: Minimum 100 mm width per pipe

07.9 DUCTWORK
07.9.1 GENERAL
Ductwork shall:
- Be manufactured in sizes shown on the drawings. All sizes are clear airway sizes.
- Be delivered to site covered, stored off the ground or slabs and protection provided to internal surfaces.
- Be clean, neat and free from dents and buckles.
- Be waterproofed where exposed to the weather.
- Be in accordance with AS4254-1995.
07.9.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS SHALL:
- Be provided where shown on the drawings.
- Be made from material complying with AS1668.
- Provide at least 100 mm free movement.
- Be securely attached to ductwork by means of clamping channels.
- Not leak.
07.9.3 INSULATION - DUCTWORK
Ductwork insulation shall:
- Comply with the requirements of AS 1668.
- Have all joints close butted.
- Be applied to clean surfaces.
- Fit closely to the surface insulated.
- Not be crushed by the fixings.
07.9.4 INTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
All internal perimeter surfaces of ducts as indicated on the project drawings shall be lined with insulation.
Insulation shall:
- Be resin bonded glass fibre.
- Have minimum density of 48 Kg/m3.
- Comply with BCA 2016 or 50mm thick as required on the drawings, whichever is greater.
- Be rigid batt form.
- Be applied with batts on adjacent duct sides overlapping at corners.
- Have insulation installed proud at each cross joint to provide compression on assembly.

07.9.5 THE FACING
Shall:
- Be perforated "sizalation" except for the evaporative cooler and canopy exhaust systems.
- Be factory adhesive bonded to the insulation.
- Be applied to the exposed face and lap 50mm over the edge onto the back surface of the insulation
board.
- Be protected by adhesive when bent at 90o.
- Have joints lapped at least 50mm.
07.9.6 STUD WELDED PINS
Shall:
- Be 2.5mm diameter cadmium or tin plated steel.
- Be spaced at 300mm maximum centres and so that there are at least two rows of pins per side of duct.
- Be fitted with plastic type speed clips.
- Be of a length selected to firmly retain insulation without compressing the batt by more than 5mm.
07.9.7 SOUND ATTENUATORS
General
Sound attenuators shall be installed into ductwork and masonry risers where shown on the drawings.
The attenuators shall be of "Barclay Engineering" or approved equal.
The sound insertion figures and pressure loss for the attenuators offered shall be based on figures tested
in a laboratory registered with N.A.T.A. and in accordance with Australian Standard AS1217-1983.
Certified results of this figures may be required.
Add max pressure loss to the schedules
Construction
The attenuators shall have the outer casings constructed from the following galvanised sheet thickness:
Width/height up to 1100 mm 1.2 mm thick
over 1100 mm 1.6 mm thick
The attenuators shall be fitted with galvanised angle end flanges, as follows:
Width/height up to 600 mm 25x25x3
900 mm 32x32x3
1200 mm 38x38x3
1500 mm 51x51x5
over 1500 mm 51x51x6.5
The casings shall have either Pittsburgh lock seams or welded joints. Welded joints shall be painted to
prevent corrosion.
The splitters shall be securely mounted into the casing on an equal module to suit the case width.

The splitters shall have a matt faced fibreglass sound absorptive fill which is held inside a perforated
galvanised steel skin. The galvanised steel skin shall be securely attached to the splitter or casing to
prevent movement in the air stream.
The splitters shall have Aerofoil shaped inlet and outlet surfaces to minimise pressure drop.
The attenuator shall be externally insulated with 50 mm thick fibreglass and sisal vapour barrier either on
site or at the factory. The insulation shall be secured with steel pins.
Regenerated Noise
The splitter module shall be sized so as to keep channel velocities low and minimise pressure drop.
Channel velocities shall be such as to prevent regenerative noise from exceed NR35.
Installation
The attenuators shall be handled and transported in such a manner as to prevent distortion and damage to
the casing and splitters. Plastic sheet covers shall be installed on the open ends to prevent the ingress of
water and dust during construction.
The attenuators shall be installed through the plant room walls. The holes in the walls shall be sized so as
to allow for the installation of end flanges, through the wall.
Alternatively, the attenuators may be built into walls.
The gap around the attenuator shall be packed with semi-rigid fibreglass batt and then with loose
fibreglass held in place with a galvanised sheet steel angle trimmer to prevent noise breakout. The air
conditioning contractor shall install this packing.

07.10 AIR FILTERS
The air filters for the project shall be as specified below. All filters must comply with AS 1132.
07.10.1 RETURN AIR
The return air filters for the ducted systems shall:
- Have extended surface area 100mm VEE form.
- Velocities less than 1.5m/s.
- Have efficiencies of 80% to no. 4 dust, 70% to no. 2 dust under AS 1132 for the main filter. These filters
shall have a metal frame and replaceable media.
07.10.2 OUTSIDE AIR
The outside air shall be filtered prior to the entry to the system. The filter shall:
- Have extended surface area 50 mm “V” Form.
- Velocities less than 1.5m/s.
- Have efficiencies of 80% to no. 4 dust, 95% to no. 2 dust under AS 1132 for the main filter to achieve
the outside air rate of 7.5l/s per person. This filter shall be metal frame with disposable media.
- Be fitted with a pre-filter of extended surface with efficiencies of 70% to no. 4 dust. This filter is to be
washable.

07.11 ELECTRICAL
07.11.1 GENERAL
The electrical installation shall be in accordance with the current Regulations and requirements of the local
Supply Authority, and with the relevant SAA Specifications and Codes, in particular AS 2430, AS 3000 and
AS 3003. The installation shall be suitable for the application and provide for satisfactory operation, control,
maintenance and safety of mechanical plant and equipment.
All equipment shall be designed so that interference will not be caused with any electronic transmitting or
receiving equipment in the same locality, including any control equipment associated with any air
conditioning plant and other similar installations.
Separate earthing conductors shall be installed for each outgoing circuit and switchboard gland plate,
originating at the earth bar in the associated switchboard.
All electrical equipment, wiring and fittings shall be of best quality, and, within their respective type, of the
same manufacture throughout the installation.
07.11.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Conduits shall be circular in cross section, minimum nominal diameter 20mm.
Steel conduit shall be used in trafficable areas and shall be heavy gauge welded galvanised with screwed
connections complying with AS 2052 of 'GALCON' or approval equal manufacture.
Rigid PVC light duty or heavy duty conduit shall be of the high impact, self extinguishing type, complying
with AS 2053.
Flexible conduits shall be PVC complying with AS 2053 using terminators of approved manufacture, or
heavy duty corrugated PVC conduit and screwed male thread glands complete with conduit locking ring.
The length of flexible conduit shall allow movement of the plant item for normal service adjustment.
07.11.3 CABLE TROUGHING
Cable troughs for power and control wiring may be used in plant rooms, accessible rising ducts or
accessible ceiling or roof spaces. Cable troughing shall be sized and have derating factors applied in
accordance with AS 3000 and AS 3008, with cables laid in the trough in straight runs avoiding crossovers
wherever possible cables for individual three phase circuits shall be taped together at intervals not
exceeding 5m and control cables shall be taped together with a maximum of 10 cables in any one
grouping.
07.11.4 SWITCHBOARD AND FIELD CABLING
Rating
All conductors shall be continuous between their terminal points and all cables shall have stranded copper
conductors unless otherwise specified.
Power circuit conductors shall have a minimum effective area equal to 2.5mm2 (7/0.67) and field control
wiring shall have a minimum effective area equal to that of 1.5mm2 (7/0.5). DDC and other electronic
equipment field wiring shall have minimum effective area not less than 0.88mm2 or as recommended by
the controls supplier, whichever is the greater. Earthing conductors shall be not less than 2.5mm2 (7/0.67).
Flexible conductors may be used in switchboards and shall be not less than 1.0mm2 (32/0.20), except that
cabling associated specialised electronic equipment may comprise 0.5mm2 (16/0.20) flexible, terminated
at an intermediate terminal block, mounted adjacent to the devices. Normal switchboard cabling shall then
be extended as required from this terminal block to other items of switchgear in the board.
Control cables operating at extra low voltage shall be selected for minimum 6% voltage drop.

Identification
Cables and conductors shall be colour coded. Red, white and blue shall be used for the three supply
phases, black for neutral circuits, green/yellow for earthing cables and orange, violet or other approved
colour for control circuits. All terminals and each end of each control wire shall be numbered. All numbers
shall be indicated on drawings.
Cable Installation And Cable Entry To Equipment
Cable trays and gland plates shall be provided to facilitate sub main connections.
Where cables are installed vertically, an approved method of clamping shall be provided to support the
cable without damage to the insulation, at intervals not exceeding 7.5m.
Field cable joints will not be permitted, except where the length of the cable run exceeds the maximum
manufactured cable length. Cables shall be joined using the manufacturer's recommended procedure and
equipment. Locations of cable joints shall be to approval, and the location of any joints clearly marked on a
drawing.
Minimum bending radius for all cables shall not be less than 6 times the overall cable diameter.
Extra low voltage control cables including DDC cabling, shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Shielded cables shall be earthed at one end only (at the controller not
the sensor). Cables shall be segregated from power cables by a distance of 250mm minimum and
enclosed in separate conduits or as otherwise directed by the manufacturer such that induced stray
voltages are prevented from affecting the operation of the controls under normal and abnormal conditions.
07.11.5 PVC CABLES
PVC cables for switchboards and for field installation shall be minimum V75 0.6/1 kV single PVC insulated
stranded conductor of CMA, Olex or other Australian manufacture to AS 3147.
07.11.6 PVC/PVC CABLES
PVC insulated and PVC sheathed (PVC/PVC) cables shall be minimum V75 0.6/1 kV stranded conductor
of CMA., Olex or other Australian manufacture to AS 3147 and AS 3191.
Cables shall run straight for at least 300mm immediately prior to entering switchboards and other
equipment.
Multicore cables containing a maximum of three power conductors and one earthing conductor may be of
flat configuration. Cables containing four or more power conductors shall be of circular configuration or
other approved type.
07.11.7 SWITCHBOARDS
General
All new equipment to switchboards shall be strictly in accordance with the relevant Sections of AS 1136
Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies suitable for 415/240 Volts 50 Hz operation with a minimum
Degree of Protection IP54 Safety Measure 1, with Construction Form 1 unless otherwise specified.
Switchboards shall incorporate all necessary starting arrangements, facilities and accessories.
Clearance between the switchboard and fixed obstructions shall be strictly in accordance with AS3000.
Cable entries shall be readily accessible when the switchboard is in its installed location.
Control Circuit Transformers
Transformers supplying extra low voltage for control interlocks and other equipment shall be double
wound, and adequately rated for their duty.

The primary and secondary terminals shall be physically separated and clearly marked. HRC fuse
protection shall be provided in the secondary circuit. Where the transformer rating exceeds 300 VA a
separate primary fuse shall be provided. For transformers rated at 300 VA or less, the primary may be
connected to the common control circuit fuse where applicable. Cabling from the secondary winding to the
control circuit fuses shall be rated for full secondary current.
Terminals
All outgoing control circuits shall be connected to tunnel type rail mounted terminals similar to Sprecher
and Schuh VR series or equal approved.
Earth and Neutral Links
Each switchboard shall be provided with separate earth and neutral bars of adequate cross section and
length to accommodate all earth and neutral cables associated with the circuits controlled from that
switchboard.
Labels
All components shall be labelled with white traffolyte labels machine engraved with black lettering.
Minimum letter size shall be 3mm. Labels shall be fixed with screws mounted on stand off supports, so that
labels are in front of equipment wiring and clearly visible. Labels shall not be fixed to removable cable duct
covers, etc.
07.11.8 MOUNTING OF EQUIPMENT
All contactors, motor starters, fuses and relays, etc. shall be panel mounted within the cabinet, front
connected and front wired.
Equipment shall be logically grouped in sequence and labelled. Equipment operating at 24 Volts 50 Hz
(contactor coils etc.) shall be mounted on a separate section of the panel, segregated from the 240 Volts
50 Hz equipment by location, with each section shall be appropriately labelled.
07.11.9 WIRING AND TERMINATIONS
Gland plates for cables shall be of 6mm minimum thickness brass drilled to accommodate all incoming and
outgoing cables.
All wiring shall be run and neatly clipped. Special wiring channels, clips and lugs suitable for switchboard
use shall be used in all cases.
Terminal blocks and contactors shall be numbered using proprietary brand machine printed number tags.
Control wiring shall be numbered at each end, using Critchley Type Z slip on cable numbers or similar,
sized to fit firmly over the cable. Stick on numbers or hand written numbers will not be accepted.
All control cables entering or leaving the switchboard shall be brought to numbered terminals.
07.11.10 PROTECTION OF SWITCHBOARDS
Switchboards and control panels shall be adequately protected, to avoid damage to paint work and
components. Damaged paint work shall be neatly touched up to match the original finish.

07.11.11 VARIABLE FREQUENCY SPEED CONTROLLERS
General
Controllers shall be suitable for continuous operation at full load in an ambient temperature of 45oC and a
maximum storage temperature of 60oC.
Enclosures shall be I.P.54 with forced draft ventilation, self contained. Filter fans assemblies are not
acceptable.
An isolating contactor shall be connected on the load side rated for the appropriate duty. Frequency
converter shall be capable of switching on the output without sustaining damage.
Preferred manufacturers of speed controllers are 'CMG' or 'Danfoss'.
Rating, Efficiency And Stability
Each controller shall be selected on the basis of maximum motor full load "nameplate" Amps and not motor
kW rating.
Output voltage and frequency levels shall remain constant at any given speed setting when supply voltage
varies by not more than + 10%.
Minimum efficiency shall be 96% at the duty point and 85% at 10% of design flow and 30% of design
speed.
The output frequency shall remain constant regardless of load variations or supply frequency variation of +
1.5 Hz. Output frequency shall remain stable throughout the ambient temperature range of 0oC to 45oC.
Components and Functions
Each controller shall be protected with suitably rated fuses or circuit breaker on the input side, selected to
provide protection of the controller and associated drive.
The variable frequency power and logic unit shall be solid state, continuously rated with micro processor
based drive logic, transforming input power into frequency and voltage controlled output power, for direct
connection to a standard squirrel cage induction motor, providing positive speed and torque control.
Speed control shall be stepless throughout the speed range under variable load conditions. Frequency
control shall be via pulse width modulation generating a clean sine wave with an operating power factor of
0.96 or better throughout the entire speed range. Power transistor devices shall be used in the output
stage.
Speed controller and motor shall be carefully selected and entirely compatible with each other, to provide
smooth operation over the whole speed range and without objectionable noise. Skip frequency functions
may be used to avoid resonance noise.
The controller shall accept at least two selectable switched inputs to override the speed control signal and
run the controller at a fixed manually adjusted speed.
Safety Protection Devices
The following safety protection features shall be provided as a minimum requirement, allowing the
controller to shut down without component damage.
Current limit: To prevent over current tripping due to momentary overload conditions and allow continued
operation (adjustable 110% to 150% of inverter rating).
Over current: When output current exceeds 110% then any speed change shall be halted until the current
drops below 110% when speed change will again be implemented. The controller shall not be damaged by
an output current of up to 150% rating.

Short circuit/instantaneous over current trip: On short circuit or instantaneous over current, the controller
shall shut down.
Earth fault protection: Phase to earth short circuit protection shall shut down the controller on fault.
Under and over voltage trip: Trip when input line voltage drops 15% below rated input voltage or when the
dc bus voltage exceeds 150% of nominal output voltage. On sustained power loss, the controller shall shut
down and upon return of power, the system shall automatically return to normal operation.
Momentary power loss: The controller shall shut down and upon return of power automatically return the
system to normal operation being capable of restarting a rotating motor immediately and regain positive
speed control.
Over temperature trip: The controller shall shut down when operating temperatures exceed safe operating
limits.
Automatic reset and restart: Restart to commence when any under voltage, over voltage or over
temperature condition is restored to normal. The number of restart attempts shall be limited to five restarts.
Automatic reset and restart attempts after an over current condition shall be limited and if a restart does not
occur on the last attempt, the controller shall shut down and require manual reset.
Signal isolation: Current and voltage signals shall be isolated from the logic circuitry via optic isolators.
Speed Control Signals
The frequency output shall be controlled from an input signal derived from DDC or an electronic controller
as appropriate. Interface devices shall be directly compatible and liaised with the supplier.
The controller shall have internal manual adjustment allowing presetting of maximum and minimum speeds
with the limits maintained regardless of the input signal.
The controller shall include an 'auto-off-manual' function and a manual speed adjustment device supplied
by the manufacturer integral with the controller to allow testing and commissioning of the unit. In the
manual mode the automatic speed control signal shall be locked out.
Status Indication
Status indication light emitting diodes or panel display shall be provided for the safety, protection and
operating controls specified, located on the controller. In addition, indication for power on, speed and drive
enabled shall be provided.
Voltage free contacts shall be provided for connection of alarm signals, with contact closure on any fault
condition occurring in the unit.
BMS Interface and Metering.
Each VFD shall be interfaced to the BMS for energy monitoring and programming and have an inbuilt,
BMS addressable, non volatile kWh meter function for input power with a documented accuracy of better
than or equal to 2%.
Motor Overloads
Overloads (and thermistor protection where applicable) for each motor shall be provided within the
controller, to protect the motor and controller at all operating speeds.
Interlock Signals
All external interlock signals as required to operate the controller, shall be connected to terminals on the
controller, with the controller internally wired to suit.

Engineering Back Up
A complete technical engineering service and spare parts facility shall be available locally, with service and
reinstatement of the controller to full working conditions following a failure, guaranteed within 24 hours
The installation of the controller shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. The controller supplier or a trained representative shall attend site to properly set up
and adjust the controller at time of commissioning to ensure optimum performance and ongoing trouble
free operation and clearly document all internal set points for speed, ramp times, etc. following final
adjustment.
DDC INTERFACING
A separate terminal strip shall be provided in each switchboard for connection of DDC interface cabling.
Terminals shall be segregated from other terminals in the same panel.
Contacts for monitoring of status and alarm conditions shall be potential free and incorporate a "wiping"
action to provide a consistently very low contact resistance compatible with the extra low voltage
monitoring supply from the DDC.
Control output from the DDC will be via voltage free contacts. Interface relays shall be mounted within each
switchboard and controlled direct from the DDC at 24 Volts 50 Hz. Relay coil current and relay
characteristics shall be completely compatible with the DDC system.
Interface connections shall be individually connected to terminals (that is, two connections per item). Any
looping required for common connections shall be made at the terminal strip. All DDC point numbers shall
be shown on the wiring diagrams consistent with the DDC numbering system.
07.11.12 METERS
Mechanical Services the building Distribution Board kWh Meter with high level interfaces to the BMS shall
be provided to identify energy usage for the following load components:
In addition CT’s shall be provided for the MSSB

07.12 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
07.12.1 DDC CONTROLS
General
This Section covers the supply and installation of the automatic controls for all systems, plant and
equipment to be incorporated into the Building Management System.
Controls shall be of approved manufacture and shall be of the same type and manufacture throughout the
project. Hybrid systems are not acceptable.
Proprietary control systems that can be used within this project are:
Innotech
Reliable via (Thorn Electrical)
Unless otherwise approved all controls shall be supplied, installed, tested and commissioned by the
controls manufacturer or supplier. All personnel engaged in this work shall be fully trained and experienced
in this field.
Responsibility shall be accepted for the design, selection of controls equipment, quality of the equipment
and performance of the controls installation. All controls shall be capable of operation within the specified
ranges and tolerances.
The control systems shall be complete in all respects and shall have all items such as, thermostats, relays,
interlocks and the like as necessary for the safe and correct operation of the plant in line with the functional
description.
Unless otherwise specified all adjustable controls such as thermostats, humidistats etc. shall be provided
with lockable covers to prevent tampering.
Where temperatures, set points, time delay periods and other criteria are nominated, the values shall be
treated as indicative only. All such settings shall be adjusted for optimum performance at the time of
commissioning and noted in the operating instructions and commissioning records.
No instruments or control devices shall be located where they will interfere with the operation or removal of
equipment, nor shall conduits or piping be run so as to interfere with the access to any equipment.
07.12.2 EXTENT OF WORK
Supply and install complete automatic Building Management System for the building which will include the
following mechanical services system operations:
Touch screen within the main MSSB panel
Provision of a Note Book computer to use by the College and service use.
Control, monitoring of the VRV/VRV and split systems through high level interfacing.
• Ambient lockout, optimum start and stopping.
• Local switching and time control of exhaust systems, main plant and equipment and all other
ancillary equipment including optimised start/stop for the A/C plant.
• High Level interfacing of the VRV systems controls to the BMS for centralised control and
monitoring.

• High level interfacing and control of the spilt systems through the BMS for centralised control and
monitoring.
• Wiring and control of the exhaust systems including but not limited to the, tea prep, store and
cleaners room exhaust systems
• Supply of all necessary power terminations to the mechanical equipment.
• Provision for monitoring and of the normal external lighting, security and emergency lighting.
• Secure, remote WEB access facilities to ensure the entire system including monitoring, reporting,
trending and control is accessible via internet access using a standard web browser.
The comprehensive commissioning, tuning and testing of the system, system functions and
operation. Logging and tuning shall be quarterly with performance testing with reports and
documentation at practical completion, quarterly and final completion to ensure the Four Star/Green.
Site graphics to incorporate these works.
Secure, remote access facilities to ensure the entire system including monitoring, reporting, trending
and control is accessible via internet access using a standard web browser.
The comprehensive commissioning, tuning and testing of the system, system functions and
operation. Logging and tuning shall be quarterly with performance testing with reports and
documentation at practical completion, quarterly and final completion to ensure the Four Star/Green
Star is attained.

07.12.3 CENTRAL EQUIPMENT.

General
The Central equipment shall be located in the basement Comms Room:
Operator interface to the system DDC controllers access control interface, emergency lighting system to
enable display of system point and alarm information.
Generation of system logs and reports.
Programming of controllers.
Computer
A Notebook computer (to approval) shall be used as the central computer which is provided to provided in
the lockable cabinet for monitoring, reporting and control on site and data backup purposes.
Software
The central computer (CPU) software shall be tested and commissioned by the Contractor. The software
shall be "user friendly" and incorporate interactive (question and answer) programme techniques to allow
programming and operation by staff who are not trained Computer Operators.
The operator interface software shall incorporate English language descriptors and message and menu
driven displays. All programming (changing set points, adjusting time programmes and such) shall be
performed, on line, without affecting the operation of the system.
OPERATING SYSTEM
The operating system (OS) shall provide control over the operation of the central processing unit and shall
be a product of, and supported by, the CPU manufacturer.
The operating system shall be responsible for scheduling all programmes for execution and shall support a
multi-tasking programme environment which provides for the concurrent execution of multiple real-time
programmes and programme development.
The system shall incorporate a multi-user capability such that multiple operations for multiple input/output
devices shall be able to concurrently issue commands to the running system programme.
A foreground/background structure shall be provided to allow the real-time control and operator interface
programmes to run in the foreground while programme assembly, compiling, debugging and loading
executes in the background.
The OS shall manage a scheme of storage protection which will enable background activities to proceed
without affecting the operating system or real-time programmes. Such protection shall prevent accidental
modification of the OS or real-time programmes resulting from execution of any background activities.
The OS shall include a real-time clock which shall maintain time of day, date and timer information.
When a power failure occurs the CPU shall be shut down in an orderly manner. When power is restored
the CPU shall automatically execute a "bootstrap" routine which shall restart the system.
The CPU shall automatically restart after the occurrence of an event that halts operation. During the restart
procedure the contents of the semi-conductor (RAM) memory shall be stored in a disk file for subsequent
printing and analysing to determine the cause of the failure.
Automatic restart shall return the CPU to full operation.
All system transmissions (to either field devices, peripherals or mass memory units) shall be checked for
errors (using an approved error detection and correction technique) and records of such errors shall be
maintained in the system memory.
A failure of any transmission data path shall be audibly annunciated on the system operator's terminals.

SYSTEM ACCESS
Operators shall gain access to the system by "signing on" to a particular operator's terminal. Sign-on shall
be achieved by entry of a unique (to each operator) password and/or identification code.
Each operator shall be assigned a system access level which will enable that operator, once signed on, to
access only those command and programme functions which have an equal or lower access level. A
minimum of three access levels shall be provided.
Only the highest access level shall enable assignment or reading of operator passwords (and/or
identification codes). The system shall support a minimum of twenty separate operators.
The system shall record (in mass memory and optionally on a selected printer) each sign-on activity.
Terminals shall automatically sign-off after a pre-set (adjustable 1 min to 24 hours) time if no keyboard
activity has occurred. In addition, operators shall be able to manually "sign-off" when leaving the terminal.
ALARM PROCESSING
Alarms shall be displayed on the visual display terminal when they occur.
Two levels of alarm shall be provided 'urgent' and 'non urgent' (warning). The type of alarms are described
below:
Urgent Alarms
Equipment failure and hardwire faults
Status mismatch
Communication faults
Sensor or device faults (including open circuits)
Temperatures beyond preset limits
Pressures beyond preset limits
Carbon Dioxide levels beyond preset limits
Refrigerant and water leak detection alarms
Non Urgent Alarms (Warnings)
Temperatures vary from setpoint
Pressures vary from setpoint
Manual over-ride of BMS points
The alarm display shall "flash" and an audible alarm sound until the alarm is acknowledged. Upon
acknowledgment, the display shall steady and the audible alarm be silenced. In the event of multiple
alarms the most recent, highest priority, alarm shall be displayed on the terminal. Once the first alarm is
acknowledged the next alarm shall be displayed (and the audible alarm re-energised) and so on. Alarms
shall "scroll" onto the terminal in this manner until all alarms have been acknowledged.
Alarm messages shall remain active until acknowledged by the operator (ie. they shall not be overwritten
by a return to normal unless they have been acknowledged).
An operator shall require to be "signed-on" before acknowledging any changes of state.
Each change of state (COS) message shall include the time of occurrence of the activity.
Alarms shall be printed on the printer as they occur. (Unless a report printout is in progress in which case
they shall be held and printed upon completion of the report).

ALARM DISPLAYS AND POINT DESCRIPTORS

Each point in the system shall be assigned a unique English language descriptor which shall be displayed
wherever the point is displayed.
In addition, it shall be possible to assign alarm messages which are displayed whenever a system alarm
occurs. Alarm messages shall consist of a minimum of 36 alphanumeric characters.
Each alarm display shall include the point descriptor, alarm message and time of occurrence of alarm.
Each point shall also be assigned an appropriate engineering unit (eg. temperature oC). All engineering
units shall be S.I.
Points as referred to in this clause shall include inputs and outputs, parameters, calculation results and
other hardware or software points.
OPERATOR'S TERMINAL DISPLAYS
Colour graphic visual display units shall include a dedicated change of state area at the top of the screen
(for display of change of state information and alarm action messages) and a header with the current date,
time and operator (if the terminal is "signed-on") displayed.
The balance of the display shall be used for programming, display of system reports and similar functions.
STATUS DISPLAY AND OVERRIDE
A status display programme shall facilitate display of the status of all points in the system.
The display shall include point identification and current status of value, dynamically updated.
The points to be displayed shall be selectable by the operator using individual or group point descriptors.
It shall be able to place any point in the manual or auto mode.
In manual mode it shall be able to command binary outputs to be On or Off, position analogue outputs to
any value between 0 and 100% and set analogue inputs to any selected value.
The status display shall indicate whether the points in manual or auto mode and shall reflect operator
commands
COLOURGRAPHIC VISUAL DISPLAY UNIT OPERATION
The colourgraphics shall incorporate instantaneous updating of dispersed real-time data and shall provide
an effective means for the operator to relate to the field. Full alphanumeric shall spell out in plain English
any condition, value, or action to be taken. Each graphic shall incorporate up to 40 freely assigned
connected or calculated points, shall be constructed and stored in the CPU mass storage units, ready to be
displayed. All dynamic data points shall be positioned to their respective location on the static portion of
the graphic.
Graphics and all related dynamic data display points shall be keyboard programmable without interfering
with the on-line operation of the system. As with the non-graphic mode of the terminal, an interactive,
conversational mode shall be used to construct graphics data files and to display them.
The programmable colourgraphics shall have dispersed dynamic data providing real-time system
information. These diagrams and variable system data shall be viewed simultaneously on the dedicated
work space section of the terminal screen. A system diagram associated with a point in alarm shall be
indexed from the dedicated alarm section of the screen and displayed by activating a Command Function
via the keyboard or (as a programmable option) automatically on receipt of an alarm. Symbols and point
identifiers on the diagram shall flash in a pre-programmed alarm colour until acknowledged. An
acknowledged alarm shall appear steady and with a colour inversion of its data field. The data field of the
point in alarm shall return to normal when the alarm is corrected in the field. Graphics shall be periodically
updated to keep displayed data current with actual field conditions.
System colourgraphics shall be easily developed, via the keyboard and mouse controller, using a number
of interactive construction programmes and a library of standard symbols representing devices such as

chillers, pump, air handling units, coils, temperature sensors, thermals, contacts, fans, dampers, motors,
relays and similar items. Graphic Construct programmes shall place the desired line drawings or symbols
in the appropriate place on the screen, assign point type, colours and text. Complete diagrams shall be
tested for accuracy and validity. The standard symbols library shall be augmented by user defined
symbols at any time. Editing features for adding, deleting and modifying data, as well as format controls,
shall be provided. Access to the colourgraphics features shall be software controlled so that only
designated operators can display or modify files.
Each point which has been manually forced (ie, not in automatic control) shall be identified with a different
background colour to that associated with alarm (or by approved equivalent means).
Each point which is associated with a failed communications line and/or controller shall be identified on the
graphic via inverse video with a different background colour to either alarms or manual forcing function.
It shall be possible to investigate each control loop by graphic penetration. That is all graphics shall be
constructed in levels as follows.
Level 1 Graphics detailing building overview.
Level 2 Graphics detailing floor plans.
Level 3 Graphics detailing control loops on each floor/system.
Level 4 Graphics detailing control loops on each component and

meters.
The system software shall accept up to 6 penetration levels of graphics and it shall be possible to raise and
lower the level of the graphic by moving the cursor, via the mouse, to a selected window and entering a
single character command via the keyboard.
Separate graphics shall be supplied for each sub-system, and control loop within a sub-system. It is not
necessary to provide separate graphic for each VAV box, however, information pertaining to each VAV box
is required to be stored and retrieved via a common logical group.
Logical Groups
It shall be possible to assign system points into logical groups comprising related points. Such grouping
shall be independent of hardware configuration.
System Logs and Displays
The operator shall be able to display system logs (on either the visual display terminal or the printer) on
request. Logs shall, as a minimum, include:
Alarm Summary logs: Summary of all current alarms
Status Logs: Review of the status of all system points.
Time Schedule logs: Review of all, or selected, time schedules.
Logical Group Logs: Review of all points in a particular group.
Event Programme Logs: Review of all event programmes.
Trend logs: Log of the value of selected points as recorded at predetermined intervals. A minimum of 10
logs each trending 10 points shall be available. (Sample times shall be adjustable in one minute
increments from 1 min. to 24 hrs).
Note: Destination of the log report (eg printer or operator’s terminal) shall be operator selectable.
Time and Event Initiated Programmes

The DDC central equipment shall provide a facility to issue commands to various points in the system.
Commands shall be initiated:
Manually, via operation of an operator’s terminal keyboard.
On a time schedule basis (including holiday override).
On an event basis. Events shall consist of changes of state (eg, controller system alarms including
analogue alarms), fire alarms, power failures, changing of a point value (eg, a calculation result) and
similar items.
Typical commands shall include:
Sequential starting or stopping of selected equipment (with time delays between starts)
Changing the value of a controller system parameter (eg, setpoint)
Initiation of power fail modes.
Initiation of a system report.
Historical Logging
It shall be possible to store selected information on the DDC system mass storage unit. This historical data
shall be contained in a file in two ways – as a “wrap around” file and as a “one shot” file.
A wrap around file shall, when full, override the oldest information with the new incoming data. A one shot
file shall store information to the limits of the defined capacity. The system shall audibly annunciate the
fact that a one shot file is almost full and initiate a COS message.
It shall be possible to select the system activity to be stored in the historical files. Options shall include:
Selected (or all) change of state information (Off/On as well as Alarm/Normal)
Selected (or all) hours run information
Selected (or all) analogue information (trend logs)
Selected (or all) meter and consumption information (trend and data logs)
Any combination of the above
The system shall historically record all alarms and data for subsequent retrieval.
Hours run information from each plant shall be recorded and automatically printed (in a ‘plant run’ report) at
the end of each week.
Help Function
A help feature shall be provided to guide system operators in the selection or operation of system
functions. It shall be possible for the operator to display help pages via operation of a single help key.
Operator Functions
It shall be possible to alter existing or enter new programmes, display report (on visual display terminals or
printers) display point information, command system points (including controller parameters) and perform
similar functions on-line from the “signed-on” visual display terminal. Examples of functions which shall be
able to be performed by authorised operators include:
Display point status information
Altering system control parameters.

Manually initiating time and event programmes.
Displaying system logs and reports.
Altering time schedules and creating new time schedules.
Altering event programmes and creating new event programmes.
Assigning operator access levels and sign-on codes.
Downline and upline loading programmes to controllers.
Reviewing historical data.
Creating or modifying historical logging files.
Altering controller control strategies and creating new control strategies.
Assigning new input/output points.
Altering existing, or assigning new descriptors or action messages.
Downline and upline loading programmes to controllers.
Other similar functions.
Response Times
General
The response times detailed below are the maximum acceptable response times for various
sequences/processes in the DDC System. (Note operators terminal shall mean VDU and/or printer as
appropriate). The times shall be achieved with a fully configures and operational system (as defined
herein) and shall not be affected by addition of spare hardware or software as specified.
Alarm Displays
The time for activation of an alarm (at the source) to registration on the DDC operator’s terminal shall not
exceed five seconds.
Change of State Registration on Operator’s Terminal
The time from activation of a change of status or value of a controller input, to the update of the input in the
data base and registration on the DDC System Operator’s terminal shall not exceed ten seconds.
Graphic Displays
The time from activation of an alarm or change of status or value of an input, to the registration of this new
information on a displayed graphic shall not exceed 20 seconds.
The time for entry of a request for a graphic display until complete output of such display shall not exceed
20 seconds.
System Logs and Reports
The time from execution of a request for a system log or report to commencement of the printout or display
of that report shall not exceed 20 seconds.
Historical Data Retrieval
The time from execution of a request for display of historical data to commencement of the display shall not
exceed 30 seconds.
Event Initiated Programmes

The time from occurrence of an event (at the source) to the activation of an associated event programme
shall not exceed 10 seconds.
Manually Initiated Commands
The time from execution of a manual command (via the system operator’s terminals) to response of the
commanded item shall not exceed 5 seconds.
CONTROL PRIORITIES.
Controllers shall respond to programme control in the following priority (highest priority is listed first):
Source Action
Controller : Fire Mode Control
Controller : Power Fail Restart
Portable Operator's Terminal/Central Equipment : Power Fail Restart
Portable Operator's Terminal/Central Equipment : Manual override from

operator's terminal
Portable Operator's Terminal/Central Equipment : Time Schedule override
Controller : Local control programme
Thus, the programme shall be arranged such that manual override of equipment (dampers, etc.) will not
prevent correct operation of plant during power fail and fire modes. It may be necessary to effect override
control of equipment via a parameter change in the DDC programme, rather than 'forcing' controller
outputs/inputs to ensure this priority operation.
CONTROL PANELS
The DDC equipment, together with associated relays, power supplies and ancillary devices shall be
installed in the Mechanical Services panels.
All control items shall be mounted on a removable panel within the control panel.
ENVIRONMENT
The entire DDC system (inclusive of all power supplies and input/output devices) shall operate
satisfactorily in the ambient conditions normally encountered in non-air conditioned spaces (up to 60oC).
Should ventilation of control panels be required to achieve this then the costs associated with such shall be
included in the tender.
POWER SUPPLY
The controllers shall be powered from the Building Essential Power supply at each mechanical services
switchboard. All transformers, voltage regulators, power conditioning, surge suppressors and similar items
required to ensure safe and correct operation of the system shall be included.
07.12.4 TEMPERATURE SENSORS.
Temperature sensors shall be of the resistance bulb or thermistor type with ranges selected to suit the
particular application. Sensors shall be housed such that access to terminal strips and cabling can only be
achieved by removal of a cover.
Duct sensors shall be of the averaging type with capillary adequately supported to prevent sagging.
Sensors shall be mounted such that effects of radiation from heating elements are minimised.
Insertion sensors shall be mounted to ensure that a rapid response to changing temperature (of the
sensed medium) is achieved.

Calibration of sensors (to compensate for non-linear characteristics, line resistance and similar items) shall
be achieved in the DDC controller's programme (where connected to the DDC or separate system). No
field calibration shall be required.
Temperature sensors shall be such that when used in conjunction with the DDC controller or a separate
controller the accuracy of the displayed value is + 0.1K.
07.12.5 STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS.
Static pressure sensors shall be of differential pressure type to accurately sense the static pressure and
shall be adjustable to suit the application. The sensor must be capable of withstanding a total pressure
differential pressure of 1000 pa without failure.
07.12.6 FAN STATUS INDICATION.
Air flow pressure switches shall be used to indicate the status of selected fans as previously specified.

07.13 CONTROLS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
07.13.1 SYSTEM OPERATION
The system will operate completely automatically and independent of any “host” computer or operator
station. All time programs event sequences, DDC etc. occur automatically within the DCU.
The following DDC Control descriptions illustrate the base functionality of the control system. These are
provisional. The MSSC is to prepare a draft full functional description for the system which is to be subject
to DSA review and approval.
07.13.2 VRV/VRF AND SPLIT SYSTEMS
Each plant will be started and stopped from the local hard wired controllers once enabled from the BMS. The
enable shall be time and ambient controlled and override
The system will modulate in sequence to maintain a required zone space temperature.
On receipt of a building fire alarm or building security activation, then all units will be stopped.
Exam Mode and Over-Ride
The operation all systems will be started and stopped from a central hard wired key switch with activation/ run
neon., The switch shall be located within the Staff room, final location will be confirmed onsite
All of the system will modulate in sequence to maintain a required zone space temperatures.
On receipt of a building fire alarm or building security activation, then all units will be stopped.
Holiday Over-Ride
A minimum of fifteen date blocks shall be provided to disable the occupied and holding time clocks during
holidays.
If a particular air handler unit is required to run during a holiday period, then the holiday block displayed on its
graphic can be manually set to “OFF” or “ON”.
After Hours Over-Ride
On receipt of a call for after hours air conditioning via local push buttons, the associated unit will be started with
full control of heating and cooling. The unit will provide air conditioning for a pre-set time (initially 1 hour) and
then shut down..
The run indicator light on the after hours panel will be illuminated whenever the particular unit is running.
Automatic Restart
Provide a software programme to automatically restart field equipment on a restoration of power following a
power failure.
A defined time delay between individual equipment restart shall be provided.

07.13.3 COMMS ROOM SYSTEMS
Each plant will be started and stopped from the local hard wired controllers once enabled from the BMS. The
CRAC unit shall be the primary operation, with the wall split system operating as standby only.
The system will modulate in sequence to maintain a required zone space temperature and humidity.
The systems shall run 24hrs, 365 days per year.
07.13.4 TOILET AND OTHER CENTRAL FANS
The toilet exhaust fans will be started under their own time schedule or when any associated fan coil units run.
If a fault occurs on the duty motor fan status, then the duty motor will be stopped, the standby motor started
and an alarm generated. An engraved plate with Run and Fault Lights shall be provided for each system, on
the ceiling adjacent to each toilet block.
If a fault occurs on the standby motor, then an alarm will be generated but the motor will not be stopped. A
faulted motor will require to be reset from the operators terminal.
07.13.5 MINOR EXHAUST FANS
The exhaust fans will be started from a local switch. The switch panel will include run and fault neons.

IO schedule.
TYPICAL PLANT No: OFF DESCRIPTOR Com. Point Analogue Event Alarm
Inputs Outputs
Binary Ana. Binary Ana Range Limit
Typical VRV/VRF Unit 1 Unit Enable 1 1 1

1 Unit Status 1 1 1 1
1 Fan Coil Unit 1 1 1
1 Room Temperature 1 TEMP L.H. 3 1
1 Ambient Air 1 TEMP 3 1
1 O/A Fan 1 1 1 1
1 A/hrs Push Button 1 3 3
1 Fire Shutdown 1 1 1 1
Typical Inverter Split System 1 Unit Status 1 1 1 1

1 O/A Fan 1 1 1 1
1 Fire Shutdown 1 1 1 1
Typical Toilet Exhaust 2 Exhaust Fan 1 1 1 1
Fan Status 1 1 1 1
Master Power Meter 1 Power Meter 1 Pulse 3 3

07.14 NOISE AND VIBRATION
07.14.1 GENERAL
The mechanical services systems shall be selected and installed for quiet and vibration free operation in
compliance with the Australian Standard 2107 and 1359.51 noise and vibration levels.
Any item of plant or equipment not performing, causing undue noise or vibration levels or exceeds
specified sound power or vibration levels shall be replaced or rectified.
07.14.2 NOISE LEVELS
The noise rating levels form the basis of design and are required to be maintained for all conditions of
operation of plant, air distribution, airflow rates and temperature fluctuations.
The levels shall conform to “the Environmental Protection (Noise) Regulation 1987”, and the following:-
NR Levels
Area
(125 to 4000 Hz)
Occupied Air Conditioned Areas 37
Service and Toilet Areas 40
Site Boundary To Local Authority requirements
Balancing Criteria
Equipment shall not exceed the vibration levels, defined by the satisfactory levels of AS1359 and AS2625.

07.15 PAINTING AND FINISHES
07.15.1 GENERAL
All units, fans, cowls, ductwork, supports, pipework, electrical wiring and conduits exposed to view and
within plant rooms must be painted / powdercoated / anodised to Australian Standards colours and
approved by the Architect.
Capable and skilled tradesmen shall carry out painting. Paints shall be applied on correctly prepared
surfaces on exposed equipment, ductwork and supports. Where necessary, finished paintwork shall be
protected during the progress of site works, by suitable dust covers.
07.15.2 MATERIALS
Paints, fillers, temporary surface dressings and all other painting materials shall be the products of an
approved manufacturer and of the best quality in their respective types. Sealers, primers, undercoats and
finishing paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
07.15.3 EQUIPMENT AND METALWORK
Equipment supplied in a factory finished condition will be acceptable provided that the finish is of high
standard, acceptable in colour and does not require touching up.
Metalwork shall be painted with one coat of zinc chromate or similar approved metalwork primer and two
coats of full gloss enamel.
Galvanised steel surfaces shall be cleaned and given one complete coat of etching primer before applying
the finishing coats as above.
Prior to manufacture of the grilles or completion of the finishes, the MSSC shall request approval and
confirmation of colours and finishes.
07.16 LABELLING
07.16.1 GENERAL
All units, fans, cowls, ductwork, pipework, electrical wiring and conduits must be labelled to Australian
Standards colours and approved by the Consultant.
Unit indentation and number traffolyte labels shall be black on white. 30mm high with 10mm lettering.
Samples to be provided for approval.

07.17 PRACTICAL COMPLETION
07.17.1 GENERAL
The MSSC shall provide all facilities, skilled manpower, materials, instruments and tools to pressure test,
commission, test, balance and prove that the installation is operating correctly and ready to be handed
over.
Commissioning
Comprehensively commission the building services in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Codes. As
a minimum the commission shall extend to:
Mechanical Services
Building Management System
Electrical systems including metering systems
The CIBSE Commission codes shall be the minimum standard for all non mechanical services.
All As Installed details of the services
Provide a complete set of as-built drawings for all mechanical, electrical and hydraulic systems and a
comprehensive Operations and Maintenance (O&M) manual.
Refer to the General Requirements worksection for detailed submission requirements.
Complete commissioning report
Provide a report which confirms that commissioning of each system or feature is in compliance with the
contract documents. The report must also include a documented list of outstanding commissioning issues,
records of all functional/commissioning testing undertaken and list any seasonal testing required in the
future.
Training
Provide comprehensive training to ensure that a building managers or staff have all the information and
understanding needed to operate and maintain the commissioned features and systems. Training issues
covered shall include:
- Design intent (including energy/environmental features);
- Review of controls set-up. Programming, alarms and troubleshooting;
- O&M manuals;
- Building operation (start-up, normal operation, unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover and
shutdown);
- Interactions with other systems;
- Optimising energy efficiency;
- Occupational Health & Safety (OH&S) issues;
- Maintenance requirements and sourcing replacements; and
- Occupant satisfaction feedback.

07.17.2 BUILDING TUNING
Provide 12 months building tuning after handover. The tuning shall include monitoring of system
performance (including energy efficiency and consumption) and adjustment of system
parameters/operation to:
- Verify and ensure that systems are performing at their optimum efficiency during all climatic
variations for the occupied building;
- Tune systems to optimise time schedules to be best match occupant needs and system
performance; and
- Aligning the systems operations to the attributes of the built space it serves.
As a minimum:
- Review system operation and performance on a quarterly basis and adjust systems to improve
performance where necessary. The review should include assessment against:
- Indoor Environment Quality (comfort)
Provide a quarterly report outputs.
Calibration checks of the service after 6 months operation.
07.17.3 COMMISSIONING
During commissioning the following generalised list of items shall be attended to:
Ensure that all control elements are functioning correctly and are calibrated.
Ensure all filters are clean.
Check for unreasonable noise and vibration.
Any defects noted with the existing equipment or control systems during this phase shall not become the
financial responsibility of the MSSC. Any items of defect found shall be noted in with costs of rectification.
Approval shall be received prior to commencing any repairs or upgrading of equipment at the site not
described in the scope of work or shown on the drawing.
07.17.4 TESTING AND BALANCING
The air systems shall be balanced generally in the order of -0 + 10% of the units rated and specified
quantities. Each balancing operation shall have the resulting figures recorded.
07.18 WARRANTY MAINTENANCE
The MSSC shall allow for complete parts and labour warranty of the new equipment for a period of twelve
months from the date of practical completion.
Replacement components shall have twelve (12) months warranty from the date of replacement.
Warranty maintenance shall apply to all equipment provided under this contract.
07.19 AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS
All construction drawings must be correctly brought up to date to reflect all field changes and are a true and
accurate representation of the actual installations. These drawing shall include the following:-

- Complete layout drawings showing the actual sizes and locations of all ducts, pipework, dampers,
supply outlets, return inlets, fresh air intakes, etc.
- Complete plant and/or equipment layout drawings with full identification of each and every item of
equipment.
- Complete control wiring diagrams showing all electrical controls, relays, cut-outs, timing devices,
inter-locks, fuses, over-load, contactors, solenoids, starters, etc. with all items clearly identified as
to type and function, and ‘as installed’ switchboard layout drawings.
- As installed wiring diagrams and switchboard layouts shall be supplied in each switchboard.
Drawings shall be kept up to date with any changes which occur during the Maintenance and
Defects Liability Period and at the end of this period and before final payment is made one (1)
complete set of drawings shall be issued and placed in each switchboard.
- Drawings shall be provided in DWG, PDF and hard copy
07.20 INSTALLATION MANUAL
Three copies of installation manuals shall be supplied, and Practical Completion will not be granted unil the
final manuals are provided.
The manual shall include ‘As Constructed’ specification and a full description of the installation and
function of the various systems. The manual shall be neatly prepared and bound in a white vinyl hard back
folder with stamped gold lettering on the front in the following format:
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FOR
MECHANICAL SERVICES
‘PROJECT NAME’
Consulting Engineers:
DSA Pty Ltd
Mechanical Services Contractor:

‘As Appropriate’
In addition, the words ‘Installation Manual’ and the project name shall be gold stamped along the spine of
the folder.
The contents of the manual shall be in the following general format:
Section 1 – Index
Index all sub-divisions of each section including lists of drawings, equipment, etc. for quick reference.
Section 2 – General Description and Capacities of Installations
Divide into sub-sections for each individual air conditioning, mechanical ventilation or mechanical systems
as appropriate and include full details of design, criteria, capacities, return and fresh air flow rates, dry and
wet bulb temperatures, cooling and/or heating duties, etc.
Section 3 – Equipment
Sub-divide as for Section 2 and list all major items of equipment installed complete with manufacturer’s
name, agent’s name, model and/or type No., serial No., size, design ratings and including all relevant data
necessary for re-ordering or replacing the equipment or components of same.

Section 4 – Installation, Maintenance and Operating Instructions
Sub-divide as for Section 2 and include manufacturer’s installation, maintenance and operating instructions
for each items of equipment such as air filters, compressors, controls, cooling towers, fans, motors, etc.
Section 5 – Plant Operating Instructions
Sub-divide as for Section 2 and provide a complete description and correct sequence of all actions
necessary to start-up, operate and shut-down all plant.
In addition the instructions shall include information on the immediate action to be taken in the event of
fault conditions arising and shall conclude with the following sentence in large lettering:
‘FOR SERVICE CALL TEL. NO……………………..’
Section 6 – Performance and Commissioning Test Results
This section shall be sub-divided as for Section 2 and shall include all performance test results as outlined
in previous clauses.
Section 7 – As Constructed Drawings
This section shall be sub-divided as and shall include all As Constructed Layout, Section, Electrical,
pipework and associated drawings.
The drawings shall be provided in hard copy (To Scale), PDF on Disks and DWG to the current BMW
Standards.
07.21 SERVICE LOG BOOKS
Supply and compile a Service Log Book.
Log Books shall be supplied prior to practical completion.
The Log Book is to be used to record all service, maintenance and corrective works.
07.22 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
07.22.1 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING REQUIREMENTS
Routine maintenance and servicing shall be carried out for a period of twelve (12) months from date of
practical completion to the end of the maintenance and defects liability period.
Regular maintenance shall be carried out on a quarterly basis and emergency service shall be carried out
on a 24 hour call out basis.
Maintenance procedures shall be as appropriate to ensure the safe and proper operation of all systems
and shall be in accordance with current standard requirements of the Building Act and Regulations.
Routine maintenance shall include not less than:
- Checking and adjustment of all drives.
- Checking filters.
- Lubrication of all bearing as necessary.
- Checking the operating of all electrical switchgear, including setting and operation of motor
overloads, bi-annually.

- Checking the operation, setting and calibration of all controls, quarterly.
- Checking of all motors for temperatures, rise, operating current and leakage, quarterly.
- Cleaning as necessary of drip trays, strainers and other sediment collecting items, which may
become fouled.
- Checking, testing and reporting on chemical treatment as required, quarterly.
- Checking, testing and report on all fire detection and

protection systems including fire shut down controls, bi-annually.
- Arranging for a testing authority to carry out tests on refrigerant and oil samples for impurities and
submission of a full report.
- Removal of oil and drier cartridges on compressors and refrigeration.
- Checking of all motor starters and relay controls.
- Checking all system safety controls.
- Checking, testing and reporting on a building fire safety control test. This shall include fire detection
and protection systems routine maintenance, fire and smoke dampers.
All maintenance procedures and intervals shall be strictly in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
recommendations, adapted as necessary for the particular installation duty including conditions such as
equipment frequent cycling and dusty environment.
The last maintenance visit prior to the end of the Maintenance and Defects Liability period shall be a major
visit for complete service and shall include the following:
At the conclusion of each maintenance visit a check list of items serviced shall be completed, the service
book shall be signed and check list shall be submitted to a responsible person on site. Within seven (7)
days of the date of the service visit, a report shall be forwarded together with a copy of the check list to the
approving authority.
Retention moneys or bank guarantee will not be released until twelve (12) correctly dated and completed
reports have been received at the appropriate times and approved. Should these twelve (12) inspections
not be completed within the maintenance and defects liability period, then that period, including all
equipment warranties will be extended until the twelve (12) inspections have been completed.
07.23 REFRIGERANT CHARGE
Any refrigerant lost during the maintenance period shall be replaced unless such loss is caused by wilful
damage to the plant by others. The plant shall be fully charged at the end of the maintenance and defects
liability period.
07.24 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS
All defects shall be promptly rectified. Retention moneys or bank guarantee will not be released until all
outstanding defects notified during the maintenance and defects liability period have been rectified and
completion of such work subsequently advised in writing to the approving authority.

07.25 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT
07.25.1 GENERAL
The following schedules have been prepared as a guide for tendering purposes. They do, however, form a
summary of the preceding Clauses in the Specification and should be read in conjunction with the Project
Drawings.
Air quantities and temperatures may be changed slightly to suit the particular manufacturers equipment
providing full details are submitted with the tender, any changes shall not affect the “Guarantee of
Performance” or conflict with any By-Laws, Statutory Requirements, Public Health Requirements or the
overall design in general.
Pressure drops and fan static pressures have been given as a guide for tendering purposes only. Allow for
all pressure drops through the equipment offered and to suit the ductwork and pipework layouts prepared
as part of the Construction and Workshop Drawings. The schedule shall not be used direct for technical
purposes when order equipment

07.26 MECHANICAL SERVICES WORKSHOP DRAWING CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST
DRAWING CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST
As following, this form shall be completed and submitted with each and all shop drawings
Checked
Item Reference Document
(Y/N)
( ) Current Architectural drawings co-ordinated
( ) Current Structural drawings co-ordinated
( ) Current Electrical drawings co-ordinated
( ) Current Hydraulic drawings co-ordinated
Reflected ceiling plans shown on drawings including lights, detectors, signage

( )
and structure co-ordinated
( ) Compliance with specification co-ordinated
( ) Handing of mechanical services plant co-ordinated
( ) Mechanical contractor engineering checks completed.
Builders access panels checked for compliance with safe access to plant and
( )
equipment for serving and maintenance.
Allowance for checking of drawing complies with the construction programme

( )
allowing 10 working days for review.
I/we certify the above construction co-ordination between all trades and works is complete in all
respects without exclusions or exceptions.
Signature:
Signature: Signature:
Date:
Date: Date:
Name:
Name: Name:
Mechanical Sub Contractor Mechanical Sub Contractor Site Contractor/Builder

Construction Manager Project Manager

07.27 SAMPLE PROGRESS CLAIM FORMAT
PROJECT NAME
MECHANICAL SERVICES
Project - 5921
PROGRESS CLAIM No: One

PROGRESS CLAIM DATE 30/10/2016
Works Value Contractors Claim DSA Pty Ltd Valuation

ITEM Description $ % Value % Value
1 Chillers $ 279,760.00 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -

2 Boilers $ 40,931.04 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
3 Pumps $ 21,304.80 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
4 Air Handling Units $ 87,801.60 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
5 VRV Airconditioning Units $ 42,351.36 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
6 Package Air Conditioning Units $ 20,659.20 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
7 Variable Speed Drives $ 12,912.00 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
8 Ventilation Fans $ 16,785.60 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
9 Pipework $ 220,795.20 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
10 Pipework Insulation $ 111,043.20 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
11 Ductwork $ 295,900.00 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
12 Electrical & Controls $ 307,951.20 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
13 Painting $ 6,456.00 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
14 Cool Room equipment $ 10,652.40 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
15 Cool Rooms $ 8,521.92 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
16 Evaporative Cooler $ 2,797.60 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
17 Kitchen Canopy $ 11,362.56 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
18 Air Diffusion $ 52,293.60 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
19 New Building Fitout $ 12,072.72 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
20 Cultural and Learning Upgrade $ 12,072.72 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
21 Installation Labour $ 12,072.72 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
22 Commissioning $ 17,108.40 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
23 Transport and Cranage $ 27,438.00 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
24 Drafting $ 20,444.00 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
25 Installation Manuals $ 20,445.00 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
26 Service and Maintenance $ 34,216.80 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -
27 Administration and Supervision $ 63,607.22 0.0 $ - 0.0 $ -

TENDER FORM 1 OF 6
PROJECT: PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE

SOUTHERN RIVER – STAGE 1
MECHANICAL SERVICES
Tender for the supply, delivery, installation, testing and maintenance of the mechanical systems as
specified and detailed in DSA Pty Ltd Specification and Drawings’.
FULL SCOPE OPTION REDUCED SCOPE OPTION
Air Conditioning Systems
Fixed Lump Sum (Excluding GST) $ $
Exhaust Systems
BMS Control Systems
TOTAL FIXED LUMP SUM
(Excluding. GST) $ $
TOTAL FIXED LUMP SUM
(Including. GST) $ $
NAME OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
ADDRESS OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
SIGNATURE OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
DATE ...................................................................................................................

TENDER FORM 2 OF 6

MECHANICAL SERVICES
SCHEDULE OF COSTS BREAKDOWN
We advise that our Tender includes work as described below to be carried out in each case by the sub-
contractor or supplier stated.
SECTION OF WORK PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTOR
VRV SYSTEM $ .............................................................
SPLIT SYSTEMS $ .............................................................
EXHAUST FANS $ .............................................................
VSD DRIVE $ .............................................................
DUCTWORK $ .............................................................
PIPEWORK $ .............................................................
PIPEWORK INSULATION $ .............................................................
ELECTRICAL $ .............................................................
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS $ .............................................................
DRAWINGS AND MANUALS $ .............................................................
PAINTING $ .............................................................
SERVICE DURING THE MAINTENANCE PERIOD $ .............................................................
MISCELLANEOUS $ .............................................................
NAME OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
DATE ...................................................................................................................

TENDER FORM 3 OF 6

MECHANICAL SERVICES
If awarded the contract, we will sub-let the following section of work to the sub-contractors named,
provided that the sub-contractors meet with the approval of the Architect.
SECTION OF WORK PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTOR
VRV SYSTEM MANUFACTURER .......................................................................................................
INVERTER UNIT MANUFACTURER ...................................................................................................
BMS MANUFACTURER .......................................................................................................................
VSD DRIVE MANUFACTURER ...........................................................................................................
EXHAUST AND SUPPLY AIR FAN MANUFACTURER ......................................................................
PIPEWORK ...........................................................................................................................................
DUCTWORK .........................................................................................................................................
INSULATION ........................................................................................................................................
ELECTRICAL ........................................................................................................................................
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................
PAINTING .............................................................................................................................................
SERVICE DURING THE
MAINTENANCE PERIOD .....................................................................................................................
NAME OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
DATE ...................................................................................................................

TENDER FORM 4 OF 6

MECHANICAL SERVICES
SCHEDULE OF VARIATION RATES
All rates below shall include, supply, installation, transport, workshop / as-installed drawings,
commissioning, warranty, site allowances, supervision, project management, overheads and profit.
Pipework Size Addition Rate Deletion Rate
Straight Copper Uninsulated 12mm $/m $/m
15mm $/m $/m

25mm $/m $/m
Elbow 90º Copper Uninsulated 12mm $ each $ each
15mm $ each $ each
25mm $ each $ each
Branch Copper Uninsulated 12mm $ each $ each
15mm $ each $ each
25mm $ each $ each
DDC Make / Model Addition Rate Deletion Rate

Room Temperature Sensor $ each $ each
Differential Pressure Sensor $ each $ each
Duct Temperature Sensor $ each $ each

Damper Actuator $ each $ each
Software development / configuration and $/point $/point

database design per digital or analogue
point
System Engineering $/hr $/hr
Software Engineering $/hr $/hr
Site Installation $/hr $/hr

Site Commissioning $/hr $/hr
NAME OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
DATE ...................................................................................................................

TENDER FORM 5 OF 6

MECHANICAL SERVICES
SCHEDULE OF VARIATION RATES
All rates below shall include, supply, installation, transport, workshop / as-installed drawings,
commissioning, warranty, site allowances, supervision, project management, overheads and profit.
Ductwork Size Addition Rate Deletion Rate
Straight Uninsulated 200x200 $/m $/m
350x350 $/m $/m
400x600 $/m $/m
90º Bend c/w turning vanes 200x200 $ each $ each
350x350 $ each $ each
Branch c/w splitter damper 200x200 $ each $ each
Ductwork Internal Insulation per square 25mm $/m² $/m²

metre (foil faced)
38mm $/m² $/m²
50mm $/m² $/m²
Ductwork External Insulation per square 25mm $/m² $/m²

metre (foil faced)
50mm $/m² $/m²
Diffusion Size Addition Rate Deletion Rate
Swirl diffuser c/w neck adaptor, internally 600x600 $ each $ each

insulated cushion head, 4000mm flexible
duct and duct spigot with damper
Return air grille c/w line of sight baffle. 600x600 $ each $ each
NAME OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
DATE ...................................................................................................................

TENDER FORM 6 OF 6

MECHANICAL SERVICES
LABOUR RATES
Labour rates applicable for work time on site and in factory and shall include GST, all loadings and
allowances apart from overhead and profit covered by item L below.
Rate Per Hour Time x

Normal Time Time x 2
1½
Ductwork Factory Manufacture $ $ $

Ductwork - Site Installation $ $ $
Pipework - Factory Manufacture $ $ $
Supervision - Site Installation $ $ $
Commissioning $ $ $
Drawing Office $ $ $
Maintenance $ $ $
1. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

Mark up to be applied on cost to purchase materials and equipment. $ ...............................................
(Including GST)
2. SPECIALIST SUB-SUB-CONTRACTORS
Mark up to be applied on sub-sub-contracts (e.g. pipework, electrical
controls, painting). $ ...............................................
(Including GST)
3. OVERHEADS AND PROFITS
Overheads and profits on total contract value. $............................................
(Including GST)
NAME OF TENDERER ...................................................................................................................
DATE ...................................................................................................................

08 HYDRAULIC 0801 Hydraulic systems
0801 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

General: Provide the hydraulic services, as documented.
This section of the Specification forms part of the contract documents. It is to be read in conjunction
with the Preliminaries section of the Specification for full meaning. Both the Contractor and
Subcontractor are deemed to be fully informed of the contents and the requirements of (in case of the
Contractor) this Specification section and associated drawings and (in case of the Subcontractor) the
relevant sections of all other Specification trade sections, including the Preliminaries and all other
relevant drawings.
The Hydraulics Contractor is referred to the Preliminaries section of the Specification for the
requirements which relate to work arising from and related to the works specified in this section.
1.2 APPROVED PLUMBING CONTRACTORS
The following Licensed Plumbing Sub-Contractors are approved to tender for the proposed
Providence Christian College – Primary School Stage 1 project
- Selected Plumbing (Contact: Mr. Wade Smith Ph: 9253 9200)
- RMP Commercial Plumbing (Contact: Mr. Rob Morrison Ph: 0419 190 834)
- Wilcox and Co. (Contact: Mr. Adam Wilcox Ph: 9330 1433)
- Impulse Plumbing (Contact: Mr. Neil Clinch Ph: 9360 3755)
- Cooper and Jones Plumbing (Contact: Mr. Kiel Tilley Ph: 9302 2432)
- Nemjon Plumbing (Contact: Mr. Russell Green Ph: 9407 9899)
The Contractor shall nominate one of the above approved Plumbing Sub-Contractors to undertake the
hydraulics section of work within their Tender submission. Failure to nominate an approved Plumbing
Sub-Contractor within the Contractor Tender submission will deem the Tender non-conforming.
The tenderer shall be fully aquatinted with all conditions relating to the contract. The tenderers shall be
deemed to have examined the tender documents, the means of access to the site, the availability and
award conditions of labour and have obtained all necessary information as to risk and contingencies
which could affect this tender. The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied themselves as to the
correctness and sufficiency of their tender to fulfil their obligations, availability of materials, they shall,
before submitting a tender, notify the Superintendent and obtain clarification prior to delivering tender.
The only interpretation which shall be recognised shall be those given to the tenderer in writing by the
Superintendent.
Notwithstanding the Preliminary clauses and other contract documents pertaining to this requirement,
the Tenderer, by submission of his tender acknowledges that he has, and shall be deemed to have,
inspected the sites and determined and allowed for all conditions on and surrounding the site including
but not limited to staged construction requirements and document, security arrangements, access,
existence, location and condition of all above and below ground services, building works and
structures and adjoining buildings all as found at the time of tender and so may affect the pricing and
carrying out of the contract
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
This Specification details the engineering and quality assurance requirements for the supply
installation, testing, commissioning and warranty of the Hydraulic Services installation.
The work shall include all necessary minor and incidental work required to implement the intent and
meaning of this specification and its associated drawings. The hydraulic services installation shall be
undertaken and completed in strict accordance with the technical requirements of this specification
and to the arrangements generally shown on the Hydraulic Services drawings.
Supply all manufactured items, materials, labour, plant, delivery, tools, appliances and fixings
necessary for the proper execution of the complete hydraulic services installation as described in this
specification and/or shown on contract drawings as required to complete the work to the satisfaction of
the Superintendent and the relevant regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
Providence Christian College
Primary School – Stage 1 1 Tender Issue - REV_0_11/01/21
The entire hydraulics hydraulic services work shall comply with all the latest relevant regulations,
Standards and regulatory authority requirements. The cost of any materials or equipment required to
comply with all the latest relevant regulations, Standards and regulatory authority requirements shall
be included in the Tender whether specifically shown or described in the Tender documents or not.
All materials and equipment shall be the best of their respective kinds, complying with the relevant
Standards. All materials and equipment shall be new and delivered to site with the manufacturer’s
labels intact.
The scope of work is described briefly in the following clauses and more fully in the remainder of the
Specification.
In particular the work shall include, but not limited to, the supply, detailed design (where required),
installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of the following;-
- Inspect the site, ascertain and include for all on site conditions.
- Provide and install all sanitary plumbing including sanitary fixtures and all necessary fittings, traps,
sink basket strainers, waste pipes, acoustic insulation, vent risers, air admittance valves, inspection
openings positioned as required in all discharge pipes and drains.
- Provide and install all property sewerage including drains, clean out points, manhole covers,
overflow relief traps, inspection openings and connection to the existing property sewer at locations
indicated on the drawings.
- Provide and install all building stormwater drainage including allowance for locating and removal of
obsolete stormwater soakwells, sumps and drains. New uPVC rain water pipes, direct connection of
metal rainwater pipes, overflows, outlets, acoustic insulation, sump boxes, relief points, grated
channels, threshold channels and soakwells
- Provide and install potable and non-potable cold water services including connection to the existing
water services, new pipework, valve pits, taps, outlets, hose taps, recessed wall boxes, isolation
valves, backflow valves, valve boxes, branches and connections to fixtures and equipment.
- Provide and install hot water services including water heaters, pipework, thermal insulation,
branches, temperature control valves, isolations valves and connections to fixtures and equipment.
- Provide and install fire services including new fire booster assembly, pipework, connection to the
existing fire service, new isolation valves, valve boxes, fire hydrants, anti-tamper covers to all
hydrants, extended hose length signage, numbering of all fire valves / boxes, fire service block plans
and system testing by a FPA accredited third party contractor.
- Provide and install drainage and water provisions to all mechanical plant and equipment.
- Provide and install approved fire stop products to all penetrations traversing through all suspended
floors and where required fire compartment walls.
- Allow for acoustic treatment of all hydraulic pipework penetrating through acoustic rated walls.
- Submit shop drawings for review and approval for all fabricated stainless-steel fixtures, recessed
hose tap wall cabinets, door threshold drains, stainless steel troughs, chilled water drink units, core
drill details of structural elements and fire booster block plan(s)
- Provide and install signage and/or painting to all above ground pipework, isolation valves, valve pits,
non-potable water outlets, fire booster cabinet, fire hydrants, and hose tap boxes
- Provide and install thermal insulation to all hot water pipework and above ground condensate drains
- Provide and install acoustic insulation to all above ground sanitary and stormwater drains within the
building traversing through all habitable areas.
- Inspection, testing and certification of the complete fire hydrant services installation by a FPA (Fire
Protection Association Australia) accredited and DFES approved third party fire services testing
contractor in accordance with AS1851, AS2419 and DFES operational requirements.
- Allow for all other necessary ancillary items of equipment, scaffolding, penetrations, sleeves, lights,
specialist sub contractors, manufactures, etc. to satisfactorily complete these works to the
satisfaction of the superintendent.
- Provide all relevant test records / sheets, photos, CCTV drain footage etc.. prior to practical
completion to verify that the installation is in accordance with all relevant Australian standards and
the Contract documents
- Provide As Constructed drawings and a separate record of ALL in-ground services prepared and
certified by a Licensed Surveyor prior to practical completion.

To ascertain the scope of work the Specification shall be read in conjunction with ALL drawings. The
Superintendent shall be advised in writing of all discrepancies prior to close of Tenders and all
discrepancy adjustments are deemed to have been incorporated into the Tender.
2 DESIGN FOR DURABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY
Design for durability: Develop the design so the systems achieve the documented performance,
reliability, service life, energy efficiency and safety requirements, and are easily maintainable.
Access for maintenance: Develop the design so the systems conform to ACCESS FOR
MAINTENANCE in the General requirements work section.
2.1 PRECEDENCE
General
Work sections and referenced documents:
- The requirements of other work sections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this
work section.
- The requirements of the work sections override conflicting requirements of their referenced
documents.
- The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements.
2.2 CROSS REFERENCES
General
Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s):
- 0171 General requirements.
2.3 INTERPRETATION DEFINITIONS
General: For the purposes of this work section the definitions given in the 0171 General requirements
work section apply.
2.4 STANDARDS
General
Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1, AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB 32.
Sanitary plumbing and drainage: To AS/NZS 3500.2.
Water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.1.
Where specified or implied, Australian Standard Specification and British Standard Specification or
Codes shall be the latest revisions.
Materials and Workmanship shall comply with following Australian Standards unless otherwise
specified:
AS 1260 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for sewerage applications
AS 1342 Precast concrete drainage pipes
AS 1345 Identification of the contents of piping, conduits and ducts
AS 1415 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for soil, waste and vent (SWV) applications
AS 1432 Copper tubes for water, gas and sanitation
AS 1464 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for gas reticulation
AS 1477 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for pressure applications
AS 1589 Copper and copper alloy waste fittings
AS 1631 Cast grey and ductile iron non pressure pipes and fittings
AS 2032 Code of practice for installation of uPVC pipe systems
AS 2118.2 Automatic fire sprinkler systems: Wall wetting sprinklers (Drenchers)
AS 2280 Ductile iron pressure pipes and fittings
AS 2419.1 Fire hydrant installations
AS 2758 Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes
AS 2977 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes for pressure applications - compatible with cast iron pipe
outside diameters.
AS 3500 National plumbing and drainage code - parts 1-4
AS 3517 Capillary fittings of copper and copper alloy for non-pressure sanitary plumbing
applications
AS 3688 Water supply - copper and copper alloy compression and capillary fittings and threaded
end connectors
AS 3725 Loads on buried concrete pipes AS 3972 Portland and blended cement
AS 256 Plastics Pipe Laying Design Keep an onsite copy of AS3500.
2.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
General
Requirement: Conform to the 0171 General requirements work section.
The Tenderer shall obtain a full set of Tender Documents including Architectural, Structural, Civil,
Mechanical, Electrical and Landscaping Services drawings and specifications. All information
indicated on the Architectural, Structural, Civil, Landscaping, Mechanical and Electrical Services
drawings and specifications that affect this section of the work but not indicated on the hydraulics
services drawings shall be deemed to be incorporated into the Tender.
Plumbing drawings do not show all the Architectural, Electrical, Mechanical and Structural details. Any
information involving accurate measurement on site or buildings shall be taken from the previously
mentioned drawings or at the site.
Should any discrepancies occur they shall be notified to the Superintendent Representative before the
work proceeds.
The hydraulic services drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by pipe work
and equipment etc, to be installed under this contract. Where the required pipe work is only shown
diagrammatically, the pipe work shall be installed in such a way as to conserve headroom and
interference as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. All pipe work
etc, shall be installed as close as practicable to ceilings, walls, floors, etc, unless otherwise shown or
specified.
The location of pipes, ducts, outlets, etc, may be altered at the direction of the Superintendent without
expense to the Principle provided that the change is made before the installation and does not
necessitate additional materials.
As the work progresses and before installation of fixtures and equipment that may interfere with the
interior treatment of the building, the Head Contractor shall consult with the Superintendent
Representative and obtain detailed drawings and instructions for the exact locations of such
equipment.
No contact variations will be approved for the tenderer not informing themselves of
information on the Architectural Drawings. It is the responsibility of the tenderer to ensure the
contractor has provided a full set of documents and specifications.
The drawings covering this section of work are as follows:
H01 Site Plan – Drain, Water & Fire 1:500
H02 Part Site Plan – Drain, Water & Fire 1:200
H03 Ground Floor Plan - Drain 1:100
H04 First Floor Plan – Drain 1:100
H05 Ground Floor Plan – Water 1:100
H06 First Floor Plan –Water 1:100
H07 Typical Details NTS
2.6 SUBMISSIONS
Maintenance program
General: Submit details of maintenance procedures and program, relating to installed plant and
equipment, 6 weeks before the date for practical completion. Indicate dates of service visits. State
contact telephone numbers of service operators and describe arrangements for emergency calls.
2.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Requirement: Conform to the 0171 General requirements work section.
Shop drawings
Standard: To AS 1100.101, AS 1100.201, AS 1100.301, AS 1100.401 and AS/NZS 1100.501 as
applicable.
Requirement: Submit detail drawings, showing the following:
- Fabricated stainless fixtures

- Recessed hose tap cabinets
- Domestic water and gas masonry valve pits.
- Structural slab and wall penetrations
- Schematic riser layouts and sections.
- Piping and other schematic drawings including numbering of each valve to correspond to valve tags
notation.
- Inclusions: Include the following on the drawings:
. Access openings, cover plates, valve boxes and access pits.
. Details of control panels including control and power diagrams.
. Insulation of piping, fittings and tanks.
- Location, capacity, type and other relevant details of water heaters, including supports and safe
trays.
. Location, type, grade and finish of piping, fittings, valves, meters and pipe supports.
. On-site detention pondage areas.
. Provision of a temporary fire hydrant service in the construction period.
. Provision of blue metal back fill to seepage drain system.
. Provision of erosion control measures.
. Provision of road barriers and lighting.
- Provision of site treatment and fire vehicle parking as required adjacent to the fire hydrant booster
inlet valve station.
. Provision of temporary sanitary accommodation for construction workers.
. Provision of trafficable cover plates in the public domain.
. Relevant survey levels.
. Site and floor set out points.
. Tank stands and supporting structures.
3 PRODUCTS
Equipment: Documented pump heads are based on provisional equipment selections and estimated
pressure drops. Before ordering equipment, calculate the respective system pressure losses based on
the equipment offered and layouts shown on the shop drawings and submit the proposed selections.
Submissions: Submit technical data for all items of plant and equipment. Data: Include at least the
following information in technical submissions:
- Assumptions.
- Calculations.
- Model name, designation and number.
- Capacity of all system elements.
- Country of origin and manufacture.
- Materials used in the construction.
- Size, including required clearances for installation.
- Certification of conformance to the applicable code or standard.
- Technical data schedules corresponding to the equipment schedules in the contract documents. If
there is a discrepancy between the two, substantiate the change.
- Manufacturers’ technical literature.
- Type-test reports.
3.1 INSPECTION NOTICE
Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following:
- Excavated surfaces.
- Concealed or underground services.
- Flow testing of the fire serice
4 EXECUTION
4.1 WORK ON EXISTING SYSTEMS

Demolition
General: Decommission, isolate, demolish and remove from the site all existing redundant equipment
from the forward work contract including minor associated components that become redundant as a
result of the demolition.
Breaking down: Disassemble or cut up equipment where necessary to allow removal.
Recovered materials: Recover all components associated with the listed items. Minimise damage
during removal and deliver to the locations documented.
4.2 EXISTING SYSTEMS
Condition of existing systems:
- If the existing condition does not conform to the requirements in the contract documents, submit
proposals to rectify the deficiencies with related costing, time and other impacts.
- Subject to the rectification works on existing systems, achieve the performance in the contract
documents.
4.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
General: Provide the accessories and fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the systems,
including taps, valves, outlets, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and
pumps.
Isolating valves: In addition to valves required to meet statutory requirements, provide valves so that
isolation of parts of the system for safe isolation of the system in the event of leaks or maintenance
causes a minimum of inconvenience to building occupants.
4.4 CONNECTIONS TO NETWORK UTILITY OPERATOR MAINS
General: Excavate to locate and expose the connection points and connect to the Network Utility
Operator mains. On completion, backfill and compact the excavation and reinstate surfaces and
elements which have been disturbed such as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips.
4.5 SUPPORT OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT OF ROOF MOUNTED PLANT AND
EQUIPMENT
Platforms: If a horizontal platform is required, or the area of the plant and equipment is extensive,
obtain the advice of a professional engineer for the documentation of a suitable platform.
Balustrades: If balustrades or screening are required, obtain the advice of a registered architect.
Roof level support: If any of the following apply to roof level support, obtain the advice of a professional
engineer:
- The total load from any unit of plant or equipment exceeds 500 kg.
- The load from a unit of plant or equipment to any single support point exceeds 100 kg.
- The average loading of plant and equipment over the area extending 1 m on all sides beyond the
plant and equipment exceeds 25 kg/m².
- Sloping roofs:
- Roof slope 10° or over: Adopt the roof material manufacturer’s documented installation procedures
or seek the advice of a professional engineer.
- Roof slope less than 10°: Provide appropriate continuous supporting members, compatible with the
roof material, laid parallel to the span of the roof sheeting. Extend the continuous support members
in both directions to the first purlin or joist that is over 1 m from the face of the plant or equipment it
supports.
4.6 SUPPORT OF GROUND LEVEL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Ground level
- If the ground slope is 15° or over, or the area of the plant and equipment is extensive, obtain the
advice of a professional engineer for the documentation of a suitable slab or platform.
- In all other cases, provide proprietary plastic or concrete supports installed with falls that achieve a
raised, impervious and water shedding bearing surface.
- Balustrades: If balustrades or screening are required, obtain the advice of a registered architect.
4.7 GREEN STAR
The Tenderer by submission of his tender acknowledges that he has, and shall be deemed to have,
determined and allowed for all GREENSTAR requirements but not limited to practical demonstration of
equipment, maintenance manuals, providing proof of purchase and installation of Green Star elements
for inclusion in submission.
4.8 PROPRIETARY ITEMS (SPECIFICATION BY EXAMPLE)
Requirement:
The Contractor shall provide and install the proprietary items, materials and goods specified herein.
Substitution:
Where a proprietary item, material, trade name, brand or catalogue number is referred to in the
contract documents, the Head Contractor may propose substituting a similar product equivalent in
form, function and quality, durability, appearance and the like to the approval of the Superintendent,
provided that:
- the Head Contractor has provided all necessary specifications, documentation, test results and the
like comparative information in respect of the proposed substitution to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent, and
- in the opinion of the Superintendent Representative the characteristics of type, quality, finish,
appearance, method of construction, durability and performance of the proposed substitution are not
less than those of the specified item, and
- where the specified product is a Western Australian product, the proposed substitution is also a
Western Australian product, and
- the Superintendent’s written approval of the proposed substitution has been obtained prior to its
implementation.
Such approval shall not be anticipated because of a similar approval having been given in a previous
contract.
UNOBTAINABLE ITEMS: In the event of a specified proprietary item being unobtainable, the
Contractor shall apply promptly to the Superintendent for further directions.
Should any items or materials and/or equipment be found to have been substituted without approval,
same shall be removed and replaced with the correct items as specified at no extra cost to the client.
4.9 APPRECIATION OF REQUIREMENTS
The Tenderer is deemed to have:
- Inspected the project documents (including all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Civil, Fire,
Landscape, Hydraulics and Electrical documents) and be cognisant of all conditions affecting the
sub-contract works;
- Inspected the site and existing buildings and ascertained local information required;
- Gathered all relevant regulations and requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction over the
project;
- assessed the work, materials and equipment necessary to carry out the intent of the specification;
- accurately assessed the time frame necessary to complete the work.
No consideration will be granted for misunderstanding the sub-contract works to be undertaken, or for
lack of knowledge of the conditions of the site.
Arrangements to inspect the facility will be coordinated by the Superintendent. Regulations
All plumbing and drainage work shall be carried out in accordance with the PLB and the National
Plumbing Code AS3500, the regulations of the Local Authority and to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent.
A full set of the current legislated AS3500 must be onsite at all times for reference.
All plumbing work shall be carried out by a plumber licensed by the Plumbers Licensing Board

All fire service work shall be carried out in accordance with the Building Code of Australia, the relevant
Australian Standards and to the satisfaction of Departments of Fire and Emergency services and
Rescue Services WA and the Superintendent.
A current legislated A2419 must be onsite at all times for reference.
All gas service shall be carried out in accordance with the ‘Australian Gas Association Installation
Code AG601-2013’ and to the satisfaction of Alinta Gas, Office of Energy and the Superintendent.
All gas service work shall be carried out by a plumber, who is an Approved Alinta Gas Installer.
A current legislated A5601 must be onsite at all times for reference.
Provide and install everything necessary to comply with the by-laws and regulations and relevant
Australian Standards even though not shown on the drawings or specifically mentioned herein.
5 SUPERVISION
A plumbing supervisor, licensed by the Plumbers Licensing Board, with seniority experience in the
type of works to be constructed and is authorised to receive and act upon instruction shall be on site at
all times.
6 PERMITS AND FEES
Make all applications, submit plans, pay all fees to all authorities having jurisdiction and obtain all
necessary permits in order to facilitate the uninterrupted installation of this section of the work.
It is the Head Contractor’s responsibility to pay all Water Corporation fees and charges.
Refer to provisional sum in Architectural specification
A receipt indicating the amount paid shall be presented to the Superintendent for the reimbursement.
It is the Sub Contractor’s responsibility to pay all other Plumbing related fees and charges.
7 SETTING OUT
Set out the pipe runs before the pouring of concrete and provide any sleeves, which may be necessary
to avoid cutting holes in finished work.
All sleeves shall be removable type and be removed from the structure prior to the installation of pipe
work.
Grout around all pipes installed through penetrations in concrete or masonry structure and finish off all
grouting with an approved two (2) hour fire resistant material to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.
All pre-fabricated sections must be fixed in position in ample time to avoid delay to other trades.
8 PROTECTION
All pipe work shall be protected against the entry of foreign matter at all times.
Sanitary fixtures shall be protected against damage and any item not considered in first class
condition on completion of the work, shall be removed and replaced at no expense of the Principal
upon receipt of notice from the Superintendent.
9 INSTRUCTING THE PRINCIPLE
Following the date of practical completion and before handing over to the Principle, the contractor
shall provide a practical demonstration in the presence of the Principle, superintendent, of all aspects
of the operation and maintenance, general preventive maintenance and emergency shut down
procedures of the hydraulic services system and equipment.
Final payment is conditional upon satisfactory completion of the above.
10 FIRE STOPPING OF SERVICES PENETRATIONS
Provide and install fire stopping products to all hydraulic services pipes penetrating through all
suspended slabs and where required; fire and/or smoke walls in accordance the National Construction
Code (NCC) clause C3.15 and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Refer to Architectural drawings to ascertain exact locations of all fire and smoke walls.
Fire stopping products shall be of an approved manufacture, compatible with the materials being used,
and tested in accordance with AS1530.4 and AS4071.1.
Fire stopping shall be in accordance with the National Construction Code (NCC) clause C3.15
Provide and install Snap H100FWS-RR high top, cast in fire collars to floor waste gully pipework
penetrations in concrete slabs or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the
Superintendent.
Provide and install Snap H100S-RR high top, cast in fire collars to all other waste, soil and vent
pipework penetrations in concrete slabs or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the
approval of the Superintendent.
A stainless-steel identification tag shall be screw fixed adjacent to all fire collars / penetrations which
includes details of the installer and fire stopping product, with a reference number to the fire
penetrations register / schedule in accordance with AS4072.1.
Provide and install H.B Fuller Firesound® fire rated acoustic sealant to gaps of small bore pipework
(15 – 40mm) penetrations and to gaps (0 – 50mm) between pipe and fire collars or a similar product
equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the Superintendent.
The Head Contractor shall provide written certification that all required fire stops have been fitted
and/or applied in accordance with the NCC Clause 3.15 and manufacturer’s instructions and a fire
penetrations register / schedule similar to that detailed in Appendix B of AS4072.1.
A copy of this Certification, specifications of the installed products, and fire collar installation schedule
shall appear in the project handover manual.
11 ACOUSTIC PIPE INSULATION
Provide and install (two) 2 layers of Soundlag 4525C 5kg/25mm Quadzero Wrap lapped 100mm and
taped with 50mm aluminium tape spirally wound or a similar product equivalent in form, function,
quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Generally, insulate all rainwater and sanitary drainage pipes suspended within internal ceiling spaces,
cavities and ducts.
Refer to Acoustic Consultants Report for additional information.
Install acoustic insulation and tape in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Provide at the completion of the project a Compliance Certificate that all acoustic installation has been
installed as required by the Acoustic Consultant in accordance the manufactures requirements.
12 ACOUSTIC WALL PENETRATIONS
All pipework penetrating walls shall be installed so that there is no direct contact between pipes and
the surrounding structure.
Pipework Penetrating Masonry Acoustic Walls
Cut a clean round hole to provide 5 to 20mm clearance with pipes. Pack gap with fibre insulation to a
density of 20 kg/m3 density; (fibre insulation must not be tightly packed). Seal the opening around the
duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.
Clearances greater than 20mm
Where clearances are greater than 20 mm, pack space around the pipe with fibre insulation to a
density of 20 Kg/m3 density. Fix 2 layers of 13mm plasterboard on both sides of the masonry wall to
achieve a clearance of 5 to 20 mm to pipe. Seal the opening around the pipe on both sides of wall
with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.
Pipework Penetrating Stud Frame Acoustic Walls
Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm. Provide additional overlapping
face boards each side if required. Gap between pipe and surrounding plasterboard sheets is to be
maximum of 20mm. Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant,
minimum 15mm thickness.

13 CONSTRUCTION
The tenderer shall familiarise himself with the form of construction, as construction is of various forms
ie concrete tilt up, block work, stud walls, pour in situ slabs, pre tensioned slabs steel frame etc and
accommodate them in their tender price.
All pipework positioned adjacent to any building shall be installed in strict accordance with the
Structural Engineer’s requirements and the relevant detailed drawings.
Where necessary, allow for all necessary holing of formwork and/or structural slab to facilitate the
installation of pipework.
Allow for providing all necessary ‘step-downs’, ‘sleeving’, ‘holing’ or ‘casting in’ to concrete foundations
necessary to facilitate the installation of all pipework as shown on relevant drawings to ensure all
pipework is concealed and has a minimum cover as required by the relevant Authorities.
No pipework shall be concealed prior to the completion of all testing by the Superintendent
Representative or his representative and all relevant Authorities.
14 TESTING
All pipe work shall be tested at regular intervals as required during the progress of the work.
Carry out all testing including providing all equipment and expenses, in the presence of the
Superintendent Representatives.
Give three working days’ notice to the Superintendent Representatives or his representative prior to
testing.
Sections of pipe work built into masonry or in inaccessible positions shall be tested and approved
before installation.
15 PROGRESSIVE AUTHORITY INSPECTION REPORTS
The Head Contractor shall provide during construction written Authority evidence stating:
Sections of property sewer, sanitary plumbing and industrial waste systems and stormwater
downpipes have been sited and tested by a DMIRS plumbing Inspector prior to concealment.
Sections of potable and non-potable hot and cold-water systems and fire hydrant services have been
sited by a DMIRS plumbing inspector prior to concealment.
Sections of the rainwater pipe system tested and approved by the Superintendent Representative prior
to concealment.
Sections of the natural gas services installation tested by the installer prior to concealment.
Fire stopping of penetrations approved by the product manufacturer and the DFES, prior to
concealment.
All pipe work shall be tested at regular intervals as required during the progress of the work.
Sections of property sewer tested and approved by the PLB Inspector prior to concealment along with
written Authority evidence.
Ovality test shall be conducted of the installed new property sewer in the presence of the
Superintendent representative and approved by the prior to concealment.
Ovality test
- DN150 plain wall PVC pipes shall be tested for ovality using a 3% deflection gauge.
- The Superintendent representative shall be provided with a letter certifying that all pipelines have
passed an ovality test.
- Straight Sewers lines shall be tested as follows.
- If the ground is dry and no dewatering equipment is required during the excavation of the trenches
the sewers can be tested for ovality 24 hours after the trenches have been backfilled.
- If the ground is wet and the level of the ground water is determined and recorded excavation is
commenced, the sewers can be tested for ovality 24 hours after the trenches have been backfilled
and the ground water has regained its original level.
- IO and IS sewers shall be tested immediately after the sewer has been constructed and the trench
backfilled to the maximum amount possible, consistent with keeping the end of the trench open.
- Where a section of sewer fails the test, the failed section shall be removed and the sewer replaced
stop. Repair couplings shall be concrete encased with the concrete encasing extending 150 mm
past the ends of the couplings
16 CLEANING UP
On completion of the work, all pipe lines shall be checked, cleaned and flushed out, grated channels
and sumps shall be cleaned out and fixtures cleaned, tapware and chrome plated fittings polished and
the whole of this section of the work left in perfect new condition.
17 "AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS"
Refer to 2.54 of the Preliminaries. In addition to the Preliminaries –

The Head Contractor shall allow for a Licensed Surveyor to record alignments and depths all new
below ground services. The Licensed Surveyor shall provide as-con data in PDF and DWG format.
The Sub Contractor shall amend construction issue plans as pipe work is installed, clearly indicating
dimensions of all pipe work and valves with their respective alignments, depths and invert levels from
fixed reference points prior to back filling trenches. These marked up drawings are to be kept on site
for regular inspection by the superintendent and/or consultant.
The electronic As Constructed Drawings (DWG & PDF) shall include surveyed invert levels and
connection points provided by a Licenced Surveyor.
18 HYDRAULIC SERVICES OPERATING MANUAL
Refer to 2.55 of the Preliminaries and 0171 General requirements section of Natspec.
In addition to the above references include the following specific Hydraulic services requirements.
- Index
- Labelled dividers indicating sections eg. Hot Water, Fire Equipment, As Constructed Drawings,
Warranties, Maintenance Procedures etc
- Name, address and contact numbers of emergency contact persons in event of warranty attendance
during Defects Liability Period
- Dates of Practical Completion and Defects Liability termination
- Schedule resume of maintenance procedures
- Manufacturers pamphlets
- Warranty for each item of equipment installed
- Operating and service instructions for each item of equipment installed
- Schedule resume of names and addresses for all suppliers of equipment
- One complete A3 set of Hydraulic Services As Constructed Drawings in each manual
- As constructed drawings to include clear dimensions to all major hydraulic services on all drawings.
- Site and floor plans.
- Copy of Plumbing Licensing Board ‘Certificate of Completion and Compliance’.
- Copy of Departments of Fire and Emergency services ‘Certificate of Occupancy’
- Copy of Energy safety ‘Notice of Compliance’.
- As Constructed accuracy certification.
- Back flow valve test sheet.
- Thermostatic mixing valve (TMV) test sheets.
- Plumbing Licensing Board compliance sheet.
- Video copies of the CCT property sewer drainage inspection x 3.
- Sub-contractors “Certification of Installation” statement. i.e. installed in accordance with contract
documents and relevant Australian Standards…
- Copies of test results for new gas system.
- Hydrostatic Test sheets for Hot and cold water service.

- Hydrostatic Test sheets for new fire service

- Copies of test results for Soil and waste system.
- Copies of test results for all back prevention devices
- The schedule of resume and maintenance shall include (but not limited to) such items as:
- Water heaters general preventative maintenance recommendations.
- Emergency shut down and resetting procedures.
- Water filters maintenance procedure and recommendations.
- Fire service maintenance procedure and recommendations.
- Domestic water service maintenance procedure and recommendations.
The hydraulic services maintenance manual shall have the following words embossed on the front
cover in gold lettering no less than 20mm high and on the spine in lettering no less than 10mm high;-
‘PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE’

PRIMARY SCHOOL – STAGE 1
'HYDRAULIC SERVICES MAINTENANCE MANUAL'
The hydraulic services operating manual shall have the name, address, phone and facsimile numbers
of the Superintendent Representatives, Hydraulic Services Consultant, Builder and Plumbing Sub-
Contractor in that order on the inside leaf of the cover in letters no less than 20mm high.
Provide sample of Hydraulic Services Maintenance Manual identification lettering prior to manufacture.
Provide with the Maintenance Manual, Two (2) sets of long handle manhole lifting keys to match
covers installed, two (2) anti Vandal tap key for each hose tap installed and a budget keys the booster
cabinet and fire hose reel/hydrant cabinets
Liaise with school superintendent to determine school operating hours and set all plant and equipment
timers to correspond with these operating hours. Submit a schedule of these hours for approval to the
consultant prior to programming timers. Copy the approved document into maintenance manuals.
Note: Final payment is conditional upon receipt of the above-mentioned items.
19 WARRANTY
All materials, equipment and workmanship etc. provided within these works shall be included in the 12
month Defects Liability Period applicable to the Head Contract and effective as from the date of issue
of a Certificate of Practical Completion.
Throughout the warranty period the Warrantor shall make good at no expense to the Principle, any
remedial work which may be required for the rectification of defects whether replacement, repair or
otherwise.
Warranties shall include for site visits, parts and labour necessary for the rectification, adjustment etc.
by the manufacturers service personnel.
20 INTENT OF THE CONTRACT
The intent of the contract is as follows;

To include for the total completion of the works shown on the contract drawings and specification
including Client requirements for this project.
To include for any errors or omissions that may become evident during the tender period in the
contract documents and specification but the intent implied by way of:
- Providing everything necessary to complete the project in accordance with the requirement of BMW.
- To include for any on site co-ordination related matters between trades, authorities, contractors etc.
- To include for all monies that may be necessary to be paid to other parties for completion of the
works whether they are authorities or other contractors or building license conditions.
- That it includes for all attendance, profit, sit allowances and working and administrative and
acceleration costs and matters imposed by the controlling building contractor or authorities.

- To include for all labour and materials: required to cut and seal redundant services from/in
redundant buildings.
21 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE. SITE AND PROJECT SPECIFIC

SYSTEM
Prepare for the Superintendent Representative approval and a project Specific Quality system
complying with AS 3900, AS3902.2 1994 – Generic guidelines for the application of AS 3901/NZS
9001/ISO 9001, AS 3902/NZS 9002/ISO 9002 and AS 3903/NZS 9002/ISO 9003.
The system shall be kept on site and continuously monitored by the Contractor and Superintendent
Representatives.
Log all non-compliance activities and issues with recommended actions to remedy the situation to
compliance.
Log all hold points for witness testing. Log all testing and inspection results.
Copy all testing and inspection results to the “as constructed” manuals.
Bring to the attention of the Head Contractor and Superintendent Representative all issues of non-
compliance, hold witness points and test results.
22 CERTIFICATION OF INSTALLATION
The Head Contractor shall provide sign-off certification on all services, equipment, plant, fixtures, etc.
installed as part of this contract, so testifying the fact that the Contractor has supplied and installed
and tested and commissioned this Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, Client
requirements and all other controlling authority’s by-laws, codes and requirements.
22.1 CERTIFICATION CHECK LIST
- Installation Certificate of Compliance
- Copy of Plumbing Licensing Boards ‘Certificate of Completion and Compliance’.
- Copy of Department Fire Emergency Services ‘Site testing results and comments’
- Copies of test results for soil, waste and stack system
- Copy of private certifier Certificate of Compliance for fire service compliance.
- Copies of test results for hot and cold water services site service and each individual units
- Copies of test results for Fire service system
- Copies of test results for all back prevention devices
- Copies of test results for soil, waste and stack system
- Copies of test results for gas system
- Copy of Fire Stopping certification by a FPA registered passive fire engineer
- As Constructed accuracy certification
- As constructed with surveyed invert levels, connection points provided by a licenced surveyor
- Copy of test tag certification for fire hydrants
- Copy of CCTV footage with video operators written report x 2
- Copy of signed Statutory Declaration to confirm the CCTV footage stating that all sewer and
stormwater drains are free of blockages, debris, damage and are flowing freely.
- The Head Contractor shall provide sign-off certification on all services, etc. installed as part of this
contract, so testifying the fact that the Contractor has supplied and installed and tested and
commissioned this Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, Client requirements and
all other controlling authority’s by-laws, codes and requirements.
23 WATER SERVICE METER READING FOR BUILDING AND COMMISSIONING
Provide and install a sub metered water service for the recording and payment of water usage during
the construction period.
Install a suitable backflow prevention valve immediately downstream of the sub meter.
Reticulate a temporary water service with taps and valves as required.
Record the sub meter reading on the first day of each month and submit to the Superintendent
24 EXISTING SERVICES
With reference to all available existing service drawings, allow to carry out onsite investigations to
ascertain extent, alignment and depths of all existing services prior to commencing new site works.
Allow to hand excavate all excavations within 1 meter(s) of all known existing services.
The exact location of existing site services, authority services and connection points indicated of the
hydraulic service construction drawings are approximate only. These services have been plotted from
record drawings.
The Head Contractor shall engage a specialised underground service locating contractor to undertake
ground penetrating radar (GPR) scanning of all proposed hydraulic service trenching routes and
excavations and a Licensed Surveyor to survey all investigation findings and provide data in AutoCAD
DWG prior to commencing new works.
Pot hole findings by hand digging to determine type of service, size, depths.
Existing services that remain as part of this contract shall be plotted on ‘As Constructed’ drawings.
Fully seal service penetrations no longer required.
Where existing services are to remain, they shall remain operational at all times.
All obsolete service pipe work, pits, sumps, manholes, valves, etc shall be removed in accordance
with the demolition and construction programme and all excavations backfilled and consolidated.
All temporary services provided shall be removed and cut and sealed upon permanent connections
being made.
25 DRAINAGE VIDEO AUDIT
The Head Contractor shall engage Tunnel Vision (Unit 1, 15 Baling Street 1800 631 799) or a similar
approved third party CCTV drain inspection specialist contractor to undertake an audit of all new
sewer and stormwater drains, and any existing drains that have been altered and/or connected to at
the following stages of construction.at the following stages of the project;
- Midway of the project – Prior to commencing hard landscaping, carparks and hardcourts
- Practical Completion – Provide video with video operators report 4 weeks prior handover
The Head contractor is to ensure all drains are clear of debris. Debris and obstructions that may be
encountered within the property sewer and stormwater drainage system shall be cleared and the
drains re-video audited by the Head Contractor. The Head Contractor shall provide a final copy of the
video audit to the Superintendent indicating all property sewer and stormwater drains are clear of
debris and obstructions prior to Practical Completion. Final payment will not be made until receipt of
the video audit.
The audit shall contain a drawing highlighting the exact details of the drains audited to correlate with
the video footage submitted for approval in accordance with AS3500.2. Appendix E.
In addition to above, the Plumbing Sub Contractor shall provide a signed Statutory Declaration that
they have viewed all the footage of the property sewer and stormwater drainage system to confirm
they are free of blockages, debris, damage and are flowing freely.
26 BUILDING TUNING
In addition to clause 3.3 MAN-3 Building Tuning the Sub-Contractors shall perform commissioning
building tuning for a continuous 12 month period after handover. This period shall be shown on the
Project time line inclusive of –
The commissioning period shall include but not limited to during the defects liability period a regular
(minimum 2 no - 1 no at 12 months) inspections, maintenance and testing of items such as backflow
prevention valves, water heaters, thermostatic mixing valves, cisterns, filters, line strainers, boiling
water units, water chillers, fire hydrants, fire pumps, domestic water pumps, hot water flow and return
system, flow limiting valves etc

27 BUILDERS WORKS
The Head Contractor shall allow for and arrange the following works;
- Below ground sub services scanning, pot holing and Surveying
- Cutting, removal and reinstatement of existing surfaces for trenching of new services
- Concrete plinth for new fire hydrant booster cabinet
- Excavation and removal of redundant services and accessories.
- Removal of waste and excess soil and rock off site
- Supply of clean free draining sand for backfill of service trenches
- Anti-tamper cage over the existing site meter and backflow valve assembly
- Reinstatement of existing turf and garden beds following installation of new services
- Landscape Irrigation services
- Rock excavation and removal from site as required
- Pipe and stack ‘box outs’ where required by the Superintendent
- Recording of all new installed services by a licensed Surveyor
- CCTV inspections of all new sewer and stormwater drains
- Water proofing of wet areas
- Painting of all exposed hydraulic pipework and accessories
- Signage to hydraulic enclosures, cupboards
- Timber supports for all fixtures installed on stud walls
- Ceiling and wall access panels to hydraulic valves and equipment
- Galvanized steel rain water down pipes and overflows
28 WORKMANSHIP
Generally
Workmanship shall be of a high standard and each section of the work shall be properly and neatly
executed to the best trade practice.
Untidy work, whether exposed to view or concealed, will not be accepted.
Plumbing drawings are provided showing pipe layout and before any layout alteration is made the
Superintendent must be consulted for his approval.
Access
All pipe runs shall be fixed in positions shown with provision for easy access to every section.
Pipe work crossing walk in ducts shall be not more than 300mm above the floor surface or lower than
2100mm, so as to provide free access for persons in duct.
Provide 300mm clearance of pipe work above cisterns for access purposes.
Chrome plating
Unless otherwise directed, install chrome plated piping, accessories, fittings and clips internally where
unavoidable exposed in toilets, food preparation areas, cool rooms, freezer rooms and other similar
areas. Where such pipes pass through walls and floors, provide a suitable chrome plated cover flange
and disconnecting nut.
Escutcheons
Where pipes enter or exit cupboards provide a matching escutcheon neatly fitted to pipe over pipe
penetration.
Dissimilar metals
Where clips, brackets and pipe supports are of dissimilar metal to that of the piping used, completely
insulate the pipe at all fixing points with at least four layers of black polyethylene self-adhesive tape
wrapped around pipe.
Liaison
Allow for and maintain proper liaison with all other trades, particularly the Drainer, Formwork,
Concretor, Reinforcer, Electrical, Mechanical and Bricklaying Sub-Contractors, to ensure that
problems arising from co-ordination or services can be solved before the work is commenced.
29 FIXING AND PIPE SUPPORTS
Copper Pipes, Steel and PVC Pipework 15mm – 150mm

Binder KS10 Kwik Clips with rubber coating with Binder M10 all thread cut to the required length and
fixed to soffit/wall with Binder Drop in anchor or Binder Female wall plate with approved Fixing or a
similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent.
HDPE and Plastic Pipes 25mm – 150mm
Binder KS12 Kwik Clips with rubber coating and spacer to prevent crushing pipe installed with Binder
M10 all thread cut to the required length and fixed to soffit/wall with Binder Drop in anchor or Binder
Female wall plate with approved Fixing or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the
approval of the superintendent.
Install clips at centres as indicated in AS 3500 and in accordance with manufacture instructions
Binder shall be engaged to provide capacity statement of fixing and clipping pipe work systems which
are to comply with the requirements of AS1170.4 earthquake code.
All valves larger than 25mm diameter and equipment such as tanks, pumps, meters, shall be
supported independently from the piping so that no undue strain is placed on the equipment.
Brazing of pipes to each other or to supports will not be accepted.
Securely fix all soil, waste and vent pipe work with Erico Macrofix clip where installed in ceiling and
roof spaces.
All clipped pipe work installed in wall cavities shall be sighted and certified by the Builder.
Note hot and cold water pipe work shall be installed clear of all wall surfaces and brick ties where
installed in cavities.
Particular attention shall be paid to hot and cold water pipe work clipping in order to eliminate
transmission of noise between rooms.
Fix all pipes clear of wall surfaces and clear of each other so as to provide clear access to each
section. Brazing of pipes to each other or to supports will not be accepted.
Install clips at 1 maximum centres as indicated in AS 3500 and in accordance with manufacture
instructions
29.1 SPACING OF PIPES
Where practicable pipes shall be spaced at least 50mm clear of each other. Lagged hot water pipes
shall be 75mm clear of plastic material and unlagged hot water pipes shall be 150mm clear.
Hot and cold water pipes shall not be installed in the same wall chase or through the same hole in
walls or floors.
29.2 EARTHQUAKE PROTECTION
Provide and install all necessary pipe support and clipping to comply with AS1170 Part 4.
Provide certification from an approved organization
29.3 CONCEALMENT OF PIPE WORK
Unless otherwise directed, conceal all pipe work in ducts, wall chases, hollow walls, cavities, ceiling
and roof spaces.
Pipe work chased into walls shall be installed behind wall face.
Pipe work concealed in cavities shall be fixed clear of all wall surfaces.
29.4 COPPER PIPING
Fabricate pipe runs out of the longest lengths practicable, building up of sections from short offcuts will
not be accepted.
When pipes terminate in all wall mounted fittings such as taps, traps, etc., provide suitable anchor
flange to pipe and secure into masonry to approval.
Bends shall be pre-formed and junctions fabricated in the tube in accordance with the best standard
practice. Cast brass bends and junctions will not be accepted.
The use of 'Conetite' fittings will not be permitted.
All pipes chased into wall, shall be installed behind the wall face and be continuously grouted with 3:1
cement mortar. Brick and plaster mortar will not be accepted.
All copper water or fire service piping installed under concrete floors shall be sleeved through
appropriately sized PVC pipe sleeves to facilitate removal and replacement of the copper water pipe.
Remove all residual flux from silver brazed joints by washing with hot water and soap and scrubbing
with steel wire brush.
29.5 CORROSION PROTECTION
“Denso 500” primer paste “Mastic” and “Tape” shall be used to protect all underground copper piping,
nuts and bolts on all fittings, valves, mechanical joints, tapping bands and as directed or a similar
product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent.
All copper pipe work chased into masonry walls shall be spirally wrapped with 6mm thick x 65mm wide
foam insulation lapped 20mm.
All steelwork shall be hot dipped galvanised after fabrication.
All fixings shall be stainless steel whether inside or outside.
29.6 UNPLASTICISED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPES (UPVC)
uPVC pipes shall be installed using the longest lengths practicable and shall be fitted with all
necessary matching fittings with solvent welded or rubber ring joints as applicable, expansion joints,
adapters and cast in situ concrete thrust blocks and anchor blocks.
The use of UPVC pipes and fittings are permitted on this project based on the contractor implementing
and adhering to Green Star best-practice guidelines and can present supporting documentation from
the manufacture
29.7 EXCAVATIONS
The Head Contractor shall make himself fully aware of all naturally occurring ground conditions
including the extent of limestone, rock, clay etc likely to be encountered in the excavations and make
all necessary allowances and inclusions in his tender for excavating in the adverse ground and laying
to install all necessary services as found. No extra claims for excavating and laying to install all
necessary services in hard ground, root or any other adverse conditions will be entertained.
The Head Contractor will be responsible for all excavation necessary to facilitate the installation of this
section of the work.
The Head Contractor shall allow for sub surface radar scanning along and below all proposed
excavations and recorded by a Licensed Surveyor. Findings shall be pot holed to identify service type,
size and depth prior to excavations for new services.
Excavations shall be true to line, maintained in a safe condition in accordance with the requirements of
the Scaffolding Act and Worksafe WA and hand dressed to falls as required.
With exception of those clearly indicated on the drawings, no excavation shall encroach within the
angle of repose of any new or existing structural footing, pipe line or pit.
Where it may be necessary to excavate within the angle of repose, approval must be obtained from the
Structural Engineer and the entire operation, including sheet piling and compaction, shall be carried
out under his supervision.
The base of trenches shall be excavated so that the piping will be supported on a solid bed of earth
compacted to ten blows per 300mm on a penetrometer to a depth of 900mm.
Hand excavate and locate all existing services traversed by or in close proximity to the excavations for
this section of the work and hand excavate for a distance of three meters on both sides of all existing
services before commencing machine excavation.
Liaise with the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors and ensure that all sub grade services are
installed in the necessary sequence and in the correct alignments to avoid future damage.
Remove all excess excavated material from site.
No contact variations will be approved for the tenderer not informing themselves of
information contained in the Geotechnical Report. It is the responsibility of the tenderer to
ensure the contractor has provided a full set of documents.
It is the tenderers responsibility to make himself aware of information contained in the site geotechnical
report.
29.8 EXCAVATION IN ROCK
Refer to Civil Specification for definition of excavation in rock.
29.9 DEWATERING
Refer to Civil Specification for definition of dewatering.
29.10 PIPE BEDDING
Sand Bedding
Where excavations are free from rock or clay, or ground water, sand bedding shall be carried out to an
even and regular grade in sufficiently dewater excavations.
Prior to laying of property sewers in sand bed conditions trench beds shall be tested with a hand
driven penetrometer consisting of a 16mm dia. rod driven by a 9kgm weight falling 600mm to resist 7
blows per 300mm. Should the soil not resist the 7 blows per 300mm, then the Hydraulic Services
Builder shall compact the virgin soil by approved means to give the required compaction.
Metal Bedding
Where excavations encounter rock, clay or water charged ground a 150 mm minimum thick metal bed
shall be laid to an even and regular grade consisting of coarse, diorite, granite or other approved stone
of igneous origin in accordance with AS 1465 - 1974, 100% passing the 13.2 mm BS sieve and 9%
passing the 4.75mm BS sieve.
Pile and Keel
Provide and install 100mm x 100mm jarrah timber piles driven to refusal and topped with galvanised
nailed jarrah timber keel as scheduled herein and in the following circumstances:
In water charged ground (if dewatering is not effective or not approved by the plumbing inspector).
Made up ground where mechanical compaction as previously specified is not obtainable.
The base of trenches shall be excavated so that the piping will be supported on a solid bed of 300mm
clean earth compacted to eight blows per 300mm on a penetrometer to a depth of 900mm above the
top of the pipe.
Pipe work shall not be installed until the bottom of all trenches has been levelled and compacted.
30 BACKFILLING AND CONSOLIDATION
Backfilling shall not commence above half the depth of the service pipe or drain, until the pipe or drain
has been sighted and approved by the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent.
Selected clean backfill material free of clay, debris, stones, rubbish, etc, shall be provided by the
Contractor above all pipes laid in excavated ground.
If acceptable backfill is not available from excavations, all excavated material shall be removed from
the site and approved earth supplied by the head contractor shall be brought in for use in this event.
All backfilling shall be done in 300mm layers, thoroughly watered and compacted to eight blows per
300mm on a penetrometer. The first 600mm of all backfill over drains shall be hand compacted.
Vibrating rollers or similarly heavy compactors will not be permitted over service lines where there is
less than 600mm soil cover over the barrel of the pipe.
Compaction of soil to this depth shall be carried out only with hand tamper or approved mechanical
type.
Allow for re-testing services in areas where heavy compaction has been undertaken over service pipe
installation.
31 MATERIALS
31.1 GENERALLY
Materials used shall be the best of their respective kinds, manufactured in accordance with the
relevant Australian Standard Specification or in its absence, the relevant British Standard
Specification.
Where required, material shall be tested and Watermarked stamped.
31.2 SUPPLY OF MATERIALS
As soon as practical place all orders and take all necessary measures to ensure the supply on time of
all materials and equipment necessary for this section of the work and verify in writing to the
Superintendent that all materials have been ordered and can be delivered to suit the Construction
Programme, or point out if the supply of any necessary material or component cannot be arranged to
suit the Construction Programme.
Failure to ensure that all materials and equipment can be delivered to the site to be installed in
accordance with the Construction Programme will render the Head Contractor liable for all extra costs
and work involved in substitutions of a more expensive nature and all freight costs involved in
obtaining the specified materials and components further afield than the normal points of supply.
Late ordering will not be accepted for substitution.
31.3 COPPER PIPES
Copper pipes shall be type 'B' solid drawn tubes manufactured in accordance with AS1432. Copper
fittings for use with copper tubes shall be manufactured in accordance with AS1589.
31.4 UNPLASTICISED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPES (UPVC)

uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AS1415 and AS1260.
the manufacture
31.5 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPES (HDPE)
HDPE pipes shall be Coestilen with matching fittings and welded joints or equal approved.
31.6 GALVANISED STEEL PIPE
Galvanised steel pipes shall be 'Heavy Gauge' tubes with screwed joints manufactured in accordance
with AS1074.
Galvanised malleable iron fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AS1590, BS143 and
BS1256 as applicable.
31.7 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
Reinforced concrete pipes shall be “Humes” Class ‘X’ or a similar product equivalent in function,
quality to the approval of the superintendent.spigot and socket pipes with rubber ring joints
manufactured in accordance with AS 1342.
31.8 VALVES
Unless otherwise specified, all valves shall be of zinc free bronze construction.
31.9 SANITARY FIXTURES
Sanitary fixtures shall be first quality of an approved brand of Australian manufacture where possible,
tested and watermarked complete with all the necessary matching fittings.
31.10 CONCRETE
All concrete and reinforcement for minor works shall be conform with AS 3600.
Minimum strength of concrete shall be 20mPa with maximum slump of 75mm and with 20 size
aggregate.
31.11 CEMENT
Locally manufactured normal Portland Cement complying with AS1315 shall be delivered in the
manufacturer's original branded containers.
31.12 SAND
Shall be coarse, well graded, clean sand, free from deleterious matter.
31.13 WATER
Shall be clean, fresh, free of impurities and of drinking quality.
31.14 COARSE AGGREGATE
Shall be clean crushed granite, diorite, or other approved stone, free from deleterious matter and
complying with AS2758.

32 SERVICES IDENTIFICATION - ABOVE GROUND
Provide and install Brady or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the
superintendent. Colour coded self-adhesive, coloured and descriptive, stickers with service flow
direction on all soil, waste, vent, rainwater, hot and cold water, gas and fire service pipe work installed
internally at 3m maximum centres, all in accordance with AS1345-1972.
33 SERVICES IDENTIFICATION - BELOW GROUND
Provide and install Calpico YDET 150mm wide colour coded detectable warning tape over cold water,
fire, gas and property sewer pipe work installed in ground or a similar product equivalent in function,
quality to the approval of the superintendent. Warning tape shall be installed 300mm directly above
pipes with service identification facing up.
34 VALVES AND METERS IDENTIFICATION
Provide and install Brady or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the
superintendent.50mm dia. custom brass valve tags secured to valve stem with Brady brass chain.
Engraving shall identify service and rooms/areas of control and shall correspond with As Constructed
drawings.
35 WATERMARK
All pipes, fittings, tapware, fixtures and equipment shall be Watermark approved in accordance with
the Plumbing Licensing Board requirements.
36 MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS
Throughout the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall include for regular and comprehensive
maintenance and service inspections by the specialist suppliers of equipment and systems installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and to maintain regulatory compliance.
37 CLEANING UP
On completion of the work clean all pipe work of mortar and other foreign material. Flush and clean
out all debris from wastes, property sewers, rainwater pipes, stormwater drains, grated channels etc.
Inspect and tighten all inspection and cleaning openings. Check all pipe clips and fasteners and
tighten where necessary. All pipelines shall be checked. Taps and valves shall be tested and rectified
if required. Cisterns shall be checked and adjusted if required. Sanitary fixtures and chrome pipe work
shall be uncovered and thoroughly cleaned and the whole of this section of the work shall be left in
perfect new condition.
38 TENDER BREAKDOWN
Tenderers shall submit a breakdown of the total tender price for each section as indicated in the below
table 1.
The contractor shall also allow to provide progress claim breakdown, similar to following table 2 below.

TABLE 1
Tenderers shall submit a breakdown of the total tender for each section as indicated in the below
I / We, the undersigned hereby commit to the following tender for the supply, delivery, installation,
testing and commissioning of the Hydraulic Services Installation associated with this project in
accordance with the design drawings and specification prepared by Hydraulics Design Australia
Itemised Tender Breakdown Price
Authority Fees and Charges $

Preliminaries Inc. Site Investigations, GPR scanning, Demolition and Removal $
Sanitary Plumbing and Drainage $
Sanitary Fixtures, Fittings and Tapware $
Stormwater Drainage - Hydraulic $
Mechanical Plant Drainage $
Stormwater Drainage – Civil $
Cold Water Services $
Hot Water Services $
Boiling, Chilled and Filtered Water Dispensers $
Fire Services Inc. Third party testing $
Natural Gas Services $0
Survey and recording of all new Hydraulic services $
CCTV inspection of all new drains $
Testing, Commissioning, Painting and Labelling $
Operation and Maintenance Manuals Inc. As Constructed Drawings $
Defects Period Maintenance $
Sub-Total (excluding GST) $

GST $
Total INCLUDING GST $
I / We, unconditionally guarantee the performance of the installation and completion of the works in
accordance with the design drawings and specification prepared by Hydraulics Design Australia
Date:
Plumbing Contractor:
ABN/ACN:
Address:
Signature:

TABLE 2
Progress Claim submissions – Itemized under the following Total this

Buildings; Total
% Claim claim
Price
1) Block A and 2) Block B
Sanitary Plumbing and Drainage $ $ $
Stormwater Drainage – Building $ $ $
Cold Water Services $ $ $
Fire Services $0 $0 $0
Hot Water Services $ $ $
Natural Gas Services $0 $0 $0
Mechanical equipment services $ $ $
Fixtures and Tapware $ $ $
Boiling, Chilled and Filtered Water Dispensers – Block B Only $ $ $
Testing, Commissioning, Painting and Labelling $ $ $
Sub-Total (excluding GST) $ $ $

GST $ $ $
Total INCLUDING GST $ $ $
Total this
Total
External Work sections: % Claim claim
Price
Water Supply $ $ $
Sewer Drainage $ $ $
Fire Services $ $ $
Natural Gas Services $0 $0 $0
Building Stormwater Drainage - Hydraulic $ $ $
Stormwater Drainage – Civil $ $ $
Sub-Total (excluding GST) $ $ $

GST $ $ $
Total INCLUDING GST $ $ $

08 Hydraulics 0811 Sanitary fixtures
0811 SANITARY FIXTURES
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide sanitary fixtures, as documented.
1.2 CROSS REFERENCES GENERAL
- 0801 Hydraulic systems.
- 0802 Tapware.
1.3 INTERPRETATION ABBREVIATIONS
General: For the purposes of this Sanitary fixtures works section the following abbreviations apply:
- WC: Water closet.
- AWC: Ambulant Water closet
- WB: Wall Basin
- KS: Kitchen Sink
- TR: Trough
- LS: Laboratory Sink
- CS: Cleaners Sink
-
Refer to drawing index for full abbreviation list.
Standards general
Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1 and AS 1428.2.
Authorised products
Standard: Listed in the Watermark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility
Operator.
Labelling
Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency
Labelling Scheme (WELS).
1.4 SUBMISSIONS CERTIFICATION
General: Submit evidence that proposed fixtures are listed in the Watermark Product Database.
Samples
General: Submit samples as documented in the Sanitary fixtures samples schedule.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Laundry troughs and tubs Standard: To AS/NZS 1229. Sealants
General: Use only sealants that do not support microbial growth.
AS/NZS 3666.1 requires that sealants not support microbial growth. Many commonly used silicone
based sealants do not meet this requirement and will support the growth of fungus.
Colour: To match fixture.
2.2 WASH BASINS
Standard: To AS/NZS 1730.

3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Storage and handling
Accessories: Use manufacturer's brackets and accessories if these are available and suitable for the
mounting substrate.
Protection: Deliver fixtures to site protected from damage under site conditions by coatings, coverings
and packaging. Remove only sufficient protection to permit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL
Connections: Connect to each fixture supply and waste services. Install plumb and level.
Cutting and fitting: If it is necessary to cut and/or fit substrate to install an item, carry out this before the
surface is finished or painted. Remove items when required for painting and protect until reinstalled.
Cap or plug the open ends of pipes. Reinstall when painting and finishing is complete.
Substrate and fixings: Before installation, make sure that the substrate to which the fixtures are to be
installed is adequate for the intended loads and fixings methods. In solid walls, confirm adequacy of
the material at fixing locations.
Provide and fix tested sanitary fixtures to the manufacturer's specifications in positions indicated and
as follows including all necessary brackets, fixings and fittings, brass chrome plated waste outlets,
overflows and such like and connect to services as required in order to complete the work to the
satisfaction of the Superintendent Representatives.
All vitreous china fixtures to be white.
All stainless steel fixtures to be satin finish
Liaise with the Cabinet Worker and provide templates to facilitate correct holing of bench tops for self-
rimming fixtures. Fix all self-rimming fixtures inset into bench tops as required, including waterproof
mastic seals.
All floor mounted pans to be set level and plumb on a white 3:1 sand cement mortar base with
stainless steel counter sunk screws inserted into all fixing points.
All Wall Hung fixtures to be set level and plumb with manufacture approved brackets and fixings. All
exposed flush pipes to be chrome plated copper with chrome plated wall plate over penetration.
All plug and washers to be chrome plated brass. At completions of works ensure all waste outlet plugs
are provided. Obtain receipt of delivery and issue to consultant.
All sinks shall be complete with sound proof backings
Provide and install fixing plates within walls to facilitate the secure anchoring of all fixtures, tapware,
outlets, valves, pipework, rails and appliances. All fixtures and fittings shall be anchored to with stand a
force of 1100 N applied in any position and in any direction without showing any visible sign of
deformation or loosening of the fastenings. All fixtures, tapware, outlets, and valves shall be installed
in a manner that prevents flexing of walls when subject to these forces.
Pipes, fittings, tapware, fixtures and equipment shall be Watermark approved in accordance with the
Plumbing Licensing Board requirements.
Refer to Architectural Room Layout Details and Wall Elevation Detail drawings to ascertain the exact
location of all fixture, tapware, outlets and appliances.
Provide protective covering to all fixtures, fittings and equipment after installation to prevent damage
during construction. Damaged fixtures, fittings and equipment shall be replaced with new at no
expense to the Principal.
Noggings: In framed construction, provide a solid nogging at each fixing point.
3.3 VITREOUS CHINA FIXTURES
General: Undertake preparation, assembly, connections to water supply and sanitary plumbing,
application of slurries and sealants in sequence. Install the fixture without stressing its attachment
points.
3.4 FIXTURES WALL HUNG BASINS
General: Set basins firmly to walls or vanities as detailed. Connect through trap to the drainage
system.
3.5 VANITIES
General: Install to manufacturer's recommendations and details. Seal top and upstand to wall surface.
Seal cut surfaces to prevent moisture penetration.
3.6 COMPLETION DAMAGE
General: Inspect all work and replace or repair to factory condition damaged or marked fixtures and
components.
3.7 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
General: Immediately before the date for practical completion, remove all protective coatings and
stickers and clean surfaces. Check and clean debris from traps.
4 SANITARY FIXTURE SCHEDULE
4.1 TOILET SUITES

(WC.1) – CLOSE COUPLED
Provide and install Caroma (766200W) Liano close coupled wall faced toilet suite complete with Liano
pan, Liano cistern back entry cistern with vandal resistant conversion kit (750109) and Caroma Liano
double flap soft close seat or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the
Superintendent.
Pan to be fixed to floor on bed of mortar with ratio of 3:1 sand cement.
(WC.2) – IN DUCT
Provide and install Caroma (766720W) Liano Invisi II toilet suite with Caroma Liano p-trap wall hung
pan, D.788 bolt thru wall bracket, Caroma Invisi II induct cistern, Caroma Invisi II (237078S) metal oval
dual flush button plate and Caroma Liano double flap soft close seat or a similar product equivalent in
function, quality to the approval of the Superintendent.
Fix to structural wall with bolt through wall bracket.
Install dual flush button plate 1000mm above floor level.
(AWC) – IN DUCT
Provide and install Caroma (766500W) Liano Easy Height Invisi II toilet suite with Caroma Liano p-trap
Easy Height wall faced pan, Caroma Invisi II induct cistern, Caroma Invisi II (237078S) metal oval dual
flush button plate and Caroma Liano double flap toilet seat or a similar product equivalent in function,
quality to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install dual flush button plate 1000mm above floor level.
(UWC) – CLOSE COUPLED
Provide and install Caroma (901900BAG) Care 800 disabled toilet suite complete with Care 800 wall
face concealed trap pan, Care 800 back inlet cistern with vandal resistant conversion kit (750109),
Pedigree II Care single flap seat (Anthracite Grey), raised Care flush buttons and Caroma backrest or
a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent.
Install toilet suite in accordance with AS1428-1 with particular attention to set out dimensions.
4.2 FLUSHING RIM
(FR)
Provide and install Simcraft 316 grade stainless steel conical flushing rim (FR/FM) complete with
removable grate, 40mm BSP threaded flush pipe connection and 100mm BSP threaded outlet or a
similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
Provide and install Caroma (237001) Invisi II in-ceiling cistern, Caroma (237006) Invisi II remote
mounting box kit, rectangular single flush plate and button (237021S) and 32mm copper flush pipe,
and or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
Head Contractor to extend wall for mounting of cistern and provide suitably sized ceiling access panel.
Liaise with Architect to ascertain location of ceiling access panel prior to commencing installation.
Install remote flush button 1000mm above floor level in location to satisfaction of the Superintendent.

4.3 URINALS
(UR) – WALL HUNG
Provide and install Caroma Cube 0.8 wall hung vitreous china box rim urinal complete with urinal
rough-in kit (678803), urinal fit-out kit (678800W), 20mm concealed copper flush pipe and D.167
concealed fixing bracket or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the
Superintendent.
Install the sensor control unit at 1500mm above floor within stud wall or on duct wall where shown.
Provide and install a 400x400 satin stainless steel access panel where installed in stud walls.
Install 25mm flexible electrical conduit pipe for the entire length of the sensor cable.
Provide and install 6mm copper charge line from 20mm copper flush pipe to CFWG where shown.
Electrical Contractor to provide a 10 Amp GPO within 1 meter of the sensor control unit.
4.4 BASINS
(WB.1)
Provide and install Corian (3222) glacier white WashPlane (1200Lx475Wx490D) complete with
matching waste kit, wall brackets and 1x Caroma (687290C) Modina 40mm chrome plated bottle trap
or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install 2x tapholes in rear upstand
(WB.2)
Provide and install Corian (3224) glacier white WashPlane (2400Lx475Wx490D) complete with
matching waste kits, wall brackets and 2x Caroma (687290C) Modina 40mm chrome plated bottle
traps or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install 4x tapholes in rear upstand
(WB.3)
Provide and install Caroma (873915) Luna wall basin (550Lx380Wx158D) complete with one tap hole,
overflow, right hand shelf, chrome plated brass outlet, D.200 basin fixing kit, and 1x Caroma
(687290C) Modina 40mm chrome plated bottle trap or a similar product equivalent in function, quality,
etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
(UWB)
Provide and install Caroma (632110 left bowl / 632210 right bowl) Opal 720 wall basin complete with
one centre tap hole, D.200 basin fixing kit, chrome waste outlet and Caroma (687290C) Modina 40mm
chrome plated bottle trap or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the
Superintendent.
Refer to Architectural details to ascertain bowl configurations
4.5 KITCHEN SINKS
(KS.1)
Provide and install Clark (1503.1L / 1503.1R) Advance 930mm long end bowl stainless steel sink
complete with one tap hole, drainer, basket waste outlet, fixing clips, 50mm PVC trap / waste and
mastic seal to bench top or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the
Superintendent.
Refer to Architectural details to ascertain bowl / drainer configurations.
(KS.2)
Provide and install Oliveri (NP612) Nu-Petite (1150Lx500Wx160D) 1 & 3/4 end bowl stainless steel
inset sink complete with two tap holes, left hand drainer, basket waste outlet, fixing clips, 50mm PVC
trap / waste and mastic seal to bench top or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the
Note- Install sink mixer to tap hole between sink bowls and the Zip boiling water tap to an additional
tap hole in right hand corner of the 3/4 bowl.
4.6 CLEANER SINKS
(CS)
Provide and install Simcraft (CSL.L.WB) 30L stainless steel cleaners sink (600Lx500Wx250D) with
rear tile lip, hinged grate, wall brackets, 50mm stainless steel waste outlet, 50mm short leg chrome
plated copper S-trap and waste or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and
appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install rim of sink 500mm above floor level, ensure grate when raised clears the taps and outlet.
4.7 PRACTICAL TROUGHS
(PT.1)
Provide and install purpose made Simcraft 304 grade 1.2mm No.4 satin finish stainless steel practical
trough (1800Lx450Wx200Dmm overall), with 1700Lx350Wmm bowl, rear and end tile upstands,
90mm waste outlet (to suit basket strainer), chrome plated copper short leg S-trap and waste, and
stainless steel wall brackets or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and
Provide shop drawings to the Superintendent for review and comment / approval prior to placing order.
Provide and install 3monkeez (Scrap-S-90) 304 grade stainless steel waste arrestor with removable
primary and fixed secondary strainers, short leg 50mm chrome plated P-trap and 50mm chrome
copper waste or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent.
4.8 LAUNDRY TROUGHS
(LT)
Provide and install Clark (1500.1) 45L Flushline stainless steel laundry trough (640Lx480Wx275D)
with one taphole, optional washing machine waste bypass, basket waste outlet, 50mm PVC trap /
waste, fixing clips and mastic seal to bench top or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc
to the approval of the Superintendent.
Provide and install 50mm trapped washing machine waste upstand within the cupboard connected to
the bypass hole nearest to washing machine recess.
Extend 65mm washing machine waste direct to the main drain and not to the floor waste gully riser.
5 CONNECT ONLY
Provide all materials and labour to connect the following fixtures and indicated on the drawings
including waste outlets, traps, valves, taps, fittings, chrome plated waste pipe, hot and cold water
connections.
DW Dish Washing Machines

08 HYDRAULICS 0812 Tapware
0812 TAPWARE
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide tapware, as documented.
- 0811 Sanitary Fixtures.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1 and AS 1428.2
Authorised products
Operator.
Labelling
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Certification
General: Submit evidence that proposed tapware is listed in the Watermark Product Database.
Samples
General: Submit samples as documented in the Tapware samples schedule.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
Accessories
General: Provide escutcheons and cover plates over visible penetrations. Finish and material to match
adjacent fixtures.
Sealants
General: Use only sealants that do not support microbial growth.
AS/NZS 3666.1 requires that sealants not support microbial growth. Many commonly used silicone based
sealants do not meet this requirement and will support the growth of fungus.
2.2 TAP AND VALVE HEADS
Metal heads and handles: Provide brass fittings or a suitable bush to prevent electrolysis and growth.
Plastic heads and handles: Provide compact fittings designed to prevent fracture and exposure of
jagged or rough edges.
Vandal-proof heads: Provide vandal-proof or anti-tampering devices for the designated types.
2.3 WATER EFFICIENCY
Shower heads: To AS 3662 and suitable for the pressures and pressure differences of the supplied
water.
Water efficient tapware: Tested and labelled with their water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400.

2.4 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

Standard: To AS 4032.1.
Requirement: Provide thermostatic mixing valves that automatically control the temperature at the
mixed outlet to a pre-sealed temperature and suitable for the number of outlets served by the
individual valve.
Controls: Include the following:
- A temperature sensitive automatic control that maintains temperature at the pre-selected setting and
rapidly shuts down the flow if either supply system fails, or if the normal discharge water
temperature is exceeded.
- Hot water flush facility.
- Wall box: House the thermostatic mixing valve in a stainless steel recessed wall box with a hinged
door and keyed lock, in ceiling space and or under cupboards as nominated on hydraulic drawings.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
General
Requirement: Install to manufacturer's recommendations. Use manufacturer's recommended tools and
templates.
Provide and install suitable approved taps, valves and outlets to comply with the following schedule.
Unless otherwise specified all tapware shall be chrome plated
All exposed cocks and outlets shall be chrome plated flanged type.
Flexible hose shall be installed without twisting, tight stress bends or over stretching.
Set taps and outlets true, level and on tile joints where such occur. Ensure assembly and spuds are
securely fastened to prevent any movement within walls.
Tap jumper washers shall be spring loaded ‘Hydroseal’ throughout.
Refer to Architectural Detail and Room Elevation drawings to ascertain exact positions of isolating
valves and outlets.
Wherever necessary all valves for services coming under the jurisdiction of the PLB shall be tested
and stamped with the approval of that Authority.
Provide protective covering to all taps and outlets after installation to prevent damage during
construction. Damaged tapware shall be replaced with new at no expense to the Principal.
All tapware, fittings, outlets, valves and equipment shall be Watermark approved in accordance with
the Plumbing Licensing Board requirements.
Prior to positioning of any pipework in ceiling spaces or wall chases, allow for coordination on site with
all other trades and Superintendent.
Install “Not For Drinking’ signage to each non potable water outlet in accordance with AS1319.
Commission and test each tap with an integral thermostatic mixing valve to manufacture instructions,
set to deliver 45⁰ hot water, provide written test report for each tap within the handover manuals.
All hot and cold water connection points under fixtures have threaded connection, securely anchored
within wall, with chrome plated mini stop, chrome plated wall plate and flexible stainless steel or
chrome plated copper connection to tap, fitting or piece of equipment.
Location
General: Locate to dimensions as documented.
Installation
General: Install level, plumb and true to line in the required location. Make sure moving parts function
freely and without obstruction. Do not modify supplied units.
Seal: Provide resilient seals between fixtures and back nuts.
Fixing: Provide rigid fixing for tapware so that it does not move in normal operation.
Cutting and fitting
General: If it is necessary to cut and/or fit substrate to install an item, carry out before the surface is
finished or painted. Remove items when required for painting and protect until reinstalled. Cap or plug
the open ends of pipes. Reinstall items when painting and finishing is complete.
Tap positions
General: Locate hot tap to the left of, or above, the cold tap.
3.2 COMPLETION
Adjustment
General: Inspect and adjust tapware for correct and smooth operation. If adjustment does not rectify
incorrect or defective operation, replace units.
Damage
General: Inspect all work and replace or repair to factory condition damaged or marked fixtures and
components.
Foreign matter: Inspect for presence of foreign matter particularly on tap seats. Remove if found.
Replace damaged seats.
Protective coatings
General: On completion of the tapware installation remove all protective coatings and stickers and
clean surfaces. Check and clean debris from traps.
Thermostatic mixing valves
Field testing: To AS 4032.3.
Maintenance: Conform to the 0891 Hydraulic maintenance work section.
4 TAPWARE SCHEDULE
4.1 TOILET CISTERNS

(WC.1, UWC)
Provide and install Zetco (1414) mini ball valve to rear entry cisterns with a WaterMarked flexible
stainless-steel connector of required length or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to
(WC.2, AWC)
Provide and install Zetco (1051) 15mm ball valve with a WaterMarked flexible stainless-steel
connector of required length or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and
4.2 FLUSHING RIM
(FR)
Provide and install Zetco (1051) 15mm ball valve with a WaterMarked flexible stainless-steel
connector of required length or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and
4.3 URINALS
(UR)
Provide and install Zetco (1051) 15mm ball valve with Zetco (1504) 15mm brass line strainer and
copper connector with disconnector union on the sensor control unit or a similar product equivalent in
form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Electrical contractor to provide and install a 10 AMP GPO at high level on the service duct wall.
4.4 BASINS
(WB.1)
Provide and install 2x Galvin Engineering (173.46.23.00) Ezy-Lever Lead Safe lever action 6 second
vandal resistant time flow bib tap with 80mm chrome plated flanged bib tap extension and aerator or a
similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the
Superintendent.
(WB.2)
Provide and install 4x Galvin Engineering (173.46.21.00) Ezy-Push Lead Safe push button 6 second
vandal resistant time flow bib tap with 80mm chrome plated flanged bib tap extension and aerator or a
Superintendent.
(WB.3)
Provide and install Caroma (96193C6A) Liano Nexus 4.5L/min chrome plated basin mixer or a similar
product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability, and appearance to the approval of the
Superintendent.
Provide and install Arco (103511) mini stops with stainless steel wall plates at high level below each
basin for connection of mixer tap flexible hose connectors.
(UWB)
Provide and install Caroma (90991C5A) Skandic 150mm Care chrome plated basin mixer or a similar
Superintendent.
Remove integral temperature limiting device to ensure correct operation of thermostatic mixing valve.
basin for connection of mixer tap flexible hose connectors.
4.5 SHOWERS
(USR)
Provide and install Galvin Engineering (CLEVA035) ClevaCare shower kit complete with slide rail,
shower arm, dual check valve, hose, handpiece and Caroma (90952C) Skandic chrome plated shower
mixer or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability, and appearance to the
Remove integral temperature limiting device to ensure correct operation of thermostatic mixing valve.
Install the slide rail, hose connection point and mixer tap strictly in accordance with AS1428-1 with
particular attention to set out dimensions.
4.6 KITCHEN SINKS
(KS.1 & KS.2)
Provide and install Caroma (96194C5A) Liano Nexus 6L/min chrome plated sink mixer or a similar
product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the
Superintendent.
sink for connection of mixer tap flexible hose connections.
4.7 CLEANER SINKS
(CS)
Provide and install 1x Galvin Engineering (49949 /CD) chrome plated cold and hot water wall set with
ceramic disc spindles, 200x120mm swivel gooseneck outlet and vandal resistant aerator or a similar
Superintendent.
Install wall set at 1300mm above floor level to centre of cleaners sink.
Supply wall set with POTABLE cold and hot water.
Install wall set over cleaners sink with 100mm clearance to raised hinged grate.
Provide and install 1x Galvin Engineering (49965) chrome plated hose tap and 50mm chrome flanged
plated bib tap extension (34819) or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability,
and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Supply hose tap with non-potable cold water from double check valve (DCV). No vacuum breaker
Install hose tap at 1000mm above floor level and directly below the cold water tap handle above
Ensure cleaner sink hinged grate will not clash with hose tap.
Install non-potable advisory signage “Do Not Drink’ on wall adjacent to non-potable hose tap.
4.8 PRACTICAL TROUGHS
(PT.1)
Provide and install 4x Galvin Engineering (49803) chrome plated 1/2 turn ceramic disc cold water
aerated bib taps with 80mm chrome plated flanged bib extensions or a similar product equivalent in
form, function, quality, durability, and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
4.9 LAUNDRY TROUGHS

(LT)
Provide and install Caroma (96194C5A) Liano Nexus 6L/min chrome plated sink mixer or a similar
Superintendent.
trough for connection of mixer tap flexible hose connections.
4.10 WASHING MACHINES
(WM)
Provide and install Galvin Engineering (49820) vandal resistant chrome plated quarter turn cold
washing machine tap with 50mm flanged bib extension (34819) and Galvin 17 l/min flood stop valves
or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of
the Superintendent.
Install washing machine taps within cupboard adjacent to washing machine recess.
4.11 HOSE TAPS
(HT-R) – WALL RECESSED
Provide and install Arco Grifo (106228) 15mm quarter turn tap with 50mm flanged bib extension within
a recessed hose tap / GPO wall box or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability
Extend 20mm copper up to and reduce at the inlet of each 15mm hose tap inlet.
Coordinate location of wall boxes with Head and Electrical Contractors prior to commencing works.
Refer to Architectural drawings to ascertain exact location of hose tap boxes.
Head Contractor to provide purpose made recessed stainless-steel hose tap / GPO wall boxes
Generally recessed wall boxes shall consist of the following.
- Constructed from marine grade 316 grade 1.2mm stainless steel
- 650mm high by 250mm wide by 150mm deep (internal clearances)
- Perimeter frame of 30mm wide set flush with finished wall
- 4x stainless steel screw fixing points through side walls
- Fitted with Arco quarter turn hose tap at 250mm above base of cabinet
- Fitted with a GPO at minimum 200mm above hose tap (by Electrical Contractor)
- Fully welded water tight with floor of cabinet sloping to door
- Fitted with a stainless steel piano hinge which allows the door to open fully / 180ᵒ
- Fitted with door stop trim for flush door / frame closing
- Door fitted with keyed camlock (Refer to Architects lock and key schedule)
- Signage “GPO & HOSE TAP” (Refer to Architects signage schedule)
- Refer to Architectural drawings for further details
Provide shop drawings to Superintendent for review, comment, and approval prior to placing order.
4.12 CONNECT ONLY
Provide all materials and labour to connect the following fixtures and indicated on the drawings
including waste outlets, traps, valves, taps, fittings, chrome plated waste pipe, hot and cold water
connections.
DW Dish Washing Machine

08 HYDRAULICS 0813 Water heaters
0813 WATER HEATERS
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide water heaters, as documented.
General
- 0781 Mechanical electrical.
- 0823 Cold and Heated Water
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Heated water services: To AS/NZS 3500.4. Gas equipment: To AS 3645.
Authorised products
Operator.
Microbial control
Standard: To AS/NZS 3666.1 and AS/NZS 3666.2.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Abbreviations
General: For the purposes of this work section the following abbreviations apply:
- CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon.
- HCFC: Hydro chlorofluorocarbons.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Certification
General: Submit evidence that proposed water heaters are listed in the Watermark Product Database.
Warranties
Requirement: Submit all required warranties:
Warranties extending beyond the end of defects liability period: Make sure that the principal is named
as the warrantee.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Insulation
Prohibition: Do not provide insulation materials that use CFC or HCFC as blowing agent during the
manufacturing process.
2.2 ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATERS
Description
General: Provide heaters as documented in the Electric storage water heater schedule. Corrosion
protection: Provide sacrificial anodes in each steel storage vessel as documented in the

08 HYDRAULICS 0813 Water heaters
2.3 ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATER SCHEDULE.

Standard
General: To AS/NZS 4692.1.
Energy performance: To AS/NZS 4692.2.
Warranties
Warranty period: Minimum 5 years on cylinder.
2.4 INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS
Description
General: Provide heaters as documented in the Instantaneous water heater schedule.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
General
Standard: Install to AS/NZS 3500.4.
3.2 GAS WATER HEATERS
Standard: Install to AS/NZS 5601.1.
Manifolds
General: If multiple heaters are installed in banks use the manufacturer's standard manifold
arrangement to provide equal flow thorough each heater in the bank.
4 WATER HEATER SCHEDULE
4.1 WATER HEATERS

(WH)
Provide and install Stiebel Eltron DHE 18 AU 60⁰C instantaneous 3 phase (19.4kW, 27A) electric
instantaneous water heater 225mm(W) x 105mm(D) x 478mm(H) or a similar product equivalent in
Water heaters to be installed in vertical position in accordance the manufacturer’s instructions.
All pipework to be concealed, utilizing rear inlet and outlet connections.
Connections to the hot water unit shall be copper, flexible hose connections are not permitted.
Provide and install Galvin Engineering (49913) vandal resistant chrome plated wall top assembly
adjacent to the water heater on the cold water supply or a similar product equivalent in form, function,
Electrical Contractor to provide a concealed power supply and connection.

08 HYDRAULICS 0815 Boiling, chilled and filtered water dispensers
0815 BOILING, CHILLED AND FILTERED WATER DISPENSERS
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide filtered water dispenser systems complete with finish, options and accessories,
as documented.
General
- 0823 Cold and Heater Water.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.1.
Heated water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.4.
Testing of products for use with potable water: To AS/NZS 4020.
Product authorisation requirements: To AS 3498.
Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1 and AS 1428.2.
Authorised products
Standard: Provide products listed in the Watermark Product Database, unless otherwise required by
the Network Utility Operator.
Labelling
Tapware: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to WELS.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
General: For the purpose of this work section, the following definitions apply:
- Ambient water: Potable water at a temperature provided by the cold water piping system, without
further heating or cooling.
- Boiling water: Potable water at a temperature at or close to 100°C.
- Chilled water: Potable water at a temperature between 6°C and 15°C.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Certification
General: Submit evidence that proposed products are listed in the Watermark Product Database.
Warranties
General: Submit evidence of warranties for all proposed tapware which clearly defines the warranty
period and any conditions.
2 EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
General
Requirement: Install level, plumb and true to line in the required location. Make sure moving parts
function freely and without obstruction. Do not modify supplied units.
Manufacturer's recommendations: Install and use tools and templates as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Fixing: Provide rigid fixing for dispenser base so that it does not move in normal operation.
Location
General: Locate to dimensions, as documented.
Sealing
Sealants: Provide sealants that do not support microbial growth.
Location: Provide resilient seals between fixtures and back nuts.
Cutting and fitting
General: If it is necessary to cut and/or fit substrate to install an item, carry out before the surface is
finished or painted. Remove items when required for painting and protect until reinstalled. Cap or plug
the open ends of pipes. Reinstall items when painting and finishing is complete.
2.2 COMPLETION
Adjustment
General: Inspect and adjust dispensers for correct and smooth operation. If adjustment does not
rectify incorrect or defective operation, replace units.
Damage
General: Inspect all work and replace or repair, to factory condition, damaged or marked fixtures and
components.
Foreign matter: Inspect for presence of foreign matter. Remove if found. Replace damaged seals.
Protective coatings
General: On completion of the dispenser installation remove all protective coatings and stickers and
clean surfaces. Check and clean debris from traps.
2.3 WARRANTIES
Period
General: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for the periods documented.
2.4 MAINTENANCE
General
Requirement: Conform to the 0891 Hydraulic maintenance work section.
3 SELECTIONS
3.1 CHILLED WATER DRINK TROUGHS (CWDT)

Provide and install Arcus (HT4D LSF.WF) 2000mm long wall hung universal access chilled water
drinking trough with Arcus US62 refrigeration unit, digital controller, 5.5L insulated copper tank, Galvin
Engineering GalvinClear 316 stainless steel tapware / outlets, 5 micron triple action water filter, left
hand wheelchair access, mounting brackets, 304 grade stainless steel framing and vandal resistant
shroud, 1x accessible piezo easy touch bubbler with hygiene purge, 2x push button bubblers and 1x
push button bottle filler
Or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of
the Superintendent.
Install 700mm above finished surface level to comply with AS1428.
Provide and install Zetco (4400) 15mm stainless steel ball valve prior to inlet of the water filter.
Install tundish below refrigeration unit for condensate discharge, discharge to floor waste gully.
Electrical contractor to provide a concealed 10amp GPO adjacent to the chiller unit.
Provide shop drawings to the Superintendent Representative for review and approval prior to placing
order.
Provide 2 No. spare Arcus 5 micron water filter cartridges for each installed unit.
Allow to replace the water filter cartridges at 6 and 12 months during the defect liability period.

3.2 BOILING WATER UNITS (BWU)

Provide and install Zip HydroTap (HT1706) B160 under bench boiling water unit (333Hx280Wx464D)
complete with Zip Classic chrome plated tap, water filter, and Zip cupboard ventilation grille kit, in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality,
durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install Zip tap to right hand corner and over the ¾ sink bowl. Refer to sink specification.
Position the under sink unit close to the outlet tap, within reach of the hose and cord lengths supplied.
Provide and install Arco (103511) mini stop with stainless steel wall plate adjacent Zip unit.
Ensure under bench unit is installed with manufactures minimum clearances.
Head Contractor to ensure cupboard space is ventilated in accordance with manufactures instructions.
Electrical contractor to provide and install a 10amp GPO within cupboard at high level above Zip unit.
All silicon tubes must be cut to size and must have a constant fall back to the unit.
Commission the boiling water unit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Program the boiling water unit to sleep (power off) when water has not been dispensed for 2 hours or
when the ambient light is low / dark in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Provide 2 No. spare matching Zip (91290) water filter cartridges for each installed unit.
Attend site to replace water filter cartridges at 6 and 12 months during the defect’s liability period.

08 HYDRAULIC 0821 Stormwater - Buildings
0821 STORMWATER - BUILDINGS
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide stormwater installation, as documented.
Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s):
- 0223 Service trenching.
- 0224 Stormwater – Site
- 0821s Siphonic Roof Drainage System
- 0421 Roofing – combined and other Roofing worksections
1.3 STANDARDS STORMWATER DRAINAGE
Standard: To AS/NZS 3500.3.
General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply:
- Embedment material: Includes bedding, haunch support, side support and overlay material.
- Pipe surround: Includes pipe overlay, pipe side support, side zone and haunch zone.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS TESTS
Pre-completion tests: Submit results from pre-completion leak testing. Certification: Submit certificate
stating that network is leak free upon completion. Warranties
Detention tanks: Submit warranty.
1.6 INSPECTION NOTICE
Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:
- Concealed or underground services prior to being covered.
- Upon completion.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Piping
Requirement: As documented in this section.
PVC-U: Provide pipe marked Best Environmental Practice (BEP).
2.2 SURFACE DRAINS – PVC-U CHANNEL DRAINS, GRATING AND SUMPS
General: Provide proprietary PVC-U channel drain complete with friction fit grating sections. Provide
matching sumps.
2.3 SURFACE DRAINS – GRATED TRENCHES
General: Provide precast or cast in situ concrete lined trenches with bitumen coated cast-iron or
galvanized steel gratings.
2.4 SURFACE DRAINS – HALF ROUND PIPE
General: Provide surface drains lined with half round pipe, including bedding and jointing, as
documented in the Surface drains – half round pipe schedule.
2.5 LINEAR DRAINS AND GRATES

Requirement: As documented in this schedule. Installation: Conform to manufacturer's
recommendations. Rainwater outlets
Requirement: Provide proprietary rainwater sumps and channels drains and as documented.
Size: 100mm/150mm diameter or as documented.
2.6 CONCRETE AND MORTAR
Requirement: Provide concrete and mortar conforming to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.9.
2.7 FILTER MATERIAL
General: Provide filter materials consisting of natural clean washed sands and gravels and screened
crushed rock conforming to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.13.1.
2.8 EMBEDMENT MATERIAL
Stormwater drains: Conform to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 6.3.5.1. Subsoil drains: Conform to AS/NZS
3500.3 clause 6.4.2.1.
2.9 GEOTEXTILES
General
Requirement: Provide polymeric fabric formed from plastic yarn composed of at least 85% by weight
propylene, ethylene amide or vinylidene chloride and containing stabilisers or inhibitors which provide
resistance to deterioration due to ultraviolet light.
2.10 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
Filter: Conform to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.13.2.
2.11 PREFABRICATED PITS GENERAL
Requirement: Provide precast or prefabricated pits in conformance with AS/NZS 3500.3 clauses
2.12.8 and 7.5.
2.12 METAL ACCESS COVERS AND GRATES
Standard: To AS 3996.
2.13 STORMWATER DETENTION TANKS
General – Forms part of the civil specification Reinforced concrete tanks
Type: Precast. Standard: To AS 3735.
Design and certification: Provided by manufacturer.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
General
Laying: Lay lengths separately with the barrel bearing evenly on the prepared bedding. Sockets: Lay
with sockets pointing upstream.
Cleaning: Clean pipe interior of dirt, debris, mortar and other foreign matter.
Protection: Provide temporary caps over the ends of incomplete sections to prevent the entry of foreign
matter.
3.2 TOLERANCES PIPELINE TOLERANCES TABLE
Permissible angular deviation Permissible displacement from
from alignment alignment
Horizontal 1:300 15 mm
Vertical 1:500 5 mm
3.3 STORMWATER DRAINS
Note: These tolerances are conditional on falls to outlets being maintained and no part of a pipeline
Location
having less than the documented gradient.

General: Provide stormwater drains to connect downpipes, surface drains, subsoil drains and drainage
pits to the outlet point or point of connection. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with
other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and
documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction.
Downpipe connections: Turn up branch pipelines with bends to meet the downpipe, finishing 100 mm
(nominal) below finished ground or pavement level. Seal joints between downpipes and drains.
Laying
General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If
other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe.
If work is not continuous, cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Identification
General: Lay a detectable strip or plastic tape in the trench after pipe laying, testing and initial
backfilling.
Pipe underlay (bedding)
General: Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding material, minimum 75 mm, maximum 150
mm thick after compaction. Grade the underlay evenly to the gradient of the pipeline.
Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from bearing on
the trench bottom or underlay.
Pipe surrounds
General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers, maximum 200 mm loose thickness, and
compact without damaging or displacing the piping.
Anchor blocks
General: If necessary, to restrain lateral and axial movement of the stormwater pipes, provide
reinforced concrete anchor blocks at junctions and changes of grade or direction conforming to
AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 7.9.
Encasement
General: As documented in this section.
Location: Encase the pipeline in concrete at least 150 mm above and below the pipe, and 150 mm
each side or the width of the trench, whichever is the greater.
Concrete: Grade N15 to AS 1379.
Thermal movement
General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in
copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility does not allow movement. Make sure that movement
does not strain branch connections.
Downpipes
Downpipe termination: Stop downpipe 100 mm below the ground level and discharged directly into
stormwater pipes with overflow as documented.
3.4 SUBSOIL DRAINS
General – Forms part of the Civil contract.
3.5 PITS INSTALLATION
General: Prepare foundation, install pit and connect pipes, to manufacturer’s recommendations.
Location: At junctions, changes of gradient and changes of direction of stormwater drains, as
documented.
3.6 METAL ACCESS COVERS AND GRATES
Standard: To AS 3996.
Cover levels: Top of cover or grate, including frame:
- In paved areas: Flush with the paving surface.
- In landscaped areas: 25 mm above finished surface.
- Gratings taking surface water runoff: Locate to receive runoff without ponding.
3.7 STORMWATER DETENTION TANKS
General installation - Forms part of the Civil contract.
3.8 TESTING
Pre-completion tests
General: Before backfilling or concealing, carry out the following tests to AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 9:
- Downpipes within buildings: Air or water pressure test.
- Site stormwater drains and main internal drains: Air or water pressure test.
- Rising mains from pumped discharge: Water pressure test. Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-
test.
4 COMPLETION
Cleaning
General: Clean and flush the whole installation.
5 SELECTIONS
5.1 GENERALLY
All stormwater drains up to and including 225mm shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and
solvent welded joints. (100mm SN6 grade, 150mm and 225mm diameter SN8 grade).
All stormwater drains larger than 225 shall be Class 2 Reinforced Concrete (RC) with matching fittings
or an approved equivalent where cover in inadequate, or DWV SN10 grade uPVC pipe with matching
fittings with rubber ring joints where applicable.
Drains shall be laid in straight lines to a regular grade and with the barrel of each pipe firmly bedded
on the bottom of the trench.
Each pipe shall be clean of foreign matter and have invert checked before the next pipe is laid.
Allow for all necessary planking and strutting of excavations and protection of adjacent property,
services and footings.
Allow to locate, demolish, remove, and backfill existing soakwells where indicated on drawings.
Carry out CCTV camera inspections of all new installed stormwater drains as previously specified.
5.2 PROPERTY DRAINS
Connect all downpipe sumps, concealed rainwater down pipes, grated channel drains, threshold
channel drains, AC condensate drains, plant room floor wastes; extend and connect stormwater
drains of sizes, at the levels and on the alignments as indicated on the drawings including all
necessary fittings, traps, gullies, etc: to soakwells as shown on the drawings and as required in order
to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.
All penetrations into Civil sumps are to be made watertight to the satisfaction of the Civil engineer.
5.3 DOWN PIPE SUMPS (DPS)
Provide and install ACO (77003) Type 33 pit 300mm square x 450mm deep polymer concrete sump
box with ACO (78677) galvanised steel welded bar grate including locking bar and brackets or a
Superintendent.
Allow to wet saw new sump boxes as required to suit depth and profile of the existing footings to
ensure the top edge of the sump sits flush with paving and 75mm above garden beds.
Form up a concrete footing for the bedding of the sump boxes, cast in a 100mm PVC outlet where the
sump boxes are replacing existing and / or installed over existing footings.
Remove and replace all existing down pipe sump boxes with above item where indicated on drawings.
Provide a sample of the sump box to the Head Contractor prior to construction for the co-ordination of
new footings and preparation of steel shop drawings.
Allow to wet saw new sump boxes as required to suit depth and profile of the existing footings where
relacing any existing sump boxes. Ensure the top edge of the sump sits flush with paving.
Form up a concrete footing for the bedding of the sump boxes, cast in a 100mm PVC outlet where the
sump boxes are replacing existing and / or installed over existing footings.
Ensure the top edge of the sump box / grate sits flush with the finished paving surface level.
Liaise with Head Contractor to ascertain the exact position of all down pipes prior to commencing.
5.4 THRESHOLD CHANNEL DRAINS (TC)
Provide and install Stormtech (65ARTDiS) 316 grade stainless steel threshold channel drains of
required lengths where indicated on drawings with concealed door sill tray (approx. 105Wx30Dmm)
and electropolished premium grade 2mm architectural stainless steel grating a similar product
equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
Liaise with Head Contractor for exact channel lengths and door track dimensions
Submit detailed shop drawings to the Superintendent for review and approval prior to placing order.
Head Contractor to co-ordinate the slab edge set down, water proofing and door installation
Provide channel drains to the Head Contractor to install in conjunction with the specified door track
and water proofing membrane in accordance with the Architectural detail drawings and manufacturer’s
instructions.
Provide and install 50mm PVC drains from channel outlets, connect to the stormwater drainage
system via a grated relief / overflow point.
5.5 PAVING DRAINS (PD)
Provide and install ACO (77003) type 33 pit 300mm square x 450mm deep polymer concrete sump box
with ACO (78678) galvanised steel heel guard grate and optional lock down bracket or a similar product
equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Refer to Landscape Architect drawings, exact location of paving drains to be confirmed onsite with Head
Contractor to suit low points of paving.
Install drain pits with 100mm thick concrete encasement to base and sides.
The finished paving level shall be approximately 3mm above the top of the sump edge. Seal around
paving and edge of sump with a suitable flexible mastic sealant.
Head Contractor to ensure sufficient falls to paving are achievable to drainage grates to facilitate
complete and efficient surface drainage.
5.6 RAIN WATER PIPES (RWP)
Provide and install all above ground DWV grade PVC rain water pipes and overflows of sizes and in
locations indicated on the Architectural and Hydraulic drawings complete with PVC offsets where
required to facilitate connections between gutter outlets and galvanised steel rainwater downpipes.
Refer to Architectural roof plans and detail drawings for PVC rainwater and overflow connections.
Refer to the Architectural section drawings to ascertain exact length of rainwater and overflow pipes.
Refer to Architectural drawings for details on location of PVC overflow pipes and terminals.
All rainwater pipework above ground and within the building shall be wrapped with acoustic insulation
as previously specified.
Head Contractor to provide and install all exposed above ground galvanised steel rainwater pipes.
Liaise with Head Contractor to ensure that all direct connect galvanised steel rainwater pipes are of a
length that will enable a concealed connection to PVC drains below finished ground level.
Connect onto galvanised steel rainwater pipes installed by Head Contractor with Fernco uPVC to CHS
flexible adaptor complete with stainless clamps and watertight mastic seal below paving level.
Wrap below ground galvanised steel rain water pipes and adaptors with Denso Petrolatum tape.
5.7 RELIEF POINTS (RP)
Provide and install relief point comprising of 100mm uPVC riser from main drain topped with Galvin
Engineering (302745X) 150x100BSP 316 grade stainless steel square grate with 100BSP x 100 PVC
coupling (302133) set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function,
Install grate assembly and adjacent unit pavers on a 300mm square x 100mm deep concrete footing
with grate set flush with finished paving level.

5.8 CLEAN OUTS (CO)

Provide and install Galvin Engineering (178051) hinged cast iron valve box or a similar product
equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install a 100/150mm PVC riser from main drain to a screw cap at 75mm below hinged cover.
Install box on a 150mm wide x 150mm deep concrete strip footing with a 225mm PVC sleeve positioned
around screw cap and hinged cover set flush with finished paving level.
Allow to replace cleanout points from existing stormwater drains within the area of new works.
5.9 FLOOR WASTES
(FW)
Provide and install floor waste comprising of 50mm uPVC riser from main drain topped with a Galvin
Engineering (302376X) 100x50 316 grade stainless steel round push in grate set flush with finished
surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the
Provide Wondercap (WC50K) 50mm puddle flange kit to Head Contractor to install in conjunction with
the water proofing, screed, and floor finishes in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
5.10 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DRAINAGE
Provide and install a 100x50mm DWV grade uPVC tundish (TD), comprising of a 100x50mm level
invert taper and 50mm M&F 90 bend, to all ceiling mounted air handling units.
Provide and install 150x100 stainless steel floor waste grates where indicated on drawings.
Provide and install 25mm uPVC drain spur to all wall mounted air conditioning units.
Liaise with Mechanical Contractor onsite to discuss and ascertain exact location and height of all
required drain points prior to commencing installation.
All horizontal drainage pipework to be concealed in roof and ceiling spaces.
Tundish’s shall be securely fixed where required to prevent movement.
Provide and install Armaflex FRV closed cell nitrile rubber insulation of 25mm wall thickness in
accordance with manufactures instructions to all above ground condensate tundishes, traps and
drains in ceiling spaces, ducts and wall cavities or a similar product equivalent in form, function,
quality, durability, and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Provide and install ColorBond pipe covers to conceal all exposed condensate drainage pipework.
5.11 STORMWATER SOAKWELLS
(S/W) - BURIED
Provide and install Galvin Concrete (1800 Dia x 1500 Deep) soakwells comprising of 1 No 1800mm
dia x 1500mm deep precast reinforced concrete soakwell (234819) set on a 300mm wide x 150 mm
deep concrete strip footing (230102) and topped with a 2100mm dia class D 150mm thick concrete
cover (232361) or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to
Neatly core drill and grout pipe connections with a flexible sealant.
Fill base of soakwell with 200mm deep blue metal (20 agg.)
Double wrap soakwell with Bidum geofabric or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality,
Backfill and compact around soakwell as previously specified.
5.12 CARPARK DRAINAGE
Refer to Civil Engineers documents for details on Carpark stormwater drainage.
5.13 DRAINAGE TESTING
Subject the rainwater pipes to sight and hydrostatic tests as required by and to the satisfaction of the
Local Authority and the Superintendent Representative.

08 HYDRAULIC 0822 Wastewater
0822 WASTEWATER
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide sanitary plumbing and drainage, as documented.
General
Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s):
- 0223 Service trenching.
- 0811 Sanitary fixtures.
- 0821 Stormwater - Buildings
1.3 STANDARDS
Authorised products
Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility
Operator.
1.4 SANITARY PLUMBING AND SANITARY DRAINAGE
General: To AS/NZS 3500.2.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
Certification
General: Submit evidence that proposed tapware is listed in the WaterMark Product Database.
1.6 INSPECTION
Notice
Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following:
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TRAPS AND GULLIES

General
Traps: As documented in this schedule.
Location: If possible, conceal traps and wastes in the fabric of the building. Gullies: As documented in
this schedule.
Inspection chambers and sumps
General: As documented in this schedule.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SANITARY PLUMBING

Location
General: Verify location and invert level of piping before commencing installation. Layout: Arrange
piping to conform to the documented layouts as follows:
- Avoid interference with other services and building elements not yet installed or built.
- Follow the most direct route with the least number of changes of direction.
Ducts: If installed in ducts, locate and fix stacks, wastes and pipes independently of other services.
Arrange so they are easily accessible and removable throughout their entire length.
Piping: As documented in this schedule. Discharge from air handling systems
Trays, sumps and plumbing: To AS/NZS 3666.1.
3.2 THERMAL MOVEMENT
General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in
copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility does not allow for movement. Make sure that movement
does not strain branch connections.
3.3 VENT PIPES
Staying to roof: If fixings for stays penetrate the roof covering, seal the penetrations and make
watertight.
Terminations: Provide vent cowls of the same material as the vent pipe.
3.4 WET AREA FLOORS
General: Where drainage connections pass through wet area floors, terminate 4 mm below the
substrate surface.
3.5 SANITARY DRAINAGE
Laying
General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If
other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe.
If work is not continuous, cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Piping: As documented in this schedule. Pipeline identification
General: Lay detectable plastic warning tape, 300 mm above buried piping, for the full length of the
piping.
3.6 PIPING
Finishes
General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows:
- In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192
service condition 2, bright.
- Externally, and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint.
- In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):
Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron
fittings.
Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping.
Supports
General: As documented in this schedule.
3.7 PIPELINE TOLERANCES TABLE
Permissible angular deviation Permissible displacement from
from alignment alignment
Horizontal 1:300 15 mm
Vertical 1:500 5 mm
3.8 TRADE WASTE
General: As documented in the Sanitary plumbing, Sanitary drainage and the following:
- Piping: As documented in the Trade waste schedule.
- Disposal: Provide sumps or interceptors.

3.9 LABORATORY WASTES

General: If there are chemically corrosive effluent wastes, provide compatible traps and waste
connections, and drain to a treatment pit.
Trap material: As documented in this schedule.
3.10 TESTS
Requirement: Test to AS/NZS 3500.2 Section 15, before backfilling or concealing. Leaks: If leaks are
found, rectify and re-test.
3.11 COMPLETION
Cleaning
General: On completion clean and flush the whole installation.
4 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES
4.1 GENERALLY
Soil, waste, Stormwater and vent pipes shall be complete with all bends, junctions, inspection and
cleaning openings carefully selected to ensure that inspection and cleaning openings are correctly
positioned and the correct radius bends and junctions are installed to provide a first class installation.
Pipework up to and including 100mm shall be SN6 DWV grade uPVC
Pipework larger than 100mm shall be SN8 DWV grade uPVC
Floor waste grates, clean out points, traps and standing wastes shall be protected from scratching and
damage throughout.
At completion remove protection and clean and polish all chrome plated sanitary ware and fittings.
4.2 SOIL PIPES
Soil pipes shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints.
Connect to fixtures with the necessary adaptors and extend soil pipes to connect to property sewers
all as indicated on the drawings and as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent Representatives.
Provide and install inspection openings to each WC branch and within stacks at each floor level.
Coordinate the installation of access panels where required.
the manufacture
4.3 WASTE PIPES (WP)
Waste pipes shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints.
Traps and waste pipes installed in exposed positions shall be chrome plated with chrome plated
disconnector nuts and flanges at floor and wall penetrations. Chrome plated flanges shall be installed
flush with floor/wall. Chrome plated nuts shall be installed flush with flanges.
Connect to all fixtures with the necessary double union traps and adaptors and extend waste pipes to
connect to property sewers all as indicated on the drawings.
Install chrome plated bottle traps to all exposed wall basins as previously specified.
4.4 VENT PIPES (VP)
Vent pipes shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints.
Provide and install vent pipes and extend up through the building and discharge through roof with
water proof flashing and anti-vermin / fire rated mesh cowls as required in order to complete the work
to the satisfaction of AS3500 and the Superintendent Representatives.
Provide and install DEKS Dektite Premium roof flashings of minimum sizes required to all roof
penetrations in accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form,
function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

Ensure vent pipe termination locations are in accordance with Code requirements, co-coordinate exact
location of building air intakes with mechanical contractor.
4.5 ACOUSTIC INSULATION

Provide and install acoustic insulation to all above ground sanity pipework, traps, fittings etc.. in ceiling
spaces, ducts, and wall cavities passing through and over habitable rooms and spaces in accordance
with specification section 0801.
4.6 FIRE STOPPING
Provide and install fire stop products to all service penetrations through suspended slabs and fire /
smoke walls defining separate fire compartments in accordance with specification section 0801.
4.7 FLOOR WASTE GULLY (FWG)
Provide and install floor waste gullies comprising of 80x65mm uPVC gully trap cast into a concrete
mass, 80mm uPVC 4 way riser, and Galvin Engineering (302445X) HeelGrate 316 stainless steel
100x80 square waste grate set flush with finished tile / concrete level or a similar product equivalent in
All floor waste gullies shall be charged by a fixture waste pipe, water seal shall not exceed 600mm.
Provide Wondercap (WC80K) 80mm puddle flange kit to Head Contractor to install in conjunction with
the water proofing, screed, and tiling in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
4.8 CLEAN OUTS (CO)
Provide and install clean outs from soil and waste pipes within concrete, tiled and vinyl comprising of
riser from main drain of same size and material and Galvin Engineering (67717X Tile Concrete /
69468X Vinyl) 316 stainless steel 150x100 push on bolted clean out set flush with finished surface
level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval
of the Superintendent.
Provide and install clean outs from soil pipes located in external block paving, bitumen and soft
landscape areas comprising of a 100mm PVC riser from main drain to a screw cap 75mm below a
Galvin Engineering (178046) hinged cast iron valve box or a similar product equivalent in function,
quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install box on a 150mm wide x 150mm deep concrete strip footing with a 225mm PVC sleeve
positioned around screw cap and hinged cover set flush with finished paving level.
Allow to replace cleanout points from existing property sewer drains within the area of new works.
4.9 SANITARY PLUMBING TESTING
Subject all soil, waste and vent pipes, to hydrostatic tests as required by and to the satisfaction of the
AS3500, the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent.
5 PROPERTY SEWERS
5.1 GENERALLY
Property sewer drains shall be Iplex or Vinidex DWV grade uPVC (100mm diameter SN6 grade and
150mm diameter SN8 grade) with matching fittings and solvent welded joints or a similar product
The use of uPVC pipes and fittings are permitted on this project based on the contractor implementing
the manufacturer.
Pipes shall be complete with all bends, junctions, inspection and cleaning openings, etc, and shall be
of the appropriate grade to suit the application.
Drains shall be laid in straight lines to a regular grade and with the barrel of each pipe firmly bedded on
the bottom of the trench.
Each pipe shall be clean of foreign matter and have invert checked before the next pipe is laid.
Allow for all necessary planking and strutting of excavations and protection of adjacent property,
services and footings.

5.2 PROPERTY SEWER CONNECTION

Provide and install uPVC property sewers of sizes, at the levels and on the alignments indicated on
the drawings including all necessary fittings, inspection openings, traps, gullies, drains, manholes etc
and connect to all soil and waste pipes as shown on the drawings and as required in order to complete
the work to the satisfaction of the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent.
Excavate to locate existing drains and confirm design invert levels prior to commencing new works.
5.3 PROPERTY SEWER DRAINS
Locate and connect to site sewer connection points, provide and install new property sewers of sizes,
at the levels and on the alignments required including all necessary fittings, inspection opnings, traps,
gullies, relief points, manholes etc: and connect to all soil and waste pipes as shown on the drawings
and as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Plumbing Licensing Board and
the Superintendent.
Install inspection openings in accordance with AS3500 and as follows:
- on each branch drain that enters under and/or exits a building
- adjacent to the junction into the main drain
- at the upstream and downstream end of all branch drains and main drains that are external to a
building
- at every change in horizontal direction of 45° or greater
- at intervals of not more than 30 meters
- at the upper bend of a jump up or a rising shaft
5.4 PROPERTY DRAINS IN/THROUGH CONCRETE FOOTINGS
Provide and install Styrolag 25mm thick pipe lagging to all drains laid through footings in accordance
with manufacture and AS3500 requirements or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality,
5.5 CLEAN OUT POINT (CO)
Provide and install clean outs from soil pipes located in concrete paved areas comprising of riser from
main drain of same size and material topped with Galvin Engineering (67717X) 316 stainless steel
150x100 push on bolted clean out set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent
in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Provide and install clean outs from soil pipes located in unit block paving, bitumen and soft landscape
areas comprising of riser from main drain of same size and material topped screw cap coupling below
a Galvin Engineering (178046) hinged cast iron valve box on a 150mm wide x 150mm deep reinforced
concrete footing with lid set flush with the finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form,
5.6 DRAINAGE TESTING
Subject the property sewers to sight and hydrostatic tests as required by and to the satisfaction of
AS3500, the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent Representative.

08 HYDRAULIC 0823 Cold and heated water
0823 COLD AND HEATED WATER
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide cold water and heated water systems, as documented.
- 0811 Sanitary fixtures.
- 0812 Tapware.
- 0813 Water heaters
1.3 STANDARDS
General
Water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.1. Heated water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.4.
Backflow prevention: To AS/NZS 2845.1 and AS 2845.2. Copper pipe: To AS 1432 and AS 4809.
Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1 and AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB
32.
Authorised products
Operator.
Installation of glass wool and rock wool insulation
General: Conform to the ICANZ Industry code of practice for safe use of glass wool and rock wool
insulation.
Marking: Deliver mineral wool products to site in packaging labelled FBS1 BIO-SOLUBLE
INSULATION.
Labelling
1.4 INTERPRETATION
Definitions
General: For the purposes of this work section the following definitions apply:
- FBS-1 (fibre-bio-soluble) mineral wool: Insulation composed of bio-soluble glass or rock fibres.
- Heated water: Water that has been intentionally heated. It includes hot water and warm water.
- Material R-Value: The thermal resistance (m2.K/W) of a component calculated in conformance with
AS/NZS 4859.1 clause 2.3.3.8. Material R-Value does not include air space or surface resistances.
1.1 SUBMISSIONS
Certification
Watermark certification: Submit evidence that proposed components are listed in the Watermark
Product Database.
Fire hazard properties
General: Submit evidence of conformance with MATERIALS, Fire hazard properties. Materials
Thermal insulation performance: Submit evidence of conformance to AS/NZS 4859.1.
Samples
General: Submit samples of accessories identified by proprietary item, including the following:
- Valves.
- Instruments, including gauges and thermostats.

1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
Pressure control valves
General: Provide reduction valves, pressure limiting valves, or ratio valves, which produce the
necessary reduction in pressure.
Backflow prevention devices
General: As documented in the Testable backflow prevention devices schedule. Standard: To
AS/NZS 2845.1 and AS 2845.2.
Line strainers
Type: Low resistance, Y-form bronze bodied type, with screen of dezincification resistant brass,
corrosion-resistant stainless steel, or monel.
Screen perforations: 0.8 mm maximum.
2.2 MATERIALS
Fire hazard properties
Spread-of-flame index: Maximum 9 where tested to AS/NZS 1530.3.
Smoke-developed index: Maximum 8 if spread-of-flame is over 5, when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3.
Flammability index of facing materials: Maximum 5 when tested to AS 1530.2.
Materials with reflective foil facing: Test to AS/NZS 1530.3 clause A6.
2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS
General
Material R-Value of insulation: ≥ Total R-Value in AS/NZS 3500.4 for the type and location of the pipe.
Polyolefin foam
Type: Closed cell cross-linked polyolefin foam produced using a hydrocarbon blowing agent.
Insulation surface facing: Heat-bonded aluminium foil laminate.
Glass wool and rock wool and polyester
Description: Select from the following:
- Glass wool or rock wool resin-bonded to form tubular sections.
- Polyester in moulded tubular sections.
Elastomeric foam insulation
Type: Chemically blown closed cell nitrile rubber in tubular sections for pipe insulation, in sheets for
insulating pipe fittings, and in sheets or rolls for large pipes, tanks, vessels and heat exchangers.
Provide with smooth natural finish and vapour barrier properties. Physical properties:
- Free of ozone depleting gases in manufacture and composition.
- Moisture absorption: Non-hygroscopic.
- Water vapour permeability: Maximum 0.065 ng/Pa.m.s.
Aluminium foil laminate sheet
Material: Glass fibre reinforced, aluminium foil-paper laminate. Duty classification to AS/NZS 4200.1:
Heavy duty.
Adhesives and sealants
Requirement: Provide adhesives and sealants to manufacturer's recommendations.
Aluminium foil laminate tape

Adhesive: Non-toxic, high tack synthetic pressure sensitive type. Liner: Silicone coated paper.
Backing: Aluminium foil laminate. Minimum width: 50 mm.
Minimum mechanical properties: Polyethylene tape serial number F11 to AS 1599.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
Location
Mains connection: Connect the cold water supply system to the Network Utility Operator's main
through a stop valve and meter.
Cold water system: Provide the cold water supply system, installed from the meter to the draw-off
points or connections to other services as documented in this schedule.
Heated water system: Provide the heated water system, installed from the cold water connection
points to the draw-off points or connections to other services as documented in the Piping system
schedule.
Finishes
General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings, cover plates and supports, as follows:
- Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright in internal locations such as toilet
and kitchen areas:
- Paint external above ground piping, and internal steel piping and iron fittings exposed to view.
- In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):
Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron
fittings.
- Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping.
Fittings and accessories
General: Provide the fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the water supply system, including
taps, valves, backflow prevention devices, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers,
gauges and automatic controls and alarms.
Provision for dismantling: Arrange piping by the provision of unions or similar so that valves, taps and
other maintainable components can be removed for maintenance without disturbing or cutting
adjacent piping.
Material identification marks
General: Pipes with grade or class identification markings: Install so that the markings are visible for
inspection.
Pipes under pressure embedded in concrete
General: Use only copper pipe and the minimum number of joints. Pressure test and rectify leaks
before the concrete is poured.
Valve spindles
General: If practicable, install valve spindles in a vertical position.
3.2 PIPING INSULATION
General
Requirement: Insulate all non-chrome plated heated water piping, fittings and valves.
Application: Fit insulation tightly to piping surfaces without gaps. Close butt ends of insulation sections.
Minimise number of joints. If the insulation is in half-sections, make only half-circumferential joints at
any one place. Seal longitudinal seams in foil laminate and fix insulation at maximum 500 mm centres
with polypropylene, zinc-coated steel or aluminium straps.
Unions and other items requiring service: Install the insulation so that it is readily removable.
Fittings: Provide insulation with thermal resistance at least equal to that of the adjacent piping
insulation.
Insulation material
General: Provide insulation material as documented.

Elastomeric foam insulation

Adhesives: Adhesive fix all longitudinal and butt joints. Adhere to the pipe at end joints, for a distance
of 25 mm, to compartmentalise each section. Use only solvent-based adhesive supplied by insulation
manufacturer and designed specifically for the material being used.
Sheathing
General: Provide metal sheathing to all piping insulation:
- In plant rooms.
- Where exposed to weather.
- Where exposed to view.
- Where subject to mechanical damage.
- On valves, pipeline components and pumps in sheathed piping.
Metal sheathing: Cover piping with 0.5 mm thick metallic-coated steel sheet sheathing sprung over the
insulation in one piece with laps at least 30 mm wide and fastened with self-tapping screws or snap
head rivets at 150 mm maximum centres. Preform the sheathing to match the shape of the insulated
pipe and fittings. Position laps to avoid water penetration. In external locations weatherproof the joints
and fixings using non-setting mastic.
Alternative protection for elastomeric foam: Where exposed to sunlight but not exposed to mechanical
damage, provide 2 coats of tintable, water-based, rubberised, UV resistant, flexible paint finish to
outdoor installations.
Surface preparation
General: Clean the surfaces to remove scale, rust, grease and dirt and prepare surfaces to suit the
insulation. Restore surface coatings, which have been damaged or affected by welding.
Insulation at pipe supports
General: Provide supports formed to fit around the insulation.
Pipes under DN 25: Either:
- Fit supports directly to pipe and form insulation around the support.
- Support as for pipes DN 25 or over. Pipes DN 25 or over: Either:
- Protect the insulation at the support point with metal sheathing extending sufficient distance both
sides of the support so the insulation thickness is reduced by less than 10%.
- Replace the insulation at the support point with a shaped timber or cork spacer block. Butt the
insulation up to the spacer block and seal with silicone compound. Clad the block and insulation in
- 0.5 mm metallic-coated steel sheet extending 100 mm both sides of the support.
Insulation of buried pipes
Insulation material: Elastomeric foam certified by the manufacturer as suitable for use direct buried in-
ground.
Sealing: Seal all but joints and longitudinal joints and seams with the insulation manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Seal the insulation to the pipe at both ends and each termination.
Valves and fittings: Insulate and seal as for pipe. Install valves in pits. Protection: Protect the pipe from
water penetration. Select from:
- Use of insulation material with integral polymeric coating to protect from mechanical damage, water
penetration and the growth of bacteria, mould and mildew.
- Application of high density rubber sheathing supplied by the insulation manufacturer and certified for
use underground.
Sleeving: Install the insulated pipe in a PVC-U soil pipe. If the water table may be above the sleeve
pipe, seal all joints watertight. If the water table is permanently below the sleeve pipe, provide 10 mm
drain holes at 600 mm centres along the bottom centre of the sleeve pipe.
Insulation of piping to solar water heating systems – Not Applicable
3.3 PITS
General
General: Install below-ground water meters, stop valves and control valves in concrete access pits
with removable pit covers.

Construction
Internal dimensions: To give 300 mm clear space all around the fittings in the pit. Concrete: Grade N20
to AS 1379, 100 mm thick, reinforced with F82 fabric.
Pit covers: To AS 3996.
Installation
General: Grade floor to a point on one side and drain to the stormwater drainage system. Carry the pit
walls up to 50 mm above finished ground level. Cast in the pit cover frame flush with the top. Trowel
the top smooth.
3.4 MARKING
Notice plate
General: Provide a notice plate containing condensed emergency instructions, legibly printed or
engraved on durable material resistant to defacement, at least 3 mm thick or mounted on board at
least 3 mm thick, permanently fixed in a convenient position at the control valves.
Marker Tape
Provide detectable marker tape conforming to AS/NZS 2648.1 along the entire length of below ground
water services at 150 mm above the installed pipe.
3.5 VALVE BOXES
General
General: Provide cast-iron valve boxes with removable covers for access to underground gate valves.
Provide cast-iron sluice valve covers for access to sluice valves.
Installation
General: Set beneath each box a shaft formed of PVC-U pipe to give clear access to the valve wheel
or spindle. Set top flush with pavement surface, or 15 mm above unpaved surfaces, and encase in
formed concrete box 150 mm thick, with top surface troweled smooth.
3.6 TESTING
Pressure tests: Before insulation is applied to joints pressure test piping to AS/NZS 3500.1 and
AS/NZS 3500.4 as appropriate.
Leaks: If found, rectify and re-test.
Cross connections: Isolate systems individually and check for cross connections. Backflow prevention:
To AS/NZS 3500.1.
Tapware: Check for leaks.
Completion test
General: Provide a full operational test to verify conformance.
3.7 COMPLETION
Commissioning
Strainers: Remove, clean and replace strainer baskets. Cleaning: To AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix I.
Disinfection: Disinfect to AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix J.
Cold water systems: Test and commission to AS/NZS 3500.1 Section 18. Heated water systems: Test
and commission to AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 13.
Testable backflow prevention devices: Test and commission to AS 2845.3 by a licensed plumber with
backflow device accreditation. Tag and certify to the requirements of the Network Utility Operator.
Charging
Completion: On completion of installation, commissioning, testing and disinfection, fill the system with
water, turn on control and isolating valves and the energy supply and leave the water supply system in
full operational condition.
Maintenance manuals
3.8 MAINTENANCE
General
Requirement: Conform to the 0891 Hydraulic maintenance work section.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 GENERALLY
Provide and install new water service pipework of sizes and on alignments indicated on drawings.
Maintain existing water service in operation until completion and testing on the new water service.
Provide and install temporary pipework as required to maintain the existing system.
Liaise with the Superintendent 4 weeks prior to isolation of the existing water service to discuss the
planned works with a date, time and expected duration of the changeover.
To minimise duration off shut downs, ensure all new pipework, water meters and backflow valves have
been installed and tested, all associated works have been undertaken, excavate to locate and prepare
existing pipework for new connection and make available all required fittings, valves etc..
4.2 PIPING
Cold water services installed in the ground external of buildings shall be Acu-Water SDR11 PN16
PE100 (black with blue stripe) polyethylene manufactured to AS/NZS 4130 with matching
electrofusion fittings manufactured to AS/NZS 4129 or a similar product equivalent in form, function,
Install polyethylene water service pipes and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines
and specifications.
Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be installed be skilled operatives, trained and certified by the
supplier / manufacture install polyethylene water service.
Provide copy of Polyethylene welding accreditation certificate to Superintendent prior to insulation.
Cold and hot water service installed above ground and within buildings shall be Kembla Type B
copper tube with Viega Propress copper EPDM rubber seal fittings installed in accordance with
manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and
All below ground copper pipework be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape.
ALL non-potable pipework shall be fitted with purple sleeving and labelled to AS3500.
All hot water pipe work shall be installed in a way that ensures damage to pipe work will not occur due
to movement or pipework due to expansion.
All hot water pipes shall have 150mm minimum clearance from cold water pipes throughout.
Where chased into walls pipes shall be protected by wrapping with approved sponge tape.
Cone-tite fittings or cast brass tees and elbows will not be accepted, flare type unions only.
Provide adequate anchorage where pipes terminate in walls, at taps and outlets, etc.
ALL above ground cold and hot water pipework shall be labelled in accordance with AS3500.
4.3 HOT WATER PIPEWORK INSULATION
Provide and Armaflex FRV 25mm wall thickness pipe insulation to all hot water pipework in
accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality,
Insulation shall be installed over piping before installation and shall not be cut longitudinally.
4.4 ISOLATION VALVES
Above Ground
Provide and install Zetco (1005) series ball valves, of sizes indicated on the drawings, with stainless
steel handles and disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on
outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the
Below Ground
Provide and install Zetco (2505) series below ground ball valves, of sizes indicated on the drawings,
with stem cap and disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on
outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the
All below ground valves, bolts, nuts shall be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape.
Provide and install Zetco (2502) 900mm underground valve key or a similar product equivalent in form,
Provide a valve key handle to all below ground valves / valve pits.
Key handle to terminate 100mm below valve box cover, cut down each key handle to required length.
4.5 VALVE PITS / BOXES
Provide and install valve boxes to all inground valves comprising of a 225mm PVC riser below a
Galvin Engineering (178049) 250x250 hinged cast iron valve box cover or a similar product equivalent
in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.
Install box on a 150mm wide x 150mm deep concrete strip footing with hinged cover set flush with
finished paving level.
Cast iron covers shall label embossed 'WATER' and epoxy coated blue.
4.6 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES (TMV)
Provide and install Galvin Engineering (101.70.00.00) CliniMix Lead Safe thermostatic mixing valve
(TMV) with 15mm inlets, 15/20mm outlet, right angle ball valves, non-return valves and strainers or a
Superintendent.
Provide and install purpose made stainless steel standoff wall brackets
Install thermostatic mixings valves on the hot water supply to all personal hygiene fixtures / tapware
and all sinks that are accessible to students at locations indicated on the drawings.
The Head Contractor shall provide suitably sized ceiling access panels where required to provide
access for maintenance purposes. Liaise with Builder and establish suitable location for ceiling access
panels prior to installing on thermostatic mixing valves.
Test all hot water outlets for maximum temperature delivery at prior to Practical Completion.
Provide test sheets and written certification that all outlets have been tested to deliver 42°C maximum
temperature hot water.
Test sheets shall nominate Room number and temperature at outlets and shall be included with the
Hydraulics Manual.
4.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTION VALVES (DCV)
Provide and install Wilkins (20-350CAB1R) 20mm double check valve with 2 No ball valves and line y-
strainer in recessed stainless-steel cabinet (500mm wide x 400mm high x 90mm deep) with removable
inspection window panel and 40mm BSP waste outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function,
Extend non potable water service and connect to non-potable cold water to hose tap over cleaner sink
as specified in section 0812.
Subject all backflow valves to test procedures as required by AS3500 and the Water Corporation.
Install engraved commissioning / service test tags to all backflow valves with test date and testing
contractors’ details.
Within 5 days of installation submit all required certificates and results to the Water Corporation.
Provide ‘owners’ copy of test certificates in operation and maintenance manuals.
Allow for servicing and retesting of backflow valves 1 month prior to end of defects liability period.
4.8 LINE STRAINERS
Provide and install Zetco (1504) brass y-strainers with 316 grade stainless steel 500 micron mesh
strainer with disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet
or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of
the Superintendent.
4.9 NON RETURN VALVES
Provide and install Zetco Series 1805 bronze check valves with disconnecting unions comprising tube
bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function,

4.10 MECHANICAL SERVICES EQUIPMENT

Provide and install a chrome plated brass hose tap with vacuum breaker as previously specified to
each mechanical plant enclosure.
Liaise with the mechanical contractor to ascertain exact location and height of all required water points
prior to commencing installation.
4.11 TESTING
Subject the domestic cold water service to hydrostatic tests in accordance with AS3500 and to the
satisfaction of the Superintendent.
The domestic cold water piping system shall be flushed of all debris and grit and subject to operating
tests to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.

08 HYDRAULIC 0831 Hydrants
0831 HYDRANTS
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Provide fire hydrant installations including water supply, piping, valves, hydrant valves,
booster valve and suction points, as documented.
Design
General
- 0814 Hydraulic pumps.
- 0891 Hydraulic maintenance.
1.3 STANDARDS
General
1.4 SUBMISSIONS
Products
Product listing: Submit documentation to verify product listing in the ActivFire Register of Fire
Protection Equipment for the respective item.
Samples
General: Submit samples of accessories not documented as proprietary items, including the following:
- Fire brigade booster valve.
- Fire hydrant valve.
- Vandal resistant canister enclosures.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
- Connection branch to existing site water mains.
- Pipes installed in trenches including all thrust blocks where required.
- Flow testing of the most hydraulically disadvantage hydrant
- Fire brigade booster / operational test
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTHORISED PRODUCTS

General
Requirement: Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment.
2.2 PIPING
General
Piping material: As documented.

2.3 VALVES
Isolating valves
Below-ground metal seated isolating valves: To AS/NZS 2638.1. Below-ground resilient seated
isolating valves: To AS/NZS 2638.2. Fire hydrant valves
Requirement: Provide fire hydrant valves as follows:
- To the requirements of the local fire brigade.
- Copper alloy construction.
- Matching non-ferrous dust cap and chain. Valve monitors: To AS 4118.1.4.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
General
System: To AS 2419.1.
Valves: Locate valves to permit satisfactory operation and maintenance.
3.2 COMMISSIONING GENERAL
System: To AS 2419.1.
Baseline data
Requirement: Provide baseline data to AS 1851.
3.3 MAINTENANCE GENERAL
Requirement: Conform to the 0891 Hydraulic maintenance worksection.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 GENRALLY
Provide and install fire booster assembly, hydrants, valves and pipework as indicated on drawings.
Liaise with DFES and the Superintendent 2 weeks prior to any isolation of the existing fire service to
discuss the planned works with a date, time and expected duration. Submit an Impairment Notification
to DFES at least 72 hours prior to planned isolation of the fire hydrant system.
To minimise duration off shutdowns, ensure all new pipework has been installed and tested, all
associated works have been undertaken, excavate to locate and prepare existing pipework for new
connection and make available all required fittings, valves etc.
It is important that where buildings are occupied during construction, that the Head Contractor
prepares a management plan to ensure the existing installed fire safety systems remain operational
and accessible for the duration of the construction.
4.2 FIRE HYDRANT BOOSTER (FB)
Provide and install Galvin Engineering (380168) two point fire hydrant booster assembly comprising of
150mm galvanised steel and painted pipework, 150mm table E flanges, gear operated butterfly valves
(chain open), non-return valve, pressure gauge, 2x 65 BIC hydrant valves, 2x booster inlet valves,
valve caps / plugs or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance
Provide and install Galvin Engineering (380212) fire hydrant booster cabinet (2000mmL x 600mmW x
1500mmH) comprising of powder coated zincalume panels, raised support legs, hinged doors, budget
taper lock and signage to AS2419 or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability
Provide and install 150mm galvanised steel risers from below ground polyethylene pipework complete
with table E flanges, fibre gaskets and matching galvanised steel nut/bolts.
Wrap all below ground steel pipework, flanges and bolts with Denso petrolatum tape.
Head Contractor to construct a 150mm thick 2400mmLx1000mmW concrete pad for mounting and
fixing of the fire booster cabinet at 50mm above surrounding finished surface level.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance from face of fire hydrant and booster inlets to face of booster
cabinet and as per AS 2419 and DFES requirements.
Head Contractor to repaint the fire hydrant booster assembly pipework and fittings with R13 “Signal
Red” gloss enamel paint prior to practical completion.
Head Contractor to paint signage in 75mm high lettering in a contrasting colour to the booster cabinet
doors 1) “FIRE HYDRANT BOOSTER” 2) “FH” within a circle of 100mm inside diameter to external
face of door(s)
Provide and install 2 No 150mm x 1800mm steel bollards filled with concrete, adjacent to fire booster
cabinet. Confirm location of bollards with Superintendent prior to installing.
Head Contractor to allow for painting of the bollards and re painting of the fire booster cabinet with
approved primer, undercoat and three coats of R13 “Signal Red” gloss enamel paint.
Provide and install A1 size engraved (black and red embossed) aluminium block plan in accordance
with AS2419 and to the satisfaction of the DFES within the fire booster cabinet. Submit a draft of the
fire service block plan to DFES for approval 6 weeks prior to DFES booster testing. Block plans to be
mechanically screw fixed.
On completion of booster testing provide and install engraved stainless steel black embossed notice of
boost “BOOST PRESSURE xxx kPa” and test pressure “TEST PRESSURE xxx kPa” to inside of
booster cabinet in letters 25mm high in accordance with AS2419 and to the satisfaction of the DFES.
4.3 PIPING
Fire service pipe installed in the ground external of buildings shall be Acu-Fire SDR11 PN16 HD-
PE100 (black with red stripe) manufactured to AS/NZS 4130 with matching electrofusion fittings
manufactured to AS/NZS 4129 or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and
Install polyethylene pipework and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be installed be skilled operatives, trained and certified by the
supplier / manufacture install polyethylene water service.
Fire service piping installed in the ground shall maintain 750mm minimum depth to top of pipe.
Fire service pipe of 100mm and larger, installed above ground and within the buildings shall be
ActivFire certified, hot-dip galvanised, medium wall steel pipes in accordance with AS1074, with
matching hot-dip galvanised roll grooved fittings and couplings.
Internal above ground pipework supports shall have an FRL of no less than 60/–/–, while maintaining
a pipe-support temperature of not less than 500°C when tested in accordance with AS 1530.4 to the
satisfaction of the Superintendent.
Galvanised steel pipe installed below ground shall be of 1500mm maximum length.
Connect steel risers to vertical polyethylene pipework 600mm below ground level.
Galvanized steel pipe and fittings shall be Denso wrapped where installed within the ground.
4.4 ISOLATION VALVES
Below ground fire main isolation valves 100mm and larger shall be AVFI (RSGV-AS) clockwise close
resilient sealing sluice valve in accordance with AS2638, with stem cap, table E flange AS2129, fibre
gaskets, galvanized steel bolts, washers and nuts or a similar product equivalent in form, function,
Sluice valves shall operate anti-clockwise open.
Provide and install spindle extension to terminate stem cap 100-350mm below finished surface level.
All below ground valves, bolts, nuts shall be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape.
Below ground fire hose reel isolation valves shall be Zetco (1007) series lockable ball valve, of sizes
indicated on the drawings with tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar
Superintendent.
All below ground valves shall be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape.
Install engraved tag with 8mm high uppercase text – “FIRE SERVICE VALVE - CLOSE ONLY TO
SERVICE FIRE HOSE REELS
Provide and install 003 padlock, lock in open position and hand over keys to the Superintendent

4.5 BELOW GROUND VALVE PITS

Provide and install 225mm SN8 uPVC riser over below ground isolating valves and topped with Galvin
Engineering (178041) 250x250 hinged ductile iron valve box cover cast into 150 wide x 150mm deep
reinforced concrete surround and set flush with finished surrounding surface level or a similar product
Cast iron covers shall label embossed ‘FIRE' and epoxy coated white.
Provide and install black embossed engraved stainless-steel tag with lettering at 75mm high to the
access cover of all existing and new sluice valves with details of valve type and valve number in
accordance with AS2419 and DFES requirements. All sluice valve numbers shall be reflected on the
new fire booster block plans.
4.6 FIRE HYDRANTS (FH)
Provide and install dual outlet fire hydrants comprising of Galvin Engineering galvanised steel hydrant
riser with dual head and flanged vertical inlet (381337), 2x 65 BIC fire hydrant valves (381301), brass
valve plugs (380550), tamper resistant valve cover (381331), stainless steel securing chain and 003
Lockwood padlock or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance
Centre of fire hydrant valve outlets to be 900mm above finished surface level.
Install a concrete surround of 450mm x 450mm x 450mm around hydrant riser pipe, with top of
concrete set 25mm above adjacent finished surface level to all external fire hydrants that are not
located within an enclosure.
Provide and install 2x 100mm diameter concrete filled heavy duty galvanized vehicle protection
bollards to either side of fire hydrants where located adjacent to driveways and carparks or where
mechanical damage by vehicles is possible.
Ensure access to and operation of all existing fire hydrants is maintained during new site works.
Provide and install signage adjacent to all new fire hydrants as detailed on drawings, clearly indicating
that three lengths of 30-meter hose (90 meters) is required to achieve complete hose coverage in
accordance the fire engineering report. Submit draft signage to the Superintendent prior to fabrication.
4.7 TESTING & COMPLIANCE
On completion of new works, the complete fire service system shall be pressure tested to not less than
1700kPa. Rectify leaks if required and re-pressure test the fire service system. Provide 2 weeks’
notice to the Superintendent of date and time of fire system pressure test. The fire service system
pressure test shall be sighted by the Superintendent. Provide pressure test certification within Booster
Cabinet and within the Hydraulic Services Maintenance and Operating Manuals.
Ensure all fire service piping is flushed clean of debris and grit. The Contractor is liable for rectification
costs if damage is caused to DFES and/or private contractors mobile pumping appliance and testing
equipment by debris and grit from within the fire service system.
Undertake testing and commissioning of the new fire service as required by DFES and in accordance
with AS2419 at least 4 weeks prior to practical completion.
The Head Contractor shall engage Complete Fire Compliance (John Mirco – 0402 469 987) to
undertake a site inspection and flow testing of the new fire hydrant system in accordance with AS2419
and DFES operational requirements.
Commissioning tests required by AS2419.1 and DFES include the following.
- Hydrostatic pressure testing of all new fire service pipework
- Fire hydrant flow pressure testing most hydraulically disadvantaged fire hydrant(s) unassisted.
- Fire hydrant flow pressure testing most hydraulically disadvantaged fire hydrant(s) using the fire
booster assembly via a DFES / mobile pumping appliance.
A copy of all test results and compliance report shall be submitted to DFES Built Environment Branch
for confirmation that the tested systems installed are compliant with AS2419.1
Insert all test results within the Hydraulic Services Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
Allow for monthly testing of all new installed fire protection equipment; fire booster assembly, fire
hydrants, etc. accordance with AS1851 (Maintenance of fire protection systems and equipment)
during the defects period. Provide copy of test records to Superintendent at final handover.

08 HYDRAULIC 0891 Hydraulic maintenance
0891 HYDRAULIC MAINTENANCE
1 GENERAL
General
Requirement: Maintain the hydraulic systems for the documented maintenance period so that the
performance, reliability, service life, energy efficiency and safety of the system is equal to or better
than that at the beginning of the maintenance period, in parallel with and including:
- Periodic and statutory maintenance, cleaning and replacement of consumables.
- Emergency repairs.
Maintenance period: As documented.
General: For the purpose of this work section the following definition applies:
- Consumable: Materials or components intended to be replaced within the service life of the
associated plant or equipment.
- Periodic maintenance: Planned routine maintenance of plant and equipment (proactive), including
fire safety measures and statutory requirements.
- Repairs: Unplanned/corrective maintenance (reactive).
- Replacement: Upgrading of a higher value component on regular cycle, including repainting and
replacement of air conditioning equipment.
1.4 SUBMISSIONS CERTIFICATION
Annual certification: Inspect and submit certification for all items required to be inspected annually
under statutory requirements including, but not limited to, air handling systems required for fire
operation, boilers and pressure vessels.
Records
Maintenance records: Conform to the 0171 General requirements work section.
Periodic maintenance and performance report: At the frequency documented, submit reports
summarising the maintenance performed and the performance of the hydraulic installation in the
preceding period. Set out the report in a form that permits comparison with previous reports. Include
the following as minimum requirements:
- Dates and number of site labour hours for periodic maintenance. Exclude travelling time.
- Dates, number of site labour hours and nature of work for emergency repairs. Exclude travelling
time.
- Dates and number of site labour hours for defects liability rectification if within the defects liability
period. Exclude travelling time.
- List of any motors for which the motor current varied by more than 10% from the current measured
during commissioning.
- For each separately metered item, the water or gas use for each month of the reporting period.
1.5 INSPECTION
Notice
Requirement: Give notice so that an inspection may be held simultaneously with the final programmed
maintenance visit.

2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Product selection
Proprietary items: Select products, as consumables or replacement items, of the same make, model
and type as those being replaced.
Substitutions: Where the existing product is no longer available, provide products with at least the
same performance and construction characteristics.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 EMERGENCY REPAIRS

General
Requirement: Respond to call outs for breakdowns or other faults requiring emergency repairs. Rectify
faults and replace faulty materials and equipment.
Remedial work: Carry out any remedial work, including temporary work, necessary to restore each
system to safe and satisfactory operation. Verify each system is operating correctly before leaving the
site. Do not leave the plant in an unsafe condition.
Temporary work: Promptly replace temporary work with permanent rectification.
Contact details
Emergency contract: Provide contact details including after hours and emergency mobile and/or pager
details, to permit notification of emergency conditions.
Response time
Period: Attend site for emergency service within the documented response time.
Response period: Starts at the time of notification to the contactor’s nominated contact point.
3.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
General
Microbial control maintenance: To AS/NZS 3666.2.
Routine visits: Make routine service visits at the frequency documented. Service items of equipment in
conformance with the maintenance schedules in the operation and maintenance manuals.
Notification of defects: When defects in the installation are identified, give notice. Requirement:
Provide maintenance work including, but not limited to, the following:
- Carry out the manufacturers' recommended maintenance.
- Attend to reported defects and complaints.
- Check for and repair corrosion.
- Check for and rectify any unsafe conditions.
- Replace faulty or damaged parts and consumable components.
- Check anti-vibration supports, brackets and clamps, holding down bolts and flexible connections, for
deterioration and for freedom of movement of assembly.
- Identification of pipes, conduits and ducts maintenance: To AS 1345.
- Safety signs maintenance: To AS 1319.
Standards: To AS/NZS 3500.1 and AS 2845.3.
Cleaning
Requirement: At the end of the maintenance period:
- Remove waste and clean all parts of the installation.
- Remove temporary protective coatings, packaging and labels.
- Clean screens and strainer baskets.
Piped systems
Tasks: Perform the following:

- Check equipment items and record values for operation, calibration, performance compliance,
temperature and energy consumption.
- Rectify all water leaks regardless of size. Clean and repair any water damage.
- Check condition of insulation and repair as required.
- Provide service tags recording inspections and tests.
Cold and heated water
Maintenance of tanks and piping for potable water: To AS/NZS 3500.1 and AS/NZS 3500.4. Ball float
valves: Check and adjust for no overflow.
Heated water systems:
- Conform to AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 12.
- Inspection and maintenance: To AS/NZS 3666.2.
- Leaks: Inspect cold and heated water systems at least annually for the following:
- Leaks, including leaks from cisterns.
- Other defects.
- Safe condition.
- Conformance to the PCA and network utility operator requirements. Leaks and defects: Report if
found and rectify.
Strainers: Inspect and clean at least annually.
Tapware
Requirement: Inspect for leaks and damage. If leaks are found, service O-rings, replace washers and
reseat to rectify.
General: Maintain to AS 2845.3 and AS/NZS 3500.1. Service tags: Record inspections and tests.
Thermostatic mixing valves
Field testing and maintenance: To AS 4032.3. Service tags: Record inspections and tests.
Fuel gas
Requirement: Maintain fuel gas services so that they are:
- Free from leaks and other defects.
- Efficient and safe.
- In conformance with AS/NZS 5601.1 and network utility operator requirements.
- Maintenance: Perform the following annually:
- Inspect all gas reticulation including fixings, isolating valves, regulators and safety enclosures.
- Pressure test the whole installation for leaks.
Sanitary plumbing
Requirement: Maintain as follows:
- At least annually: Inspect for leaks, repair and report.
- At other times: Attend and clear blockages within 24 hours of notification. Submit a report on the
cause of the blockage.
System performance: Conform to the PCA and network utility operator requirements.
Stormwater
Requirement: Regularly clean and inspection as follows:
- Annually at the end of autumn: Inspect guttering and other rainwater goods. Remove leaves and
other potential blockages. Clean leaf screens.
- At other times: Attend and clear blockages within 24 hours of notification.
System performance: Conform to the PCA and network utility operator requirements.
Hydrants
Hydrants: To AS 1851.

3.3 END OF MAINTENANCE PERIOD SERVICE

General
Requirement: Within a month of the end of the 12 month maintenance period, undertake all work
scheduled to be carried out on an annual basis.
3.4 COMPLETION
Maintenance records
Service records: Record maintenance undertaken in the schedules in the operation and maintenance
manuals.
Maintenance reports: Prepare maintenance reports as documented.
Restitution after maintenance tasks
Requirement: Restore removed, damaged, contaminated, or soiled services and building elements
when the maintenance task is complete.
Standard: Equal to the condition of the original installation.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS SCHEDULE
Provision Requirement
Maintenance period Conform to the 0171 General requirements work
section

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE
ELECTRICAL, COMMUNICATIONS
AND SECURITY SPECIFICATION
Prepared By: Scott Barrell
Client: Brad Quartermaine

Architect
Date: 11 January 2021
Doc No: 9155SB-SE-119655sb
Revision: 0
Reviewed/Approved: SB / SC
61 Loftus Street
Leederville WA 6007
T: (08) 9328 5500
E: etc@etcpl.com.au
PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PAGE i
REVISION REGISTER
Rev. Date Revision Details Originator Reviewed Approved
A 11/01/21 Issued for Tender SB SB SC
9155SB-SE-119655sb-0 11 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PAGE ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART A GENERAL CLAUSES ............................................................................ 7
A1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ 7
A1.1 Contract Conditions ............................................................................................................. 7
A1.2 Definitions of Terms ............................................................................................................. 7
A1.3 Scope of Work ..................................................................................................................... 7
A1.4 Order of Precedence ........................................................................................................... 8
A1.5 Assignment/Sub-Contracting ............................................................................................... 9
A1.6 Programming of Work .......................................................................................................... 9
A1.7 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ............................................................................... 9
A1.8 Variation Pricing................................................................................................................. 10
A1.9 Supervision and Coordination ........................................................................................... 10
A1.10 Risk Management / OHS ................................................................................................... 11
A1.11 Design and Certification .................................................................................................... 12
A1.12 "As New" Condition on Completion Date........................................................................... 12
A1.13 Alternative Equipment ....................................................................................................... 12
A1.14 Discrepancies and Queries ............................................................................................... 13
A1.15 Labour ................................................................................................................................ 13
A1.16 Regulations ........................................................................................................................ 13
A1.17 Drawings ............................................................................................................................ 14
A1.17.1 Contract Drawings ..................................................................................................... 14
A1.17.2 Shop Drawings .......................................................................................................... 14
A1.17.3 As Constructed Drawings .......................................................................................... 15
A1.17.4 Purchase of CADD Drawings .................................................................................... 16
A1.18 Existing Site Conditions ..................................................................................................... 16
A1.18.1 Demolition .................................................................................................................. 16
A1.18.2 As Constructed .......................................................................................................... 17
A1.19 Existing Equipment ............................................................................................................ 17
A1.20 Samples ............................................................................................................................. 17
A1.21 Electro Magnetic Radiation ................................................................................................ 17
A1.22 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............... 17
A1.23 Chasing and Openings ...................................................................................................... 17
A1.24 Fire/Smoke Sealing ........................................................................................................... 18
A1.25 Fixing of Equipment ........................................................................................................... 18
A1.26 Fabricated Equipment ....................................................................................................... 19
A1.27 Materials Selection and Corrosion..................................................................................... 19
A1.27.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 19
A1.27.2 Corrosion ................................................................................................................... 19
A1.27.3 Exterior Installations .................................................................................................. 19
A1.28 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 19
A1.28.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 19
A1.28.2 Surface Preparation ................................................................................................... 20
A1.29 Phase Balancing ................................................................................................................ 20
A1.30 Testing, Commissioning and Tuition ................................................................................. 21
A1.31 Thermographic Survey ...................................................................................................... 23
A1.32 Operating and Maintenance Handbook ............................................................................. 23
A1.32.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 23
A1.32.2 Hard Copy .................................................................................................................. 24
A1.32.3 Electronic Copy.......................................................................................................... 24
A1.32.4 Sections ..................................................................................................................... 25
9155SB-SE-119655sb-0 11 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PAGE iii
A1.33 Maintenance & Defects Liability ........................................................................................ 26

A1.34 Keys .................................................................................................................................. 27
A1.35 General Demolition and Modification of Existing Services................................................ 27
PART B GENERAL TECHNICAL CLAUSES .................................................... 28

B1 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION - GENERAL ......................................................... 28
B1.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 28
B1.2 Sub-Mains to Panels Provided by Other Trades ............................................................... 28
B1.3 Power Disruptions ............................................................................................................. 28
B2 EARTHING - GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 28
B2.1 Earthing and Bonding ........................................................................................................ 28
B3 SWITCHBOARDS - GENERAL ............................................................................................ 28
B3.1 Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................... 28
B3.2 General .............................................................................................................................. 29
B3.2.1 General Requirements .............................................................................................. 29
B3.2.2 Identification .............................................................................................................. 30
B3.2.3 Legend and Drawing Holder ..................................................................................... 30
B3.2.4 Bus Bars .................................................................................................................... 30
B3.3 Enclosures ......................................................................................................................... 31
B3.4 Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................. 31
B3.4.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 31
B3.4.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) ................................................................ 32
B3.4.3 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)............................................................................ 32
B3.4.4 Residual Current Devices (RCDs) ............................................................................ 33
B3.5 Fuses ................................................................................................................................. 33
B3.5.1 H.R.C. Fuse Units ..................................................................................................... 33
B3.5.2 Spare Fuses .............................................................................................................. 33
B3.6 Escutcheons ...................................................................................................................... 33
B3.7 Contactors and Motor Starters .......................................................................................... 33
B3.8 Isolators and Switches ...................................................................................................... 34
B3.9 Provisions for Locking Off ................................................................................................. 34
B3.10 Time Switches ................................................................................................................... 34
B3.11 Wiring ................................................................................................................................ 34
B3.12 Shop Drawings .................................................................................................................. 34
B3.13 Form of Internal Separation .............................................................................................. 35
B3.14 Discrimination .................................................................................................................... 35
B3.15 Circuits and Test Facilities for Emergency Lighting .......................................................... 36
B3.16 Switchboard Inspection Test Plan ..................................................................................... 36
B3.17 Surge Protection................................................................................................................ 36
B3.17.1 Surge Diverters ......................................................................................................... 36
B3.17.2 Surge Filters .............................................................................................................. 36
B3.17.3 Performance .............................................................................................................. 37
B3.17.4 Performance Criteria ................................................................................................. 37
B3.17.5 Test Results and Certification ................................................................................... 37
B3.17.6 Condition Monitoring ................................................................................................. 37
B3.17.7 Installation ................................................................................................................. 37
B3.17.8 Approved Manufacturers ........................................................................................... 38
B3.17.9 Warranty .................................................................................................................... 38
B3.18 ELV Segregation ............................................................................................................... 38
B4 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS - GENERAL ............................................................... 38
9155SB-SE-119655sb-0 11 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PAGE iv
B4.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 38

B4.1.1 Standards .................................................................................................................. 38
B4.1.2 Trenching and Excavation ......................................................................................... 38
B4.1.3 Bedding and Backfilling ............................................................................................. 39
B4.1.4 Separation of Services .............................................................................................. 39
B4.1.5 Directional Boring ...................................................................................................... 39
B4.2 Underground Conduit ........................................................................................................ 40
B4.2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 40
B4.2.2 Conduit Bends ........................................................................................................... 40
B4.2.3 Couplings ................................................................................................................... 41
B4.2.4 Depth of Cover........................................................................................................... 41
B4.2.5 Empty Conduits ......................................................................................................... 41
B4.3 Cable Pits .......................................................................................................................... 41
B4.3.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 41
B4.3.2 Construction............................................................................................................... 41
B4.3.3 Load Classification .................................................................................................... 42
B4.3.4 Conduit Entries .......................................................................................................... 42
B4.3.5 Labels ........................................................................................................................ 42
B4.3.6 Sizing ......................................................................................................................... 42
B4.3.7 Drainage .................................................................................................................... 42
B5 CABLING – GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 43
B5.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 43
B5.2 Ability to Trace Cables within Buildings ............................................................................. 44
B5.3 Labelling ............................................................................................................................ 44
B5.3.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 44
B5.3.2 Underground Cables – All Cables ............................................................................. 44
B5.3.3 Above Ground Cables - Submains ............................................................................ 45
B5.3.4 Above Ground Cables – Final Circuits ...................................................................... 45
B6 POWER - GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 45
B6.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 45
B6.2 Switched Socket Outlets .................................................................................................... 45
B6.3 Suspended / Pendant Outlets ............................................................................................ 46
B6.4 Isolators ............................................................................................................................. 46
B6.5 Heavy Duty and Weatherproof Accessories ...................................................................... 46
B7 LIGHTING - GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 46
B7.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 46
B7.2 LED Lamps/Luminaires ..................................................................................................... 47
B7.3 Recessed Luminaires ........................................................................................................ 47
B7.4 Samples ............................................................................................................................. 47
B7.5 Photoelectric Switch .......................................................................................................... 47
B7.5.1 Switchboard Mounted ................................................................................................ 48
B7.5.2 Building Mounted ....................................................................................................... 48
B7.6 Light Switches.................................................................................................................... 48
B7.7 Dimmers ............................................................................................................................ 49
B7.8 Motion Detectors for Lighting Control ................................................................................ 49
B7.9 Exterior Luminaires ............................................................................................................ 50
B7.10 Supports and Mounting Accessories ................................................................................. 50
B7.11 Emergency and Exit Lighting ............................................................................................. 50
B7.12 Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 51
B8 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES - GENERAL ...................................................................... 51
9155SB-SE-119655sb-0 11 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PAGE v
B8.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 51

B8.2 Positioning of Fittings ........................................................................................................ 52
B8.3 Conduit .............................................................................................................................. 52
B8.3.1 Conduits in Concrete ................................................................................................. 52
B8.4 Cable Trays, Ladders and Supports ................................................................................. 52
B8.5 Electrical Cable Ducting .................................................................................................... 53
B8.6 Universal Access Toilets (UATs) ....................................................................................... 54
B8.7 Circuit Identification ........................................................................................................... 54
B9 COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - GENERAL ............................. 54
B9.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 54
B9.1.1 Standards and Regulations ....................................................................................... 54
B9.1.2 Licence ...................................................................................................................... 55
B9.1.3 Approved Vendors, Cable and Equipment ................................................................ 55
B9.1.4 Guarantee, Warranties and Installation .................................................................... 56
B9.1.5 Records and Certification .......................................................................................... 56
B9.2 Communications Equipment Racks .................................................................................. 56
B9.2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 56
B9.2.2 Cable Management ................................................................................................... 57
B9.2.3 RJ45 Patch Panels .................................................................................................... 57
B9.2.4 Distribution frames / Termination modules ............................................................... 57
B9.2.5 Power Distribution Unit (PDU) ................................................................................... 57
B9.3 Optical Fibre Cabling ......................................................................................................... 57
B9.4 Copper Twisted Pair Cabling ............................................................................................ 58
B9.4.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 58
B9.4.2 Terminations .............................................................................................................. 59
B9.4.3 Cat 6A UTP Patch Leads .......................................................................................... 59
B9.4.4 Work Area Cords (Flyleads) ...................................................................................... 59
B9.4.5 Surge Protection........................................................................................................ 59
B9.5 Outlets ............................................................................................................................... 59
B9.6 Labelling ............................................................................................................................ 60
B9.7 Earthing ............................................................................................................................. 60
B9.7.1 Communications Earth System (CES) ...................................................................... 60
B9.7.2 Telecommunications Reference Conductor (TRC) ................................................... 60
B9.8 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) .................................................................................. 61
B9.9 Testing ............................................................................................................................... 61
B9.9.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 61
B9.9.2 Copper Cabling ......................................................................................................... 61
B9.9.3 Optical Fibre Cabling ................................................................................................. 61
B10 POLES – GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 62
B10.1 Fabrication ......................................................................................................................... 62
B10.2 Erection of Poles ............................................................................................................... 63
B10.3 Installation of Foundations ................................................................................................ 63
B10.4 Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................... 63
B10.5 Finishing ............................................................................................................................ 63
B10.6 Lighting Poles .................................................................................................................... 64
B10.7 Shop Drawings .................................................................................................................. 64
PART C DETAILED TECHNICAL CLAUSES .................................................... 65

C1 WORKS BY OTHER TRADES ............................................................................................. 65
C1.1 Contractors Works (Builders Works) ................................................................................. 65
C1.2 Works by Mechanical Services Installer ........................................................................... 65
9155SB-SE-119655sb-0 11 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PAGE vi
C1.3 Works by Hydraulic Services Installer ............................................................................... 66

C1.4 Works To Be Undertaken by the Client ............................................................................. 66
C2 GENERAL POWER ............................................................................................................... 66
C2.1 Additional General Purpose Outlets .................................................................................. 66
C2.2 Direct Connections ............................................................................................................ 66
C3 PUSHBUTTON TIME DELAY SWITCHES FOR LIGHTING CONTROLS ........................... 66
C4 SECURITY SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 66
C4.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 66
C4.2 Electronic Equipment Requirements ................................................................................. 67
C4.3 System Description ............................................................................................................ 67
C4.4 Data Gathering Panels ...................................................................................................... 68
C4.5 Arm/Disarming Stations ..................................................................................................... 68
C4.6 Motion Detectors................................................................................................................ 68
C4.7 Door Contact/Detectors ..................................................................................................... 68
C4.8 Smoke and Thermal Detectors .......................................................................................... 69
C4.9 Power Supplies .................................................................................................................. 69
C4.10 Audible Alarm & Visual Indicator ....................................................................................... 69
C4.11 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 70
C4.12 Cabling ............................................................................................................................... 70
C4.13 Programming/Training ....................................................................................................... 70
C4.14 Testing ............................................................................................................................... 70
C4.15 Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 70
C4.16 Maintenance and Monitoring ............................................................................................. 71
C4.17 Samples ............................................................................................................................. 71
C4.18 Handbooks ......................................................................................................................... 71
C4.19 Lighting interface to security .............................................................................................. 71
C5 DISABLE TOILET ALARM SYSTEM .................................................................................... 71
C6 ELECTRICAL AND GAS KITCHEN/COOKING APPLIANCES ........................................... 72
C6.1 Electric Bench Cooktop ..................................................................................................... 72
C6.2 Electrical Underbench Oven .............................................................................................. 72
PART D APPENDICES....................................................................................... 73
D1 SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTABLE PITS / LIDS ....................................................................... 73
D2 ENCLOSURE LV ELV SEGREGATION REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY ............................. 74
D3 SWITCHBOARD DESIGN ITP .............................................................................................. 75
9155SB-SE-119655sb-0 11 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PAGE 7
PART A GENERAL CLAUSES

A1 GENERAL
A1.1 Contract Conditions

Refer to the "Preliminaries" which forms an integral part of the entire Specification.
A1.2 Definitions of Terms

In this section of the specification the following terms shall have the meanings assigned to
them as follows:
‘The Architect’ shall mean Brad Quartermaine Architect
‘The Superintendent’ shall mean Brad Quartermaine Architect
‘The Principal’ shall mean Providence Christian College.
‘Approved’ or ‘Approval’ shall mean approved by the Architect or Superintendent.
‘Provide’ shall mean supply, install, test and commission.
A1.3 Scope of Work

This document and referenced documents forms a part only of the project requirements, and
together with the preliminaries and all other contract documents, describe the services
installation for the Providence Christian College project.
All contract documents, drawings and specifications and appendices thereto shall be
considered as co-operative and any work omitted from one but inferred or present in the other
shall form part of the contract. This document in isolation shall not be interpreted as describing
the whole of the works required by a trade or trades. Include for all works as described in the
contract documents.
The work described by this section of the specification comprises the supply, delivery,
installation, testing, commissioning, maintenance and defects fault rectifications of electrical
services and associated equipment. The work includes the detail design of various
components such as switchboards, control circuits, low voltage systems, etc. Refer to the
respective trade specifications for scope of work and technical requirements for specialist
mechanical (‘mech-elec’) and hydraulic electrical services, controls and the like. Liaise and
coordinate with the respective trades.
This specification indicates the required methods of installation of the various electrical
services. However, where full details are not given in this specification, include everything
necessary for the convenient, safe, efficient and correct operation of such services.
Examine all building and trade specifications and drawings so as to be fully informed of the
intent, extent and nature of the works. This includes the connection and/or control, of various
items of electrical equipment supplied and to be connected/controlled in accordance with other
sections of the specification.
Coordinate and liaise with other trades to reduce any conflict between trade information shown
on electrical services documentation and the associated trade without cost variation.
Detailed Clauses herein provide a more detailed description of various elements of the
services to be provided.
The work includes but is not restricted to the detailed design, manufacture, supply, installation,
testing and maintenance of electrical and associated services including but not limited to:
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Low voltage power distribution installation including:

- Modifications to existing Switchboards
- Switchboards
- Busduct
- Power distribution submain cables
- Electrical supplies to equipment and switchboards by other trades (e.g.
mechanical, hydraulics, lift services etc);
- General power outlets;
- Pendant outlets
- Sub-circuit cabling
- Cable pathways including cable ladders, trays and conduits
- Lightning Protection (surge protection and filters);
- Earthing
• Other miscellaneous services including:
- General fittings and accessories
- Cable duct
- Connections to Electric stoves and ovens
• Car Park Light and light poles
• Artificial lighting including:
- Exit signs and emergency lighting throughout
- Emergency lighting testing system;
• Telecommunications services including:
- Communications cupboard fitout including equipment racks;
- Building structured cabling system;
- Cable pathways including cable trays and conduits;
• Electronic security system including:
- Intruder detection
• Public Address System via communications network
• Disable Toilet Alarm System Call
• Wiring, cables, enclosures and supports
• All other equipment and works required to provide a fully functional operational project
• Commissioning and defects
• Training
• Maintenance of the works during the defects liability period
A1.4 Order of Precedence

Unless directed otherwise by the Superintendent or indicated in the Contract Documents, the
following order of priority shall prevail:
• Commonwealth, State and Local Government Acts, Regulations and By-laws;

• Australian Standards and Codes of Practice;
• Design drawings;
• Parts of this specification as follows:
- Part A General Clauses;
- Part C Specific Scope of Work and Technical Requirements;
- Part D Appendices;
- Part B General Technical Clauses.
Should conflict occur between this Electrical Services Specification and any of the Reference
Documents, other trade documents and Client Standards, it shall immediately be brought to
the attention of the Superintendent for a ruling. In all cases the more onerous requirement
shall be assumed for tender purposes.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

A1.5 Assignment/Sub-Contracting
Nominate with tenders, proposed companies for which the work described within this section
of the specification, will be assigned or subcontracted.
Do not further assign or sub-contract any part of the works described in this section of the
specification to another party without the express written approval of the Superintendent.
Refer to preliminaries.
A1.6 Programming of Work

Submit to the Superintendent within thirty (30) days of awarding of contract a program/flow
chart of works described in this section of the specification. Prepare the programme/flow chart
in liaison with other trades and reflecting critical activities identified on the approved
construction programme. Illustrate timing of installation on the programme/chart including
approval periods, ordering dates, delivery and installation times for electrical materials and
equipment. Also identify major activities to be carried out during electrical services
commissioning (e.g. thermographic survey, phase balancing and the like).
A1.7 Quality Control and Quality Assurance

Prepare and implement a quality control and assurance program for the whole of the works
described in this section of the specification and submit a copy to the Superintendent within
fourteen (14) days of award of contract.
Maintain effective control of the quality of the equipment and materials, provide test facilities
and perform all examinations and tests to demonstrate conformance of the equipment and
materials to the technical requirements of the specification.
Provide objective evidence to prove that controls and inspections are effective. For this
purpose objective evidence means any statement of fact, either quantitative or qualitative,
pertaining to the quality of the supplies based on observations, measurements or tests which
can be verified.
The Superintendent reserves the right to perform any examination or tests to ensure that the
equipment or services provided conforms to the technical requirements of the specification
and to reject any equipment/service which does not conform.
The inspection of the quality assurance program or the marking of a component, shop
drawing, assembly or inspection document by the Superintendent shall not be construed as
an act of acceptance nor shall it relieve any obligation under the Contract.
Amend any element of the program deemed ineffective by the Superintendent to conform to
the Superintendent requirements.
The program shall include but not be limited to the following checklists:
• Job safety / risk analysis / JSA’s in accordance with Safe Work Australia and National
OHS Strategy Guidelines
• Supply and approval of pamphlets or samples and colour selection for all equipment
• Depth of underground conduits
• Testing and commissioning of equipment, materials and installation
• Authority approvals and applications
• Testing of luminaires requiring ‘night test’
• Confirmation that each luminaire has the correct lamp type, size and colour temperature
• Confirmation of equipment loads and locations prior to installation
• Confirmation of switchboard sizes and spaces allocated or cupboard sizes prior to
Submission of workshop drawings
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Submission of shop drawings

• ‘As constructed’ drawings – recording of information
Give adequate written notice to the Superintendent to inspect the work.
A1.8 Variation Pricing

Submit variations costs and/or extensions of time claims associated with proposed variations
within time period as set out in conditions of contract or where not indicated within two (2)
weeks of receiving documentation instructions of the relevant change. Where such notice is
not submitted, the instruction is deemed to have no cost or time implications to the Contract.
Unless previously agreed that unit rates can be applied to variations, all prices shall be broken
down into material quantities, material costs, labour (hours) and cost of labour.
All variation requests received shall be listed separately on monthly progress claims with date
received, date submitted, amount and date of approval.
A1.9 Supervision and Coordination

Employ during hours when work is being carried out until the Date of Practical Completion a
competent Supervisor who shall have sufficient command of the English language and of
Australian construction and technical terminology, to be able to read, converse and receive
instructions in English. The Supervisor shall be empowered to make decisions on behalf of
the Contractor / Subcontractor as appropriate.
Employ on the site of works an Electrical Services Supervisor or other suitably qualified and
experienced person to manage and coordinate the installation of all electrical services and
associated works as detailed in this specification. The responsibilities of the Electrical Services
Supervisor include but are not limited to the following:
• Check and coordinate all works against shop drawings of other trades and notify
Superintendent of any discrepancies between the electrical services drawings and
other trade drawings;
• Check, coordinate, integrate, accept and endorse shop drawings and submit same to
the Superintendent for review as required;
• Brief, coordinate and liaise with the Contractor, all subcontractors, Superintendent and
Authorities to ensure the supply, installation and commissioning and resultant data
provided for Superintendent’s approval is consistent with the requirements of the
Contract;
• Prepare detailed progress reports on testing and commissioning;
• Detailed programming and interfacing of commissioning activities for all services as
detailed in this specification;
• Arranging meetings with interested parties, including Superintendent and Authorities as
appropriate, to deal with commissioning and testing and to chair and minute such
meetings. Minutes are to be issued within three (3) days to all attendees and the
Superintendent;
• Compilation, checking and endorsement of operation and maintenance documents,
warranties, and ‘As Constructed’ drawings;
• Attend meetings, assist Principal’s staff and prepare status reports on defects during
the Defects Liability period, and submit these reports regularly to the Superintendent.
The Electrical Services Supervisor is also responsible for fully briefing and coordinating the
participation of the Principal’s staff during the testing, commissioning, and handover phases
of all services detailed in this specification to the Superintendent’s satisfaction.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

The Electrical Services Supervisor’s participation in the Contract shall commence from the
earliest required time and their Site presence, shall, from that time, be sufficient to inspect all
electrical work, and liaise with Superintendent and Authorities and to attend to other duties as
required.
During the latter period of the Contract, and for at least the commissioning period of the
Contract, the Electrical Services Supervisor shall be located full time on Site to manage the
commissioning process.
A1.10 Risk Management / OHS

Risks / hazards associated with the construction, commissioning, maintenance and ongoing
use of this project shall be managed to contain the risks within defined objectives.
Objectives shall be set to comply with Safe Work Australia, Australian Safety and
Compensation Council (ASCC) directives and the Contractors and Subcontractors duty of
care responsibilities.
Risk analysis decisions shall be recorded and responsibility for risk containment formally
assigned (JSA’s, MSDS, etc). Risk assessments shall be conducted in accordance with Safe
Work Australia Codes Of Practice for Managing Electrical Risks and Safe Design Of Buildings
and Structures.
Risk decisions shall be reviewed at site meetings and at time intervals recorded in the original
risk analysis and whenever a function is altered or governing legislation or standards are
changed.
Risk management and rating shall comply with Australia / New Zealand Standard AS/NZS
ISO 31000:2009 Risk Management.
Risks to be managed include but are not limited to:
Electrical Risks General Risks
Fall arrest systems / ladder access Construction, operation and maintenance

systems. safety / job risks.
Normal and emergency modes of

Work near power aerials.
operation.
Uninsured deliberate and accidental

Excavation near underground services.
damage.
Safe clearance in front of switchboards. Probity and integrity.
Pit levels / trip hazards. Shut down of facility or services.
Floodlights / lighting access methods. Failure of critical facilities.
Pit proximity to roads / car parks, safe work

Avoiding incurring unplanned costs.
practices.
Rotating machinery. Avoiding incurring unnecessary costs.
Pit depths – over 1200mm deep, confined Risks of storm, flood, fire, intrusion, duress,
space work practice. hazard, industrial relations.
Ceiling access / safety. Avoiding environmental contamination.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Ensuring competency of service providers

Pole setbacks from roads.
and subcontractors.
Warranty, defects liability and ongoing

Safe lamp disposal.
maintenance.
EMC / RF radiation Cost control and life cycle cost.
Security and integrity of facilities, services

and information.
Contract management.
Compliance with regulations, policies and

guidelines.
The aim of Risk Management and Job Safety Analysis is to integrate hazard identification into
the construction and maintenance process early to eliminate or minimise the risks of injury
throughout the life of the Facility, Building or Structure. It encompasses components of the
process including facilities, hardware, systems, equipment, products, tooling, materials,
controls, layout and configuration.
The Operation and Maintenance handbook specified herein must include copies of all residual
OHS risk information / JSA’s associated with the construction and maintenance of the project,
along with specific instructions in the safe maintenance and monitoring of all services and
products supplied and installed. Refer to Safe Work Australia’s codes of practice.
A1.11 Design and Certification

All design undertaken by the Contractor as part of this contract works shall be certified as
being fully compliant with the contract documentation, component manufacturer’s installation
recommendation and all relevant Australian Standard codes, regulations and as further
specified within this specification.
A1.12 "As New" Condition on Completion Date

Each item of equipment or cabling which is to form part of the permanent installation shall be
new, clean and shall not be used for construction purposes. Equipment shall be energised
only for necessary testing and commissioning.
A1.13 Alternative Equipment

The specification of a proprietary item does not necessarily imply exclusive preference for that
item but shall be deemed to indicate required properties of the item such as type, quality,
appearance, finish, method of construction, performance and the like.
Alternative proposals that will reduce the cost but not quality or performance of materials, or
equipment may be submitted for review with tenders. Preferences shall be given to Australian
Manufactured goods.
A fully complying tender price based on all equipment specified must be submitted with
separate attached alternative tenders before alternative tenders are considered.
The Superintendent may in its absolute discretion adopt or reject any or all alternatives. No
claim shall arise from any rejection nor, unless otherwise agreed, shall adoption of an
alternative be grounds for any claim for extension of time.
When offering an alternative for approval, provide all available technical information, details
of benefits to the Principal, test reports carried out by approved independent testing
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Authorities, any associated works required by other trades and any other relevant information
requested by the Superintendent. Technical information shall include manufacturer, supplier,
catalogue reference number, product brochure and comparison sheet of technical
performance between specified and alternative offered.
Where alternative luminaires are offered luminaire technical information shall also include
lighting calculations for all associated areas indicating illumination and glare levels in
accordance with AS/NZS 1680. The maintenance factor used for all calculations shall be
clearly identified and calculations supporting each maintenance factor shall be provided. All
lighting calculations must be certified by an independent qualified Engineer.
Alternate tender prices submitted shall include the clause numbers of the specification to
which the alternatives apply.
No substitution will be authorised through failure of the Contractor to place orders in sufficient
time to avoid delays to the Works other than in circumstances where the Contractor can
demonstrate that delay in material supply is or was beyond the Contractor’s control. No claim
shall arise from any refusal of the Superintendent to approve a substitution.
Where specified materials are unobtainable, notify the Superintendent in time to avoid delays
to the Works. Obtain written instructions from the Superintendent before commencing any
work associated therewith.
Generally alternatives will not be considered after the tender closing date.
All alternative proposals offered after closing of tender date must include a benefit to the
Principal in the form of reduction in cost, improvement in quality or improvement in
performance. Proposals shall also include for the Superintendent costs borne in carrying out
a review of the proposed alternatives. These costs shall be charged at commercial rates and
shall include for all time, travel and redesign required ensuring alternatives are suitable for
use. Confirm costs with Superintendent prior to submission of alternative.
A1.14 Discrepancies and Queries

Immediately notify the Superintendent of any discrepancy discovered in the documents and
obtain instruction as to how the discrepancy is to be resolved before submitting tenders.
Where discrepancies occur during construction notify the Superintendent and obtain
instruction as to how the discrepancies are to be resolved before proceeding.
A1.15 Labour
All workmanship shall be of a high standard and only carried out by suitably trained and
qualified labour.
Where necessary, employ specialist tradespersons/service providers to carry out work
covered by the specification.
A1.16 Regulations
Materials and workmanship shall comply with all relevant current Australian Standards, Codes
and Regulations and also reference codes and Standards listed in the prefaces to those
standards and codes. All installations must comply with AS/NZS 3000 Wiring Rules.
Where Australian Standards and Codes do not exist the appropriate International Standard or
Codes shall apply. Request an instruction from the Superintendent for amendments to
Standards, Codes or Regulations that come into effect during the works and affect the works
of the contract.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

All work shall comply with the Electricity Supply Authority Regulations, National Construction
Code (NCC), Health Department Regulations, Australian Communications and Media
Authority (ACMA), Local Building Authority, Worksafe, Western Australia and DFES WA
requirements and guidelines.
If any discrepancy exists between the requirements of the specification and the requirements
of Standards or authority regulations, the more stringent requirement shall apply. In each
case however, request an instruction from the Superintendent.
A1.17 Drawings
A1.17.1 Contract Drawings
Confirm the location, electrical ratings and connection details of all electrical equipment and
switchboards furnished by all trades, prior to commencement of installation. Immediately
before installation of cabling or conduiting, re-confirm the location of equipment and
connection details. Refer to Clause A1.14 ‘Discrepancies and Queries’.
All drawings are diagrammatic. Check all relevant dimensions on site before proceeding with
the work. Do not scale dimensions from the drawings.
Include in tender price for any accessory or appliance to be relocated up to 1 metre in any
direction by the Superintendent, prior to any associated works being undertaken on site, at no
additional cost adjustment to contract.
A1.17.2 Shop Drawings
Prepare shop drawings as further specified, in digital (CADD) format.
Submit shop drawings electronically (minimum A3 PDF format unless otherwise specified) to
the Superintendent for examination. A single printed hard copy of each drawing (plus
additional copies where nominated by the Contract Preliminaries) shall be provided on
request.
Shop drawings are to be reviewed and certified correct by a senior representative of
the Electrical Services Company with a signature on each drawing prior to being
submitted for examination. Unsigned drawings will be rejected.
Obtain examined drawings from the Superintendent before manufacture or installation
commences for all fabricated equipment as further detailed herein. Submit shop drawings in
a timely manner, allowing a minimum of twenty-one (21) days for examination prior to return,
unless nominated otherwise.
Comments on “examined” shop drawings will apply to general principles of design only.
Examination of the drawings by the Superintendent will in no way relieve the Contractor’s
responsibility for any errors, omissions or necessity of furnishing such workmanship or
materials as may be required for the completion of these works in accordance with the contract
documents.
Provide shop and detailed design drawings for all fabricated equipment and specialty services
including, but not limited to:
• Switchboards
• Car park Lighting Poles
• Security system
• Communications equipment rack / cabinet details, layouts and elevations
• Luminaire suspension and support systems
• Connections and interfaces to mechanical, hydraulic and lift services
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Electrical Services contract drawings indicate design intent only and shall not be reproduced
in specialty services shop drawings. Electrical services shop drawings shall instead be
produced based on the actual equipment, devices, settings and component selections
proposed by the contractor.
Where required, request from the Superintendent and issue architectural backgrounds to
specialty services Subcontractors for production of shop drawings. Include all associated
costs in tender price.
Show on drawings single line schematics, control diagrams, floor plans, elevations,
dimensions, equipment details, panel layouts, labeling, operational descriptions,
compliance/certification, as required to fully describe the system/equipment to be supplied,
installed and/or commissioned. Shop drawings shall contain reference to all work required by
all trades.
Specialty services shop drawings shall be upgraded to ‘As Constructed’ status, at the
completion of the project, as defined herein.
A1.17.3 As Constructed Drawings
Prepare comprehensive ‘As Constructed’ drawings, detailing all equipment and services
installed within the scope of work defined within the contract documents. As Constructed
drawings shall show location of all equipment, circuit details, single line diagrams, switchboard
layouts, equipment rack layouts, system schematic diagrams, details of special items of
equipment and requirements as nominated for shop drawings.
As Constructed drawings shall show the exact depth and location (±300mm) of all inground
services excluding final circuit conduits. Such services shall be dimensioned off actual
building lines or surveyors datums.
Drawings shall not make reference to construction notes or information relevant only to the
construction process. All information associated with specialty systems shall not appear on
general electrical services drawings.
As Constructed drawings shall be prepared in CADD format. All CADD drafting shall be to
Australian Standards unless otherwise specified. Confirm exact requirements with the
Superintendent in each case, prior to submission.
All ‘As Constructed’ drawings shall incorporate the supplier’s and/or supplier’s company title
block. A statement shall be provided on each drawing, to read: ‘As Constructed by (company
name and telephone number)’ and signed and dated by a senior representative of the
company. The signatory’s name and position within company shall also be provided in block
capitals. Title block shall clearly incorporate Engineering Technology Consultants as Electrical
Consulting Engineers.
Preliminary ‘As Constructed’ drawings shall be prepared and submitted for the
Superintendent’s review, before completion of commissioning. Preliminary drawings shall be
examined by the Electrical Services Company or Installer and signed to confirm the
preliminary drawings are representative of the equipment and systems installed.
Where a total electrical services drawing or parts of a drawing are superseded by a shop
drawing (as built status drawing) the original drawing shall be amended and clearly notated
as cross referenced to the new as built drawing.
Upon completion of commissioning and in no case less than two (2) weeks prior to practical
completion, submit final approved drawings. Each drawing shall be signed and verified correct
by the Electrical Services Company, or Installer. Unsigned drawings will be rejected without
further review.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Supply one (1) set of CADD disk(s), electronic copy of ‘As Constructed’ drawings in PDF
format and one (1) set of full size drawing prints, for each maintenance manual. In addition
provide one (1) No. set of CADD disk(s) containing an electronic copy of ‘As Constructed’
drawings in CAD and PDF format to Superintendent.
A1.17.4 Purchase of CADD Drawings
Contract drawings may be purchased from Engineering Technology Consultants, in electronic
media format. An administration cost of $6.00, plus GST, per drawing file (subject to a
minimum charge of $28 per issue) will apply. Electronic media drawings will be issued in CD
format. Where Architectural backgrounds are required to form the basis of specialty services
shop drawings, delete all electrical services information from the drawing in order to obtain
the clear Architectural background.
Issue a written order, stating the drawings numbers required, to the appropriate value as noted
above, and prior to electronic drawings being issued by Engineering Technology Consultants.
A1.18 Existing Site Conditions

Inspect existing site conditions and services prior to submission of Tenders. No variation will
be considered for additional works which could have been ascertained at a thorough site
inspection and is required for the convenient, safe, efficient and correct operation of specified
services.
Locate and protect existing services prior to any works commencing that may damage or
interrupt the service. Use all reasonable endeavours to locate services (e.g. site inspection,
“Dial Before You Dig”, ‘As Built’ drawings etc.). Where existing services are suspected, hand
expose or utilise ground/slab scanning to identify exact locations.
All existing electrical and communication services indicated on the drawings are provided as
a guide only. The full extent of existing services shall be validated and confirmed as part of
these works using detail survey, visual inspection, testing, GPRS, hand excavation/potholing,
etc as necessary.
Validation shall include lifting all existing pit lids, testing, tracing and inspection to confirm live
or redundant underground services.
All existing electrical and communication services including conduits, pits, cabling, cabinets,
lighting poles, etc shall be identified and included onto a comprehensive set of marked up
service plans.
Prepare and submit detail Work Methodology Statements (WMS) prior to commencing
services survey and validation works for approval.
Liaise closely at all times with the Principal (Electrical and Communication/IT representatives)
to coordinate all necessary testing, inspection, shut downs, disconnections, etc to
Superintendent’s approval.
A1.18.1 Demolition
On completion of all existing electrical and communication services survey and validation,
prepare and submit for review a detail services demolition plan with Work Methodology
Statements (WMS) and JSA’s to suit the project program.
The above shall include all staging/phasing, temporary services, reconnections and
commissioning required to approval. Amend and reissue demolition plans, WMS and JSA’s
for review and approval where changes to the program or sequencing occur.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

A1.18.2 As Constructed
Using the marked up electrical and communication service plans CAD draft all existing
services which remain underground following completion of the project works to provide an
‘As Constructed’ record of the existing and modified services remaining.
This shall be setup as a separate CAD layer over the new services to Superintendent’s
approval.
A1.19 Existing Equipment

Any existing materials, lighting fittings, conduit, cabling and the like, removed from an existing
installation shall remain the property of the Principal. Allow for all costs to dispose of as
directed by the Superintendent in accordance with State environmental guidelines.
A1.20 Samples
Submit samples and colour range of each type of light fitting, switch and outlet to be used prior
to ordering and delivery to site, for approval. Catalogue pamphlets may be accepted in lieu of
samples as agreed by the Superintendent. Verify requirements with Superintendent in each
case. Where night testing is required for specific luminaires orders are not to be placed until
night testing approval and luminaire approval has been obtained.
Obtain approval for all samples in a timely manner to ensure that the item of equipment can
be supplied and installed without impact on the construction programme.
A1.21 Electro Magnetic Radiation

All electrically operated equipment shall comply with Australian electromagnetic emission
standards, EMC framework and have radio communications and telecommunications
compliance labelling notices.
All electrical equipment shall be installed/routed/shielded/earthed to minimise EMF (ELF) to
occupied spaces. Utilise installation methods to ensure EMI levels to workspaces are below
in accordance with ARPANSA Radiation Protection Standards.
A1.22 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electromagnetic Compatibility

(EMC)
All electrical equipment shall be EMC compliant and be provided with “C-Tick” labels. EMC
compliance certificates in accordance with ACMA requirements shall be provided as
requested by the Superintendent.
Provide EMI suppression filters to satisfy compliance with Australian EMC standards.
A1.23 Chasing and Openings

Chase surfaces as required and make good to original condition. Grout all conduits/services
installed in chases over the whole length of the chase.
At single leaf double sided face brick walls build in conduits by slotting bricks and concealing
conduits without disturbing the usual pattern of the face brickwork.
Obtain Superintendent’s approval before chasing concrete or load bearing brickwork.
Drill or cut openings as required. Form up any necessary openings before concrete is poured.
Size and fire rate all penetrations in accordance with National Construction Code (NCC) and
Authority requirements.
Obtain structural engineers written approval for any chasing or penetrations in floors or
structural walls.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Chase conduits or otherwise conceal conduits in masonry to be rendered. All chases and
openings shall be in accordance with Australian Standards and suitable for the application of
specified finishes.
Fire and smoke stop openings in fire and smoke rated walls, floors or ceilings to approval with
a material which meets current National Construction Code (NCC), DFES WA and Worksafe
Requirements.
A1.24 Fire/Smoke Sealing

The Contractor shall provide fire stopping, fire barriers, smoke seals etc. where electrical
services pass through or are installed in floors, fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, ceilings
and the like to a rating not less than that of the surrounding barrier. Penetration spacings, and
dimensions shall be in strict accordance with the National Construction Code (NCC) and AS
4072.1. All fire stopping, fire barriers, smoke seals etc. shall be carried out to the approval of
the Superintendent and shall comprise of materials compliant with the requirements of the
current National Construction Code (NCC), fire barrier product manufacturers specifications
and requirements, DFES and Worksafe requirements.
Fix an approved AS 4072.1 compliant permanent label adjacent each penetration with a title
correlating with that on the fire/smoke sealing schedule.
In addition to the minimum sealing requirements, all cable support systems, suspension
systems, etc shall be discontinuous where electrical services transition through fire and smoke
barriers or adequately wrapped at the location of the penetration in accordance with the
requirements of the NCC, AS 4072.1 and fire barrier product manufacturers requirements, to
prevent the transmission of heat from one compartment to the next via the support system.
Provide a fire/smoke sealing schedule to AS 4072.1 comprising of information which shall
include but not be limited to:
• Penetration label
• Location
• Service
• Penetration dimensions
• Stopping material
• Rating
• Manufacturer
• Contractor signoff
Document and dimension each location on A3 plans for inclusion in the operation and
maintenance manuals along with the schedule.
A1.25 Fixing of Equipment

Fix all equipment rigidly, neatly, and symmetrically to rigid supports.
Fixings shall be in accordance with good engineering practice, be in accordance with AS
1170.4 ‘Structural Design Actions. Part 4: Earthquake actions in Australia’ and meet with the
All exterior fixings, or those exposed to corrosive environments such as chemicals, gases,
dusts, water spray or high humidity, must be 316 marine grade stainless steel. Refer to clause
“Corrosion” herein.
On request supply to the Superintendent certification from a structural engineer verifying
compliance of nominated components, parts and fixings with AS 1170.4.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

A1.26 Fabricated Equipment

Fabricated equipment shall be of robust, symmetrical and unwarped construction and all such
equipment shall be approved before being installed. Metalwork shall be neatly and accurately
cut and free from undulations or any other distortions.
Bends and folds in sheet metalwork shall be made in a suitable bending machine. All joints
and folds shall be seam or spot welded.
Welding shall be neatly executed and any ragged spots filed smooth.
A1.27 Materials Selection and Corrosion

A1.27.1 General
Take all necessary precautions with the selection, supply and installation of all materials,
accessories, fittings and equipment specified to prevent corrosion. Likewise, selected
materials shall be suitably sealed and robust to suit the application with consideration for sun
exposure, rain, dust and vandalism.
A1.27.2 Corrosion
All materials and combination of materials shall be selected and/or treated to prevent corrosion
in accordance with AS 1874 recommendations. Material selection must take into account
atmosphere and micro climate conditions of the site. Dissimilar metals shall be avoided or
adequately separated using insulating materials (such as nylon washers, protective coatings,
sleeves etc) to prevent galvanic corrosion. Dissimilar metals shall not be used where they can
be exposed to frequent contact with an electrolyte such as water from irrigation systems, rain,
sea spray etc which could lead to galvanic corrosion.
Make good or replace any component or accessory showing signs of rust or corrosion during
the maintenance period in an approved manner without additional cost to the Principal.
A1.27.3 Exterior Installations
All external enclosure shall provide a minimum ingress protection rating of IP56 unless
otherwise specified.
Equipment and enclosures shall generally be 316 grade stainless steel and painted unless
otherwise specified:
• Where aluminum material is shown or proposed this shall be LM6 marine grade (to
BS1490) or equivalent (e.g. switchboards, CEC).
• Where hot dip galvanized material is shown or proposed, this shall be painted to Cat
5D to AS/NZS 2312 and to approval (e.g. poles).
All exterior fixings including pole, luminaire, socket outlets etc. shall be 316 grade stainless
steel. During manufacture or installation, all exposed threaded and bolted or screwed fixings
shall have a corrosion inhibitor such as graphite or lanolin grease applied.
A1.28 Painting
A1.28.1 General
Remove or otherwise protect flush plates, luminaires and all similar equipment that could be
disfigured during painting. Correctly and permanently re-install or remove protection on all
equipment after completion of painting.
Paint all equipment including cable supports, cable trays and ducts, conduit luminaire
supports, unistrut framework and all fabricated equipment unless otherwise specified or where
concealed from view in ceiling spaces. Equipment located in plant rooms generally do not
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

require painting unless otherwise stated. Finished surfaces of all paintwork shall be free from
bubbles, runs or any other imperfections. All galvanised surfaces shall be suitably heated and
degassed prior to painting to prevent air pin holes in final paint finish.
All surfaces to be painted shall be free of rust, scale, oil and other foreign matter, and then
painted with one coat of compatible etching primer, zinc primer or similar corrosion resistant
barrier to suit the material being painted and the finishing coats to be applied. This shall be
followed by two coats of approved wet spray polyurethane or powdercoat paint in accordance
with AS 4506, to an approved colour. All external metal work shall be aluminium, hot dip
galvanised or stainless steel. Paint finish to external metalwork shall be finished with two
coats of approved colour Dulux or equal two pack polyurethane epoxy paint in accordance
with AS/NZS 2312 (pur5) Cat 5 unless otherwise specified as powdercoat where it shall be in
accordance with AS 4506 Cat 5.
Carry out all surface preparation, painting and curing in accordance with the paint
manufacturers recommendations and data sheets.
Hot dip galvanise metal surfaces not requiring painting (e.g. where concealed in ceiling
spaces, in plant rooms) or protect against corrosion by application of an approved corrosion
inhibitor suitable for the installed location. Hot dip galvanising shall be to AS/NZS 4680 unless
otherwise specified.
A1.28.2 Surface Preparation
Prior to any painting the surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as follows:
• All sharp edges and points must be rounded and smoothed using a suitable grinder
then sanded.
• Any porosity, holes, flat spots, indentations or the like in the material surface shall be
filled with weld or approved filling compound. The surface is to then be smoothed using
a suitable grinder then sanded.
• Where porosity is detected after paint is applied, the paint is to be removed and the
porosity filled then smoothed as above.
• All weld splatter is to be removed using a scraper, wire brush or sander.
• Ensure close fitting surfaces such as light pole access doors have adequate clearance
gap all round after painting to accommodate the dry film paint thickness (DFT) on both
surfaces.
A1.29 Phase Balancing

During commissioning, the phase current shall be measured on each phase and loads evenly
balanced. This shall be done for all submains to switchboards, including switchboards of other
trades, and at the Supply Authority point of connection.
The load at the Supply Authority point of connection shall comply with Supply Authority
requirements as follows:
• ≤ 5% deviation of individual phase current from average three phase current;

• ≤ 10% deviation is permissible for periods of less than two minutes.
The Contractor shall take corrective action to achieve the above where necessary. Provide
load results in the Operation and Maintenance manuals and record the final load arrangement
on ‘As constructed’ drawings and circuit schedules.
Re-check phase balancing at the end of the defects liability period and report to the
Superintendent.
Include all associated costs.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

A1.30 Testing, Commissioning and Tuition

Test and commission the installation in accordance with Australian Standards and the
recommendations contained within the appendices of those Standards where applicable. Prior
to permanent power being connected, submit via the Contractor a detailed program of testing
activities, commissioning dates, and the training of Principal’s representatives in correct
operation of services. The program shall indicate the numbers of commissioning staff on site
at any time during the testing and commissioning period and the anticipated duration of the
various activities on a system by system basis.
Submit details of the proposed commissioning procedures and methods of measurement.
Commissioning procedures and measurement methods, which are not approved or not in
accordance with methods detailed in this specification, will not be accepted as evidence that
the systems have been correctly commissioned.
Provide full training of Principals Representatives in the operation and regular maintenance of
all electrical services systems, including Security Systems, Emergency Lighting Control and
Testing Systems etc. Include for a minimum of two training sessions on each system held on
two separate occasions, with dates agreed with the Principal. The Contractor, Subcontractor
and Specialist Technicians shall develop training material as required for the Principal’s
representatives. Training sessions shall be minuted and an endorsed attendance and
acceptance sheet developed, recording the date time and attendees of the training session.
Failure to record training sessions may result in the training being repeated at no additional
cost to the Principal.
Start up, commission and test the systems in accordance with the approved program. A
representative, who is qualified to commission the installation, shall remain on site until the
system is operating to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.
Arrange for the setting up of major equipment provided under this subcontract to be
supervised by the manufacturer’s representative, who shall remain on site until the equipment
is operating satisfactorily. Coordinate manufacturer’s representative so that testing is carried
out according to the approved program.
Testing and commissioning shall be carried out for the complete installation as required or
recommended by equipment manufacturers or relevant Australian Standards.
Testing and commissioning is to include but not be limited to the following:
Maximum Load Test - For all mains and submains.
Insulation Test - For all mains, sub-mains and final sub-circuits. Test
between each live conductor (including neutral) and
earth and individually between conductors of a circuit.
Neutral Connection Test - For compliance of circuit identification and segregation

from other services.
Earthing Test - For compliance of resistance and impedance values on

each circuit, switchboard and earth stake.
Socket Outlets - Test for correct connection, polarity, circuiting,

identification and earth impedance at each outlet
including tripping times for each circuit.
Circuit Schedules - Test for compliance of each circuit.
RCD's - Test for sensitivity / operation / clearance time.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Switchboards - Busbar re-torque on major switchboards.

Circuit breaker protection settings – record and test.
Thermographic surveys.
Labelling - Check all labels to ensure correct description. Check all

socket outlets to ensure those not protected by RCD’s
are engraved as such. Labels on non RCD protected
outlets shall also detail the specific use the outlet was
installed for.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance - Test for compliance in accordance with Clause 8.3.9 of
AS/NZS 3000.
All systems/services shall be tested and operational to specification prior to commissioning

tests being carried out in the presence of the Superintendent. Formats for test check sheets
shall be as required or recommended by equipment manufacturers or relevant Australian
Standards. The Superintendent will attend selected commissioning activities and provide a
list of any rectification works required. These will be checked at a second commissioning if
required, however, only after Subcontractor and Contractor certification. If the Superintendent
is required to attend any further tests to prove the safe and correct operation of any system,
hours of attendance will be charged to the Contractor at ACEA recommended hourly rates.
Provide signed test sheets to the Superintendent before confirmation of commissioning dates
and the booking of principals Representatives for training sessions. Upon completion of
successful testing, commissioning and training certify completion, as detailed herein.
Copies of all test results and certifications shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance
manuals, submitted to the Superintendent for review as a condition of granting Practical
Completion.
Certifications and testing and commissioning results shall include, but is not limited to:
Description By
Switchboards and discrimination Switchboard Manufacturer
Power supply and distribution Electrical Installer
General electrical installation, cables, Electrical Installer

submains and fault loop impedance
Power outlets and wiring/RCD test results Electrical Installer
Emergency lighting and exit signage Electrical Installer
Fire stopping and sealing of smoke walls Building Installer
Structured voice and data cabling systems System Specialist Installer
Security systems and alarms Security System Specialist Installer
Disable Toilet Alarm System System Specialist Installer
Completion Certifications shall follow the format detailed below.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

“We certify that the Emergency Lighting System was installed in compliance with AS 2293,
AS/NZS 3000, the design specification and drawings and all statutory requirements. The
Principals Representatives have been trained in system operation and basic maintenance”.
The certification is to be made on company letterhead stationery and is to include ACN/ABN
and licence numbers.
Practical completion cannot be granted without Completion Certificates and O&M manuals.
A1.31 Thermographic Survey

Prior to Practical Completion and again just prior to expiry of the Defects Liability Period, carry
out a thermographic survey of all busbar, equipment, cable joints and connections within all
switchboards, LV control panels and transformers supplied and installed under this section of
the works. Survey shall be conducted only when all loads are connected and operational,
ideally during maximum load conditions. Rectify all hotspots/defects indicated and re-survey
those particular areas to approval.
Engage an independent specialist company to carry out the thermographic survey in
accordance with AS ISO 18434.1. The independent specialist shall have demonstrated
experience in carrying out thermographic surveys and personnel conducting the survey shall
be suitably qualified in accordance with AS ISO 18436.7. Personnel conducting the survey
shall carry a minimum CAT I certification from a reputable third party authorised qualifying
body (BINDT, AINDT etc. A senior representative from the specialist company shall carry a
minimum CAT II certification from an Authorised Qualifying Body (BINDT, AINDT etc.) as per
sections 4 and 5 of AS ISO 18436.7. Evidence of these qualifications must be provided with
all submissions.
A survey report shall be provided that includes the following content as a minimum:
• Details of company and personnel carrying out the test, including qualifications of
personnel;
• Project details, site address and date;
• Methodology statement on how the survey was conducted, switchboards surveyed and
conditions at time of survey including external ambient temperature and commentary
on any loads not connected or not likely to be drawing full load at time of survey, or
anything that could influence the outcome of the survey;
• Survey results including time of survey, normal and thermal images, room and/or
enclosure ambient temperature and load (amps) drawn by the switchboard or
equipment at time of survey;
• Analysis of results including identification of any faults, abnormal conditions and
recommendations;
• Details of equipment used to carry out the survey including serial number, calibration
records etc.
The report shall be certified correct and wet signed by a senior representative of the company.
Submit report to the Superintendent for review prior to practical completion. Include a copy of
the report in the Operating and Maintenance Handbook.
A1.32 Operating and Maintenance Handbook

A1.32.1 General
Submit “Draft” manuals and drawings for review at least eight (8) weeks prior to application
for practical completion.
Provide three (3) approved hard bound copies complete with embossed lettering of the
Operating and Maintenance Handbook to the Superintendent. The final Operating and
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Maintenance Handbook complete with all ‘As Constructed’ drawings must be submitted
for approval at least two weeks, before application for practical completion. The final
submission shall include a written certification from the Contractor that the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals and all information therein, including As Constructed drawings, and has
been completed satisfactorily and in accordance with the contract.
A1.32.2 Hard Copy
Bind literature and drawings in hard bound A4 size handbooks in commercial quality 4-ring
binders with white coloured hard covers with each indexed, divided and titled. Features shall
include:
Hard copy shall include:
• Ring size: 50 mm maximum, with compressor bars.
• Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title (PROJECT NAME, SERVICES
NAME, VOLUME No.) OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, to the spine and
front. Index: Provide an overall index for each section inside the front cover of each
Volume and sub index at the start if each section.
• Dividers: Durable divider for each section separately identified, with typed description
of system and sub sections for major equipment components. Clearly print index
number and short title on laminated plastic tabs.
• Brief description of each system at start of each section.
• Copies of Risk, Safe Design, Job Safety Analysis sheets for all constructed and
maintainable items and their safe use.
• Copies of all equipment guarantees suitably completed and dated.
• Copies of all literature elsewhere required by the Specification.
• Specific operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment and systems, with
programmed maintenance schedules and safe work practices action sheets (JSA’s).
• Copy of all test results and reports specified.
• Contact list of all companies supplying and/or installing works under this contract.
• Contact list of all maintenance companies, which carry out maintenance of the specified
works.
• List of maintenance requirements for each system.
• Asset register of all major items of equipment and all serviceable items with full technical
details and identification of key characteristics, service dates, etc
• As-constructed information including A3 copies of as-constructed drawings, folded to
A4 size, individually inserted in protective removable covers. Drawings shall include:
- As-constructed Contract drawings
- As-constructed equipment shop drawings;
- As-constructed speciality system drawings.
• One (1) electronic copy as further described below.
A1.32.3 Electronic Copy
Provide an electronic copy of the material contained in the hard copy on a suitable sized USB
flash drive.
The material shall be in PDF format. Drawings shall be provided in both PDF and native
fromats (e.g. DWG, DGN, Revit etc.).
Files shall be logically named and organised in folders that correspond to the sections of the
hard copy.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

A1.32.4 Sections
The following additional individual sections shall be provided in the manual as per the following
table.
SECTION DESCRIPTION
Switchboards • Description of site power distribution and isolation points in the event on emergency or
fire
• Schedule of all switchboards – reference / identifier, manufacturer’s name and contact
number
• Schedule of all equipment installed, including technical literature, manufactured part
numbers, manufacturer’s name and contact number
• Copy of all site specific information including, circuit schedules, circuit breaker settings
• Operating and Maintenance requirements including associated operating and
maintenance instructions, test procedures, JSA, PPE requirements, etc
• Copy of As Constructed switchboard shop drawings
• Copy of Switchboard manufacturers ITP and Factory test results
• Copy of all relevant technical data supporting compliance of the works with Contract
requirements
• Additional requirements as nominated herein or required by Statutory Authorities
• Copy of all circuit schedules
• Maintenance requirements RCD test, injection testing, risk analysis, JSA’s, etc
Lighting • Schedule of all light fittings complete with the following:
- Description of fitting (as per legend sheet) including all accessories
- Fitting catalogue number, lamp type, rating, colour temp, beam angle, control gear
or driver type and catalogue number
- Manufacturers or local suppliers name, addresses and contact details
• Luminaire data sheets and control gear details, performance, specifications,
compliances and relevant certifications
• Maintenance requirements for all light fittings: e.g. testing and inspections, cleaning
materials, relamping strategy, maintenance risks / JSA’s, PPE, etc
• For emergency lighting fittings a schedule showing drawing number for luminaire
positions, unique luminaire identifier and type of luminaire
Fittings and • Schedule of all equipment installed, including technical literature, manufactured part
Accessories numbers, manufacturer’s name and contact number for:
- Cable tray and ladder
- Cable duct
- Conduits
- Pits
• Copy of Certification of cable tray / ladder and support systems to carry installed cable
loads
• Copy of Certification of cable tray / ladder and support systems to comply with fire rating
to AS 3013
requirements
Cables • Schedule of all cables installed, including technical literature, manufactured part
numbers, manufacturer’s name and contact number for:
- Electrical cables (LV)
- Electrical cables (ELV)
- Electrical cables fire rated to AS 3013
- Communications cables (CAT 6A)
- Communications fibre optic cabling
• Copy of all relevant technical data and Certification supporting compliance of the works
with Contract requirements
Communications • Description of system
Structured • Schedule of all equipment installed, including technical literature, manufactured part
Cabling System numbers, manufacturer’s name and contact number
• Copy of all site specific information including settings, custom modifications, etc
• Copy of As Constructed shop drawings
• Copy of manufacturers ITP and Factory test results
requirements
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Electronic • Description of system operation

Security • Schedule of all components including manufacturer’s name, part number and supplier’s
name
• Cabling diagram
• Circuit block diagram of system
• Walk test results
• Schedule of maintenance required
Disabled Toilet Description of system operation
Assistance Call Schedule of all equipment installed, including technical literature, manufactured part
System numbers, manufacturer’s name and contact number
Copy of all site specific information including settings, custom modifications, etc
Operating and Maintenance requirements including associated operating and maintenance
instructions, test procedures, JSA, PPE requirements, etc
Copy of As Constructed shop drawings
Copy of all relevant technical data supporting compliance of the works with Contract
requirements
Additional requirements as nominated herein or required by Statutory Authorities
Inspection and • Inspection and test plan with all relevant test sheets and test results of each system and
Test results and works
Certification • All electrical system tests results to AS 3000 and related Standards including but not
limited to:
- Cable tests
- Equipment tests
- Earthing tests including loop impedance
- RCD tests
- Switchboard Load balancing
- Switchboard Thermographic survey
• Lighting, controls and Emergency lighting test and commissioning
• Electrical Preliminary Notice
• Electrical Notice of Practical Completion
• Print of event log showing operation of all security inputs
• Emergency lighting commissioning certificate
• ACMA Telecommunications Cabling Advice (TCA1 Form)
• Communications cabling infrastructure test results in electronic (CD) format complete
with all necessary software required to read the test data
• Functional tests of all systems as standalone and integrated operation with other
systems
• Certification of each system and works
Warranties and • Electrical installation warranty / guarantee
Guarantees • Schedule out all Warranties for all equipment and components of the works with details
including system or equipment, staring date, end date, inclusions and exclusions, and
Company carrying out the repairs or replacement under the warranty period.
• Provide copies of all system and equipment warranties offer by the manufacturer and
installer for the works. Any warranty extending after the Defects liability period shall be
transferred to and registered to the Principal by the Contractor at completion of the
works as required to allow the warranty to be extended to the Principal.
A1.33 Maintenance & Defects Liability

During the Maintenance and Defects Liability Period repair all defects without delay and carry
out all maintenance necessary to keep the installation in first class operating condition. Carry
out maintenance work in accordance with the Operating and Maintenance Manual, Australian
Standards, Authority Regulations and as recommended by equipment suppliers.
All lamps or light fittings that have failed or are failing during the maintenance and
defects liability period must be replaced with a lamp or light fitting of the same type
within five business days of reporting, at no additional charge to the Principal. If a
replacement light fitting cannot be supplied and installed within the five business day
period, a temporary light fitting shall be supplied and installed until the replacement
light fitting is available for installation. The Contractor must include all costs
associated with fitting replacement in tender sum.
At 3 monthly intervals after practical completion carry out all tests required, and submit results
to Superintendent for approval prior to insertion into maintenance manuals. Testing required
includes, but not limited to three (3) monthly testing of all RCD’s, 6 monthly testing of
emergency lighting, testing and adjustment of equipment as recommended by manufacturers
and testing of specialist systems as specified elsewhere.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

If reported defects are not rectified within an acceptable period, or maintenance is not carried
out, the Superintendent shall issue two (2) weeks written notice to complete the work. If works
are not completed within an approved timeframe, suitably qualified companies, selected by
the Superintendent, will be authorised to carry out the work and associated costs will be
deducted from retention monies.
A1.34 Keys
Three (3) sets of keys shall be provided to the Superintendent at Practical Completion for all
lockable devices and enclosures. Where site standard key system exists, all locks shall be
keyed alike to match the master key system. Confirmation required for keying prior to
manufacture.
A1.35 General Demolition and Modification of Existing Services

All submains, sub circuits and communications cables within the vicinity of the proposed
building works associated with the redevelopment that are required to remain are to be located
and protected prior to any building works to avoid any damage.
When required on a temporary or permanent basis and particularly for existing site services,
extend/redirect cables as necessary to avoid new building work. Provide junction boxes,
conduits, etc. Make all cables joints in accessible junction boxes. Joints to be carried out
using crimp links in approved terminal boxes where not exposed to weather.
Mark all locations of conduits, pits, etc on “As Built” drawings as required by the Specification.
In the interim, provide the Contractor with permanent drawings showing these locations for his
reference during the course of the works.
Liaise and coordinate with the Contractor with regard to demolition and the removal of
equipment and cabling.
All equipment is to be isolated prior to any demolition. Extend/redirect existing cabling to
relocated equipment where building clashes occur and/or removal of interior walls requires
redirection and installation of new cabling to maintain services. The same applies to speaker
cabling, data, video, security, telephone cabling and the like.
In conjunction with the Contractor’s programme, disconnect and remove all redundant
services. Remove all redundant cabling.
Prior to demolition or modification of any existing services, review such services with the
Superintendent and Contractor to determine the exact requirements and methods of removal
and/or modification.
Refer to clause “Existing Equipment”, “Existing Site Conditions” and all contract drawings.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

PART B GENERAL TECHNICAL CLAUSES

B1 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION - GENERAL
B1.1 General
Design all equipment to operate on the Supply Authority power supply.
Make all necessary arrangements with the Supply Authority and furnish all necessary
provisions for service.
Where works include new or modifications to existing incoming service, on commencement of
works on site issue the service provider (Western Power unless otherwise specified) with the
“Preliminary Form” and “request For Network Service” forms, and a copy of the site drawing
and building programme. Copy of advice to be forwarded to the Superintendent. Unless
otherwise specified, pay all service provider fees and charges associated with the new or
modified service.
B1.2 Sub-Mains to Panels Provided by Other Trades

Supply install, terminate and test sub-mains to equipment installed by other trades (e.g.
equipment panels, motor control centres, switchboards etc) shown on drawings and as
otherwise required by the specification.
Obtain the equipment electrical rating (voltage, full load current) from the respective trade and
verify supply and cable selection prior to procurement, and again prior to installation. Similarly,
verify the exact location of cable termination and required routing with equipment installer prior
to installation.
B1.3 Power Disruptions

Minimise power disruptions and where unavoidable they shall be at pre-arranged times to suit
the Principal.
B2 EARTHING - GENERAL
B2.1 Earthing and Bonding

Provide equipotential bonding in accordance with AS/NZS 3000, the supply authority,
regulatory authorities and equipment suppliers recommendations.
Directly earth all light fittings, socket outlets and appliances to the respective supply
switchboard earth bar.
Bond any water, waste, or down pipes within a distance of 2.40m of one another.
Refer Clause "Testing".
Neatly bond and earth all steel conduits, steel wire armour, cable screens and MIMS cable
sheaths at switchboards or connection points. Carry out earthing and bonding utilising gland
plates within switchboards in a neat and orderly manner.
B3 SWITCHBOARDS - GENERAL
B3.1 Manufacturer
Engage a switchboard manufacturer to design, construct, test and commission the
switchboards. The engaged company must be a member of the National Electrical
Switchboard Manufacturers Association (NESMA). The following companies are pre-
approved:
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Arc Switchboards
• C.P.E. Pty Ltd
• Nilsen Electrical Switchboards
• NRP Switchboards
• Plummers Switchboards
• Ray Brookes Pty Ltd
• SJ Electrics
• PGS Industries
• Price Trandos
Any others must be approved by the Superintendent.
B3.2 General
Switchboards shall be complete with all necessary components, comply with AS/NZS 61439
and be designed and constructed in accordance with this specification and contract drawings.
B3.2.1 General Requirements
All switchboards shall have a minimum of 25% spare spaces for additional circuit protection
and control devices. Spare spaces shall include busbars, mountings and individually blanked
openings (e.g. spare poles on MCB chassis’ shall have insert-type pole fillers).
All switchboards shall have metal enclosures and all metalwork shall conform to General
Clause ‘Fabricated Equipment’. Finish switchboards inside and out in accordance with
General Clause ‘Painting’.
Paint all switchboards white internally or in an otherwise approved colour.
Paint all switchboards externally in an approved colour.
Provide anti-graffiti treatment to all external switchboards unless otherwise approved.
Switchboards shall be the front access type with escutcheons unless otherwise shown.
Unless otherwise specified, the top of the switchboards shall be 2000mm above floor level.
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) are to be mounted on proprietary brand mounting chassis
complete with busbars unless approved otherwise. Split or cut chassis’ will not be accepted
where separate chassis’ have been identified on the drawings.
Cover spare busbar arrangements and tags for future circuit breakers with either heat shrink
sleeving or proprietary insulating shrouds or caps.
Neutral links shall have at least as many terminals as to suit full incoming and outgoing active
cable capacity (including spare spaces). The terminals shall be numbered and connected to
correspond with the fuse or circuit breaker numbers.
Plate all hardware to prevent corrosion.
Unless otherwise specified, key all locks alike to Electricity Supply Authority standard. Refer
to clause “KEYS” herein for key details.
Self-tapping screws shall not be used anywhere in the construction of switchboards.
Unless otherwise specified use a single brand throughout the project for each type of
equipment (e.g. MCBs, contactors, fuses, switches etc). All switchboard protective devices
and components shall be of a manufacturer with locally available spare parts / replacements
and regional technical support.
Observe maximum and minimum mounting heights for equipment and devices (e.g. controls,
safety switches, displays etc.) per AS/NZS 3000 and AS/NZS 61439. Ensure minimum and
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

maximum mounting height requirements for Electricity Supply Authority meter panels in
accordance with Supply Authority standards are achieved. Confirm that the height
requirements are achieved to standing area finished floor/ground level on site after installation
of the switchboard, accounting for mounting plinth, concrete foundation (if applicable) and
potential level differences due to sloping surfaces (e.g. external paved areas). For external
installations in particular, the installed height of the equipment or device after installation may
differ and the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring this is checked and accounted for
in switchboard design and/or installation methods.
B3.2.2 Identification
Provide a label fixed to the front elevation of the switchboard to detail manufacturer, fault
rating, form construction, submain cable type and size and source of supply.
All equipment and devices shall be labelled to identify function and service it provides to
approval.
Uniquely identify all sub-circuit protection devices with labels that correspond with the single
line diagram with the use of numbered phase markers (e.g. red markers - 1, 2, 3 etc, blue
markers - 1, 2, 3 etc) or engraved traffolyte fixed to panels or escutcheon plates, secured in
line and centered directly adjacent the related items. Where multiple chassis’ are installed for
a single switchboard, ensure numbered phase markers are sequential and numbers are not
duplicated across chassis.
Where an alternative labeling format is noted on the drawings, engraved traffolyte glued and
screw fixed adjacent to the protective device(s) shall be utilized.
Multi-module devices on chassis shall be identified by a single marker only to ensure accurate
identification and the chassis poles increased as required to achieve the nominated spare
spaces required.
Multiple master meters shall be labelled to approval.
For all switchboards containing RCD units, either integral or within the field wiring, install a
label to the chassis escutcheon plate to read ‘Warning: RCD’s installed on this switchboard
and in the field, do not megger. Refer to circuit schedule’. Label to be green on white.
Clearly label all other devices on switchboards stating their function and unique identification
corresponding with the drawings.
Clearly label all contactors, controls and the like installed behind escutcheon stating their
functions using labels as specified above.
B3.2.3 Legend and Drawing Holder
Provide a circuit schedule holder for each switchboard and secure it inside the switchboard
doors. All circuit details shall be typewritten on a circuit schedule card and placed in the
schedule holder. Circuit details shall include circuit reference, circuit description, rating of
protection device and size of cable for each circuit.
The card shall also show the customer's name for each multiple master meter, where such
metering is fitted.
Provide a separate drawing holder. Holder shall contain switchboard As Built drawings and
shall also contain site plans in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 – Clause 3.11.4.6.
B3.2.4 Bus Bars
Busbars shall be completely insulated with colour coded heat shrunk sleeving, or otherwise
protected by clear polycarbonate barriers to IP2X, in accordance with AS/NZS 61439.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Busbars shall be design and brace for the fault current shown on the drawings or available at
the point of installation applied for one second.
Ensure that busbar systems are re-torqued after transport to ensure busbar fixings have not
loosened off since factory setting.
Bus bars shall be sufficiently sized to ensure space for bolting of all cable lugs, ensuring lugs
achieve full contact on the bar. Lugs overhanging the bar and not achieving full contact will be
rejected.
B3.3 Enclosures
Enclosures generally shall be steel unless exposed to weather where they shall be aluminium
or stainless steel. Where aluminium it shall be marine grade (5000 or 6000 series to BS 1490
or equivalent) with brushed external finish unless otherwise indicated.
Isolate aluminium from dissimilar metals, masonry and concrete. Use aluminium channel for
mounting of aluminium enclosures in lieu of steel. All switchboards exposed to the weather
shall be minimum IP54 rated to AS 60529 and fitted with weatherproof and insect proof
ventilation. All fixings into aluminium shall be 316 stainless steel.
External switchboards shall be constructed with a sun shield and rain hood to the top section
of the board. The shield shall be welded to the panel roof, open at both ends and provide for
sufficient slope to avoid ponding of water. Provide details for comment with shop drawings.
Ground mounted external enclosures shall be fixed to an inground concrete foundation
suitably sized to retain the switchboard. Foundation to extend 150mm above ground level.
Provide a watertight, vermin proof seal between switchboard base and the foundation..
External switchboards shall be provided with an anti-graffiti treatment applied after surface
finishing in accordance with system manufacturers application instructions, relevant clauses
of AS/NZS 2311, and this specification “Painting”. Submit proposed “Anti-Graffiti System” for
approval prior to application.
Select equipment and size enclosures to suit cupboards, ducts or spaces provided. Confirm
exact dimensions of areas available and clear opening dimensions in the case of door frames
with Architect prior to preparation of shop drawings to ensure switchboards can be installed
and removed through final finished clear openings.
Switchboard enclosures shall be complete with suitable gland plates for bottom and/or top
entry as required to suit cable entries. Gland plates design shall minimise circulating eddy
currents.
Switchboard enclosures shall be complete with door(s) unless otherwise specified. Doors shall
be hinged, lockable and secured shut in three locations, top, middle and bottom. Door locking
devices shall be “Lock Focus” stainless steel swing lockable handles with recessed key barrel
or equal approved. During design of all switchboards, particular attention must be paid to the
prevention of inadvertent contact with live parts during inspection of equipment, by use of
insulation or barriers in accordance with AS/NZS 61439.
Doors shall open through 100 and when installed externally be complete with captive stays
to hold open against wind.
Doors shall be earthed by means of 4mm2 copper braid.
B3.4 Circuit Breakers

B3.4.1 General
Generally, circuit breakers are to be utilised for all transformer, submains and subcircuit
protection, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified herein.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Circuit breakers shall be rated for the prospective fault current available at the point of
installation, or the fault current nominated on the drawings, whichever is the greater.
All trip units shall be suitable for continuous full load enclosed operation with such trip rating
nominated on the drawings or as specified herein. Commission all trip units to meet authority
requirements and discrimination co-ordination requirements specified herein.
Transformer isolating switches for Supply Authority Transformers or for transformers of
500KVA rating and greater shall be Withdrawable Air Circuit Breakers (Withdrawable ACB’s).
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) shall be used for protection of all circuits of 100A
rating or greater and whenever such protective device is utilised for submains protection and
/ or isolation. MCCB’s may only be used as transformer isolating switches for transformers
rated at less than 500KVA and used in combination with line-side transformer isolating links
sized to suit 110% of transformer capacity.
For all adjustable circuit breakers, detail frame size and settings on the submitted shop
drawings. In some instances, electronic trip units must be used to ensure compliance with
earth fault loop impedance. Obtain earth cable sizes prior to final selection of trip units. Final
settings shall be recorded on as built single line diagrams.
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) shall be utilised for the protection and control of all
subcircuits rated at less than 100 Amps, unless otherwise specified.
B3.4.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) shall be constructed of a non-conducting low
hydroscopic case that will not fail under the maximum electrical, thermal or mechanical
conditions possible at the point of installation.
MCCBs shall comply with AS/NZS 60947.2.
All MCCBs shall be fitted with adjustable trip units. Electronic trip units shall be installed for all
MCCBs rated at 400A or greater, or where nominated on the drawings or to achieve electrical
performance requirements (e.g. earth fault loop impedance or discrimination) nominated
herein.
All moulded case circuit breakers shall be fitted with positive “flag” identification of open or
closed positions, or shall otherwise be clearly labelled for rapid identification of switch position.
Where used as transformer protection in accordance with this specification, MCCB’s shall be
fitted with fully adjustable short time and long time overcurrent and earth fault trip units as
specified for ACBs.
B3.4.3 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)
Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall have a minimum fault interrupting capacity of 10kA.
Where back-up protection is provided via the upstream device (i.e. cascading) in accordance
with manufacturer’s requirements, MCBs with a lower fault interrupting capacity may be
utilized to approval.
All MCBs shall have ‘C’ curve tripping characteristics unless otherwise specified. MCBs shall
comply with AS/NZS 60898.1 It is the responsibility of the switchgear manufacturer to certify
acceptability prior to submission of shop drawings.
MCB’s shall be installed on proprietary, fully insulated and colour coded MCB chassis.
MCB’s shall be of a readily and locally available manufacture.
Non Auto MCB’s shall not be used as isolators.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

MCB’s shall not be utilised for submain protection unless otherwise approved or specified
herein or on the drawings.
B3.4.4 Residual Current Devices (RCDs)
RCDs shall be with integral overcurrent protection (RCBOs) to AS/NZS 61009 unless
otherwise noted.
The requirements for RCBOs shall be as per section ‘Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)’, with
additional requirements as follows.
RCBOs shall have a rated operating residual current not exceeding 30mA in accordance with
AS/NZS 3000. Devices with 10mA sensitivity shall be used where noted on the drawings or
required by AS/NZS 3000. Tripping shall be ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating
currents (Type AC RCD per AS/NZS 61009.1).
RCBOs shall be of single pole width for single phase circuits, and shall be installed on all light
and power circuits required by AS/NZS 3000.
Multiphase sub-circuits requiring RCD protection shall be RCBOs.
B3.5 Fuses
B3.5.1 H.R.C. Fuse Units
Fuses shall only be used where shown on drawings or where prior written approval is given.
The fuse fittings shall have fully shrouded bases and carriers. H.R.C. fuse cartridges shall be
GEC or approved equal standard T type, Class Q1.
All fuses shall be the HRC gG type unless otherwise shown.
B3.5.2 Spare Fuses
Provide one set of three (3) spare HRC fuse cartridges for each rating and type of fuse
incorporated on each switchboard. Mount these fuse cartridges neatly on racks located in a
section of the switchboard front zone.
B3.6 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall have turned edges, chrome lift off handles, locating pins and chrome
captive thumb screws with screw slot. Provide locating pins at a rate of one pair for each
450mm length of escutcheon or part thereof.
All operating devices including reset buttons shall protrude through escutcheons.
All fixings for escutcheons shall be complete with internal star metal captive washers.
Paint all escutcheons in approved colour.
All escutcheons shall be designed to prevent inadvertent contact of the escutcheon with live
parts during removal and installation by means of insulation or barriers to AS/NZS 61439.
Escutcheon plates equal to or greater than 900mm high shall be installed with lift off hinges in
addition to chrome captive thumb turn screws and lift off handles.
B3.7 Contactors and Motor Starters

Contactors and motor starters shall be of Sprecher and Schuh, minimum Type 1 coordination,
or approved equal manufacture suitable for the required duty, AC3 for motor loads and AC5(a)
for lighting loads. Coils, unless otherwise specified, shall be 250 volt.
Where extra low voltage coils are required, size control transformers for the maximum in rush
current of all coils plus 20% spare capacity.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Starters shall have thermal overload in all three phases and single phasing protection. Size
overloads to suit motor nameplate data and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
Install contactors and motor starters with adequate clearances from other equipment as
recommended by the specific equipment manufacturers.
B3.8 Isolators and Switches

Isolation switches (isolators) shall be Schneider Compact INS, Socomec or equal, shall be
load-break fault-make type and shall be capable of being switched onto the maximum fault
current available at the point of installation. MCCBs in accordance with section ‘Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)’ may also be used, except with trip units removed (e.g. non-auto
MCCBs), they shall be rated at not less than 150% of the current rating of the upstream
protective device.
All isolators shall be complete with insulating shrouds over terminals.
Override switches shall be Cam Switches similar to NHP BIN Series complete with engraved
plate indicating function e.g. - "OFF-ON", "MAN-AUTO", etc.
B3.9 Provisions for Locking Off

All isolation devices, including ACBs, MCCBs, MCBs and isolators, shall be capable of being
‘locked off’. The lock-off provision must accept a padlock or hasp. Where devices rely on an
external optional attachment to provide this facility (e.g. for MCBs), supply a quantity of these
attachments loose to minimum 10% of installed circuit breakers and store in a holder on the
inside of the switchboard door for future use.
B3.10 Time Switches

Time switches shall be Legrand Alpha Rex Astro range or approved equal. Time settings to
be set to approval. Obtain advice on required settings from the Superintendent.
B3.11 Wiring
Wiring shall be neatly run, generally contained in slotted PVC cable duct or harnessed in an
approved manner such that any cable can be readily traced.
Use compression type lugs to properly terminate all cables where suitable tunnel terminals
are not provided.
Label active neutral, and earth conductors using numbered and phase coloured printed type
coded ferrule type proprietary brand cable markers at protection device, earth bar and neutral
bar. Neutral labels shall be black with white lettering R1, R2, etc. Tape markers are not
acceptable.
Each active, neutral, and earth cable is to be identified with its corresponding I.P.A. marked
fuse/MCB.
Mark control cables to correspond with terminal numbers on shop drawing control diagrams.
B3.12 Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings detailing the switchboard design as previously specified for all
switchboards. Obtain Western Power approval for main switchboards and switchboards
containing Western Power metering equipment, before drawings are submitted for
Superintendents review.
All switchboard designs shall be accompanied by a signed ITP and endorsed by the
switchboard manufacturer.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Show all label wording, positions, details, and clearly indicate the fault ratings of all protective
devices and busbar assemblies on shop drawings. Submit detailed control diagrams for all
control circuits, complete with termination and cable schedules.
Shop drawings shall comprise of the following:
• Minimum A3 drawing sheet size;
• Produced using Autocad or equivalent electronic drafting package;
• Manufacturer’s drawing sheet title block identifying the project name, project number,
drawing number;
• Minimum scale of 1:10;
• Include equipment materials list with part numbers;
• Labelling schedule noting size and colour of lettering and background;
• Switchboard general arrangements; front elevations with escutcheons fitted and without
escutcheons, minimum one section both vertically and horizontal;
• Confirm form construction;
• Confirm fault rating;
• Diagrams for all control equipment, (e.g., lighting controls, meters, relays) complete with
terminal strip numbers;
• Schedule of construction details confirming as a minimum material type and sizes used,
colour, handle types, locks and all hardware, etc;
• Simplified single line diagram clearly showing all principle equipment, busbar and
internal wiring, fault rating of equipment and protective devices. The diagram must
identify proposed detailed design and construction and therefore shall not utilise
consultant’s drawings;
• Where protective devices are fitted with adjustable settings, confirm settings on the
drawings;
• Provide Manufacturers pamphlet details of any proprietary equipment used as part of
the switchboard construction, e.g. meters, relays, contactors, time clocks, and push
buttons.
All switchboard designs and shop drawings must be checked and endorsed by the Contractor
for correctness prior to submission to Superintendent. The Superintendent will reject shop
drawings that have not been so endorsed.
B3.13 Form of Internal Separation

Switchboards shall be constructed to meet the internal separation requirements detailed in
AS/NZS 3000 and AS/NZS 61439 or where a higher level is shown on the drawing. As a
minimum switchboards shall be constructed to the following criteria:
• Heavy current site main switchboards and main distribution switchboards serviced by a
protective device/s with frame ratings the summation of which exceeds that detailed in
AS/NZS 3000 shall have a form 3b separation as a minimum.
• Site main switchboards and main distribution boards serviced by circuit protective
devices with a frame size less than that detailed in AS/NZS 3000 for heavy current
switchboards shall have Form 2b separation.
• Distribution boards shall have Form 1 separation with additional insulation or barriers
segregating the incoming functional unit from all outgoing functional units or where
installed in restricted locations, as identified in AS/NZS 3000.
B3.14 Discrimination
Prior to submission of tenders and again prior to selection of switchgear supplier, the
switchboard manufacturer must ensure discrimination can be achieved as follows. The
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

switchboard manufacturer must obtain submain cable details from the design drawings to
ensure discrimination and earth fault loop impedance requirements are met.
Co-ordinate the protection equipment on all main and distribution switchboards such that in
the event of any condition of over-current or short circuit occurring at the load side of terminals
of any submain protective device or final subcircuit equipment isolator/connection device to
the full prospective fault level of the installation;
• Submains protection effectively discriminates (enhanced selectivity);

• All lighting circuits continue to operate apart from any lighting which is supplied by the
faulty circuiting;
Short circuit calculations shall be for all faults up to and equal to the prospective fault current
at each distribution switchboard. The manufacturer may use cascading if the manufacturer
can prove by test results that discrimination is ensured to the full prospective fault level of the
system.
Switchgear manufacturer or Switchboard manufacturer must certify compliance with the
above in writing to the Principal, including fault and discrimination test results/tables for
switchgear used prior to submission of switchboard shop drawings for examination. Time
current curves cannot be used to prove discrimination in the short circuit region of circuit
breakers.
Submission of equipment list and manufacturer’s discrimination and enhanced selectivity
charts are acceptable in lieu of individual test results, where these are available.
Note that use of some brands of switchgear may require upgrading of circuit cabling, the cost
of which shall be borne by the manufacturer.
B3.15 Circuits and Test Facilities for Emergency Lighting

Provide phase failure relays, timers and reset devices for emergency and exit lighting circuits.
Refer clause “Emergency & Exit Lighting”.
Label each circuit supplying emergency lights in accordance with AS/NZS 2293.
B3.16 Switchboard Inspection Test Plan

For each switchboard that shop drawings are being submitted for, the checklist provided in
Appendix D3 shall be completed, signed and included in the drawing submission for review
by the Superintendent.
The omission of this sheet or any items on the below checklist will result in the automatic
rejection of the shop drawings.
B3.17 Surge Protection

Supply and install surge diverters/filters where shown on the drawings.
B3.17.1 Surge Diverters
Shunt connected MOV type surge diverters shall be used at the main switchboards and
distribution boards shall be a Class II device tested to IEC 61643-1.
Diverters shall be installed after the switchboard main switch, but before any RCDs, in
accordance with AS/NZS 3000.
B3.17.2 Surge Filters
Series connected surge filters shall be a Class II device tested to IEC 61643-1.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Devices shall have a maximum load current IL equal to the circuit protection device rating.
Additionally, filters shall reduce the voltage rise time (dv/dt) to a maximum of 100V/us.
B3.17.3 Performance
Performance of a surge protection device shall be based on the testing methods of IEC 61643-
11 and AS/NZS 1768. The device should meet Class I, II or III as per IEC 61643-11.
Devices tested to UL 1449 Ed 3 but not IEC 61643-11 shall be reviewed by the
Superintendent.
B3.17.4 Performance Criteria
Generally, unless otherwise specified on the drawings, SPDs shall meet the following
minimum performance requirements, depending on where on the electrical network the device
is located, as follows:
BMSB DB
Maximum continuous operating voltage (Uc) ≥ 275V ≥ 275V
Maximum discharge current (Imax) ≥ 40kA ≥ 10kA
Nominal discharge current (In) ≥ 15kA ≥ 5kA
Voltage protection level @ 3kA, 8/20us (Up) < 1kV < 750V
Modes of protection L-N/N-PE L-N/N-PE
Note: Performance characteristics noted for devices located at a DB (Distribution

Board) also apply for devices for protection of MCB chassis’ and final sub-circuits.
Devices shall be rated for the prospective short circuit fault current apparent at each
switchboard.
B3.17.5 Test Results and Certification
Testing and results data indicating conformity with the performance requirements should be
able to be made available to the superintendent on request for review. This includes the raw
test results showing the test wave shapes applied to the device during testing and the output
wave shapes.
A certification of product compliance with IEC 61643-11 signed by a National Engineering
Register (NER) registered electrical engineer (or equivalent for international engineers) should
also be able to be provided on request.
Failure to do so will result in an automatic rejection of the proposed device.
B3.17.6 Condition Monitoring
All devices shall be able to display a visual indication of health.
Surge diverters shall have a voltage free contact that shall close when the device is damaged
or depleted.
Visual indication shall be provided via a labelled indicator light visible on the front of the
switchboard.
B3.17.7 Installation
Surge protective devices shall be installed in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 Appendix F,
AS/NZS 1768 and manufacturer’s requirements.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Devices with visual indication of health shall protrude through the switchboard escutcheon.
B3.17.8 Approved Manufacturers
The following manufacturers are approved:
• ABB
• Ciprotec
• Dehn
• Eaton
• Erico
• Novaris
• Schneider
Alternative manufacturers may be considered only if certification of product compliance to IEC
61643-11 can be provided and certified by an electrical engineer whom holds registration
(NER) with Engineers Australia or equal internationally recognized registration body. Results
of testing by a NATA accredited laboratory that demonstrates compliance to IEC 61643-11
shall be available on request.
B3.17.9 Warranty
All devices shall be provided with a minimum 5 years warranty.
B3.18 ELV Segregation

Extra low voltage systems shall be segregated from low voltage parts of the switchboard or
enclosure in accordance with AS/NZS 3000, AS/CA S009 and this specification.
Refer to Appendix D2 for a summary of requirements.
B4 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS - GENERAL
B4.1 General
B4.1.1 Standards
Generally, refer to AS/NZS 3000 and AS/CA S009 for minimum requirements for underground
electrical and telecommunications installations.
Other standards that shall be adhered to include:
• Utility Provider’s Code of Practice for minimum separations in verges and road reserves;
• AS/NZS 2067 for high voltage installations;
• ACIF C524 and G645 for communications carrier installations;
• AS/NZS 3084 and AS/NZS 14763.2 for telecommunications installations;
• Utility/authority standards where installing utility services or in proximity to utility services.
B4.1.2 Trenching and Excavation
All excavation work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of WorkSafe WA
Code of Practice – Excavation and the Principal’s Safety Procedures and Instructions.
Before trenching, make thorough enquiries and take every reasonable precaution to locate
and avoid damage to existing services. Replace all damage to existing services caused by
failure to comply with this specification.
Excavations shall provide the specified minimum cover to avoid damage or loss of support to,
obstacles such as pipes, drains, cables and other utilities and services; and the excavated
area shall be reinstated in accordance with Principal’s requirements.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Keep trench widths to the minimum, sufficient for satisfactory and safe working conditions and
to provide the specified minimum bedding and cover of services so as to avoid damage or
loss of support to, ducts, cables, drains and other utilities and services.
If excavated material cannot be used for filling or backfilling, remove it from the site in
accordance with the environmental specification.
Open trenches and excavations including excavation for cable joints shall be protected against
entry of water from any source.
During trenching and excavation make sure that water is prevented from flowing into the
excavations. Where this is not possible, undertake all works necessary to adequately dewater
the trench or excavations. Installation of cables and equipment, bedding or backfilling and
compaction must not be undertaken where water is present.
Place "DANGER ELECTRIC CABLE UNDER" orange PVC tape or polymer cover strip at 50%
burial depth below ground along all electrical cable routes to AS/NZS 3000. Place “DANGER
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE UNDER” white PVC tape to AS/CA S009 and S008.
Record as built locations of all underground cabling routes. As built copy of electrical cable
routes shall be provided in site main switchboards in accordance with AS/NZS 3000.
B4.1.3 Bedding and Backfilling
Supply imported bedding sand approved for bedding of direct buried cables. Sand shall be,
clean sand free of rocks, clay lumps, tree roots, building rubble, metal, glass, sharp objects,
organic solvents or other deleterious material that is likely to damage cables.
Sand used for bedding of direct buried power cables shall be imported yellow brickie’s sand
and shall surround the cable of minimum 200mm thickness unless otherwise noted.
Imported bedding sand is not required for cables installed in conduits. Conduits shall be laid
on compacted clean fill providing minimum 200mm thickness around the conduit.
Backfilling shall not commence until inspections have been completed and approved by the
Superintendent and Principal.
Backfill shall be equal to the original excavated material / surrounding soil.
Where cables and/or conduits are laid beneath other buried services, ensure that the backfill
beneath such services is adequately compacted to prevent damage to the other buried
services, due to inadequate support.
Where installed under roadway and the like, compacted soil and backfill shall be in not more
than 300mm layers to a compaction equal to that specified for road works.
The surface shall be reinstated to its original condition. Make good to all lawn, paving, gardens
and finished surfaces to original condition.
B4.1.4 Separation of Services
Minimum separation to services in accordance with relevant standards shall be observed at
all times.
Generally, refer to AS/NZS 3000, AS/CA S009 and referenced standards for minimum
separation required for electrical and telecommunications installations.
B4.1.5 Directional Boring
Provide horizontal directional boring, carried out by suitably qualified personnel.
Utilize accurate and proven guidance equipment and procedures to undertake the works.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Make all necessary investigation and examinations of the site conditions to determine the
suitability of the works.
The Contractor undertaking the boring works shall supply a log for the total length of the bore
for inclusion on the “As Constructed” construction records. The Log shall include for each
bore, as a minimum:
• Contractor details
• Location;
• Size and number of conduits installed;
• Depth below finished surface level to the top of the bore at 3m spacing.
B4.2 Underground Conduit

B4.2.1 General
Generally all underground conduits shall be heavy duty electric orange rigid PVC-U electrical
conduit for extra low, low, and high voltage power services and white PVC-U
telecommunications conduit to AS/CA S008 for telecommunications services.
All electrical conduits shall be installed by a licensed electrical installer.
All underground conduit for low voltage communications cabling (e.g. public address) shall be
installed in dedicated white communications conduit to AS/CA S009.
All conduit shall be manufactured to AS/NZS 61386.21.
Telstra and NBNCo conduits shall be to the respective authority’s standards.
The conduit routes shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only. The Contractor shall be
responsible for determining the exact route on site in coordination the underground installation
with other trades to avoid clashes with footings, piling and other underground services
installations. Advise Superintendent of any clashes and modify route as instructed by the
Superintendent.
Where external conduits are entering or leaving poles, switchboards or buildings, seal
conduits internally with a sealing compound (e.g. expanding foam) on completion of works to
prevent water and insect/rodent ingress. Conduit shall be sealed internally at both the cable
pit and building/equipment entry point. The Compound shall fill up minimum 150mm of conduit
end being sealed and shall be easily removed for future conduit use. Ensure compound is
flush with end of conduit by masking or cutting back once set.
Where conduits enter building, slope conduits away from buildings and provide brass plates
approximately 75 x 150mm labelled "Electrical/communications conduits under" securely fixed
to wall directly above entry point.
On completion of contract works mark ‘As Constructed’ drawings indicating unused conduits
and dimension location of spare conduits that do not terminate in a pit.
Record as built locations of all underground cabling routes and include a copy of drawing in
appropriate switchboards in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 – Clause 3.11.4.6.
B4.2.2 Conduit Bends
Unless otherwise shown all conduits shall be installed in straight lines between pits, etc.
Where unavoidable, the number of bends shall be minimised and all cases the shall not
exceed two 90° large sweep bends between access points. The Contractor shall ensure the
maximum pulling tension of the cable is not exceeded at any time.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Where required, bends shall be pre-fabricated large-sweep bends of suitable bend radius that
exceed the cable minimum bend radius. The bending radius of the cable whilst under tension
(during installation) shall be used and not the set in position bending radius.
B4.2.3 Couplings
PVC conduit fittings shall be coupled with a suitable PVC cement or adhesive that forms a
durable and watertight seal.
B4.2.4 Depth of Cover
Minimum depth of cover for underground power shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 3000
and AS/NZS 2067, generally 500mm for LV and 750mm for HV. Depth of cover may be
reduced in specific situations as defined in AS/NZS 3000, however approval must be sought
in each case.
Minimum depth of cover for communications conduits shall be a minimum of 450mm. Depth
of cover may be reduced in specific situations as defined in AS/CA S009, however approval
must be sought in each case.
Where installing conduits beneath railway, conduit depth of cover shall be increased as
required by the relevant authority.
B4.2.5 Empty Conduits
Provide a 2.5mm2 PVC insulated copper draw wire or suitable nylon rope in each spare or
empty conduit.
B4.3 Cable Pits

B4.3.1 General
Cable pits shall be used at changes of direction and at intervals not exceeding 50 metres or
as further shown on drawings. When underground conduit bends without a cable pulling pit
cannot be avoided, the Contractor shall demonstrate cable manufacturer’s pulling tensions
will not be exceeded and approval sought from the Superintendent. In all cases conduit bends
shall be large sweep bends that exceed the minimum cable bending radius during installation.
There shall be not more than two large radius bends in any conduit run.
All communications cable pits shall meet the requirements of AS/CA S008.
All communications carrier pits (e.g. Telstra, NBNCo) shall be in accordance with their
requirements.
Additional cable pits to those shown on the drawings may be installed but written approval
must be obtained from the Superintendent for localities prior to installation.
Where not specified on the drawings, pits and lids shall be as scheduled in the Appendix D1.
All cable pit lids shall be as specified, engraved "ELECTRICAL”, “TELSTRA” “NBN” or
"COMMUNICATIONS" as applicable or fitted with permanently fixed approved labels
engraved as specified.
B4.3.2 Construction
Cable pits are to be constructed from polymer concrete or equal to approval.
Polyethylene/plastic pits are not acceptable for B, C, D or E Class lids unless specifically
tested and rated and then only by obtaining specific approval. Plastic lids/pits must be installed
with a supporting reinforced concrete edge beam surround and haunching to prevent pit wall
distortion.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B4.3.3 Load Classification

Cable pits and access covers shall have a load rating in accordance with AS 3996.
Load classification shall be as nominated on the drawing, or if not nominated generally as
follows:
• Load Class B: Raised / walled garden beds;
• Load Class C: Footpaths and lawn areas;
• Load Class D: Local roads and carparks;
Any load classification for lids/covers shall apply to the entire installed pit and lid assembly in
its installed condition.
In addition, the installed pit shall be capable of withstanding lateral loads such that the pit shall
not deform post backfill and compaction. Any deformed pit wall identified during inspection
shall be rejected.
Pits shall not be located in loading docks, hard stands or other heavy duty areas unless
otherwise approved.
Pits shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements to achieve the above
load classifications, including any required concrete haunching.
B4.3.4 Conduit Entries
Where conduits are installed into pit wall, provide a water tight seal around conduits between
conduit and pit wall cutout. Where necessary, or as required by the pit manufacturer, install
concrete haunching to manufacturer’s recommendations in order to retain pit wall strength
following cut-outs in pit wall.
Conduits shall not protrude more than 100mm into the pit and shall be minimum 100mm above
the pit floor to avoid conduit flooding when bottom of pits pool with water. Fit bell ends to
communications conduits.
Communications conduits shall only enter the two short ends of the pit in accordance with AS
3084 and AS 14763.2.
B4.3.5 Labels
All cable pit lids shall be fitted with brass or stainless steel engraved labels, mechanically
fastened. The use of glue or fixings of the plate will not be accepted.
B4.3.6 Sizing
Pits shall be sized as shown on the drawings. Where sizes are not shown, they shall be of a
size suitable for terminating quantity and size of conduits nominated and pulling through of
cables specified in the conduits shown, ensuring that minimum cable bending radius can be
achieved, along with all accessories and/or equipment specified.
The depth of the pit is to be based on the burial depth of the service and any stacking of
conduits required.
B4.3.7 Drainage
All cable pits shall have a preformed or drilled drainage hole of minimum 12mm diameter. A
soakway comprising minimum 300mm deep layer of crushed aggregate (e.g. bluemetal) shall
be installed beneath pits as a soakway.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B5 CABLING – GENERAL
B5.1 General
Wiring shall be carried out with stranded copper conductor, Class V-75/V-90, PVC insulated
and sheathed, 400/750V grade or with X-90 or X- 110 XLPE insulation and sheath.
Cables with alternate insulation used in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and AS/NZS 3008,
with higher current rating than the specified cable, may be used in lieu of specified cables.
All cables shall be new and delivered on site in unbroken reels with maker labels attached.
Loop all cables (including mains, submains and final circuits) from point to point without joints
and with terminations only at switchboards, devices, switches or outlets. Cable joints shall not
be permitted unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, or where cable run length exceeds
standard cable drum length. If in-line joints are required, they shall be carried out using
proprietary jointing kits that are fit for purpose and acceptable to the cable manufacturer for
the installation conditions proposed. Where in-line joints are required they shall be utilised in
accessible locations only, joints within conduits will not be accepted.
Obtain Superintendent’s approval for proposed jointing kit, method of jointing and locations of
joints prior to placing cable orders. Locations of joints shall be recorded as-built drawings.
Enclose unsheathed cable in conduit. Underground cabling shall be sheathed circular in
conduit unless otherwise specified.
Install and conceal all wiring, including sheathed cable, within or by the building structure in a
manner that can be easily replaced without damage to the completed building finishes.
All cable entries into ingress protected (IP rated) enclosures shall be glanded. Cable entries
must not compromise the ingress protection rating of the enclosure.
Cables shall not be installed in any area until all construction work which is likely to damage
cable is completed. All cabling installed in stud walls shall be enclosed in conduits where
required by AS/NZS 3000 – Figures 3.3 to 3.7 and where not easily withdrawable for
refurbishment.
Cabling in cavities and stud walls is not permitted unless cables are RCD protected or
enclosed in conduit. Drop vertically down walls from ceiling spaces to accessories. Install
conduit sleaves through “noggings” where required to comply with AS/NZS 3000 – Figure 3.4.
Suspend/secure cabling within ceiling spaces over removable tile ceilings in such a manner
and spaced above ceiling to ensure cables do not interfere with the removal and reinstallation
of tiles, or the maintenance of in ceiling equipment.
Where more than 5 cables are in close proximity, they shall be installed on catenary wire, on
trays or in ducts with segregated sections and removable lids. Securely fix all cables direct to
the structure (not to ceiling hangers, pipes, ducts, etc). All wiring enclosures in walls shall
extend up to easily accessible location in ceiling space, cable tray, catenary wire or other
permanent support structure to produce a neat appearance and suitably protect the cable from
disturbance. Install, group and fix all cables in a tradesman like manner. Notify the
Superintendent, prior to installation of ceilings, that the above ceiling cable installation is ready
for inspection. Carry out any remedial works necessary prior to installation of ceilings.
Cabling passing through a roof shall be water tight sealed to approval. Cable penetrations
through metal roofs shall be made at the top/crest of the profile, and shall not be made in the
trough. A proprietary, tested sealing solution (e.g. Dektite, cable glands) shall be used unless
otherwise approved. In all instances, submit details of proposed solution for approval prior to
installation.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Cables shall be installed so as not to penetrate damp proof courses nor bridge the cavity in
external masonry cavity walls.
Minimum conductor size for a given circuit rating shall ensure protective device disconnection
time within the limits of AS/NZS 3000 Clause 1.5.5 and limit temperature rise to that of the
insulation. Size all cables in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and AS/NZS 3008. RCBOs,
installed in accordance with this specification, that are used to protected circuits ensure
disconnection times under earth fault are achieved.
Group and install all cabling in straight runs parallel with line of building. Cable sizes specified
have not been derated for grouping of multiple circuits unless otherwise noted. The Contractor
shall be responsible for determining applicable derating factors based on Contractor’s chosen
cable installation methods and the circuit protection device setting. Refer to AS/NZS 3008.1.1
regarding derating factors for cables. Install cables with spacing between circuits to avoid
derating, but where derating is necessary (e.g. due to reduced spacing)increase cable sizes
as specified in AS/NZS 3008.1.1. Where cables are installed in walls filled with thermal
insulation, increase cable size or separately enclose cables in individual conduits to ensure
ventilation around cable. Refer to derating tables of AS/NZS 3008.1.1.
Cable sizes specified for connection to equipment supplied by other trades are based on
design information and are for tender purposes only. Check and re-confirm all electrical
information with equipment suppliers prior to commencement of works, and notify
Superintendent of any discrepancy with the design information. Submit schedules and cost
adjustment for any proposed changes to contract documentation for approval prior to
installation.
Unconditionally guarantee all cables during the maintenance period.
B5.2 Ability to Trace Cables within Buildings

All cabling for all services shall be installed in a manner that allows the cable or associated
enclosure to be visibly inspected and traced along its entire length.
B5.3 Labelling
B5.3.1 General
Provide unique identification labels for all above ground and underground ground cables.
Labels shall be positioned such that they are visible, not obstructed by other cables, and
readable. Where there are multiple cables in a single location, labels shall be orientated the
same such that they are readable from the same direction.
Labels shall be secured in place by nylon cable ties. Minimum text height shall be 10mm, and
shall be of a contrasting colour. Details of label proposed shall be submitted for approval prior
to procurement.
Unless the format is otherwise noted on the drawings, label format and text shall be as follows:
• Cable source DB;

• Circuit number.
E.g. SMSB-P1; DB1-RWB6
Cable labels used shall be referenced on as built single line diagrams.
B5.3.2 Underground Cables – All Cables
Labels shall be provided where cables enter or exit a switchboard or equipment enclosure,
light poles and also within each cable access pit, trench or the like that the cable passes
through.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Label material shall be engraved traffolyte or etched stainless steel.

B5.3.3 Above Ground Cables - Submains
Above ground submains shall be labelled at each end of the cable, and at every 10m and
change of direction.
Label material shall be engraved traffolyte, or approved equal, unless exposed to sunlight /
weathering in which case they shall be etched stainless steel.
B5.3.4 Above Ground Cables – Final Circuits
Above ground final circuit cables shall be labelled at each end of the cable.
Neat hand written labelling with permanent marker is acceptable.
B6 POWER - GENERAL
B6.1 General
Supply and install power outlets, cabling enclosures and cabling to all appliances and
equipment as shown on the drawings. All cabling to equipment, appliances and socket outlets
shall include suitably sized neutral and earth.
Connections are only mentioned in the Specification where additional detail is necessary.
Make final connections to all appliances and equipment. Provide suitable isolating switches
where necessary.
Where equipment is furnished by other trades check wiring details and locations with
equipment suppliers before beginning any installation.
The following subclauses shall be read in conjunction with clause ‘Fittings and Accessories’.
B6.2 Switched Socket Outlets

Switched socket outlets (SSOs), also referred to as general purpose outlets (GPOs) shall be
fixed socket outlets in accordance with AS/NZS 3000.
Socket outlets shall have 10 Amp 250 Volt rating. Heavy duty socket outlets shall have 15
Amp 250 Volt rating and built-in neon indicators.
Generally socket outlets shall be Clipsal 2000 Series or approved equal. Fire rated wallboxes
shall be used in all fire rated and acoustic walls in accordance with National Construction Code
(NCC).
Where socket outlets are connected to special circuits such as Generator or UPS backed,
request Superintendent to confirm identification requirements (generally red outlets for
essential and blue outlets for UPS).
Unless otherwise permitted all socket outlet circuits shall be protected by devices
incorporating 30mA RCD Protection.
All socket outlets not protected by RCD’s shall be engraved in 3mm high red filled lettering
“Not RCD protected” with the name of device under, and in each case confirm that RCD
protection is not required.
Engraving of removable surrounds is not acceptable.
Refer also to clause ‘Fittings and Accessories’.
Request Superintendent to select flushplate and toggle colours prior to placing orders. In each
case, confirm requirements with Superintendent.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B6.3 Suspended / Pendant Outlets

Suspended or pendant type outlets in office areas Clipsal SS15/10 or SS15/15 or equal
approved. Where twin type socket outlets are shown on , provide two suspended pendants.
Suspended heavy duty type outlets shall be Clipsal 56SPO310 or 56SPO315 or equal
approved.
B6.4 Isolators
Install isolators wherever required by the authorities or these documents. Isolators shall have
Fault Make, Load Break contacts at prospective fault level rated at not less than 125% of
circuit cable ratings. Rate motor isolators to Fault Make, Locked Rotor Current Break.
Enclosures shall be dustproof internally and weatherproof externally. Label all switches
appropriately. Isolators must accept a padlock in the on and off position.
B6.5 Heavy Duty and Weatherproof Accessories

Where documented, these shall be Clipsal 56 series type or approved equal and comply with
the requirements of socket outlets and three phase socket outlets.
B7 LIGHTING - GENERAL
B7.1 General
Supply and install the complete lighting installation as specified, scheduled and shown on the
Drawings.
All lighting circuits shall be protected by RCDs in accordance with AS/NZS 3000.
All fittings shall be clean and all lamps shall be new at Practical Completion.
All components forming the luminaire shall be compatible to achieve the performance
nominated in manufacturer’s published data.
Luminaire manufacturer certified IP Ratings to AS60529 shall not be compromised or reduced
due to incorrect or poor installation.
Guarantee all luminaires against faulty design workmanship, materials and components for
the defects liability period. The guarantee shall include for labour, transport and materials to
rectify any such faults on site.
The lighting installation shall be complete with luminaires, lamps and all necessary
accessories and all control gear.
Verify the exact location of all luminaires with the Architect before proceeding with any
installation. Coordinate final location of luminaires with other services and structures.
All luminaires shall be securely fixed, supported, and provided with suitable trimmers where
necessary.
Internal wiring shall be securely fixed throughout the luminaire and comprise minimum 105 oC
insulated copper cable selected to suit the operating temperature within the luminaire.
A terminal block with tunnel terminals shall be provided to all luminaires to allow connection
of at least 3 x 2.5mm2 conductors in each.
The IP rating specified for luminaires shall be maintained through installation of fixings,
supports and wiring.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B7.2 LED Lamps/Luminaires

Provide LED Luminaires complete with lamps and control gear as nominated on the drawings.
Lamps and control gear should have a minimum LM80 (lumen maintenance) at 50,000 hours
for internal and 100,000 hours for external application luminaires.
An unconditional 5 year warranty shall be supplied for the complete luminaire. The complete
LED luminaire including luminaire housing, control gear / driver, and lamps shall be compatible
with each component and warranted as a complete assembly.
All lamps shall be of an approved colour temperature of 4,000k and a CRI of no less than 80,
unless otherwise specified.
Power factor shall be not less than 0.9 lagging.
LED luminaires shall be from by a recognised LED manufacturer/supplier, Philips, Osram,
Cree, or equal and approved.
All control gear shall be suitable for the lamps utilised in accordance with lamp manufacture’s
recommendations and shall sustain lamp condition at voltages within Authority Supply
Guidelines (nominal 240V ± 10%).
LED lamp drivers shall have an earth leakage current not exceeding 0.5mA/per luminaire.
LED luminaires shall incorporate a passive cooling system utilising convection.
LED luminaries for outdoor application shall be IP66 minimum rated, including mounting and
cable entries.
B7.3 Recessed Luminaires

Connect all luminaires installed in suspended ceilings via a lighting socket installed in the
ceiling space adjacent the opening.
Provide each luminaire with minimum 1.5m long flexible cable and plug top to suit.
Ensure adequate clearance is provided around recessed luminaires and separation from
combustible materials is maintained in accordance with luminaire manufacturers
recommendations.
Provide openings for recessed light fittings as required.
B7.4 Samples
Submit samples as specified under "Samples".
B7.5 Photoelectric Switch

Supply and install a photoelectric switch (PE cell) to control lighting as specified on the
drawings.
Sensors shall incorporate switching hysteresis to ensure rapid fluctuation of light levels (e.g.
due to passing cloud cover) do not falsely trigger operation.
Devices shall be switchboard and/or building mounted as shown on the drawings and
specified below. Where not shown on the drawings, provide the appropriate type.
Sensitivity of PE cells shall be initially set to 20 lux. During commissioning, the PE cell
sensitivity setting shall be verified on-site to ensure night-time operation at appropriate levels
of darkness to approval of the Superintendent. Sensitivity shall be adjusted as required.
Switch contacts shall be sized to load and where necessary provide contactor to carry load
current.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

An override switch at the switchboard shall be provided for maintenance and testing purposes.
B7.5.1 Switchboard Mounted
Where required to be mounted to a switchboard, the PE cell shall be a two part device
comprising an external light sensor and a DIN rail mounted relay. The device shall be capable
of a sensitivity adjustment range from 1 to 1000 lux.
Where a sun shield is fitted, the sensor shall be fitted to top of enclosure beneath the shield,
positioned close to the edge of the switchboard. Where a sun shield is not fitted, the sensor
shall be fitted to the South facing side of the switchboard where possible.
The sensor shall be fitted by the switchboard manufacturer, and adequately sealed to maintain
enclosure ingress protection rating.
Relay and sensor combo shall be Schneider IC2000, Finder 11 Series or equal to approval.
B7.5.2 Building Mounted
A building mounted PE cell shall be a combined relay and sensor type, incorporated within an
IP56 rated enclosure and capable of sensitivity adjustment between range of 20 to 500 lux.
The device shall be externally mounted in accordance with manufacturer recommendations,
and mounted in a location not exposed to direct sunlight or where sources of artificial light and
shadowing may affect correct operation.
PE cell shall be Clipsal 56SSR/3, HPM PE170R2 or equal to approval.
B7.6 Light Switches

The height of lighting switches shall normally be 1000mm from finished floor level to the centre
of the switches or as near to this height as possible if required to line up with tile courses, or
courses in finished face brickwork.
Check light switch locations in relation to door swings prior to installation to ensure switches
are on opening side of door.
Supply and install all lighting controls/switches in accordance with NCC Part J6.
Light switches shall be flush-mounted Clipsal 2000 Series 30USM AC5 rated 20A Standard
curved rocker miniature mechanisms or approved equal on flush set vertical wall boxes. Flush
miniature plates shall be used in partition mullions and architraves.
Request Superintendent to select flushplate and toggle colours prior to placing orders. Where
circuits are connected to generator backed (Essential) circuits, toggles shall be “red” and
where connected to UPS backed circuits, toggles shall be “blue”. In each case, confirm
requirements with Superintendent.
Unless otherwise permitted all lighting circuits shall be protected by devices incorporating
30mA RCD protection.
Where 5 or more light switches are in a single location, or where light switch panels (L.S.P)
are shown, they shall be machine engraved Clipsal Stainless Steel B Series Multi-gang switch
assembly or equal.
Equivalent devices by HPM will be accepted.
External/Weatherproof light switches shall be Clipsal WSF226 or approved equal hose proof
type. Where internal/weatherproof light switch is shown or where switches are installed in
Restricted Zones to AS/NZS 3000 IP66 Clipsal 2000 series 2031V66 or approved equal shall
be used.
Refer to clause ‘Fittings and Accessories’ for further requirements.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B7.7 Dimmers
Where necessary fit dimmers with suppressors and / or filters to prevent noise interference
with audio, video and communication systems in accordance with EMC standards.
Wall mounted local dimmers shall be Clipsal or HPM unless otherwise specified.
Unless otherwise nominated dimmers shall be of type and sized to suit circuit load plus 20%
as recommended by manufacturer.
Dimmers shall be matched to suit the lamp or control gear used.
Refer to clause ‘Fittings and Accessories’ for further requirements.
B7.8 Motion Detectors for Lighting Control

Supply and install motion sensors for lighting control and/or occupancy detection as shown on
the drawings and as further specified herein.
Sensors shall be flush recessed within areas that contain ceilings and surface mounted within
areas that have no ceilings. Where shown externally, sensors shall be of a weatherproof type
of minimum ingress protection (IP) rating of IP44.
Motion detectors shall be Revolution Building Controls or equal to approval. Contact Alan
Taylor 0426 865 840.
Motion sensors shall be selected based on the area they are to be installed. Include in tender
price for the following devices.
Offices / - Passive infra-red detection with single channel output. Can be set in
Classrooms absence mode with momentary bell press switch. Delay timer ranging
from 5 seconds to 4 hours. Movement sensitivity shall be adjustable.
With inbuilt passive and active photocell that can be set in units of
Lux. Revolution Building Controls LS3100RF or equal approved.
Toilets - Where shown a single channel output, shall be Revolution Building
Controls LS3100RF or equal approved.
Passive infra-red detection with single channel output and 16M
Corridors -
coverage. Can be both flush or surface mounted with the same unit.
Revolution Building Controls RBC521 or equal approved.
Passive infra-red detection with single channel output. Can be both

Store Rooms / -
Utility Areas flush or surface mounted with the same unit.
Revolution Building Controls RBC521 or equal approved.

Minimum rating of motion sensor switching contacts shall be 10A. Ensure sensors are
arranged such that circuit load does not exceed 10A. Alternatively, control lighting circuits via
motion control switched contactors installed in the local switchboard.
Locations of motion sensors shown on the drawings are indicative only. Exact location of
motion sensors shall be determined on site to manufacturer’s recommendations, with due
consideration for detection range, occupancy type (e.g. sitting/standing or walking),
obstructions and air vents. Seek input and review from the manufacturer for location advice
prior to installing. Include in tender price for supply and installation of 10% additional detectors
to quantity shown on the drawings to allow for additional detectors required following this
review.
All delay timers shall be set to not exceed 15 minutes in accordance with BCA Section J6,
however confirm all settings with the Superintendent prior to commissioning.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B7.9 Exterior Luminaires

Provide neat 3mm thick neoprene insertion gasket with approved non-hardening waterproof
sealing compound between walls and flanges of wall mounted luminaires.
Moulded plastic diffusers and bodies shall be manufactured from high impact resistant UV
stabilised material.
All external exposed fixings for luminaires shall be torx tamperproof 316 grade stainless steel
security screws or equal approved. Provide three (3) keys to suit screws installed to the
Superintendent on completion of works.
B7.10 Supports and Mounting Accessories

Provide all necessary supports, suspension and mounting accessories to suit the actual
location in which luminaires are to be installed. These accessories shall be in addition to
standard equipment provided with the luminaire, if required to suit the installation.
Where specified suspension devices shall be rigid and comprise suitably sized steel rods to
carry luminaire weight and enclose cabling from the structure above. The final length of the
suspension shall be determined on site to suit approved mounting height and location.
Where the rigid suspension attaches to the structure and luminaire, provide threaded
connection devices. Secure suspensions to the structure with adjustable support brackets.
Brackets shall be adjusted so the suspension is in the vertical plane. Provide locking nuts
above and below the brackets to avoid loosing of due to vibration.
All suspension rods shall be painted with colour and finish to match structure or luminaire as
directed on site.
Where specified suspension shall comprise multi strand stainless steel wires, with proprietary
attachment accessories at both ends.
Conceal penetrations in ceilings with a removable cover flange attached to the suspension
rod or ceiling. The colour of the flange shall be to approval.
Where there is inadequate or no structure to accommodate the luminaire, provide all
necessary equipment, braces, supports, fixed onto the main building structure.
B7.11 Emergency and Exit Lighting

Emergency and exit lighting installations shall comprise self contained, single point luminaires
comply with AS/NZS 2293, with a minimum 2 hour emergency backup supply using nickel
cadmium or lithium-ion batteries. Other battery chemistries compliant to AS/NZS 2293 shall
be to approval.
Identify, label and number each emergency luminaire in accordance with AS/NZS 2293.
Labels/identification to be on or near as practical to the fitting and visible without removal of
diffusers. Emergency light operation must be automatically activated by the failure of local
lighting circuit in which the emergency light or exit sign is installed.
Arrange wiring and controls to emergency and exit lighting to enable battery discharge and
general testing either manually or automatically without disconnecting supply to normal
lighting. Unless an automatic computer testing facility is specified, a manual testing facility to
AS/NZS 2293, shall be provided to all emergency and exit lighting installations.
Locate the manual testing facility on each switchboard supplying the emergency and exit
lighting, consisting of:
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

1) 1-3 hour adjustable timer pushbutton test switch which automatically reverts to normal
operation after the required test duration (duration to be preset to approval). A manual
interrupt/reset function shall be provided to the timer function.
2) The test switch facility shall be clearly labelled 'Emergency Lighting Test Switch' and
'Emergency Lighting Test Reset'.
Supply a hard bound emergency lighting maintenance logbook and manual complying with
AS/NZS 2293 for all installations with emergency and exit lighting. The manual shall be
completed and a full inspection and discharge test carried out in accordance with AS/NZS
2293.2 at practical completion.
Following entry of the test results into the manual, submit the original manual to the
Superintendent for examination.
B7.12 Commissioning
Provide all necessary personnel and equipment to commission the complete lighting
installation to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.
Supply all necessary meters, instruments, temporary wiring, electrical supply, scaffolding and
labour to perform all required tests and adjustment of equipment and wiring installed and
connected under this specification.
B8 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES - GENERAL
B8.1 General
Provide fittings and accessories, including socket outlets, switches and the like as shown on
the drawings. This section describes general requirements for fittings and accessories. Refer
to power, lighting and communications clauses elsewhere in this specification for specific
requirements of individual components.
Flush mount all fittings on flush set wall boxes as recommended by the switchgear/accessory
manufacturer. All adjacent flush wall fittings shall be in a ganged wall box under a common
flush plate. Provide fire rated wall boxes in all fire rated walls. Provide acoustically rated wall
boxes in all acoustic walls.
“C” clips for plasterboard type walls may be used in non-fire or acoustic stud plaster walls. All
such mounting clips must be securely retained in place such that clip does not fall into stud
wall cavity upon removal of accessory.
Where 2 or more phases occur behind a common plate, provide adequate barriers or
separation.
Request the Superintendent to select accessory colours from standard ranges not less than
two (2) weeks before a critical date.
Where flush plates, light switch panels and other items of equipment are to be labelled or
engraved, they shall be machine engraved in upper case lettering filled with black pigments
to approval.
Where works are alterations and additions to existing buildings, fittings shall be of type to
match existing unless specifically noted in detailed clauses or drawings.
Unless otherwise specified a single brand of fittings and accessories shall be used throughout
these works.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B8.2 Positioning of Fittings

Heights shown on plans or specified shall be the height from finished floor level to the centre
of the equipment, unless otherwise indicated. The height and exact position of fittings in all
tiled walls shall be as indicated on detailed drawings or as directed by the Superintendent.
However, cover plates for switches and other fittings shall line up with the tile coursing and be
located centrally at the junction of four tiles.
All fittings shall be aligned plumb and in line.
The requirements of AS 1428.1 shall be observed for switches, control panels, card readers
and the like. These requirements are not intended to apply to socket outlets unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings. Such requirements include but not limited to, the following:
• Devices/fittings shall not be located less than 500mm from an internal corner;
• Height of devices/fittings shall not be less than 900mm AFFL, but not exceed 1100mm
AFFL.
B8.3 Conduit
Conduit shall be circular rigid PVC generally. Use galvanised steel conduit where exposed to
mechanical damage and UV stabilized conduit where exposed to sunlight.
Enclose tails to fixed connections in PVC sheathed steel flexible conduit where mechanical
protection is required. Where a flexible connection is mechanically protected by alternate
means, PVC heavy gauge sheathed corrugated conduit will be accepted.
Minimum size shall be 20mm.
Conceal all conduits including draw-in boxes from view within or by building into structure.
At all outlets and devices use wall boxes and/or conduit boxes
Completed conduit installations shall enable wiring to be drawn in or out at any time without
damage to cable or the building. Keep conduits and boxes free of moisture and rubble.
All electrical conduits shall be installed by a licensed electrical installer.
B8.3.1 Conduits in Concrete
Attend all concrete pours involving conduits. Repair any damage during pouring. Provide an
approved flexible joint at all concrete expansion joints and in every 12 metres of conduit.
Refer to structural drawings for expansion/construction joints.
Review large concentrations of conduits in suspended slabs with the Superintendent before
proceeding.
Obtain approval from the Superintendent concerning the positioning of any conduit larger than
25mm in a concrete footing, slab or wall.
B8.4 Cable Trays, Ladders and Supports

Cable trays shall comply with the following. They shall:
• Shall be ‘ladder-tray’ type, Burndy LT5 or equal to approval;

• Be of width as required to accommodate the cables specified and 50% additional future
cables allowing for AS/NZS 3008.1.1 space factors;
• Be manufactured from minimum 1.25mm mild steel sheet with ‘Galvabond’ protection, or
2mm marine grade aluminium;
• Have sides of depth and shape to provide rigidity;
• Not deflect more than 6mm at any point when loaded with cables as specified;
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Be complete with matching splice plates, tees, bends, transitions, etc as required. All
changes of direction shall be suitable radiused.
Provide sample of cable tray for approval prior to placing orders.
Fixing shall be rigid hot dipped galvanised metal brackets or ‘Unistrut’ channels (and
accessories) as appropriate.
Continuous threaded galvanised rod shall be used for suspended trays. Cable ladder shall
be specified for cable trays above.
Where specified to accommodate fire rated cables, cable supports shall be suitable to achieve
WS rating of the fire rated cable in accordance with AS 3013.
Cable trays, ladders, support systems where penetrating through fire and smoke rated
construction shall be discontinuous or adequately wrapped in accordance with National
Construction Code (NCC) requirements.
The drawings show main cable tray routes only. Prior to and during installation, the Contractor
shall carefully validate cable tray requirements and re-coordinate routes with all other above
ceiling services trades (e.g. mechanical, fire, hydraulics) and check for conflicts and to
determine sequencing of installation. Any conflicts shall be resolved on-site by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional cable tray required including any
additional material and labour costs. Request approval from the Superintendent prior to
significant deviations to routes which results in a cable length change of over 10m. Ensure
alignment with wall and slab penetrations.
Cable tray widths nominated on the drawings are correct at time of design however due to
potential for site changes in cable size and routing, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring cable pathway spare space of 20% is provided at completion of work. Additional
cable tray/ladder required shall be at no additional cost to the Principal.
Cable ladder/tray should be located so as to be accessible for future installation of cables.
Where trays/ladders are located above non-tiled ceilings, arrange with the builder for
installation of access hatches.
Electrical continuity shall be maintained at joints between sections of metallic cable tray using
earthing straps/cables.
Cable tray/ladder shall only be cut along a line of unperforated material. After cutting, all sharp
edges shall be made smooth and the finish made good as per manufacturers
recommendations.
B8.5 Electrical Cable Ducting

Provide 2 compartment aluminium electrical cable duct to the positions shown on the
drawings. The ducts and all associated components shall be provided with a powder coated
finish of a colour to the approval of the Superintendent.
The cable duct shall be manufactured by ECD Cat No. EL15050C.
Installation of the duct shall be carried out in a first class manner by skilled tradesmen with
the appropriate experience. All joints within the duct shall be dowelled for alignment. Internal
duct and external corners shall be neatly mitred and fixed with internal corner fish plates,
alternatively approved manufactured corner fittings may be used. Ends of the duct shall be
blanked. No short make up pieces will be accepted.
For each telephone, data or power outlet, an individual section of cover shall be provided, pre
punched to facilitate the fixture of the outlet plate. Outlet plates shall be screw fixed.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Multiple short sections of duct cover (less than 300mm) shall not be installed adjacent each
other except at outlet positions.
Any cutting shall be carried out with a machine saw and jig to ensure a straight and square
cut. Use packers if necessary to make duct body straight after installation for easy fitting and
removal of covers. Adjoining sections of duct shall be securely fixed for alignment. Earth
continuity of metal duct shall be maintained throughout its length. Obtain confirmation of outlet
locations on site prior to final installation.
All duct covers shall be secured via approved concealed clipping device or screw fixing to
ensure lids cannot be dislodged.
All electrical cable duct shall be installed above benches unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
B8.6 Universal Access Toilets (UATs)

Socket outlets and switches in UATs shall be large format Clipsal Prestige type or equal in
accordance with AS 1428 to approval.
B8.7 Circuit Identification

Fit coloured circuit identification studs behind removable covers of flush plates of lighting
switches and socket outlets and to the face of any accessory without a removable cover. Fix
studs with Araldite or otherwise approved.
All accessories connected to essential or UPS circuits shall be identified by engraving and
faceplate colour to Superintendents approval.
B9 COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - GENERAL
B9.1 General
Supply, install and commission a structured cabling system for telephone (voice) and data
communications as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The structured cabling
system shall be in compliance with Australian Standards, client and manufacturers
requirements.. The structured cabling system shall be supplied by FibreStore, no other
supplier will be accepted. The works shall include but not be limited to:
• Incoming service coordination and termination;

• Cable pathways
• Communications equipment rack(s) and distributors
• Cable termination panels
• Structured Cabling (Horizontal cabling, backbone cabling, campus cabling)
• Jumper Cabling
• Patch leads (for interconnection of outlets on racks)
• Telecommunications Outlets (TOs)
• Wiring Termination
• Labelling and Records
• Earthing
• Associated cabling supports and equipment
• Commissioning and testing of cable plant
B9.1.1 Standards and Regulations
The structured cabling installation shall comply with all relevant Australian Standards. This
shall include, but not be limited by, the following:
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Australian Standards
Requirements for customer cabling

AS/CA S008
products
Installation requirements for customer

AS/CA S009
cabling (Wiring rules)
Information technology – Generic cabling

AS/NZS 11801 (Parts 1 to 4)
for customer premises
Telecommunications installations –
AS/NZS 3084 telecommunications pathways and spaces
for commercial buildings
Telecommunications installations –
AS/NZS 3085 administrations of communications cabling
systems
Information technology - Implementation

AS/NZS ISO/IEC 14763.2 and operation of customer premises
cabling Planning and installation
Testing of balanced communication cabling

AS/NZS IEC 61935.1 in accordance with ISO/IEC 11801—
Installed cabling
Commercial Building Telecommunications

ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568
Cabling Standard
B9.1.2 Licence
The work shall be performed by an Installer registered on the Australian Cablers Registration
Services (ACRS) Register. The Installer shall be registered as an Open Cabler and shall also
be endorsed and approved/certified by the manufacturer of the equipment and cabling
installed.
Submit evidence of cabling registration at time of tender.
B9.1.3 Approved Vendors, Cable and Equipment
Materials, products and installation shall comply with the mandatory provisions of ACMA
(Australian Communications and Media Authority) Technical Standards AS/CA S008 and
AS/CA S009 and installed in compliance with ACMA requirements and vendor
recommendation, where applicable if more stringent.
Refer to the ACMA Certified Components List (CCL) for customer equipment and customer
cabling which comply with the relevant mandatory requirements for electrical safety and
network compatibility as detailed in ACMA Technical Standard AS/CA S008, or refer to
manufacturer to verify compliance with AS/CA S008.
Unless otherwise noted, the entire structured cabling system shall be from a single approved
vendor. Submit details of the proposed vendor with tender.
As a minimum, Category 6 U/UTP cable and components shall be utilised for copper based
horizontal and backbone structured cabling subsystems.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B9.1.4 Guarantee, Warranties and Installation

Provide a performance guarantee on all installed cables and connectors. The guarantee shall
confirm satisfactory operation of the cabling system for the application.
The complete structured cabling system shall have a manufacturer supported warranty of
thirty (30) years minimum, with respect to system performance and integrity and all
components of the system, from the time of practical completion.
The structured cabling installer must be suitably qualified and must hold current certification
for the installation of the cable and component solution being installed. This shall requirement
is applicable to both installation personnel and supervisors. A copy of current certification must
be provided to the Superintendent prior to installation.
B9.1.5 Records and Certification
Complete the records and certification required by AS/CA S009 and the ACMA.
Provide record books at each distribution frame installed. Record the details of cable
terminations in these books. The record book shall be inserted in a purpose built holder fixed
to the wall adjacent the BD or in the inside cover of a LD or FD.
Submit a copy of the Telecommunications Cabling Advice (TCA 1) Form to the Superintendent
for approval prior to practical completion and include a copy in the handover documentation.
B9.2 Communications Equipment Racks

B9.2.1 General
Supply and install 482.6mm (19 inch) communications equipment racks to suit IEC 60297
standard. Racks shall be of rigid construction securely fixed to floor (i.e. rack should not easily
deflect when equipment is being mounted or patching carried out at high level on rack).
The equipment racks shall be complete with the following features as a minimum:
• Enclosed type, complete with removable sides and vented and earthed lockable front
and rear door;
• Fitted with exhaust fans;
• Front and rear adjustable depth mounting rails;
• Vertical cable management fixed to both sides of the enclosure, comprising of cable tray
or proprietary management troughs;
• Where accessible from the front only, located to ensure clearance to front face equivalent
to the depth plus 300mm.
• Metallic divider(s) to separate other sections shared with other systems (e.g. CCTV, PA)
• Communications Earth Bar;
• Two sliding shelves for each rack for equipment storage, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings
• Provision for level adjustment
• Power distribution unit, cable termination equipment and cable management as further
described herein.
The rack shall meet the following minimum usable depth, usable height and feature
requirements:
Location Min Size Reference Product
FS 45U GF4-Series 4-Post

Communication Rack 1 600W x 1026D x 45RU Adjustable Open Frame
Rack
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

FS 45RU GF2-Series 2-Post

Communication Rack 2 516W x 45RU
Open Frame Rack
Submit details of the proposed communications equipment racks and layout of equipment to
be mounted in the rack before construction of the racks to ensure suitability of the rack offered.
B9.2.2 Cable Management
Supply and install horizontal and vertical brackets (cable tidies) for cable management of
patching leads.
Horizontal brackets shall be open ring type with minimum dimensions 40mm x 60mm.
Horizontal brackets shall be provided between every 2RU of patch panels.
Vertical brackets shall be open ring type with minimum dimensions 40mm x 125mm, and shall
only be installed in cabinets greater than 600W.
B9.2.3 RJ45 Patch Panels
Supply and install Cat 6A UTP RJ45 keystone patch panels in the communications equipment
rack(s).
Fit each panel with a rear cable support bracket running the full length of the panel and spaced
approximately 100mm behind the panel.
Size patch panels to suit the installation and provide a minimum spare capacity of 30%. Equip
each patch panel, to its full capacity, with Cat 6A UTP type RJ45 modular sockets.
B9.2.4 Distribution frames / Termination modules
Distribution frames populated with termination modules shall be utilised for termination of
incoming service cabling where required.
Size distribution frames to suit the installation and quantity of cable pairs specified and provide
a minimum spare capacity of 30%.
Equip frames with IDC termination modules matched to cable type.
Provide a completed record book for each distribution frame and fit into a record holder
installed within each communications room or cupboard.
Provide approved line protector units (surge arrestors) to the connectors of all cables installed
external to buildings. Critec SLPI0-K4 or equal approved.
B9.2.5 Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
Provide a power distribution unit (PDU) mounted to the internal of the rack.
PDU shall be fitted with six (6) switches socket outlets (SSOs). Fit the power duct with a
minimum 2 meter flex and plug top, and plug into a dedicated 15A SSO provided within the
rear of the communications cupboard or outlets in rooms. Outlets in rooms shall be mounted
in a location to avoid interference with equipment being mounted in rack.
B9.3 Optical Fibre Cabling

Fibre optic cable and patch leads shall be:
• FDDI Compliant
• Single mode OS2 9/125 micron
• External fibre cabling shall be graded index loose tube gel filled
• Internal fibre cabling shall be tight buffered
• Polyethylene sheathed nylon jacketed
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Terminate all the fibre optic cable cores with plug in provision (eg. No onsite termination),
unless otherwise specified within the respective communications equipment racks in fibre
optic break out trays (FOBOTs).
Terminate all fibre cores in all cables with industry standard L.C. connectors that are FOIRL
(Fibre Optic Inter Repeater Link) compliant. Confirm requirement for L.C. connectors or
otherwise with Superintendent prior to placement of orders and installation. Ensure that all
connectors are matched to the cable to which they are connected and fitted using the correct
crimping tool.
Ensure that each cable is installed in one continuous length, that is joints or splices in the
cable are NOT permitted except at the FOBOT where connecting to a pigtail.
Provide cable coils in fibre cables in the following locations:
• Within the rack, a single coil of minimum diameter 600mm;
• Within the first pit entering or exiting a building, rack or equipment, 2m length;
• Within every other pit, a single coil of minimum diameter 600mm;
Indelibly label all underground cables within pits clearly notating where the cable originates,
type of cable and where it terminates.
B9.4 Copper Twisted Pair Cabling

B9.4.1 General
Provide Category 6A unshielded twisted pair (Cat 6A UTP) horizontal cabling from the
nearest/designated CER to each telecommunications outlet and where otherwise specificied.
Check all cable lengths before installation and ensure maximum length of cable pathway does
not exceed 85m from equipment rack/frame to outlet.
All cabling shall be installed to AS/CA S009 requirements and must also meet the
requirements stipulated by cable manufacturer to obtain the cabling warranty / guarantee.
Segregate communications cabling from other services in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and
AS/CA S009.
Exterior grade cabling shall be used where installed in underground conduit.
Each cable shall be of one continuous length. No joints or connectors will be permitted.
Cables on trays, catenary wires and building elements shall be fixed at specified intervals with
hook and loop (Velcro) straps and the appropriate bending radius as stated in AS/CA S009,
or by recommendations by manufacturer if requirements are more stringent. All cable
pathways shall be independently supported by the building structure and shall not be attached
or laid on the ceiling or ceiling support system.
Cable ties are not to be used for securing cables.
The following are minimum requirements unless less stringent than other standards or vendor
installation requirements:
• Cable shall be grouped with a maximum of 24 cables per bundle.
• Cable straps shall not be over tightened so as to distort the cable twist. Visually inspect
all cable straps to ensure no distortion to cable sheath;
• Install with minimum stress on cable and a minimum bending radius of 8 x cable
diameter;
• At communications equipment rack provide sufficient cable to allow panels to be moved
to any position on rack. Excess cable not to be coiled but left to loop down then back
up to panel;
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Cable containment (e.g. conduits, trays, ducts) fill factor shall not exceed 50%
B9.4.2 Terminations
All copper twised-pair cable terminations shall use the insulation displacement contact (IDC)
method.
Data and voice cable termination to RJ45 socket and UTP cable pair/pin assignment shall be
to T568B of AS/NZS 11801.
B9.4.3 Cat 6A UTP Patch Leads
UTP patch leads shall be RJ45 Cat 6A (male) to RJ45 Cat 6A (male) of adequate length to
connect any two outlets. Supply sufficient patch cables for all terminated outlets and not less
than 10% spare. Patch cables shall be capable of the highest operating transmission rates
specified and comply with Cat 6A specifications. Patch leads shall be minimum multi-strand
flexible copper 24AWG Cat 6A. Patch leads to be colour coded to distinguish between data
and voice as a minimum. Cabling requirements including quantities and lengths of patch leads
to be confirmed with Superintendent prior to placement of order.
B9.4.4 Work Area Cords (Flyleads)
All work area cords (flyleads) at outlets will be provided by others.
B9.4.5 Surge Protection
Supply and install an approved surge protection device to all outdoor copper twisted pair
cabling. Devices shall be fitted at both ends of the cable at the termination frame or panel and
in accordance with AS/CA S009 and AS/NZS 1768.
Surge protection devices shall be the following or equal approved:
• ABB
• Ciprotec
• Dehn
• Eaton
• Erico
• Novaris
• Schneider
Alternative manufacturers may be considered only if certification of product compliance to IEC
61643-21 can be provided and certified by an electrical engineer whom holds registration
(NER) with Engineers Australia or equal internationally recognized registration body. Results
of testing by a NATA accredited laboratory that demonstrates compliance to IEC 61643-21
shall be available on request.
B9.5 Outlets
Outlets shall be RJ45 Cat 6A tooless keystone network jack modules type outlets. Colour to
match electrical GPO's.
The minimum mounting height for data and voice outlets is 500mm above finished floor, unless
otherwise shown, to avoid accidental damage.
Outlets shall be positioned so as not to be obstructed by fixed furniture, fixtures and the like
(i.e. taps, gas valves, heaters).
Review current Architectural detail drawings on site prior to installation of outlets to ensure no
obstruction.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Cabling duct mounted outlets shall have cable termination method of type to ensure
flushplates are installed flush on ducting.
B9.6 Labelling
Communications equipment racks shall be sequentially numbered. Confirm numbering with
Superintendent. Screw fix a clearly visible engraved traffolyte label with the rack desigation
to the front and rear of each rack. Text size shall be minimum 25mm high in contrasting colour,
nominally black on white background.
Identify all sockets on the patch panels with a 4mm high engraved traffolyte label above each
socket. Numbering shall be in the form ‘N-1’, ‘N-2’, ‘N-3’, etc, where ‘N’ indicates the rack
number. Numbering shall be sequential (left to right and top to bottom) from the top left hand
corner of the panels. Where more than one panel is required continue to number the sockets
sequentially, following on from the first panel.
Label outlet flush plates above the RJ45 sockets with engraved traffolyte (black text with white
background) fixed with Araldite to the centre of flush plate. Labels shall not be located on
removable surrounds. Engraving shall correspond to the number on the respective
communications equipment rack outlet patch panel to which they are connected, i.e. ‘N-1’, ‘N-
2’, ‘N-3’, etc, where ‘N’ indicates the rack number. Identification shall also be reflected on the
as built plans and schematics.
All lines/outlets used for security services/monitoring facilities shall be clearly labelled
“Reserved for Security – Do not Alter”.
Indelibly label all underground cables within pits, pole and other access points clearly notating
where the cable originates, type of cable and where it terminates. Refer to “Cables – General”
for additional requirements including labelling.
B9.7 Earthing
B9.7.1 Communications Earth System (CES)
Provide a Communications Earth System (CES) to AS/CA S009 requirements. Provide a
Communications Earth Terminal (CET) within the rack (for single racks), or in an approved
accessible location within each comms room, and bond to the earth bar of the switchboard
supplying the rack/room with 6mm2 green/yellow PVC insulated copper cable.
The CET shall be separate to the electrical earth bar in accordance with AS/CA S009.
B9.7.2 Telecommunications Reference Conductor (TRC)
Install TRC exclusive to the telecommunications systems in accordance with AS/CA S009.
Install additional earth electrode to obtain the specified maximum earth resistance in
accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and to AS/CA S009, where required.
For the connection of the main earthing conductor and interconnecting bonding, use clamps
to AS1882.
Locate connections within a pit having a removable cover. Size the pit to suit testing,
disconnection and reconnection.
Install the pit cover flush with the surrounding finished ground level and make the connection
to the earthing system not less than 150mm above the level of the ground within the pit.
Where electrodes are to be installed in rock, fill the gap between the rock and electrode with
a bentonite clay or resin compound or as otherwise approved.
Permanently label, using an engraved brass plaque, with the works “Telecommunications
Electrode”.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Install earthing cables from the BD link bar to each FD and from each FD to each LD.
B9.8 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

Power, telecommunications cables and earthing shall be separated to minimise interference
and Standard to AS/CA S009 and AS/NZS 11801.
B9.9 Testing
B9.9.1 General
On completion of the installation of the structured cabling system check test of all
telecommunications cabling and outlets and confirm that the equipment has been installed
and connected in accordance with the specification and drawings and that the specified
performance is achieved.
Testing of all cabling shall be carried out using handheld testers Fluke or equal approved,
complete with system compatible test probes/leads, suitable for the tests specified herein.
Test equipment shall be calibrated and current test certificates shall be supplied along with
test results.
Advise the Superintendent in writing, giving at least five (5) working days notice that the work
is ready for testing so that testing may be witnessed.
All cables failing specified testing shall be replaced at no cost to the contract.
Submit one written copy and one electronic copy of test results in the testers native file format.
Include the software to enable review of results from any PC.
B9.9.2 Copper Cabling
All UTP cabling shall be tested to IEC 61935.1 and be compliant to AS/NZS 11801
specification.
Test all UTP cable pairs in accordance with IEC 61935.1 as summarised below:
• Wire map including shield connection if present;

• Insertion loss;
• NEXT (local and remote)
• NEXT Power Sum (local and remote);
• ACR-N (local and remote)
• ACR-N Power Sum (local and remote);
• ELFEXT or ACR-F (local);
• ELFEXT or ACR-F Power Sum (remote);
• Return loss (local and remote);
• Propagation delay;
• Delay skew;
• D.C. loop resistance;
• PS ANEXT;
• PS AACR-F.
Check for compliance with Cat 6A in accordance with AS/NZS 11801. Manual or * passes will
not be acceptable.
B9.9.3 Optical Fibre Cabling
Optical fibre testing shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 14763.3. All fibre testing shall be
carried out using Optical Time Domain Reflectometry.
Test all fibre optic cabling and check for:
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• End to end continuity

• Correct core sequency at both ends (White-White, Blue-Blue, etc)
• Cable free from kinks and strain
• Cable has sufficient clearances at bends
• Cable has been support to manufacturer’s recommendation and specified
• Cable jacket maintained as close to the point of termination as possible, withing the
termination unit (box, tray, etc).
• Through Couplers are secure in termination units.
• Connectors are standards compliant and free from discrepancies, prior to termination.
• Cable has been properly stripped and prepared, all jelly cleaned from the cores, all
supports removed from the inner tube, and the cores cleaned and freed from grease oils
and any other impediments.
• Light losses at both ends of the terminated cable. This test must be conducted from both
ends, i.e. test all cores from end ‘A-B’. Then test all cores from ‘B-A’. Results must be
recorded for each test sequence.
Provide a ‘Drum Test Certificate’ for all fibre optic cabling from the cable supplier to prove
continuity and quality assurance of the unreeled cable.
B10 POLES – GENERAL
B10.1 Fabrication
Unless otherwise specified, poles shall be steel hot dipped galvanised and painted. Poles,
bases, footings and holding down bolts shall be designed in accordance with the appropriate
Australian Standard to suit the soil and wind loading conditions of the site and shall be certified
by a practicing Structural Engineer. Submit Structural Engineers certification with shop
drawings.
Poles shall have no manufacturers labeling, numbering identification or the like exposed
externally.
Install cabling inside poles and a minimum of two 32mm large sweep conduit bend shall be
provided through each concrete footing. Verify the top elevation of each pole foundation before
proceeding.
Poles shall be complete with all necessary brackets, spigots and ferrules to suit light fittings
and crossarms, etc. Generally poles shall be base-plate mounted with base plates and holding
down bolts concealed below finished ground level.
All fixing and fasteners on poles shall be unpainted marine grade stainless steel (316 grade).
Isolate dissimilar metals. A suitable insulating barrier and/or shrouds (sleeving) shall be
installed to provide adequate barrier between any dissimilar metals. Request a detailed
installation instruction from the pole manufacturer.
As electrical cables will be installed in the pole, it is essential that all holes and surfaces are
free of burrs and sharp edges.
Generally all holes and penetrations in poles e.g. cable entries shall be drilled.
Where oxyacetylene is used to form a penetration all jagged edges must be ground smooth.
Seamed poles must be ground and then sanded to a smooth finish.
Where pole sections are joined to achieve the required height, joins are to be welded. Poles
must be finished in accordance with General Clauses ‘Surface Preparation’ prior to painting.
Pole colours shall be to Architects selection.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B10.2 Erection of Poles

All poles are to be bolted truly vertical onto the foundations.
Verticality shall be checked and adjusted on site as necessary.
Care must be taken when handling poles so that the finished paintwork is not damaged.
Suitable belt slings shall be used to lift poles. Chain slings shall not be used.
B10.3 Installation of Foundations

Suitable concrete foundations shall be provided for mounting of each light pole. Where direct
buried pole bases are specified ensure the soil around each pole is compacted to the
Structural Engineers approval. Review the final location and elevation of foundations prior to
commencement of work.
Holes for pole foundations are to be augured or excavated as necessary and allowance for
this work based on the soil conditions of the site included in the tender price. Allowance must
also be included for any shoring up of soil as required.
Care must be taken to ensure that surrounding soil compaction levels, paving etc are not
disturbed or damaged. Where necessary the soil around footings shall be compacted to
Superintendent’s approval. Foundation liners are to be provided to retain soils where
necessary.
All painted and galvanized metal concealed below ground including pole base plates, holding
down bolts, washers etc shall be thoroughly coated in approved protective two-pack epoxy,
Dulux Durebild STE or equal approved. Coat prior to erection of pole and touch up around
bolts following erection and tensioning of holding down bolts. Quantity of coats and curing
times between coats to manufacturer’s recommendations.
Shop drawings of foundations shall be submitted for examination prior to manufacturer or
installation. Engage a practising structural engineer to design and certify foundations as being
suitable for the intended purpose prior to submitting drawings for the Superintendent’s
examination.
B10.4 Manufacturer
Engage one of the following pole manufacturers to design, construct and supply the poles:
• Ingal EPS
• A D Coote & Co Pty Ltd
• G & S Industries
• Auspole
No other manufacturer will be approved without prior written approval.
B10.5 Finishing
Hot dip galvanise all steel poles to AS/NZS 4680. Where no further finishes are to be applied,
“dress” the galvanised pole to remove galvanising lumps, runs, imperfections etc to give each
pole a consistent neat finish without compromising the protective galvanising coating. Where
painting is specified, poles shall be lightly sanded to remove surface imperfections or lightly
abrasive blast cleaned to AS 1627.4 Class 2. All poles to be painted shall be pretreated in a
suitable primer followed by a two pack polyurethane system as specified elsewhere in this
specification. Final paint colour shall be to approval. Counterbalanced poles shall have their
overlapping surfaces treated in a similar manner. Where any damage occurs to the pole
surface repair damage to approval; clean and paint to above standard.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

B10.6 Lighting Poles

Provide a weatherproof (IP54) covered opening – handhole access door – near the base of
all lighting poles to gain access to terminations, circuit protection device and control gear.
Opening access door to be flush mounted with the pole. Provide a suitable weatherproofing
strip welded all round inside of the opening with a suitable gap to house a seal.
Provide a minimum of 1mm clearance all around handhold access doors after all protective
coatings and finished paint treatments are applied to poles and door.
Generally poles of less than 100mm diameter shall be fitted with fuses rated for twice the
current required by the lights on each pole with a minimum rating of 2 amps. All poles of
100mm diameter or greater shall be fitted with MACB sized as for fuses, complete with
installation shroud. All poles greater than 200mm shall be fitted with MACB sized as for fuses
mounted inside a Clipsal 56 Series or Legrand Plexo IP56 enclosure or equal approved.
B10.7 Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings for review showing all details including foundation sizes. Shop drawings
must be accompanied by certification from a practising structural engineer.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

PART C DETAILED TECHNICAL CLAUSES

C1 WORKS BY OTHER TRADES
The following works and/or provisions, unless specifically stated as by the Electrical Services
Contractor, are not included in the Electrical Services:
C1.1 Contractors Works (Builders Works)

The following items are not intended to be a full specification of items to be provided. They
are provisional only and indicate the general extent of work. Full details should be coordinated
with the various trades and the Contractor before installation.
Review all tender documentation prior to submission of tender to ascertain the exact work
requirements for the installation and should any discrepancy occur over and above the list of
items include for the cost for the same in tender price to be carried out by the Contractor.
The following services to be provided for the project by the Contractor:
• Painting of walls, smoke sealed doors and ceiling to electrical and communications
cupboards.
• Cupboards for electrical switchboards.
• Cupboards/Rooms for Communication Racks and Security Equipment.
• Recesses for GPO’s, light switches, light switch panels, etc where larger than a
standard electrical wall box, in rammed earth walls.
• Labelling of services cupboards and rooms.
• Temporary power for construction purposes.
• Temporary lighting for construction purposes.
• Sealing of all penetrations through acoustic rated walls and floors other than 50 mm dia
cable penetrations.
• Fire stopping of penetrations between fire zones or through fire rated walls and floors
other than 50 mm dia cable penetrations.
• Reinstatement of any bitumen, paving and landscape garden areas associated with the
installation of underground conduits and cable pits.
• Structural supports for Projectors, motorised screens, LCD screens, associated with the
Audio Visual services equipment by the Audio Visual Contractor.
• Ceiling access panels to obtain access to cable trays and the like.
• Set out of walls for locating of services.
• Cutting of holes in benches, partitions, furniture, ducts and other timber work to
accommodate electrical services outlets and switches.
• Protection of services once installed ie. switchboards, conduits, cable trays and the like.
• Combined services riser/ducts with smooth sealed internal surfaces.
• Building in of flush/recess mounted panels larger than a double gang box.
• Cutting and trimming of ceilings for recessed luminaires, speakers and the like.
• Filling in and making good of wall chases around conduits, wall boxes and flush
mounted panels.
• Production of detailed combined services external works drawing with surveyed
locations of all inground services.
C1.2 Works by Mechanical Services Installer

• All cabling, cable enclosures and controls from MSSB to all mechanical services
equipment, including connection of equipment.
• All cabling, cable enclosures and controls between all mechanical services and controls
• Ventilation of communications rooms via dedicated exhaust fans.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Shutdown of mechanical services on buildings not being occupied

• Shutdown of mechanical services on fire alarm via or security system
C1.3 Works by Hydraulic Services Installer

• All equipment, controls and cabling other than the required electrical supply to Hydraulic
services (e.g. Hot water units and alike).
C1.4 Works To Be Undertaken by the Client

• Telephone PABX, IT network Server racks, equipment etc, other than cable termination
racks and cabling infrastructure.
• Telephone system works including handsets and PABX.
• Data system active components (hubs, routers, PC’s, radio transmission, etc) and
patching of cabling system.
C2 GENERAL POWER
C2.1 Additional General Purpose Outlets

Include in tender sum for the supply and installation of 10 additional GPO’s with 40metres of
cable installed via ceiling space and cavity. Liaise with the Consulting Engineer to confirm
location for these outlets.
C2.2 Direct Connections

Connections indicated on drawings are for tender information only. Confirm all electrical
connections types, loads and installation locations, in writing to the superintendent’s approval
prior to works commencement onsite.
C3 PUSHBUTTON TIME DELAY SWITCHES FOR LIGHTING CONTROLS

Provide time delay switch(es) to all classroom areas for lighting control as noted on the
contract drawings. Time delay switch shall be Clipsal 2031 VETR3 or similar product
equivalent in function to the approval of the Superintendent - refer clause ‘Alternative
Equipment’. Time setting for light switches shall be 4 hours on the first classroom switch and
4½ hours on the second classroom switch but may be varied to suit School’s requirements.
Confirm all settings prior to final commissioning.
C4 SECURITY SYSTEM
C4.1 General
Modify and extend the existing security intruder alarm system.
Engage Securex to complete the supply and installation of the security system. No other
companies will be accepted.
The work includes but is not limited to:
• Modification/upgrade of existing head end equipment, to suit new works, including

backbone cabling between new and existing buildings via the new and existing fibre
optic network.
• Data gathering panels.
• Arm/Disarm LCD stations (number to suit documented on drawings).
• Door contacts.
• PIR motion detectors.
• Smoke detectors
• Thermal detectors
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Battery supported and general 240 VAC power supplies.

• 24 hour tamper alarms to all equipment.
• One weatherproof audible alarm device and visual indicator on the outside of each new
building. Exact location to be determined on site with Architect.
• Complete system cabling.
• Any other material or components necessary to achieve the specified performance.
• Complete system commissioning and programming including all user codes.
• As constructed drawings.
• Operator handbooks.
• Making good.
• Maintenance and monitoring of the system for 12 months from the date of
commissioning.
• Defects liability.
C4.2 Electronic Equipment Requirements

Equipment shall:
• Operate in ambient temperatures from 0C to 50C.

• Cooling shall be by natural ventilation.
• All switching contacts shall be rated by the component manufacturer for 100,000
operations at the installed operating current.
• Relay coils shall be suitable for operation from their respective supply voltage +20%.-
25% in the battery powered equipment and +15% in mains only powered equipment.
• A frequency of 1000hz shall be used for test and reference purposes in audio circuits.
• Mains operated equipment shall be suitably fused and designed for operation from a
single phase, 50hz supply of 240 volts +6%. Two (2) metres of 3 core flexible cable
terminated on a 10 amp 3 flat pin plug, shall be used for the connection to that supply.
• Cabling shall be protected against damage by overloads.
• Cable liable to bending during service or maintenance, shall be of a flexible type.
• Plugs and sockets shall be labelled with the circuit they connect.
• Cabling within equipment, shall be neatly laced and tied and supported on metal
brackets as necessary.
• Interconnections between equipment and internal modules shall be via plug socket
connections.
• All indication lamps shall be L.E.D.
C4.3 System Description

Arrange, install and commission the security alarm equipment to achieve intruder detection in
the areas as indicated on the drawings.
Detection equipment shall be controlled by arming/disarming stations located as shown on
the drawing.
When a system or area within the system is switched “on” (armed), movement within the area
covered by the motion detectors, will initiate an alarm.
Intruder detection points shall not latch but report each alarm and restore.
Unauthorised tampering with intruder alarm detectors, cabling or equipment cabinets shall
cause a tamper alarm to be transmitted to the monitoring station. The tamper circuits shall
operate twenty four hours per day, regardless of whether the system is “armed” or “disarmed”.
The alarm condition shall be reported to the monitoring station via the telecom switched
network.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Locate equipment as indicated on the drawings.
C4.4 Data Gathering Panels

Install data gathering panels with adequate capacity to monitor and separately communicate
all alarm points shown.
DGP enclosure shall be constructed in compliance with AS 2201.1 and tampered.
C4.5 Arm/Disarming Stations

Install keypad arming/disarming stations at location indicated on the drawings.
The keypads shall:
• Have LCD alphanumeric display.
• Support the alarm system as shown on drawing.
• Be assembled in a neat, compact housing.
• Have a durable key pad for pin number entry.
• Show alarm status of all alarmed areas.
• Have front panel indication of system status.
C4.6 Motion Detectors

Movement detectors shall be of an approved passive infra-red type and with integral LED.
The passive infra-red detection range shall not decrease as room temperature nears body
temperature. The range/type of detector shall provide coverage to the total area in which it is
shown.
Provide Dual Technology and Long Range Motion Detectors in areas as per documentation.
The detection sensitivity shall be adjustable.
The motion sensor shall have individual outputs for the signaling of alarm, tamper and trouble.
The motion sensor shall signal an alarm when its alarm relay is de-energised (N.C.). Tamper
switch shall be closed, when the equipment is fully assembled.
An alarm-indicating LED on the sensor shall be capable of being disabled, but shall indicate
trouble by flashing, even when disabled.
Include in tender price for the supply, installation and commissioning of 4 off additional
detectors to be installed as instructed by Electrical Engineer on site.
Have walk test LED indication enable/disable facility (the walk test LED to be disabled on
completion of testing).
Incorporate the latest technology to reduce the incidence of false alarms caused by vibrations,
voltage spikes, radio frequency interference, etc.
Have facilities to allow all cable entry and mounting holes to be sealed after installation to
prevent ingress of insects, draughts, etc.
Install mounting brackets where corner or direct wall mounting does not provide optimum
detector performance.
C4.7 Door Contact/Detectors

Install magnetic reed switches to doors at locations indicated on the drawings and complying
with the following.
• Where a reed switch is nominated and there are double doors, fit a reed switch to each
door and wire them in series on one zone.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

• Be fully sealed reed contact type.

• Operate with a door gap of 80mm or less.
• Be end of line monitored.
Door contacts and associated cabling shall be built into door frames and concealed, co-
ordinate installation with other trades.
C4.8 Smoke and Thermal Detectors

Install smoke and thermal detectors at locations indicated on the drawings. Smoke Detectors
shall:
• Detect smoke by the obscuration of an optical beam (photoelectric type).

• Be suitable for ceiling mounting.
• Operation to be silent (not local noise maker).
• Be suitable for connection to a monitored alarm panel (relay output).
• Have a local test facility.
• Be located to approval.
Provide samples of detectors prior to ordering.
C4.9 Power Supplies

The alarm system shall be designed for operation from 240 V + 6% 50 HZ mains. All alarm
circuitry shall operate from a d.c. voltage derived from the mains. This d.c. voltage shall be
battery supported via fully sealed lead acid batteries with sufficient capacity to maintain full
operation of the system for at least eight (8) hours after mains failure.
The batteries shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by a constant voltage battery
charger.
The charging conditions shall be in accordance with the battery manufacturer's specifications.
The charging rate shall be capable of fully recharging the battery from a fully discharged
condition, in not more than twenty four (24) hours.
The date of installation of the battery shall be clearly and indelibly marked on the body of the
battery.
The changeover to battery operation shall be completely automatic without initiation of any
alarm signal.
The Sub-contractor shall allow in his quotation for any mains general purpose outlets required
for the alarm system, in addition to those indicated on drawings, to be installed by a qualified
licensed electrician. General purpose outlets shall be on a suitably protected separate final
subcircuit.
NOTE: Power supply equipment is to be contained with equipment enclosures or in
independent enclosures to approval. Exposed plug in step down transformers are not
acceptable.
C4.10 Audible Alarm & Visual Indicator

Install an approved external weatherproof siren and visual indicator to each of the new
buildings.
Exact location of audible alarm and visual indicator shall be reviewed on site with the Architect
and Electrical Engineer before installation of conduits and cabling.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

C4.11 Installation
The system must be installed and commissioned by security company staff (i.e.
subcontractors must not be used).
C4.12 Cabling
Install the cable in accordance with the general clauses of this specification and as follows:
• Cable to passive infra-red detectors shall generally be multi-conductor PVC sheathed
cable with conductor size 14/0.20 stranded copper.
• A separate cable run is required for each detection point.
• Cable for control and communications signals shall be to the equipment manufacturer's
requirements.
• Identify cables by numbered ferrules or approved labels affixed to each cable end.
Numbering shall be consistent throughout each run.
• No jointing of cables, other than at terminal strips or junction boxes, shall be permitted.
• At junction box terminal trips provide sufficient terminals for individual conductors.
Multiple conductors on a single terminal point is not acceptable. Blue point type
connectors and terminal strips not fixed to the cabinet are not acceptable.
• A cable schedule shall be provided at each cable termination box.
C4.13 Programming/Training
Fully programme the system.
Train users in system operation and programming.
Include in tender price for 2 hours training for group (minimum of 4 representatives).
C4.14 Testing
Prior to commissioning of the system completely test the alarm system. This testing shall
include:
• Walk testing all detectors

• Test led enable/disable at each detection point
• Control/communication operation - Check each alarm point initiates a call to the
monitoring station
• Confirm with monitoring station – and provide printout of alarms received at monitoring
station per review by Electrical Engineer.
• Check tamper circuit operation.
• Test standby battery operation for all power supply units.
On completion of testing the contractor shall complete and sign a test schedule.
C4.15 Commissioning
Commission the complete intruder alarm system in the presence of the Architect.
Commissioning will not take place until the system has operated free of faults for seven (7)
days following testing of the installation.
Commissioning will consist of:
• Final inspection of the complete installation
• Confirmation all items have been tested
Prior to commissioning supply handbooks as detailed in this specification and completed test
schedule.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

Note: Commissioning may be performed outside normal working hours.
C4.16 Maintenance and Monitoring

Maintain and monitor the whole of the security alarm/access installation and carry out all
service free-of-charge for 12 (twelve) months from the date of final, satisfactory testing of the
system.
Renew all defective parts which may develop during this period without cost to the Owner.
This shall include all electronic, electrical and mechanical components failing within the
maintenance period, unless failure is due to negligent or careless operation of the equipment.
From the date of commissioning the system, security installer shall deem to be available
twenty four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week and shall respond to a system fault, within
two hours.
Allow in your quotation to provide the above warranty maintenance.
When maintenance is being carried out:-
• Inform the monitoring station prior to entering the premises and again prior to leaving.
• Advise staff at the premises that maintenance is being undertaken.
C4.17 Samples
Provide samples and data sheets of all proposed Security equipment and devices to
Superintendent for approval prior to ordering.
C4.18 Handbooks
Supply three (3) neatly bound service handbooks for the installation and equipment. These
handbooks shall give complete and detailed information on the installation and shall contain
at least the following information:
• Block diagrams which shall show the interconnection between major pieces of
equipment
• Circuit diagrams, which shall be annotated with voltages present, under no signal
conditions, at salient points in the equipment
• Layout diagrams, which shall indicate the location of major pieces of equipment and the
location of each component within each piece of equipment
• Cabling diagrams, which shall indicate the layout of all cables, including colour codes
and details of the terminations shall be stated
• Operating instructions, which shall clearly set out the operation of each piece of
equipment
The above literature, shall be of a professional standard, both in format and presentation.
C4.19 Lighting interface to security

Provide lighting controls interfaced with Security system to disable lights when building is
unoccupied in accordance with NCC J 6.3 d. Refer to details on the electrical drawings for the
general arrangement of lighting enabling/disabling function when the building Security system
is un armed/armed. Coordinate with the Security installer and validate operation on completion
of the works. Provide Certification of compliance with NCC J6.
C5 DISABLE TOILET ALARM SYSTEM

The Disable Toilet Alarm system shall comprise of a push button, remote light and buzzer
system.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

The push buttons shall be installed where shown on the drawings with the light and buzzer
indicator installed to the common area shown on the drawings
Provide an alarm system for each accessible toilet as indicated on the drawings.
The system control voltage shall be 24 Volt DC dedicated extra low voltage power supply.
Call points shall be provided with the following:-
• Flush mounted on walls with flushplates finish matching other wall plates.
• Alarm button with mushroom head not less than 25mm diameter, coloured red.
• Latching facilities.
• Reassurance light to illuminate when a call has been placed.
• Splash proof construction.
• Contact to operate a combined indicator light and buzzer above the toilet door or in
locations as shown on drawings.
• Sealing to prevent the egress of water between the flush plate and wall box with a non
hardening anti-fungus silicon sealing compound.
• Have flush plate indelibly marked “Press for assistance”.
• Remote combined indicator light and buzzer shall be provided with the following:
• White translucent dome.
• Red indicator lamp.
• Protrude not less than 50mm.
• Visible through all angles up to 90o from horizontal.
• Buzzer.
Be indelibly marked “UAT ASSISTANCE REQUIRED” as applicable.
C6 ELECTRICAL AND GAS KITCHEN/COOKING APPLIANCES
C6.1 Electric Bench Cooktop

Provide final connection via 40A single phase fixed connection and isolator switch flush
mounted above adjacent unit within 200mm to 2000mm from unit. Confirm final location,
electrical load and manufacturers detail with Superintendent prior to installation.
C6.2 Electrical Underbench Oven

Provide final connection via 40A single phase fixed connection. Confirm final location,
electrical load and manufacturers details with Superintendent prior to installation.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

PART D APPENDICES
D1 SCHEDULE OF ACCEPTABLE PITS / LIDS
Minimum Acceptable Types
Installation Notes (Notes are in addition to
Service Installation Conditions Pit Lid Load Lid Style
manufacturer’s recommendations)
Telstra • All locations (pits not permitted in Telstra Specification Telstra Telstra To Telstra standards flush with surrounding surfaces.
roadways or driveways). Specification
Power & • Garden Beds (non-trafficable) GFRC/PC/HDPE ‘A’ Class Flat with plugged lifting Install flush with garden/ mulch level
Comms AS3996 eye/s
• Lawns/Mowing Strips GFRC/PC ‘B’ Class Flat with plugged lifting Install 100W x 200D collar (poured concrete haunch)
AS3996 eye/s around pit to support lid edge. Install flush with grass
level.
• Paved External Pathways GFRC/PC ‘B’ Class Galvanised steel recessed. Pit lid recess to suit surrounding paving, flush with
(Pedestrian) AS3996 paving.
• Paved Roadways/Driveways – GFRC/PC/PCRC/SMB ‘C’ Class Gatic or equal concrete Fully surround pit in concrete haunching/bedding with
Residential AS3996 filled ductile iron cells. 200mm edge to lid. Install flush with paving.
• Paved Roadways/Driveways – GFRC/PC/PCRC/SMB ‘E’ Class Gatic or equal recessed Ductile iron recess lid to suit paving used. Fully
Commercial and Industrial AS3996 ductile iron cells. surround pit in concrete haunching/bedding with
200mm edge to lid. Install flush with paving.
• Internal Paved Areas (No Vehicles) GFRC/PC/HDPE ‘A’ Class Galvanised steel recessed. Pit lid recess to suit surrounding paving, flush with
AS3996. paving.
• Concrete/Bitumen External GFRC/PC ‘B’ Class Flat with plugged lifting Install flush with surrounding pathway.
Pathways (Pedestrian) AS3996 eye/s.
• Concrete/Bitumen GRFC/PC/PCRC/SMB ‘C’ Class Gatic or equal concrete Fully surround pit in concrete haunching/bedding with
Roadways/Driveways (Residential) AS3996 filled ductile iron cells. 200mm edge to lid. Install flush with surrounding
roadway/driveway.
• Concrete/Bitumen Roadways & PC/GFRC/PCRC/SMB ‘E’ Class Gatic or equal, concrete fill Fully surround pit in concrete haunching/bedding with
Driveways – Commercial and AS3996 ductile iron cells. 200mm edge to lid. Install flush with
Industrial roadway/driveway.
• Internal Concrete/Bitumen Areas GFRC/PC/HDPE ‘A’ Class Flat with plugged lifting Flush with surrounding areas.
(No Vehicles) AS3996 eye/s.
Abbreviations: • ‘A’ Class > 10kN lid load • GFRC – Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete Notes:
• ‘B’ Class > 80kN lid load • PC – Polymer Concrete
• ‘C’ Class > 150kN lid load • HDPE – HDPE Plastic 1) PCRC pits shall be proprietary concrete liners
with poured base and proprietary lid system.
• ‘D’ Class > 210kN lid load • PCRC – Precast Reinforced Concrete: Note 1
Submit details for approval
• ‘E’ Class > 400kN lid load • SMB – Site manufactured brick: Note 2
2) SMB pits shall be designed by a Civil Engineer
and constructed to civil engineers details. Submit
shop drawings for approval.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

D2 ENCLOSURE LV ELV SEGREGATION REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY
CABLES TERMINATIONS
Summary: Switchboard Segregation
ELV ELV
Selected Requirements LV Power LV Comms ELV Power LV Power LV Comms ELV Power
Comms Comms
LV Power Cables (double insulated) - 50a 50a 0d - 150b,c 150b 0d
LV Comms Cables (e.g. PA, Fire) 50a - 50a 50a 150b,c - 150b 150c
ELV Comms Cables (e.g. CAT6, 48V to Comms Equipment) 50a,d 50a - - 150b,c 150b,c - -
ELV Power Cables (e.g. Isolated from Comms Equipment) 0a,d 50a - - 0c,d 150b,c - -
Note 1: This is only a summary of selected communications segregation requirements applicable to switchboards. All works shall comply with AS/NZS 3000 and AS/CA S009 in their entirety,
including the recommendations contained within those standards. Refer also to AS/CA S009 Table G1. All new switchboards to be designed for communications section to be open while
switchboard is energised.
Note 2: "ELV Comms" on this table refers to the AS/CA S009 categories of SELV, TNV and Limited Current Circuits, which includes CAT6 communications and most DC power supply cabling.
Refer to AS/CA S009 for additional requirements for ELV that does not meet these categories (e.g. self-generated power / solar). "ELV Power" on this table refers to the AS/NZS 3000 definition
of SELV (similar to AS/CA S009 TNV), where the cable is in no way connected to comms equipment.
a = fixed in a way that permanently provides 50mm separation. Alternatively, provide a barrier of durable insulating material, metal, or enclose in conduit.
b = fixed in a way that permanently provides 150mm separation. Alternatively, provide a rigidly fixed barrier of durable insulating material or earthed metal.
c = accidental human contact with LV terminals, single insulated LV cable or uninsulated LV cable prevented to approval.
d = AS/NZS 3000 Clause 3.9.8.3 and 7.5 permit LV and ELV cables to be installed touching, provided the LV cable is double insulated and the ELV cable is insulated to 500VAC for 1 min, and
IPxxB / IP2x is provided at terminals. This is only applicable where AS/CA S009 does not apply to the cable, and ETC interpret AS/CA S0009 to include DC power supply cabling to comms
equipment.
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

D3 SWITCHBOARD DESIGN ITP
SWITCHBOARD DESIGN SUBMISSION ITP CHECKLIST
SWITCHBOARD REFERENCE: ____________________________________________________

MANUFACTURER DRAWING NUMBER(S) AND REVISION: _____________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
DESIGN AND FABRICATION ITEMS CHK’D COMMENTS
MINIMUM A3 DRAWING SHEET SIZE WITH DETAILS TO

SCALE TO MINIMUM 1:10 AND PRODUCED USING

AUTOCAD OR EQUIVALENT ELECTRONIC DRAFTING
PACKAGE
DRAWING SHEET TITLE BLOCK IDENTIFYING THE
MANUFACTURER, PROJECT NAME, PROJECT NUMBER, 
DRAWING NUMBER, REVISION & SCALE
BASIS OF DESIGN WHICH SWITCHBOARD IS BASED ON

E.G. AUSTRALIAN STANDARDS, DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS,
CONSULTANT DRAWINGS. INCLUDE DOCUMENT/DRAWING 
REFERENCE NUMBER AND EDITION OR REVISION
NUMBER OF REFERENCE
MINIMUM THREE (3) FRONT ELEVATIONS WITH DOORS ON

& CLOSED; WITH DOORS REMOVED; AND WITH DOORS 
AND ESCUTCHEONS REMOVED
PLAN VIEW OF TOP AND BOTTOM OF SWITCHBOARD 
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SECTIONS – MINIMUM ONE

SECTION EACH
MAIN BUSBARS AND CABLING DISTRIBUTION

ARRANGEMENTS SHOWN
EQUIPMENT MATERIALS LIST WITH PART NUMBERS FOR

ALL EQUIPMENT INDICATED
LABELLING SCHEDULE NOTING LABEL MATERIAL, SIZE
AND COLOUR OF LETTERING AND BACKGROUND 
INDICATED
TYPE AND THICKNESS OF ALL CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS INDICATED
METHOD OF DISSIMILAR METAL ISOLATION NOTED 
LOCATION, TYPE AND MATERIAL OF FIXINGS SHOWN IN


ELEVATION VIEWS
FINISH TYPE/SYSTEM AND COLOUR INDICATED 
DOORS DETAILED INCLUDING HINGES, HANDLES,

LOCKING DEVICES, DOOR STAYS AND DOOR SWING 
ANGLE
VENTILATION DETAILED INCLUDING VENTS, FILTERS ETC. 
SEGREGATION PROVIDED FOR SAFETY CIRCUITS,

TELECOM ETC.
FORM OF SEPARATION NOTED 
IP RATING NOTED 
FAULT RATING NOTED 
SWITCHBOARD WEIGHT NOTED 
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM PROVIDED SHOWING ALL

PRINCIPAL EQUIPMENT INCLUSING BUSBARS, INTERNAL

WIRING, PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND SETTINGS WHERE
ADJUSTABLE
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

CONTROL DIAGRAM PROVIDED WITH TERMINAL STRIP


NUMBERS
DRAWING HOLDER DETAILED 
MCB LOCK-OFF ATTACHMENTS AND HOLDER 
INSTALLATION ITEMS
SWITCHBOARD SIZE CHECKED AND IS ABLE TO BE 
TRANSPORTED AND INSTALLED IN ALLOCATED SPACE
SWITCHBOARD HEIGHT CHECKED AGAINST DOORWAYS 
SWITCHBOARD BASE CHECKED AND FOUNDATION / 

SUPPORT AND FIXING DETAILS DETERMINED
CABLE ENTRY AND METHOD VERIFIED 
UNDERGROUND CABLE/CONDUIT SETOUT CHECKED 

AGAINST SWITCHBOARD TIER/CUBICLE SETOUT
CABLE ENTRY AND TERMINATION FACILITIES ADEQUATE 
FOR ALL INCOMING CABLES
SUFFICIENT SPACE ALLOCATED FOR THIRD PARTY 
EQUIPMENT E.G. LIGHTING CONTROL
9155SB-SE-119655sb 0 – 11 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN
COLLEGE
LIFT SERVICES
SPECIFICATION
Prepared By: Trevor Stevenson
Client: Brad Quartermaine

Architect
Date: 12 January 2021
Doc No: 9155SB-SE- 119657sb
Revision: 0
Reviewed/Approved: SB/SC
61 Loftus Street
Leederville WA 6007
T: (08) 9328 5500
F: (08) 9328 5522
E: etc@etcpl.com.au
PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE – LIFT SERVICES PAGE ii
REVISION REGISTER
Clause
Revision Date Revision Details Originator Reviewed Approved
No.
0 12/01/21 Tender TS SB SC
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE – LIFT SERVICES PAGE iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 7
1.2 Application of General Requirements Clauses .................................................................. 7
1.3 Interpretation of Terms ......................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Requirement for Contract ..................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Contract Sum ......................................................................................................................... 7
1.6 Goods and Services Tax ....................................................................................................... 8
1.7 Progress Claims .................................................................................................................... 8
1.8 Construction Program ........................................................................................................... 8
1.9 Site Meetings .......................................................................................................................... 8
1.10 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 8
1.11 Health and Safety ................................................................................................................... 8
1.12 Site Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 9
1.13 Shop Drawings ....................................................................................................................... 9
1.14 Samples ................................................................................................................................ 10
1.15 Fire Service and Protection ................................................................................................ 10
1.16 Review of Work .................................................................................................................... 11
1.17 Testing and Commissioning .............................................................................................. 11
1.18 Tuition ................................................................................................................................... 11
1.19 Final Completion .................................................................................................................. 12
2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL .................................................................... 12
2.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 12
2.2 Drawings ............................................................................................................................... 13
2.3 Format ................................................................................................................................... 13
2.4 Quantities ............................................................................................................................. 14
3 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Extent of Works ................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Schedule of Main Features ................................................................................................. 15
3.3 Work by Other Parties ......................................................................................................... 18
3.4 Rules and Regulations ........................................................................................................ 19
3.5 Finishes and Painting.......................................................................................................... 20
3.6 Labels and Notices .............................................................................................................. 21
3.7 Performance Requirements ................................................................................................ 21
3.8 Testing and Commissioning .............................................................................................. 21
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE – LIFT SERVICES PAGE iv
3.9 Practical Completion ........................................................................................................... 22

3.10 Guarantee and Maintenance ............................................................................................... 22
3.11 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 23
3.12 Comprehensive Maintenance ............................................................................................. 23
3.13 Requirements, Permits and Fees ....................................................................................... 23
3.14 Standards .............................................................................................................................. 24
3.15 Materials, Workmanship and Sundries .............................................................................. 24
3.16 Manufacturer’s Directions ................................................................................................... 24
3.17 Obvious Minor Work ............................................................................................................ 24
3.18 Equipment Layout ................................................................................................................ 24
3.19 Setting Out ............................................................................................................................ 24
3.20 Drawings ............................................................................................................................... 24
3.21 Schedule of Works ............................................................................................................... 25
3.22 Co-ordination with Other Services ..................................................................................... 25
3.23 Services and Facilities Provided ........................................................................................ 25
3.24 Fixings and Supports .......................................................................................................... 25
3.25 Electrical Equipment............................................................................................................ 26
3.26 Seismic Restraints ............................................................................................................... 26
3.27 Electromagnetic Compatibility Framework Compliance ................................................. 26
4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS - LIFT MACHINE EQUIPMENT .............................................. 26
4.1 Gearless Machines............................................................................................................... 26
4.2 Machine and Hitch Beams................................................................................................... 26
4.3 Motors General ..................................................................................................................... 27
4.4 Motor Power Control ............................................................................................................ 27
5 CONTROLLER ...................................................................................................................... 27
5.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 27
6 LIFT DISTRIBUTION BOARD ............................................................................................... 28
6.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 28
7 MACHINE AREA ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................ 29
7.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 29
8 LIFTWELL EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................... 29
8.1 Guide Rails and Fixings ...................................................................................................... 29
8.2 Well Flushing ........................................................................................................................ 29
8.3 Screens ................................................................................................................................. 29
8.4 Counterweight ...................................................................................................................... 30
8.5 Pit Access ............................................................................................................................. 30
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE – LIFT SERVICES PAGE v
8.6 Pit Stop Switches ................................................................................................................. 30

8.7 Governor Tension Switch ................................................................................................... 30
8.8 Pit and Lift-Well Lighting .................................................................................................... 30
8.9 Lift-Well Screening to Ventilation Openings .................................................................... 31
8.10 Buffers and Supports .......................................................................................................... 31
9 LIFT CAR EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 31
9.1 Car Platform ......................................................................................................................... 31
9.2 Car Frame Construction...................................................................................................... 31
9.3 Car Guide Shoes .................................................................................................................. 31
9.4 Car Superstructure .............................................................................................................. 32
9.5 Car Ventilation ..................................................................................................................... 32
9.6 Car Lighting and Power ...................................................................................................... 32
9.7 Emergency Lighting ............................................................................................................ 32
9.8 Car Control Button Panels .................................................................................................. 32
9.9 Emergency Alarm ................................................................................................................ 33
9.10 Emergency Communications ............................................................................................. 33
9.11 Car Doors ............................................................................................................................. 34
9.12 Power Door Operation......................................................................................................... 34
9.13 Passenger Protection Device ............................................................................................. 34
9.14 Lift Car Protective Quilting ................................................................................................. 35
9.15 Equal Access Use ................................................................................................................ 35
10 LANDING EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 35
10.1 Landing Doors and Frames ................................................................................................ 35
10.2 Landing Sills ........................................................................................................................ 36
10.3 Landing Call Buttons ........................................................................................................... 36
10.4 Landing Position Indicators ............................................................................................... 36
11 CONTROL SYSTEM DETAILS ............................................................................................. 37
11.1 General Control System ...................................................................................................... 37
11.2 Floor Finding ........................................................................................................................ 37
11.3 Floor Levelling ..................................................................................................................... 37
11.4 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 37
11.5 Independent Service ............................................................................................................ 37
11.6 Fireman's Service ................................................................................................................ 38
12 SOFTWARE .......................................................................................................................... 38
12.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 38
13 ELECTRICAL ........................................................................................................................ 39
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE – LIFT SERVICES PAGE vi
13.1 Wiring General ...................................................................................................................... 39

13.2 Machine Area Wiring ............................................................................................................ 39
13.3 Lift-Well Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 39
13.4 Travelling Cables ................................................................................................................. 39
13.5 Equipment protection .......................................................................................................... 39
13.6 Electromagnetic Interference ............................................................................................. 40
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE – LIFT SERVICES PAGE 7
LIFT SERVICES
1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
Providence Christian College Primary School is located at, Southern River, Western
Australia.
The new building will encompass 2 levels of teaching and accommodation.
The lift services will comprise of one (1) stretcher capacity passenger lift.
Passenger lift car finishes are to good quality as selected by the Architect from the
manufactures standard range of finishes.
1.2 Application of General Requirements Clauses

These General Requirement clauses of the specification shall be read as supplementary to
the General Conditions of Contract and in the event of any conflict or inconsistency between
any of these General Requirement clauses of the specification and the General Conditions
of Contract, the General Conditions of Contract shall prevail to the extent only of the conflict
or inconsistency.
1.3 Interpretation of Terms

In this section of the specification the following terms shall have the meanings assigned to
them as follows:-
‘The Consulting Engineer’ shall mean: Engineering Technology Consultants.
‘The Architect’ shall mean: Brad Quartermaine Architect
‘The Superintendent’ shall mean: nominated representative.
‘The Principal’ shall mean: Providence Christian College
‘The Contractor, subcontractor’ shall mean: the Contractor engaged to undertake the works.
‘Approved’ or ‘Approval’ shall mean: approved by the Architect or Superintendent.
“Provide” means: the supply and all installation for the completion and operation of the item.
“Supply” means: supply and delivery without installation.
“Install” means: the installation with all ancillary fittings for the satisfactory operation of the
item, excluding supply.
“Submit” means: submit to the Superintendent.
“Works” means: the services and goods to be delivered by the Contractor under this
contract.
1.4 Requirement for Contract

Ensure that there is a binding contract before commencing work. No responsibility shall be
accepted by or on behalf of the Principal for the failure by the Contractor to enter into a
contract before commencing work.
1.5 Contract Sum

The tender shall be a fixed lump sum contract in Australian Dollars and not subject foreign
currency fluctuations and rise and fall.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Claims for variations to labour rates, material costs, GST, import duties, freight charges,
currency exchange rates, customs’ and primage duties for all work or materials provided or
supplied during the contract period will not be considered for payment.
1.6 Goods and Services Tax

Pay Goods and Services Tax (GST) and provide with each progress claim a tax invoice as
prescribed in the GST Legislation.
Goods and Services Tax is to be itemised separately on each invoice.
The Contractor shall not be paid any additional amounts for any costs involved in
administering the GST.
1.7 Progress Claims

Submit progress claims including a statement of the current contract amount as follows:
1) Original contract amount
2) Deduction of all unexpended provisional and contingency sums
3) Addition of all variations claimed other than rise and fall
4) Amended contract amount varied and adjusted at the date of the claim
1.8 Construction Program

Provide a construction program indicating all major activities that are necessary for the
works, with the tender submission and prior to commencement of any site works.
The program must be negotiated and meet the overall building works program and provide a
critical path.
Include dates for completion of significant stages of each major activity of the works such as
shop drawings, placing orders, manufacturing, delivery, installation on site, placing into
operation, adjustment and testing and detail day to day activities for the final stages of the
works, including, in particular, setting into operation, sublet activities, adjustment,
commissioning, testing, and witnessing of acceptance tests.
1.9 Site Meetings

Attend site meetings as reasonably required and appropriate to the progress of the work.
1.10 Quality Assurance

Apply Quality Assurance as required by the contract to all aspects of this contract.
Implement a quality system, subject to external audit in accordance with AS/NZS ISO 9001
and employ an Auditor accredited as an external Auditor by Quality Assurance Services.
All costs associated with the external audit including those of the external auditor are
payable by the Contractor.
1.11 Health and Safety

Take all steps to ensure that the obligations imposed by all occupational Safety and Health
Regulations, Acts and Codes of Practice are complied with at all times including:
1) Being familiar with the requirements of those Acts, Regulations and Codes of Practice
as applicable to the works
2) Ensuring that the specified works provides for the safety of all personnel during
construction, inspection, testing and subsequent operation of the systems
3) Providing for the identification of hazards, assessment of risks, implementation of
necessary risk control measures and devices and provision of information to ensure
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

the safety of all personnel during construction, inspection, testing and subsequent
operation of the systems
4) Advising of all potential hazards not adequately protected to the requirements of the
Health and Safety Legislation, Acts, Regulations and Codes of Practice
5) Providing all temporary or permanent screens, guarding, safety notices, identification
labels and safety clothing, footwear and equipment required for the execution, testing,
commissioning and maintenance of the works.
Even where the above obligations are not imposed on the Contractor by Health and Safety
Legislation, the Contractor will take all steps to ensure that the obligations are complied with
at all times.
In performing its Health and Safety obligations the Contractor will coordinate with other
services to ensure that notwithstanding the activities of other services, its Health and Safety
Obligations are met.
1.12 Site Conditions

1.12.1 Screens and Barricades
Screens and barricades shall be provided on site, by the Builder, complete with self closing
doors and night latch locking.
Screens shall be securely fixed in place and be kept in good clean condition.
1.12.2 Personnel Access
All personnel shall undergo a site induction process and be bound by the site conditions.
1.12.3 Materials Handling
All materials handling, once equipment is landed on site by the builders crane, including
lifting, hoisting, moving, lowering of materials, plant or tools and equipment shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor who shall pay costs for such activities.
Work areas must be kept clean and safe at all times. Rubbish and redundant materials shall
not be stored on site but must be removed and placed in a bin for safe removal.
1.13 Shop Drawings

Submit for review, comprehensive installation and manufacturing drawings, with notes
and/or specifications and/or catalogue pamphlets (hereinafter called shop drawings):
1) As required for the execution of the works
2) Detailing all works to be carried out by other trades.
Submit with the shop drawings a list of all deviations from the specification requirements for
equipment and the installation. Should such a list not be provided, the Contractor shall be
responsible for full compliance with the specification, irrespective of any review by the
Superintendent.
Submit a schedule of shop drawings listing the drawings to be submitted for review, update
the schedule to show the date of submission and return of each drawing and resubmit the
schedule when drawings are added to the list.
Take account of site dimensions, actual dimensions and access requirements for installation
and servicing of the equipment supplied, and co-ordinate shop drawings with the building
structure, finishes and other services in accordance with the design details and general
arrangements shown on the contract drawings.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Comply with Statutory Authorities and show sufficient information to verify that the
equipment can be installed, operated, adjusted and maintained in the manner for which the
system was designed.
Show all building details and identify services and plant by the same numbering as used on
the drawings. Metric units of measurement are to be used throughout.
Take all responsibility for, and pay for, all alterations of the works due to any discrepancies,
errors or omissions in the shop drawings or other information supplied under the contract,
whether such prints of drawings or information have been reviewed or not, provided that
such discrepancies, errors or omissions are not due to inaccurate or incomplete information
provided for the works.
Shop drawings shall be reviewed marked where alterations are desired, and returned within
14 working days, unless specified elsewhere, of receipt. Where marked to be resubmitted,
amend the originals as required and cloud the parts of the drawing altered as a
consequence of the last revision and resubmit a plain paper print for review.
1.14 Samples
If requested, submit samples for review. Once accepted, retain as the reference benchmark
for materials, finish, quality and workmanship. Any deviation in the final installed item, from
the submitted samples, may be cause for their rejection. Where an article is too large to
submit as a sample, arrange for the item to be made available for review at a suitable
location.
Submit other samples where clarification is required for additional items not specified as
requiring samples. Once accepted, retain the samples and treat in the same manner as
specified samples.
Samples shall:
1) Be submitted within sufficient time to permit modifications to be made if such are
deemed necessary and allowing not less than seven working days for comment
2) Be submitted with copies of relevant approval certificates and technical data where
associated with essential services and emergency systems
3) Be complete in every detail and labelled to include; name of Contractor, date
submitted, make, model no., purpose of sample and relationship to these documents
4) Be submitted with a complete list of those non-complying features where deviations
from specification in the samples exist. Should such a list not be provided the
Contractor shall be responsible for full compliance with the specification, irrespective
of any review by the Superintendent.
5) Be held on site after review until built into the works as the final unit
6) Documentation submitted with samples shall be returned:
7) Marked acceptable, subject to any comments applicable or
8) Marked resubmit, which shall require the rejected sample to be amended as required
and resubmitted.
1.15 Fire Service and Protection

Provide temporary firefighting services and equipment in accordance with the requirements
of the Principal where such temporary services and equipment are required.
Ensure hot works permits are submitted and approved and all detectors and alarms etc have
been isolated before commencing any hot works.
Maintain the areas of work clear of debris including all combustible materials and liquids
resulting from the performance of the works.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

A certified fitter shall carry out all welding or cutting activities as required by AS1735 part 1.
1.16 Review of Work

Review of a drawing, means that the drawing has been reviewed for general compliance
with the specification. Amendments required are noted on the drawing. Dimensions, site
co-ordination with associated plant and all other services and site conditions, compliance
with Statutory Regulations and compliance with specified requirements and compliance with
the contract and subcontract remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
Engineering review means that the work shall be reviewed during construction, and after
completion, strictly for the benefit of the Principal to determine whether such work has been
conducted and completed in substantial conformity with the drawings and the specification.
Reviewed work not conforming to the specification shall be advised in writing giving the
reasons for the non-conformity. A further review shall be undertaken when formal advice is
received advising that the defective works have been completed.
Review does not guarantee that the works accepted as satisfactory are entirely in conformity
with the drawings and the specification notwithstanding approval of such work by any notice
in writing. No reliance should be placed upon any such review or approval.
1.17 Testing and Commissioning

Prior to practical completion, test and commission all installed equipment and systems to
verify that they operate correctly and function in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements, this specification and the contract conditions.
Before commencement of commissioning, submit a program itemising the systems and the
proposed dates for conducting acceptance tests.
Provide one week’s notice to the Superintendent the dates of tests, which are to be
performed, that require witnessing. Where the Superintendent is unable to witness tests, site
staff and the contractor are to sign off the test certificates.
Test shall be completed on dates as agreed. Records of, and the results of all tests carried
out, are to be compiled into a test report and provided in the Operating and Maintenance
Manuals. Provide all necessary labour, materials, stores, apparatus and instruments to
complete these tests.
A Contractors representative, who is qualified to commission the installation, shall remain on
site until the system is operating to the satisfaction of the Superintendent and signed off.
Ensure that all instruments have been calibrated by an independent certified testing
authority within 6 months of the date of use and a current calibration certificate is available
for inspection. Instruments shall not be used to measure quantities, which are outside their
accurate measuring range. If there is reasonable doubt as to the accuracy of an instrument,
the instrument shall be re-calibrated or alternatively, quantities measured with the disputed
instrument shall be re-measured with another approved instrument.
Conduct the tests as detailed in the specification and perform all additional tests as
instructed to bring the plant into running order.
1.18 Tuition
Provide an experienced technical person, who has a complete technical knowledge of the
installation, to instruct and demonstrate to the Principal or his nominated representatives,
method of operation and maintenance requirements of all components in the installation. All
operating manuals and as installed drawings shall be available prior to tuition being given.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

1.19 Final Completion

Final completion shall mean the end of the defects liability period or when defects notified
during the defects liability period have been made good, whichever shall last occur.
2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.1 General
Provide documentation to allow the Principal to operate and maintain the plant and
equipment, together with all relevant information that would assist in carrying out operation,
maintenance, additions and alterations to the installation.
The Manuals shall be prepared by personnel who are familiar with the system design and
capable of providing a detailed description of the system operation and related items.
The manuals shall be concise and written in English to describe the systems installed and
the method of operation and maintenance procedures.
All text in the manual shall be written in terminology to enable it to be understood by non-
technical personnel.
Documentation shall include:
1) A title section including the project name, address, Principal, Superintendent and
Contractor.
2) As installed layouts, car interiors and appointment drawings
3) Wiring diagrams
4) Listings of all entered programmable parameters and fault codes
5) Operating characteristics of the lift together with descriptions of special features and
functions of key switches
6) Procedure to be followed when accidents involving injury to persons occur
7) Brief technical description of the lift including technical data information supplied with
the tender
8) Provide copies of landing door and frame fire test certificate
9) All test results
10) Approval and compliance certificates and notices issued by Authorities, Agencies,
Suppliers, Installers and Contractors.
11) Manufacturer’s documentation of all equipment
12) Care and maintenance of applied finishes
13) Instructions for operation of the system
14) Maintenance schedule and procedures
15) Recommended frequency of inspection and lubrication of equipment
16) Information relating to the expected operational life of all major system components.
17) Warranty details in excess of the defects liability period
The details to be contained within the documents are specified in the Scope and Quality
Requirements sections of this specification.
Submit a ‘draft’ copy of the Manual, for approval, prior to practical completion.
An interim copy of the sections of the Operating and Maintenance Manual which refers to
essential and emergency services shall be provided prior to practical completion for site use
until the final versions of the manual are supplied.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

2.2 Drawings
The drawings shall include the final shop drawings provided during the progress of the works
and as installed drawings for the installation.
All drawings shall be produced in electronic format (CAD) using a standard print font.
Freehand or manually drafted drawings and sketches are not acceptable.
2.3 Format
Hard copy manuals shall:
1) Be sized with A4 pages.
2) Contain typewritten text. Handwritten documents are not acceptable.
3) Be bound in binder/s, which shall be labelled with the project description, service and
volume number on the cover and spine of the binder. Binders shall be hard covered,
multi ring type, which enable easy removal or insertion of pages.
4) Include original copies of printed documents of equipment by manufacturers, note that
if the applicable component is only a minor part of printed manufacturer’s documents,
the relevant pages shall be colour photocopied and inserted in the manual.
5) Include dividers between sections of the manual with printed identification of the
section as cross referenced in the index.
6) Include clear plastic sleeves to contain documents, which are not suitable for binding,
e.g. Certificates. etc.
Electronic format manuals shall:
7) Be sized for A4 paper
8) Be provided in two formats:
a) Adobe Portable Document Format, PDF
b) The original source file
9) Be produced to suit electronic on line documentation
10) Be produced in a form suitable for use with Adobe Acrobat 5.0 software or higher
11) Be produced in one of the following format files not less than a maximum three
versions older than the current release version:
a) Microsoft Office
b) Adobe PageMaker
c) Adobe FrameMaker
12) For pre-formatted documents produced by other software products for inclusion in the
manuals, be provided in one of the following formats:
a) Adobe Portable Document Format, PDF
b) Postscript File, Level II
13) Where manufacturer’s documents are not available in electronic format, be provided
with electronically scanned images of relevant sections of the documents in Adobe
Acrobat PDF format at a resolution not less than 150dpi
14) Be provided on an indexed CD ROM or USB electronic format, labelled with the
a) Project name
b) Drawing numbers
c) File type/s
d) Date
15) Hard Copy drawings shall:
16) Be provided on the same size print sheet for uniformity of all drawings
17) Be bound in a set with a proprietary binding system which enables easy removal or
insertion of drawings.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

18) Be bound in a set with a cover sheet labelled with the project description, service and
volume number of the drawing set.
19) Include an index of all drawings in the set
20) Electronic format drawings shall:
21) Be produced in a suitable file format that can be viewed and opened by the latest two
versions of AutoCAD
22) Be prepared utilising one of the latest two versions of AutoCAD with all details of the
layers system utilised.
23) Be prepared as a black and white postscript plot file or Adobe Acrobat PDF file in the
same standard as for AutoCAD printed versions
24) Be provided on an indexed CD ROM or USB electronic format, labelled with the
e) project name
f) drawing number/s
g) file type/s
h) date
2.4 Quantities
Provide the following quantities of documents for the Operation and Maintenance Manual:
1) Manuals – Three (3) sets in hard copy format and two sets in CD ROM or USB
electronic format
2) Drawings – Three (3) sets in hard copy format and two sets in CD ROM or USB
electronic format
3 SCOPE
3.1 Extent of Works

This document covers and includes the supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning
and subsequent maintenance of:
• One (1) Machine Room Less passenger lift (MRL)

Accredited QA providers are:
1) Otis Elevator Company
2) Kone Elevators
3) ThyssenKrupp Elevator
4) Schindler Lifts Australia Pty Ltd
5) Octagon BKG
Architectural drawings are available from Brad Quartermaine Architect.
Provide all manufactured items, materials, labour, cartage, hoisting, tools, plant, appliances
and fixings necessary for the proper execution of the works, together with all minor and
incidental works.
The following list identifies the work to be undertaken by the Contractor. The listed items are
not intended to limit or exclude any items required by the contract documents.
Take full responsibility for:
1) The complete design of the lift installation
2) Co-ordination with architectural and structural details
3) Co-ordination with other trades and Contractors
4) Compliance with Authority’s requirements
5) Preparation and provision of design/shop drawings
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

6) Engineering calculations
7) Payment of Plant Registration fees
3.2 Schedule of Main Features
1) Lift number - One (1)
2) Service classification - Passenger
3) Contract load - 1275 or 17 passengers

Stretcher compliant
4) Number of levels served - Two (2)

G&1
Single entry
5) Contract speed - 1.0 metre per second
6) Machine type - Permanent Magnet Gearless
7) Machine drive system - Motor Room Less Overhead Traction with

machine in lift shaft (MRL)
8) Motor starts per hour - 180
9) Roping - 2:1
10) Machine location - Overhead located within the top of the lift
shaft
11) Lift well plan size - 2000mm wide x 2400mm deep (clear internal
shaft)
12) Approximate travel - 4.0M (approx) TBC
13) Pit depth - 1200 mm (maximum)
14) Clear headroom from top floor - 3950mm

served to underside roof
15) Number of car entrances - One (1)
16) Entrance type - Two Panel Side Opening. (2PS)
17) Entrance size - 1000 mm wide x 2100 mm high.
18) Doors and frames - Brushed stainless steel
19) Entrance protection acceptable - ‘3D’ Multiple infrared light beam, proximity
types device or electronic scanner
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

20) Car sizes -
a) Internal (measured to - 1450 mm wide x 2000 mm deep clear.

wall finishes)
Internal clear dimensions after finishes
applied to allow stretcher access.
b) Ceiling height - 2200mm

(measured to
underside suspended
ceiling)
c) Roof height (measured - 2300 mm

to underside of car
roof)
21) Car Fixtures -
a) Car control button - Two (2) on the lift car side walls
panels
b) Car button type - Dual coloured, (White/ Blue) micro movement.

Dupar US95.
c) Car position indicator - Electronic LCD screen display types complete

(type) with audible information adjustable between
35dB(A) and 55dB(A)
d) Car position indicator - Above each car control panel

(location)
22) Lift car interior -
a) Side walls - Patterned stainless steel
b) Front walls - Patterned stainless steel
c) Rear walls - Patterned stainless steel
d) Car doors - Patterned stainless steel
e) Flooring - Vinyl
f) Ceiling - Patterned stainless steel
g) Lighting - Auto on/off LED down lights
h) Handrail - 38mm Stainless steel
i) Bump Rails N/A
j) Ventilation - Fan
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

23) Landing fixtures -
a) Landing call button - One (1) dual illuminated (White/ Blue) manual
panels push button with call registration at both
floors. Mounted flush with vandal resistant
hidden fixings
b) Lift position indicators - Direction of travel arrows at both levels

complete with adjustable electronic tone.
Located above each entrance.
24) Emergency - Alarm bell in an appropriate location.

alarm/communication
Allow for GSM appliances for phone system
(Pixel EM-G4E or equivalent)
Hands free auto dial telephone system, EM
Phone LX-8 or equivalent
25) Emergency lighting -
a) Lift cars - Automatic on/off car illumination utilising LED

down lighting
b) Machine area - 1 off two hour capacity unit at top of shaft and
1 off in the lift pit area
26) Control system - Simplex Micro Processor Control.
27) Fireman’s recall floor - Provided at Ground level

Fireman’s key switches in lift car
28) Independent Service - Key switch in lift car
29) Levelling accuracy - +5mm
30) Car safety gear - Flexible guide clamp type
31) Guide rails -
a) Car - ‘T’ section hard drawn planed steel of

adequate size
b) Counterweight - ‘T’ section hard drawn planed steel of

adequate size
32) Guide shoes -
c) Car - Roller or Slipper type
d) Counterweight - Roller or Slipper type
33) Buffers -
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

a) Car - Polymer or equivalent
b) Counterweight - Polymer or equivalent
34) Special requirements - Disabled person access requirements in

accordance with AS 1735.12.in compliance
with the NCCA.
- Diagnostic and specialised maintenance tools

and passwords
Fault codes
- Provide Auto Rescue Device (ARD) to enable

passenger release in the event of loss of
mains power
- Provide flushing panels above each entrance

equal to the length of the levelling zone
Wiring for future CCTV and security card

reader in the lift car.
On/Off key switch on both landings
Arrange and coordinate the provision of SIM

cards ready for hand over.
3.3 Work by Other Parties

Some works and/or provisions associated with the Lift Services shall be performed by other
trades or parties. Liaise with other trades to ensure that all requirements are provided as
required for the completeness and proper operation of the equipment or system.
The following works and/or provisions, unless specifically stated as by the Contractor, are
not included in the Lift Services:
3.3.1 Building Works
General Items
1) Temporary light and power supply for construction purposes together with permanent
power for testing and commissioning of the machinery.
2) Lunch room, water and toilet facilities on site.
3) Datum levels for the alignment and positioning of equipment.
4) Handover of lift-well in a clean condition, all formwork and ties removed, openings
cleaned, and the pit and pit sump cleaned of water and debris.
5) Suitable dry storage area for equipment and tools.
6) Provide a clean dry lockable site storage area from the time material is received on
site until completion of the contract.
7) Hoisting of equipment on to site.
8) Allow for lift shaft rough door opening guarding on all entrances for the duration of the
works
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Lift Pits
1) Provide a tanked waterproof lift pit to lift code and contractors requirements. Pit to
extend to solid earth and be designed to withstand dynamic loadings provided by the
Contractor.
2) Building in of buffer support steelwork or inserts, where required.
3) 300mm x 300mm x 300mm dry sump recess to pits complete with non-slip, perforated
grates. Grade pit slab with a minimum fall to the sump. To be located immediately
below the lowest level landing door entrance.
Lift-Wells
1) Construct waterproof, fire rated lift-well with non-brittle material. Lift-well should not
deflect more than 25mm when subjected to a force of 450N applied horizontally on
any square of 50mm side.
2) Lift-well to be constructed square and plumb within 25mm. Front wall shall be
constructed plumb within + or - 6mm on the inside face and + or - 12mm on the lobby
side face.
3) Rough openings at each floor served, as nominated, for lift door frames and recesses
or set downs for door sills.
4) Provide floor datum’s for the installation of door frames and landing tracks.
5) Make good landing rough entrances to the lift door frames and sills following
installation by the Contractor.
6) Build into the lift well structure fixings for guide rail brackets and landing door frame
supports. Brackets to be provided by the Contractor.
7) Provide lifting beam, or lifting eyes, with a two (2.5) tonne capacity in the top of the lift
overrun to lift contractor detail.
8) Provide 200 x 200 ventilation relief at the top of the lift shafts
Electrical and Security Services
1) Provide and connect a suitable three phase and neutral, 50 Hz, 415 volt fire rated
sub-main, from main switchboard to lift machine distribution board inside the lift shaft
adjacent to the top landing entrance. Fault level of the lift switchboard is to be
confirmed with the Electrical Engineer.
2) Apply with the lift contractor and make application for the connection of the phones to
each lift. Pay for all fees for connection of lift phones
Mechanical Services
1) Fire protection services
2) Provision of fire detection and/or suppression equipment to the lift-well as detailed
within the Fire Protection Services specification and in compliance with the
Regulations, including but not limited to:
a) Supply and install fire detection to the top over runs and sprinklers in the lift pits
of each lift shaft.
3) Liaise with the Contractor for all installation and positioning of equipment
3.4 Rules and Regulations

Provide equipment and an installation in accordance with the requirements of the:
1) Relevant Statutory Authority
2) Electricity Distributor
3) Australian Communications Authority
4) Government Health Department
5) Applicable Building Regulations, By-Laws, Acts and Codes
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

6) The relevant Work Place Health and Safety Regulations

7) AS/NZS 4431 Guidelines for safe working on new lift installations in new constructions
8) AS/NZS 3000/2007 Wiring Rules
9) AS 1735 Part 1-2016 - EN81:20 and OH&S Regulation
10) Relevant sections of the NCCA.
3.5 Finishes and Painting

3.5.1 Painting General
All equipment shall be protected to minimise the effects of corrosion, rust and galvanic
action.
Remove all part number pen and paint marks.
Ferrous metal, unless specified to the contrary, shall be cleaned, freed from rust, grease and
scale, coated with rust inhibiting self etching primer, and then coated with a minimum of two
final coats of quality enamel paint.
Small items of equipment may be process plated.
After installation, any damage to the prime coat or plating shall be made good.
Car, landing and lift-well equipment visible past the line of the entrance when the car is at a
landing with the doors open shall be of first class workmanship and finished matt black.
3.5.2 Stainless Steel
Unless otherwise specified stainless steel shall be grade 304, minimum, and finished to a
satin finish equivalent to Comsteel No.4 grade or equivalent approved.
Stainless steel, where used for face plates, shall be minimum 2.0 mm thick.
All panels shall be flat and smooth and, where panels have been welded, no weld marks
shall be visible.
Where screw fixings are used they shall be stainless steel, Truss Head, raised Phillips head
type.
Stainless steel shall be adequately protected, from the time of manufacture to the time of
hand over of the complete installation. Any stainless steel not protected and being damaged
on site may be subject to rejection.
3.5.3 Engraving
All engraving and lettering styles and heights shall be to selection and approval of the
Architect.
3.5.4 Final Clean Down
Prior to commencement of final testing and commissioning, carry out a complete and
thorough clean down of the entire installation to remove all construction debris and dust.
After satisfactory completion of all tests, any damage to finished surfaces shall be made
good.
3.5.5 Protection
Protect units from damage and the entry of water, dust, rubble, etc., up to the time of
practical completion.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

3.5.6 Cleaning
Prior to practical completion the entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, grime,
oil and grease.
Car interior finishes, car operating panels, handrails, doors and frames shall be cleaned and
polished to remove any dust, stains, etc. Any protective compound as recommended by the
manufacturer shall be applied prior to practical completion.
3.6 Labels and Notices

Supply and fix all notices and labels relative to the safe and efficient performance and
maintenance of the installation and to the requirement of the relevant Statutory Authority.
Supply and fix all labels, notices, etc., required for this installation, including:
1) Lift number on all machine equipment and inside the lift car
2) Identification labels to the machine distribution boards with source of supply
3) Stainless steel engraved Plant Registration number permanently fixed on the MAP
/E&I panel.
4) Copy of Plant Registration Certificates adjacent to the lift MAP/E&I panel
5) Labels to pit stop switches
6) Labels for buffer clearances
7) Engraved labels for key switch keys
8) Notice showing telephone operating instructions
9) Other notices deemed necessary or required by the Statutory Authority
All apparatus shall be labelled as to its designation and status. Each label shall be
conspicuous and manufactured from Traffolyte or like material engraved to approval,
particularly in respect of size and lettering. Dymo or similar tape labels will not be permitted.
The function of all ancillary apparatus, e.g., fuses, relays, and in the case of fuses, the
ratings also shall be clearly indicated. Fixings to the equipment shall use at least two,
stainless steel round head screws, which will permit ready replacement.
3.7 Performance Requirements

3.7.1 Sound Levels
Based on a maximum ambient sound level of 45 dB(A) in lobbies and occupied space
adjacent to lift-wells, take appropriate steps to restrict lift operating average peak sound
levels to the following:
1) Inside car, stationary at any floor, fan off, doors closed 48 dB(A)
2) Inside car, car running, accelerating or decelerating, fan off 50 dB(A)
3) During door opening, closing or reversal sequences, fan off 60 dB(A)
4) Outside lift well at the top landing with the lift operating 50 dB(A)
Provide all necessary measuring and recording equipment and perform tests to demonstrate
compliance.
3.8 Testing and Commissioning

3.8.1 General
Prior to final Consultant inspection, complete all tests, as required by the relevant Statutory
Authority. Practical completion will not be granted until all tests are completed and results
issued in the O&M Manuals.
Supply all instruments, equipment and labour necessary to carry out such tests. Make
arrangements for all tests to be witnessed in order to avoid the repetition of such tests.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Replace any equipment found to be defective during such tests and repair or replace any
equipment damaged. In particular, the guide rails are to be redressed after safety gear
tests.
In addition to the mandatory tests, all the equipment including finishes will be inspected and
checked for correct operation of at least the following for each lift:
1) Levelling accuracy
2) Independent service
3) Simplex operation
4) Fireman's service
5) Load weighing operation
6) Sound levels
7) Passenger protection devices
8) Car lighting and emergency lighting
9) Car ventilation
10) Car emergency communication and alarm system
11) Car and landing controls and indicators
12) Auto Rescue Device
13) Pit and well lighting
14) Car roof inspection operation
Allow for repeating all tests prior to expiry of the maintenance period.
3.8.2 Keys
Supply three keys for each key switch. Respective keys shall be attached to a plastic
engraved label for each key switch function, i.e., car lights and car fan, independent service,
etc.
3.9 Practical Completion

Practical completion will not be achieved until the following items have been completed:
1) All works covered by the intent of this specification
2) All tests as required by the Statutory Authorities and the specification
3) Completion of all adjustments to circuits, equipment and devices
4) Completion of all cleaning, painting and finishes
5) Submission of operating and maintenance manuals including as installed drawings
6) Demonstration of the ability of the equipment to perform to the quality required by the
specification and the performance times as guaranteed
7) Copies of certification that the installation has been inspected tested and are suitable
for general use in accordance with the relevant Statutory Authority requirements.
3.10 Guarantee and Maintenance

3.10.1 Guarantee
The entire installation shall be guaranteed against faulty workmanship and materials for the
duration of the twelve (12) month defects liability period.
3.10.2 Defects Liability Period Maintenance
Maintenance shall be carried out on each unit during the defects liability period as part of the
contract.
Fully maintain each unit in a proper working order by:
1) Regular preventative maintenance, plus answering all breakdown calls on any day or
hour, supervisory inspections and adjustments
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

2) Preventative maintenance performed systematically and in a scheduled manner

3) The replacement of damaged and/or defective parts, materials or equipment, or parts
showing signs of undue wear
4) The replacement of burnt out lamps and the illuminated signals within each lift car and
on the landings for each lift
5) The testing of emergency lighting and communication/alarm systems
6) The provision of all necessary lubricating oils, greases, cleaning liquids, materials and
accessories
The maintenance shall include, all maintenance offered under the proposed comprehensive
maintenance contract including costs of all repairs and replacement parts and all hours
callout service.
Regular preventative maintenance shall be carried out at times arranged with the Owner or
his representative.
Maintenance staff shall complete the site log-book, as required by the Occupational Safety
and Health Regulations, each time they visit the site. The exact details of work carried out
shall be entered in the book. This log-book shall be made available to the Owner or his
representative at any time and all entries shall be clearly stated. Abbreviations are not
acceptable.
Unsatisfactory maintenance or continued faults or defects which result in unacceptable
operation, will extend the defects liability period maintenance until such time as the system
has operated to the satisfaction of the owners representative for a minimum period of one
calendar month.
3.11 Final Inspection

Two weeks prior to the expiry of the twelve (12) month defects liability period the Owner or
his representative shall complete a final inspection.
Any defects found shall be rectified prior to release of final retention amounts.
3.12 Comprehensive Maintenance

Submit the annual charge for full comprehensive maintenance of the equipment. A quotation
for a five year period is required.
This shall be provided as a separate item and not included in the final contract sum.
In addition to coverage of normal maintenance agreements, allow for the following:
1) Attendance at any annual inspection required by the relevant Statutory Authority or
the Principal
2) Complete the annual safety tests and inspections of equipment as required by
EN81:20 & EN81.50
3) Performance of equipment to be maintained to guaranteed performance levels
4) Ownership of any software, passwords and special tools required to maintain the
equipment shall be provided to the Principal should the Maintenance Contractor be
taken over, bought out or otherwise cease to operate
5) Supply and replacement of all failed lamps within lift cars, machine rooms, lift wells
and pits
3.13 Requirements, Permits and Fees

Perform all work in accordance with the current National Construction Code of Australia
(NCCA). References herein to codes and standards shall be to the current version adopted
by the NCCA the State Authority administering that code.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over any part of the works
including requirements for ladders, stairs, platforms, safety access and scaffolding.
Make all applications and pay all fees required by any such Authority. Prepare and submit
applications including those that are required to be signed by the Owner.
3.14 Standards
Work not covered by the requirements of Regulatory Authorities or this specification shall
comply with the appropriate publication of the Standards Australia.
Wherever a Standard or Code of Practice is referred to in this specification, it will imply the
latest issue and/or revision applicable at the time of tender.
3.15 Materials, Workmanship and Sundries

All materials, fittings, accessories and apparatus of new manufacture shall comply with the
relevant standard.
Prior to commencing the installation, samples of all accessories, fittings and apparatus that
are proposed to be employed in the work, shall be submit for approval. Failure to comply
with this provision may result in the unconditional rejection of such items when inspected on
site.
Provide all materials, new, clean and free from corrosion unless otherwise specified.
3.16 Manufacturer’s Directions

Apply, install, connect, erect, adjust, use, clean and condition, manufactured articles,
materials and equipment in strict conformity with manufacturers' printed directions. Retain
manufacturers' directions for such articles on site for future reference.
3.17 Obvious Minor Work

Minor materials and parts which are necessary for the project shall be provided at no cost.
3.18 Equipment Layout

Equipment shall be set out the in accordance with the general arrangement shown on the
contractors drawings with adjustments, to accommodate the equipment being provided, to
ensure easy access for operation, maintenance and removal of components.
Co-ordinate with all other trades to ensure equipment being installed by that trade does not
restrict operation, or maintenance, or service access to equipment installed under these
works.
3.19 Setting Out

All work shall be set out from datum lines established on site. Any errors that become
apparent shall be reported immediately for rectification.
3.20 Drawings
Provide full working drawings for approval, including shaft layouts, builders works lift car
design and car and landing appointments.
Any information involving accurate measurement of the works shall be taken from the
architectural and structural drawings and at the site.
Co-ordinate with all other trades, Architectural and Structural drawings to ensure that
equipment is accessible and suitably located.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

The final location of all equipment shall be determined in co-ordination with other services
and architectural details.
Examine carefully, as soon as is practicable prior to the commencement of any works, the
architectural, structural and other trade drawings and be satisfied that the works can be
satisfactorily carried out without changes to the building as shown on the architectural
drawings. Before commencement of any works, report any defect or interference affecting
the works.
3.21 Schedule of Works

Schedule and arrange the works in co-operation with other trades so that all works are
installed to the best advantage. Equipment which is installed without due regard to other
trades, shall be relocated without variation to the contract.
3.22 Co-ordination with Other Services

Co-ordinate the works with all other trades and services which relate to the lift works.
Claims for variations, extensions of time, delay, disruption or other items, will not be allowed
for failure to co-ordinate the works.
Equipment installed without due regard to other trades shall be relocated at no additional
cost.
3.23 Services and Facilities Provided

Provide conduits, wiring, leads, lamps and similar items as required for the works.
Provide hoisting, scaffolding, telephones and any other facilities which do not exist and
which are required for execution of the works.
3.24 Fixings and Supports

Provide fixings to secure equipment and wiring to walls, ceilings, floors or structure as
applicable. All fixings adopted shall be of an approved type.
All fixings shall be corrosion resistant and shall be of appropriate size for the anticipated
load.
Ensure that all supports shall:
1) have electro galvanised or cadmium plated threaded rod
2) have galvanised or cadmium plated steel brackets
3) be approved and suitable for the intended purpose
Ensure that nuts and bolts shall:
4) have heads which are hexagonal in shape
5) be provided with suitable washers
6) have metric threads
7) be of length that when tightened to correct tension, will show at least one full thread
beyond the nut
The following fixings are not acceptable:
8) fixings made by the use of explosive powered tools
9) fixings made in the mortar joint in block or brickwork
10) fixings made into the timber in fills of concrete slab floors
11) fixings into plasterboard, fibre cement, ceiling tiles or similar friable material
12) fixings which rely on expanding elements of nylon, plastics or similar synthetic
material for wiring and equipment associated with emergency systems
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

13) nylon ties for all power sub mains and feeders except where run in horizontal plane
and weight of sub-mains is directly supported by cable tray or ladder rack
3.25 Electrical Equipment

Equipment shall be isolated such that no live components or conditions exist in the area of
the work being undertaken and at all times no unsafe conditions shall prevail. Should work
on a live system be unavoidable, the Contractor must ensure that all precautions required by
relevant standards, codes and Authorities are adhered to. The Contractor is fully
responsible for personnel and property safety and shall indemnify the Project Co-ordinator
against any claims which may arise during such work.
3.26 Seismic Restraints

Provide seismic restraints for the installation in accordance with AS 1170.4.
Provide horizontal restraints to resist forces of not less than 0.5 Gc and vertical restraints to
resist forces of not less than 0.25 Gc where Gc is the weight of a component.
3.27 Electromagnetic Compatibility Framework Compliance

Ensure that all electrical, electronic and digital components and systems provided as part of
the Works, meets the requirements of the Australian Communications Authority (ACA) for
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) framework to prevent Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) by complying with the standards nominated by ACA relevant to the products and
where required by the ACA are labelled with the C Tick mark to establish compliance with
the EMC Framework.
4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS - LIFT MACHINE EQUIPMENT
4.1 Gearless Machines

Gearless traction type machines shall consist of a permanent magnet drive motor, drive
sheave and dual electro mechanical brake mounted on a common bed plate. The machine
shall be assembled and balanced to ensure minimum vibration and noise.
The machine shall be contained within the lift shaft at the highest level served. Access to the
machine and controller shall be through the top floor landing entrance.
The machine shall have isolation pads fitted to eliminate the transmission of sound and/or
vibration.
Where integral fan cooling is provided to the hoist motor, the fan shall be thermostatically
controlled or continue to run for a period of approximately 180 seconds after the motor has
stopped.
All bearings shall be precision grade, self-aligning and quiet in operation.
The machine shall be provided with a nameplate setting out lift duty, motor speed, drive
sheave diameter and size and gross lengths of hoist ropes for replacement purposes.
4.2 Machine and Hitch Beams

The machine shall be mounted on structural steel beams supplied and installed with bearing
plates.
Machines and/or machine beams shall be isolated from the machine beams by noise and
vibration isolating mounts designed to suit the application.
Where two to one roping is used, supply steel hitch beams, suitable steel bearing plates and
isolating mounts for these beams.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

The bearing plates and supports where required, shall be built into the structure.
4.3 Motors General

The motor shall be designed for lift duty featuring moderate starting currents and sufficient
torque to start, run and level the lift under all conditions up to 110% of rated load in the up
direction.
Acceleration and retardation shall be smooth in both travel directions regardless of load.
All motors shall be suitable for operation commensurate with the starts per hour nominated
in the schedule.
4.3.1 AC Motor
The AC hoisting motor shall be suitable for use with a Variable Frequency AC power
transistor power control system.
4.4 Motor Power Control

4.4.1 General
Variable Voltage systems shall control acceleration, deceleration and full speed running to
preset patterns. Acceleration patterns, deceleration patterns and reference feed-back
devices shall ensure smooth speed transitions and a soft final stop. The machine brake shall
not be used in the deceleration or stopping process.
The lift contract speed shall be monitored by a speed measuring and correcting pulse
generator in a closed loop configuration.
4.4.2 AC Motor Control
Power conversion from AC mains supply to DC intermediate format, then to controlled
Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC, shall be achieved by high frequency switched
power transistors. Supply to the traction motor shall be by means of a proven variable
frequency lift power control system.
Such a system shall have the following features:
1) a power factor of not less than 0.9
2) employ a converter for initial conversion of three phase AC mains supply to DC
current
3) employ pulse width modulation, vector control or digital torque control techniques and
an appropriate inverter for conversion of DC current to variable voltage, variable
frequency AC supply to the traction motor
4) employ feed of regenerated power back into the supply mains via suitable line filters
subject to the approval of the local Electrical Supply Authority
5 CONTROLLER
5.1 General
Control equipment shall be designed and manufactured for lift usage and shall operate free
of vibration and noise.
Control equipment shall be housed in robust metal cabinets and fitted with closely fitting
doors.
Equipment shall be mounted with adequate ventilation being provided to prevent
overheating or early component failure.
All equipment, contactors and junction strips shall be clearly labelled.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

All 240 volt and 415 volt terminals and connections shall be adequately protected from
incidental contact.
All bolts and screws shall be fitted with washers, nuts and locknuts or spring washers.
Under voltage, sustained overload, phase failure or phase reversal protection shall be
provided to prevent damage.
Control circuits shall be adequately protected by fuses or other appropriate means.
Thermal protective devices, where used, shall not be subject to heat rising from rectifiers,
resistors, etc.
Solid state devices shall be conservatively rated for the duty with adequate provision for
short term overload situations.
All card mounted microprocessor and/or integrated circuits shall be fixed in the vertical
position to minimise the accumulation of dust.
Any special tools required for initial set up, retune or adjustment or for the purpose of
diagnosing faults, shall, either be incorporated into the controller or if separate, be supplied
complete with codes and passwords and remain the property of the owner.
6 LIFT DISTRIBUTION BOARD
6.1 General
Provide a distribution board in the controller unit located on the top landing of each lift.
The controller shall be provided with a fire rating where it penetrates the lift shaft.
The distribution board shall be:
1) complete in every respect, fully wired and factory tested
2) of overall dimensions suitable for spaces allocated
3) designed to facilitate easy access to and removal of component parts
4) constructed and contain equipment as required by the Local Supply Authority
5) The distribution switchboard shall:
6) conform to AS3439.1
7) be provided with a minimum protection rating of IP 51 as defined in AS1939
8) be capable of withstanding the stresses caused by a fault level as specified for a
period of one second
9) be of the following minimum form construction as per AS3439.1:
10) less than 150 amps capacity - Form 1
Distribution switchboard shall:
The switchboard shall contain the following:
11) three phase main circuit breaker for each lift
12) single phase, Earth Leakage Protected, circuit breaker for each car lighting and power
13) single phase, Earth Leakage Protected circuit breaker for lift well lighting in each lift
shaft
14) single phase, Earth Leakage Protected circuit breaker for the General Purpose
Outlet located in each lift pit overrun
15) be provided with emergency lighting test facilities in accordance with AS2293.1 for car
emergency lighting.
Connection of sub mains to the lift control system shall be completed by the electrical
contractor. Allowance should be made for tails and connection.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

7 MACHINE AREA ACCESSORIES
7.1 General
Provide, and fit as necessary, the following accessories in each lift machine area prior to
practical completion:
1) as installed wiring diagrams suitable protected and wall mounted
2) well access key and door unlocking devices suitably labelled and wall mounted
3) holder fixed to the lift shaft wall adjacent to the top landing for log books and relevant
information
4) duplicate book to record all maintenance, emergency lift calls and breakdowns
8 LIFTWELL EQUIPMENT
8.1 Guide Rails and Fixings

Car and counterweight guide rails shall be machine planed tee section steel suitably sized
for the application
Care shall be taken during storage, packing, handling and transporting of rails throughout
the supply and erection process such that rail quality is maintained.
Guide rails shall be installed plumb and parallel to ensure smooth riding quality.
Tee type guide rail joints shall be machined and factory matched tongue and groove type.
Rail clip design shall allow vertical rail movement during contraction, expansion, building
settlement or safety gear application without distortion to rails. Any paint or corrosion
treatment of rails should not interfere with this requirement.
Guide rails shall be bottomed on the pit frame with adequate provisions made for shortening
of rails and/or adjusting jacking bolts to allow for building settlement.
Rail fixing centres shall not exceed 2400mm.
Unistrut inserts shall be supplied, for building in by the Builder, for the purpose of fixing
brackets and steel work to the concrete lift well structures. Alternatively, masonry anchors
may be used for any or all fixings.
Supply and install all trimmer beams, brackets, backings, stiffeners, packing’s, bolts and
similar items necessary for the support and fixing of all guide rail systems.
8.2 Well Flushing

Supply and install sheet steel flushing panels at the top and bottom of each landing
entrance opening in the path of travel of the car door opening equal to the length of the
levelling zone.
Flushing panels shall be suitably stiffened and painted prior to practical completion.
8.3 Screens
Supply and install pit counterweight screens and any guarding necessary for the prevention
of travelling cables being damaged by the shaft or lift equipment.
Where the distance between lifts does not meet the requirements of 500mm clearance then
full height screening between lifts is the be provided.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

8.4 Counterweight
The counterweight shall be of the structural frame type and designed to balance the total
weight of the finished lift car plus not less than 40% of the rated load. Space shall be left for
the addition of further filling weight to a minimum of 10% of the total calculated weight
required.
Counterweight and associated equipment shall be designed and installed to minimise noise.
Noise from the counterweight or associated equipment shall not be audible from within the
lift car, or on any of the occupiable areas.
Counterweights shall also be fully balanced after correct final weights are established.
The counterweight filler weights shall be painted bright yellow for safety purposes.
8.4.1 Guide Shoes
Each counterweight shall be fitted with roller or slipper guide shoes, adjustable to ensure
sufficient contact with the guide rails.
Adjustment shall be made to ensure the counterweight will hang vertical at the mid-point of
travel, prior to the top set of guide shoes being finally bolted in position.
8.5 Pit Access

Supply and install a suitable access ladder of non-combustible material permanently
mounted in the lift shaft to allow access from the lowest level served by the lift to the lift pit.
A door lock unlocking egress device shall be provided in the pit adjacent to the access
ladder.
8.6 Pit Stop Switches

Suitable impact resistant isolating switches shall be provided adjacent to the top and bottom
of each pit access ladder and appropriately labelled.
8.7 Governor Tension Switch

Provide over speed governor wheel tension detection switches on each lift bottom governor
tension sheave.
8.8 Pit and Lift-Well Lighting

LED or fluorescent luminaries of minimum 1 x 28 watts each, with a suitable impact resistant
diffuser or wire guards shall be supplied and installed in the pit and lift-well. In addition, one
RCD protected socket outlet shall be provided in the lift pit.
The luminaries shall be mounted vertically and located to the rear of lift well together with
additional units such that pits are effectively illuminated with the lift car on the compressed
buffer.
The top of each unit shall be in line with the floor level of each floor served. An additional
unit shall be mounted below the top of lift well to effectively illuminate the top of the car with
the counterweight landed.
All power shall originate from the line side of the main lift circuit breaker through an
appropriate circuit breaker labelled ‘Lift well Lighting’. Wiring shall be arranged such that
lamps are connected by heavy duty leads of maximum 600 mm length and a round earth
type three pin plug and socket. A failed or disconnected lamp shall not effect operation of
other lamps.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Two way intermediate switching for the luminaries shall be provided within easy reach in the
lift well at the bottom and top floors served and the lift machine access door.
8.9 Lift-Well Screening to Ventilation Openings

Supply and install flush mesh screening over the lift well ventilation openings.
8.10 Buffers and Supports

Provide buffers designed to the requirements of the Australian Standards in the bottom
overrun pit.
Hydraulic buffers shall be fitted with graduated dip sticks to enable checking of the oil level,
capped filler openings to facilitate topping up and suitable drain plugs. Oil reservoirs shall be
sealed to prevent leakage and contamination. Hydraulic buffers shall be fitted with non-
return detection safety switches.
Buffers shall be bolted to mild steel bases fixed to the pit floor between the guide rails. Pit
steel, bases, buffers and any braces required shall be supplied and installed by the
Contractor.
Where the vertical height from the pit floor exceeds 760 mm to the top of the compressed
buffer, the top of the buffer shall be supported in a steel framework fixed at the ends to the
guide rails.
9 LIFT CAR EQUIPMENT
9.1 Car Platform

The car platform shall be designed, robustly constructed and fire proofed, to adequately
cope with all possible conditions of use.
The platform surface shall be smooth, free from flexing or drumming and isolated from the
main car frame structure by purpose designed sound and vibration isolation mountings.
The front edge of the platform shall be fitted with extruded hard aluminium alloy sill together
with a metal toe guard.
The top side of the platform shall be adjustable and built up with a suitable thickness, not
less than 20mm, of marine grade plywood, smooth and level, ready to accept finish floor
materials.
9.2 Car Frame Construction

Car frames shall be robustly constructed of structural steel members to suit the specified
duty and to form a rigid structure.
The spacing between top and bottom cross members/channels shall be the maximum
permissible within the specified overrun dimensions to ensure maximum vertical spacing of
the car slipper guides. Care should be taken to ensure guide centres do not coincide with rail
fixing centres or rail joint centres.
Where 2:1 roping is used, car sheaves shall be enclosed, acoustically treated and effectively
isolated from the car frame.
9.3 Car Guide Shoes

The car frame shall be fitted with adjustable slipper or roller guide shoes, to ensure sufficient
contact with the guide rails.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Guide shoes shall be located at maximum vertical spacing permissible within the specified
overrun dimensions. Care should be taken to ensure guide centres do not coincide with rail
fixing centres or rail joint centres.
9.4 Car Superstructure

The car superstructures shall be fabricated from timber or mild steel and glass, suitably
braced and stiffened to eliminate flexing or drumming.
The car superstructures shall be effectively isolated from the car frames and shall be free of
any racking, rattles or squeaks under all loading, unloading and operating modes.
Interior finishes for lift cars shall be of the highest standards of materials and finish and
generally as stated in the Schedule of Finishes and Appointments.
Superstructures and finish materials shall be fully protected from when they leave the factory
to when the lifts are accepted at practical completion.
9.5 Car Ventilation

Natural ventilation slots shall be provided at the bottom and top of the side and rear wall
panels and shall be located such that they are not directly visible from within the car.
Ventilation openings shall be fitted with baffles and filters to minimise transmission of air
borne noise and dust to lift car interiors.
Supply and install cooled mechanical ventilation to each lift car and having a sound level
output of 45 dBA maximum measured at 1.5m above the lift car floor, inside car, doors
closed, and car stationary at any floor.
9.6 Car Lighting and Power

Internal car lighting shall be concealed vandal resistant LED down lights mounted flush on
the lift car ceiling, as detailed in the lift car design and finishes detailed and provided by the
lift contractor.
Lighting shall be automatic on/off where when the lift is a rest the lighting switches itself off.
9.7 Emergency Lighting

The lift car shall be provided with emergency lighting to provide internal car illumination in
the event of power failure. The unit shall provide continuous illumination for a period of four
hours and be completely sealed and maintenance free.
The charger shall be solid state, completely automatic, providing fast and float charge
modes of operation. The recovery rate shall be not less than that required by AS1735.
Testing facilities in accordance with AS2293.1 shall also be provided. Controls shall be
located in the lift main panel adjacent to the top landing.
9.8 Car Control Button Panels

The car control panels shall contain the following equipment:
1) Dual coloured (White/Blue) Dupar US95 micro movement floor call buttons
2) emergency alarm button
3) door open button, located adjacent to door jamb
4) door close button
5) regulation notice showing:
• maximum load in number of passengers and kilograms
• year of installation
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

• equipment number
6) independent service key switch
7) emergency telephone call button complete with engraved details of building address
8) car light and fan key switch
9) fire service control
10) Car Position Indicators
Car position indicators shall be in the form of electronic LCD screens display types featuring
minimum 50 mm high characters.
Floor designation numerals and letters shall be capitals and shall be reprogrammable.
Position indication shall be in the form of numerals and/or letters corresponding to the floors
served such that they illuminate brightly when arriving at each floor.
9.9 Emergency Alarm

Provide and install audible lift car alarm.
The alarm shall derive its power source from the lift car emergency lighting unit.
Provide contacts, wiring and junction boxes necessary for extension of the audible alarm to
a remote location.
9.10 Emergency Communications

Emergency telephone shall interface via a non-proprietary standalone wireless
communication gateway (Pixel EM-G4E or equivalent), independent of the building’s
communications system; supplied and installed under the work of this subcontract. The
wireless Gateway solution shall be capable of operating over a minimum of two major
Australian telecommunication mobile networks and include four (4) hour backup power
supply. (International sim cards are not acceptable).
The wireless communication gateway shall be positioned in an optimum location ensuring no

interference from surrounding plant and other communications devices. Supply and install all
necessary communications cabling from the lift car telephone to the wireless gateway.
Whenever the emergency telephone button in the lift car is pressed, the following shall be
activated:
1. the alarm bell shall operate in accordance with statutory requirements.
2. the door open signal to the control system; if the lift is within the door zone the doors
shall re-open if they are operable.
3. after at least three seconds of constant pressure, the hands-free telephone system in
the lift car shall autodial to the nominated location,
Fully programmable two-way hands free auto-dialling telephone system in the lift car,
compatible with the aforementioned wireless gateway shall include:
• Dual LED illuminating ‘AMBER/AMBER’ colour telephone button, to illuminate brighter
to indicate connection to the emergency answering service.
• Loudspeaker volume set to normally produce a sound pressure level 1 m in front of
the speaker of 70 dB(A), adjustable
• Automatic dial out to the lift maintenance contractor’s emergency call centre or other
24 hour manned remote locations,
• Remote lift identification at the lift maintenance contractor’s emergency call centre
• External callers (eg contractor’s emergency call centre) shall be capable of dialling
into the lift car
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

• Automatic self-diagnostic testing and fault reporting, to an independent remote

telephone monitoring system at a user defined interval or at least every three days (in
accordance with EN 81-28:2003) with remote alarm
• Continuous recording all voice communications
• All communications cabling for interfacing with building telephone system to a point
adjacent to the landing Service and Inspection panel shall be included under the
work of this contract. All cabling shall be in accordance with ACMA
Telecommunications Cabling Provider Rules 2014 (CPRs).
An alarm button shall be installed on the underside of the lift car in the vicinity of the pit
refuge space to facilitate the emergency release of personnel trapped in the lift pit.
Whenever the alarm button is activated, a bell shall operate (audible on the landings).
Intercom stations capable of communicating with the phone system inside the lift car shall be
located:
• on top of the lift car,

• in the lift pit
• in the lift service and inspection panel
Ensure timely application in the name of the Principal is made for the provision of telephone
lines supplying the emergency telephone in each lift car. Fees together with the rental
charges shall be payable by the building owner.
9.11 Car Doors

The car doors shall be power operated, stainless steel with replaceable bottom door guides
designed to run silently in the groove of the car sill and prevent the doors from rattling while
the lift is running.
9.12 Power Door Operation

Door operators shall be heavy duty performance type. Door systems shall be designed with
adequate capacity to allow performance times of 125% of the maximum energy levels
permitted by the AS 1735.1. Lift Code.
Both the landing and car doors shall operate automatically and simultaneously. Pre-opening
of doors may be provided.
Door opening and closing speeds and door open dwell times shall be fully adjustable,
allowing for passenger comfort.
The whole door operation shall be accomplished smoothly and quietly without undue
vibration or shock. Door movements shall be cushioned or checked at both limits of travel.
Door motor fuse and overtime protection shall be provided.
9.13 Passenger Protection Device

Protection shall be afforded over the entire width and height of the car door entrance.
The device shall function such that obstruction of the entrance shall hold doors open if in the
open position, or reverse and fully reopen the doors if closing.
The device shall also be provided with the capacity to detect approaching passengers and
re-open if closing.
The device shall be positioned to avoid the risk of damage and shall not intrude on the clear
door opening.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

The passenger protection device shall incorporate a nudging feature, which, after an
adjustable pre-set time, shall cause the doors to close at a reduced speed and sound an
audible buzzer. Such nudging feature to be initiated under any of the following conditions:
1) obstruction of the passenger protection device for an extended period
2) the passenger protection device becoming inoperative for any reason
3) stuck landing button at a floor where the lift is parked
The door open button shall remain operative at all times and upon operation shall reset the
time delay for nudging operation.
Interruption of the passenger protection device shall reduce the door open dwell time to less
than one second once the entrance becomes clear.
9.14 Lift Car Protective Quilting

Supply one (1) sets quilted canvas protective screen of fire retardant construction complete
with hidden fixings.
The fixings shall consist of plastic coated hooks securely fastened to the screen and long
enough to be supported from the top of the side and rear wall panels of the respective car
superstructure. Where glass panels are fitted inside the lift cars, appropriate warning
notices shall be displayed on the protective quilting.
9.15 Equal Access Use

Lifts shall be suitable for use by persons with disabilities and shall comply with the codes
stated in the schedule.
1) Internal lift car dimensions of not less than 1450mm x 2000mm
2) Clear door opening width of not less than 1000mm
3) Lift car floor finished surface shall be firm and non-slip, with a gloss of not more than
30 percent.
4) Levelling accuracy of better than plus or minus 6mm.
5) Landing doors shall remain fully open for not less than six seconds.
6) Landing button panels shall be located in the range of 900-1200 mm above floor level.
7) Car control buttons shall be located in the range of 700-1250 mm above floor level
and be provided with a tactile symbol and Braille equivalent located on the face of the
respective buttons.
8) Handrail adjacent car control panel to be located at 850 to 950 mm from floor level to
top of handrail.
9) Voice annunciation within the lift car
10 LANDING EQUIPMENT
10.1 Landing Doors and Frames

Each landing entrance for the passenger lifts shall be fitted with landing doors and frames of
the two panel side opening type. (2PS)
The front edges of the landing doors shall present a male and female edge to interlock when
closed.
The landing doors and frames shall be manufactured from prime commercial stainless steel
suitably treated to prevent corrosion. Door frame jamb and head sections shall be formed to
a selected profile, the head flush with the jamb. Joint lines shall be visible between the head
and the jamb.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Supply and fix mild steel forming strips to the lift well side of all door frames to facilitate
building in by the Builder without entering the lift-well.
Door panels shall be perfectly flat without sharp edges dents or dishing and constructed to
withstand severe service conditions.
Sight guards, where fitted, shall be finished in the same material as the doors and shall be
provided and attached to the leading edges of door panels and shall be equal in height to
the clear opening height.
Landing doors shall be fitted with removable guides to slide silently in the groove of the
landing sills.
Protection of landing door and frame finishes up to the time of practical completion shall be
provided.
Landing door closers shall be based on an air cord connected counterweight system and
shall slide silently in enclosed guide tubes fitted with over travel stops.
Clearances between the landing door vanes and pick up rollers and the opposite car door
member shall be tight fitting during door opening and closing cycles. The fit shall only be
reduced on the coupler mechanism in the final closing sequence. In all cases, the fit shall
not enable slop between the car and landing door sets.
Emergency door unlocking devices shall be provided at all landings.
10.2 Landing Sills

The landing sills shall be constructed of extruded hard aluminium alloy.
Sills shall be installed flush with the finished floor level.
Supply and fix all necessary support angles, brackets, bolts and hardware together with mild
steel forming strips under sills to avoid slurry entering lift-wells when sills are grouted in.
10.3 Landing Call Buttons

At each landing served provide one landing button unit.
Units at terminal floors shall contain one call button and units located on intermediate floors
shall contain two call buttons.
Buttons shall be the micro movement type with integral illumination to indicate that a call has
been registered. Buttons shall be Dupar US95 range and be compliant with the disabled
requirements.
The fireman's service recall key switch shall be mounted in the landing unit on the Ground
floor level.
Face plates shall be extended to include the prescribed engraved fire notice in compliance
with the Regulations.
Units shall be constructed and installed such that no light leakage occurs.
Units shall be suitably sized or treated, e.g., steel plates behind, to comply with local
Building Regulations in relation to maintaining the fire rating of lift-well.
10.4 Landing Position Indicators

Landing direction of travel indicators shall be located above each landing entrances in
accordance with AS1735 part 12.
Tone adjustable audible electronic tones shall also be provided one (1) tone for up and two
(2) tones for down.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

The units shall be constructed and installed such that no light leakage occurs.
Units shall be suitably sized or treated, e.g., steel plates behind, to comply with local
Building Regulations in relation to maintaining the fire rating of lift-well.
11 CONTROL SYSTEM DETAILS
11.1 General Control System

Provide a microprocessor based control systems compatible with the type of equipment
specified and commensurate with the efficient operation of the lift system within the building
for the lifts.
The power control systems shall be the solid state type that controls and varies the voltage
supply to the lift motors to provide step-less acceleration, smooth deceleration and a soft
final stop.
The systems shall control acceleration, deceleration and full speed running to preset
patterns.
11.2 Floor Finding

Floor levelling shall be positive and correctly maintained irrespective of varying load
conditions.
Floor finding shall be designed so that the registration of late calls does not interfere with the
normal deceleration of the car. Means of adjustment shall be provided to compensate for
wear on moving parts where this affects the accuracy of the equipment.
The equipment installed in the well for this purpose shall be independent of all other
functions and shall be smooth and quiet in its operation.
11.3 Floor Levelling

Floor levelling shall be obtained in a step-less manner direct to the floor in either direction
under all load conditions.
The levelling equipment shall be silent in operation and of a type which does not use
mechanically operated switches in the well.
A low speed re-levelling feature shall be provided to maintain correct level if for any reason
level within guaranteed tolerances is not achieved in the initial approach to floor or while
loading or unloading at floor level.
11.4 Operation
On automatic control, the method of operation for the lift shall be as described below.
Each landing call shall be cancelled immediately the car commences to slow down in
answer to the call.
Car call preference shall be provided and shall be maintained at least until commencement
of the door closing sequence.
The lift shall park with its doors closed.
11.5 Independent Service

The use of a three position key operated automatic, independent and park service switch
provided in one car operating panel shall:
1) remove the lift from automatic control whereby it does not respond to or cancel
registered landing or homing calls
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

2) park the lift with doors open

3) allow car button registration to be made in the normal manner and shall set the
direction of travel
4) operation of the key shall cause the doors to close and the lift to respond to a
registered car call, all car calls shall be cancelled upon opening or reopening of the
doors
5) not cancel car button security where provided
The key switch shall be of the restricted high security type, have a key combination similar,
but different, to other key operated switches used on this or other installations, and key shall
be removable in the automatic and park positions.
11.6 Fireman's Service

11.6.1 Car fireman's Service
Provide one Fireman's service key operated switch in each lift car in compliance with the Lift
Code and local Regulations.
11.6.2 Fireman's Recall
Provide a Fireman's recall key operated switch in the landing button unit at the recall floor
suitably designated and removable in both positions.
The switch shall have two positions and when turned to the off position shall cause the lift to
function normally under the last selected method of operation. When turned to the on
position shall cause the lift, if not on inspection or fireman's service, to return non-stop to the
recall floor and park with doors open.
The non-stop sequence for the lift shall be as follows:
1) when travelling toward the recall floor, shall bypass all registered car and landing calls
and proceed directly to the recall floor
2) when accelerating in response to a registered car or landing call, shall firstly
respond to this call and then proceed directly to the recall floor
3) when travelling away from the recall shall stop at the next floor within its normal
slow down distance, reverse and then proceed directly to the recall floor.
Under these conditions the doors shall not open until the lift has arrived at the recall floor
During this operation, the car door passenger protection device shall be inoperative,
registered car button calls shall cancel and remain inoperative.
The key switches for this and the Fireman's Service switch located in the car shall be of the
registered restricted high security type.
A minimum of one copy of this key suitably labelled shall be provided to the Fire Brigade.
12 SOFTWARE
12.1 General
Supply all equipment and software for the project capable of handling and interpreting
without error, time, day and year dates including leap years, without the necessity of human
intervention, i.e., free of any date related bug or issue.
Ensure that all equipment and components including software, firmware and controls
conforms to the requirements of Australian Standard HB104 or British Standard PD2000.
Where modifications are made to existing systems as part of the works, the Contractor shall
provide certification of the systems compliance with these clauses prior to practical
completion of the works.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

Access to control and drive motor parameter settings shall be free, without project or
manufacturer specific passwords, flash card re-initialisation or run timer menu shutdowns.
Where lifts are controlled via a programmable logic controller, then the installing contractor
shall provide the diagnostic tool, the programme and schematic ladder diagram on CD.
These shall be handed over when the lift is commissioned and accepted by the Owner.
13 ELECTRICAL
13.1 Wiring General

All wiring shall be carried out using PVC insulated cabling except for solid state logic wiring.
Cables shall be of sufficient size to prevent excessive voltage drop and shall terminate in
lugs or terminals.
Cables carrying high voltages and frequencies shall be screened and separated from signal
reference cables and other circuits susceptible to spurious signals.
13.2 Machine Area Wiring

All machine area wiring shall be run in heavy duty conduit or ducting systems installed to
ensure rigidity and located to avoid damage.
Connection between ductwork and other equipment where vibration may occur or
adjustment is required shall be by flexible piping or conduit.
13.3 Lift-Well Wiring

Lift-well wiring shall be run in metal or heavy duty plastic conduit or ducting systems to the
requirement of the Statutory Authority.
Provision shall be made to accommodate building shrinkage without distorting/buckling of
conduits/ducting.
Where conduits are used, separate inspection type draw-in boxes shall be provided at
maximum 15m centres.
13.4 Travelling Cables

The travelling cables shall be fire and moisture resistant lift type in accordance with AS1979.
The number of cores used in each multicore cable shall be such that at least 10% spare
cores are provided. One twisted pair and one coaxial cable shall be spare.
Telephone, security and intercommunication cables shall be individually shielded and/or
coaxial type as required.
Cores suitable for security systems shall be included in the travelling cables.
Travelling cables shall hang free of twists or kinks and be installed to avoid strain being
placed on conductors or terminals.
Appropriate means shall be taken to avoid abrasion or damage.
13.5 Equipment protection

13.5.1 Adequate protection shall be provided for comprehensive overload, under voltage, and
phase failure, as appropriate, for the specified lift drive and control system.
Protection shall be arranged such that lifts return to normal operation upon restoration of
correct supply.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

13.5.2 General
All equipment and/or appliances provided under this specification shall not cause electrical
interference to any other equipment within the building. If the inherent characteristics of the
lift equipment are such that interference is possible, provide efficient devices capable of
suppressing the interference.
13.5.3 Limitation of Disturbances
Solid state direct drive units shall be isolated electrically from the main supply by an isolation
filter transformer to prevent high frequency harmonic feedback. A ripple filter shall be
incorporated to reduce harmonic distortion to the machine.
Limit the overall voltage distortion factor at the lift electrical switchboard to a maximum of
3%.
Precautions shall include compensation for the following:
1) harmonic distortion
2) flicker
3) line notching
Installation with an overall voltage distortion factor exceeding 3% will not be accepted.
13.6 Electromagnetic Interference

Lift power and/or control systems shall not create electromagnetic energy, either radiated or
through electrical wiring, that interferes with other apparatus.
9155SB-SE- 119657sb-0 12 January 2021

EXTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE
PROJECT PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY SCHOOL PROJECT NO. 19.06 DATE OF ISSUE 23 December 2020 REVISION 0
This schedule is to be read in conjunction with the drawings and specifications. Submit control samples of all finishes for approval and keep on site once approved.
ELEMENT MATERIAL FINISH MANUFACTURER COLOUR REFERENCE NOTES
Site
Carpark Bitumen Bitumen - Black - -
Paving - - - - - Refer Landscape Schedules
Walls
Masonry Walls (Brick) Clay Brick Face Brick Midland Brick Opal Blush 290x90x162mm Rolled joints to match existing
Refer to drawings for coursing detail
Masonry Walls (Brick) Clay Brick Face Brick Midland Brick Opal Blush 290x90x76mm Rolled joints to match existing
Refer to drawings for coursing detail
Retaining Walls Clay Brick Face Brick Midland Brick Opal Blush 290x90x162mm Rolled joints to match existing
Steel Sheet Cladding Zincalume Custom Orb Colourbond Bluescope Steel Surfmist Spandek -
Masonry Walls (Brick) Cement Render Sand Finish render with Dulux Acratex To be selected - -
Textured Paint coating
Fibre Cement (Walls) Compressed Fibre Low Sheen acrylic paint Dulux Weathershield Colorbond Surfmist C1 -
Cement sheeting
Fibre Cement (Walls) Compressed Fibre Low Sheen acrylic paint Dulux Weathershield Feature Colour TBS TBS -
Cement sheeting
Steel Structure
Steel Columns Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - -
Steel Beams Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - -
Steel PFC Fascia Beam Steel Gloss Polyurethane Dulux Weathermax HBR Colorbond Basalt C30 Surface Treatment to drawing S1001
Note S23 Type B.
Weathermax HBR top coats to Dulux
specification.
Doors & Windows
Door & Window Frames Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Basalt 260-7473S Satin -
Doors (Swing doors) Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Surfmist 272-1137S Satin -
Doors (Bi Fold doors) Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Basalt 260-7473S Satin -
Doors Timber Semi-Gloss Enamel Paint Dulux Aquanamel Colorbond Surfmist C1 -
Door Frames Steel Semi-Gloss Enamel Paint Dulux Aquanamel Colorbond Basalt C30 -
Page 1 of 3
Doors & Frames (Electrical) Timber / Steel Semi-Gloss Enamel Paint Dulux Aquanamel To match feature wall TBS -
colour TBS
Window Awning Heka Hood Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Basalt 260-7473S Satin -
Security Screens Stainless Steel Powdercoat - Black - -
Security Screen Frames Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Basalt 260-7473S Satin -
Roller Shutter Steel Powdercoat B & D Roller Doors Dulux Surfmist 272-1137S Satin -
Glazing
Vision Glass - Comfort Plus Viridian Clear - Refer Door & Window Schedule
Vision Glass - Comfort Plus Viridian Neutral - Refer Door & Window Schedule
Louvres & Grilles
Wall Grilles Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Surfmist 272-1137S Satin -
Soffit
Soffit Lining Fibre Cement Low Sheen Acrylic Paint Dulux Weathershield Colourbond Surfmist C1 -
Soffit Lining Zinclaume Colourbond Australian Ceiling Surfmist Perforated -
Systems Corruline
Roof
Roof Sheeting Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel Surfmist Spandek profile -
Capping and Flashings Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel To match roof - -
Translucent roof sheeting Fibreglass reinforced - Ampleite Opal Wonderglas GC FS Firecheck 2400
polyester
Eaves Gutter Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel Basalt - -
Rainwater Downpipes Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - -
Miscellaneous
Balustrade framing & Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - -
handrails
Screens UWB5050 Aluminium Powdercoat Bluechip Woodstock UW2311 -
Battens
Balusters UWB5050 Aluminium Powdercoat Bluechip Woodstock UW2311 -
Battens
Page 2 of 3
Bag Racks Compact Laminate Carbide Finish Laminex Sentry Alfresco Compact -
Laminate
Exposed Concrete Structure
Concrete Columns Concrete Class 2 finish - Portland grey cement - Fosroc Niticote SN502 Clear matt
sealer
Concrete Beams Concrete Class 2 finish - Portland grey cement - Fosroc Niticote SN502 Clear matt
sealer
Concrete Soffit Concrete Textured Paint Dulux Acratex Colourbond Surfmist C1 -
Concrete Balcony Floor Concrete Screed Wood float finish to - Portland grey cement - Dulux Avista water based sealer.
P4/R11 slip resistance
END OF SCHEDULE
Page 3 of 3
INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE
PROJECT PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY SCHOOL- STAGE 1 PROJECT NO. 19.06 DATE OF ISSUE 23 December 2020 REVISION 0
CODE ITEM MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION COLOUR NOTES IMAGE
AP- Acoustic Wall Panels

AP-01 Acoustic Wall Panel Autex Quietspace 50 Koala Vertiface fabric covering to panel face & edges
AP-02 Acoustic Wall Panel Autex Quietspace 50 Wasabi Vertiface fabric covering to panel face & edges
AP-03 Acoustic Wall Panel Autex Quietspace 50 Porcelain Vertiface fabric covering to panel face & edges
BL- Blinds
BL-01 Roller Blind Vertilux Metalo Mettalised Gunmetal
BR- Brickwork
BR-01 Face Brickwork Midland Brick 290 x 90 x 162 Opal Blush Rolled joints.
CA- Carpet
CA-01 Carpet Tile Interface Cubic 1151 Dimension 010 500 x 500 tile in random pattern
CA-02 Carpet Tile Interface Cubic Colours 1153 Lima 022 500 x 500 tile in random pattern
CA-03 Carpet Tile Interface Cubic Colours 1153 Kaleidoscope 500 x 500 tile in random pattern
008
CE- Ceiling
CE-01 Ceiling Tile Armstrong Utlima White Prefinished in exposed T-Bar Ceiling
CE-02 Flush plasterboard CSR Gyprock Flush Plasterboard PA-04
CE-03 Perforated Plasterboard CSR Gyprock Gyptone PA-04 12mm square hole
CS – Concrete Sealer
CS-01 Concrete Floor Sealer Fosroc Nitroflor 150 HP-FC Grey
CS-02 Concrete Column Sealer Foscoc Niticote SN502 Clear matt
FA-Fabric
FA-01 Pinboard fabric Ecoustic Velour Panel Alpaca
FA-02 Pinboard fabric Ecoustic Velour Panel Putty
FA-03 Pinboard fabric Ecoustic Velour Panel Flint
FA-04 Pinboard fabric Ecoustic Velour Panel Herb
HD- Handles
HD-01 Cabinetry Handle Hafele Studio 138mm D-Pull Brushed SS
Page 1 of 3
HD-02 Cabinetry Handle Hafele 155.00.270 mm Flush Matt Chrome

handle Plated
LA- Laminates
LA-01 Whiteboard Laminate Formica Magnetic Laminate Glossy White
9672
LA-02 Cabinetry Laminex Laminate Stormcloud
140
Natural finish
LA-03 Cabinetry Laminex Laminate Raw Birchply
8910
Natural Finish
LA-04 Toilet Cubicles Laminex Compact Laminate Raw Birchply
8910
Natural Finish
MA- Entry Mats
MA-01 Door Mat Forbo Coral Brush Hurricane Grey
5721
PA- Paints
PA-01 General wall paint Dulux Wash & Wear Low Natural White
Sheen Acrylic SW1F4
PA-02 Door, Door Frames & Dulux Aquanamel Semi- Natural White
Trims Gloss Acrylic SW1F4
PA-03 Door, Door Frames & Dulux Aquanamel Semi- Basalt C30
Trims Gloss Acrylic
PA-04 Ceiling paint Dulux Ceiling White White
PA-05 Door & Door Frames Dulux Aquanamel Semi- Feature colour
(Electrical Cupboards) Gloss Acrylic TBS
PC- Powdercoats
PC-01 Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Basalt 260-7473S Satin
Page 2 of 3
PC-02 Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Surfmist 272-1137S Satin

RF- Resilient Finishes
RF-01 Floor Vinyl Forbo Surestep Wood Natural Oak Slip Resistance R10
18942
SF- Solid Finishes
SF-01 General Benchtops Corian 12mm/6mm Glacier White Heat moulded seams –no visible joints
SK- Skirtings
SK-01 Skirting (General) Gunnersens Bevelled MDF PA-01 92 x 18mm
SK-02 Skirting Tile Johnson Tiles Waringa Grey Micro 300 X 150mm, Slip Resistance R11/P4
TF- Floor Tiles
TF-01 Floor Tile- General Johnson Tiles Waringa Grey Micro 300 X 300mm, Slip Resistance R11/P4
TR- Trims
TR-01 Wall tile/ wall fabric / DTA Australia Contempo Edge Trim Aluminium Depth to suit wall tile or fabric depth
wall laminate trim
TR-02 Floor Vinyl Expansion Armstrong X-pand Grey
Joint
TW- Wall Tiles
TW-01 Wall Tile Johnson Tiles Spectrum Rhino Gloss 197 x 97 nom. Brick stretcher bond pattern.
Grout Ardex EG 15 – Colour Misty Grey
TR-01 to exposed edges
TW-02 Wall Tile Johnson Tiles Spectrum White Gloss 197 x 97 nom. Brick stretcher bond pattern.
Grout Ardex EG 15 – Colour Misty Grey
TR-01 to exposed edges
WL - Wall Lining
WL-01 Impact resistant Refer specification Refer specification PA-01 -
plasterboard
WL-02 Plaster Thistle Multi-finish PA-01
END OF SHEDULE
Page 3 of 3
INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE ROOM BY ROOM
ROOM WALLS FLOOR CEILING DOORS WINDOWS FITMENTS NOTES

FACE FINISH FLOOR SKIRTING FINISH FRAME DOOR SILL FRAME TREATMENTS
A-G01 NW - RF-01 - CE-01 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - Bifold Doors – PC-01

Activity Area NE WL-01 MA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01 PA-04
FA-01
LA-01
SE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - TR-01 to TW-01 edges
PA-01
TW-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - Refer
PA-01 Cabinetry
FA-01 Schedule
Activity Area NE WL-01 MA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - Refer -
PA-01 PA-04 Cabinetry
FA-01 Schedule
SE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - TR-01 to TW-01 edges
PA-01
TW-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
FA-01
LA-01
Education NE WL-01 MA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
Development PA-01 PA-04
Centre FA-01
SE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
PA-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
Page 1 of 15

FA-01
LA-01
A-G04 NW WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - - -
Office PA-01 CE-02
NE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PA-04 - - - -
PA-01
SE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
SW - - PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 PC-01
A-G05 NW WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - - LA-04 Toilet cubicle panels &
Toilets PA-01 PA-04 doors
NE WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - - Washplane Basin SF-01
PA-01
SE WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
A-G06 NW WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 - - - - - - TR-01 to TW-02 edges
UAT 1 PA-01 PA-04
TW-01
NE WL-02 SK-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - -
PA-01
SE WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-02 SK-02 - - - -
PA-01
TW-01
A-G07 NW WL-02 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-02 - - - - -
Store PA-01 PA-04
NE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
Page 2 of 15

SE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
A-G08 NW WL-02 RF-01 - CE-02 - - - - - - -
Comms PA-01 PA-04
NE WL-02 - - - - - - - -
PA-01
SE WL-02 - - - - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-02 - PA-02 PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
A-G09 NW WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - - LA-04 Toilet cubicle panels &
Toilets PA-01 PA-04 doors
NE WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - - Washplane Basin SF-01
PA-01
SE WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
A-G10 NW BR-01 CS-01 - CE-02 - - - - - - -
Electrical PA-01 PA-04
NE BR-01 - PA-05 PA-05 - - - - -
PA-01
SE BR-01 - - - - - - - -
PA-01
SW BR-01 - - - - - - - -
PA-01
A-G11 NW WL-02 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-03 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - TR-01 to FA-01/LA-01 edges
Kitchen PA-01 MA-01 PA-04
Page 3 of 15

NE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PA-03 PA-032 - - - -

PA-01
LA-01
FA-04
SE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - Refer
PA-01 Cabinetry
SF-01 Schedule
SW WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - Refer
PA-01 Cabinetry
SF-01 Schedule
A-G12 NW WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 - - - - - - Toilet cubicle interior finishes to
Staff WC PA-01 PA-04 match.
TW-02
NE WL-02 SK-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - -
PA-01
SE WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-02 SK-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - -
PA-01
Page 4 of 15

A-G13 NW WL-02 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -

Office PA-01 PA-04
NE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - -
PA-01
SE WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
A-G14 NW BR-01 CS-01 - - - - - - - - -
Trolley Store NE BR-01 - - - - - - - -
SE BR-01 - PC-02 - - - - - -
SW BR-01 - - - - - - - -
B-02 N WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - - -
Cleaner PA-01 PA-04
E WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
TW-02
S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - Refer -
PA-01 Cabinetry
Schedule
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-03 N WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
Office PA-01 CE-02
E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PA-04 - - - - - -
PA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - PC-01 BL-01 -
PA-01
Page 5 of 15

B-04 N - CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -

Office E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - PC-01 BL-01 -
PA-01 PA-04
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-05 N WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - - -
Staff Study PA-01 MA-01 CE-02
E WL-01 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 PA-04 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - -
PA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - -
PA-01
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - Refer
PA-01 Cabinetry
SF-01 Schedule
B-06 N WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - - -
Office PA-01 PA-04
E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 BL-01 -
PA-01 (Including door)
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-07 N WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - - -
Office PA-01 PA-04
E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 BL-01 -
PA-01 (Including door)
Page 6 of 15

W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-08 N WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - - 3 No. AP-01panels to N wall
Meeting Room PA-01 PA-04
AP-01
E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - PA-02 PC-01 BL-01 -
PA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W - SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - -
B-09 N WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 - - - - - -
WC PA-01 PA-04
E WL-02 SK-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - -
PA-01
S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
TW-02
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-10 N WL-02 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - Refer
Parent Room PA-01 PA-04 Cabinetry
SF-01 Schedule
E WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
S WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - -
PA-01
B-G11 N WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - - Toilet cubicle interior finishes to
Toilets PA-01 PA-04 match.
Page 7 of 15

E WL-02 SK-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - - Washplane Basin SF-01

PA-01
S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
TW-02
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-G12 N WL-02 RF-01 - CE-02 - - - - - - -
Comms PA-01 PA-04
E WL-02 - - - - - - - -
PA-01
S WL-02 - - - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 - PA-02 PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
B-G13 N WL-02 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - - -
Store PA-01 PA-04
E WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PA-03 PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01 PA-02 PA-02
S WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
PA-01
S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
Page 8 of 15

B-G15 N BR-01 CS-01 - CE-02 PA-05 PA-05 - - - - -

Electrical E BR-01 - PA-04 - - - - - - -
S BR-01 - - - - - - - -
W BR-01 - - - - - -
B-G16 N WL-02 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-03 PA-03 PA-03 - - - - TR-01 to FA-01/LA-01 edges
Kitchen PA-01 MA-01 PA-04
LA-01
FA-03
E WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - -
PA-01
S WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - Refer
PA-01 Cabinetry
SF-01 Schedule
W WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - Refer
PA-01 Cabinetry
SF-01 Schedule
Staff WC PA-01 PA-04 match.
E WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
TW-02
S WL-02 SK-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
PA-01
Page 9 of 15

S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-G19 N WL-01 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - - -
Activity Area PA-01 MA-01 CE-02
FA-01 PA-04
LA-01
E - - PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - Bifold Doors – PC-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - Refer -
PA-01 Cabinetry
FA-01 Schedule
W WL-02 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - TR-01 to TW-01 edges
PA-01
TW-01
B-G20 N WL-01 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - Refer -
Activity Area PA-01 MA-01 CE-02 Cabinetry
FA-01 PA-04 Schedule
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
FA-01
LA-01
PA-01
TW-01
B-G21 N WL-01 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - Refer -
Activity Area PA-01 MA-01 CE-02 Cabinetry
FA-01 PA-04 Schedule
Page 10 of 15

S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
FA-01
LA-01
PA-01
TW-01
A-F01 NE - CA-01 - CE-01 PC-01 PC-01 - - - Refer LA-01 to sliding operable wall
General Learning MA-01 CE-02 Cabinetry
Area PA-04 Schedule
SE WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
PA-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - TR-01 to FA-01 edges
PA-01
FA-01
NW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - -
PA-01
LA-01
A-F02 NE - CA-01 - CE-01 PC-01 PC-01 - - - Refer LA-01 to sliding operable wall
Area PA-04 Schedule
SE WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
PA-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - LA-01 to sliding operable wall
PA-01
FA-01
NW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - -
PA-01
LA-01
Page 11 of 15

A-F03 NE WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - Refer -

General Learning PA-01 MA-01 CE-02 Cabinetry
Area FA-01 PA-04 Schedule
SE WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
PA-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - LA-01 to sliding operable wall
PA-01
FA-01
NW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - -
PA-01
LA-01
A-F04 NE WL-01 CA-01# SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - - # CA-01; 60% of area comprising
Breakout / PA-01 CA-02* CE-02 perimeter boarder and random
Activity Area SE WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - distribution within boarder.
PA-01 *CA-02; 40% of area random
LA-01 distribution within boarder.
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PA-02 PA-02 - - - -
PA-01 PA-03 PA-02
NW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - PA-02 PC-01 - -
PA-01
A-F05 NE WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-02 - - - - -
Store / Work PA-01 PA-04
Room SE WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
NW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - PA-02 PC-01 - - -
PA-01
A-F06 NE WL-01 RF-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 - - - - - - -
Store PA-01 PA-04
SE WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
Page 12 of 15

PA-01
SW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PA-03 PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
NW WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
B-F01 N WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 - - - - - - LA-04 Toilet cubicle panels &
Male Toilets PA-01 PA-04 doors
E WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - - Washplane Basin SF-01
PA-01
S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-02 PC-01 PC-02 - - - -
PA-01
B-F02 N WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 - - - - - - -
Staff WC PA-01 PA-04
TW-02
E WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
S WL-02 SK-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
B-F03 N WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-03 - - - - -
UAT PA-01 PA-04
E WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
TW-02
S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
Page 13 of 15

B-F04 N WL-02 TF-01 SK-02 CE-02 - - - - - - LA-04 Toilet cubicle panels &
Female Toilets PA-01 PA-04 doors
E WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - - Washplane Basin SF-01
PA-01
S WL-02 SK-02 - - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-02 SK-02 PC-01 PC-02 - - - -
PA-01
B-F05 N - CA-01 - CE-01 PC-01 PC-01 - - - Refer LA-01 to sliding operable wall
Area PA-04 Schedule
E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - -
PA-01
LA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - TR-01 to FA-01 edges
PA-01
FA-01
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
PA-01
B-F06 N - CA-01 - CE-01 PC-01 PC-01 - - - Refer LA-01 to sliding operable wall
Area PA-04 Schedule
E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - -
PA-01
LA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - LA-01 to sliding operable wall
PA-01
FA-01
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
PA-01
Page 14 of 15

B-F07 N WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - Refer -

General Learning PA-01 MA-01 CE-02 Cabinetry
Area FA-01 PA-04 Schedule
E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - -
PA-01
LA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - - - LA-01 to sliding operable wall
PA-01
FA-01
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-02 - PC-01 - - -
PA-01
B-F08 N WL-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-02 CE-02 PA-03 PA-02 - - - - -
Store / Work PA-01 PA-04
Room E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - PA-01 PC-01 - - -
PA-01
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - -
PA-01
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 - - - - - - -
PA-01
B-B09 N WL-01 CA-01# SK-01/PA-02 CE-01 - - - - - - # CA-01; 60% of area comprising
Breakout / PA-01 CA-03* CE-02 perimeter boarder and random
Activity Area E WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PA-04 - - PA-02 PC-01 - - distribution within boarder.
PA-01 *CA-03; 40% of area random
S WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PA-02 PA-02 - - - - distribution within boarder.
PA-01 PA-03 PA-02
W WL-01 SK-01/PA-02 PC-01 PC-01 - - -
PA-01
LA-01
END OF SHEDULE
Page 15 of 15
INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE CABINETRY
PROJECT PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY SCHOOL-STAGE 1 PROJECT NO. 19.06 DATE OF ISSUE 23 December 2020 REVISION 0
ROOM ITEM PLINTH CUPBOARDS BENCH TOP OPEN SHEVLVING EDGES FRAMING NOTES
INTERNALS FACE HANDLES SHELVES SURROUND
A-G01, A-G02, Cupboard LA-02 White LA-03 HD-02 - LA-02 LA-02 ABS - Face matched ABS edging
B-G19, B-G20, Melamine ABS Multiplex Ply ABS edging
B-G21 to LA-03
Activity Area
A-G11, B-G16 Kitchen LA-02 White LA-02 HD-01 SF-01 - - ABS - Face matched ABS edging
Kitchen cupboards Melamine SF-01 splashback
Kitchen - White LA-03 HD-01 - - - ABS - ABS Multiplex Ply ABS edging
Overhead Melamine
Cupboards
Laundry LA-02 White LA-02 HD-01 SF-01 - - ABS - Face matched ABS edging
Cupboard Melamine SF-01 splashback
Laundry - White LA-03 HD-01 - - - ABS - ABS Multiplex Ply ABS edging
Overhead Melamine
Cupboards
B-G01 Wall Shelf - - LA-02 - - - - ABS - Face matched ABS edging
Cleaner
B-G05 Kitchen LA-02 White LA-02 HD-01 SF-01 - - ABS - Face matched ABS edging
Staff Study cupboards Melamine SF-01 splashback
Kitchen - White LA-03 HD-01 - - - ABS - ABS Multiplex Ply ABS edging
Overhead Melamine
Cupboards
B-G10 Cupboards LA-02 White LA-02 HD-01 SF-01 - - ABS - Face matched ABS edging
Parent Room Melamine SF-01 splashback
A-F01, A-F02, A- Cupboard LA-02 White LA-03 HD-01 - - - ABS - ABS Multiplex Ply ABS edging
F03, B-F05, B- Melamine
F06, B-F07
General
Learning Area
END OF SHEDULE
Page 1 of 1
ATC WILLIAMS PTY LTD
Perth
t +61 8 9213 1600
1141 Hay Street,
West Perth, WA, 6005
atcwilliams.com.au
ABN 64 005 931 288
Our Ref: 120118.01LR01 Rev0

22 July 2020
BPA Engineering
460 Roberts Road
SUBIACO WA 6008
ATTENTION: Long Truong
Dear Long,
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION – PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY

SCHOOL REDEVELOPMENT, SOUTHERN RIVER
1 INTRODUCTION
This report presents the results of a geotechnical investigation carried out at the Providence
Christian College Primary School in Southern River. The plans provided indicate that a northern
portion of the existing Primary School site located to the northwest of the existing Administration
building will be demolished and replaced with four new double storey Primary Teaching Block
buildings. A new covered Piazza area is proposed to be constructed in the middle. In addition
to this, several car parking areas are also proposed to be constructed to the north and west of
the proposed building area.
The investigation was requested by BPA Engineering.
The objectives of this investigation were to ascertain the following:
 Subsurface conditions and groundwater levels (if encountered);
 Site classification in accordance with AS 2870 [1];
 Site subsoil class in accordance with AS 1170.4 [2];
 Site preparation requirements (earthworks) and construction considerations.
 Footing design criteria including allowable bearing pressures for pad and strip
footings.
 Subgrade CBR for flexible pavement design,
 Soil permeability and suitability of site for on-site disposal of stormwater (if granular
soils are encountered).
Terms of reference for this investigation were provided in ATC Williams proposal 120118.01P01
dated 9 June 2020. Authorisation to proceed was received from Long Truong of BPA
Engineering in an e-mail dated 26 June 2020.
2 SITE DESCRIPTION AND GEOLOGY
The study site is located on the western side of Furley Road in Southern River and has a total
area of approximately 14.5 ha.
G:\Synergy\Projects\120\120118 Providence Christian College PS\01 Site

Investigation\Documents\R01\Text\120118.01LR01 Rev0.docx
At the time of the investigation, the proposed building area was occupied by several existing single
storey Primary School buildings (which will be demolished) surrounded by paving and several
small garden bed areas. Two existing car park areas were also located to the east and to the
northwest of the proposed building area.
The available geological map for the area [3] indicates the site to be underlain by thin Bassendean
sand overlying clayey soils of the Guildford Formation.
The Perth groundwater atlases (1st and 2nd Editions [4],[5]) indicate groundwater levels at the site
to be between 24.5 m AHD and 23 m AHD, respectively.
The site surface elevation is estimated to be approximately 26 m AHD.
3 SCOPE OF WORKS
Due to the limited access to the proposed building area, only the Stage 1 investigation was
carried out. The fieldwork was carried out on 9 July 2020 and comprised:
 Dial Before You Dig underground service search for the site and engagement of the
underground service locator to clear the proposed CPT and HA borehole locations of
any underground services (undertaken on the 8 July 2020).
 Four electric friction cone penetrometer tests (CPTs) (located at the front portion and
rear portion of the site), advanced to depths of between 4.4 m (CPT04) and 7.6 m
(CPT03).
 Three hand auger boreholes (HA01-HA03) (located within the proposed building
areas) advanced to depths of 1.9 m (HA1), 1.8 m (HA2), and 0.7 m (HA03) to visually
assess subsurface conditions and obtain samples for laboratory testing.
 Excavation of two shallow test pits located in the proposed car parking areas at the
northern portion of the site to obtain samples for the Standard compaction and
soaked CBR testing.
 Four Perth Sand Penetrometer (PSP) tests, one adjacent to each borehole and
shallow test pit, to a depth 1.05 m to determine the relative density of the subgrade.
On complete of the excavations, all boreholes and shallow test pits were backfilled and levelled.
4 LABORATORY TESTING
The following laboratory tests were carried out on soil samples recovered from selected
borehole and test pit locations across the site:
 Particle Size Distribution 1 no.
 pH/SO4 for concrete durability 1 no.
 Standard Compaction 1 no.
 Soaked CBR @ 98 % SMDD 1 no.
5 RESULTS OF THE INVESTIGATION
5.1 Detailed Results
The detailed results of the investigation are presented as follows:
 The test locations are indicated on Figure 1.
 A geotechnical Subsurface Cross section “Section A-A” in Figure 2.
22 July 2020 Page 2 of 7 120118.01LR01 Rev0

 The CPT test results are provided in Appendix A
 The borehole logs (including PSP test results) and photographs in Appendix B.
 The laboratory test results are provided in Appendix C.
5.2 Summary of Ground Conditions
The subsurface conditions at the site comprised:
Topsoil: A thin layer of loose, fine and medium, brown sand with trace silt and grass roots
was encountered in all hand auger boreholes
Fill: A layer of medium dense to dense yellow brown sand material was encountered
in all hand auger locations, below the topsoil to depths of approximately 0.8 m
below ground level (BGL).
Sand: Dense fine and medium, pale grey sand was encountered in all hand auger
locations to depths of up to and beyond 1.9m below the ground level.
The CPT probes (CPT1-CPT4) located in the proposed building area, indicate
the presence of dense sand in all CPT locations. A localised area of medium
dense sand was encountered in CPT01 and CPT03 at depth of 3.5 to 4.5 m below
ground level (BGL).
Groundwater: Groundwater was encountered in all CPT locations (but CPT02) at depths of
approximately 3.4m (CPT01) to 3.7m (CPT04) below ground level (BGL).
6 LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
Selected soil samples recovered from hand auger boreholes and test pit locations were submitted
for laboratory classification testing.
The results of a Particle Size Distribution test carried out on a sample sand from HA1, located
within the proposed building area, are summarised in TABLE 1.
TABLE 1: PARTICLE SIZE TEST RESULTS
Hole ID Depth % Fines % Sand % Gravel USC

(m) Class
HA03 0.4 – 0.7 2% 98% 0% SP
The results of compaction and soaked CBR testing are summarised in TABLE 2.
TABLE 2: COMPACTION AND SOAKED CBR RESULTS
Hole ID Depth(m) CBR* SMDD OMC USC Class

(%) (t/m3) (%)
TP01 0.2 – 0.4 14% 1.72 13.5% SP
* 98 % SMDD
A soil sample obtained from HA03 (0.4 – 0.7 m) was assessed for the purpose of soil exposure
classification with respect to concrete durability. The results of pH and SO 4 are summarised in
TABLE 3 on the following page.

TABLE 3: SOIL pH AND SULFATE CONTENT
Hole ID Depth (m) pH Sulphates SO4 (%) Soil Conditions
HA03 0.4 – 0.7 6.8 <0.001% A1
7 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
7.1 Site Classification
After site preparations are carried out in accordance with Section 7.3, the site is considered to
be a Class A site in accordance with AS 2870-2011 [1].
7.2 Site subsoil classification
The site sub-soil class is Ce (shallow soil site) in accordance with AS 1170.4-2007 [2],
7.3 Site Preparation and Construction Considerations
Prior to bulk earthworks commencing, the existing building on site should be demolished and the
entire site should be stripped of topsoil, trees, tree roots, and any other unsuitable material. The
exposed subgrade should be proof compacted and any excavations to remove trees and tree
roots should be backfilled with clean sand fill and compacted to a dry density ratio of at least 95%
relative to Standard Maximum Dry Density (SMDD) in accordance with AS 3798-2007 [6]
It is recommended that the subgrade compaction is verified using a Perth Sand Penetrometer
(PSP) with a target of at least 7 blows/300 mm in the depth range 150 mm to 450 mm below the
compacted surface.
It is recommended that all site preparation earthworks compaction is verified by PSP testing
prior to footing construction.
7.4 Foundation Design
Following site preparation and compaction verification testing detailed in Section 7.3, the
subsurface conditions are considered suitable to support standard footings designed in
accordance with AS 2870-2011 [1], including slab on ground footing systems and systems
comprising pad and strip footings.
The assessment is based on the results of CPT03 probe and assumes footing depths of at least
0.60 m. In order to maintain foundation settlements within tolerable limits (approximately 15 mm)
allowable bearing pressures not greater than 150 kPa are recommended for pad footings and for
strip footings.
Figure 3 and Figure 4 provides an indication of predicted pad and strip footing settlements
respectively for various column loads and bearing pressures.
In all instances the base of footing excavations supported on sand should be proof compacted
using a plate compactor prior to footing construction.
7.5 Subgrade CBR for Pavement Design
Following the site preparation work, the subgrade should comprise compacted sand. Provided
the in-situ material is compacted to at least 98% SMDD, a design subgrade CBR of 14% (light
brown sand) is considered appropriate for pavement design, based on laboratory test results.

7.6 Exposure Classification
Chemical analysis of a sand sample was undertaken to determine the site exposure classification
in accordance with AS 3600 [7]. Based on the test results, non-aggressive conditions are inferred
and an exposure classification of A1 is considered satisfactory for concrete buried within
approximately 0.7 m of the site surface.
7.7 Stormwater Drainage
Near-surface level soakwells should be suitable for stormwater drainage at the site if placed in
the areas with deeper sand deposits. Based on empirical calculations, a soil infiltration rate of
approximately 4.0 x 10-4 m/s is suggested for the near-surface level sand deposits encountered.
Soakwells should be placed as far as possible from foundations. Exact distances will depend on
the depth of footings and soakwells but generally, a line drawn downward and outward at a slope
of 1H:1V from footing edges should not intersect with a soakwell.
8 CLOSURE
Your attention is drawn to the “Conditions of Investigation and Report” which are presented at
the end of this report.
Yours sincerely,
Pernel Conocono Peter Reid

Author Reviewer

REFERENCES
[1] AS 2870 (2011): Residential Slabs and Footings – Construction.
[2] AS 1170.4 (2007): Structural Design Actions Part 4: Earthquake Actions in Australia.
[3] Geological Survey of Western Australia. 1:100,000 Environmental Geology Series, Perth
Sheet.
[4] Water and Rivers Commission (1997): Perth Groundwater Atlas (1st Edition).
[5] Department of Environment (200): Perth Groundwater Atlas (2nd Edition).
[6] AS 3798 (2007): Guidelines on earthworks for commercial and residential development.
[7] AS 3600 (2018): Concrete Structures.

CONDITIONS OF REPORT
1. This report must be read in its entirety.
2. This report has been prepared by ATCW for the purposes stated herein and ATCW’s experience,
having regard to assumptions that can reasonably be expected to make in accordance with sound
professional principles. ATCW does not accept responsibility for the consequences of
extrapolation, extension or transference of the findings and recommendations of this report to
different sites, cases, or conditions.
3. This document has been prepared based in part on information which was provided to ATCW by
the client and/or others and which is not under our control. ATCW does not warrant or guarantee
the accuracy of this information. The user of the document is cautioned that fundamental input
assumptions upon which the document is based may change with time. It is the user’s
responsibility to ensure that these assumptions are valid.
4. Unless specifically agreed otherwise in the contract of engagement, ATCW retains Intellectual
Property Rights over the contents of the document. The client is granted a licence to use the report
for the purposes for which it was commissioned.
CONDITIONS OF GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

1. Geotechnical site investigation necessarily involves the investigation of the subsurface conditions
at a site at a few isolated locations, and the interpretation and extrapolation of those conditions to
elsewhere on the site not so investigated. This procedure has been adopted at the site that is the
subject of this report and due care and skill has been applied in carrying out and reporting on the
work. Thus, the findings, conclusions and comments contained in this report represent
professional estimates and opinions and are not to be read as facts unless the context makes it
clear to the contrary. In general, statements of fact are confined to statements as to what was
done and/or what was observed. Other statements have been based on professional judgement.
2. The scope of the work has been planned in the absence of any fore knowledge of the site other
than that stated in the report. Unless otherwise stated we consider that the number of locations
investigated and the depths to which they have been investigated are reasonable bearing in mind
the scale and nature of the project, and the defined purpose for which the investigation was
undertaken.
3. We do not accept any responsibility for any variance between the interpreted and extrapolated
conditions and those that are revealed by any means subsequently. Specific warning is also given
that many factors, either natural or artificial, may render ground conditions different from those
which pertained at the time of the investigation. Should there be revealed during the construction
or at any other time any apparent difference from subsurface conditions described or assessed in
this report, it is strongly recommended that such differences be brought to our attention so that its
significance may be assessed, and appropriate advice given.

FIGURES
FILE: G:\SYNERGY\PROJECTS\120\120118 PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PS\01 SITE INVESTIGATION\CADD\120118.01 SITE PLAN.DWG
0
0m
REV DESCRIPTION
CLIENT ISSUE
40 m
26 26
.72 .93
26 27
27
.09
.42 .02
26
.39
26
26 .88 27
.73 .06
27
119°49'5"
27
.11
.0
26
.43
26 26 27
26 26 .78 .90 .19
112
.25 .67
26
.98
26
DP414958
80 m
.27 26
.48
26 26 26 27 27
.17 .72 .93 .07 .19
26.3
26
26
26
.24
.34
.10
26
.21
26
.16
26
27
109.
89 26.5
.31
.20
26 26
.11 .24 27
.26
26
27
.8
27
26 26 .19 .15
.39
07/07/20
.09
25
.98 26 27
26 .49 26 27 27 .22
26
.28 26 .90 .05 .15

.68
.58
26
.71
27
.25
RM
26
26
.58
.30
26
.14 26 27
.69 27 .24
.13
26
CPT04
26
.00
.61
27.0
28 27
.24 .20
PC
25
27
.90
.22
26
.90
27
26 27
.23
.69 26
.55 .26
27 27
26
.18T .26
.64
OW
27 27
STP01
.22 .18
26
.64 27 12
.20T
DATE
27
0.9
HA03
FIG
26 OW
26 1 .20
.57 .71 27
26 .23
.43 26 27
26 .80T .06
2
DRAWN
.66T
DESIGN
OW
OW 27
26 .17
.48
26
A
.56
CHECKED
27
26.5
26 26
120 m
.26 27
.30 26 .88 27
26 26 .41T .29
.32
DATE DRWN CHCK APPROVED

.07T .09 OW
OW
27
.78T
OW 27
26 .19
.73
27
.01
26
.66
26 26 27
.56 .49 .23
27
SHT SIZE A4
.44
SCALE 1:1000
26
.39
PR
PC
RM
RM
26 27
SHEET 1 OF 1
.95 .24
27
03/07/20
26 .28
.14
27
26 26 .26
.72 .40
27
.20 27
27 .20
26 .11 27
.00 .21
27
.17
26
.81 27
.07
26
27
.47
.08
25
25 .99
.88 27 26
.15 .92
29
26 26
.24
26
27
26 .58 .46 .93

.45T
.09
OW
HA02
26.5 26
.91
26 26
.64 .8
25 26
.74 .82
26
.61
26
CPT03
26 .68 27
HA01
.31 26 .08T
27.3
.61 OW
26
.74
26
STP02
26
A.B.N. 64 005 931 288

.59
25 .55
.71
26 26 26
.53 .89T .56
Perth T +61 8 9213 1600

26
26 OW
.5
.53
26
.22
160 m
27 26
.03T .40 26
25 OW .47
26
INFERED BUILDING ENVELOPES
.77
.86
26
26 .64 26 26
.42 26 .37 .32
.85
26
.25
26
.40
26.0
26
.19
25.8 26
.06 26 26
.65 .85
26
26 .87 26
27 .92 .20
.02T
26 26
.22 OW .96
25 26
.60 .19
26
.05 26
.62
25
.89
26
.05
26
CPT01
CPT02
.21
26
26 26 .55
.07 .45 26 26
26 .44 .49 26
.30 .19 27
26 .15
.14
26
26 .36
.20 26
26 26 26.1
.17 6
.38
.21 26 26
.22 26 .34
.15
25
.55 26 26
.29 .20 26 26 26
.12 .27 .90
26
26 26 26 .25
.22 .15 .10
26 27
26
.12
.19
.47
26
26 .08
.12 26
.80
26
.49
26
.03
26 26
.23 .05 26 26
.74 .89
26 26 26
.20 .06 .03
26 26
.21 .02
26
.16
25 26 26
26
200 m
.99 .10
.026 .74
26.0
26 1.07
.0 25
2626 1 .98
FU
.00.0
25 4
.96 25
R
.93
26
26 .0 26
.07 26 250 .41
LE
25 .02 .9
8 25
.92
25 26
Y
25 .9256
25 .60
25.8
.91 .99 .99

26
perth@atcwilliams.com.au
25
www.atcwilliams.com.au
.75 .27
.98
25
.84
25 26
.87
25 .45
26
26 .79
.04
.01 26
.49
25
.80
26.0
25
FU
.89 26
.06
26 25
R
26.0
.09 .82
R
26
25 .31
O
.75
26 26
LE
.06
-
.09 25 25
AD
.88 25 25
.81
Y
.83.78
25 25 26
25
.73 25.77 25 26
.7 .36
.75
9 25
.82 .00
R
.72
26 26
26 .05 26
D
.06
26 .03 .24
.09 25
.80
25
.95
25
25
.62 25 26
.64
26
.92 25 25
.29
.57
.09 25 .93 25
.93 .94
26 25 26
.08 .95 25 25 .17
26 .55 .96
25 .11 26
.98 .03
LEGEND:
26 26
.09T 25
.04 .92 26
OW .10
25
.76
25 26
25 .97
.97 25 25.9 26 .23
.94 4 .09 26 25 25
.13T .96 .90
OW
25 26
25 .76 .02
.95
25
.93 26
.13 26
25 26 .19
.11
.85
LOCATION
25
.97 26 26
.01
25
.06
25 25
.84
25 .85 .99
.95
26
.08
25
25 .97
25 .87 25
26 .98 25 .99
.08 25 .91
.99
25
26 .97 25 25
.09 .94 .97
25
.98
25 25
- CPT LOCATION
26 .91
PLAN
.08 .98
25
25 .99
25 .98
.99
JOB No. 120118.01 REV No. 0
25
25 25 25 .91
.96 .92 .98
26 25
.00 26
25
.94 26 .06
.0254 2626
26262626
.91 .94 26
0.11.1.1.12
.1.10.126
25 26 .12234
26 .90 .16
26 25
.0252
25 .07
25
.96 26 .93
.01
.88 .88
25
.87
HAND AUGER AND PSP
25 25
.92 .93
25
25 .9
25
25 .94 5
.97
.94
25
25
25 25
.95
.88
25 26
26
26 .0 .93 .97
.91 26
25 25 2626.0.0.0877 25
26
.73 .84 .08.192626 25 25.9

.11
25
0 .11.12
25 .94 .91
.91
BPA ENGINEERING
.89 25 5
26
.0 .80
26 8
.08
26
INFERRED NEW BUILDINGS
26.0
25 .07
STAGE 1 SITE INVESTIGATION
26 .92
.07 25 25
2526 25 .78 .71 25
.99.0 .87 .77 25
8 26 .79
.07
25 25
.84
25 25 .76
FIGURE 1
.93 .74
- SHALLOW TEST PIT LOCATION
25
.93 25
25 .76
25
25.8
.88
.72
25 25 25
.95 .79
25 .84
.93
NATURAL
GROUND SURFACE
FILE: G:\SYNERGY\PROJECTS\120\120118 PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PS\01 SITE INVESTIGATION\CADD\120118.01 SITE PLAN.DWG
INFERRED TOP OF
NATURAL SAND LAYER
SHEET 1 OF 1 A.B.N. 64 005 931 288 www.atcwilliams.com.au

SHT SIZE A4 BPA ENGINEERING
SCALE: NTS
DATE 03/07/20 PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE
DESIGN RM STAGE 1 SITE INVESTIGATION
DRAWN RM
SECTION A-A
0 CLIENT ISSUE 07/07/20 RM ZK CHECKED PC
REV DESCRIPTION DATE DRWN CHCK APPROVED PR Perth T +61 8 9213 1600 perth@atcwilliams.com.au JOB No. 120118.01 REV No. 0 FIGURE 2
Pad Footing Settlement for Various Column Loads and Bearing
Pressures
Column Load (kN)
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

0
Bearing Pressure (kPa)
5
Footing Settlement - mm
100
10
150
15
200
20
250
25
300
30 350
35
Notes: The settlements are based on the Schmertmann calculation method using E/qc = 5
Based on the cone resistance data from CPT03
The footing founding depth is 0.5m
The footing aspect ratio is constant for all footings (L/B = 1)
G:\Synergy\Projects\120\120118 Providence Christian College PS\01 Site Investigation\Data and Calcs\[Schmertmann Settlement Calculation CPT03.xlsm]Column Load Plot
Date: 13/07/2020 Job No: 120118.01 FIGURE 3
Cell labels for the notes
Where does the data come from?

What is the footing aspect ratio?
What modulus ratio has been used?
Average (E/qc) 5
The settlements are based on the Schmertmann calculation method using E/qc = 5
What is the footing founding depth?
Strip Footing Settlement for Various Column Loads and Bearing
Pressures
Column Load (kN)
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

0
Bearing Pressure (kPa)
Footing Settlement - mm
5
100
10 150
200
15
250
20
300
25
350
30
Notes: The settlements are based on the Schmertmann calculation method using E/qc = 5
G:\Synergy\Projects\120\120118 Providence Christian College PS\01 Site Investigation\Data and Calcs\[Schmertmann Settlement Calculation CPT03 Strip.xlsm]Column Load Plot
Date: 13/07/2020 Job No: 120118.01 FIGURE 4
Cell labels for the notes
Where does the data come from?

What is the footing aspect ratio?
What modulus ratio has been used?
Average (E/qc) 5
The settlements are based on the Schmertmann calculation method using E/qc = 5
What is the footing founding depth?
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A – CPT TEST RESULTS
ELECTRIC FRICTION-CONE PENETROMETER Probe I.D
CLIENT: BPA Engineering Job No.: 120118.01

CPT 01
PROJECT: Providence Christian College Primary School RL (m):
LOCATION: PCCPS Southern River Co-ords: 09-Jul-20
Tip Resistance qc (MPa) Tip Resistance qc (MPa) Friction Ratio Rf (%)
10
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
Tip Resistance
Friction Sleeve
1
1
2
2
3
3
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Friction Sleeve fs (kPa)
Approx. water (m): 3.4 Cone I.D.: EC07
Dummy probe to (m): File: WA0844T

Tested in accordance with AS 1289.6.5.1-1999
and IRTP 2001 for friction reducer Refusal: 50 MPa + Rod Friction Rig Type: 7t track

CPT 02
10
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
4
4
5
5
6
6
Tip Resistance
Friction Sleeve
7
7
8
8
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Approx. water (m): Dry to 3.1 Cone I.D.: EC07
Dummy probe to (m): 0.45 File: WA0845T

and IRTP 2001 for friction reducer Refusal: 60 MPa Rig Type: 7t track

CPT 03
10
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
4
4
5
5
6
6
Tip Resistance
Friction Sleeve
7
7
8
8
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Dummy probe to (m): File: WA0846T

and IRTP 2001 for friction reducer Refusal: 36 MPa + Rod Friction Rig Type: 7t track

CPT 04
10
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
4
4
5
5
6
6
Tip Resistance
Friction Sleeve
7
7
8
8
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Hand Auger to (m): 0.6 File: WA0847T

and IRTP 2001 for friction reducer Refusal: 60 MPa Rig Type: 7t track
ELECTRIC FRICTION-CONE PENETROMETER
ALL DATA
PROJECT: Providence Christian College Primary School Date/s: 9-Jul-2020
LOCATION: PCCPS Southern River
Tip Resistance qc (MPa) Friction Sleeve fs (kPa) Friction Ratio Rf (%)
100
200
300
400
500
600
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
10
0
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
Depth (m)
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8

and IRTP 2001 for friction reducer Rig Type: 7t track
&$/,%5$7,21&(57,),&$7(TF IV
&21(,' (&
&RQH&DSDFLW\

&DOLEUDWLRQ'DWH 78

3UHOLPLQDU\,QVSHFWLRQ

&DOLEUDWHG%\
1$
&DOLEUDWLRQ3URFHGXUH
)RUFH$SSOLFDWLRQ
5HIHUHQFH(TXLSPHQW !"#
$%&'(
$)
!*+&+,#--
.*!/#/,&,0
#!
*
2!3-,'4&/!3
$)
! *.*)"#--
$)
! !
!
.!*!

* 5

*
* 5
)"
*.* 5)"6
*&6 !.$"/
5HVXOWVRI&DOLEUDWLRQ7LSTF 5HVXOWVRI&DOLEUDWLRQ)ULFWLRQ6OHHYHIV
$SSOLHG 0HDQ 0HDQ $FFXUDF\ 5HSHDWDELOLW\ $SSOLFDWLRQ $SSOLHG 0HDQ 0HDQ $FFXUDF\ 5HSHDWDELOLW\ $SSOLFDWLRQ
)RUFH 2EVHUYHG &DOFXODWHG &ODVV )RUFH 2EVHUYHG &DOFXODWHG &ODVV
N1 5HDGLQJ 3UHVVXUH N1 5HDGLQJ 3UHVVXUH
9ROWV 03D 9ROWV N3D

9:
$8; / 9:
$8; /
TF&DOLEUDWLRQ)DFWRU03D9ROW IV&DOLEUDWLRQ)DFWRUN3DYROW

&ODVV$SSOLFDWLRQ$FFXUDF\ DFKLHYHG &ODVV$SSOLFDWLRQ$FFXUDF\ DFKLHYHG
=HUR6KLIW(UURU =HUR6KLIW(UURU
Nicole London
&DOLEUDWLRQ&KHFNHG $XWKRULVHGBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
-RE'HWDLOV
ATC Williams 09/07/2020
&OLHQW 'DWHRI-RE
Pernel Conocono 35.53

5HS 7LS'LDPHWHU
35.79
/RFDWLRQ
Southern River 6OHHYH'LDPHWHU
APPENDIX B – BOREHOLE LOGS AND PHOTOGRAPHS
HAND AUGER NUMBER HA01
SHEET 1 OF 1
CLIENT BPA Engineering JOB NAME Providence Christian College Primary School
JOB NUMBER 120118.01 JOB LOCATION Southern River
DATE 9/7/20 LOGGED BY RM CHECKED ZK R.L. SURFACE 26.5 DATUM AHD

EQUIPMENT HAND AUGER LOCATION 399581.61E 6448189.37N MGA94
REMARKS Groundwater not encountered
Perth Sand Penetrometer
Sample condition
Material Description: No. of blows for depth
indicated by bar thickness
Classification
Graphic Log
Soil: type, USCS symbol, strength, plasticity or particle size, colour, secondary
components, moisture condition
Sample
Symbol
Method
Water
Type
RL Depth
(m) (m)
0 4 8 12 16 20
SP TOPSOIL
Loose, fine and medium, brown sand with roots, moist
SP FILL
Medium dense becoming dense, fine and medium, yellow brown sand, moist
SP SAND
Dense, fine and medium pale grey, moist
26.0 0.5
Not encountered
25.5 1.0
25.0 1.5
Hand auger HA01 terminated at 1.9m

2020 TEST PIT FIELD LOGS REVA.GPJ GINT AUSTRALIA.GDT 18/7/20
24.5 2.0
24.0 2.5
23.5 3.0
PHOTO 1 – HA01
PHOTO 2 – HA01 SPOIL

SHEET 1 OF 1

Sample condition
Classification
Graphic Log
Sample
Symbol
Method
Water
Type
RL Depth
(m) (m)
0 4 8 12 16 20
SP TOPSOIL
Loose, fine and medium, light brown sand with roots, moist
27.0
SP FILL
Dense, fine and medium, yellow sand, moist
0.5
26.5
Not encountered
SP SAND
1.0
26.0
1.5
25.5

2.0
25.0
2.5
24.5
3.0
PHOTO 3 – HA02

SHEET 1 OF 1

% Finer than 0.075mm

Sample condition
Classification
Graphic Log
Sample
Symbol
Method
Water
Type
RL Depth
(m) (m)
0 4 8 12 16 20
SP TOPSOIL
SP SAND
Not encountered
26.5 0.5
BK 2
26.0 1.0
25.5 1.5
25.0 2.0
24.5 2.5
24.0 3.0
PHOTO 5 – HA03

TEST PIT NUMBER STP01
SHEET 1 OF 1

EQUIPMENT SHOVEL LOCATION 399538.46E 6448207.58N MGA94
Sample condition
Classification
Graphic Log
Sample
Symbol
Method
Water
OMC
MDD
Type
RL Depth
(m) (m)
0 4 8 12 16 20
SP TOPSOIL
SP FILL
Not encountered
Medium dense, fine and medium, yellow brown sand, moist

SP SAND
26.5 0.5
BK 1.72 13.5
Test pit STP01 terminated at 0.6m
26.0 1.0
25.5 1.5
25.0 2.0
24.5 2.5
24.0 3.0
PHOTO 7 – STP01
PHOTO 8 – STP01 PIT
PHOTO 9 – STP01 SPOIL

TEST PIT NUMBER STP02
SHEET 1 OF 1

EQUIPMENT SHOVEL LOCATION 399581.31E 6448231.53N MGA94
Sample condition
Classification
Graphic Log
Sample
Symbol
Method
Water
Type
RL Depth
(m) (m)
0 4 8 12 16 20
SP TOPSOIL
SP FILL
Dense, fine and medium, yellow brown sand, moist
Not encountered
27.0 0.5
Test pit STP02 terminated at 0.8m
26.5 1.0
26.0 1.5
25.5 2.0
25.0 2.5
24.5 3.0
PHOTO 10 – STP02
PHOTO 11 – STP02 SPOIL
PHOTO 12 – STP02 PIT

APPENDIX C – LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
SOIL | AGGREGATE | CONCRETE | CRUSHING
TEST REPORT - AS 1289.3.6.1
Client: BPA Engineering Ticket No. S1433
Client Address: - Report No. WG20/7364_1_PSD
Project: Providence Christian College Sample No. WG20/7364
Location: Southern River Date Sampled: 9-07-2020
Sample Identification: HA03 0.4-0.7m Date Tested: 13-07-2020
TEST RESULTS - Particle Size Distribution of Soil
Sampling Method: Sampled by Client, Tested as Received
Percent Passing 100

Sieve Size (mm)
Sieve (%)
90
150.0
100.0 80
75.0
70
37.5
19.0 60
9.5 50
Passing (%)
4.75 100
40
2.36 100
1.18 100 30
0.600 84
20
0.425 46
10
0.300 18
0.150 6 0
0.0 0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 1000.0
0.075 2 Particle Size (mm)
Comments:
Approved Signatory:
Brooke Elliott Accreditation No. 20599

Name: Brooke Elliott Accredited for compliance
Function: Quality Manager with ISO/IEC 17025 - Testing
Date: 16-July-2020 This document shall not be reproduced except in full
235 Bank Street, Welshpool WA 6106 | 08 9472 3465 | www.wgls.com.au
WG_AS 1289.3.6.1_TR_1 Page 1 of 1

Client Address: - Report No. WG20/7365_1_SMDD
Sample Identification: STP01 0.4-0.6m Date Tested: 15-07-2020
TEST RESULTS - Standard Maximum Dry Density
Sample Curing Time: 2 hours
Method used to Determine Liquid Limit: Visual / Tactile Assessment by Competent Technician
Material + 19.0mm (%): 0 Material + 37.5mm (%) -
Moisture Content (%) 10.2 12.7 14.9 16.7 #N/A

Dry Density (t/m³) 1.681 1.715 1.710 1.687
Dry Density (t/m³)
1.800
1.750
1.700
1% Air voids
2% Air voids
1.650
3% Air voids
1.600
7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00
Moisture Content (%)
Standard Maximum Dry Density (t/m³) 1.72

Optimum Moisture Content (%) 13.5
Comments: The above air void lines are derived from a calculated apparent particle density of 2.479 t/m³
Approved Signatory:
Cody O'Neill Accreditation No. 20599
Name: Cody O'Neill Accredited for compliance
Function: Senior Technician with ISO/IEC 17025 - Testing
WG_AS 1289.5.1.1_TR_3 Page 1 of 1

Client Address: - Report No. WG20/7365_1_SCBR
Sample Identification: STP01 0.4-0.6m Date Tested: 16-07-2020
TEST RESULTS - CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO
Sample Description: Sand
Load Penetration Curve Compaction Details

2.5 Compaction Method Hammer Type
AS 1289.5.1.1 Standard
Plasticity Determined by Estimated Curing Time (Hours) 2.0
% Retained 19.0mm 0 Excluded/Replaced Excluded
3
Maximum Dry Density (t/m ) 1.72 Optimum Moisture (%) 13.5
2.0
Target Dry Density Ratio (%) 98 Target Moisture Ratio (%) 100
Specimen Conditions At Compaction

Dry Density (t/m3) 1.68 Moisture Content (%) 13.6
Load (kN)
1.5 Density Ratio (%) 97.5 Moisture Ratio (%) 101.5
Specimen Conditions After Soak

Soaked or Unsoaked Soaked Soaking Period (days) 4
1.0
Surcharges Applied (kg) 4.50 Measured Swell (%) 0.0
Dry Density (t/mᶟ) 1.68 Dry Density Ratio (%) 97.5
Moisture Content (%) 16.7 Moisture Ratio (%) 125.0
Specimen Conditions After Test

0.5
Top 30mm Moisture (%) 16.2 Remaining Depth (%) 16.2
Correction applied to Penetration: 1mm

0.0 Determined at a Penetration of: 2.5mm
0.0 5.0 10.0 California Bearing Ratio (CBR): 14%
Penetration (mm)
Comments:
Approved Signatory:
Accreditation No. 20599
Brooke Elliott
Name: Brooke Elliott Accredited for compliance
Function: Quality Manager with ISO/IEC 17025 - Testing
WG_AS 1289.6.1.1_TR_2 Page 1 of 1

Envirolab Services (WA) Pty Ltd trading as MPL Laboratories
ABN 53 140 099 207
16-18 Hayden Court Myaree WA 6154
ph 08 9317 2505 fax 08 9317 4163
lab@mpl.com.au
www.mpl.com.au
CERTIFICATE OF ANALYSIS 247022
Client Details
Client Western Geotechnical & Laboratory Services
Attention Matt Van Herk
Address 235 Bank Street, Welshpool, WA, 6101
Sample Details
Your Reference BPA Engineering/ Providence CC/ S1433
Number of Samples 1 Soil
Date samples received 13/07/2020
Date completed instructions received 13/07/2020
Analysis Details
Please refer to the following pages for results, methodology summary and quality control data.
Samples were analysed as received from the client. Results relate specifically to the samples as received.
Results are reported on a dry weight basis for solids and on an as received basis for other matrices.
Report Details
Date results requested by 17/07/2020
Date of Issue 16/07/2020
NATA Accreditation Number 2901. This document shall not be reproduced except in full.
Accredited for compliance with ISO/IEC 17025 - Testing. Tests not covered by NATA are denoted with *
Results Approved By Authorised By

Heram Halim, Operations Manager
Michael Kubiak, Laboratory Manager
MPL Reference: 247022 Page | 1 of 6

Revision No: R00
Client Reference: BPA Engineering/ Providence CC/ S1433
Miscellaneous Inorg - soil

Our Reference 247022-1
Your Reference UNITS GW20/7364

HA03
Depth 0.4-0.7
Date Sampled 09/07/2020
Type of sample Soil
Date prepared - 15/07/2020
Date analysed - 15/07/2020
pH pH Units 6.8
Sulphate % <0.001

Revision No: R00
Method ID Methodology Summary

INORG-001 pH - Measured using pH meter and electrode base on APHA latest edition, Method 4500-H+. Please note that the results for
water analyses may be indicative only, as analysis can be completed outside of the APHA recommended holding times. Soils
are reported from a 1:5 water extract unless otherwise specified.
INORG-081 Anions - a range of anions are determined by Ion Chromatography based on APHA latest edition Method 4110-B. Soils and
other sample types reported from a water extract unless otherwise specified (standard soil extract ratio 1:5).

Revision No: R00
QUALITY CONTROL: Miscellaneous Inorg - soil Duplicate Spike Recovery %

Test Description Units PQL Method Blank # Base Dup. RPD LCS-1 [NT]
Date prepared - 15/07/2020 [NT] [NT] [NT] [NT] 15/07/2020 [NT]
Date analysed - 15/07/2020 [NT] [NT] [NT] [NT] 15/07/2020 [NT]
pH pH Units INORG-001 [NT] [NT] [NT] [NT] [NT] 101 [NT]

Revision No: R00
Result Definitions
NT Not tested
NA Test not required
INS Insufficient sample for this test
PQL Practical Quantitation Limit
< Less than
> Greater than
RPD Relative Percent Difference
LCS Laboratory Control Sample
NS Not specified
NEPM National Environmental Protection Measure
NR Not Reported

Revision No: R00
Quality Control Definitions

This is the component of the analytical signal which is not derived from the sample but from reagents,
Blank glassware etc, can be determined by processing solvents and reagents in exactly the same manner as for
samples.
This is the complete duplicate analysis of a sample from the process batch. If possible, the sample selected
Duplicate
should be one where the analyte concentration is easily measurable.
A portion of the sample is spiked with a known concentration of target analyte. The purpose of the matrix spike
Matrix Spike is to monitor the performance of the analytical method used and to determine whether matrix interferences
exist.
LCS (Laboratory This comprises either a standard reference material or a control matrix (such as a blank sand or water) fortified
Control Sample) with analytes representative of the analyte class. It is simply a check sample.
Surrogates are known additions to each sample, blank, matrix spike and LCS in a batch, of compounds which
Surrogate Spike
are similar to the analyte of interest, however are not expected to be found in real samples.
Australian Drinking Water Guidelines recommend that Thermotolerant Coliform, Faecal Enterococci, & E.Coli levels are less than
1cfu/100mL. The recommended maximums are taken from "Australian Drinking Water Guidelines", published by NHMRC & ARMC
2011.
The recommended maximums for analytes in urine are taken from “2018 TLVs and BEIs”, as published by ACGIH (where available).
Limit provided for Nickel is a precautionary guideline as per Position Paper prepared by AIOH Exposure Standards Committee,
2016.
Guideline limits for Rinse Water Quality reported as per analytical requirements and specifications of AS 4187, Amdt 2 2019, Table
7.2
Laboratory Acceptance Criteria

Duplicate sample and matrix spike recoveries may not be reported on smaller jobs, however, were analysed at a frequency to meet
or exceed NEPM requirements. All samples are tested in batches of 20. The duplicate sample RPD and matrix spike recoveries for
the batch were within the laboratory acceptance criteria.
Filters, swabs, wipes, tubes and badges will not have duplicate data as the whole sample is generally extracted during sample
extraction.
Spikes for Physical and Aggregate Tests are not applicable.
For VOCs in water samples, three vials are required for duplicate or spike analysis.
Duplicates: >10xPQL - RPD acceptance criteria will vary depending on the analytes and the analytical techniques but is typically in
the range 20%-50% – see ELN-P05 QA/QC tables for details; <10xPQL - RPD are higher as the results approach PQL and the
estimated measurement uncertainty will statistically increase.
Matrix Spikes, LCS and Surrogate recoveries: Generally 70-130% for inorganics/metals (not SPOCAS); 60-140% for
organics/SPOCAS (+/-50% surrogates) and 10-140% for labile SVOCs (including labile surrogates), ultra trace organics and
speciated phenols is acceptable.
In circumstances where no duplicate and/or sample spike has been reported at 1 in 10 and/or 1 in 20 samples respectively, the
sample volume submitted was insufficient in order to satisfy laboratory QA/QC protocols.
When samples are received where certain analytes are outside of recommended technical holding times (THTs), the analysis has
proceeded. Where analytes are on the verge of breaching THTs, every effort will be made to analyse within the THT or as soon as
practicable.
Where sampling dates are not provided, Envirolab are not in a position to comment on the validity of the analysis where
recommended technical holding times may have been breached.
Measurement Uncertainty estimates are available for most tests upon request.
Samples for Microbiological analysis (not Amoeba forms) received outside of the 2-8°C temperature range do not meet the ideal
cooling conditions as stated in AS2031-2012.

Revision No: R00
APPENDIX B CONFIDENTIAL DECLARATION FORM
STRICTLY CONFIDENTIAL
Confidential Declaration form must be completed by:

• Persons requiring access to schools who are not employees of Providence Christian College.
Please read the following carefully, and tick (ü) one of the boxes below:
1 I declare that I DO NOT HAVE any convictions, circumstances or reasons, which

might preclude my working with, or near, children.
OR
2 I declare that I DO HAVE convictions, circumstances or reasons which might

preclude my working with or near children. The nature of these convictions,
circumstances or reasons is outlined below:
(Please attach a separate sheet of paper, if required)
I certify the accuracy of the above information. I am aware that I may be required to consent to a criminal
record clearance, through the Department of Education’s Screening Unit, if it is considered necessary to
verify the information I have provided.
Name:
Company: (if relevant)
Address:
Telephone:
Email:
School visiting:
Purpose of visit:
Signature: Date:
See the following page for explanatory notes

NOTES ABOUT THIS CONFIDENTIAL DECLARATION FORM
What the form is about:
In 1997, the then Education Department of Western Australia joined other Australian states to
implement the National Strategy in Schools for the Prevention of Paedophilia and Other
Forms of Child Abuse. The Confidential Declaration form is designed to prevent people from
entering schools who may pose a potential risk to children based on previous criminal history. It
does not replace the Working With Children check for employees.
The Confidential Declaration form is for persons who are not Providence Christian College
employees, and are not involved in child-related work, but who do require access to a school (for
example, tradespeople carrying out repairs or entertainers who do not work directly with children).
By completing this form, you will help the College ensure that schools are safe places for our
children.
Confidentiality:
Please be assured that unless statutory obligations require otherwise, the information on the
completed form will not be used without your consent for any purpose other than in relation to your
entry onto the school premises.
The completed form will be treated with the utmost confidentially at all times. Thank you for taking
the time to read this information.

19.06 Specification Tender 210111

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

19.06 Specification Tender 210111

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPECIFICATION

for the construction of

PROVIDENCE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE PRIMARY SCHOOL STAGE 1

THORNLIE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE INCORPORATED

19 FURLEY ROAD, SOUTHERN RIVER

BRAD QUARTERMAINE ARCHITECT

27 CHARLES STREET, SOUTH PERTH, WA 6151

0417 931 941

TENDER ISSUE 11 JANUARY 2021

TRADE SECTIONS (SPECIFICATIONS)

08330 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS 1 - 3

6. Permission to Visit the Site

9. Approved Electrical and Hydraulics Services Sub- Contractors

Architects Name of Contact Tel: 0417 931 941

11. Annexure Part A to General Conditions of Contract

The Principal: Thornlie Christian College Incorporated

The address of the Principal: 19 Furley Road, Southern River, WA 6110

The Superintendent: Brad Quartermaine Architect

The address of the Superintendent: 27 Charles Street

Limits of accuracy applying to quantities for which the Not Applicable

Bill of Quantities—the alternative applying: Alternative 2

Principal shall provide security in the amount of: Not Applicable

The period of notice required of a party’s intention to Not applicable

Interest on retention moneys and security—the Not Applicable

The number of copies to be supplied by the Principal: 0

The number of copies to be supplied by the 0

The time within which the Superintendent must give a 14 Days

The percentage for profit and attendance: 0%

Insurance of the Works—the alternative applying: Alternative 1

The assessment for insurance purposes of 10 % of the Contract Sum

The value of materials to be supplied by the Principal: $ Nil

The additional amount or percentage: 5%

Public Liability Insurance—the alternative applying: Alternative 1

The amount of Public Liability Insurance shall be not $ 20 Million

Liquidated damages per day: (Clause 35.6) $ 600.00 per day

Limit of Liquidated damages: (Clause 35.7) Not Applicable

Bonus per day for early Practical Completion: Not Applicable

Limit of bonus: (Clause 35.8) Not Applicable

Extra costs for Delay or Disruption: (Clause 36) No Extra Events

The Defects liability period: (Clause 37) 12 Months

The Charge for overheads, profit, etc. for Daywork 10 %

Unfixed Plant and Materials for which payment claims Nil

Retention Moneys on: Nil

Unfixed Plant or Materials - the alternative applying Alternative 3

The delay in giving possession of the Site which shall 28 Days

The alternative required in proceeding with dispute Alternative 2

Location of arbitration: Perth, Western Australia

3. Tenderer to Inform Himself and Sub-contractors

4. Discrepancies, Errors and Omissions in Tender Documents

7. Informal Tenders (Non-conforming Tenders)

10. Pre-requisites to Acceptance

11. Review And Acceptance Of Tenders

12. Acceptance of Tender

EXISTING OCCUPIED BUILDINGS TO BE RETAINED.

COMPLETE IN FULL AND LODGE WITH ARCHITECT

I/We (tenderer’s name)

hereby tender(s) to perform the work for (proprietor name):

in accordance with the following documents and specifications:

For the lump sum of:

________________________________________days for inclement weather.

Signed by (Company Directors)

Date this (day) (month) 20

Tender Sum Breakdown

Lump Sum (excluding GST)